MDSRC 2016 PDF

MDSRC - 2016 Proceedings, 16-17 November, 2016 Wah/Pakistan
Table of Contents
Sr. Contents Page

Engineering
1. A Survey on Analysis and Design of Scheduling Algorithm for LTE-Advanced 5
Heterogeneous Networks
2. CFD Analysis of 105mm HE Artillery Shell & validation of Computational Results 15
3. Awareness of Workplace Hazards among Workers in Textile Mill: A pilot Study 20
4. Impact of Innovative Work Behavior on Strategic Management in Competitive 27
sector: Role of Social Media
5. CFD Analysis of a Single Rotating Ducted Axial Fan and Validation of Results by 37
Integral Flow Analysis Technique
6. Design and fabrication of Vertical Takeoff & Landing RC Aircraft (VTOL) 43
7. Energy Analysis of Seasonal Air Conditioning Demand of All Income Classes 49
Using Bottom up Model in Pakistan
8. Design and Implementation of Smart Bi-Directional Energy Meter to Measure 54
Electrical Parameters
9. Impact Analysis of Cultivation of Jatropha Tree on Fuel Prices and Environment 62
10. Virtual Non-Isolated DC to DC Converters Laboratory for teaching 69
Undergraduate Students
11. Hydraulic Optimization During Drilling Operation Using Indigenous Mud to 71
Improve Rate of Penetration and Reduce Environmental Waste
12. An Application of the SMED Methodology in Textile Industry 80
13. Obstacle Avoidance for Mobile Robots 87
14. Applications of Electroencephalography (EEG) in the control of 93
Neuroprosthesis, a Comprehensive Review
15. Intelligent Traffic and Smart Lighting Control System 102
16. Construction of Quad-Copter for Surveillance Purposes 107
17. Measurement of Leakage Power of Microwave Ovens in 2.4 GHz Range and the 113
Sr. Contents Page
Effects of Shielding Materials on the Leakage
18. Room and Sheilding Design for 6MV Linear Accelator 119
19. Voice controlled wheelchair 123
20. Rheological Characterization and Modeling of PVC Paste 129
21. Evaluation of Conventional and Superpave Mix Design using Neat and Modified 139
Binder
22. Effective Power Methodology for Home Energy Management Using Smart Grid 150
Basic Sciences
23. Frequency of Candida Albicans in Paediatric Population with Candiduria in The 158
Children’s Hospital, Lahore
24. Synthesis and Characterization of Substituted Hydrazones from 4- 164
Hydroxycoumarin
25. Effects of The Frequent use of Calculators on Students’ Basic Mathematics Skills 168
26. Chromosomal Aberrations in Cases with Turner Syndrome Phenotype 176
27. Genetic Sex Assignment to Cases with Ambiguous Genitalia 181
Computer Sciences
28. Need of Virtual Education and its Significance in Pakistan 190
29. An Information Visualization Framework for Rapid Use of Web-Based Mobile 200
Application by Elderly Retarded People
30. Rise Of Enterprenuership Trend Among Students In Pakistan 214
31. Usability Evaluation of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa Universities’ Websites 224
Management Sciences
32. Index Tracker Funds- An opportunity for Retail Investors 233
33. Role of Performance Appraisal in Public Sector Organizations and its Linkages 240
with Employee’s Motivation, a Case Study of Government Schools of Wah and
Taxila City
34. An Empirical Investigation of Relationship between Occupational Health and 247
Safety Measures and Competitive Performance of Small and Medium
Enterprises (SMEs)
Social Sciences
35. Impact of Work- Family Conflict Self Efficacy on Job Commitment, Job 253
Satisfaction, Life Satisfaction on Teachers of Special Children Institutes
Sr. Contents Page
36. Impacts of Foreign Debt on Economic Growth: Evidecne from Pakistan 261
37. Identifications of the Factors Causing Terrorism and its Effects on Education 272
38. Post Conflict Rehabilitation: A Restorative Justice Approach 280
39. Impact of Prosocial Behavior on Life Satisfaction among University Students 292
40. The Rise of Hindu Nationalism and New Indian Historiography: Lessons for the 299
Hindu Diaspora
41. Factors Affecting the Child’s Nutritional Status: Evidence from PDHS-2013 306
42. A Comparative Study of Teacher’s Performance in Government and Private 314
Schools of Islamabad
43. Sufism and Politics in Medieval India 326
44. A Study to Evaluate the Employees Performance through 360 Performance 335
Appraisals Technique in public sector universities of the Punjab
45. Relationship between Religious Orientation and Frustration Tolerance among 343
Adults
46. Impacts of War on Women and Children: A case Study of Intra-conflict in Syria 355
and Iraq
47. Evaluate Staff Empowerment Practices at Higher Education Level 363
48. Impact of Teacher’s Behavior on Student’s Academic Achievement at Secondary 369
Level
49. Impact of Professional Status on Marital Satisfaction and Dimensions of 375
Relational
50. Evaluation of Reading and Thinking Competency Skills for Teaching English 384
Language at Grade Xi Level
51. Developing Reading Comprehension at Intermediate level through 395
Newspapers
52. Electronic Media Detection of Crimes: Comparative Study of GEO News and ARY 406
News, Pakistan
53. Is laffer Curve Alive in Pakistan? 415
54. Impact of Déjà vu in Language Acquisition; a Psycholinguistics Approach 424
55. Decision Making Practices by Heads of Secondary Schools of Punjab 432
56. Impact of Family Conflict on Adolescents Psychological Wellbeing 442
ENGINEERING
A Survey on Analysis and Design of Scheduling Algorithm for LTE-Advanced

Heterogeneous Networks
Mohammad Masoom Zafar1, Ammar Hafeez2, Sir Ahmad Mudassir3

Department of Electrical Engineering1, 2, 3
COMSATS Institute of Information Technology, Lahore1, 2, 3
mohammadmasoomzafar@gmail.com1
ammarhafeez5@gmail.com2
amudassir@ciitlahore.edu.pk3
Abstract
Different types of traffic with different QoS requirements are competing for its resources.
The 3G LTE-A accommodates smart selections of users and transmission of data through
packets. LTE-A is one of the fastest growing technologies and it supports variety of
applications. To support multiple applications, RRM procedure is one of the main things for
improving the system performance. Packet scheduling mechanisms play fundamental roles,
because they are responsible for choosing the fine time and frequency resolutions. However,
scheduling algorithms are not defined in the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP)
specifications. Therefore, it becomes one of the special interests for service providers. In this
paper, packet scheduler for LTE downlink is described and comparison of five basic packet
scheduling algorithm is explained. Also, the throughput comparison for downlink of different
schedulers for VoIP and video application is tested by LTE-Simulator (an open source frame
work) as a simulation tool. Hence the throughput fairness between users can be effectively
controlled. This paper explores LTE-Advanced wireless system, its features and technologies
to fulfill its requirement.
Keywords: LTE-A (Long Term Evolution-Advance), VoIP (voice over IP), QoS (Quality of
Serves,) RRM (Radio Resource Management), Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP).
1. INTRODUCTION (orthogonal frequency division

multiplexing) technology for downlink.
Basically, LTE was introduced by 3GPP. In OFDMA, subcarriers of the available
LTE attain the revolution in the advanced bandwidth are divided in multiple parts. This
applications with low packet loss ratio, high also provides the group of subcarriers to the
throughput, less delay and useful bandwidth. user to meet QoS standards [2].
The ultimate goal of LTE is enhancing data To meet the performance objectives of the
rate. It provides radio resources for many of LTE networks, it is very important to design
applications to meet with optimize level of an efficient scheduling algorithm for
QoS, for all connected users [1]. LTE resource allocation and fairness, with
supports applications like video traffic, voice enhancing the spectral efficiency of the
over IP (VoIP), constant bit rate (CBR) and system [3].
web browsing etc. Due to increasing capacity
of users in this technology both researchers 2. Overview of LTE Network Architecture:
and industrialists are trying their best to In the previous technology, separate Radio
improve the system. LTE system uses OFDMA Access Network (RAN) was used to interface
with User Equipments (UEs). But in
Page 5
LTE (latest technology), eNBs (evolved Node

Base station) have the duty of caring for
these protocols. Hence LTE required lesser
number of nodes, which have the benefits of
low latency in the system and improved
overall performance of the system [4].
The architecture of LTE networks consists
of core network known as Evolved Packet
Core (EPC) and access network known as
Evolved-Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
Network (E-UTRAN) [5].
Figure 2: LTE frame structure [1].
2.4. Resource Block:

In the time domain it consists of period of
0.5 ms time slot and in frequency domain RB
Figure 1: Overall LTE Architecture [1] (Resource Block) consists of 12 consecutive
subcarriers. Recombination of these two
S1: Is the connection b/w eNodeBs and slots makes an allocation period [8,9].
Gateways. Also b/w distanced eNodeBs. Transmit Time Interval (TTI) is also called
X2: Is the connection b/w nearer eNodeBs. scheduling period and its duration is 1ms.
2.1. Packet Gateway (PGW):

This act as the default router for the user
interface. Its duty is IP address allocation for
the UE. PGW connects a User equipment to
the external Network i.e. IMS (IP Multimedia
Subsystem) and internet.
2.2. Serving Gateway (SGW):
Its responsibility is routing the packets
and forwarding from the UE to other UE.
2.3. Mobility Management Entity:
Mobility Management Entity is the main
object in the control plane. It is use for
assigning of NAS signaling between the CN
(Core Network) and UEs. NAS signaling
occurs, when UEs starts activation and then Figure 3: LTE Downlink Resource Block
join its self to the LTE network [6, 7]. Structure [1].
Page 6
3. LTE-Advanced:
LTE-A is also the mobile communication
standard and advance version of LTE. To
support the rising demand, hundred times of
increase in capacity is required, that’s why
LTE-A was introduced. LTE-A provides high
capacity and high bit rate in efficient cost
[1]. By increasing the network density, high
capacity can be achieved, by providing more
spectrums and with the improvement of
spectral efficiency. Also the network density
can be increased by arranging a network of
small cells. Main performance targets of LTE
are given below [10]. Figure 4: Heterogeneous network [1].
Table 1: Main LTE Performance Targets

[3]
4. HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK:
Small cells of different types together
with the macro cells form a network known
as Heterogeneous Network [11].
4.1. Small Cell:
Small cells have low coverage and
transmitted power. A small cell can be
indoor femto cell or outdoor pico cell. Small
cells also reduce the cost with improving
network capacity [12].
4.2. Femtocell:
LTE-A utilizes femtocell technology. FC
provides efficient connection with the macro
cell network through a broadband backhaul
i.e. cable modem and DSL (Digital Subscriber
Line) [13].
4.3. Microcells and Picocells:
These are deployed to facilitate hundreds
of users. These are used in small networks
which may or may be not in the range of a
macrocell. Picocell are designed for the
network operating in the premises of indoor
areas like airports, bus station and office
place etc.
4.4. MacroCells:
Macrocells are the common cells sites
supporting technologies like LTE. Their
normal range is from a few hundred meters
to a few kilometers [3].
Page 7
4.5. Radio Resource Management resources. For example for video

(RRM): streaming services QoS conditions can
RRM is used to cover all radio related be used to maintain the data rate.
functions of the network. The assignment, The minimum cell edge data rate that
management and division of radio resources is ensured can also be obtained by a
to the users is done by RRM [3]. Nominal Bit Rate (NBR) and it works
even without QoS classes with
ensured bit rates. There is a minor
impact of Cell edge prioritization on
5. SCHEDULING: the cell total throughput limit. The
The main goal of a Scheduler is to get the capacity is high measured in the
optimize allocation of the resources in the number of satisfied subscribers. At
units like time, frequency and power etc for the cost of 5% cell throughput
the UEs, with satisfying level of QoS. capacity, the cell edge throughput
“Scheduling means if you have number of improvement of 30% can be obtained
resources and you have to decide that how [3].
to distribute them in different active users
for their QoS requirements”. 5.2. Packet scheduling:
Scheduler exists in the eNodeBs (evolved Its job is the use of different sources of
Node Base station). It controls the assigning information to allocate resources and
of Resource Blocks (RBs) among UEs with the coordinate activities, so that interference
defending of intra-cell interference. For can be avoided. It also has the freedom of
different networks there are different controlling the allocation of resources in
schedulers [14,15]. time, frequency and power domains. Packet
scheduler at radio base station done the
5.1. Smart scheduler and its features: assigning the portions of spectrum divided
Boosting cell edge performance is the
among users [17]. In LTE system its main
main purpose of Smart Scheduler. Frequency feature is the scheduling and we know it by
Selective Scheduling (FSS) is the most the name of packet scheduling. Packet
important part of Smart Scheduler [16]. scheduler works for making the channel
Smart scheduler uses the following features: quality drop minimum. In cellular
• Frequency Selective Scheduling (FSS): technologies we have different types of
It improves network performance in service of real-time multimedia like online
the event of frequency selective video streaming and voice over IP (VoIP)
fading and fractional inter-cell service.
interference. It consists of In video streaming the main requirement is
Interference Aware Scheduling (IAS) to deliver the data packet within the
and Channel Aware Scheduling (CAS). deadline. And the packet scheduler works by
FSS can improve cell edge data rates prioritizing the user on different aspects like
by more than 30%. its channel condition, traffic, type of service
• When allocating the uplink and packet delay. A genetic algorithm is
transmission power, Uplink power used to optimize the application-layer video
control with interference awareness quality which is proposed by the authors in
takes into account the adjacent cells. [15]. And its basic function is to improve the
This feature helps to boost uplink accuracy of prioritization.
data rates and minimizes inter-cell The packet scheduling used for increase
interference. the system performance, maximize the
• In weak channel conditions, QoS system throughput and improving the system
differentiation improves cell edge fairness. In downlink networks, the
performance by allocating more scheduling is the main phenomenon which
Page 8
determines the downlink performance [15]. fairness purpose because every packet
LTE also uses Hybrid ARQ (Automatic Repeat transmission time has the equal share of
Request) for the fast and quick transmission time. But it has a very big disadvantage that
of packets which are not correctly received. it has the poor performance because of cell
throughput. In RR all terminals are equally
5.3. Scheduling Strategies:
scheduled and the terminals resource blocks
one after the other without considering the
CQI (channel quality indicator). However, its
throughput performance is low and fairness
is high
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
= 𝑖𝑖 − 𝑇𝑇 (1)
𝑚𝑚𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘 𝑖𝑖
Where t is the current time and
𝑇𝑇𝑖𝑖 is the last time when the user was served.
The concept of fairness is related to the
amount of time in which the channel is
occupied by users but not in terms of user
throughput [7].
5.5.2. Blind Equal Throughput:

Throughput Fairness can be achieved
with Blind Equal Throughput (BET) which
stores the past average throughput achieved
Figure 5: General classification of by each user and uses it as metric [8]. In this
scheduling [4] case this metric is described as follows:
Where 0 ≤ 1β ≤ 1.
𝐵𝐵𝐸𝐸𝑇𝑇= (2)
𝑚𝑚𝑘𝑘𝑖𝑖,
5.4. QoS unaware Scheduling: ̅ ̅𝑖𝑖 (𝑡𝑡−1)
𝑅𝑅
𝑅𝑅𝑖𝑖̅(𝑡𝑡)=𝛽𝛽𝑅𝑅𝑖𝑖(̅ 𝑡𝑡−1)+(1−𝛽𝛽)𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖(𝑡𝑡) (3)
In CSS, if the scheduler tries for fairness
among the UEs, this is called QoS unaware
Scheduling [14]. 5.6. Channel-aware/QoS-unaware
scheduling:
5.4.1. Best CQI: 5.6.1. Frame Level Scheduler:
This scheduling works by checking the Frame Level Scheduler (FLS) is a two-level
radio link on the basis of the channel quality, scheduling scheme with one upper level and
the best radio link will get the resource other is lower level.
block. Resource block is assigned to the user Thus, according to results FLS is a good
with the best CQI because the higher CQI scheduler for guaranteeing bounded delays
means better conditions of the channel. It to multimedia flows, and also provides the
works by sending the CQI to base station lowest Packet Loss Ratio. So, it ensures the
(BS). highest video quality to mobile users.
Its equation is described as follows:
5.5. Channel Unaware Scheduling: 𝑢𝑢(𝑖𝑖𝑘𝑘)=ℎ(𝑖𝑖𝑘𝑘)∗𝑞𝑞𝑖𝑖(𝑘𝑘) (4)
5.5.1. Round Robin (RR): The above equation tells that the amount
In round robin the scheduler have the of data to be transmitted by the ith flow
number of resources and every single during the kth LTE frame is obtained by
resource is used by all users and every user filtering the signal qi(k) through a time-
have the same number of time and this invariant linear filter with pulse response
continues in a cycle and the channel hi(k).
conditions are not considered for the
scheduling. This approach is best for the
Page 9
5.6.2. Maximum Throughput : Table 2. Notations used for Scheduling

Its function is maximizing the overall Metrics
throughput by assigning each RB to the user.
But it performs unfair resource division
[20,21].
𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇 Its metric is described as follows:
=𝑑𝑑𝑖𝑖(𝑡𝑡) (5)
𝑚𝑚𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘
5.6.3. Buffer-Aware scheduler:

This scheduler provides guarantee to a
maximum of throughput deduction. Then the
buffer conditions are used to make
scheduling decisions for all the users. This is
not for real-time traffic [4, 5]. In buffer
aware the scheduling is done by checking
both, the channels and the buffer
conditions. Buffer conditions are used to
make scheduling. If the transmission rate I
satisfies then you can say that it is a
candidate users which are selected by
channel conditions. It has maximum 5.8.1. Maximum-largest weighted
throughput deduction [16, 17]. delay first (M-LWDF):
It is able to give better performance in
5.7. Channel sensitive scheduling: sense of better spectral efficiency, better
fairness and less Packet Loss Rate. It is an
The UEs sent Channel Quality Indicator
algorithm designed to support multiple data
(CQI) value reports to the eNodeBs. Here,
users with continuously varying QoS (Quality
scheduler can adjust the channel quality of
of service) requirements within Code division
each UE. This is called channel sensitive
multiple access [3]. This scheduler
scheduling [1,3]. Examples of channel
differentiates between non-real-time and
sensitive schedulers are described [5].
real-time traffic. Its formula can be
Key design aspects are: Complexity and
expressed as:
Scalability, Spectral efficiency, Fairness, QoS 𝑀𝑀−𝐿𝐿𝐷𝐷𝑊𝑊𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝐹𝐹 𝑑𝑑𝑖𝑖 (𝑡𝑡)
Provisioning. 𝑚𝑚𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘 =𝛼𝛼𝐷𝐷
𝑖𝑖 𝐻𝐻𝑂𝑂𝐿𝐿𝑖𝑖.,𝑚𝑚𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘 =𝛼𝛼𝑖𝑖𝐷𝐷𝐻𝐻𝑂𝑂𝐿𝐿,𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖̅.𝑅𝑅(𝑡𝑡−1)
𝑘𝑘
5.8. Channel-Aware/QoS-Aware (7)

Scheduling: Where, 𝐷𝐷𝐻𝐻𝑂𝑂𝐿𝐿,𝑖𝑖 is the delay of the head of line
packet and 𝛼𝛼𝑖𝑖 is calculated. LWDF metric is
based on the system parameter.
𝛿𝛿𝑖𝑖, representing the acceptable probability
for the i-th user that a packet is dropped due
to deadline expiration. Its metric is
described as follows:
𝑀𝑀−𝐿𝐿𝐷𝐷𝑊𝑊𝐹𝐹 = 𝛼𝛼 𝐷𝐷
[26] (8)
𝑚𝑚𝑘𝑘𝑖𝑖, 𝑖𝑖 𝐻𝐻𝑂𝑂𝐿𝐿,𝑖𝑖
Where αi is given by:
log 𝛿𝛿𝑖𝑖
𝛼𝛼𝑖𝑖 = − 𝜏𝜏𝑖𝑖
(9)
5.8.2. Proportional Fairness (PF):

This scheduler provides the better system
throughput and fairness (in sense of resource
allocation) among all users [4, 5]. It provides
Page 10
the user at least a minimal level of service results and record the values, obtaining
and at the same time it maximizes the total after runing of the simulator. Firstly we
throughput of the system. It was basically calculate the throughput for VoIP running
proposed to maintain NRT service in the five times the simulator for 1 user of PF
system. It gives high fairness and high cell scheduler and get the average vakue. Then
throughput [5]. Its metric is obtained by increasing the number of users till (5,10
merging the ones of MT (Maximum & 20) we run each of the simulation many
Throughput) and BET (Blind Equal of times and finally get the average value.
Throughput). Its metric is described as Hence we repeated this process for every
follows: [15]. of five schedulers (P.F, Max.Throughput,
𝑃𝑃𝐹𝐹=𝑚𝑚𝑀𝑀𝑇𝑇.𝑚𝑚𝐵𝐵𝐸𝐸𝑇𝑇= 𝑑𝑑𝑘𝑘
𝑖𝑖
(𝑡𝑡)
(6) FLS, results
the MLWDF inandthe
EXP)graph
and finally
as showputabove.
all of
𝑚𝑚𝑘𝑘𝑖𝑖, 𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘 𝑖𝑖,𝑘𝑘 ̅𝑖𝑖 (𝑡𝑡−1)
𝑅𝑅
Note that all of this work is done manually
with the help of LTE-Simulator. By
5.9. Calculating Downlink Throughput: analysing on all obtained result, we
conclude that.
Table 3: Simulation parameters
As it is shown by the given result that “for
Parameters Value
VoIP traffic, MLWDF is the best scheduler for
No. of Cells 1
downlink throughput” as its added
Radius of cell 1 km throughput of all users is 286134.5 bps.
No. of Users 5 to 20 Which is greater than all others schedulers
Speed 3 km/h used in this test.
Bandwidth 5 MHz
Transmit Power of 43 dBm Figure 7: Graph of downlink throughput for
Base Station video traffic.
Figure 6: Graph of downlink throughput for

VoIP traffic
Same at this time also with cahanging the

application for video, we calculate the
throughput running five times the simulator
for 1 user of PF scheduler and get the
average value. Then by increasing the
number of users till (5,10 & 20) we run each
We used LTE-Simulator ( which is an of the simulation many of times and finally
open source frame work ) as a simulation get the average value. Hence we repeated
tool (Linux based), to test the simulation this process for every of five schedulers (P.F,
Page 11
Max.Throughput, FLS, MLWDF and EXP) and

finally put all of the results in the graph as
show above. With the help of these graphs
we can easily check the each value of
downlink throughput for many users in many
of schedulers, as shown in the graph.
As it is shown by the given result that “for
Video traffic, FLS is the best scheduler for
downlink throughput” as its added
throughput of all users is 304357.1 bps.
Which is greater than all other schedulers
used in this test.
5.10. Drawbacks:
There are some drawbacks in all of above
mentioned algorithms like:
Unequal fairness, less spectral efficiency,
Non-stability and Complexity etc. We will
design optimal scheduling algorithms to
overcome their limitations. Practical
limitations in real LTE systems are: Uplink
Limitations, Control Overhead, Limitations
on the Multi-User Diversity Gain and Energy
Consumptions [19, 18, 22].
5.11. COMPARING DIFFERENT

SCHEDULING ALGORITHMS:
6. CONCLUSION:
Table 4: Comparison between different The 3GPP LTE standard aims to achieve
Scheduling Algorithms revolutionary data rate, spectral flexibility
with seamless mobility and enhanced QoS
over the entire IP network. In this project,
we have performed some scheduling
algorithms for LTE Advanced networks with
the help of LTE-Simulator. By scheduling
algorithms we distribute radio resources
among UEs in efficient way to improve the
fairness and throughput of the system [3].
We have identified the strength and
weakness of well known algorithms in the
LTE system and the key aspects that should
be taken into account when designing a new
algorithm. Here performance results show
that for VoIP traffic, MLWDF is the best
scheduler for downlink throughput. And for
Video traffic, FLS is the best scheduler for
downlink throughput.
Page 12
7. REFERENCES [12]S. Liu, C. Zhang, Y. Zhou and Y. Zhang,

[1]J. Acharya, L. Gao and S. "Delay-Based Weighted Proportional Fair
Gaur, Heterogeneous networks in LTE- Algorithm for LTE Downlink Packet
Advanced. . Scheduling", Wireless Pers Commun, vol. 82,
[2]X. Xiang, C. Lin, X. Chen and X. Shen, no. 3, pp. 1955-1965, 2015.
"Toward Optimal Admission Control and [13]S. Chadchan and C. Akki, "A Fair
Resource Allocation for LTE-A Femtocell Downlink Scheduling Algorithm for 3GPP LTE
Uplink", IEEE Trans. Veh. Technol., pp. 1-1, Networks",International Journal of Computer
2014. Network and Information Security, vol. 5,
[3]S. Fouziya Sulthana and R. Nakkeeran, no. 6, pp. 34-41, 2013.
"Study of Downlink Scheduling Algorithms in [14]S. Radhakrishnan, S. Neduncheliyan and
LTE Networks", Journal of Networks, vol. 9, K. Thyagharajan, "A Review of Downlink
no. 12, 2014. Packet Scheduling Algorithms for Real Time
[4]B. Sahoo, "PERFORMANCE COMPARISON OF Traffic in LTE-Advanced Networks", Indian
PACKET SCHEDULING ALGORITHMS FOR Journal of Science and Technology, vol. 9,
VIDEO TRAFFIC IN LTE CELLULAR no. 4, 2016.
NETWORK", International journal of Mobile [15]W. Lai and C. Tang, "QoS-aware downlink
Network Communications & Telematics, vol. packet scheduling for LTE
3, no. 3, pp. 9-18, 2013. networks", Computer Networks, vol. 57, no.
[5]F. Capozzi, G. Piro, L. Grieco, G. Boggia 7, pp. 1689-1698, 2013.
and P. Camarda, "Downlink Packet [16]D. Robalo and F. Velez, "Economic trade-
Scheduling in LTE Cellular Networks: Key off in the optimization of carrier aggregation
Design Issues and a Survey", IEEE with enhanced multi-band scheduling in LTE-
Communications Surveys & Tutorials, vol. 15, Advanced scenarios", J Wireless Com
no. 2, pp. 678-700, 2013. Network, vol. 2015, no. 1, 2015.
[6]M. Rathika and P. Sivakumar, "A Survey on [17]A. Ali, R. Nordin, M. Ismail and H.
Resource Scheduling Algorithms of LTE 4G Abdullah, "Impact of Feedback Channel Delay
Wireless Communication", 2015. [Online]. over Joint User Scheduling Scheme and
Available: Separated Random User Scheduling Scheme
http://www.ijae.in/current_issue/paper5.p in LTE-A System with Carrier
df. [Accessed: 24- May- 2016]. Aggregation", Journal of Computer Networks
[7].Salman A. AlQahtani, Mohammed and Communications, vol. 2014, pp. 1-7,
Alhassany, Comparing Different LTE 2014.
Scheduling Schemes, 978-1-4673-2480- [18]F. Capozzi, G. Piro, L. Grieco, G. Boggia
9/13/$31.00 ©2013 IEEE and P. Camarda, "On accurate simulations of
[8] D. McQueen, “The momentum behind LTE LTE femtocells using an open source
adoption,” IEEE Commun. Mag., vol. 47, no. simulator", EURASIP J Wirel Commun Netw,
2, pp. 44–45, Feb. 2009. vol. 2012, no. 1, p. 328, 2012.
[9]M. Sauter, From GSM to LTE. Chichester, [19]b. Kumar, d. Prasad and m. Kumar, "LTE-
West Sussex, U.K.: Wiley, 2011. Advanced communication using in Femtocells
[10]F. Afroz, S. Barua and K. Sandrasegaran, Perspective.", International Journal Of
"Performance Analysis of FLS, EXP, LOG and Engineering And Computer Science, 2015.
M-LWDF Packet Scheduling Algorithms in [20]G. Piro, L. Grieco, G. Boggia, F. Capozzi
Downlink 3GPP LTE System", IJWMN, vol. 6, and P. Camarda, "Simulating LTE Cellular
no. 5, pp. 77-91, 2014. Systems: An Open-Source Framework", IEEE
[11]A. Kanagasabai and A. Nayak, "Channel Trans. Veh. Technol., vol. 60, no. 2, pp. 498-
Aware Scheduling Algorithm for LTE Uplink 513, 2011.
and Downlink", NPA, vol. 7, no. 3, p. 111, [21] 3GPP, Tech. Specif. Group Radio Access
Network - Max #UEs/Subframe
2015.
Page 13
for Optimum E-UTRA DL Performance (5-20

MHz), 3GPP TSG-RAN
WG1 R1-070792.
[22] C. Bontu and E. Illidge, “DRX mechanism
for power saving in LTE,”
IEEE Commun. Mag., vol. 47, no. 6, pp. 48 –
55, Jun. 2009.
[23] L. Zhou, H. Xu, H. Tian, Y. Gao, L. Du,
and L. Chen, “Performance
Analysis of Power Saving Mechanism with
Adjustable DRX Cycles in
3GPP LTE,” in Proc. IEEE Veh. Tech. Conf.,
VTC-Fall, Calgary, Alberta,
Sep. 2008, pp. 1 –5.
[24] D. Laselva, F. Capozzi, F. Frederiksen,
K. Pedersen, J. Wigard, and
I. Kovacs, “On the Impact of Realistic
Control Channel Constraints on
QoS Provisioning in UTRAN LTE,” in Proc.
IEEE Veh. Tech. Conf.,
VTC-Fall, Anchorage, Alaska, USA, Sep.
2009, pp. 1 –5.
[25] 3GPP, Tech. Specif. Group Radio Access
Network - Persistent Scheduling
in E-UTRA, 3GPP TSG-RAN WG1 R1-070098.
[26] D. Jiang, H. Wang, E. Malkamaki, and E.
Tuomaala, “Principle and
performance of semi-persistent scheduling
for VoIP in LTE system,”
in Proc. IEEE Wireless Commun., Net. and
Mobile Comput., WiCom,
Shanghai, China, Sep. 2007.
[27] A. S. Tanenbaum, Modern Operating
Systems, 3rd ed. Upper Saddle
River, NJ, USA: Prentice Hall Press, 2007.
[28] P. Kela, J. Puttonen, N. Kolehmainen,
T. Ristaniemi, T. Henttonen,
and M. Moisio, “Dynamic packet scheduling
performance in UTRA
Long Term Evolution downlink,” in Proc.
International Symposium on
Wireless Pervasive Comput., Santorini,
Greece, May 2008, pp. 308 –313.
Page 14
CFD Analysis of 105mm HE Artillery Shell & validation of Computational Results
Muhammad Kashif, Roman Kalvin, Nauman Rasheed,

M. Umer Sohail, Sajid Hussain
Department of Mechanical Engineering
Wah Engineering College, University of Wah
m.kashif@wecuw.edu.pk
romankalvin12@yahoo.com
ABSTRACT
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) is a modern technique used to solve the problem of Fluid
Dynamics by using numerical methods. The goal of this research was to study the computational
analyze the flow behavior around an 105mm HE Artillery shell and validate the numerical results
with experimental data and the behavior of the flow field around an 105mm HE Artillery Shell
and result validation with published data. This research covers the scaled modeling of the
artillery shell using Pro Engineering and GAMBIT respectively and numerical simulation using
ANSYS (FLUENT) at Mach number 0.8 to 1.4 with a validation of Angle of Attack from 0 10 4
deg. This research also covers the experimental analysis of a scaled down version of the artillery
shell carried out in the wind tunnel.
Keywords: HE Artillery Shell, Scaled Modeling, CFD
1. INTRODUCTION considered on research. CFD underway in

the 1970‟s around that time, it converted an
CFD is mostly used in fluid mechanics which abbreviation for the blend of physics,
comprises of numerical methods, algorithm numerical mathematics and to some
and processes to resolve furthermore amount, computer sciences all working to
examine difficulties that include fluid simulate fluid flows.
flows. CFD is employed to attain the designs
essential to simulate the interface of liquids Computational Fluid Dynamics procedures
and gases with surfaces well-defined are usually hired in the grounds of air-craft,
by boundary conditions. Better solutions turbomachines, car, and craft proposal.
can be attained by using high speed Additionally, CFD is also practical in
computer processor. Current research weathercasting, oceanography,
shows that CFD software advances the astrophysics, environmental science, oil
accurateness and swiftness of multifaceted retrieval, and in construction. Some CFD
imitation scenarios such as transonic and software's by American companies are
turbulent flows. Investigational validation FLUENT, TIDAL, C-MOLD, GASP, FLOTRAN,
of CFD software is achieved by means of SPLASH, Tetrex, VIGPLOT, VGRID, etc.
a wind tunnel with ultimate result achieved
in full-scale flight tests. Since 1940’s logical
explanation to utmost fluid dynamics
difficulties were accessible for flawless
resolutions. Approaches for resolution of
Ordinary differential equations (ODEs) or
Partial Differential equations (PDEs) were
Page 15
The missile which transmits a 'payload' to first build the model in computer aided
the mark, tailored with a fuse on its nose to design (CAD) according to given
trigger its explosion. Payloads comprised of dimension.
high-explosive, white phosphorus,
illumination flares, smoke mixture,
'butterfly, bomb lets, or anti-personnel
falsettos.105mm artillery is again becoming
popular among many armies due to the high
mobility and low weight, which makes it
appropriate for subsidiary Quick Disposition
Forces. In the field of Artillery this shell is
frequently used and selected as the
reference shell in this project. Some main
characteristics of 105 mm HE shell are given
Figure 2: Dimensions of 105mm Artillery Shell in Gambit
below in the table. It can be fired from
following guns. M1, M2A1, M2A2, 3. Formation of Vertex
M101/M101A1, M102 and M106 (USA),
L10/A1, L-119 and M119A1 (UK), L-5 (Italy), After find coordinates the next step is to
KH178 (South Korea), Type 75 (Japan), LG- import the co-ordinates.dat file in gambit as
1 and M101A1 modernized (France) and shown in figure.
many other worldwide.
Figure 3: Geometry of 105mm HE Shell in Gambit
Figure 1: 105 mm Artillery shell 1
2. Results:
1. Modeling:
Modeling includes making of the model Figure 4: O Type Domain of Shell

as the dimension given in the data. So
Page 16
Figure 7: Dimensional Meshing of Shell 1
During the iterations the residual or

Figure 5: 2D Meshing of Shell coefficient graphs are checked to see the
convergence. When the solution is
converged, the residual graphs show the
4. Dimensional Meshing:
After completing the 2-D meshing we

convert the meshing in to 3-Dimensional
by using simple revolve faces command
in Gambit. Salient mesh generation data
is as follows:
 Mesh = 643840 Cells
 Type of Mesh = “O” Type
 Domain Size = 15 C (15 times the
Shell length).
 Shell length = 18 inch.
Figure 6: 3D Meshing of Shell Graph 2: Drag vs Mach 1
Page 17
constant value for the specified solution as 0,1,2,3 degrees so up to 4 degrees’ angle of
shown in figure below. attack at 1.4 Mach number the Lift of
The above figure shows the relation

between Mach Number Vs Drag Coefficient
at 0 to 4 degree Angle of Attack & we
conclude that the Drag Coefficients have
higher values at 4 degree as compare to
0,1,2,3 degrees so up to 4 degrees angle of
attack& 1.4 Mach number the Drag
Coefficient increases with the both Angle of
Attack and Mach number
Graph 5: Drag Coefficient Vs Angle of Attack
Graph 3: Lift Vs Mach
The above graph figure shows the relation

between Mach Number Vs Lift Coefficient at
0 to 4-degree Angle of Attack which
concluded that the Lift Coefficients have
Graph 6: Lift Coefficient vs Angle of Attack
higher values at 4 degrees as compare to
Coefficient rises with the both Angle of
Attack and Mach Number.
5. Experimental Validation:
Alpha Cd Cl Cm Cn C.P.X
0 3.04E-02 0 0 0 0.2573
6.59E- -3.83E-
1 3.18E-02 -0.001 0.2605
03 03
6.83E- -4.05E-
2 3.34E-02 -0.002 0.2671
03 03
7.15E- -4.29E-
3 3.68E-02 -0.0031 0.2608
03 03
Graph 4: Moment Coefficient Vs Drag 7.35E- -4.45E-
4 3.84E-02 -0.0042 0.2456
03 03
Table 1: Wind tunnel Results of 105 mm A 1
Page 18
6. REFERENCES
1. “EXTERIOIR BALLISTICS OF
ROCKETS” by LEVERET DAVIS, jr.
JAMES W. FOLLIN, jr. LEON
BLITZER.
2. “TACTICAL MISSILE DESIGN” by
Eugene Fleeman.
3. Technical report of DEFENCE
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
ORGANIZATION AUSTRALIA ON
AERODYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS OF
105MM SHELL.
Graph 6: Drag Coefficient vs Mach 4. Technical information report
“CALCULATING THE CENTRE OF
PRESSURE OF A MODEL ROCKET” by
JAMES BARROWMAN.
5. “The research analysis of
aerodynamic numerical simulation
of grid fin”, Journal of Zhejiang
University SCIENCE.
6. “AERODYNAMIC ANALYSIS OF
LATTICE GRID FINS IN TRANSONIC
FLOW” THESIS, Karl S. Orthner,
Ensign, USNR AFIT/GAE/ENY/04-
J09.
7. “Computation of Flows Past Grid Fin
Missiles” M. Khalid, Y. Sun, and H.
Xu.Institute for Aerospace Research,
Graph 7: Coefficient of Lift Vs Mach National Research Council,Ottawa,
KlA OR6, Ontario, Canada.
8. Guidance, Navigation, and Control
for Munitions, Doctor’s Thesis
Submitted to the Faculty of Drexel
University by Mark Dean Ilg.
9. FIELD ARTILLERY (VOLUME 6),
“BALLISTICS AND AMMUNITION”,
report no. B-GL-306-006/FP-001.
Graph 8: Coefficient of Moment vs Mach
Page 19
Awareness of workplace hazards among workers in textile mill:

A pilot study
Mohsin Ali Shaikh*1, Murlidhar Nebhwani2, Abdul Salam Soomro2, Miskeen Ali Gopang3,
P P P P P P P P
1
P M.E Student, 2Professor, 3PhD Research Scholar,
P P P P P
Department of Industrial Engineering and Management
Mehran University of Engineering and Technology, Jamshoro -76062- Sindh, Pakistan
engrmohsinshaikh131@gmail.com, murlidhar_rs@hotmail.com,
3TU
soomro.abdulsalam@yahoo.com, miskeen.gopang@gmail.com
3TU
ABSTRACT
Exposure to hazards is dangerous to the health. In order to know the awareness of
workplace hazards among workers, a study was carried out at Sapphire Textile Mill located
at S.I.T.E Kotri Sindh, Pakistan. Questionnaire of Musa et al.,2012 [1] was modified and
used to collect the data from 80 workers. SPSS software was used to analyze the data. The
main objective of this study was to know the awareness among workers about workplace
hazards which include: noise, heat, machine injury, dust particles, floating fibers,
lighting, furniture, lifting objects, fumes and fire. Results revealed that 88.8% of
respondents were aware of workplace hazards and main source for their awareness was
co-workers, internet, and supervisors. Respondents reported that they face health
problems like Byssinosis, head ache, eye irritation and contact dermatitis due to
workplace hazards. 95% workers reported that they were not using personal protective
equipment (PPE) due to inadequate availability in the industry. 81.3% of the respondents
reported that poor health has influence on their production rate. From above statistics it
can be concluded that workers were aware of workplace hazards but due to non-
availability of adequate measures, they face many health problems. It is recommended
that adequate safety measures should be taken as it is social and moral responsibility of
every organization to provide safe working environment to their workers.
Keywords: Hazards Awareness, Textile, Noise, Heat, Dust, PPE, Pakistan.

U
*Corresponding Author:
Mohsin Ali Shaikh (M.E. Student)

Department of Industrial Engineering and Management,
E-mail: engrmohsinshaikh131@gmail.com Cell No: +92-335-1120376
3TU U3T
Page 20
1. INTRODUCTION:
2T
Industrialization has exposed workers working environment [3]. Noise is big

more to the occupational hazards and complication hazards in textile
exposures to hazards are dangerous to industries. Due to much noise in the
the health. There are different types of working environment, workers suffer
hazards in textile Industries like physical, from hearing loss [7]. Gigantic machines
Biological, Chemical and Ergonomic. produced high level of noise which create
These hazards bring unhealthy fatigue and nervousness problem for
environment, inappropriate accident and workers life [6]. Noise creates sleeping
infectious diseases [2]. Occupational disorders in the workers of textile
injuries have great impact on the life of Industry [8]. Issues of ecological hazards
worker at the work place. All over the in textile have also been studied and
world it is approximately 300000 people suggested that these factors can be
expire due to 250 million mishaps that controlled easily by best design of
happen in the working environment or machine with less noise [6]. Many factors
place [3]. Mostly Asian factories are poor including working for a long time with
in the course of health and safety inaccurate instruments and sleep
condition due to lack of responsibilities disorders can cause occupational injury in
of private and public sector. Pakistan and textile Industries [9]. The Sleeping
Bangladesh health and safety disturbance, lack of training and job
environment shows that, hundreds of stress increase the injuries at
workers have lost their life due to lack of occupational place [3]. The lack of
safety arrangements in Industries. instructions and training, sleeping
Thousands of workers are killed and interruption, and job tension expands the
injured every year due to workplace risk of occupational injury. Providing
hazards [4]. In Pakistan, there are 15 basic health and safety, training &
million people working in the textile education among younger and male
sector who are exposed to workplace workers minimize the stress and sleep
hazards on daily routine basis [5]. Work disorder [10]. When health risks are
environment of textile industry possess increases ultimately the productivity of
many potential hazards: cotton dust, employees’ decreased [11]. An Ergonomic
noise, heat, floating cotton fiber, fumes, and Physical hazards can disturb the
fire, machine injury, lighting, furniture natural strength and health [7]. The
and lifting objects [1 and 7]. Noise is one prevention of hazards becomes necessary
of the major occupational hazards. in working environment. The smashing
Continuously sound of machines create environment decreases the risk of injury
noise pollution which is harmful for head- [2]. More attention is required to worker
ache. Noise has directly influenced on for making better health condition and
headache disease which cannot provide working environment. Government
high production on Industries. Noise agencies should monitor the all
keeps the most omnipresent natural circumstances of safety and provide the
issue. It has unfriendly impact on people fund for research purpose in the interest
and their environment. If the textile to make better health condition at
industries want to better improvement, working environment [7]. It is very
they will have to design machines with necessary to improve the occupational
less noise and reduce air pollution from health and safety and create awareness
Page 21
about hazard. Illiterate workers don’t Questionnaire was consisted of closed

know how to use preventive measure at ended questions and workers were asked
working place. Hazards control measures to respond the questions according to the
can easily minimize the impact of these best of their knowledge.
hazards. The country will have to
improve safety infrastructure. There is 3.1 Demographics characteristics of
respondents:
also need of qualified people related OHS
to make better design of health and
According to the statistical analysis of
safety services at working place [2]. A
collected data, 31(38.8%) of the
study has been conducted in Dera Ismail
respondents were from the age group of
Khan which shown the effect of
30-39. The range of age was (21~59), the
demographics which are not significant
highest percentage was calculated
on the level of knowledge, attitude and
31(38.8%) age between (30~39).The
practice regarding occupational health
lowest percentage 10 (12.5%) was noticed
and safety among textile workers [12].In
in the age of 50~59 as shown in Table 1.
the light of above literature this research
study was carried out with an aim to
Table 1: Age of respondents
know the awareness of occupational Variables Number Percentage
hazard among the workers of sector. 20~29 26 32.5
30~39 31 38.8
2. MATERIAL AND METHODS: 40~49 13 16.3
50~59 10 12.5
The study research has been carried out
in sapphire textile mill located at SITE
Majority of the respondent 26 (32.5%)
area Kotri, Sindh, Pakistan. First of all
were single and 54 (67.5%) were married
permission was taken from the
respondents. It is concluded that married
management of sapphire textile mill for
respondent were in majority as shown in
conducting the research study. The
Table 2.
population of total staff was 1500. The
Table: 2. Marital Status
questionnaire used in this study has been
Variable Number Percentage
adopted from Omotosh et al.; 2012 [1].
Single 26 32.5
This study is pilot study. The
Married 54 67.5
questionnaire distributed separately
amongst the worker and eighty
questionnaires were got fully filled. The level of education was not
Further, descriptive statistics techniques satisfactory. Mostly respondents 31
(frequency tables and percentage) were (38.7%) were illiterate. The primary
used to analyze the data with the help of education was passed by 26 (32.5%)
SPSS software. respondents. Only 13 (16.2%) were matric
passed, 7 (8.7%) were intermediate while
3. RESULTS:
2T
only 3 (3.7%) respondents were graduate.

The highest percentage of respondents
Every worker has fully right to get
were illiterate, while graduate were the
valuable health from working
lowest percentage among them as shown
environment. Healthful man brings
in Table 3.
wonderful production which helps to
increase the economy of factory and also
Majority of respondents 29 (36.3%) had
help to develop the country.
worked between 6~10 years in the
Page 22
factory, while 23 (28.8%) had worked 1~5 internet 45 (56.2%) and supervisor 42
years and 16 (20%) had worked 11~15 (52.5%) were highest source of
years in the factory. as shown in Table 4. awareness, while television 12 (15%),
newspapers 6 (7.5%), and family
Table3:Level of Education members 13 (16.3%) was also the source
Variables Number Percentage of awareness as shown in Table 6.It is
Illiterate 31 38.7 concluded that colleagues, internet and
Primary 26 32.5 supervisor were be the high sources of
Matric 13 16.2 awareness while safety training was least
Intermediate 07 08.7 source of awareness. It indicates that
Graduation 03 03.7 safety training was not providing to
workers.
Table 4: Duration on present job
variable Number Percentage Table 6: Source of awareness
1~5 23 28.8 Variable Frequency Percentage
6~10 29 36.3 Training on safety at work
11~15 16 20.0 Yes 09 11.3
16~20 06 07.5 No 71 88.8
21~25 06 07.5 Supervisor at Work Place
Yes 42 52.5
3.2 Awareness about occupational No 38 47.5
Colleagues At Work
hazards:
Yes 47 58.8
No 33 41.3
Respondents were asked to indicate the Internet
awareness of job hazards. Result shows Yes 45 56.2
that majority of the respondents No 35 43.7
71(88.8%) were aware about occupational Friends
hazards and minority 9(11.3%) were not Yes 45 56.3
aware about it as shown in Table 5. It can No 35 43.8
be concluded from above statistic that Television
majority of respondents were aware Yes 12 15.0
No 68 85.0
about occupational hazards.
Newspaper
Table 5: Respondents’ awareness Yes 06 07.5
No 74 92.5
Variable Frequency Percentage Family Member
Yes 13 16.3
Yes 71 88.8 No 67 83.8
No 09 11.3
3.4 Hazards at work place:
3.3 Sources of awareness:
Respondents were also asked to indicate There are different types of hazards in
the source of awareness of job hazards. textile industry. Respondents were asked
Mostly respondents 47 (58.8%) were to report the hazards available at
aware about job hazards because of workplace. Mostly respondent reported
colleagues; while Safety training at work that major available hazards at work
place 9(11.3%) was least source of place in the industry were noise 71
awareness. Colleagues 47 (58.8%), (88.7%), heat 47(58.8%), machine injury
Page 23
57(71.2%) cotton dust particles 73 of hazards. Respondents 71 (88.7%) had

(91.3%), floating fibers 71 (88.8%), dark never got training about hazard
and poor light 55 (68.8%), improper prevention. Only 9 (11.3%) respondent
furniture 54 (67.5%), manual lifting had done training on hazard prevention
object 53 (66.3%), fire 61(76.3%), and as shown in Table 9. It is concluded from
lubricant burn smell 53 (66.3%) as shown the above statistics that majority of the
in Table 7. It is concluded that the main respondents had never gone through
hazards at workplace were dust particles, hazards prevention training.
floating fibers, noise, fire, machine
injury, lighting, furniture, lifting object, TABLE 8: Health Problem due to
fumes and heat. hazards
Variable Yes Percentage
Table 7: Hazards at work place Eye irritation 48 60.00
Variables Yes Percentage Skin Irritant 22 27.50
Dust particles 73 91.25 Accident 11 13.75
Floating fibers 71 88.75 Stress 45 56.25
Noise 71 88.75 Contact Dermatitis 31 38.75
Fire 61 76.25 Respiratory
22 27.50
problems
Machine injury 57 71.25
Organ System
Lighting 55 68.75 21 26.25
perturbation
Furniture 54 67.50 Muscular skeletal
18 22.50
disorders
Lifting object 53 66.25
Head ache 51 63.75
Fumes 53 66.25
Lungs problems 05 06.25
Heat 47 58.75
Byssinosis 60 75.00
3.5 Health problems due to Table 9: Hazard prevention training

hazards: Variable Frequency Percentage
Mostly respondents were facing many Yes 09 11.25

diseases at working place. Respondents No 71 88.75
were facing byssinosis 60(76.2%), head-
ache 51(68.8%), stress 45 (56.3%), eye
irritation 48 (60%), contact dermatitis 3.7 Availability of personal protective
31(38.7%), skin Irritant 22(27.5%), equipment (PPE):
respiratory problem 22(27.5%), organ
system perturbation 21 (26.3%), Mostly Respondents were asked to report
musculoskeletal disorder 18(22.5%), about availability of PPE for the
accident 11(13.8%) and lungs problems prevention of hazards. Mostly respondent
05(6.3%) as shown in Table 8. The highest 76 (95%) stated that PPE were always not
percentage was noticed on byssinosis, available as shown in table 10.
head-ache, eye irritation and stress.
Table 10: Availability of PPE
3.6 Hazard prevention training: Variables No Percentage
Not Always
Respondents were asked to report about 76 95%
Available
training they received for the prevention
Page 24
It is concluded that there is no and heat. The main health problems

availability of PPE in industry. Workers faced by workers due to these
were aware of work place hazards but occupational hazards were Byssinosis,
due to non-availability of adequate headache, eye irritation and contact
measures PPE they face many health dermatitis. It was due to non-availability
problems. of adequate PPE in the industry. Majority
of respondents also reported that poor
health influenced on production rate. It
3.8 Influence of hazards on was also observed that workers were
production: aware of work place hazards but due to
Respondents were asked to report about non-compliance of hazards prevention
influenced of hazard on production. training they faced many health
Mostly respondent 65(81.3%) believed problems. It is recommended that top
that hazards give less production, while management should take an adequate
15(18.8%) respondents said that there is safety measure which is social and moral
no influence of hazards on production as responsibility of every employer /
shown in table 11. It is concluded that organization.
hazards make poor health which causes
5. REFERENCES:
reduction in the production.
[1] Musa, O. and Bamidele, J. 2012.
TABLE 11: Influenced of hazards on Occupational Hazards Awareness and
production Safety among Cement Factory
Variable Frequency Percentage Workers at Obajana Kogi State
Yes 65 81.3 Nigeria, Elixir International Journal
No 15 18.8 Bio Diversity, 47, pp 9013-9018.
[2] Nazia, M. Ashfaq, A. Tariq, S.P.

4. CONCLUSION AND Akhtar, S. and Tanveer, A. 2010.
RECOMMENDATION: Role of Hazard Control Measures in
Occupational Health and Safety in
This study was carried out with an aim to the Textile Industry of Pakistan,
know the awareness of hazards among Pakistan Journal of Agricultural
the workers of Sapphire textile mill Kotri Science, 47(1), pp 72-76.
S.I.T.E Sindh Pakistan. It was observed
that most of the workers were aware of [3] Jaiswal, A. 2012. A Case Control
occupational hazards and main source of Study among Carpet Thread Factory
their awareness was colleagues, Internet Workers in Uttar Pradesh, Global
and supervisor. Whereas; the least source journal of Human Social Science,
for the awareness of hazards were 12(10).
newspapers and training. It is because
few workers have been provided training [4] Theuws, M. Pauli, T. Huijstee, M.
on hazard prevention. According to this V. Overeem, P. and Seters, J.V.
study the main occupational hazards 2013. Analysis of Recent Factory
available at textile industry were dust Fires in Pakistan and Bangladesh, A
particles, floating fibers, fire, Noise, Call to Protect and Respect
Machines injury followed by improper Garments Workers Lives Published by
lighting, furniture, lifting object, fumes SOMO (Stichting Onderzoek
Page 25
Multinational Ondernemingen & CCC Determination of Occupational Injury

(Clean Clothes Campaign). in Kombolcha Textile Factory, North-
East Ethiopia, International Journal
[5] Naz, S. Ilyas, M. and Rehman, A. of Occupational and Environmental
2015. Impact of Organizational Medicine, 5(2), pp. 84-93.
Culture on Decision Making Style,
Emprical Findings of Textile Industry [10] Aderaw, Z. Engdaw, D. and
in Pakistan, Science International Tadesse, T. 2011. A Case Control
Lahore, 27(1), pp 431-438. Study among Textile Factory Worker
in Amhara Regional State Ethiopia,
[6] Das, S. 2000. A Case Study: Some Journal of Tropical Medicine.
Issues of Ecological Hazards in
Textile Industry.
[11] Burton, Wayne, N. Daniel, J.
[7] Gopang, M.A. 2015. Impact of Chin-Yu. And Alyssa, B. 1999. The
Safety Management Practices on the Role of Health Risk Factors and
Performance of SME’s, An Empirical Disease on Worker Productivity,
Study at Kotri, Master Thesis, Journal of Occupational and
Mehran University of Engineering Environmental Medicine, 41(10), pp
and Technology, Jamshoro, Sindh 863-877.
Pakistan.
[12] Ahmed, I. Qadir, S. Yasir, M.
[8] Abebe, Y. and Fantahun, M. 1999. Irfanullah, M, Aslam Z.S, Mahboob,
Shift Work and Sleep Disorder Among A. and Waqas, M. 2012. Knowledge,
Textile Mill Workers in Bahlr Dar, Attitude and Practices Related to
North West Ethiopia, East African Occupational Health and Safety
Medical Journal, 76(7), pp 407-410. among Textile Workers in Dera Ismail
Khan, Gomal Journal of Medical
[9] Serkalem, Y. S. Haimanot, G. M. Science, 10(2), pp 222-226.
and Ansha, N. 2014. The
Page 26
Impact of Innovative Work Behavior on Strategic Management in Competitive sector:

Role of Social Media
Iqra Aitbar1, Iqra Saeed2, Syed Kamran Hussain Shah3

1, 2,3
BE student, Department of Electrical Engineering
Institute of Space and Technology, Islamabad Pakistan
email1:syedaiqra01@gmail.com
email2:iqrasaeed94@gmail.com
email3:kami_0809@yahoo.com
ABSTRACT
The main purpose of the paper will be to find the relationship between innovative
behavior and strategic management and means to boost it for a positive outcome in
competitive sector through Social Media. This paper examines the use of innovative
behavior to obtain a competitive advantage through strategic management. As world
economy and market is dynamic in nature, therefore to face the challenges, organizations
must innovate and thus strategic management should recognize and plan the ways to boost
innovativeness. This study examines how proper implementation of the innovative
behavior in a business organization can provide a solution to competitive strategy plans.
Keywords: Innovative Behavior, Strategic Management, Competitive
Strategy, Social Media
Strategic management has a noteworthy

influence on the performance of the
1. INTRODUCTION organizations [2]. In today’s business
With the development of knowledge world, all types and sizes of organizations
economy and the nonstop growth of try to manage the constantly changing
science and technology, every conditions. The companies today are
organization/business has to confront an composed of diverse divisions, units and
uncertain dynamic environment, greater functions that must be coordinated side
risks and highly challenging competitive by side. Strategic management is
pressures so, in order to survive, involved in many of the decisions that
compete or gain advantage organizations managers make.
must innovate their methodologies and
Organizations around the globe develop
processes.
strategic plans. They create a mission to
The uneven and often hectic achieve analyze the strategies needed to
environment, within which organizations achieve the goals. However the expected
compete, is driving organizations to be strategic results are not gained by many
more and more self-motivated. It also of the organizations. Unfortunately,
provokes organizations to innovate and executive teams fail to identify the
remain competitive. Moreover, while reasons behind this dilemma so they keep
innovation is generally considered to be a on repeating the strategic management
central success factor in today’s cycle over and over again with the hope
organizations, very little is known about that the next session of the management
the strategies that impact upon the will bring better and fruitful results. And
innovative behavior of employees. [1] of course it doesn't due to the sole reason
Page 27
that the proper way on implementing the Social Media is a competitive weapon for
strategies is not fulfilled. [3] an organization. Proper handling and
investment in Social Media helps shape
As such, this research will add to the the competitive strategy of an
body of literature about the impact of organization by improving the managerial
the strategic management upon the processes. Through a good Social Media
innovative behavior of employees. an organization can improve its customer
Additionally, the research will outline the service, improve the process of feedback
techniques to improve the innovative through customers, enhance innovation,
behavior of the employees. seek new opportunities and break
The competitive strategic management geographical barriers [5].
of an organization makes it concentrate As Social Media is an important part of
on the means of getting a distinct organization’s competitive strategy
competitive edge or to gain profits. sector and is greatly influenced by
Awareness of competitive sector innovative behavior so this research
differentiates the firm from the paper will now aim to find out the
competitors giving the firm continuous overlapping areas between these fields
profits and meeting customer’s demands and its effect on organization’s outcome.
more effectively. It also gives a clearer
picture of organization’s current status This research will determine whether or
and helps the organizations grow strong not social media plays a role in
in market. As Michael Porter, who did a innovative work behavior for competitive
great deal of work on competitive sector of strategic management.
strategies analysis said “The essence of
strategy formulation is coping with 2. LITERATURE REVIEW:
competition.” [4]
2.1 Innovative work behaviour:
The change or “innovativeness” in The terms creativity and innovation are
market creates changing forces with often used interchangeably in research
accurately integrated forces from studies. The distinction between them
competitive sector the organization can lies in the fact that creativity is actually
defend these changing market the production of beneficial ideas and
environment or even divert them to gain innovation is the adaption or generation
its own advantage. of useful ideas and their implementation.
Competitive Strategy is defined as [6]
organizations’ power to perform in a way Innovation is “the process whereby new
that cannot be matched by competitors. and improved products, processes,
It is important in nowadays changing Materials, and services are developed and
market conditions, complexity of transferred to a plant or market where
business environment and globalization of they are appropriate.” [7]
business markets.
Innovative work behavior or (IWB)
With the changing market environment basically includes exploration of
and increasing importance of innovative opportunities and the generation of new
behavior as described earlier the use of ideas (creativity related behavior), but
Social Media in the field of management could also include behaviors which
is very important.
Page 28
implement change, apply new knowledge implementation of strategic

and improve the process to improve management. It is a disciplined approach
business performance (implementation utilizing the principles and process of
oriented behavior). [8] management to identify the corporate
objective or mission of any business. [11]
It is a process that tells how to manage
knowledge in order to recognize a It is described as the set of integrated
problem, looking for more effective pattern derived from: purpose, goals and
solutions for the problem and hence the major policies and plans for
figuring a way to implant those solutions formulating, implementing and
into organizational practice, a way of evaluating these goals. Concerned with
applying the knowledge of innovative defining the business the company is in or
thinking in the organization to improve is to be, and a pathway which moves the
the performance and respond more organization from its current status to
accurately to customer’s demand. the planned future. [12]
Innovative behavior is considered to be Strategic management combines:

important for organizations who aim to management, marketing, production,
improve the effectiveness and the finance, operations, research and
efficiency of the organizational process. development, and Social Media to
achieve organizational success.
IWB is not only based upon idea Sometimes the term strategic
generation, but it also depends on the management is used to refer to strategy
behaviors required to bring these ideas formulation, implementation, and
into practice and achieve improvements evaluation, with strategic planning
that will boost up personal and/or referring only to strategy formulation.
business performance [9]. [13]
2.2 Strategic Management: The five stages of the process are goal-
A strategy is a design which exploits the setting, environmental scanning, strategy
essential competencies of an organization formation, strategy implementation and
to gain a competitive advantage. strategy monitoring.
Strategy management means choosing
These strategies help in increasing the
competitive alternatives as a map to
innovative behavior of the employees and
decide means of getting advantage from
help reach the organization to the
strategic competiveness. The chosen
specified goals.
strategy defines the direction of
organization. [10] 2.3 Management of Innovative
Behaviour:
Strategic management is the technique of
using all the principles and process of Management of innovative behavior is
management to identify the objective or creating a link between different
mission of any business. It determines the departments for planning, developing,
target to achieve the goal and satisfy the implementing, monitoring and controlling
objective and make a way to achieve the technology and ideas to maximize overall
required objective. The performance of benefits as described by strategic
any organization is highly dependent on objectives. [14]
the quality of its management via
Page 29
According to the researches [15],it is advantage through strategic management

found that innovative behavior of over the other organization, it is
individuals was affected by their confident that the competitors will fail to
expectations that the behavior would duplicate its strategy, but this insurance
have a constructive effect on is short termed as a good organization’s
performance results (e.g., increase in strategy actively copes up with the
productivity, decrease in error rates, external environment.
increase in ability to achieve goals)
and/or on their image within the Strategic management highly emphasis on
organization. Specifically, employees in analyzing the external environment and
the study preferred to engage in internal organizational environment to
innovative behavior when they expected determine its resources, capabilities, and
fruitful outcomes than when they did not core competencies which are its strategic
expect such a constructive result. inputs. With the information gained from
Similarly, they abstained from taking part this analysis, the organization develops
in innovative behavior when they feared its vision and mission and formulates one
doing so would cause others to view them or more strategies. [4] .
negatively.
2.5 Impact of Innovative Behaviour
In order to engage employees in in competitive Sector of Strategic
innovative behavior following suggestions Management:
are involved: Identify the perception of Innovative behavior is very positive for an
“positive performance outcomes.” by the organization especially when it comes to
employees; Ensure that the competition and it can be boosted by
organization’s infrastructure is based on generating an efficient strategic plan
innovative culture – e.g. performance keeping in mind the future scope.
management systems reward those who
perform well and engage in innovative Therefore, we can say innovative
behavior; Ensure that the desired behavior has direct relationship with
behaviors are demonstrated by all the strategic management. To boost
leaders; Innovation must be made a innovative behavior, the organization
specific requirement for every job in the should keep in line and pay attention on
organization; Presentation of new ideas, whether personal characteristics and the
making of suggestions; questioning organizational needs are matching when
assumptions; and challenging the status enrolling.
quo must be made “safe” ;Quality
Secondly, the organization should
employee-supervisor relationships must
promote and advocate organization’s
be made a priority. [16]
internal innovation culture. In addition to
2.4 Importance of Strategic this, the organization should encourage
Management: employees’ innovative behavior through
appreciation, training, motivation and
Strategic management takes a deep goal orientation.
interest in creating a superior value for
customers to create an edge for the Thirdly, the organizations should pay
organization which it competitors are more attention to social capital and the
incapable to match. When one relationships and communication
organization gains a competitive between horizontal (relationship between
Page 30
employees) and vertical levels and suppliers and bringing a positive

(relationship between supervisor and change in organization by taking into
employee) and most importantly consideration customer’s demand. [16]
relationship of whole organization with
customer. In order to encourage Innovation is highly effective for quality,
innovative behavior in an organization, adopting innovation leads to new
leaders should pay more attention to products, processes, services and new
emotional information from subordinates ideas as well. It provides better quality
and respond to them analogously in the and utilizes production methods
process of innovation. [17] efficiently. Innovation also reduces cost
of both product and process, assisting
2.6 Social media for competitive organization to have better quality with
advantage: reasonable cost. Innovation has positive
impact on flexibility, adopting innovative
Implementation of Social Media helps
methods in products and process allow
improve business process by cutting costs,
organizations to customize products and
improving quality, creating ways for
services based on customer
customers to interact and developing new
requirements. To conclude, innovation
products. Moreover, it can promote
has a positive impact on competitive
innovation in terms of creating new
advantage; the five dimensions of
business opportunities, enabling a firm to
competitive advantage combined by
enter into new markets etc. Through it an
Michael Porter [6] together show better
organization can build a very strong
result under the impact of innovation,
relationship with its customers and
indicating that the use of innovation in
suppliers by offering better quality to
all competitive advantage dimensions will
customers and fulfilling their
create eventually much better
requirements. Through an organization can
performance for the organizations. [19]
create such a solid position and strict
competition that new players find unable 3. METHODOLOGY:
to enter into the circle.
This research used a qualitative
2.7 Collective Effect of Innovative descriptive approach to determine
Behaviour on above described whether or not social media plays a role
variables: in innovative work behavior for
competitive sector of strategic
As with the changing market environment
management. Interviews were taken from
Social Media has taken the place as an
19 CEOs and H.R managers of small firms
agent of competitiveness because it helps
that are dealing or participating in any
support competitive strategies. The new
social media adoption process in the
growing business environment cannot be
retail, financial services, and
met without emphasis on Strategic IS.
manufacturing sectors. It was made sure
[18]
that the respondents were involved in
Competition is the key to growth and strategy formulation for their firms and
survival. An organization must innovate firm itself actively used social media to
its strategies to create a defending policy represent itself. Most of the respondents
that cannot be attacked by opponents. chosen were on the basis of their
Competitiveness is also vital for alertness about changing trends,
establishing relationships with customers
Page 31
competition and emphasis on customer The study showed that everyone has its
feedback. own unique ability to think and this
shapes what they achieve. Some people
Appointments were made with CEOs and are more capable in risk taking and thus
owners of 11 small firms, boutiques and they can shape this ability into
their interviews were conducted. The opportunity.
interview had three sections: First
section covered inquiries approaches to Innovation in an organization primarily
select, support and develop innovative depends on the attitude and the culture
work behavior in organizations and ways defined by the manager/supervisor. The
to boost IWB [20].It also inquired about manager should first clarify the goals and
the barriers and catalysts for innovative keep them scheduled, keep himself
behaviors in organizations. The second updated with the trends and use outside
section included questions regarding the sources of ideas effectively, involve
competitive strategy used for meeting his/her team and suppliers for new ideas,
the challenges faced by the organizations provide incentives for innovation, should
[21]. The questions also made the conduct group meetings and knowledge
respondent give a brief comparison sharing and to normalize the excessive
between their firm and their competitor workload, develop deep customer
and their strategy to overcome it. The understanding. One of the employee
third section asked questions regarding quoted,” Innovative behavior depends on
role of Social Media used as a tool to how much space a manager/supervisor
interact with customers, analyzing the provides to his/her employees”.
external environment and competitor’s
ability through social media. [22] When it comes to competitive sector
employees think that innovation is
4. ANALYSIS: necessary for competitive sector. They
think it is critical for their business’
For the purpose of identifying some facts
successes. Although every firm has its
and collecting data samples concerning
own sector priorities and problems to
the study, specific variables were chosen.
look after, but competitive sector has its
The variables included: educational
own definite importance, organizations
degree, designation, and the current job
that fail to innovate eventually lose
position. The analysis was made by
ground to competitors and operate
collecting information through interviews
inefficiently.
from 19 CEOs of different organizations.
If an organization sticks to its own
strategic policies then it would not meet
In organizational terms innovation was the requirement of the market, as with
defined as the skill to show and bring the change of the time, new products
new ideas through one’s work. It pertains comes in the market, and attract people,
to new idea, process and product. The so there should be flexibility in strategic
valid approaches to select, support and policies. Nowadays more and more
develop innovative work behavior in competitors are coming in the market, so
organizations were found to be: it would not be beneficial to stick with
Resources availability, interlinked one's terms and conditions.
association, Freedom for ideas and
Identification of expertise for individuals.
Page 32
According to most of the managers, in Chart 1: Comparison of Social media

order to maintain the organization on the tools with other means of promotion
competitive edge, there must be
something to lead in the competitive
environment. Little competition can be a
Chart 1
healthy thing. It can also be both costly Facebook Bill boards
and disastrous if you aren't up to par with TV Advertisements
others in your particular business or
industry. The way an organization
handles the competition can directly
affect success or the failure of the 15%
company. As a company sees its
competitors ‘ products leading theirs in
the market, these executives recognize 27%
the need to become more and more 58%
involved in the management of the new
technology in the face of rapid change.
Moreover, the organization should keep a
close track of the requirements and
needs of the customers and alter their
58% of our respondents supported
products accordingly.
Facebook as the most important mean to
The role of social media is very vital in promote their organization.
promoting the organization. The most Comparatively the percentage of the
common and widely used social respondents who were in favour of TV
management tools in order to promote advertisements and billboards is quite
organization are Facebook, twitter, low.
newspapers, emails, Google etc.
Social media tools help to a large extent
Especially Facebook plays a vital role to
in the organization’s external SWOT
connect and share with the people all
analysis. Most of the CEOs were of the
around by creating Facebook pages and
view that through the feedback via social
advertising the products. Billboards are
media, the organizations are able to
also one of the most effective ways to
know which product of the organization is
attract the customers, the way you
better than the other products in the
represent your product in the market
market. A company may be able to know
through attractive models and best
their weak points and alter their products
photographers matters a lot. One
accordingly. It also assists the company
substantial fact is that billboard
to create new products reaching a
marketing is very efficient when it comes
competitive advantage and hence results
to cost. Moreover, TV advertisements
in the sale of the products on a wider
also help in promoting the products of an
scale letting the organization generate
organization.
more revenue. Social media can be used
to support a variety of strategic
objectives, including changing business
process at par to changing trends in the
market, creation of innovative
applications, having an insight of your
Page 33
competitor’s reputation: their strengths the literature on innovative behavior,

and weaknesses and using it for it’s the competitive advantage, porter's model
benefit of one’s own organization, links for competitive situations and role of
with business partners, suppliers and social media. From the analysis it was
customers, reduction of costs, acquiring revealed that it’s not only the
competitive intelligence, and others. employee’s commitment that affects the
innovative work behavior of an
Chart 2: What Strategic objectives does organization but it’s also the
social media helps to improve?
organizational innovation atmosphere
that assists the organization in achieving
Chart 2 tis goals.
Changing business process at par to changing On the basis of this, the paper puts
trends in the market.
forward some of the following
Creation of innovative applications. suggestions to promote innovative work
behaviors in competitive sector and
Having an insight of your competitor’s manage employee’s innovative behavior:
reputation. in order to encourage employee
Links with business partners,suppliers and innovative work behavior, the
customers e.t.c. organization should provide enough space
to the employees to think the solutions of
15% different problems by themselves rather
38% than burdening them with hectic routine.
16% Moreover, the effective stimulation from
the external environment like leadership
and motivation can boost the innovative
31%
work behavior to a large extent.
Innovation in an organization depends
38 % of our respondents were of the view solely on the culture defined by the
that changing business process at par to leader. The supervisor should keep a
changing trends in the market is the close track of the activities undergoing in
major area which is improved by using his organization and to promote team and
social media to promote the collaboration. By using the strategic
organization. management techniques to influence
innovative work behavior of the
Moreover 31% of them stated that social
organization like goal setting, planning,
media helps in improving the creation of
strategy formation and implementation
innovative applications.
and external and internal environmental
Similarly, 16% said that social media scanning the organization can achieve its
helps in having an insight of the goals.
competitor’s reputation. While 15% were
This research investigates the impact of
of the view that it helps improving the
innovative behavior in gaining sustainable
links with business partners.
competitive advantage for the
organizations actively linked with social
5. CONCLUSION
media. Results from the analysis showed
In this study we considered the opinion of that social media feedback highly
some of strategy makers and reviewed positive affected on the competitive
Page 34
advantage and innovative behavior. The [5] Mckinsey&Company, Perscpectives

feedback and information acquired on Digital Business.: McKinsey
through social media enables strategy Center for Business Technology,
makers to update knowledge and abilities 2012.
to gaining sustainable competitive
advantage in their work and that as a [6] Ginamarie Scott Michael D.
result, will provide competitive Mumford, "The Effectiveness of
advantage for the organization. Finally, it Creativity Training: A Quantitative
is deduced that one of the important Review," Creativity Research
factors in new challengeable business Journal, pp. 361-388, 1998.
environment is emphasis on improving
innovativeness in accordance to the [7] Albert H. Rubenstein, "Managing
feedback generated from social media. technology in the decentralized firm
," pp. 400-401, 1990.
6. ACKNOWLEDGMENT:
[8] Jeroen P.J. de Jong, "Innovative
A special gratitude to Sir Ch. Bilal Ahmed
Work Behavior: Measurement and Va
khan whose guidance was of great value.
l idat ion ," Scales, pp. 1-27, 2008.
[9] Neil Anderson, "The routinization of

innovation research: a constructively
critical review," Journal of
7. REFERENCES Organizational Behavior, pp. 147-
173, 2007.
[1] Dr Yvonne Brunetto Mr Matthew
Xerri, "The innovative behaviour of [10] Dr Azhar Kazmi, "Business Policy &
employees within a small to medium Strategic Management," Tata
sized," ANZAM, 2009. McGraw Hill Publi. Col Ltd, 2002.
[2] Muhammad Asim Tufail,Mohamad [11] Dr. Fareeha Zafar Syeda Ataat
Nizam Yusof Abu Hassan Abu Bakar, Zahra, "Strategic Management:
"Implementation of Strategic Executing and Crafting: Research
Management Practices," Pak. J. and Development Strategy in
Commer. Soc. Sci, pp. 140-154, Organizations ," Universal Journal of
2011. Education and General Studies, pp.
24-29, 2013.
[3] William Pasmore, "Developing a
Leadership Strategy A Critical [12] Kenneth R Andrews, "Product
Ingredient for Organizational Diversification and the Public
Success," Center of Creative Interest ," Harvard Business Review,
Leadership, pp. 10-22, 2004. 1951.
[4] Michael E Porter, "Clusters and the [13] Forest R. Fred. R. Davud and David,
new Economics of Competition ," "Strategic Management: Concepts
Harvard Business Review, pp. 77-90, and Cases – A Competitive Advantage
1998. Approach," Prentice Hall Publishing
Company, Upper Saddle River, N.J,
Page 35
2015. [22] J. W. T. a. P. M. Leonardi, "Social

Media Use in Organizations ,"
[14] Scott and Reginald A. G. O. Young COMMUNICATION YEARBOOK, pp.
Susanne G. Bruce, "Determinants of 143-189, 2012.
Innovative Behavior: A Path Model of
Individual Innovation in the [23] M.Hemmatfar,.
Workplace," The Academy of
Management Journal, pp. 580-607, [24] "Business Models, Business Strategy
1994. and Innovation," D. J.Treece, pp.
172-194, 2010.
[15] F. & Woodman, R.W. Yuan,
"Innovative behavior in the [25] "Competitive Advantage Audit
workplace: The role of performance Forum," Smart Advantage.
and image outcome expectations.,"
Academy of Management Journal,
2010.
[16] R. Duane Ireland, Robert Hoskisson

Michael Hitt, "Strategic
Management: Concepts:
Competitiveness and Globalization,"
Cengage Learning, 2010.
[17] R.D.I.R.H Micheal Hitt, "Strategic

Management: Concepts:
Competitiveness and Globalization,"
Cengage learning, 2010.
[18] M.Hemmatfar, "Competitive

Advantages and Strategic
Information Systems," International
Journal of business and
management, pp. 158-169, 2010.
[19] Abou-Moughli, "Impact of Innovation

on Realizing Competitive Advantage
in Banking Sector in Jordan,"
American Acadamic and Scholary
Research Journal, 2012.
[20] P. F. P. D. M. Kerrin,
"Characteristics & Behaviours of
Innovative People in Organisations ,"
NPRU, 2010.
[21] "The Small Business Strategy

Questionnaire," 2003.
Page 36
CFD Analysis of a Single Rotating Ducted Axial Fan and

Validation of Results by Integral Flow Analysis Technique
Muhammad Yousaf Iqbal1, Adeel Ansar2, M.Abdullah3
Dr. Sajid Hussain4, Manzar Masud5

Yousaf.iqbal120@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
Using CFD technique, an analysis was done to study the flow behavior in a ten bladed
ducted axial fan and to calculate flow rate, pressure, density, temperature and contours
both at inlet and outlet of ducted axial fan. The scaled modeling of fan was in ANSYS
workbench, Vista AFD, BLADGEN, TURBO GRID, and numerical simulation in CFX PRE and
CFX POST.
Results were validated by integral analysis using integral flow equations of fluid flow. The
effect of variation of different parameters such as the number of blades, RPM, flow rate
and inlet pressure was also studied. The number of blades was varied from 3 to 12 and
RPM were varied from 3600 to 7600 to study the effect on flow rate, pressure head.
Corresponding torque (power) and hence efficiency was also calculated. Back pressure was
varied and its effect was measured, particularly, the effect of back pressure on surge
characteristics was analyzed. The analysis was done on grid, composed of hexahedral
elements (structured mesh).
By the post processing counters, vectors, streamlines and vortice

drawn. Transient blade row analysis was also done to calculate results under rotational
animation of flow properties.
Keywords: CFD (Computational Fluid Dynamics), ANSYS, CFX, ducted axial flow fan,
numerical simulation, integral flow analysis techniques.
I. INTRODUCTION the deflection, flow gets two velocity

components: axial and tangential. Axial
Ducted axial flow fan[1] sucks and propels
velocity component is along the axis of
gas, air or vapor along its axis of rotation
rotation which is desired because it
by the action of rotor and is enclosed in a
moves air to/from the desired spaces.
duct. 1
While tangential velocity component can
Ducted axial flow fans, being incapable be converted into static pressure.
of developing high pressures[2], are
The single stage axial flow fans have
suitable for handling large flow rate of
rotating blades which implies dynamic
air at relatively lower pressure. These
action to induce lift[1] to air and to add
are cheaper and possess higher stage
efficiency and are widely used. The
operating principle of ducted axial flow
fans is simply deflection of air. Through 1,2,3 team members
4,5 supervisor and co-supervisor
Page 37
momentum so as to move it parallel to behaviour and to obtain the results. The

the shaft about which the blades rotate. analysis comprised of following steps.
The ducted axial flow fan is extensively (a) In the first step, an accurate and
used in a wide variety of engineering efficient model which was most
applications, ranging from small cooling suitable for meshing, was created
fans for electronic appliances to the fans in “ANSYS Workbench-15”. The
used in wind tunnels and aircraft ducted geometry was created by using
fans. VISTA AFD for providing input data
to the ANSYS and then geometry
Being a major component of aerospace was created by using
technology[3] it must be accurately „BLADEGEN
designed and tested. 1).
Numerical investigations[4] have been (b) Discretization or meshing of
performed by using CFD techniques to geometry for the CFD analysis by
quantify accurately the performance of using finite elements methods
axial fans and their flow characteristics. (FEM) was done in “TURBO GRID”.
In this, the hexahedral elements
With the expressive computer capability (structured mesh) was created for
and extensive development in the CFD analysis.
simulation flied, CFD[5] has secured a (c) After meshing domains were
remarkable role in the field of design and defined, boundary conditions
analysis. were set, i.e., inlet mass flow,
exit pressure, rotating part and
For the CFD analysis, model is created in stationary walls in CFX pre[6] as
any CAD software. If CAD model is shown in (Figure 2).
created correctly only then it can
account for the complex flows in
equipment. CFD models for ducted axial
fans have been used to analyze the flow
behavior and characteristics. The models
provide sufficiently accurate results over
a range of operating conditions, which
are not possible using conventional
methods.
In this study, CFD technique was used to Figure 1 CAD Model of Ducted Axial Fan
analyze the flow passing through a Single
Stage Ducted Axial Fan. The objective
was to analyze the flow behavior through
Single Stage Ducted Axial Fan, evaluate
pressure, density, velocity, flow rate,
temperature and validate results with
integral flow analysis techniques.
II. METHODOLOGY Figure 2 Computational Domain of Fan

CFD analysis was done in ANSYS
WORKBENCH-15 to analyze the flow (d) At the end, simulation was run.
Solver applies basic fluid
Page 38
mechanics equations (Navier III. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

[6]
Stokes equations) as shown In the post processing, CFD results were
below: obtained in the form of streamlines,
vector contours, animations and plots.
Equation of Continuity:
Results were also obtained through Macro
⁄ ( ) calculator at different locations and then
(1) compared with integral flow techniques.
Following are the results from post
Equation of Energy: processing.
⁄ ( )
(2)
Equation of Momentum:
(3)
Solver solved these equations by iterative

process and gives solution with minor
assumptions like ideal and dry air at Figure 4 Meridional Pressure Contour
standard atmospheric pressure, zero from Hub to Shroud
reference pressure.
It is concluded from (Figure 4) that there
The solution output in the form of is negative pressure at the inlet side
velocity streamlines is shown in(Figure 3) because of cavitation produced by fan.
There is a higher pressure at exit because
The solution was obtained under of energy addition.Turbulence also
following input conditions increase from hub to shroud due to
increase of blade velocity from hub to
• Turbulence model-k-ε turbulence
shroud.
model with standard wall
function. (Figure 5) shows the pressure distribution
• Temperature – 300 K over the blade surface, which shows that
• Flow media- air pressure is higher at the tip of blades
• Solution method- SIMPLE first while lessor at the hub.
order upwind
• Meshing tetrahedral structural
Grid
Figure 5 Pressure Distribution over Hub

Figure 3 Velocity Streamlines of Fan and Blades
Page 39
Temperature falls down from the inlet to

fan because of suction effect of fan then
it rises at outlet because of turbulence
(disturbed region) as shown in (Figure 8).
From this comparison one infers that as

RPM increases temperature at exit also
increases linearly because of higher
Figure 6 Temperature Distribution over turbulence.
Hub and Blades
(Figure 6) shows temperature variation

over the blade surface. Temperature is
maximum at the tip.
Figure 9 Axial Velocity vs Duct Length

Figure 7 Pressure Variation from Inlet to
Outlet There is minor increase in axial velocity
from the inlet to fan entrance because of
Static pressure from inlet to entrance suction effect of fan. Then it rises
of fan drops and creates negative suddenly across fan because of addition
pressure due to cavitation produced of energy, at outlet it again falls due to
by fan. Across the fan, there is jump turbulence as shown in (Figure 9). From
in static pressure. It again increases this comparison one evaluates that as
slightly due to turbulence and wake RPM increases, the axial velocity at
region as shown in (Figure 7). outlet also increases.
Density remains constant throughout the

duct at specific inlet conditions. No
matter what the RPM of fan is, it remains
constant. The reason for this is that
Ducted Axial Fan belongs to
dynamic/momentum displacement pumps
category
Figure 8 Temperature vs Duct Length
Page 40
Angular Momentum Equation:
( ) ̇ (
) ̇ (6)
Energy Equation:
̇ ̇ ̇ ( )
̇ ( ) (7)
V. COMPARISON OF RESULTS
Figure 10 Pressure vs Blade Cord Comparion shows 8-27% variations of
results. The reason for this variation is
From Figure 10 it is observed that there
that both these are two different
is more pressure on the suction side of
approaches. Also the mathematical
blade because of air stagnating on it but
analysis was based on steady state flow
it ‟s
much lesser at the propelling side.
but actual flow is turbulent.
IV. INTEGRAL FLOW ANALYSIS
TECHNIQUE[7]
This is a fluid flow problem solving
techniques by applying continuity, linear
momentum, angular momentum and
energy equations according to Reynolds
transport theorem on given control
volume across which mass, momentum
and energy can flow (Figure 11)
Figure 12 Backward Force Vs Flow Rate
Figure 11 Control Volume across Fan
Integral flow equations of fluid flow are:
Continuity of Mass:
̇ (4)
Linear Momentum Equation: Figure 13 Inlet Axial Velocity Vs Flow

Rate
(∫ ) ( )
( ̇ ) (5)
Page 41
produced by fan and more energy is

added to fluid.
Number of blades effects the flow

rate. At much lessor number of blades,
the cavitation is much less so flow rate is
lesser. At much higher number of blades,
the flow rate also decreases due to lesser
spacing which provide passage to flow.
Figure 14 Outlet Axial Velocity Vs Flow
At lower flow rates the efficiency
Rate
is less because fans are designed for
higher flow rates but If these are
operated at very very high flow rates
efficiency decrease because stage
efficiency is limited against flow rate.
The CFD results are satisfactory

compared to published theoretical
results.
VII. REFERENCES
Figure 15 Torque Required Vs Flow Rate [1] S M Yahya, Turbines Compressors and
Fans, 2nd Edition.
[2] John F. Douglas, Janusz M. Gasiorek,

John A. Swaffield, Fluid Mechanics, 5th
Edition.
[3] Malcolm claus, 11th march 2014,

Future Aerodynamic and Propulsion and
Computational Techniques, Chris
Esionwu-k1114745.
[4] D. Almazo, C. Rodriguez, and M.

Toledo. Modern Layout and Design
Figure 16 Pressure Vs Flow Rate Strategy for Axial Fans. Erlangen 2009.
VI. CONCLUSIONS [5] P Nageswara Rao, CAD/CAM Principles

and Applications, 2nd edition.
The aerodynamics characteristics
of ducted axial fan exhibit similar [6] ANSYS. ANSYS Turbo Manuals 14.5.
behavior both for CFD analysis and for
integral flow analysis techniques results. [7] Frank M White, Fluid Mechanics, 6th
The little bit variation in results is due to Edition.
two different techniques to solve.
At lower RPMs, the flow rate is

lesser than at higher RPMs. This is
because at higher RPM, more cavitation is
Page 42
Design and fabrication of Vertical Takeoff & Landing RC Aircraft (VTOL)

Furqan Rasool, Ibtisam Arshad, Muhammad Uzair, Sameer Yousaf
Furqan.rasool-s12@wecuw.edu.pk
Supervisor
Chairperson Mechanical Department
Col® Hafiz Sibghat Ullah Fazil
hodme@wecuw.edu.pk
ABSTRACT
VTOL is an aircraft that can take off, Hover 1. AIM OF STUDY
& land vertically. The aim of this project is The purpose of this study is to design and
to design & fabricate the aircraft which will fabricate a prototype VTOL aircraft that
be able to take -off vertically just like the should be able to generate vertically
helicopter but will have a design like an enough lift for ground takeoff. This
aircraft to achieve characteristics of a generation of lift by the prototype will help
standard aircraft. Two rotors will be used in understanding the analogy of flight
to generate the vertical lift which will be dynamics of VTOL aircrafts. Moreover this
placed at wingtips. The rotors will be able will help us in understanding the stability
to tilt i.e. they could change their direction concepts behind the modern VTOL, as
90° and 180° through rotation. Rotors are modern VTOLs are challenged with the
coupled with motors which are powered by issues regarding their stability in hoovering
battery. The wings are given an angle of 8 phase so this study is the key to the answer
degrees from horizontal in order to of the general stability issues &
maintain its center of gravity for requirements. Since VTOLs are capable of
stabilization when hovering. Flight performing tasks that are not possible for
controller is used which controls its other aircrafts, thus this study serves to
stabilization for vertical as well as increase the awareness of VTOL in modern
horizontal flight. Structure is made of Balsa industry. This detailed study helped in
Wood accompanied with carbon fiber. understanding of the aircraft vertical and
horizontal flight aerodynamics.
Keywords: VTOL, Angle of Attack, Dihedral.
Page 43
2. PRACTICAL GROUNDING: THEORY & 2.3 Wing Design & Selection:

DESIGN
As far as wing selection is concerned
The designing phase was quite delegate as following parameters are catered ; Number
stability was the prime concern so selection of the wings, Vertical position relative to
of different parameters regarding the the fuselage (high, mid, or low wing), Cross
aerodynamics of VTOL were to be taken section (or airfoil), Aspect ratio (AR), Taper
very sensitively by applying the design ratio (λ), Mean Aerodynamic Chord (MAC or
methodology as illustrated below: C), Span (b), Twist angle (or washout) (αt),
Sweep angle (Λ), Dihedral angle (Γ), High
2.1 Mission Profile: lifting devices such as flap.
Mission profile [1] is chalked out on the basis 2.3.1 Number of wings:
of design specifications. This is the exact
mission that the aircraft will fly on the final First of all one has to select the no. of
day. This mission profile will serve as a wings. There are usually 1-3 number of
reference point for the further analysis and wings, Monoplane, Biplane, Tri-wing. As all
optimization process the modern planes are monoplane i.e.
having one wing. Therefore monoplane
category is used In VTOL. The one wing
having both right & left portions are most
suitable in modern aircrafts.
2.3.2 Wing Vertical Location:

Second parameter for selection of wing is
the location of wing with respect to the
Fig. 2.1 vertical position. With this perspective
following options are there. These are
2.2 Weight Estimation: shown below:
Weight has a very critical role when it
comes to flying because lift is generated to
cancel the effect of weight & makes the
aircraft fly in the air. After weight
calculation, one has to give a certain power
along with the required design in order to
make aircraft fully functional.
Table 2.2: Weight calculation of VTOL
Components Weight
Air Frame 700g
Servos 200g
Motors 280g
Batteries 400g
Heavy duty servos 120g
Fig 2.2
Miscellaneous (glue, 100g
tape, wiring)
Total Weight 1800g = 1.8kg
Page 44
High wing is selected for VTOL aircraft. The increment in dihedral angle basically height
descriptions along the advantages of the of wings are increased. In this way more
high wing are mentioned below. distance to center of gravity is achieved. In
case of instability or gusty wind due to
2.3.3 Airfoil Selection: reasonable distance from COG, the aircraft
tends to come back to its initial state.
Airfoil is no doubt heart of the aircraft. It’s
just the magic of the airfoil that makes
dead weight reach the skies. Selecting the 2.5 Calculations:
correct airfoil is a very complicated
decision because of the impact it can have Calculated results for VTOL are as follows:
on the aircraft performance as well as
weight and manufacturing process. An Parameter Result Equation
airfoil selection criterion is defined and on
Stall Speed 20.137 2 ×W / S
that the best airfoil is picked. 2
Vstall = α
V stall m/s ρ ∞ × C L ,max
2.3.4 Reasons For Selecting Clark Y: Coefficient 0.333 2 ×W / S
Lift C L CL =
Clark-Y Airfoil is selected since the aircraft ρ ∞ × Vstall
2
being designed is VTOL & a low speed Lift 6.524N C L × S

aircraft therefore Clark Y is used as it is
most suitable for low speed aircraft. Coefficient 0.020 C D = C D, o + KC L 2
Moreover as this project is first of its nature of Drag C D
Drag 3.91N D = 1/2×ρ×V2×C D ×A
being done on this level so basically its
structure is similar to trainer aircraft, for CL / CD 16.685 CL / CD
trainer aircraft Clark Y is preferred. The
construction of Clark Y is easy and ass this (L / D) max 16.395 (L/D) max =1/(4×K×C D,o )
0.5
aircraft is a propeller aircraft so the flat
bottom in Clark Y eliminates the complexity Pitching 0.497N M = 1 / 2 × ρ ∞ × V 2 × Cm × S × c
of angles when it comes to the placement Moment m CW
of propellers. Wing 84.58N W/S
Loading /m2
Thrust 17.6N T=D

(V)
Power 48.003 P R =T R V
Required W
Fig. 2.3
Table 2.1
2.4 Dihedral wing (VTOL):
2.6 Simulation (Pro-E):
As the aircraft is VTOL & it has to start up &
generate lift through vertical flight. During For the better understanding of forces
vertical flight one has to cater the acting on the airfoil during flight, we
equilibrium & great amount of stability in perform three dimensional simulation of our
the hovering phase. For this the dihedral
chosen airfoil (Clark-Y). These simulations
angle is given. Dihedral angle highly
are performed at an angle of attack α=4°
influences the dihedral effect. By
and speed V= 14m/s
Page 45
2.6.1 Wing Internal Structure:
2.6.4 Velocity Structure:
Fig. 2.4
2.6.2 Fuselage Structure:

Fig. 2.7
2.6.5 Temperature Analysis:
Fig. 2.5
2.6.3 Pressure Analysis:
Fig. 2.8
3.0 FABRICATION:
Following steps are taken for the successful
fabrication of VTOL:
1) Initial Idea about VTOL
Fig. 2.6 2) 2D sketch of VTOL and Modelling of VTOL
on software
Page 46
3) Manufacturing of body (wing, tail, As this is a prototype & upon augmentation

fuselage etc.) it could serve the following purposes
4) Cutting of straight parts is done before  VTOL can provide accessibility to the
curves and tapered parts troops where terrain is harsh or even
5) Choosing Airfoil (Clark-Y) in army compounds.
6) Construction of Airfoil  It will free aircraft from the
7) Construction of ribs, spar, frame of limitation of runway e.g. cratered
airfoil runways
8) Sheeting of Balsa on skeleton shape of  It can also be made & used for
airfoil drones as in quad-copter but it will
9) Construction of Fuselage, both have more speed just like a plane.
stabilizers, rudder, elevator and ailerons.  It could be used provide surveillance
10) Monokote is applied at all manufactured by hovering over the area.
parts using digital heating iron to resist  It can provide more safety by using
heat and water. the traits of a plane as helicopters
11) Installation of electronic components are the leading cause of death in
(motors, speed controllers, flight rescue operations.
controllers, servos etc.)  In modern warfare two things i.e.
12) Assembly of all parts mobility & air superiority plays
13) Testing of plane critical part & VTOL can provide
both of these.
3.1 2D Sketch (AutoCAD): 4.2 Future Aspects of VTOL:

Following augmentations could be done in
VTOL;
 Battery could be replaced with an
engine.
 Duct fans could be used as they are
more efficient in generation of lift.
 Thrust could be produced with the
help of jet engines.
 Instead of tilt rotor mechanism, tilt
wing can also be applied with
special concern for avoiding aircraft
stall.
 Propellers size can be increased to
assist in more lift generation at less
thrust.
Fig. 3.1
5.0 CONCLUSION:
4.0 INTERPRETATION AND SIGNIFICANCE
The paper serves to understand the
OF THE STUDY
complicated fabrication, operation and
significance of a vertically takeoff and
4.1 Applications of VTOL: landing RC aircraft. An aircraft with the
Page 47
ability of Vertical Takeoff & Landing is

developed. The method used for
transformation of vertical to horizontal
flight is by tilting of rotors gradually &
ultimately gaining the angle of 180 Degrees
for maximum speed in horizontal flight The
defined Altitude, Endurance, Speed along
with the ability to hoover in vertical flight
are all accomplished successfully, thus
eliminating the need of runways and
providing mobility & air superiority.
6.0 REFERENCES:
[1] Author, Raymer Aircraft design by

Raymer Book
[2]http://www.airfieldmodels.com/informa
tion_source/math_and_science_of_model_a
ircraft/rc_aircraft_design/plotting_airfoils/
about_airfoils.htm
[3]
http://wiki.kerbalspaceprogram.com/wiki/
Center_of_lift
[4] https://www.flyingfoam.com
Page 48
ENERGY ANALYSIS OF SEASONAL AIR CONDITIONING DEMAND OF ALL

INCOME CLASSES USING BOTTOM UP MODEL IN PAKISTAN
Saba Arif1, Anam Nadeem2, Shahid Khalil3
P P P P P
1
P Department of Mechanical and Aeronautical engineering,
P
University Of Engineering and Technology Taxila
Email1: sabaarif50@gmail.com,
3TU U3T
2
P
Email2: anamnadeem139@gmail.com,
3TU U3T
3
P
Email3: Shahid.khalil@uettaxila.edu.pk
3TU U3T
ABSTRACT
Currently, energy crisis are taking serious attention. Globally, industries and building are
major share takers of energy. 72% of total global energy is consumed by residential
houses, markets and commercial building. Additionally, in appliances Air conditioners are
major consumer of electricity; about 60% energy is used for cooling purpose in houses due
to HVAC units.
Energy demand will aid in determining what changes will be needed whether it is
estimation of required energy for households or instituting conservation measures.
Bottom up model is one of the most famous methods for forecasting. In current research
bottom up model of air conditioners energy consumption in all income classes in
comparison with seasonal variation and hourly consumption is calculated.
By comparison of energy consumption of all income classes by usage of air conditioners

total consumption of actual demand and current availability can be seen.
Key words: Energy consumption, air conditioners, bottom up model, forecasting,

conservation measure
Page 49
1. INTRODUCTION based technique for cooling load

calculation in comercial offices [10].
Worldwide, the increasing number of
traditional air-conditioning units has 2. METHODOLOGY
caused a significant increment in
demand for basic energy resources. As a Increasing trend in electricity demand is
result, remarkable increase in demand due to increased residential demand. A
of electric power has been occurred, combined increment in usage of
which results in risk of blackouts [1] A. electricity in residential sector and
Fouda et al forecasted a model for cooling requirement during the summer is
cooling load calculation for household occurring now a days. A model is required
buildings. A comparative study is also for estimation of future electricity
developed between this model and demand and shortages. Also, this model
ASHRAE standards and results show this should be able to forecast how much
model calculate results more accurately energy is needed in every season of year
and effectively [2].Lin Duanmu et al for residential sector. Bottom up model
used Hourly Cooling Load Factor Method is solution of such problems. Major
(HCLFM) in order to predict building consumers of electricity in residential
cooling load. Results show this method sector are air conditioners. So,
can provide accurate estimation for Without an accurate past study and
large scale house hold buildings estimation future picture may result in
[3]. Abdulla if et al. Optimized, HVAC high shortages, down fall in energy and
load consumption in residential thermal unexpected high costs.A Precise
sector. Also, He developed regression model always require sufficient a data
numerical networks for this for simulation of results, without these
optimization. The results showed for results forecasting is unreliable.
optimization of thermal load NN is a However, survey availabale data is
powerful tool in building sector if, always insuffiecient in many terms which
considered parameter is only external lead toward number of theoretical and
temperature [4]. Fernando Simon et al. practical problems. In current research
use transfer function method for Bottom up model is established for the
calculating thermal loads. Additionally, estimation of total consumption of
validation was done by ASHRAE standard energy by air conditioners.
140 [5]. Mehmet Azmi et al. did a
Fig1. shows bottom up model of all
comparative study between cooling
income classes and energy consumption
loads and outdoor design conditions.
summation for the total estimation of
Additionally, at different outdoor
consumed power.
conditions different cooling coil
capacities were generated and
compared [6]. Tingyao Chen et al.
developed a method for designing of Energy Consumption by All Classes
different weather conditions for
calculation of peak cooling loads [7].
Wong et al. contributed in studying and
developing new model to design and
simulate Monte Carlo simulation for
occupant load profiles [8]. Fernando et UPPER MID LOWER
al gave a new approach for uncertainty
ELITE MIDDLE DLE MIDDLE POOR
in calculation of peak loads. This
approach was compared with previous
models and a significant development in
sensitivity analysis was developed [9].
Jenkins et al developed a simulation
Page 50
Figure 1: Integration of energy highest demand while poor is at lowest

consumption by all income classes into peak.
total consumption
It can be seen clearly shows that by

integrating usage of energy by all income
classes a model can be established for
total demand of power requirement in air
conditioning sector.
In current research, Data is gathered by

the survey from all the classes. Hourly
consumption of AC electricity usage is
calculated. Furthermore this hourly
consumption is integrated into seasonal
estimation, which will eventually gives
yearly actual demand and gap between Figure 3: Clear graphical view of
supply and demand. intermediate season demand of AC
3. RESULTS Fig4. Show variation of demand of
Fig2. Shows summer season demand of all electricity in winter season. Here also
income classes. Here consumption greatly weather effects a lot as there is no need
depends upon affordability factor. Elite of AC in current season. But according to
class have highest affordability factor the division of months sometimes need
while poor class lowest. By keeping in occur. Winter season comprises on
mind this factor greatly effects the months of November, December and
consumption of particular income group. January.
In seasonal variation lower middle and Also major factor of demand is income.
poor class have no AC demand as they Poor class have less income so energy
cannot afford it. Elite class has highest demand is also less while in elite class
demand, on second no demand of lower demand and income both are high.
middle class comes and on last middle
class needs it.
Figure 2: Shows summer season

demand of all income classes
Fig3.have clears graphical view of

intermediate season demand of AC. In
intermediate season another factor
comes which is weather effects. In
intermediate season weather is moderate
in Pakistan so already demand of AC is
Figure 4: Shows variation of demand of
less.
electricity in winter season
Table 1 shows seasonal energy

But it cannot be denied the effect of consumption of all classes. As summer
income. Income level highly emphasize season comprises on May- September,
on demand and usage. Elite class have winter is from December to march and
intermediate have months of April,
Page 51
October and November, in first stage of Secondly energy demand is highly

research hourly consumption is dependent on affordability factor. Elite
calculated and from those results class have highest affordability factor
calculation of seasonal demand is which means this class put major share of
intended. demand value in to total stream line of
demand.
Seasonal variation also gives impact on

Table 1: Seasonal energy consumption energy demand of AC. In summer season
of income classes requirement is high in comparison with
winter season. So demand curve have
highest value in summer while lowest in
winter.
5. RECOMMENDATIONS
There is no realistic distribution of supply
and demand of electricity. No of
household are greatest in middle class
case but energy demand is not according
to no of households in Pakistan. So if
Fig5. Have completely graphical view of elite class take highest share of
calculated results of Table 1. Also, it electricity in AC demand there should be
shows that demand graph have a cut off value above which penalization
decreasing trend as income will will occur on this class
decrease. Usage of AC is greatest in elite
class while lowest in poor class. Also, elite class has high income which
means they can afford greater no of AC
than any other income class. So tariff
duty should be high in this class.
4. REFERENCES
[1] Umberto Desideri, Stefania Proietti,
Paolo Sdringol, Solar-powered cooling
systems: Technical and economic analysis
on industrial refrigeration and air-
conditioning applications, Available
online 20 February 2009, contents lists
available at Science Direct Website,
www.sciencedirect.com.
Figure 5: Seasonal AC consumption [2] Kulkarni K., P.K. Sahoo and Mishra
(kWh) of income classes M., “Optimization of cooling load for a
lecture theatre in a composite climate in
4. CONCLUSION India” Energy and Buildings, 2011; 43;
1573-1579.
Current research was actually based on
real survey results of energy consumption
[3] Suziyana M. D., Nina S. N., Yusof T.
and analysis of AC demand. According to
M. and. Basirul A. A. S., “Analysis of Heat
the results it can be inferred that
Gain in Computer Laboratory and
whenever income class changes energy
Excellent Centre by using CLTD/CLF/SCL
demand will also change.
Method” Procedia Engineering, 2013; 53;
655 – 664.
Page 52
[4] Suqian Y., Jiaping L., Ge Xiangrong

and Xiang H., “The Research of Cooling
Load and Cooling Capacity Calculation
Methods of Spinning Workshop” Procedia
Environmental Sciences, 2011; 11; 597 –
603. 82
[5] Foudaa A., Melikyan Z., Mohamed

M.A. and Elattar H.F., “A modified
method of calculating the heating load
for residential buildings” Energy and
Buildings, 2014; 75; 170–175.
[6] Duanmu L., Wang Z., Zhai Z.and

Xiangli L., “A simplified method to
predict hourly building cooling load for
urban energy planning” Energy and
Buildings, 2013; 58; 281–291
[7] Christian A., Gueymard and

Thevenard D., “Monthly average clear-sky
broadband irradiance database for
worldwide solar heat gain and building
cooling load calculations” Solar Energy,
2009; 83; 1998–2018.
[8] Westphal,F.S. and Roberto L., “The

use of simplified weather data to
estimate thermal loads of non-residential
buildings” Energy and Buildings, 2004;
36; 847-854.
[9] Tingyao Chen and Zhun Yu, “A

statistical method for selection of
sequences of coincident weather
parameters for design cooling load
calculations” Energy Conversion and
Management, 2009; 50; 813–821
[10] Meral Ozel, “Determination of

optimum insulation thickness based on
cooling transmission load for building
walls in a hot climate” Energy Conversion
and Management, 2013; 66; 106–114.
Page 53
Design and Implementation of Smart Bi-Directional Energy Meter to measure Electrical

Parameters
Mian Farhan Ullah1, M Sami uz Zaman2, M. Ali Raza3, Abdur Rahim4, Ijaz Ahmad5, M. Faizan
P P P P P P P P P P
Mehdi6 and Nadia Kalsoom7

P P P
1
PDepartment of Electrical Engineering
P

mianfarkhan61@gmail.com
34TU U34T
ABSTRACT
This paper presents design and implementation of Smart Bi-Directional Energy Meter for
homes or industries to measure import and export of energies between consumer and
distribution utility. This is due to the acute Energy crisis and depletion of fossil fuels faced by
humanity, whereby consumers are attracted and encouraged to adopt Renewable Energy
Systems such as Solar Photovoltaic (PV Panel), Wind Energy and others or may be a Steam
Plant in industry. The main idea of the project is that consumer is allowed to generate
Electricity from its own on-site generating system and at the same time it is also connected
to Grid (Smart Grid); a system known as Net Metering system. In Net Metering system,
Consumer utilizes Energy from Utility and its own Renewable Energy Source in ON-Peak hours.
In OFF-Peak hours, the consumer supplies surplus on-site generated energy to electric utility.
Bi-directional Energy meter is accurate, precise, based on actual readings, efficient and
intelligent in measurements with control over bill calculation (unlike traditional meters). This
paper also proposes the two way communication between consumer and utility due to meter
by GSM, which diminishes meter reading issues by intelligently calculating the bills once in a
month and informing the consumer and distribution company of the relevant consumer
information, which is helpful in controlling, power quality improvement, determining nature
of Load and reduction of bill.
Keywords: Bi-Directional Energy Meter, Smart Meter, Net Metering, GSM, Import Export
Energy Meter
1. INTRODUCTION every country has crossed this midpoint as

shown in Figure 1.
Electricity consumption and utilization has
increased exponentially in the last 3 years
and is expected to double in the next 10-15
years. Due to depletion and high pricing of
fossil fuel, Global warming issues, Load
shedding and high billing of Conventional
Sources, the world is now switching toward
Renewable / Alternative / Non-Conventional
Energy Resources.
Before 1980, there was no need of

adaptation of Renewable Energy System for
power generation. But now according to
expert analysis, the midpoint of fossil fuel Figure 1: Campbell prediction graph
consumption has passed in 1999. Almost
Page 54
That is the reason why the world is now To achieve high level performance, Energy
switching to Renewable Energy Systems, by must be properly distributed and managed.
which the consumer will generate its own On-site and decentralized energy generation
electricity and they will use the supply from should be distributed without transmission
own on-site generation plant and electric to reduce losses.
utility (Grid). So during ON-Peak period,
consumer utilizes its own generated energy Pakistan is facing a lot of problems
plus energy from utility. Similarly, during regarding insufficient supply, poor quality,
OFF-Peak period, consumer demand is low poor protection, lack of communication
and generated energy is high. So it will between consumer and utility, awareness,
deliver energy to grid. The back power flow mismanagement, continuity of supply,
is also known as reverse power flow. There reliability, huge line losses, and accessibility
is need of a meter which measures this to electricity and theft of energy. On-grid
energy import and export between consumer (Smart Grid) will resolve these problems and
and electric utility. Bi-directional energy make an existing system more reliable and
meter is used for this purpose. efficient [3].
To encourage production and use of

renewable energy, NEPRA (National Electric
Power Regulatory Authority, Pakistan) in
2015 approved the rules and regulation of
net metering, according to which every
consumer can generate electricity from
renewable source such as solar and wind,
and they can also sell it to the energy
distribution companies [7].
By this rule, the consumers are encouraged

to produce electricity and will be credited in
response by payment, thus a reduction in
Electricity bill only if the consumer uses bi-
directional meter. This meter will measure
Figure 2: Percentage of electricity energy in both cases: when consumer
generated from renewable energy utilizes power from grid (they are producing
(Countries in 2014) less energy and their consumption is high)
Use of Alternative energy resources along and also when supplying power to grid (they
with conventional resources can help are producing more energy and their
overcome energy crisis. On-Grid system is consumption is low). Smart Bi-directional
better solution to energy crisis and it Energy Meter is the main component of Net
encourages consumer to participate in metering System (Smart Grid System). It is
energy regulation. more precise, reliable, and efficient than
traditional energy meters and it also enable
Usage of alternate resources can entail the communication between consumer and
many problems and difficulties. In Smart Distribution Company as shown in Figure 3.
Grid mechanism energy is distributed among
consumer through proper algorithms, thus
avoiding this issue.
Page 55
one meter which can measure current

flowing in both direction. It is unlike feed-
in-tariff which requires two meters for its
operation.
The policy of every country and company is

different regarding billing. Generally,
monthly bill or bill after some specific
interval is formulated such that the export
energy units are subtracted from import
Figure 3: Block Diagram of Net Metering units. And the resultant units are multiplied
System
with unit rates in order to form net tariff.
According to this philosophy, consumer is
billed at the end of every month for the net Net metering is different from feed-in tariff
energy utilized. All net metering system is because it requires only one meter for
connected to grid, and it will deliver excess measurement, which is bi-directional energy
supply to grid and will credit according to meter. Figure 4 has some details.
rules and regulation.
Net metering system is facing some issues

too, which belong to those countries whose
economy depends on profit from electricity
generation. A couple of these are:
• Installation of on-site private power

plant reduces the need of main or
central power plant. Government
power plant produces electricity and
supplies it to consumer thus earning
a profit for them in the process,
which is not present in net metering.
• As the profit is distributed among
Figure 4: Working of Net Metering System
utility and consumer, this can have
adverse effects on country’s 1.2. Smart Grid
economy. This paper shall propose a
A power system that consists of electricity
solution to this issue too.
generation, transmission and distribution is
1.1. Net Energy Metering known as Smart Grid. Smart grid saves
energy by load management and energy
Let us go through the fundamentals of the
regulation. Smart meters are used in smart
subject. Net energy metering is a service in
grids that intelligently perform tasks of
which consumer utilizes the Energy supplied
measurement, control, monitoring and
from electric utility plus from its own on-
communication. Smart Bi-directional Energy
site electricity generating system in peak-
Meter is used to measure both import and
ON hours. In peak-OFF hours it gives back its
export of energies. The instantaneous load
own surplus generated electricity to electric
monitor data and schedule data will be sent
utility. Net metering is done through net
to consumer and electric utility by Meter.
energy meter (also known as Bi-directional
According to these data sets, consumer can
energy meter). Net metering requires only
Page 56
reduce consumption, thus reducing the bills. database in which monitored data is stored
Normally, Meter readers get readings from and it can be accessed when needed. Smart
traditional energy meters. There are more meter enables the automatic calculation of
chances of human error in getting measured electric bills using this database [2].
data, error during calculating bill and error
after printing bills. A Smart meter can
intelligently calculate bill after every
month. At the end of every month the
electric utility will be sent, at the latest
unit rate, to an energy meter which
calculates electricity bill.
1.3. Electric Energy Meter (Uni-

Directional Energy Meter)
As a comparison, we now go through what a

Uni-directional meter is. Electric Meter is a
device or instrument that measures the
utilization of amount of electrical power or
energy by load (domestic, commercial,
industrial, government, municipal, traction
loads, or different electrical devices).
Electricity suppliers or Electric utilities use
these energy meters on consumer side to
measure the energy supplied to consumer
and for billing purposes. They are read once Figure 5: Block Diagram of Energy Meter
every month. Meters are standardized or Electro-mechanical energy meters were
calibrated in billing unit usually in kilowatt used to prevent tampering and detect theft.
hours (kWh) [1]. For this purpose a backstops mechanism was
used. There must be two electromechanical
Traditional energy meter is installed at
consumer side and at the end of every energy meters for net metering, one for
import of energy and other for export of
month, a meter reader notes the units
energy. But some electromechanical energy
consumed. These units are multiplied with
meters are not equipped with the backstops
existing unit rates to calculate monthly bill.
mechanism, which causes meter to run in
It may be in the form of printed paper or
online billing payment system. In these reverse direction in case of exporting
energy. Due to this the electric utility
Traditional Digital Energy Meters there is no
such facility of instantaneous energy charges the customer (Incorrect reading of
Meter) for shortfall. This is also called back
monitoring and reading system, without
billing [4] [6].
consumer to visit their meter. These meters
are mostly installed on wall of homes or A Smart Meter can help avoid these issues.
offices, where there are more chances of
human and systematic error. There is need 1.4. Bi-directional Energy Meter (Net
of a system which instantaneously monitors Energy Meter Or Net Meter)
energy and informs consumer as well as
electric utility about monitored statistics. Bi-directional energy meter is a smart
Energy monitoring system consists of electronic device which can measure the
Page 57
reverse power flow. A device which This meter is able to measure and calculate;
measures both the energy imported from
grid to the consumer and energy exported to 2.1. Project Objectives
the grid from consumer source (Renewable The Meter shall have following
energy source). Bi – directional meter is a specifications:
smart electronic device which can measure
energy in both-directions. • Measurement of Apparent power:
Imported, Exported and Net
• Power flow from utility to consumer • Measuring Energy: Imported,
• Power flow from consumer to utility Exported and Net
• Measuring Current: Imported,
1.4.1. Advantages of Bi-directional Exported and Net Voltages of both
energy meter Sources
• Encourages the consumer to take • Introduction of Real Time Clock
part in energy regulation (RTC) to access time and date
• Reduce bills • Showing the measured data on LCD
• Enable communication between display
consumer and utility • Incorporation of a GSM module: To
• Improve power quality enable Bi-directional communication
• Increase system efficiency between consumer and Distribution
utility
2. PROPOSED METHODOLOGY • Automatic Bill Calculation
This paper presents the design and • Load Management & Monitoring
implementation of SBEM (Smart Bi-
Directional Energy Meter). This is an open 2.2. Control unit
source hardware, which provides easy Control unit consists of Arduino Mega 2560.
interfacing of Hardwires with Arduino (Brain Arduino is interfaced with Real time Clock to
of Meter). The SBEM is consists of certain access time and date. Other components
units such as Measuring and calculating unit, include GSM Mobile SIM (900A), LCD, Zero
Switching unit, Memory Storing unit and Cross Detectors, Voltage and current sensors
Communication unit (GSM module). and Relay circuit.
2.3. Voltage and Current

Measurement
The basic electrical quantities to calculate
Energy are Voltage and Current. The voltage
is measured by either Potential Transformer
or Potential Divider with Opto-coupler to
isolate high Voltage circuit from low Voltage
circuit. A voltage divider is an electronic
circuit that converts large voltage into
fraction of the input by using two resistors
in series, a step down transformer and an
input voltage. Similarly current is measured
by either Current Transformer or Arduino
Figure 6: Block Diagram of Smart Bi- Current Sensor (Range up to 100A).
Directional Energy Meter
Page 58
time when an input voltage crosses zero or

reference point. The Arduino calculates the
phase angle from time period of the ZCD
output pulse.
Figure 7: Block Diagram of Voltage Sensor
2.3.1. CT Ratio and Calculation Figure 8: Interfacing of ZCD with Arduino

Current Transformers (CT’s) are connected PA = VA x IA x PF (1)
to conductors for inverter (Renewable
PB = VB x IB x PF (2)
source) and mains. The CT must be of same
size e.g. 200A or 125A. In controller, there is PC = VC x IC x PF (3)
only one register assigned for the
calculation of currents. But if there are Total imported power = PA + PB
different values of CT, then the calculation
Total exported power = PC
is adjusted by programming software [3].
Net Power = Total imported power - Total
So if one CT of 200A is used to calculate IA
exported power = (PA + PB) – PC (4)
and IB and one CT of 50A for calculating IC
as shown in figure 9, then 200A divided by
50A = 4. The software is program such that
IC is divided by 4 before calculating the
value of PC.
2.4. Power calculation

Three electrical parameters must be known
before calculating: Apparent, Active and
Reactive power of any Electrical load.
Voltage, Current and the phase angle

between voltage and current are the three
electrical parameters used. The voltage and
current is measured through their
corresponding sensors. The phase angle
between them is measured by Zero Cross
Figure 9: Smart Meter Connection
Detection Circuit (ZCD), which is a voltage
comparator that generates a pulse every
Page 59
2.5. Energy Calculation Communication unit is used for Load

Energy is calculated by the Power switching, receiving calculated bill,
consumption over time. receiving the information about load
consumption and load nature [5].
EA= PA x t (5)
2.9. Electricity Bill Calculation
2.6. Electrical Isolation
The traditional electricity bill is calculated
Isolation transformers are used to isolate such that;
the meter from load and Grid. Isolation
1-Unit = 1 kWh
transformer is 1:1 transformer that is used
for isolation of two electrical circuits from Total-kWh = 1000 W (Power Consumed) x 24
high voltage spikes and load sharing. hrs. x 30 days = 720000 Watt-hour = 720kWh
2.7. Load Switching Total Units = 720 kWh
Load switching is done through Conventional Cost of 1 unit = 8 Rs / kWh (Suppose)

relays in collaboration with Controller. Load
switching is the technique of load shedding Electricity bill of month = 8 x 720 = 6480
automatically when necessary. In peak ON
hours, non-important loads are turned off in 2.9.1. Net Metering Electricity Bill
order to reduce bill. If there is shortage of Let’s take an example of a 5 kW ON-grid
supplied energy then load is shed according solar power system which costs around Rs
to available power automatically. Load is 700,000. It produces 5 units per hours (35
sheds manually too (Home automation units a day) for 7 hours daylight availability.
Concept). If 35 units are produced per day then 1050
electricity units are generated per month.
Consider one unit retail rate as Rs 13 per
unit, 1050 unit will cost Rs 13,650 every
month. This is how the bill is calculated.
• Case # 1 (Exporting Surplus Energy)
If 600 units are consumed out of 1050 units

and 450 units are sold out to grid. Then
consumer will credit approximately Rs 5,850
per month.
• Case # 2 (Importing Required

Energy)
If a consumer uses 2000 unit per month, the

Figure 10: Relay Circuit consumer will be charged only for 950 units.
2.8. Communication Unit
3. HARDWARE RESULTS
In the proposed methodology, GSM SIM The presented hardware and methodology
(900A) is used as communication unit which completely fulfill the objectives of the
enables the communication between project. It measures Import and Export of
Consumer and Distribution Utility. energies accurately.
Page 60
performance to cost ratio, higher cost, and

large size, difficult to integrate electrically
and mechanically, less flexible. In
commercial products more intelligent,
cheap and small chips must be used.
6. REFERENCES
[1]. Fleming, J.A. (1914). Magnets and
Electric Currents. New York: Spon &
Chamberlain., p. 335
[2]. Gong, Mao Fa, Yan Ping Su, and Bin
An. 2014. "Design of Single-Phase
Multi-Function Energy Meter."
Applied Mechanics and Materials 448:
2530-2534.
[3]. Muhammad Amin Azad, Umer Khalid,
Zeeshan Ali, Ali Murtaza. Poly Phase
Figure 11: View of Implemented Hardware Import Export (Bidirectional) GSM
All the parameters that had been envisioned Based Smart Metering System for
were practically implemented and the Smart Grids,
module is working efficiently and Proceedings of the 2nd International
Conference on Engineering &
effectively. All the relevant readings are
Emerging Technologies (ICEET),
being taken, the energy difference is being Superior
calculated and the data is being sent via University, Lahore, PK, 26-27 March,
GSM to consumer’s SIM card. 2015.
[4]. Zoran Petrušić and Andrija Petrušić.
4. CONCLUSION “Application of a bidirectional
electricity meter in the 5kW grid-
Bi-directional energy meter is Efficient, connected photovoltaic power
Reliable, Accurate, and Precise. This paper plant”,
presents Design and Implementation of Proceedings of the 5th Small Systems
Smart Bi-Directional Energy Meter for homes Simulation Symposium 2014, Niš,
or industries to Measure Import and Export Serbia, 12th-14th February 2014
of Energies between consumer and [5]. Yang, Yan. 2014. "Design of
electrical meter reading system
distribution utility. In this paper, we
based on CDMA network." Journal of
presented how the proposed meter and Chemical and Pharmaceutical
techniques are different and better than Research 6.6: 2497-2503.
other ones. Arduino has been used to [6].Ricks, G.W.D. (March 1896).
measure and calculate Voltages, Currents, "Electricity Supply Meters". Journal of
Powers, and Energies. This Smart Meter is the Institution of Electrical Engineers
accurate, precise, easy to design and use, it 25 (120): 57–77. doi:10.1049/jiee-
1.1896.0005. Student paper read on
improve cash/bill calculation, manages load
January 24, 1896 at the Students'
well and is cost effective. Meeting.
[7]. Article about Net Metering System,
5. FUTURE RECOMMENDATION Published in Dawn, September 4th,
The major problem that arises in designing a 2015
meter is the choice of controller used.
Arduino has lots of advantages but it is not
use in commercial products due to low
Page 61
IMPACT ANALYSIS OF CULTIVATION OF JATROPHA TREE ON FUEL

PRICES AND ENVIRONMENT
Saba Arif1, Anam Nadeem2, Shahid Khalil3
P P P P P
1
P
Email1: sabaarif50@gmail.com,
3TU U3T
2
P
Email2: anamnadeem139@gmail.com,
3TU U3T
3
P
Email3: Shahid.khalil@uettaxila.edu.pk
3TU U3T
ABSTRACT
Globally transportation sector accounts for around 25% of energy demand and nearly 62%
of oil consumed. Therefore, new energy sources are required to introduce for this huge
demand replenishment of depleting conventional energy sources. Currently, bio fuels such
as Jatropha trees as an energy carrier for transportation sector are being utilized
effectively round the globe.
However, climate conditions at low altitudes with average annual temperature above 20
degree Celsius and rainfall of 300-1000mm are considered the most suitable environment
for efficient growth of Jatropha trees. The current study is provide a theoretical survey
based analysis to investigate the effect of rate of cultivation of jatropha trees on
reduction of fuel prices and its environmental benefits. The resulted study shows that
jatropha tree’s 100 kg seeds give 80kg oil and the conversion process cost is very small as
890 PKR. More ever the extraction of oil from Jatropha tree is tax free compared to other
fuel.
The analysis proved very essential for potential assessment of Jatropha in terms of future
energy fuel for transportation sector at global level. Additionally, it can be very beneficial
for increment in total amount of transportation fuel in Pakistan
Key words: Jatropha tree, environmental impact, energy contents, theoretical survey
Page 62
would result in a daily demand of around

18.4 billion liters [4].
1. INTRODUCTION World’s energy demand can be fulfilled
In past few Decades, due to increase in by Renewable fuels i.e. biomass, because
population and drastic change in life of its huge potential. Biomass can be
style, consumption of energy is also used for energy in several ways; one of
increased. Currently, reduction of fossil these is the conversion into liquid or
fuel occurred to meet high energy gaseous fuels such as ethanol and bio-
demands. Serious environmental impacts diesel for use in mobile source
such as worldwide temperature, combustion. In fact global stipulate for
alteration, acidification, deforestation, liquid bio fuels become more than tripled
ozone exhaustion, Eutrophication and in 2000 to 2007[2]. Additionally, future
photochemical exhaust smog are taking goals and venture plans suggest muscular
place. Fossil fuels are not enough to growth will carry on in near future. As
achieve the high energy demands. So, bio fuels are more advantageous,
economical and environmental friendly economically, politically and
alternative sources of energy should be environmentally. Speaking in terms of
introduced. Transportation and industry advantages, much heard is that they, as
sectors are main consumers of energy. an alternative fuel, could solve several
Petroleum fuels such as diesel, gasoline, issues as the increasing energy prices
liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) and worldwide, the increasing need of energy
compressed natural gas (CNG) are the imports, the negative environmental
major source of consumption in transport consequences of fossil fuel combustion
sector [1]. Transport fuels demand has and the security of national energy
been also get higher significantly during supply for many countries.
the last century [2].Additionally, growth Emission of greenhouse gasses i.e. carbon
of transportation sector and progressing dioxide (CO2), methane (CH4) and nitrous
economies is making expectations that oxide (N2O) is less in bio fuels than fossil
this inclination will remain unchanged in fuels. Those gasses pose risks as they
next few decades. Transport fuel demand tend to warm the earth’s surface. The
is traditionally fulfilled by fossil fuel energy substance of bio fuels vary from
demand. Now a day, renewable conventional fuels. Total energy yield per
transportation bio fuels are under liter of bio fuel is resolute by the
consideration by reason of environmental feedstock used, section where the
impacts and shortage of petroleum fuels feedstock is developed and manufacture
[3]. Bio fuels are viable solution of fossil techniques applied. According to
fuels because they will not come to an research Biodiesel has an energy ratio
end. Moreover, bio fuels are match up to diesel of approximately 1.1
environmental friendly and less costly to 1, which shows that its energy stuffing
than fossil fuels. Shortage of is 87% as compare with diesel. Bio
conventional fuel is leading toward the Ethanol has energy content of 1.42
higher cost of fuels. [4] compared to gasoline. The amount that is
Forecasts are that transport on a global similar to the amount of energy content
scale will increase demand for of one liter gasoline is referred to as
conventional Fuels with up to a maximum gasoline equivalent.[5]
annual growth of 1.3% up to 2030. This Moreover, to its environmental impacts,
It is clear that there is a suppressed
Page 63
demand of bio fuel because of inclination been conceded on the holistic approach
in price of oil and the awareness that to utilization of JCL as a source of
fossil fuels will be depleted soon, this various energy carriers [9]. These
extend research interest in fuel making researches paying attention on feasible
from plants. That’s why it is needed to energy carriers from fruit shells, seed oil
work on the potential of biodiesel as well and seed components. However, there is
as its feasibility, so that it can be used as requirement for incorporation of the
a viable alternative fuel in the future. existing and dispersed statistics,
14% of the world’s energy demands can information and experiences on use of
be fulfilled by Bio-fuel. So, Biomass is JCL as an energy source. This paper is an
taking attention around the world as a effort to make a theoretical analysis of
source of renewable energy [6]. price impact of integration of bio-fuel
into existing available fuel systems of
1.1 Plant Description Pakistan. Also this research is all about
Jatropha curcas L. (JCL) has been environmental effects caused by
recognized as appropriate energy crop. cultivation of Jatropha tree and its
The JCL plant is presently gaining a lot of scope.
interest as an energy plant, Jatropha
curcas is a plant that belongs to the 2. METHODOLOGY
family Euphorbiaceous. It is a shrub that Data is gathered with the help of online
can be grown up to 10m having height of questionnaire and theoretical survey. Key
5m under suitable conditions [7] .It can points of current research are
grow on barren and craggy lands under
callous climatic conditions. It is pest • Cultivation feasibility of Jatropha
tolerant plant and can be easily • Comparison based on Cost
cultivated. Non-edible oil is produced analysis of Jatropha oil
from Jatropha curcas. From the second • Environmental impacts of
year of plantation, the shrub starts jatropha bio diesel i.e. Carbon
bearing fruit. By careful handling, after 5 emission
years of cultivation, JCL’s production of
seed is approx 4-5 kg. Due to its 1.1 2.1 Cultivation Feasibility of
Jatropha
versatility in usage and prolonged
existence of 40-50 years it has huge Jatropha can be cultivated anywhere
potential. The raw oil and its esters are along roads, railway tracks, canals, on
the major energy carters. Additionally, border of farm and even in alkaline soils.
Chemical and mechanical processes are It can grow in high and low rainfall areas,
involved in conversion of JCL into energy but production is more in high rainfall
carriers [8]. For the derivation of solid, areas. Furthermore, it occurs mostly at
liquid and gaseous energy carriers from lower altitude (0-500) cm with average
JCL and it’s by- products many yearly temperature above 200C, andP P
technologies are used. It includes precipitation of 300-1000mm.

pyrolysis, anaerobic digestion, 2.1 2.2 Comparison based on Cost
gasification, combustion and trans- analysis of Jatropha oil
esterification. However, JCL is a energy The cost feasibility is the most important
plant, which in addition to seed oil, also parameter of encouragement of Jatropha
produces wood, seed husks, press-cake for bio-diesel production in
and fruit shells.a number of studies have underdeveloped country. It is important
Page 64
to have a clear composition percentage

idea for calculation and comparison of
cost. Jatropha composition largely
comprises on jatropha Seeds, Kernels and
capsules as in Fig 1. 58% oil quantity is
extracted from Jatropha due to 35% of
capsule sheath and 35% of seed shells.
2.3 Environmental impacts of

jatropha cultivation i.e. Carbon
emission
The environmental impact varies greatly
across locations. From the examination
of exhaust gas it is concluded that
percentage of CO2gas of biodiesel is very
lower than the petroleum based diesel.
The percentage of O2 as a result of
Figure 1: Jatropha composition
burning of biodiesel is very higher than
From Jatropha plant Methyl ester and the petroleum based diesel. Additionally
glycerin is obtained, with the reaction of % of CO is zero for biodiesel & for other
Triglyceride (Jatropha) and methanol. two it is one. furthermore, according to
Glycerin is a byproduct, which is characteristics of Jatropha given in
compound of glycerol. Glycerol plays (Table 2) it is clear that Ash content,
important role in burning of bio-diesel. Acid value, Calorific value and water
So, total cost of production of bio diesel content is less than biodiesel standards
will rely on price of glycerol, seed cost which means that Jatropha is highly
and tran-estrfication. Chemical reaction suitable for environment and have less
for converting Jatropha into oil is in carbon emission contents According to
Equation (1). (Table 3).
Triglyceride (Jatropha)+Methanol Table 2: Properties of bio-diesel from
Methyl ester + glycerin (1) jatropha
Moreover, Jatropha is eco-friendly, have

feasible oil extraction, trans-
esterification, cheaper and can
commercially produced raw material
easily. Cost of diesel extracted from
Jatropha is highly dependent on price of
glycerol. Fluctuations in price of glycerol
monthly are approximate 100 Rs. Table 3: Biodiesel Standards
Table 1: component and total

expenditure of Jatropha tree
Page 65
3. Results
From data obtained through survey,
relative properties of Biodiesel obtained
from jatropha and petroleum based
diesel has considered in current research.
Results show that bio-diesel obtained
from jatropha is highly compatible with
environment having high calorific values, Figure 3: Effect of price of glycerol (40
Flash point and optimal viscosity Fig 2. Rs/kg) on price of Jatropha diesel
After burning Jatropha bio-diesel have
less ash content and carbon residuals. In Fig. 4 Same sample is taken but with
the price of glycerol 50 Rs/kg.
Bio diesel from jatropha
Neat jatropha oil
Remarkable decrease in Total price of
diesel production of biodiesel has been
140000
observed with increase in glycerol price.
120000
100000
80000
60000
40000
20000
0
Density (Kg/m3)
Viscosity
Calorific
(cSt)
value
Flash
(kJ/kg)
Point( Cetane no
properties
Figure 2: Comparison of properties of Figure 4: Effect of price of glycerol (50

diesel, neat jatropha oil and bio diesel Rs/kg) on price of Jatropha diesel
from jatropha
For the same sample of 1000 kg seeds
Current data is analyzed on the basis of price of glycerol is kept 60 Rs/kg and it
variation of glycerol prices and current gives 62.63 Rs for making of 33L.
price of diesel in Pakistan. Results
explain on the basis of variant prices of
glycerol, feasibility of Jatropha scope
and cultivation. Fig 3. give details view
with the glycerol price of 40 Rs/kg,
theoretical samples of 1000kg seeds are
taken which produces 33 liter of bio
diesel. If 40 Rs/kg glycerol price is taken
then total cost for the production of bio
diesel is 68.69 Rs.
Page 66
Figure 5: Effect of price of glycerol (60 4. CONCLUSION AND

Rs/kg) on price of Jatropha diesel RECOMMENDATIONS
Comparative results of jatropha diesel Petroleum fuel can be replaced by

and petroleum based diesel price in Biodiesel. Its positive impacts are
Pakistan shown in table [3] and fig 6. improved lubricity, compact global
Current price of high speed diesel in warming, and fewer emissions (apart
Pakistan is 94Rs. For 33L it becomes from NOx) and enhanced pastoral growth.
3104Rs. But biodiesel obtained from Jatropha oil has capability to use as a
Jatropha will cost only 68.69 Rs. for substitute of energy resources. However,
33L.High revenue generation is indicated independence of foreign oil cannot be
by the results. reduced by only JCL. Use of this and
additional alternative energy sources
Table 4: component and revenue at 33L could put in to a more constant supply of
energy. Public policies are required
revision for the support of development
of JCL cultivation. Economic feasibility of
biodiesel fuels in comparison with
traditional petroleum is significant. For
the increased production of JCL more
resources are required. Overwhelming
and biodiesel making plants need to be
established. Distribution and storage
services should be created. For growth of
the industry, monitoring of problems in
momentous use is required. To reduce
the import of the country, emphasis on
the awareness of green fuel is needed.
Reinforcement of oil seed segment
should be laid down. The importance
should be made to spend in agriculture
division for development of existing
potential by creating model seed
procurement hub, establishing
preprocessing and processing services,
trans-esterification units, oil withdrawal
unit etc. strategy of dense organized
plantation of Jatropha on the existing
wastelands of the state should be
implemented. Independent farmers and
Figure
37T 6:37Tcomparison of total farming communities of the country
Expenditure/Revenue for 33liter (Rs) of should be in a manner that favors
petro-diesel and Jatropha diesel progress. This will smooth the progress of
our country to become self-governing in
Page 67
the fuel sector. There are enormous

opportunities in Jatropha farming and [8] Kywe, T.T. and Oo, M, M., 2009,
biodiesel production associated sectors. Production of biodiesel from Jatropha oil
Bio-fuels have diverse production (Jatropha curcas) in pilot plant.
opportunities and reduction opportunities Proceedings of WorldAcademy of Science,
in terms of cost, import and feasibility. Engineering and Technology, Vol. 38, pp.
Additionally, cultivation of Bio-fuels 481-487.
leads toward progressed nation.
[9] Singh, R.N., Vyas, D.K., Srivastava,
5. REFERENCES N.S.L., and Narra M., 2008, SPERI
[1] Dimerbas, A. 2006. energy periorties and
37T
experience on holistic approach to utilize
new energy strategies, energy Edu Sci all parts of Jatropha curcas fruit for
Technol: 53-109 energy. Renewable Energy, Vol. 33, pp.
1868-1873.
[2] Dolf Gielen,2008, Energy technology
Perspectives, international energy
agency,france
[3] Hill, J., E. Nelson , D. Tilman, S.

Polasky, and D.
Tiffany. 2006. Environmental, economic,
38T 38T 37T
and energetic costs and benefits of biodiesel

and ethanol biofuels
[4] Mhairi C, October 2008, Ground-level

37T 37T
ozone in the 21st century: future trends,

impacts and policy implications,
royalsociety.org, Edinburgh.
[5] Kumar, A. And Sharma, S., 2008, An

evaluation of multipurpose oil seed crop
for industrial uses (Jatropha curcas L.): a
review. Industrial Crops and Products,
Vol. 28, pp. 1-10
[6] Demirbaş, A. and Demirbaş, M.F.,

2003, Biomass and wastes: Upgrading
alternative fuels. Energy Sources, Vol.
25, pp. 317-329.
[7] Del Greco, G.V. and Rademaker, L.,

1998, The Jatropha energy system: An
integrated approach to decentralised and
sustainable energy production at the
village level. Workshop on the potential
of Jatropha curcas in rural development
and environment protection. Harare,
1998 May 13-15.
Page 68
Virtual Non-Isolated DC to DC Converters Laboratory For teaching Undergraduate

Students
Muhamamd Arif, Jawad Saleem, Asad Javaid, Uzair Khan, Atiq ur Rehman, Abdul Majid
Department of Electrical Engineering

COMSATS Institute of Information Technology, Abbottabad
{marif, jawadsleem, asadtareen, uzairkhan, atiqjadoon, a_majid }@ciit.net.pk
ABSTRACT
Power electronic converters are the back bone of modern power system and plays pivotal
role in many industrial applications. Understanding the working principle of converters is
essential for smooth operation of the system. In universities laboratories are equipped
with essential hardware for converters design and understanding, but process is time
consuming and difficult to fault diagnosis in case of failure. To avoid such a difficulty at
understanding level many teaching methods were proposed, and one of them is Computer
Aided Education (CAE). In CAE people used computer software's for learning of complex
educational topics. Computer software's as a teaching tool provides many benefits in
terms of time, visual impact of models and Interactive understanding. Here we implement
the concept of CAE by using the matlab for teaching non isolated DC to DC converters. It is
used for Buck, Boost, Buck-boost and Cuk converters. By using matlab simulink and
graphical user interface design environment (GUIDE), we developed our virtual
laboratory. GUIDE has soft buttons for input/output power, voltage and current
calculations. Moreover GUIDE has buttons for simulation start/stop and visualization of
different parameters waveform. A unique characteristic of this virtual laboratory is
provision of updating simulink models. Quantitative results are obtained through a survey
during the use of virtual laboratory in the undergraduate classroom.
Keywords: Computer Aided Education, Graphical User Interface, Boost Converter
1. INTRODUCTION: these is Matlab, which is very powerful

tool used for various engineering
Fast growing computer technology shows applications. It has strong GUI tool for
its significance in every aspect of life. A teaching application [3],[11]. GUI based
new emerging concept from the last four teaching methodology is very effective
decades is the computer aided education for parametric type of engineering
(CAE), which increases the interest of problems [5],[25]. Power converters are
students in thinking and learning of new also parametric type of problem, they
engineering models[5],[8],[12]. CAE is have many circuits and control
very effective in terms of many factors parameters. GUI based power electronics
like time, cost and design complexity converter teaching is an emerging
[15],[12]. Today's researchers have concept in modern education
developed various educational software system[3],[11].So for this we developed
tools for modelling and simulation of an application for teaching non-isolated
complex engineering applications. These DC-DC converters at undergraduate level.
tools make learning and development of Basic models of converters are design in
product easier [5],[7],[12]. For making matlab simulink and frontend interface in
learning tool more and more interactive, Matlab GUI. Models can be modified by
a graphical user interface (GUI) is being the controls available in GUI. After the
used. A lot of software tools and introduction of discussed in the section 1
programming languages are used for the rest of the is divided as, section 2
GUI development [3],[9],[11]. One of describes non-isolating DC-DC converters
Page 69
theory and their simulink models, section

3 is all About graphical user interface
(GUI), section 4 presents survey results
conducted in the undergraduate class
room and section 5 concludes overall
research work.
2. NON-ISOLATED DC-DC CONVERTERS Figure 2: Types of DC to DC Converter

Power electronic is the field in In second case when the switch is open
which we control the power flow in than the diode D is forward biased
the power system by using power because of the current flowing through
semiconductor devices based it, is due to the residual energy stored in
converter circuits. Figure 1 shows
the inductor and capacitor. Some of the
the four basic type of converters
mathematical equations used for the
used in power electronics. In our
modelling of the buck converters are
work we used non-isolated DC to
shown in table 1. il is the current
DC converters (choppers) and
flowing through the inductor
models are developed in matlab
simulink and GUIDE. Non isolated VL = L.d (il) / dt (1)
DC to DC converters used in VL is the voltage across the
different industrial applications. inductorV0 is the output voltage across
are i) Buck Converters ii) Boost the resister and Vin=VDC which is input
Converters iii) Buck-Boost to the system. Here Dt is the duty ratio.
Converters iv) Cuk Converters.
Figure 2 shows the types of the TON is the time for which switch is on
converters used in this work. state and T is the total period for which
2.1 Buck Converter switch is on and off. Buck converter has
two mode of operation continuous and
Buck converter is a step down converter, discontinuous. By increasing the value of
which step down DC voltage. Basic model
the L we can get the continuous flow of
of the converter is shown in the Figure 3.
current in the load else current is
discontinuous in the load. It has the
efficiency of 95 % and used for the
designing of power supplies for the
Laptops and computer systems. Simulink
model of the boost converter is shown in
the Figure 5.All the parameters are set
with default values. We use IGBT as
Figure 1: Power Electronics Converter
switch.
In Figure 3 VDC is input to the circuit, SW
Semiconductor switch (in our model it is
IGBT), D is for Diode, L for Inductor, C
represent Capacitor and R used for
Resistive load. When the Switch (SW) is
closed the diode D is in reversed biased
and all the current is flowing through the
inductor L which is il and it is further Figure 3: Buck Converter
distributed in the IC flowing through the
capacitor and IR flowing through the
resister
Page 70
HYDRAULIC OPTIMIZATION DURING DRILLING OPERATION USING INDIGENOUS MUD TO

IMPROVE RATE OF PENETRATION AND REDUCE ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE
Hassan Aziz1, Ubedullah Ansari2, Asad Ahmed Memon3

P P P P P
1
P P hassanaziz901@gmail.com
2
P P ubedullah.ansari@faculty.muet.edu.pk
3
P P Asadahmedmemon63@gmail.com
1, 2, 3
P P Institute of petroleum and natural gas engineering,
Mehran University of Engineering & Technology, Jamshoro.
ABSTRACT
Drilling operation for the extraction of hydrocarbons is a very costly process. The
efficiency of drilling process is a function of rate of penetration. Drilling mud/fluid plays
an important part during drilling operation as it transport the drilled cuttings from hole to
surface. In oil industry, mathematically designed rheological models are used to calculate
the frictional pressure losses to optimize the drill bit hydraulics for improving penetration
rate. After the drilling job is completed, drilling mud and cuttings (wastes) are disposed
of. Instead of disposing the drilling mud, the same used mud (indigenous mud) can be
reused by collecting the mud from different resources. For example mud collected from
pit, mud separated from cuttings, mud obtained from offshore drilling, etc. In this
research, two different water based drilling mud systems were compared namely
indigenous mud and fresh mud which help in analysing the performance of both muds in
terms of rate of penetration by the use of Bingham plastic rheological model and hydraulic
horsepower criterion. To calculate the rheological properties of prepared all the four
samples of density 9.5 lb/gal, viscosity at the dial readings of 600 and 300 rpm was
measured using rotational viscometer. The results concluded that large volume
approximately 42-46 % of indigenous mud resource is required for the designing of an
indigenous mud with improved rheological parameters as a result not only penetration
rate will improve but also environmental issues as well as other drilling operation costs
can be minimized.
Key words: Indigenous drilling fluid, Drilling waste, Improved rate of penetration, Drill bit
hydraulics
1 INRODUCTION passing through drilling bit, moves up the

Drilling operations for the extraction of annuals transporting the drilled cuttings
oil and gas from subsurface is a very to the surface. The main functions of
costly process. The efficiency of drilling circulating drilling fluid during drilling
process is the function of rate of operation is to keep the bit and drill
penetration (ROP). It has been proved string lubricated and cool, to keep the
through laboratory experiments that ROP hydrostatic pressure above pore pressure
is significantly influenced by hydraulic for preventing the invasion of formation
energy at the drill bit, bottom hole fluid into the drilled hole, and to
differential pressure and bit nozzle fluid transport the cuttings up to the surface
viscosity. These all factors which effect [1].
ROP are controlled by type of drilling The drilling fluid and treatments involved
mud (fluid) used for drilling operation. from preparation to disposal of drilling
Drilling fluid through an empty drill string mud are considered as source of
is pumped down the hole, which after pollutants because of harmful chemicals
Page 71
composition of drilling mud. Chemical not obey Newtonian law of viscosity. The
additives like barite and bentonite are flow behavior of non-Newtonian drilling
commonly used additives for the fluid is very complex. Drilling fluids used
preparation of all types of drilling mud. in oil/gas well drilling are mostly
In addition, oil is also used for the non-newtonian in nature and the
preparation of drilling mud. The volume viscosity of such fluids changes with
of oil varies according to the type of the change in shear rate [3]. For this
mud. Large volume of oil is required for reason, mathematical models of rheology
oil based mud and small volume is are used by the industry to approach the
required for water based drilling mud. complex behavior of drilling muds. During
During drilling operation two types of drilling mud circulation, models in
wastes are commonly generated that are accordance with the characteristic of the
produced drilled cuttings to the surface fluid are used to compute pressure loses
and drilling mud. Drilling mud in large due to friction. The computed frictional
volume is reserved in the mud tanks for pressure is used for optimizing the drill
fluid circulation into hole to transport bit hydraulics. In addition, the computed
the drilled cutting from subsurface to value can also be used for the estimation
surface. As the fluid with cuttings of equivalent circulating density (ECD),
reaches the surface it is passed through providing sufficient efficiency for hole
vibrating screens called shale shaker for cleaning and optimizing rate of
the removal of cuttings from the mud and penetration hence reducing the drilling
then the mud is recirculated. The operation cost [4].
amount of wastes generated during 2.1 Bingham Plastic Rheological
drilling depends on wellbore diameter Model
and well depth. Drilling of Large A linear shear rate to shear stress
diameter wellbore as compared to small relationship of a fluid when minimum
diameter wellbore, generates large threshold stress (yield point) has
amount of drilling wastes [2]. exceeded, such a fluid is called Bingham
Investigation of bit hydraulics by the use plastic fluid. Bingham plastic fluid will
indigenous drilling mud resource (already not flow, if the minimum threshold stress
used mud) to improve drill bit has not reached. As the yield point (τy )
penetration rate and to manage drilling becomes greater than the minimum
waste for reducing environmental value, shear stress value varies
concerns are the objectives of this paper. proportionally with shear rate values
For achieving objectives of this paper, with a proportionality constant called
two different water based drilling fluid plastic viscosity (µ𝒑 ). The mathematical
system were composed in the laboratory, equation of two parameter Bingham
one system called indigenous drilling mud plastic rheological model is as follow: [3].
contains indigenous resource and other τ = µp γ + τy (01)
called fresh mud does not contain Fig. 1 describes the graphical shear rate-
indigenous resource. Both muds were stress relationship of Bingham plastic
compared in terms of ROP. The volume of model.
indigenous mud resource needed for the Figure 1: A graphical representation of
formulation of suitable indigenous mud Bingham plastic model [5].
mixture for the purpose of higher ROP is
also the part of this research.
2 NON-NEWTONIAN DRILLING
MUD
A drilling mud is said to be non-
newtonian if its properties are different
from Newtonian drilling mud. In other
words, non-newtonian drilling muds do
Page 72
3.2 Bingham plastic pressure losses

equations
The mathematical formulas for
computing pressure losses due to friction
when fluid flows from pipe and annulus
are given blow [8].
Flow from the pipe
The equation for computing frictional
pressure losses when fluid with laminar
flow regime is flowing from inside of the
pipe is given blow
Two parameters of Bingham plastic
model are yield point and plastic µ p vL τ yL
𝑃𝑓 = + (06)
viscosity and can be calculated by the 1500 * d i
2
225 * d i
mathematical equations given blow [9]. Similarly, when the fluid is flowing in
µp = RPM 600 reading – RPM 300 reading (02) turbulent flow regime, pressure losses
And can be calculated by
𝜏𝑦 = RPM 300 reading − µp (03)
µ
1.75 0.25
ρ m 0.75 v L
3 PRESSURE LOSSES DUE TO 𝑃𝑓 = P
(07)
0.25
FRICTION 1800 * d i
The expansion of hydraulic energy at the Flow from the annulus
interference of rock and bit has major The equation for computing frictional
effects on drilling performance. The pressure losses when fluid with laminar
expansion of hydraulic energy around the flow regime is flowing from annulus is
drill bit is effected by the frictional given blow
pressure losses. When the mud is 𝑝 �𝐿
𝜇 𝑉 𝜏𝑦 𝐿
circulated, because of pipe/borehole 𝐴𝑃𝑓 = 2 + 200∗(𝑑 (08)
1,000∗(𝑑 2 −𝑑1 ) 2 −𝑑1 )
wall contact with the drilling fluid, Similarly, when the fluid is flowing in
friction occurs as a result circulating turbulent flow regime pressure losses can
pressure provided by the mud pumps is be calculated by
reduced. In the circulatory system ρm 0.75 𝑉� 1.75 𝜇𝑝 0.25 𝐿
𝐴𝑃𝑓 = (09)
because of friction pressure drops in the 1,396∗(𝑑2 −𝑑1 )1.25
surface equipment (P s ), drill string (pipe
R R
4 MAXIMUM DRILL BIT
and collar) and in the annulus. HYDRAULIC HORSEPOWER
CRITERION (HHP)
The mathematical equation describing During drilling, Inefficient drilled cuttings
loss of pressure due to friction is given cleaning from under the bit, leads to the
blow: [6]. regrinding of the drilled cuttings hence
P d = Ps + DP pd + DC pd + ADP Pd + ADC Pd
R R R R R R R R R R
causing drill bit wear and increasing time

(04) of drilling operation.
3.1 Surface connection pressure The hydraulic horsepower criterion (HHP)
losses concludes that optimum condition for
Pressure losses in the surface equipment removing the drilled cuttings from hole
due to friction can be calculated by using bottom is when HHP is maximum in
following formula [7]. accordance with the flow rate of the
𝑃𝑆 = 10−5 ∗ 𝑘 ∗ 𝜌 ∗ 𝑞1.86 (05) fluid. According to HHP, drop in pressure
If the type of surface connection is at the drill bit should not be less than
known the value of surface pressure (k) 65% of the total available pump pressure.
can be determined from table. [6] The The selection of accurate bit nozzles size
surface connection type for this study is 4 and flow rate is necessary to achieve this
which has a value k = 3. condition.
Mathematically, [6].
Hhp = Pb Q (10)
Page 73
Or in field units fluid to invade into the hole and to

P Q stabilize the drilled hole. As the target
Hhp = b (11)
1714 depth is reached, wastes produced during
Pressure across the drill bit (Pb ) can be
drilling operation are disposed. Wastes
substituted by equation (12)
are disposed either directly without any
Pb = Ps − CQm (12)
treatment or they receive proper
In equation (12), c is called constant and
treatment before disposal [9].
m is called flow exponent. The
Disposal of drilling mud either directly or
theoretical value of m is 1.86.
after proper treatment effects the
According to maximum HHP, the optimum
environment. The mud planned for
hydraulics value can be obtained if
disposal can be used at another drilling
pressure losses due to friction are
location as an additive in a drilling mud.
maintained at an optimum value, hence
Following are some resources from where
Hhp criteria gives the following equation
1 used mud can be obtained
Pf opt = P (13) 5.1 Mud separated from cuttings
m+1 s max
Equation (14) describes an optimum drop The circulated mud that brings the
of pressure across the nozzles of drill bit cuttings to the surface is remixed with
m
Pb opt = P (14) the circulating mud after the proper
m+1 s max
Equation (15) can be used to achieve removal of drilled cuttings. The
optimum flowrate circulated mud is passed through
1 Pf opt vibrating screens called shale shakers for
Q opt = Q a antilog � log � �� (15)
m Pf the removal of cuttings. The cuttings are
Optimum pressure drop (Pb opt ), can be coated with drilling mud volume more or
determined if optimum flow rate is less equal to the volume of produced
known cuttings.
�8.3∗10−5 �ρQopt The fluid used for coating is the source of
Pb opt = (16)
A2 t opt ∗𝑐𝑑 2 pollution and can be reused as an
Where (𝑐𝑑 )is coefficient of discharge and additive in a drilling mud at another
has a theoretical value 0.95. location and can be termed as indigenous
Equation (16) can be arranged to obtain mud resource.
optimum nozzle area (A t opt ), 5.2 Burial of drilling wastes
(8.3∗10−5 )ρQopt In petroleum industry, burial is the most
A t opt = � (17)
Pb opt ∗𝑐𝑑 2 common drilling wastes disposal
Optimum size of nozzles diameter (dnopt ) technique. Burial of drilling wastes can
can be determined if optimum nozzles be either by reserve pits or by landfills.
area (A t opt ) is known. In both types generated wastes are
At opt
disposed into excavations.
dn opt = 2� (18) 5.2.1 Reserve pit
nπ
In equation (18), n describes the quantity The placement and sealing of drilling
of nozzles. Nozzles on a drill bit can be wastes into reserve pit is called pit
equal or greater than 3. encapsulation. Reserved pit is generally
According to Hhp criteria, optimum located near the drilling rig. Separated
hydraulic horse power can be determined cuttings still coated a large volume of
by the following equation drilling fluid, are placed into reserve pit.
Pb opt Qopt As the evaporation of drilling mud takes
Hhp opt = (19)
1714 place, native soil covers the pit. This
5 INDIGENOUS MUD RESOURCES technique requires very low cost for
Different chemical additives contributes disposing wastes, this is the reason it is
towards the composition of drilling mud. very popular technique for the disposal of
Its composition is designed in accordance drilling wastes among the operators [11].
with the characteristics of the subsurface The drilling mud left for the evaporation
formations. Drilling mud is used to clean in the reserve pit can be indigenous mud
the hole by removing the cuttings from resource.
the hole, prevent invasion of subsurface
Page 74
5.2.2 Landfills Two different drilling muds systems are

Large quantity of drilling wastes are compared in this paper. One system
disposed by landfills technique. In called indigenous mud system contains
landfills, drilling wastes are transported indigenous mud resource and other
into a man-made impoundment for system called fresh mud system that does
disposal. Either each day of operation or not contain indigenous mud resource. To
on alternative days, soil or other material adjust the weight of fresh mud system,
Coates the wastes [12]. barite (weighting agent) was added. Each
5.3 Downhole injection of drilling system comprised of two samples. The
wastes densities of all the prepared mud samples
Downhole disposal is a technique of were checked by using mud balance. A
injecting drilling wastes downhole. density of 9.5lb/gal was used for all the
Downhole disposal can be of two types. samples. Viscosities of mud samples at
One in which wastes are injected in the different dial readings were determined
annulus of drilled well, in this wastes can using a two dial rotational viscometer
be disposed only once. Second, injection with rotor speed of 600 and 300 RPM.
of liquid wastes by the drilling of special Measured viscometer dial reading was
well into suitable geological formation used to calculate rheological properties
for disposal purpose called disposal well. of all the samples. Different
Treatment prior to downhole injection of concentration of additives were used to
wastes is a necessary requirement of prepare mud samples with rheological
downhole injection technique [13]. properties that provides minimum
5.4 Biotreatment of drilling wastes frictional pressure.
The process of converting toxic materials To achieve the objectives, well and mud
into non-toxic materials by using data was obtained from a nearby oilfield.
microorganisms in such a way that the Table 1 shows the data of a well. Table 2
final product is CO 2 , H 2 O, and microbial shows the composition of indigenous mud
resource and list of additives with their
R R R R
cell mass is called biotreatment [14].

In petroleum industry, biotreatment of densities used for the preparation of mud
drilling wastes is among widely used samples. An assumed fluid flow rate of
methods as it is an economical method 350 gal/min was chosen for the
for degrading generated drilling wastes. computation of pressure losses.
The common techniques of biotreatment Table: 1 Data obtained from an oil field
applied in petroleum industry are: [15].
(1) Composting Hole size (Inch) 8.5
(2) Land treatment TVD (Ft) 10909
5.5 Offshore discharge of drilling Drill pipe ID (Inch) 4.276
wastes Drill pipe OD (Inch) 5
The offshore operation for hydrocarbons Drill collar OD (Inch) 6.25
drilling generates large volumes of Drill collar ID (Inch) 2.8125
wastes. Produced drilled cuttings are Length of drill collar (Ft) 837
discharged continuously with seawater Mud flowrate (gal/min) 350
into the sea. Density (PPG) 9.5
Similarly, water based drilling mud is Max pump operating pressure (PSI) 3500
flushed into ocean from pit at an uneven Pump horsepower 1600
intervals. The large quantity of mud is Surface equipment type 4
discharged when change in mud
composition is required or capacity of pit Table: 2 Additives used for the
has increased in volume [16]. preparation of indigenous mud resource
Sea life can be effected by the discharge and mud samples
of drilling waste in to sea. Hence offshore
discharge is another resource that can be
utilized as a drilling mud additive.
6 OBJECTIVES OF EXPERIMENT
Page 75
Additives of indigenous mud resource
Additives of mud samples
7 MUD SAMPLES
The elemental composition of drilling
mud defines its density. The equation Table: 4 describes the viscometer dial
used to prepare mud samples of required reading of all the samples
density is given blow.
Mathematically,
𝑀 +𝑀 +𝑀
𝜌 = 𝑀11 𝑀22 𝑀33 (20)
+ +
𝜌1 𝜌2 𝜌3
The above formula can be adjusted in
accordance with the number of additives
that will be the part of mud samples [6].
7.1 Indigenous mud system
Indigenous mud system comprises of two
mud samples namely sample 1 and
sample 2. The composition of each
sample with their viscometer dial reading, Table: 5 describes the rheological
calculated rheological properties that are properties of all the samples
plastic viscosity (PV) and yield point (YP)
and calculated frictional pressure loses
are given in the table 3 through 7.
7.2 Fresh mud system
Fresh mud system also comprises of two
mud samples namely sample 3 and
sample 4. The composition of each
sample with their viscometer dial
reading, calculated rheological properties Table: 6 Pressure losses due to friction
that are plastic viscosity (PV) and yield for mud sample no. 1
point (YP) and calculated frictional
pressure loses are given in tables 3
through 9.
Table: 3 describes the composition of
the samples used for mud designing
Page 76
Depth PS DP pd DC pd ADP pd ADC pd pd ECD Depth PS DP pd DC pd ADP pd ADC pd pd ECD

ft psi psi psi psi psi psi ppg ft psi psi psi psi psi psi ppg
Regime Regime Regime Regime Regime Regime Regime Regime
Turbulent Turbulent Laminar Laminar Turbulent Turbulent Laminar Laminar
9800 15.375 322.5 220.3 161.1 31.2 750.475 9.839 9800 15.375 327.2 223.5 175.2 33.8 775.075 9.869
10000 15.375 329.7 220.3 164.9 31.2 761.475 9.845 10000 15.375 334.5 223.5 179.4 33.8 786.575 9.876
10200 15.375 336.9 220.3 168.7 31.2 772.475 9.852 10200 15.375 341.8 223.5 183.5 33.8 797.975 9.883
10400 15.375 344.1 220.3 172.5 31.2 783.475 9.859 10400 15.375 349.1 223.5 187.7 33.8 809.475 9.891
10600 15.375 351.2 220.3 176.3 31.2 794.375 9.865 10600 15.375 356.4 223.5 191.8 33.8 820.875 9.898
10800 15.375 358.5 220.3 180.1 31.2 805.475 9.872 10800 15.375 363.7 223.5 196 33.8 832.375 9.905
10909 15.375 362.3 220.3 182.2 31.2 811.375 9.876
10909 15.375 367.7 223.5 198.2 33.8 838.575 9.909
Table: 7 Pressure losses due to friction
8 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
for mud sample no. 2
The calculated results of pressure losses
Depth PS DP pd DC pd ADP pd ADC pd pd ECD in the circulatory system for each sample
ft psi psi psi psi psi psi ppg is given in table 6 through 9.
Regime Regime Regime Regime The study of obtained results indicated
Turbulent Turbulent Laminar Laminar
that at all the depths pressure drop due
9800 15.375 314.9 215.1 84.9 19.04 649.315 9.683
to friction in surface connections that
was 15.375 psi remained same. The
10000 15.375 321.9 215.1 86.9 19.04 658.315 9.687
maximum drop of pressure was
10200 15.375 328.9 215.1 88.9 19.04 667.315 9.69
experienced inside the drill pipe for all
10400 15.375 335.9 215.1 91 19.04 676.415 9.694
the samples.
10600 15.375 342.9 215.1 93 19.04 685.415 9.698
Regime of fluid flow inside the pipe was
10800 15.375 350 215.1 95 19.04 694.515 9.701
found to be turbulent at a flow rate of
10909 15.375 353.8 215.1 96.1 19.04 699.415 9.703 350 gal/min, while at the same flowrate,
Table: 8 Pressure losses due to friction flow regime was found to be laminar in
the annulus of pipe.
for mud sample no. 3
Drilling mud Sample no. 2 that has plastic
Depth PS DP pd DC pd ADP pd ADC pd pd ECD viscosity 15 cp and yield point 4.5
ft psi psi psi psi psi psi ppg Ib/100ft 2 , showed minimum pressure
Regime Regime Regime Regime losses of 699.415 psi in the fluid
Turbulent Turbulent Laminar Laminar circulatory system.
9800 15.375 331.8 226.6 293 52.2 918.975 10.108 When compared with other mud samples,
10000 15.375 339.2 226.6 299.9 52.2 933.275 10.12 the same mud sample no. 2 resulted to
10200 15.375 346.6 226.6 306.8 52.2 947.575 10.133 minimum equivalent circulating density
10400 15.375 354 226.6 313.7 52.2 961.875 10.145 value of 9.703 ppg.
10600 15.375 361.4 226.6 320.7 52.2 976.275 10.157 As compared to other muds, indigenous
10800 15.375 368.8 226.6 327.6 52.2 990.575 10.169 drilling mud sample no. 2 showed the
10909 15.375 372.8 226.6 331.3 52.2 998.275 10.176 minimum value of pressure losses in the
circulatory system so the same drilling
Table: 9 Pressure losses due to friction mud sample was chosen for optimum drill
for mud sample no. 4 bit hydraulics.
For this study, to improve the
penetration rate by optimizing drill bit
hydraulic horsepower (Hhp) using
indigenous drilling mud sample no. 2,
optimum loss of pressure due to friction
is 1223.77 psi and optimum drop of
pressure across the bit is 2276.23 psi. To
achieve these conditions of optimum
parasitic pressure loss and optimum
pressure drop, mud pump are required to
Page 77
be operated with the conditions given in θ600 = 600 rpm viscometer dial reading
Table 10. θ300 =300 rpm viscometer dial reading
Table: 10 Optimum drill bit hydraulic Ps = Surface connections pressure losses,
conditions for this study (psi)
ρm 𝑜𝑟 ρ = drilling mud density, (lb/gal)
Depth QOPT A OPT DOPT HHPOPT q = mud flow rate, (gal/min)
9800 502.73 0.312 0.363 653.28 P f = frictional pressure losses, (psi)
R R
10000 498.77 0.309 0.362 648.13 DP pd = drill pipe frictional pressure loss,
R R
10200 494.9 0.307 0.361 643.1 (psi)

10400 491.1 0.304 0.359 638.16 DC pd = drill collar frictional pressure loss,
R R
10600 487.39 0.302 0.358 633.34 (psi)

10800 483.75 0.3 0.356 628.61 ADP Pd = Annular drill pipe frictional
R R
10909 481.79 0.299 0.356 626.07 pressure loss, (psi)

ADC Pd = Annular drill collar frictional
R R
9 CONCLUSION pressure loss, (psi)

Oil or gas well drilling is a high-cost P d = Total loss of pressure due to friction,
R R
process. In the era of extremely low oil (psi)

prices, cost of drilling a well becomes V� = Mean velocity, (ft/min)
extremely costly when the mud designing 𝑑𝑖 = internal diameter pipe, (in)
cost to mud disposal cost are included in L = pipe length, (ft)
drilling operation cost. The cost of 𝐴𝑃𝑓 = Annular frictional pressure losses,
drilling operation can be reduced by (psi)
improving ROP. Additional cost of drilling 𝑑1 = pipe outer diameter, (in)
operation can be reduced by the use of 𝑑2 = Hole diameter, (in)
indigenous mud in the following manners Hhp = hydraulic horsepower, (hp)
1. A large volume approximately 42- Pb = pressure across the drill bit, (psi)
46 % of indigenous mud resource is Ps = maximum pump pressure, (psi)
used for the designing of Pb opt = optimum pressure drop across the
indigenous mud with improved
drill bit, (psi)
rheological parameters.
Ps max= maximum pump pressure, (psi)
2. Generated drilling wastes that are
Pf opt = optimum frictional pressure drop,
considered as source of
pollutants, environmental issues (psi)
can be minimized as large volume Q opt =optimum flow rate, (gal/min)
of previously used mud is utilized Q a = Assumed flow rate, (gal/min)
in newly designed mud. A t opt = optimum nozzle area, (in2)
3. Pressure losses in the circulatory dn opt = optimum nozzle diameters, (in)
system due to friction can be Hhp opt = optimum hydraulic horse power,
reduced by the use of indigenous (hp)
mud. 𝑀1 =Mass of first element, (gm)
4. By the use of indigenous mud, ROP 𝑀2 =Mass of second element, (gm)
can be improved by the optimum 𝜌1 = Density of first element, (lb/gal)
use of drill bit hydraulics which 𝜌2 = Density of second element, (lb/gal)
reduces drilling operation cost. In ECD= Equivalent circulating density,
(ppg)
addition, additives cost to
improve rheology of drilling mud REFERENCES
and cost of disposal and
treatment of drilling mud can be [1] Institute of Petroleum Engineering,
saved. Heriot-Watt University, 2005. Drilling
Engineering by University Heriot-Watt.
NOMANCLATURE
τy = yield point, (𝑙𝑏𝑓/100𝑓𝑡 2 ) [2] Shadizadeh, s. r., and
µp = plastic viscosity, (cp) Zoveidavianpoor, m. (2008).
Page 78
Environmental impact assessment of [11] Lyle E. Nesbitt, Joe A. 34T
onshore drilling operation in Iran, Sanders, 1981. Drilling

1T34 Fluid 1T
Abadan, Iran: Petroleum University of Disposal, Society of Petroleum Engineers. 34T 34T
technology.
[12] Anne Morillon, Jean-François34T 34T 1T 1T34
[3] Okoli Ugochukwu (Addax Petroleum 1T 1T34 Vidalie, Udi Syahnudi Hamzah, S.
34T 1T 1T34 34T 34T
Nigeria), 2015. Optimizing Hydraulics for 34T Suripno, Eddy K. Hadinoto, 2002.
1T34 1T34 34T
Drilling Operations, Society of Petroleum 34T Drilling and Waste Management, Society 34T
Engineers. 34T of Petroleum Engineers. 34T
[4] M. Owusu (Petroleum Commission - 34T [13] K.M. Bansal (Conoco Inc.) | S. 34T 1T34 1T39 1T39 1T34
Ghana) | G.S. Enty (Ghana National 1T34 1T39 1T39 1T34 1T34 1T34 Sugiarto (Conoco Indonesia), 1999. 1T34 1T34 34T
Petroleum Corporation) | A. Osei- 1T34 1T39 1T39 1T34 Exploration and Production Operations -
Twum (Ghana National
1T34 Petroleum 1T34 Waste Management a Comparative
Corporation), 2014. Statistical 34T Overview: US and Indonesia
Characterization of Performance of Cases, Society of Petroleum Engineers.
34T 34T
Biopolymer Drill-In Fluid for Different

[14] U.S. Congress, Office of Technology
Rheological Models, Society of Petroleum
Assessment, Bioremediation for Marine
34T
Engineers.
Oil Spills— Background Paper, OTA-BP-O-
34T
[5]http://www.drillingformulas.com/typ 70 (Washington, DC: U.S. Government

es-of-flow-and-rheology-models-of- Printing Office, May 1991).
drilling-mud/
[15] Sara J. McMillen, Ross Smart, Rene 1T 1T34 34T 34T
[6] Jamal J. Azar, G. Robello Samuel,

34T 34T 1T 1T34 34T Bernier , 2004. Biotreating E&P Wastes:
1T34 1T 1T 1T
2007. Drilling Engineering. 19T Lessons Learned From 1992-2003, Society 34T
of Petroleum Engineers.
[7] Baker Hughes INTEQ, 1995. Drilling
34T
Engineering Workbook. [16] Composition, environmental fates,

and biological effects of water based
[8] Jr. Adam T. Bourgoyne, Keith K.
drilling muds and cuttings discharged to
34T 1T34 1T34
Millheim, Martin E. Chenevert, Jr. F. S.

the marine environment: a synthesis and
1T34 1T34 1T34 1T34
Young, 1991. Applied Drilling

annotated bibliography prepared for
1T34
Engineering (Spe Textbook Series, Vol 2)

petroleum environmental research forum
[9] Jacyra Veloso and Gisele Benedicto 1T 1T39 34T9
(perf) and American petroleum institute,
Dos Santos, 2013. The Challenges for the 1T34 1T
2005.
Treatment of Drilling Fluid Wastes
Generated by E&P Industry in
Brazil, Society of Petroleum Engineers. 34T 34T
[10] EPA, 2000, "development document

for final effluent limitations guidelines
and standards for synthetic-based drilling
fluids and other non-aqueous drilling
fluids in the oil and gas extraction point
source category," epa-821-b-00-013, u.s.
environmental protection agency,
December (available
at: http://water.epa.gov/scitech/wastet
34T
ech/guide/sbf/eng.cfm.) 34T
Page 79
An Application of the SMED Methodology in Textile Industry

Rano Khan Wassan, Muhammad Husnain Siddiqi, Muhammad Asim Aslam,
Muhammad Ahsan, Muhammad Mairaj Saleem, Muhammad Asad Ayoob
Department of Industrial Engineering and Management
Dawood University of Engineering and Technology
Email. mhasnain131.mh@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
Due to the competitive environment in textile industry, there is a need to reduce setup
time. Besides this, product customization has been increasing which negatively effects the
setup time. Thus, there is need of effective technique which can reduce the setup time.
Therefore, Single Minute Exchange of Dies (SMED) has been proposed in this research
work. To show the applicability of SMED, a case study has been carried out in the
changeover activity of printing rotaries of the processing department in textile industry.
The results Shows that the study has achieved more than 36% reduction in setup time,
7min 42sec can be reduced per change over which increases the production more than
2.21% per day. Single Minute Exchange of Dies (SMED) is the approach to increase output
and reduce quality losses.
Keywords: SMED, Internal and External Activity, Setup time, lean Manufacturing.
1. INTRODUCTION
23T goal of reducing changeover times to the
“single” digits (i.e. Less than 10
These days High quality product is minutes). [1]
demanded by customer with reasonable
price in shorter time. It is impossible to 1.2. TYPES OF SMED
23T
achieve this target by using traditional

INTERNAL SETUP: Internal Setup can be
methods of manufacturing. It can only
23T 23T
defined as the operations that can be

achieve through modern techniques and carried out when the machine is stopped
new concepts according to the process. at the time of working. An example in
So to overcome these problems. We have this removal and exchange of die and
used SMED (Single minute exchange of drill bit.
Die) to reduce operation time for the
EXTERNAL SETUP: External setup can be
existing machine.
23T 23T
defined as the tasks that can be carried

out while the machine is in performing
1.1. SMED
the operation. An example in this is an
23T
arrangement and sequencing of printing

(Single-Minute Exchange of Dies) is a
screens.
system for dramatically reducing the
time it takes to complete equipment
1.3. SET UP TIME
changeovers. The essence of the SMED 23T
system is to convert as many changeover

The time passed between the completion
steps as possible to “external”
(performed while the equipment is of the last product of the old series and
running), and to simplify and streamline the completion of the first good product
the remaining steps. The name Single- of the new series.
Minute Exchange of Dies comes from the
Page 80
1.4. CHANGE OVER

23T
selection of the appropriate team and
coordinator, allocation of specific roles
The process of switching from the and responsibilities to each team
production of one product or part number member, training of team and shop floor
to another in a machine or a series of staff on the new methodology and
linked machines by changing parts, dies, changeover standards. By implementing
molds or fixtures. the new tailored SMED improvement
program, the company achieved a 33%
2. LITERATURE REVIEW OF SMED
reduction on changeover time. [4]
23T
Single Minute Exchange of Dies (SMED):

(Vipan Kumar, Amit Bajaj, 2012) describe
Globalization has created the need to
that how the SMED technique is used and
produce small lots, causing a significant
how it helps to reduce the time and
increase in the frequency of setup,
increasing the productivity. The SMED
causing the reduction of times production
technique is implemented on three
for each lot. For this reason, it is
mechanical press machines and
important that changeovers are quick, so
calculated the setup time before and
that the flexibility to respond to demand
after implementing SMED. [5]
is not affected.
(Sivasankar et. al, 2011) Performed the
(Rodolfo Rodriguez-Mendez et. Al, 2015)
experimental verification of Single
discussed the methodology and the
Minute Exchange of Dies and concluded
benefits obtained, which, with properly
that SMED improvement techniques may
forecasted demand, aggregate planning
be assessed both in terms of their
methodology and the synchronization of
allocation to the methodology’s stages
some lean manufacturing techniques
and in terms of their collective
using tools like JIT, SMED make the
representation of a full range of potential
enterprise more competitive in delivery
improvement options. [6]
lead time, improve customer service
level and reduce inventory. [2] (Ana Sofia Alves et.al, 2009) concluded
that the SMED methodology can be
(Jonalee D. Bajpai, 2014) discusses the
combined with other classic tools,
SMED concept and methodology as
providing very positive results for
customized for reduction of style
companies such as chart analysis and
changeover time in garment
statistical analysis allowed the
manufacturing industry and demonstrates
identification and separation of different
a live case that reduced style change
groups for analysis, and added value of
over time. [3]
traditional SMED methodology. [7]
(Pablo Guzmán Ferradás, Konstantinos
(Cakmakci,2008) showed the relation
Salonitis, 2013) The main finding is that
between both the setup time reduction
in addition to SMED tailored
(SMED) and product design efficiency
methodology, appropriate strategy
through quality control technique, and
definition and preparatory activities are
process capability analysis, he also
key enablers for success. That includes
showed that SMED is still a suitable
project targets and timescale definition,
method not only for manufacturing
improvement but also for equipment/die
design development. [8]
Page 81
(Michels, 2007) stated that application of addition to manufacturing, YTM also

SMED methodologies is an effective way provides its customers design and
to analyze, improve and reduce existing distribution services with offices based in
processes used to change over USA, France, Spain, United Kingdom and
manufacturing equipment. This field Canada.
study has shown that it is possible to
reduce the amount of time required to 3.2. PROBLEM STATEMENT
23T
perform a changeover as well as reduce

the amount of direct labor needed to YTM is one of the largest textile industry
perform a changeover through of Pakistan. But they are facing greatest
improvement of processes. [9] challenge relating costumer demand
which required shorter lead time and
(Kayis et al, 2007) described the results setup time. There is a lot of time wasted
of SMED system in three categories due to changeover in printing rotaries. In
namely: Mechanical improvements, order to reduce setup time there is a
Procedural improvements and need to implement SMED in printing
organizational improvements and also rotaries.
concluded that setup reduction (SUR) is
an extremely valuable approach in 3.3. METHODOLOGY
23T
modern manufacturing. To ensure its After studying the different sources we

success it must begin at a grass roots found the procedure to implement the
level of the organization and a constant SMED technique, its procedure is shown
drive towards improvement must come in figure no. 02, it begins with identifying
from all levels of the company. [10] and classifying the internal and external
(Trovinger et.al, 2005) applied the set up to convert internal to external
principles of SMED to pick and place chip setup and streamlining all aspects of
shooter machines and they were able to setup operation.
reduce setup times by removing all
activities that could be done off-line. Identity internal and
They proved that SMED and sophisticated external setup
(computer) methods are interrelated to
each other and having optimum effect
while used in combination. [11] Separate external
and internal setup
3. IMPLEMENTATION OF SMED IN
Internal External
23T
PRINTING ROTARIES IN YUNUS setup setup

TEXTILE MILLS
3.1. CASE STUDY

Converting
23T
To show the applicability of the SMED

Internal External
model, case study has been carried out in setup setup
Yunus Textile Mills Limited (YTM). It is a
vertically integrated textile mill located
in Karachi, Pakistan. The company, with Stream line all setup
annual production capacity of 100 Million operation
meters, is the largest exporter of Home
Textile products from Pakistan. In Figure 2: SMED conceptual technique
Page 82
3.3.1. Identity internal and external

23T 3.3.4. Streamline all setup
23T
setup In this step, the remaining elements are

reviewed with an eye towards
In this step we have classify the Internal streamlining and simplifying so they can
and External setup by using the Internal be completed in less time. First priority
and External Setup sheet as shown in should be given to internal elements to
figure no. 03, in which shows the name support the primary goal of shortening
items and type of setup. the changeover time.
For each element, the team should ask
the following questions: How can this
element be completed in less time? How
can we simplify this element?
4. DATA COLLECTION AND ANALYSIS

23T
THE SET UP TIME FOR COMPARISON

BETWEEN BEFORE SMED AND AFTER
SMED:
After data collection in printing rotaries

Figure 3: Internal and External
the data have been analyzed and
Setup Sheet
reviewed for the purpose of conversion of
3.3.2. Separate external and internal
23T
internal setup to external setup.
setup
After the SMED implemented in printing
In this step segregate the internal and rotaries. The setup time is calculated
external setup sheet to distinguish the before and after SMED implementation.
setup process and it is easy to use at time Table no 1 represent the setup time and
of setup of machine. time save before and after SMED
implementation.
3.3.3. Converting internal to external
23T
setup
Start
In this step convert most process or items
from internal to external setup. It helps
to reduce the setup time of machine.
Data collection
Analyzing
Evaluation
End
Figure 5: Proposed SMED stages
Figure 4: conversion of Internal to

External Setup
Page 83
Data collection
Before After Time

S.NO ACTIVITY TIME
SMED SMED saved
1. Operator Goes to Engraving 1min35sec External External 00
2. 35sec/screen External External 00

Over Screens to Operator
Operator Collect Screens from 1min21sec/scre
3. External External 00
Engraving en
4. Screen Sequencing as Per Design 10sec/screen External External 00
2min 12sec/
5. Material Availability to M/C Internal External 2min12sec
batcher
1min41sec/
6. Squeegee Preparation Internal External 1min41sec
squeegee
7. Lead Clothes Trolley to Fabric 56sec Internal External 56sec
8. Fabric Stitched to Lead Clothes 55sec Internal External 55sec
9. Temperature Maintaining 4min54sec Internal Internal
10. Sensor wire removed 3sec Internal Internal
11. Sensor removed 6sec Internal Internal
12. screen removed 32sec Internal Internal
13. Squeeze removed 25sec Internal Internal
14. removed colour pump 4sec Internal Internal
15. Clean of head 1min18sec Internal Internal
16.
screen took in to machine and fit 57sec Internal Internal
17. squeeze took into screen 24sec Internal Internal
18. Squeeze levelling 1min17sec Internal Internal
Parallel to
19. cleaning of pump 46sec Internal 46sec
16,17,18
Parallel to
20. sensor took and sensor wire 1min12sec Internal 1min12sec
18.
21. colour pump insert 9sec Internal Internal
TOTAL 20mints 7min42sec
Table 1: Set up time (Before SMED

Implementation) and time saved
Table 2: Set up time (Before and after

SMED Implementation)
Before SMED After SMED Time saved

Setup time
20mints 12mints 18sec 7mints 42sec
Page 84
direct causes to increase the productivity

of industry.
6. REFERENCES:
23T
[1] www.leanproduction.com/smed.
[2] Rodolfo Rodríguez-Méndez *,

Diana Sánchez-Partida*, José Luis
Martínez-Flores*, Ezequiel Arvizu-
Before SMED After SMED Barrón ** A case study: SMED & JIT
methodologies to develop
continuous flow of stampedparts
25
into AC disconnect assembly line
in Schneider Electric Tlaxcala
TIME (MINUTE)
20
15 Plant, 2015
10
5
0 [3] Jonalee D. Bajpai, Smed (Single-
Printing Rotary Minute Exchange Of Die)
data
Methodology In Garment
Manufacturing Industry: Case
Study In Reducing Style Change
Over Time, December 12th–14th,
2014.
Figure 6: Graphical representation of [4] Pablo Guzmán

setup time (Before and after SMED Ferradás, Konstantinos Salonitis,
Implementation) Improving Changeover Time: A
Tailored SMED Approach for
5. CONCLUSION 23T Welding Cells,2013
The implementation of SMED technique [5] Vipan Kumar, Amit Baja, The
has given the favorable outcomes for the Implementation of Single Minute
reduction of setup time. This study has Exchange of Die in Machining
proved that reduce setup time with Processes for reduction of Setup
Time, 2012.
eliminating no value adding at time of
changeover. In this paper we have [6] Sivasankar M, Dhandapani N,
implemented the SMED technique in Manojkumar S, Karthick N, Raja K,
printing rotaries. The setup time has Yuvaraj J, Experimental
been calculated of change the screens verification ofSingle Minute
and tools in the machine before and after Exchange of Dies (SMED), Recent
Research in Science and
implementing the SMED technique. After
Technology, 2011.
collection of data it is found that total
setup time of Rotary printing machine [7] Ana Sofia Alves and Tenera,
before SMED implemented was 20 Improving SMED in the Automotive
minutes for single screen and after SMED Industry: A case study, Production
implemented was 12minuts 18sec, the and Operations Management
time saved was 7 minutes 42sec. We Society 20th Annual conference
Orlando, Florida U.S., 2009.
concluded that SMED technique is very
helpful for setup time reduction and it
Page 85
[8] Cakmakci M, Process

Improvement: Performance
analysis of the setup time
reduction – SMED in the
automobile industry, International
Journal of Advanced
Manufacturing Technology, 2009.
[9] Michels T.B, Application of

Shingo's Single Minute Exchange of
Dies (SMED) Methodology to
Reduce Punch Press Changeover
Times at Krueger International”,
Thesis, University of Wisconsin-
Stout, 2007.
[10] Kayis.B and Kara.S, Set-Up

Reduction in Injection Molding
Process: A Case Study in
Packaging Industry,
4thInternational Conference and
Exhibition on Design and
Production of Machines and
Dies/Molds, Cesme, Turkey, 2007.
[11] Trovinger and Bohn, Setup Time

Reduction for Electronics
Assembly: Combining simple
(SMED) and IT-based methods”,
Production and Operations
Management Society, 2005, 14(2),
ISSN 1059-1478.
Page 86
OBSTACLE AVOIDANCE FOR

MOBILE ROBOTS
Nadia Riaz Bajwa, Syed Irtiza Ali Shah, Zahra Fazal, Syed Omer Gillani
National University of Sciences and Technology, Pakistan
ABSTRACT
Collision avoidance generally considers a very high level planning problem. There are
many methods for obstacle detection and avoidance that have been developed and
implemented. The APF (artificial potential field) method gives an easy and effective
method of path planning for practical usage. In Artificial Potential Field robot behaves as
a charged particle that is repelled by the obstacles and is attracted by the goal. Resultant
force vector R is a sum of repulsive forces from obstacles and target-directed attractive
forces. This resultant force vector R is applied on the robot as a rising force, meanwhile
the robot's present position for a particular time is computed, and the algorithm is
repeated. With this approach robot is easily trapped at a local minimum before attaining
its target which is a major problem with this method. The evasion of local minimum has
been a dynamic exploration topic in field of motion planning. In this paper, we introduce a
method to solve this problem which is an effectual process to find out a secure way in the
vicinity of obstacles. Computer simulations and experiments are executed for a mobile
robot to illustrate the potency of the proposed method.
Keywords: - Mobile Robots, Collision Avoidance, Path Planning Artificial Potential Field approach.
1. INTRODUCTION:
24T and direct a route or path and autonomous
robot must do so correctly, in order to move
Obstacle avoidance is one of the safely from one location to another, without
fundamental problems which affect the colliding with obstacles. There is great
performance of mobile robots in real time. amount of research that has been done to
Every mobile robot has featured some kind resolve the issue of obstacle avoidance
of collision avoidance, depending on problem in field of robotics, including the
obstacle avoidance algorithm that work of J. Borenstein and Y. Koren [1], who
determines the path for the robot that proposed a technique for obstacle avoidance
avoids collision of the robot with the in real time that is termed as ‘Vector Field
obstacles and can reach the target Histogram(VFH)’. By employing information
accurately. The most recent algorithms are taken from the sensors, VFH updated its
some overly complicated, as much as these Cartesian histogram grid periodically. This
algorithms not only recognize an obstacle, method comprises of two steps for data
but also involve in certain type of reduction process. Its first step reduces the
cumulative calculations, regarding the polar histogram and its second step finds the
obstacle's measurements. Once the obstacle closeness from the mobile robot
obstacles have been detected, the obstacle which helps the robot in achieving its target.
avoidance algorithm provides guidance to In another study conducted by Y. Wang [2],
the robot about the obstacle and resumes he has managed to develop an algorithm of
movement in the direction of goal. collision avoidance for mobile robots by
Navigation is a process or activity to plan visualizing the environment. By using an
Page 87
embedded camera, this algorithm extracst can recommence its
information from the authentic flow. Y. Koren [8] stated that this
method has limited
image sequence. The technique comprises in

stabilizing the number of left and right side functions and is useful for only a few
circulation in order to keep away from applications. One recently introduced
obstacles. In 2008 Hui and Pratihar proposed commercial system applies this approach on
a collision free, time-optimal algorithm by a floor cleaning robot, which is designed for
using Genetic-fuzzy system and Genetic- cleaning for long hallways.
neural system with a conventional potential Normally, in autonomous exploration,
field method so that mobile robots could environment is supposed to have obstacles,
easily move in the existence of a few fixed both known and unknown, along with the
obstacles [3]. Study conducted by B. Hamner addition of global path planning and local
[4] uses an incremental decision tree to path planning. Global path planning
steer the robot actively until it defines pin generates the overall path with prior
order to avoid obstacles lying in its way and information about environment, and is not
it has used a genetic algorithm to suitable when unexpected obstacles appear
accomplish the intended navigation and in the pre-planned path. Local path planning
suggested a waypoint-based robot steering is the online obstacle avoidance technique,
method. There are various methods having no prior information of the
developed in past to encounter in this environment.
problem. U. Raschke[5] suggested an In this paper, a new algorithm is proposed
effectual system that is able to follow a for obstacle avoidance by mobile robots.
formerly labelled path also responsive and Artificial potential field has also been
active enough to keep away from obstacles implemented. After getting the results from
in its way. The presented system uses laser both methods, a section of this paper has
range finder to detect obstacles along with been solely dedicated to compare those
layered system persistently follows the results. Section 2 explains the grid based
obstacle direction, would be able to re-plan method for obstacle representation. Section
the route where needed and also keep away 3 introduces our Artificial Potential Field
from obstacles. Various methods of obstacle approach that is implemented on a grid.
avoidance are given below. Section 4 describes the proposed algorithm.
Edge detection is the most famous method There is a discussion in section 5 and section
used for obstacle avoidance. Algorithm of 6 represent conclusion.
this method calculates the location of
vertical corners of the obstacle and then
steers the robot about each of the 2. GRID BASED METHOD
detectable corners. By coupling two corners
with a line, it represents one of the In this paper, we created 2d environment on
obstacle’s ends. The line connecting the two MATLAB. The dimensions of this grid are
corners is considered to represent one of the 10*10, that is divided into several square
obstacle’s boundaries. The disadvantage of cells. Every cell (I, J) of a grid has a
this technique is that the robot has to be particular value of C (I, J).In this grid, the
stopped in front of an obstacle for correct location of obstacles and the target location
measurement because of the limitation of are both randomly generated. All the points
the ultrasonic sensors according to C. R. inside the grid have been given value of 1,
Weisbina and S. Bhattacharya[6,7]. except for the obstacles which have been
In autonomous navigation, wall-following given value of 2. Target has been assigned a
method is also used. This method allows the value of 3.
robot to move along the walls at a specific
distance that is already defined by the user.
In case robot has to face some obstacles it
will simply consider them as walls and start
moving along the obstacle’s boundary till it
Page 88
presented by Zhu [13],
which states that negative gradient of
attractive potential is equal to attractive
force.
Fattr = − ∇Uattr = −K attr �q − qgoal �
In the above equation K attr is a scaling

factor and q-qgoal is the Euclidean distance
from the robot’s present position to the
target and repelling forces are computed by
finding the distance.
Fig 1 (a) and (b): Showing obstacles and n
target Urep = Σi=1 Urep (q)
3. ARTIFICAL POTENTIAL FIELD The starting point, target and obstacle

METHOD coordinates have been given to the moving
robot. The distance has been calculated
B. Krogh [9] has proposed a plan to visualize from the current location of the robot, that
forces that are acting on a robot. This is, from all points on the grid to the
concept was further improved by Krogh [10] obstacles, and also from all points to the
considering the robot’s velocity in the range target location. For example, if grid is 10*10
of obstacles. Thorpe [11] has executed this having 100 points then from all these points,
method to off-line path planning and Krogh distance has been calculated from obstacle
and Thorpe [10] propose compound method to robot and target to the robot. Now robot
for global and local path planning that can easily achieve its target by keeping
utilizes a "Generalized Potential Field" itself away from obstacles from starting
approach. Newman and Hogan [12] initiate point which can be defined by the user.
the making of potential functions by merging Navigation is a problem having two main
particular obstacle functions with logical parameters. Shortest path is determined
operations. The above mentioned methods before path planning, which means robot
cannot be employed on a mobile robot in has to follow the shortest path and last is
real time as data is taken from the sensors. obstacle avoidance that is neutralized by
These methods can only generate off-line following the shortest path to get to the
path for mobile robots by assuming known goal, by avoiding obstacles in between.
and recommended world model. Repulsive and attractive environment has
First Artificial Potential field method has been created which will help the robot to
been executed which can be applied on real move to its final destination. Robot and
time sensory data. In this algorithm robot obstacles both have same charges but target
and obstacle behave as positive charges has a different charge. Therefore, the
whereas the goal behaves as a negative repulsive forces present between obstacles
charge. So the robot is attracted towards and robot, and the attractive force between
the goal by some force and repelled by the target and robot, will both work together to
obstacles with some force. The magnitude take the robot to the target.
of this force acting on the mobile robot, is
defined by the distance. The speed of the
robot will get higher, with decreasing
distance between the target and the robot.
Generally, in this algorithm, attractive
forces are computed by using formula
Page 89
Fig 2: Showing repulsive potential fields of

obstacle
Fig 3: Mobile Robot Moving Toward the

Target
Fig.2 shows the obstacles having repulsive
potential which should be avoided by robot.
After that, it was taken to next level. Robot
Also, in determining the attractive and
was served with a path having multiple
repulsive forces, gradient plays an important
obstacles of different sizes and same
role in repulsion of obstacles which has been
repulsive forces as shown in the figure
set by using this formula:
below. It reached the target avoiding
obstacles.
Urep = k r �(x − x0 )2 + (y − y0 )2
As k r is a parameter controlling the shape

of the repulsive force. Attractive forces are
given by the following formula:
Uattr = k g × �(x − x0 )2 + (y − y0 )2
Where k g is controlling the shape of the

surfaces of attractive field. In the figure
below, it can be seen that the path followed
by robot initially had no obstacles. So, the
robot easily got to its target, due to absence
of interference from other forces.
Fig 4: Path Planning of Robot
4. Proposed Method
After applying artificial potential field,

second method was adopted. In proposed
method, mobile robot would not move
Page 90
toward the obstacles, even in the absence surrounded by number of
of the electrostatic force, which was the obstacles, then it collides with obstacles.
soul of Artificial Potential Field. It decides One major benefit would be that it does not
every step of its path that it needs to take, get stuck in local minimum problem that is a
to reach its destination, while on the move. major concern in APF. This method selects
It selects a desired location, and then gets its nearest neighbor if it’s not an obstacle
there by moving on the path, while avoiding then by going to the neighbor it selects next
one and move on to the last point on the
grid but if it’s all
the obstacles in between. As mentioned

before, the obstacles have been given the neighbour from the starting points are
value of 1 and all the other free points have obstacles then it is difficult for the robot to
a value of zero. Therefore, the robot can find a way.
navigate successfully.
In the figure below, the red line shows the 5. DISCUSSION
path robot has taken while avoiding the
obstacles, which are colored black. These In comparison with the already existing
obstacles are randomly generated and the algorithms based on artificial potential field
robot itself calculates the grid value, and this method is fast but less accurate,
avoids them. The major task was to avoid its because attractive force in APF draws the
collision with the obstacles and get to the robot out of scenario when most of neighbor
target. are obstacles and in proposed strategy.
Robot get stuck in that scenario but
advantage over APF would be avoiding local
minimum problem as it get stuck there this
method can handle that situation.
6. CONCLUSION
Obstacle avoidance is a major problem

because for robot to move in an unknown
environment and reach its goal, without
hitting any obstacles, is considered as
complete task. Both methods were
compared and both worked pretty well in a
Fig 5: Path followed avoiding Obstacles in given environment. APF is well known and
black dot easy in implementation but gets stuck
sometimes and our proposed method work
quite well if all neighbors of robot are not
obstacles.
7. REFERENCES
[1] J. Borenstein and Y. Koren. 1991.

The vector field histogram-fast obstacle
avoidance for mobile robots, Robotics and
Automation, IEEE Transactions on, vol. 7,pp.
278-288.
[2] Y. Wang, D. Mulvaney, I. Sillitoe,
and E.Swere. 2008. Robot navigation by
Fig 6: Obstacle collision
waypoints," Journal of Intelligent and
Robotic Systems, vol. 52, pp. 175-207.
As shown in the above figure, if the robot is
Page 91
[3] N. B. Hui, V. Mahendar, and D. K. algorithm for mobile
Pratihar. 2006. Time-optimal, collision- robots in environments with incomplete
free navigation of a car-like mobile robot knowledge. Knowledge-Based System.
using neuro-fuzzy approaches," Fuzzy Sets
and Systems, vol. 157, pp. 2171-2204.
[4] B. Hamner, S. Singh, S. Roth, and T.
Takahashi. 2008. An efficient system for
combined route traversal and collision
avoidance, Autonomous Robots, vol. 24, pp.
365-385, 2008.
[5] U. Raschke and J. Borenstein. 1991.

A comparison of grid-type map-building
techniques by index of performance,
presented at Robotics and Automation,
Proceedings of the IEEE International
Conference.
[6] C. R. Weisbin, G. de Saussure, J. R.
Einstein, F. G. Pin, and E. Heer. 1989.
Autonomous mobile robot navigation and
learning, Computer, vol. 22, pp. 29-35.
[7] S. Bhattacharya and S. Talapatra.
2005. Robot motion planning using neural
networks: a modified theory, International
Journal of Lateral Computing, vol. 2, pp.9-
13.
[8] Y. Koren and J. Borenstein. 1991.
Potential field methods and their inherent
limitations for mobile robot navigation,
presented at Robotics and Automation,
Proceedings of IEEE International
Conference.
[9] B. Krogh and C. Thorpe. 1986.
Integrated path planning and dynamic
steering control for autonomous vehicles,
presented at Robotics and Automation.
Proceedings of IEEE International
Conference.
[10] C. Thorpe and L. Matthies. 1984.
Path relaxation: Path planning for a mobile
robot, presented at OCEANS.
[11] W. Newman and N. Hogan. 1987.
High speed robot control and obstacle
avoidance using dynamic potential
functions, presented at Robotics and
Automation. Proceedings of the IEEE
International Conference.
[12] Oroko, J., &Ikua, B. (2012). Obstacle
Avoidance and Path Planning Schemes for
Autonomous Navigation of a Mobile Robot: A
Review. Sustainable Research and
Innovation Proceedings, 4.
[13] Zhu, Y., Zhang, T., Song, J., & Li,
X. (2012). A new hybrid navigation
Page 92
Applications of Electroencephalography (EEG) in the control of Neuroprosthesis, a

comprehensive review
Ayesha Hasan1, Abeera Jamil1, Jibran Manzar1, Ahmed Hassan2, Tayyab Ahmed Ansari1
1
Department of Biomedical Engineering,
Hamdard Institute of Engineering & Technology, Hamdard University, Karachi
ayeshahasan.great@gmail.com, abeera.jamil245@gmail.com, m.jibranmanzar@gmail.com,
tayyabansari2011@gmail.com
2
Department of Electronic Engineering,
Hamdard Institute of Engineering & Technology, Hamdard University, Karachi
engrahmedh@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
Acquisition of electroencephalography (EEG) signals and its use in Brain-Computer interface
(BCI) is a popular concept for enhancing the effectiveness of prosthetics. The resulting
prosthetics are named as ‘Neuroprosthetic devices’. With the advancement in robotics and
motor control mechanisms, the neuroprosthetic devices are highly promising for
rehabilitation systems targeted to patients with limited limb activity with an added
advantage of minimum assistance requirement. This paper presents a study and tabulates
main aspects of different devices targeting the acquisition of EEG signals. The study then
selects the most effective EEG system based on qualities like ease of operation, speed,
accuracy etc. and then proposes a mechanism to increase the effectiveness of that system
by adding a robust exoskeleton structure to aid upper limb rehabilitation.
Keywords: Electroencephalography (EEG), Neuroprosthesis, rehabilitation.
1. INTRODUCTION: A Neuroprosthetic is a breakthrough in

medical science in the sense that this
According to the study, there are nearly 1 technology allows a person to regain the
of every 50 people living with paralysis or control of one’s limbs or other lost motory
loss of motory functions caused due to functions like hearing, speech & even
accidents, sickness or trauma – sight which have been lost due to
approximately 5.6 million people [1] in Paralysis, sickness or Trauma caused by
total, most of whom never recover. So for some accident using artificial means.
the purpose of helping & rehabilitation of These devices work as an extension of the
these people, various techniques & body & utilize Brain Computer Interfacing
technologies are currently being (BCI) for controlling purpose.
developed from physical therapy to
artificial limbs. When it comes to Brain Computer Interfacing (BCI), also
efficiency, these techniques can known as Brain to Machine Interfacing
sometimes become more of a burden then (BMI), is a hardware and/or software
a blessing. But in recent years, a relatively based mechanism to establish a
new technology has been developed called communication channel between the
Neuroprosthetics which utilize the signals human brains i.e. the controller & the
generated by the brain to control the machine i.e. the controlee. BCI is a vastly
paralyzed or weakened limbs by artificial growing field in medical science mainly for
means. the rehabilitation of lost or paralyzed
Page 93
limbs. BCI devices use the EEG signals The basic assembly of a Non-Invasive BCI
generated by the brain as inputs for consists of electrode caps which are
controlling the motors or machinery in the placed on scalp for picking the EEG signals
prosthetic limbs or exoskeletons. generated by brain. But a number of other
purpose built devices & EEG headsets have
2. TYPES OF BRAIN COMPUTER also been developed by companies like
INTERFACE (BCI) [2] Neurosky & EMOTIV to be used for
The BCI systems can be of two types: acquiring EEG signals.
i. Invasive BCI
ii. Noninvasive BCI
2.1 Invasive BCI:

Invasive BCI devices are the devices which
require surgical implantation directly onto
the brain for recording EEG and provide
the highest quality EEG signals.
Figure 2: Non-invasive BCI

As far as commercial use is concerned, BCI
technology is still in research
development phase as the nature of the
EEG waves can vary from person to
person. So a lot of research is required
before it can be made commercially
Figure 1: Invasive BCI [3]
available.
In Invasive BCI are implanted over the grey
matter of the brain hence this greatly 3. COMPONENTS OF NEUROPROSTH-
enhances their signal quality since there is ESIS
nothing distort them. But they can be
Every Neuroprosthetic or BCI system is
really expensive & in some cases also
basically made up of following major parts
dangerous as they requires surgery to be
i) A signal acquisition system,
placed over the brain’s surface.
ii) Signal Processing & Feature
2.2 Non-Invasive BCI: Extraction system,
Non-invasive BCI offers less EEG signal iii) Signal classification &
clarity as compared to Invasive BCI transmission system &
because skull distorts signal from the iv) Finally the Prosthetic itself
brain. On the other hand, it is considered (i.e. robotic arm, wheel chair
to be safest method for recording EEG in etc.)
comparison with invasive BCI. These
devices are found to be successful in 3.1 Signal acquisition system [3]
giving a patient the enough movement Signal acquisition can be invasive or Non-
capability to operate muscle implants and Invasive but the most convenient & easy
restore partial movement in the limbs. to use method is by using non-invasive
Page 94
electrodes. Although not as accurate as Signals received from Intracortical ECoG is

invasive electrode, they make up their in its purest form. It contains nearly zero
lack of accuracy by being cheaper, safer & artifacts as the signal is picked directly
easier to use as they can be placed or from the neurons with no interference.
removed as required without the need of
surgery which in its self is a challenge. Due to its relatively high spatial
resolution, its usage in source localization
3.1.1 Invasive signal acquisition problem is extensively recommended. But
intra-cortical acquisition could encounter
In invasive EEG, electrodes are placed long term signal variability. This could
directly into or over the surface of the happen as a result of neuronal cell death
brain through surgery, this procedure or increased tissue resistance.
yields the best quality signals as the
electrodes are placed directly on the brain Although being the most accurate, it is
there is very little chance of also the most risky method of signal
distortion/noise to occur in the received acquisition as the electrodes are
signals. The most popular method used for implanted into the brain & the slightest
invasive EEG signal acquisition is mistake during implantation can lead
Electrocorticography or ECoG which, permanent disability or, in severe cases,
depending upon the level of invasiveness even death.
is of two types: Intracortical & Cortical
Surface [3]. ii) Cortical Surface [3]
i) Intracortical [3] In this method, a thin strip of electrodes

is placed on the surface of the cortical
This is the most invasive form of region of the brain. It is a much less
Electrocorticography as in this method, invasive option as compared to
the electrodes are implanted directly intracortical method & acts as a middle
beneath the cortical surface of the brain. ground between invasive & Non-Invasive
Using the electrodes, the action signals signal acquisition.
from each individual neurons are
measured. The number of electrodes on the strip
determines the range of accuracy of the
signal. Higher the no. of electrodes,
better the quality of acquired signal.
The main disadvantage in this method is

lack of maneuverability, as once the strip
is placed over the brain it cannot be
moved. And being a less invasive
technique, it is still involves surgery so the
risk factor associated with brain surgery
still remains.
3.1.2 Non-invasive signal acquisition

Figure 3: Intracortical
Page 95
There are a number of commercially Although being accurate, the Emotiv EPOC
available noninvasive signal acquisition is 6 times more costly than Neurosky & the
systems such as: [4] availability of Emotiv EPOC is also limited
to certain countries.
i) Neurosky Mindwave
ii) Emotive EPOC ii) NEUROSKY MINDWAVE (3 ELECTRODE
RECORDING) [5]:
These devices are able to exports raw
as well as processed EEG data. The Mindwave Mobile EEG headset from
Neurosky is a headset with necessary
i) EMOTIV EPOC (14 ELECTRODE electrodes built-in in the form of ear-clip,
RECORDING): and a sensor arm. The ear clip is used to
provide reference and ground while the
The Emotiv EPOC, is a purpose built EEG sensor arm functions as the EEG electrode
acquisition device consisting of sixteen resting on the forehead. It can easily
sensors that detects many types of brain measure the raw data from the EEG
activities like conscious thoughts, spectrum (i.e. alpha, beta gamma, theta,
attention level and facial languages. With etc.) & using its special E-sense
the addition of gyroscope, the headset can technology, it can also sense other signals
also detect head movements. With a high like Attention, Meditation & Eye blink.
sampling frequency (4 times to that of
Neurosky Mindwave), Emotiv EPOC system
is similar to virtual rehabilitation EEG
devices in terms of performance [4].
Figure 5: Neurosky Mindwave [5]
Apart from the technical capabilities,

another added benefit of Neurosky
Mindwave is that it is far less expensive
Figure 4: Emotive EPOC [12] and it is more easily available all over the
world as compared to EMOTIV EPOC
The signals are much more accurate as
compared to Neurosky Mindwave & can be
The data received from Neurosky
received in the form numbers, graphs or
Mindwave can be in the form of numbers,
waves. The received data can be
bar graphs or simple EEG waves depending
transmitted using Bluetooth and it is
upon the requirement. Signals are
compatible with computing softwares like
transmitted using Bluetooth & there are a
MATLAB & Labview. Also a various
number of applications available from
applications from manufacturers of
Neurosky for the collection & processing
Emotiv EPOC are also available for signal
of the raw data. In addition to that, it is
extraction & processing.
Page 96
also compatible to use with other Non-invasive methods are much better as
softwares like MATLAB or Lab View. compared to invasive methods in the
sense that they are more affordable, more
iii) EEG ELECTRODE CAPS (20-256 easy to use & much more maneuverable.
ELECTRODE RECORDING): Since non-invasive methods do not require
surgery to be placed, they can easily be
The EEG cap consists of a large number of moved over different areas of the head to
electrodes placed in a cap made of rubber acquire signals from different regions of
or some other insulating material & spread the brain.
over the entire scalp.
Another advantage of using Non-Invasive
techniques is the low risk factor as
everyone knows that any surgery has risks
but Brain Surgeries are even more
dangerous as the brain tissue is very
fragile even a minor mistake can result in
complete paralysis, loss of memory or in
severe cases may even result in death of
the patient. Whereas non-invasive
methods have no surgery related risks
Figure 6: EEG electrode cap [13]
involved. So the most obvious choice
The EEG cap uses a large number of would be to use non-invasive method for
electrodes to picks signals from the entire signal acquisition.
scalp so it offers much greater accuracy as
Table 1: Invasive signal acquisition
compared to either of the Non-invasive
methods mentioned above. Attributes Intracortical ECoG Cortical
ECoG
But the biggest downside in using this Accuracy Highest High

method is that unlike the EEG headsets it Signal
High High
is much harder to use the data as the Quality
electrodes pick the EEG signals as analog Mobility Low Low
signals. So the acquired signals must be Risk Factor High High
filtered, amplified, processed &
Cost Low Low
converted into digital signals before they
can be used for controlling any
Neuroprosthetic device. All of this Table 2: Non-Invasive signal acquisition
processing in itself is a big challenge & can
Attributes Neurosky Emotiv Electrode
affect the signal quality if not done
Mindwav EPOC. Cap
properly. Whereas Neurosky & Emotiv e
headsets give you pre-processed signals
Accuracy Moderate High Moderate
which we can used directly.
Signal Low High Moderate
Quality
3.1.3 Comparison
Mobility Highest High Low
When it comes down to a comparison Risk Factor Low Low Low
between the acquisition methods as Cost Highest Moderate Moderate
shown in Table.1 and 2 it is obvious that
Page 97
data. A number of algorithms &

Signal Accuracy techniques are available for the Feature
safety extraction from EEG signals. Some of
Signal Quality these techniques [8] are Time-Frequency
Affordability Distributions (TFD), Fast Fourier
100 Transform (FFT), Eigen Vector Methods
(EM), Wavelet Transform (WT), Auto
50 Regressive Method (ARM), amplitude
values of EEG signs, Band Powers (BP),
0
Power Spectral Density (PSD) Values,
Inracortical Cortical Neurosky Emotiv Adaptive Auto Regressive (AAR) and
surface mindwave EPOC
Inverse Model-Based Features [6].
Although all the above mentioned

3.2 Signal Processing & Feature
techniques are used in feature extraction
Extraction:
from EEG signals, but the most widely
After signal acquisition, the next step is to used methods for feature extraction of
convert the raw signals into computable motor signals (i.e. limb movements) are
signals which can be used as an input or i) Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) &
control signals. This is accomplished by ii) Wavelet Transform (WT).
means of signal processing & feature
extraction. i) Fast Fourier transform (FFT)
3.2.1 Signal preprocessing [6]

Discrete Fourier Transform is a
mathematical conversion mechanism to
In signal preprocessing, the required
convert a finite sequence of discrete,
frequency band is filtered by means of a
equally spaced samples of a function in
band pass filter having cut off frequencies
from its original domain (time or space) to
from 0.5 Hz to 45 Hz. For this purpose, a
frequency domain or vice versa.
5th order Butterworth pass band filter is
For the purpose of real-time computation
used to remove all unwanted frequency
of Discrete Fourier Transform for
signals.
extracting information from complex
signals, Fast Fourier Transform algorithms
By using the filter to reduce the frequency
are developed.
unwanted frequency bands, we reduce the
The EEG signals, acquired in the form of
number of channels & also the amount of
discrete voltage signals in time domain are
features which greatly impacts & reduces
converted to voltage series in frequency
the execution time while increasing
domain (sinusoidal components) called
memory utilization. This greatly enhances
the Power spectrum.
the system performance.
Any signal under observation should be a
stationary signal so that the FFT can be
3.2.2 Feature extraction
applied upon it. Since EEG signals are not
stationary, so in order to apply FFT, the
After preprocessing the next step is the
EEG signals are broken into two or more
feature extraction in which the processed
parts or windows where its stationary is
signal is run through different algorithms
valid. The Fourier transform pairs are
to convert it into usable & meaningful
expressed in equation (1) and (2):
Page 98
factor when performing Continuous

∑ . 0,1, … . , Wavelet Transform. The mother wavelet is
1 ….. (1) derived by performing cross validation as
shown in figure below.
∑ ….. (2)
2.3 Signal Classification & Transmission
! System
" # $ %& ' (
After feature extraction the extracted
features are then classified as different
input or control signals. These signals are
ii) Continuous Wavelet Transform [6,
then transmitted wirelessly via Bluetooth,
10, 11]
Wi-Fi or some other means.
The Continuous Wavelet Transform, as
2.3.1 Signal Classification [6]
opposed to Fast Fourier Transform,
measures the signals in time-frequency For signal classification a Multilayer
domain & provides the time and frequency Perceptron Neural Network (MPNN) is used
information instead of either time or which classifies the signals using a
frequency domain information. The standard back propagation algorithm. The
Continuous Wavelet Transform is recorded data is divided into sets for the
described as: purpose of training & testing randomly.
Extracted features are than classified as
) *, + , - & . ∗0,1 & #& input neurons for the neural network.
" ∗ " # 3& * 4356$ 43 78%"& * The output of the neural network contains
three output neurons for each of the three
The equation (3) pointout function ƒ(t) is movements of the arm. There is no
broken down into a basic functions .s,T(t), specific rule for the number of hidden
known the ‘wavelets’. The variable ‘s’ is layers so multiple tests & adjustments
the scale and ‘τ’ is the translation must be performed so that the system may
obtained after the wavelet transform provide the desired output.
after scaling and translation:
2.3.2 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION:
1 & +
.0,1 & . ∗ : ;
√* * After signals are classified into specific
movements they are than transmitted
It works by converting the continuous time wirelessly using Bluetooth or Wi-Fi to the
EEG signals to small wavelets & then main controller (i.e. Arduino etc.) to be
computing the correlation coefficients used as control signals for the robotic arm.
between the wavelets & EEG signals &
using this correlation coefficient as the 2.4 Comparison between Performances
feature & to overcome the problem of the of EEG Extraction Methods: [7-9]
EEG variation among different individuals
Fast Fourier Transform will not be the
we use the persons own EEG waveform at
optimal choice for signal extraction
rest as the mother wavelet. Because the
because since it only detects changes in
subjects' own EEG signals contain the right
frequency domain, small changes in the
frequency band the ERD/ERS phenomena
EEG signal in time domain may go
occur, the scale factor is omitted the scale
undetected after conversion from time
Page 99
domain to frequency domain. One solution Discrete Wavelet Transform, after

is to increase the no. of stationary populating the mother wavelet of the
windows by decreasing the length of user, is found suitable to be used as the
windows. But this results in increase in feature extraction mechanism for the
computation time and effort required and system. In this way we can have a
may decrease the speed and overall personalized system for a certain patient
efficiency of the system. with minimum possibility of error in
feature detection.
Continuous Wavelet Transform is most
suitable for the analysis of EEG signals. Lastly any prosthetic mechanism can be
The only minor downside is the acquisition designed to address a subject’s particular
of mother wavelet which varies from need. This may be an external mechanism
person to person. The issue of mother for a wide range of movements, as little
wavelet can be resolved by using the as a single finger to as big as a whole limb.
subjects own EEG wave at rest (with no
distractions to the subject) as the mother 5. REFERENCES
wavelet. Since every person has different [1] Christopher reeve, “Stats about
EEG waves because no two individuals Paralysis”,https://www.christoph
think alike, so it is necessary to calculate erreeve.org/living-with-
the resting EEG signals for each individual paralysis/stats-about-paralysis;
accessed on 26 July, 2016.
subject which take only few minutes
(about 10-15 mins) if done properly. [2] Anupama.H.S, N.K.Cauvery,
Lingaraju. G.M; “Brain Computer
Interface And Its Types - A Study”;
International Journal of Advances
4. CONCLUSION in Engineering & Technology, May
2012, Vol. 3, Issue 2, pp. 739-745.
The aim of development of a
Neuroprosthetic system is to provide [3] Sarah N. Abdulkader, , Ayman
Atia , Mostafa-Sami M. Mostafa,
higher recovery rate with minimum
“Brain computer interfacing:
amount of time possible. Such a system Applications and challenges”,
should be flexible, low cost and efficient Egyptian Informatics
mechanism so that it can implemented on JournalVolume 16, Issue 2, July
a subject with minimum effort and 2015, Pages 213–230
discomfort to the subject/patient. [4] Alexander Astaras, Nikolaos
Moustakas , Alkinoos Athanasiou,
With all the techniques studied in the Aristides Gogoussis, “Towards
paper addressing different aspects of a Brain-Computer Interface Control
neuroprosthetic system, we have enough of a 6-Degree-of-Freedom Robotic
information to propose a system which Arm Using Dry EEG Electrodes”
keeps in view the above mentioned Advances in Human-Computer
Interaction, Volume 2013 (2013), 6
requirements.
pages
Proposed system: Neurosky Mindwave, [5] “Neurosky Mindwacve store”,
being easily available and cost effective as http://store.neurosky.com/pages
compared to other EEG devices, shall be /mindwave
the most suitable data acquisition [6] Howida A. Shedeed, Mohamed
mechanism for EEG signals. F.Issa, Salah M. El-sayed, “Brain
EEG signal processing for
controlling a robotic arm”,
Page 100
Computer Engineering & Systems

(ICCES), 2013 8th International
Conference on, 26-28 Nov. 2013,
pp 152-157
[7] Takufumi Yanagisawa, masaYuki
hiraTa, Youichi saiToh et al.,
“Real-time control of a prosthetic
hand using human
electrocorticography signals
Technical note”, Journal of
Neurosurgery, Jun 2011 / Vol. 114
/ No. 6 / Pages 1715-172
[8] Amjed S.Al-Fahoum1 and Ausilah
A.Al-Fraihat, “Methods of EEG
Signal Features Extraction Using
Linear Analysis in Frequency and
Time-Frequency Domains”, ISRN
Neuroscience,Volume 2014 (2014),
7 pages
[9] Ira Jay Rampil, “Fast Fourier
Transformation of EEG Data”,
JAMA, 1984; Volume 251(5), pp-
601
[10] C. Valens, “A Really Friendly Guide
to Wavelets”,
http://perso.wanadoo.fr/polyvale
ns/clemens/wavelets/wavelets.ht
ml
[11] https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Co
ntinuous_wavelet_transform
[12] “Brainwear”,
http://www.emotiv.com/
[13] http://www.gizmag.com/eeg-
headsets-gaming-
neuromarketing/18693/
Page 101
Intelligent Traffic and Smart Lighting Control System

Sajid Iran Khan, M.Nadeem Iqbal, Wahab Ali, M. Usman Khalid,
Mazhar Iqbal, Sajid Saleem

geniusboyever@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
In all around the world, Power consumption as well as traffic congestion is the most severe
problem among all modern cities. The basic objective of the purpose system is to offer a
competent solution to control the traffic jamming and smart lights by using the technology
called infrared technology. That system works to sense auto mobile movement on the
given road. When an automobile approaches, few lights in front of vehicle turn on to their
full intensity at hundred percent as soon as automobile passes the Infrared sensor, the
light of maximum intensity decrease to their minimum intensity like ten percent. That is
all the process works in a loop. That given system offers a complete control of traffic
jamming at the junction too. Where the side of road junction that has high traffic density
needs more time of green signal as compare to low traffic density side so that system also
serve for that purpose. That prescribed system can also be implemented many places like
industries for power conserving the road lights at night time because road lights glow all
the night continuously and a lot of power waste during that time so smart lights also used
to save almost 90% power. The third benefit of that project is to operate all that system
on solar energy. Where in case of an emergency or power shortage that system will
automatically shift to WAPDA or utility.
Keywords: Energy conservation, Infrared detection technology, Street light control

system, Smart lights, intelligent traffic, smart lighting, Congestion control
1. INTRODUCTION:
23T congestion control as well as smart lights
control.
The most common things that can be That system works to sense auto mobile
observed daily on the roads are traffic movement on the given road. When an
lights. It was the best discovery to automobile approaches, few lights in
manage the traffic system and it is front of vehicle turn on to their full
essential for every driver to follow these intensity at hundred percent as soon as
lights and given traffic rules. automobile passes the Infrared sensor,
First time traffic control system seen in the light of maximum intensity decrease
1868 but cant called as traffic lights to their minimum intensity like ten
because that system was not consists of percent. That given system offers a
any lights because it was simple consists complete control of traffic jamming at
of vertical and horizontal arm used to the junction too. Where the side of road
indicate the path for arriving train. Given junction that has high traffic density
existing traffic control system in Pakistan needs more time of green signal as
is very simple and old traditional system. compare to low traffic density side so
In that prescribed research paper we that system also serve for that purpose
offer a complete that presents the [1]. Basically that system controlled
system of two main objective traffic through a microcontroller which
interfaced with infrared technology (IR
Page 102
Sensor) that are placed across the given

road side to sense the traffic density
which changes the timing of junction
according to given high traffic
congestion. The road side across the
junction divided into three basic zones or
regions called as low, medium and high
traffic density zones and according to
these zones system controls the traffic
[2]. That prescribed system can also be
implemented many places like industries
for power conserving the road lights at
night time because road lights glow all
Figure01.Transparent block diagram of System
the night continuously and a lot of power
0T
Hardware Specification:
0T
waste during that time so smart lights

In that part we specify the hardware
also used to save almost 90% power [3].
0T
components. Where the components for

the proposed system are classified based
METHODOLOGY OF Intelligent traffic
on the prescribed components group that
and smart lighting control system
is input, output as well as controller. In
The prescribed system is included the
hardware PIC controllers are use to
three basic parts to complete this study.
control the system. The entire hardware
The basic block is Design architecture
for the planned design and the apparatus
that is the basic and main block function
involved is shown in Figure 02.
for the planned design. Where the second
part is hardware specification which
provides the detail of the components
involved in that given design. The third
and last part is software development
which based on the proposed design that
will briefly describe in software part.
Design Architecture:
The system development is beginning
with the design architecture of the given
proposed design. Transparent block
diagram has been used to outline the
proposed design as shown in Figure 1.
The given transparent block diagram of
system shown in figure 01 which contain
two main components identified as the
input to the system; power and sensor. Figure02.Complete hardware diagram for the
0T
While, two components have been prescribed design

Declared as the output two this system;
display and LED Module.
0T Snapshot of Hardware:
Page 103
There are many stages in software

0T
0T
development which added as the stage of

respond for the integrated sensor.
There are four PIC controllers are placed
0T
at each side of junction that sense the

traffic density and send signal to main
control for controlling traffic congestion
and operate traffic lights.
Figure03.Hardware for street lighting
Figure06.Complete schematic diagram for the

proposed design
In that system, Pulse width Modulation or

Figure04.Sensor Circuit for street lighting PWM is used. PWM used in wide range of
the control application which includes:
speed control, power control,
0T
Measurement and communication. That

PWM technique switches on the power
supply from 5v to 3.3v for controlling the
intensity of LED circuit design purpose.
That dimming light system also called
smart lights in that research paper save
the great amount of power consumption
almost 90% of total power. The complete
flow chart of Congestion control system
working is shown in Figure 07.Where flow
chart of smart light control system is
shown in figure08.
Figure05.Traffic Congestion Control Circuit
Software Development:
0T
Page 104
 Use of solar power to avoid extra load

0T
on national grid station.
3. REFERENCES
[1] Street Light Glow on Detecting Vehicle
Movement Using Sensor, S. Suganya, R.
Sinduja, T. Sowmiya students,Assistant
Professor.S. Senthilkumar,Department of
ECE, EGS Pillay Engineering College,
Nagapattinam (9, November 2014)
[2] Design of Traffic Flow based Street Light
Control System, Vipasha,Centre for
Development of Advanced
Computing,Mohali, Punjab, India Preeti
Abrol,Centre for Development of
Advanced Computing, Mohali,Punjab,
India Preeti Abrol,Centre for Development
of Advanced Computing, Mohali,Punjab,
India(18, June 2013)
[3] Design and Implementation of Automatic
Street Light Control Using Sensors and
Solar Panel, Associate Prof. Vani H.V,
Assistant Prof. M Kiran Kumar,Sharath
Patil Student, Rudresh S.M
Student,Kallendrachari.K Student,
Figure07.Flow chart of traffic congestion control Department Of Eee, Sjmit, Chitradurga,
system Karnataka, India (June 2015)
[4] E – Street: LED Powered Intelligent Street
Lighting System with Automatic
Brightness Adjustment Based On Climatic
Conditions and Vehicle Movements,
Archana M, Chennai,Prof. Mahalahshmi.R,
Department of Electrical and Electronics
Engineering, Saveetha Engineering
College, Chennai(2, April 2014)
[5] Street Light Glow on Detecting Vehicle
Movement Using Sensor, S. Suganya, R.
Sinduja, T. Sowmiya students,Assistant
Figure08.Flow Chart (Light Control System) Professor.S. Senthilkumar,Department of
ECE, EGS Pillay Engineering College,
2. CONCLUSION Nagapattinam (9, November 2014)
 The basic benefit of that system to
0T
[6] Design of Traffic Flow based Street Light
save a lot of power almost 90% of Control System, Vipasha,Centre for
power by using smart lights. Development of Advanced
 Control the traffic congestion and Computing,Mohali, Punjab, India Preeti
Abrol,Centre for Development of
0T
manage the traffic flow.

Advanced Computing, Mohali,Punjab,
 It will minimize human efforts in
India Preeti Abrol,Centre for Development
0T
future especially control the traffic of Advanced Computing, Mohali,Punjab,

through traditional way. India(18, June 2013)
 Economical and easy installation.
0T
Page 105
[7] Automatic Street Lighting System for

Energy Efficiency Based On Low Cost
Microcontroller,Zulkifli Othman, Khairul
Khaizi Md Shariff,Hadzli ,Rohaida Husin,
Syed Abdul Mutalib Al Junid,Zulkifli Abd
Majid,Faculty of Electrical
Engineering,University Teknologi
MARA,Shah Alam, Selangor, Malaysia, (6-
7, June 2012)
[8] Intelligent Traffic Light and Density
Control Using IR Sensors and
Microcontroller,Ms. Promila Sinhmar,
Rawal Institute of Engineering and
Technology Zakopur, Faridabad,(2, March
2012)
[9] Accurate Speed and Density
Measurement for Road Traffic,Rijurekha
Sen, IIT Bombay,Andrew Cross, Aditya
Vashistha,Venkata N. Padmanabhan,
Edward Cutrell, and William
Thies,Microsoft Research India.
[10]Intelligent Traffic Signal Control System
Using Embedded System by Dinesh
Rotake and Prof.SwapniliKarmore,
Innovative Systems Design And
Engineering, ISSN 2222-1727 (paper) ISSN
2222-2871 (online), Vol. 3, No. 5, 2012 |
[11][2] Priority Based Traffic Lights Controller
Using Wireless Sensor Networks by
Shruthi K R and Vinodha K, International
Journal Of Electronics Signals And Systems
(IJESS) ISSN: 2231- 5969, Vol-1 Iss-4, 2012
[12]Road Traffic Congestion Monitoring and
Measurement using Active RFID and GSM
Technology by Koushik Mandal, Arindam
Sen, Abhijnan Chakraborty and Siuli Roy,
IEEE | Annual Conference on Intelligent
Transportation Systems, 2011.
Page 106
Construction of Quad-Copter for Surveillance Purposes
S.T. Hussain
tamoor_319@yahoo.com, sheikh.taimoor@wecuw.edu.pk
ABSTRACT
Quad copters have abilities to work or operate in accidental locations under some critical
circumstances and due to this fact its military use has been remarkably grown during these
days. It is also due to the fact that its human operator will be at a safe location and
distance. Basically, there are two categories of Quad copter in which larger quad copter
are design to have long flight time, less cost and even weapons. While on the other hand
smaller quad copters are designed to do aerobatic tactics and military operations which
are only in feet to meters in size. Quad copters total payload includes the camera weight
and video transmission chip which enable a person to see what is happening in field on a
monitor screen at some 25 meters away from the field.
For commercial and military use, smaller size quad copters can be use and this is the main
theme of this paper. By using modern technology, a perfect version of a smaller size quad
copter can be easily build. Although it is proved before that many enhancements are
possible in designing of a quad copter but we should stick to the point that smaller quad
copters are not only use in military but also in commercial use.
Keywords: Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV), Telemetry
1. INTRODUCTION 2. LITERATURE REVIEW
Quad-copter is a kind of flying vehicle 2.1 Body X-Frame

without a pilot commanding it. At first, After selection, the material (carbon
unnamed aerial vehicle was developed fiber mostly), the shape is another
for military. Quad copter can do a important factor. Square, triangular or
number of actions and movement such as circular shape is best for construction. In
moving up and down, forward and these given option, the most efficient
reverse, along its axis, move to the side shape is square. The frame has different
ways and can do twist easily. But for parts e.g. arms, center space etc. The
observing this kind of behavior, perfect arm length decided on the thrust given
angle handling of the UAV is necessary. by motors to uplift the quad copter. The
On the other hand, the video received propeller is mounted on the end of arms
from the camera that is embedded on of frame. One thing should be kept in
quad copter body is transmit by digital or mind that the arm length should be same
analog signals [1]. This paper provides a and balance on all four arm should also
solution to use the stable UAV be same. Otherwise there is instability.
quadcopter design for practical uses by The frame shape is further divided into
attaching a live video camera to a two categories, one is “+” and the other
remotely Control Quadcopter. is “X” [1]. The difference between these
Page 107
is that how we are controlling the speed of motors and propellers. If we
motors. In the “+” form, we have to use scroll in one direction the speed of motor
one motor while in “X” form we have to (propeller) will increase. If we scroll in
use the two motors on each direction. It opposite direction the speed of the motor
is explained in better way with graphics (propeller) will decreased.
which are given below.
3. STANDARD FLIGHT OPERATIONS
AND THRUST
These are the two basics things that
should be considered before designing of
a Quad Copter.
3.1 Landing and Take-off

Figure 1: X-Frame
All the four rotors in landing mode rotate
in Counter Clock Wise direction because
of the fact that counter clock wise
direction gives negative net thrust on the
quadcopter body, thereby producing
translational motion about the (–ve) Z-
axis. [2], [3] All the four propellers spin
in Clock Wise direction when in takeoff
Figure 2: “+” Form of X-Frame mode because the Clock Wise direction
contributes positive net thrust on the
quad copter body, thereby exerting
2.2 Controlling a Quadcopter translational motion about the (+ve) Z-
axis. [3], [4], [5] Eq. 1 gives the net
The controller processes the signal and
thrust on the body only when all the
also differentiates between the different
propellers are spinning with same
signals to make it useful for different
velocity and in same direction. [2], [6]
motors to fly the quad copter. The quad
copter has many functions such as it can 𝟒
fly upward and downward with different 𝐧𝐞𝐭 𝐓 = 𝒑𝑨 ∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒗𝒊𝟐 (1)
speed. It can also move right & left and
also in forward & reverse direction. 3.2 Hovering
All these functions are controlled Hovering is a state in which a quad
by the remote controller’s transmitter. copter moves with altitude which is
The remote has different buttons. There constant. When the net thrust of all four
are six buttons which control the rotors becomes equal to zero, hovering is
direction of motion. One button is used possible then only. The direction of
for forward motion. Second is used to rotation is always the same for each pair
control the reverse motion. Third button of rotors at each axis. But the spinning
used for the right motion and fourth direction of rotation of both propellers in
button is used for the left motion. The X-axis body frame must be reverse to the
other two buttons are used for applying spinning direction of propellers in Y-axis
the thrust on the quad copter. The body frame so that net thrust will be
scrolled button is used to adjust the equal to zero as shown below in Figure 3.
Page 108
[4] Regardless of the direction of rotation 1. Velocity (v)
of propellers during hovering phenomena, 2. Density of air (p) and
the rotating speed of all propellers 3. Area of cross-section (A) of the rotor
always remains equal. [3], [5], [7] The density of air is corresponded to
Eq. 2 gives the net thrust from the four external conditions of environmental
rotors. factors which always variable type. So, a
real-time air-density reading is
𝟐 𝟒 necessary. At external environmental
𝐧𝐞𝐭 𝐓 = 𝒑𝑨 ∑𝒌=𝟏 𝒗𝒊𝟐 − 𝒑𝑨 ∑𝒌=𝟑 𝒗𝒊𝟐 = 𝟎 conditions, due to this effect the
(2) propeller’s velocity is necessary for the
quad rotor to move up or down or hover
about a constant altitude. That’s why,
the performance of the propellers and
total thrust (overall) of a quad rotor is
settled by a constant reading of density
of air and also. As the area of all four
rotors take part in total thrust of the
quad copter so it is kept constant during
quad copter flight time.
4. VOLTAGE AND THRUST

Brushless motors have most preference of
Figure 3: Hovering use in quad copters because of the fact,
it has low maintenance cost and high
reliability with effective efficiency.
Furthermore, in sections 3.1 and 3.2 the Brushless motors are rated in RPM/volt.
net tangential acceleration is equal to To compute the velocity, we always use
zero. Therefore, during taking-off, the thrust needed, as shown below in Eq.
landing or hovering there is no 4. [7]
translational motion observed in (X-axis)
and (Y-axis). |𝑻|𝒊
𝑽𝒊 = ±√ 𝒑𝑨 (4)
3.3 Total Thrust
A force which exert on the propeller is To rotate a motor at certain Revolution
called as thrust. [4], [7] at a certain per minute Eq. 5 gives the voltage
velocity, it is produced by spin of the needed [4] where ‘r’ is the radius of the
rotor (Eq. 3). Moreover, body will propeller.
accelerate in the direction of its own
𝟏 𝟔𝟎𝑽𝒊
force. Notation ‘i’ in all equations points 𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒕𝒊 = 𝒎𝒐𝒕𝒐𝒓 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕 × (5)
𝟐𝝅𝐫
towards a particular propeller in (Figure-
1).
4.1. Positioning
|𝐓| = 𝒑𝑨(𝒗𝒊)𝟐 (3) Adjusting of angular orientation is require
because it enable the user for correct
In above equation, T could be obtained operation of quadcopter. Positioning is
by using the parameters given in form of pitch and roll angles.
Page 109
(Figure 4) Roll angle is measured with
respect to the rotation of (X-axis) and
Pitch angle is measured with respect to
the rotation of (Y-axis). [5]
Figure 4: Roll and Pitch angles
4.2. Video Transmission System Figure 5: Flow Chart (I)

For the perfect selection of a Quadcopter
for surveillance purposes, choice of video
5.2. Flight Control Process
transmission system is very important in
it. The camera that is embedded on Quad This stage is very important because it
rotor body should have light weight and includes the stability of Quad-Copter.
solid so that it is enough for the UAV to
fly persistently. The camera does not
interfere with the rotors and landing
gear. The chosen video transmitting
system should have abilities to transmit
video at a suitable distance without
losing signal over open space.
5. FLOW CHART
5.1. Software Implementation
This stage represents the operation of

Quad-Copter. This basic stage at once
when the UAV starts performing to
calibrate gyroscope, accelerometer and
ESC for all four motors.
Figure 6: Flow Chart (II)
Page 110
seen from the graph that there is a linear
relationship between load and flight
6. RESULTS
time.
6.1. Fixed Height Test
The flight test was performed with the
help of loads by fixing them on
Quadcopter body. The range of the
attached loads is from 0 to 400 grams.
The used loads were in the form of
mechanical weights that were uniformly
distributed over whole body of the
Quadcopter.
The tests were organized in both

the vacant space and limited indoor
space. The results obtained from limited
space are shown in Table 1. These results
were cross verified by flying the
quadcopter in freely space with the
Figure 7: Test Results Graphically
weights mentioned above in order to
check the difference in performance at
the two conditions. The Quadcopter was 7. CONCLUSION
stabilized by remote control during the
tests and it was flown approximately at This paper basically gives directions to a
the height of four to five feet from the person to select the right and best
ground. possible Quad-Copter for a specific
purpose which in our case is for
surveillance of any certain event. This
Weight Flight Time paper tells us basics about Quadcopter
(gm) (mins) that how to adjust the thrust of the
0 19.90
40 19.10
propellers with the help of voltage supply
80 18.75 to perform standard flight operations. It
120 18.25 also gives us information about the
160 17.95 orientation of quad copter for a specific
200 17.40
flight routine.
240 17.05
280 16.15
320 15.20 8. REFRENCE
360 13.65
400 11.45
[1] 2010 IEEE A. Bachrach, A. de Winter,
Ruijie He, G. Hemann, S.
Table 1: Results of Fixed Height Test Prentice, and N. Roy. RANGE -
robust autonomous navigation in
GPS-denied environments. In
6.2. Graph Robotics and Automation (ICRA),
2010 IEEE International
The above collected data could be Conference on, pages 1096 –
converted in the form of a graph on 1097. MIT, May 2010.
MATLAB as shown in Figure 7. It can be
[2] Robotics and Automation, 2008 Ruijie
Page 111
He, S. Prentice, and N. Roy.
Planning in information space
for a quadrotor helicopter in a
GPS-denied environment. In
Robotics and Automation, 2008.
ICRA 2008. IEEE International
Conference on, pages 1814 –
1820, 2008.
[3] IROS 2007 S. Bouabdallah and R.

Siegwart. Full control of a
quadrotor. In Intelligent Robots
and Systems, 2007. IROS 2007.
IEEE/RSJ International
Conference on, pages 153–138, 9
2007-Nov. 2 2007.
[4] ICRA 2008. A. Censi. An ICP variant using

a point-to-line metric. In
Robotics and Automation, 2008.
ICRA 2008. IEEE International
Conference on, pages 19 –25,
May 2008.
[5] ―Ardu copter --- Arduino---Based

Autopilot for Mulirotor Craft,
From Quadcopters to Traditional
Helis --- Google Project
Hosting"". Code.Google.Com.
[6] Retrieved July 3, 2014 Imu with Kalman

Filter,FromHttp://Cog.Yonsei.Ac
.Kr/Quad/Quad.Htm.
Page 112
MDSRC - 2016
6 Proceedings, 16-17 November, 2016Wah/Pakistan
Wah/Pakistan
Measurement of Leakage Power of Microwave Ovens in 2.4 GHz Range and the Effects
of Shielding Materials on the Leakage
N. Mufti1, J. Khan1, N. Qadar1 and U. Farooq1
1
Department of Telecommunication Engineering
University of Engineering & Technology Peshawar, Mardan Campus
naveedmufti@mail.com
ABSTRACT
Microwave Ovens (MWO) operate in the 2.4 GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM)
Band. Most of the Wireless Local Area Networks
Networks (WLANs) also operate within the same
frequency band, hence creating the possibility of mutual Radio Frequency (RF)
interference. Microwave ovens transmit without taking care of Wireless Fidelity (Wi (Wi-Fi)
channel usage, which can result in degraded network
network performance and even losses in
connectivity. So operation of microwaves in the vicinity of Wi-Fi
Wi Fi Networks is a challenging
problem of Electromagnetic Interference (EMI).
(EMI) In this investigation, the leakage of Brand
A and Brand B microwave ovens is compared
comp d with the help of AirMagnet, in turn, by
placing them at similar distance from the AirMagnet sensor. Lesser esser leakage power has
been observed from the microwave with a higher rate output power. For this the side of
the microwave with most leakage is detected. Then, different shielding materials are
tested for their attenuation capabiliti
capabilities. Also, These investigations can help in further
understanding of the co-frequency
frequency issues like mutual interference and and sharing between
microwave and Wi-Fi.
Fi. They can also enable public in general to take preventive measures
and researchers in particular to carry on further investigations. Manufacturers of
microwave ovens, microwave radiators/emitters and Wi-Fi Wi Fi equipment canc also benefit
from these findings.
Fi, interference, leakage power, ISM, 2.4 GHz, EMI, EMC,

Keywords: Microwave, Wi-Fi,
shielding, WLAN
1. INTRODUCTION A MWO employs microwave radiation

mainly to cook or heat up food.
Microwave Ovens (MWO) operate in the Microwaves are emitted from Magnetron;
2.4 GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Commercial MWO normally uses two
Medical (ISM) Band. Most of the Wireless magnetrons and residential
sidential MWO consists
Local Area Networks (LANs) also operate of one magnetron. Active period for 50Hz
within the same frequency band, hence input is 8msec (out of 20msec) and
creating the possibility of mutual Radio 16msec for 60 Hz inputs [1].
Frequency (RF) interference. Microwave
ovens transmit without taking care of The effects of operation of microwave
Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi)
Fi) channel usage oven on certain key performance
(i.e. whether channel is free or in use), indicators for Wi-FiFi Networks have
which can result in degraded network already been investigated
investigat by Noor Qadar
performance and even losses in et al [11]. In the current paper, the
connectivity. So operation of microwaves
microwav leakage powers of two different MWOs
in the vicinity of Wi-FiFi Networks is a are compared. Also the side of the MWO
challenging problem of Electromagnetic with most leakage power is detected.
Interference (EMI). Different shielding materials are also
Page 113
MDSRC - 2016
Wah/Pakistan
tested for their comparative attenuation residential MWO’s emission is

properties. roughly Isotropic.
3. Time: MWO emits RF power in
2. PREVIOUS STUDIES & RESEARCH periodic pulses.
There are some qualitative methods of Bangay and Zombolas investigated the
observing/ detecting the leakage power problem of interference from microwave
of microwaves [5]. Mahanati et al [1] oven [10], upon reports of leakage from
observe that the main reason MWO ovens. The paper discusses microwave
affects Wi-Fi
Fi Network more than other emission limits and measures Specific
co-frequency
frequency devices is due to its wider Absorption Rate (SAR),, with reference to
spectrum. Wi-FiFi network is adversely any possible ers
dangers caused by
affected by MWO, Wireless Cameras, and microwave oven missions to human
Analog Cordless Phones. WiWi-Fi Channels tissues. SAR is the measure of energy
overlapping with the frequencies used by absorption rate of human body when
Wireless Camera and Analog Cordless exposed to radio frequency
Phone are completely destroyed because electromagnetic field. It was concluded
both these interferers
ers are narrow band that most undamaged microwave ovens
and transmit continuously. Due to their would not exceed the SAR limits for f a
frequency hopping nature, Bluetooth person 30cm away from microwave.
Headsets and Digital Cordless Phones
have minimum impact on Wi--Fi [1]. 3. RESEARCH PROBLEM
YoupingZao et al [4] discuss the leakage This study performs a quantitative

power of MWO, being the major cause of analysis of the leakage power of the MWO
interference
ence to the 2.4 GHz ISM Band, in terms of specific leakage levels
which includes the Wi-Fi Fi and WLAN recorded. Leakage from all sides of the
802.11 b/g. The high output power of the MWO is analyzed. Also, leakage power of
MWO can cause serious threat to the two different makes of MWOs is
performance of WLAN networks. In comparatively analyzed.
hospitals, where large number of MWOs is
used for various purposes, the 4. IMENTAL SETUP
EXPERIMENTAL
performancece of network can be more Practical experiments are carried out by
disastrous. The typical characteristics of using the arrangements such that Brand A
the leakage from MWO are given below in and Brand B MWO are placed at the same
terms of frequency, power and time: distance from AirMagnet [8] to observe
1. Frequency: MWO Leakage has their respective leakage powers being
bandwidth less than 1MHz; so it is received at the AirMagnet Sensor. For
narrowband signal. The supposed this purpose
urpose the same physical location
carrier frequency is 2.45 GHz, was used, turn by turn, for both the
with higher power spikes microwave ovens. In second part of the
concentrated within 2.45
2.45-2.485 experiment, Metal sheet is used as
GHz Range. shielding material to find out which side
2. Power: The Effective Isotropic of the MWO leaks more power. In the last
Radiated Power (EIRP) of MWO part, different shielding mamaterials are
can reach 33 dBm. Also, the tested on the side with maximum
leakage.
Page 114
MDSRC - 2016
Wah/Pakistan
The arrangement for shielding materials 5.2 AirMagnet (Performance Analyser)

is depicted in the Figure 1, showing the The device used to observe the
interferer, the shielding material and the microwave/Wi-FiFi spectra, to record the
sensor: power levels of interferers etcetera, is
the AirMagnet A5220. The two major
components of this device are (i) Remote
Analyzer and (ii) Spectrum Analyser.
5.3 Shielding Materials

Different shielding materials are used for
a comparative analysis of their shielding
effects. Shielding object used in the
experiment was 0.5m x 0.5m. This size
esting of Shielding Materials
Figure 1: Testing
was chosen in accordance with the radius
[from 12]
of the first Fresnel zone [9], calculated
for 2.4 GHz frequency.
6. MEASUREMENTS
REMENTS AND
OBSERVATIONS
6.1 Leakage Power of Brand A and

Brand B MWOs
Leakage power of both microwave ovens
Figure 2: Brand ‘A’ Microwave Oven was measured using AirMagnet. Both
Signal Spectrum [from 12] were placed at similar distance from the
AirMagnet, at the same physical location,
5. TECHNICAL DETAILS OF turn by turn. The microwave spectra
EQUIPMENT USED were observed for one minute period in
each case and the average leakage power
5.1 Microwave Ovens (Interferers)
as measured by the AirMagnet Sensor was
The two microwave ovens used include
determined. The EMC leakage limits set
Brand A (DW131G), with rated power
by US Food and Drug Administration [13]
output of 1000W and Brand B (NNE279W),
and other similar bodies is approximately
with rated power output of 800W. Based
5mW/cm2 when measured in close
on the power output values, Brand B
vicinity of the microwave (approx.
(appro 2
microwave is expected to be better in
inches).
terms of Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC). However, Brand B Microwave is Table 1 shows the average power being
older than Brand A and hence its radiated/leaked from the microwaves as
performance might have deteriorated received by the AirMagnet. As can be
over
er the passage of time of use. Both the easily observed, the Brand B MWO shows
microwave ovens quote their center a greater leakage power relatively.
frequency as 2.45 GHz. This overlaps
directly with channel 9 of Wi Wi-Fi [7].
Figure 2 shows the spectrum of Brand A
Microwave Oven.
Page 115
MDSRC - 2016
Wah/Pakistan
Table 1: Table Leakage Power of Brand packing material, hardboard and metal)
A and Brand B Microwave Ovens are placed near the front of the
Microwave Average Measured
Oven Power
Table 2: Table Leakage Power of Brand
A and Brand B Microwave Ovens
Brand A -58
58 dBm
Position of Left Right Front Top
Metal on Brand B -30
30 dBm
MWO
microwave forr comparative analysis of
Power (dBm) -38 -37 -52 -37 the attenuation power. It was observed
that metal was most effective, providing
maximum attenuation to the
radiation/energy leaking from the Brand
6.2 Effect of Placing Metal Shielding
AMWO.
Material on all sides of MWO
In this part of the experiment, the Brand 7. CONCLUSIONS
A microwave oven was placed in near
vicinity of the AirMagnet Sensor as Brand A microwave oven has lesser
compared to the previous part of the leakage power as compared to Brand B.
experiment, so that the shielding does This is despite the fact that Brand AMWO
not attenuate the leakage power to such is more powerful, in terms of its rated
an extent that it cannot be detected by power output (1000W) as compared to
the AirMagnet sensor. Metal Sheet is used Brand B (800W), though Brand B
as a shielding on each side of the Brand Microwave has been in use for longer
AMWO to observe which
w side period of time than the other.
radiates/leaks the most power. The
The front side of MWO has more leakage
power is observed using the AirMagnet for
as compared to other sides. This is
1 minute time interval and the average
probably because all other sides have the
value of the power received by the
metal body of the microwave as a
AirMagnet sensor is used.
shielding material while the front is made
The results of the table indicate that the of glass. However, using metal sheet as
effect of shielding is mostt effective on shielding material had lesser effect on
the Brand AMWO at its front part of the the sides as compared to the front,
body. The shielding and resulting probably because the leakage from sides
attenuation of EMI on other sides is had already been attenuated by metal
similar. sheet that formed body of the microwave
oven.
The shielding experiment was performed
on one microwave only because both Metal is the most effective shielding
were expected to behave similarly, in material by comparison to hardboard,
terms of the side with the most leakage glass and packing material.
(front).
These investigations can help in further
6.3 Effect of Placing Different Shielding understanding of the co-frequency
co issues
Materials like mutual interference and sharing
Taking the lead from the above results, between microwave and Wi-Fi.
Wi They can
different shielding materials (glass, also enable public in general to take
Page 116
MDSRC - 2016
Wah/Pakistan
preventive measures and researchers in Leakage for 802.11 WLAN

particular to carry on further Interference Management”, IEEE
investigations. Manufacturers of International Symposium on
Microwave, Antenna, Propagation
microwave ovens, microwave
and EMC Technologies for
radiators/emitters and Wi-FiFi equipment Wireless Communications, 2005.
can also benefit from these findings. MAPE 2005.
[5] wikiHow,, “How to Check a
Microwave
ave for Leaks”, Internet
8. FUTURE WORK source,
‘http://www.wikihow.com/Check
Shielding materials were used on one -a-Microwave-for
for-Leaks’,
MWO in this study. Same materials can be Accessed 19 August 2014
used for the other er microwave and [6] CISCO Systems,
Systems “Regulatory
comparisons can be drawn between the Compliance and Safety
effects of shielding on both. Also, the Information for the Cisco Small
effects of simultaneous operation of two Business Routers and Access
Points (EMC Class B Devices)”,
or more microwaves on Wi--Fi Networks
ct Literature, 2009
Product
can be analyzed in future. Also, leakage
can be quantitatively analyzed by [7] IEEE,, "IEEE 802.11-2007:
802.11 Wireless
LAN Medium Access Control (MAC)
developingg a leakage measurement
and Physical Layer (PHY)
model for local microwaves. specifications". IEEE. 2007-03-08.
9. REFERENCES [8] Fluke Networks,

Networks “AirMagnet
Enterprise: User Guide”, Part No.
[1] A. Mahanati, N. Carlsson, C. AME-v10.1-USG--01-0512, Fluke
Williamson and M. Arlitt,
Arlitt Corporation 2012
“Ambient Interference Effects in
Fi Networks”, NETWORKING
Wi-Fi [9] ITU-R
R Recommendation P.526,P.526
2010, 9th International IFIPTC & “Propagation by Diffraction”, ITU-
Networking Conference, Chennai, R P.526-13,, 2013
India, May 11-15,
15, 2010. [10] M. Bangay and C. Zombolas,
Zombolas
[2] T.M. Taher, A.Z. Al-Banna, J.L. “Advanced Measurements of
LoCicero, and D.R. Ucci,
Ucci Microwave Oven Leakage”,
“Characteristics of an Australian Radiation Protection
Unintentional Wi-FiFi Interference and Nuclear Safety Agency and
Device – The Residential EMC Technologies Pty Ltd, ARPS
Microwave Oven”, Proc. IEEE Annual Conference;
nference; Hobart, TAS
Military Communications (Australia); 26-29
29 Oct 2003
Conference,
ce, Oct. 2006 [11] N. Qadar, J. Khan, U. Farooq&
[3] T. M. Taher, M.J. Misurac, J. L. N. Mufti,, “Investigating The
Lo Cicero, D.R. Ucci“Microwave
Ucci Effects Of Microwave Oven On
Oven Signal Interference and The Performance Of Wi-Fi
Wi
Mitigation for Wi
Wi-Fi Network”, 12th International
Communication Systems”, Conference on Frontiers of
Consumer Communications and Information Technology 2014
Networking Conference (CCNC) (FIT2014),, Islamabad, Pakistan,
2008 December 2014
[4] Y. Zhao, B. G. Agee and J.H.
Reed, lation
“Simulation and
Measurement of Microwave Oven
Page 117
MDSRC - 2016
Wah/Pakistan
[12] N. Qadar, J. Khan and U.

Farooq,, “Investigating The
Effects Of Microwave Oven On
The Performance Of Wi-Fi
Wi
Network”, Undergraduate Final
Year Project Thesis,, University of
Engineering & Technology
Peshawar, Mardan Campus
Camp
[13] "Microwave Oven

Radiation."Radiation-Emitting
Emitting
Products.. US Food and Drug
Administration, 10 Aug. 2014.
Web. 01 Feb. 2016
Page 118
Room and Sheilding Design for 6MV Linear Accelator

Engr. Adeel Saleem1, Engr. Rabia Arshad2, Engr. Danista Khan3
P P P P P
1
PDepartment of Electrical Engineering
P
The University of Lahore

adeel.saleem@ee.uol.edu.pk
2
P Department of Electrical Engineering
P

rabia.arshad@ee.uol.edu.pk
3
P Department of Electrical Engineering
P

danista.khan@ee.uol.edu.pk
ABSTRACT
In this paper, room designing and shielding assessment was carried out for 6MV linear accelerator.
Discussing the all types of radiations and the basic principles to reduces such type of radiations by
shielding. Calculations for room design with maze were done. Three materials concrete, steel and
lead were used as shielding material. Thickness of each wall was calculated for each of three
materials in accordance with PNRA regulation. It was found that shielding thickness for concrete is
larger than lead and steel while shielding thickness for lead is smaller than steel and concrete.
According to economical point of view, availability & easy accessibility, concrete was chosen for
shielding purpose.
ABSTRACT
The paper abstract in English, of no more than 200 words. It should be the same text than
the approved abstract. It should not include any mathematical symbols, figures, tables or
references. It is required that all authors have the draft article reviewed for language
proficiency before submitting it to the editorial panel for review.
Keywords: Keyword1, Keyword2,...
1. INTRODUCTION latter are able to repair them and

function properly [1].
The discovery of X-rays in 1895, There are two types of radiotherapy,
radioactivity in 1896 and Ra-226 in 1898 Teletherapy or external beam
altered the course of medicine towards radiotherapy is the application of
the radiation. Radiotherapy is the radiation that has been externally
treatment of cancer and other diseases produced by a linear accelerator or
with ionizing radiation. This radiation Co-60 machines. Linear accelerators and
deposit their energy to the cells that bettor are machines that produce X-rays
injuries or destroys cells in the area of increasingly greater energy.
being treated by damaging their genetic The leading radiotherapists throughout
material. Although radiation damages the world have pointed out that several
both cancer cells and normal cells, the types of cancer can be better controlled
Page 119
and treated today using high-energy The quantity recommended for shielding
radiation than was possible earlier. design calculation when neutrons, as well
The International Commission of as photons, are present is Dose
Radiological Protection (ICRP) has Equivalent.
recommended that all exposure should
be kept as low as reasonably achievable 1.5 OCCUPANCY OF THE AREA TO
(ALARA), economic and social factors BE SHIELDED
being taken into account [2]. It is the fraction of time a particular
Adherence to established rules reduces place is occupied by staff, patient or
radiation risks to extremely low level. public. Its range of value is from 1to
0.06. According to NCRP 49[4] and values
1.1 PRIMARY RADIATIONS: are given in table 1-1[3].
Primary radiations, also called the useful
beam, are radiation emitted directly Occupancy Type of area
from the equipment that is used for 1 Fully Occupancy: work area
U U
patient therapy. such as offices, shops etc

0.25 Partially
U Occupancy: U
Corridors, rest rooms etc

1.2 SECONDARY RADIATIONS:
0.06 Occasional Occupancy:
It is the radiation scattered from or
U U
waiting rooms, toilets

produced by interaction with the patient stairways etc
and other objects as well as the leakage Table 1-1 shows occupancy and type of
radiation from the protective housing of area shielded
the source. 1.6 LIMITED VALUE IN THE AREA
1.3 BASIC PRINCIPLES: TO BE SHIELDED
Exposure of individuals to primary and The limited value of controlled area is
secondary radiations can be reduced by 0.0001Sv/week and for uncontrolled area
the following methods: 0.00002Sv/week. The limited values are
• Increasing the distance between given in table 1-2[5]
the individual and the source of Application Occupational Public
the radiation, Whole Body 20mSv/year 1mSv in
• Limiting the exposure time Effective year
• Interposing protective shielding dose
between the individual and the averaged
over 5 years
radiation sources.
Maximum is
As there is no much control over time and 50mS/year
distance for staff therefore, adequate Annual equivalent dose of
shielding design is essential during Eye 150 mSv 15 mSv
planning and building and radiotherapy Skin 500 mSv 50 mSv
facility. Hand & Feet 500 mSv 50 mSv
The main purpose of shielding is to limit Table 1-2 shows values for occupancy and
radiation exposure of staff, patients, type of area shielded
visitors and the public to acceptable
2. METHODOLOGY
levels and to optimize protection of
2.1 LOCATION:
patients, staff and the public.
The suitable location for radiotherapy
1.4 BASIC QUANTITIES ABOUT departments I hospital is the boundary
RADIATION SHIELDING: area, to overcome the radiation
Page 120
protection problems [5]. It is also. 2.7 CONCRETE:

Shielding of rooms below ground level Concrete is an inexpensive and easily
excavation, watertight ceiling and available shielded material. This
providing access are important issues. shielding material is used for the high-
While for rooms on or above ground level energy machines (>10MV). The density of
the shielding of walls is an important concrete is variable which depends upon
area. the area.
2.8 LEAD:
2.2 ACCESS: Lead is also a shielding material, which
Access must be considered for delivery has great importance to shield the
and replacement of treatment unit. Any radiation. It has advantage of high atomic
entrance to the root should be the number and density. The density of lead
shielded door. The public and the of lead is 11.35 gm/cm3 this value is
P P
member should not be allowed to go near larger than the density of concrete.
the areas of radioactive sources. 2.9 STEEL:
2.3 ROOM SIZE: Steel can also be used in situation where
The machine manufacture should provide space is important. Due to its more rigid
minimum room dimension. The size of properties, it still needs external
the room actually depends upon the type support. The density of steel is
of treatment. 7.8gm/cm3.P P
2.4 DOOR AND INTERLOCKS: 2.10 EARTH:

Usually a motorized door is used during Earth is also commonly used, very
radiation exposure and also for inexpensive shielding material. Its
emergency purposes. A motorized door density is 1.5gm/cm3 (95lb/ft3).
P P P P
requires a sensor to save the patients and 2.11 POLYETHYLENE:

staff from injuries. Is a door is opened Polyethylene is the best neutron shielding
then interlocks are used to prevent and material available but it is relatively
exposure. expensive.
After normal working hours a barrier can 3. RESULT
also be used to restrict the access to the Different quantities, which are used or
treatment room. Security threats can be calculated, are shown with different
analyzed to determine the barrier quantities and their values in table 3-1.
characteristics. Sr Quantities Values
2.5 TREATMENT CONTROL AREA: #
The area where workers control the 1 Number of patients 40
machine is called treatment control area. per week
Control area should be large enough and 2 Treatment 3×5
time(days×hours)
equipment like TV monitors, computer
3 Occupancy factor (T) 1
terminals, electronic portal imagining 4 Use factor (U) 1
should be there. 5 Limiting value (P) 0.0001
2.6 PATIENT OBSERVATION AND 6 Work load (W) 40×3×5=600
COMMUNICATION: Table 3-1 shows different quantities with
For video communication close circuit TV their use values.
is used to observe the treatment of the Different radiations used with different
patient. An audio communication should material of walls are shown in table 3-2.
also be provided between treatment Radiation Concrete Lead Steel
control area and room. Primary 0.343 m 0.055 m 0.098 m
Page 121
Beam middle of treatment room. By applying

Secondary 0.279 m 0.04 m 0.08 m accelerator at middle we get better
Beam result during operation or any other
Table 3-2 Tenth value layer (TVL) for 6MV usage. This linear accelerator is used
X-ray energy [6] mostly during cancer treatments and we
getting absolute result from linear
The source was considered in one third of accelerator. Hence, we referred to install
the room for room design with maze. The this at middle of treatment room.
thickness of the brick is calculated based
on fact that it has a composition similar 5. FUTURE RECOMMENDATIONS:
to that of concrete but differ in density.
The density of concrete is 2.35g/cm3.
If we install linear accelerator at the
P P
Graph of thickness of walls required of

floor of basement then there will be less
different materials as shown in figure 1.
shielding required and less quantity of
Thus the concrete thickness values are
concrete will use for this purpose.
adjusted for the difference in the density
to obtain the same required rate per unit 6. REFERENCES:
area [7].
2 [1] Faiz M. Khan, “The Physics of

1.8 Radiation therapy”, Third Edition,
1.6
Lippincott Willims & Wilkins, USA (2003)
[2] URL: http://pnra.org
3TU U3T
1.4
[3] McGinley P. “Shielding of
1.2
Radiotherapy facilities” Medical Physics:
1
Thickness in m
Medicine 1998
0.8 [4] National Council on Radiation
0.6 Projection and measurements,
0.4 “Structural Shielding design and
0.2
Evaluation for medical use of X-rays and
Gamma rays of energies up to 10MeV”.
0
Lead Steel Concrete NCRP Report No.49, NCRP, Washington,
DC (1976) NCRP report No. 49.
[5] International Atomic Energy Agency,
Figure 1: Graph of thickness of walls Radiation Protection in the design of
required of different materials. radiation therapy Facilities”, Safety
Reports Series No. 47, IAEA, Vienna
4. CONCLUSION:
(2006)
The main objective of the study was to
[6] NELSON, W.R., LARIVIERE, P.D.,
design room and shielding assessment for
Primary and leakage radiation
6MV linear accelerator, which would be
calculations at 6, 10 and 25 MeV, Health
helpful for the installation of linear
phys. 47 (1984).
accelerator at INMOL and other medical
[7] International Atomic Energy Agency,
centers in Pakistan. From the results it is
Design and Implementation of a
concluded that wall and ceiling needed
Radiotherapy Program: Clinical, Medical
more thickness and no more thickness
Physics, Radiation Protection and Safety
required. Values of thickness change
Aspects, IAEA-TECDOC-1040, Vienna
when we will install linear accelerator at
(1998).
Page 122
Voice controlled wheelchair

Shahroz Ahmad1, Muhammad Faraz2, Yasir Iqbal3, Mateeb Ahmad4
1
Department of Electronics Engineering
University of Engineering and Technology Taxila
shahroz.17@live.com
2
Department of Electronics Engineering,
muhammad.faraz@uetttaxila.edu.pk
3
Yassir.iqbal1207@gmail.com
4
Mateebahmed29@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
With the advancement in the field of science and technology, different products have been
developed to make life comfortable for physically disabled people. In this work a voice
controlled wheel chair is developed in order to assist the physically handicapped and elderly
persons who are not able to move well. Another objective achieved in this work is that
wheelchair developed is cost effective. This work consists of the following parts: Hardware,
software, components interfacing and testing. Wheelchair works by simply giving the
commands orally, such as start, stop, back, left and right. A voice recognition module is
used to convert the speech into a digital form which is accepted by the Arduino. The output
pins of Arduino are connected to an H-bridge circuit, which controls the directions (forward,
reverse, left and right) of motors attached to wheels. This makes the wheelchair
comfortable for the people without hands, or paralyzed.
Keywords: wheelchair, voice recognition module v3, motors, disable.
1. INTRODUCTION wheelchair to take the tour including the

services from a servant. As the society and
Wheelchair has been around for many technology progressed the role of wheel
centuries but early wheelchair was used to chair also changed. In the 20th century
move from one point to other point. The first motorized wheelchair was introduced
first wheel chair was designed back in 5th [2].
century by Chinese people [1]. They use to
move heavy object using wheel borrow Wheel chairs have been categorized in
which led the concept of moving people as different types for different purposes.
well .The picture of king Philip II of Spain
was found using wheelchair in 1595 .  Manually propelled
In 1887 people of Atlantic City introduced  Transport wheelchair

wheelchair for invalid tourists to let them
 Electric powered
take the tour of their city on it. After some
time unhealthy person also rented the  Other variants
Page 123
 Sports variants handicapped. And the number is

increasing day by day due to road
 All terrain variants accidents and diseases. The percentage of
physically handicapped people is more.
In adults, independent mobility is an
There are many diseases and injuries
important factor of self-worth or self-
which causes a person to use wheelchair
esteem and plays a vital role in "aging in
these diseases and injuries includes brain
place." For example, if older people find
injury, stroke, fracture, amputation,
it increasingly difficult to walk or wheel
pulmonary disease, neurological disorder,
then they might reduce this hindrance by
musculoskeletal and spinal cord injuries.
not doing it often and drinking less fluid to
For elder people arthritis is one of the
control their urination. If they become
major problem to use wheelchair. Study
unable to walk or wheel themselves to the
shows that continuous use of joystick is
required destination in a house and help is
very painful for arthritic patients. The
not readily available when needed, then
major issue of these people is their
moving such adults to a more helpful
transportation. It is also very painful for
environment is necessary.
them too when they have to go washroom.
Mobility limitations are the leading cause A servant is required 24/7 for their help.
of functional limitations among adults,
with an estimated prevalence of 40 per 3. FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
1,000 persons age 18 to 44 and 188 per
1,000 at age 85 and older [3]. Mobility
difficulties are also strong indicators of
activities of daily living (ADL) and
instrumental ADL disabilities because of
the need to move to accomplish many of
these activities. In addition, if a person’s
mobility is impaired then it leads to
decreased opportunities to socialize and
learn and therefore leads to isolation,
anxiety and depression. For example, 31
percent of people with major mobility
difficulties were found to be frequently
depressed or anxious compared with only
4 percent of people without mobility Figure 3-1: Flow Chart
difficulties. The functional block diagram of the work
is shown in Figure 3-1. A microphone is
Smart wheelchairs have been the subject
used as an input for voice commands. This
of research since the early 1980s and their
voice signal is then fed to voice
trend is now increasing throughout the
recognition module V3. This module stores
world.
the voice signal as well as convert it into
2. PROBLEM STATEMENT a signal which can accepted by UNO
Arduino board. At the output side of
Handicaps and disable persons are always Arduino, this converted signal is used to
a very major concern of our society. The control the direction of motors to operate
survey of world health organization (WHO) the wheel chair.
reports that around 70 million people are
Page 124
rpm. There construction is easy and they

have high starting torque. They are used
4. CONTROL METHOD in many application. The motors that are
In this work we use open loop control used in this work are commonly known as
method as shown in figure 4-1. In open power window motors. They are easy to
loop method there is no feedback system. understand and have very low cost. Dc
Open loop methods are easy to implement motors are best option for using in battery
and are less expensive. In this work we operated wheelchair because we don’t
assumed that controller of a wheelchair have to use any circuit to convert the dc
can see properly and can handle the into ac.
hurdles coming in his way.
6.1 Advantages of DC gear motor
 High starting torque
 Construction is simple
 Simple design
 Low cost
Figure 4-1: Control method
 Maintenance is easy
5. COMPONENT LIST
7. WHEELS
 Wheelchair regular size
Wheelchair used in this work is regular
 Voice recognition module V3 wheelchair as shown in figure 7-1. It can
be seen that it has two big and two small
 Motor driver circuit
wheels. It is the most common wheelchair
 Relays available in market. Diameter of the rear
wheel is 13 inches and diameter of front
 Vero board wheels are 3 inches.
 Battery 12V , 12Ah
 Microphone
 Transistors
 Switches
 2 Power window motors 12V ,8-10

A
 Battery charger
Figure 7-1: Wheelchair
 Resistors
8. VOICE RECOGNITION MODULE
6. DC GEAR MOTOR Voice Recognition Module V3 shown in
In this work two dc gear motors are used figure 8-1 is a compact and easy to use
for both right and left wheel. Dc gear voice recognition board. This module is
motors are easy to use. They have low speaker dependent. It can support up to
Page 125
80 voice commands and maximum 7 voice

command could work at the same time.
Any command in any language can be used
in this product. The user has to train the
module first in order to use it.
There are two controlling ways: Serial Port

(full function), General Input Pins (part of
function). General Output Pins on the
board could generate several kinds of Figure 9-1 H-bridge Circuit for Left
waves while corresponding voice Motors
command was recognized [4].
Figure 9-2 H-Bridge Circuit for Right

Motors
10. BATTERIES
There are three types of different
Figure 8-1: Voice recognition module
batteries which can be used in electric
V3
wheelchair.
9. MOTOR DRIVING CIRCUIT
1. Wet batteries
There are several circuits and ICs in
market which are used for driving motors. 2. Dry Batteries
One of the most common circuit is called
H-bridge circuit. It is called H-bridge 3. Gel batteries
because it makes a shape like H alphabet. 4. Absorbed glass matt batteries
It is one of the most popular type of motor
driving circuit. The battery we used is simple dry battery
which is easily available in market. The
H-bridge is an electronic device which cost of dry battery is a bit higher than
allows the voltage to be applied in either local car batteries but the life time and
direction on load. It is used with DC efficiency of dry batteries are more than
motors to operate them in two directions car batteries. They are more reliable to
i.e. forward and backward. The direction use in electrical wheelchair.
of rotation of motors can be change by
changing the current direction of 11. TESTING AND RESULTS
armature and field winding [5].
Following tests were done in order to
Figure 9-1 and Figure 9-2 shows the actual evaluate the efficiency of the wheel chair.
H-bridge circuit used for left side and right
side motors.
Page 126
11.1 Speed Measurement: 11.3 Accuracy of V3 module at a noisy

environment:
Speed of the wheelchair was measured
with an operator weight 42 kg. Several To test the percentage accuracy of the
trials were conducted for distance of up to voice recognition, a series of 10 trials
were also conducted in a noisy
2 m, and the time for each trails was
environment and the responses of the
recorded. Therefore the calculated and system was observed. The following
actual speeds found was: results were obtained as shown in table
11.2.
Calculated speed (𝑽𝒄𝒂𝒍𝒄𝒖𝒍𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒅):
Table 11.2: Accuracy Table in Noisy
𝜋×𝑛1 ×𝐷1
=
𝜋×80 𝑟𝑝𝑚×0.33𝑚
= 𝟏. 𝟑𝟖 𝒎⁄𝒔 (1) Environment
60 60
Trials Percentage accuracy
Experimental Speed (𝑽𝒂𝒄𝒕𝒖𝒂𝒍):
ON 70%
Weight of the Testing person = 42 kg.
OFF 80%
Distance: 2 m
RIGHT 70%
Time: 1.6 sec
2𝑚 LEFT 60%
𝑉𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑎𝑙 = 1.6𝑠
= 𝟏. 𝟐𝟓 𝒎⁄𝒔 (2)
BACK 60%
11.2 Accuracy of V3 module at a
noiseless environment:
To test the percentage error of the voice
recognition, a series of 10 trials were 12. FUTURE ENHANCEMENT
conducted in a noiseless environment and A lot of contribution is needed in electric
the responses of the system was observed. wheelchair market. People are unaware of
The results obtained are shown in table the ease of use of electric wheelchair and
11.1. they still think that electric wheelchair
are very expensive but in this work effort
Table 11.1: Accuracy Table in Noiseless was made to design and develop low cost
Environment
electric voice controlled wheel chair.
Trials Percentage Accuracy
The main area of essential enhancement
is noise elimination in order to get best
ON 90%
results of voice recognition. Many erudite
OFF 90% methods such as Real-time adaptive noise
cancellation for speech recognition can be
RIGHT 80% used.
LEFT 90% Also a well dependable closed loop control

method required for the safety of the
BACK 80% users. To ensure the operation to work
perfectly such as starting, stopping, and
breaking PID controller may be used in
addition with torque sensors and speed
feedback.
Page 127
Possible additions to this work: International Conference on Smart

Technologies and Management for
One or more of the following feature Computing Communication Controls
might be added to it. Energy and Materials (ICSTM), 6-8 May, pp
1. Emergency stopping. 366-371.
2. User Bio-Feedback. [5] Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Sarmad

Naimi, Sepehr Naimi. The AVR
3. GPS emergency system. microcontroller and embedded system,
Using assembly and C, 1st edition Pearson.
4. Battery charging through solar
13. CONCLUSION
In this work we have successfully designed
and executed an electric wheelchair
controlled through voice recognition
module. The total cost was approximately
Rs.25000 including the cost of the
wheelchair. It will help a lot of people who
are physically disabled without relying on
someone else’s help or aid. The voice
recognition command system worked for
most of the commands with the accuracy
of around 90% in silent environment and
around 50-60% in noisy environment but as
we discussed above this accuracy can be
increased.
14. REFRENCES
[1] Maggie Koerth-Baker. 2012 "Who
Invented the Wheelchair?”. Mental Floss
Inc. Retrieved 25 May.
[2] Johnson, Nelson. 2012-02-01.

Boardwalk Empire: The Birth, High Times,
and Corruption of Atlantic City (Kindle
Ed.). Independent Publishers Group. p. 28
[3] Richard C. Simpson. 2005. "Smart

wheelchairs: A literature review", The
Journal of Rehabilitation Research and
Development, July/August 2005, pp 423-
438.
[4] Roy, Amit Baran, Apratim Halder,

Rahul Sharma, and Veena Hegde. 2015.
"A novel concept of Smart Headphones
using Active Noise Cancellation and
speech recognition", Published in
Page 128
Rheological Characterization and Modeling of PVC Paste

R. Ahmed1, W. Ali2,3, S.G.Hussain2, J. Ali3, H.I.Qazi1, H.Saqlain1,M.Siddiqui1
P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
1
PPolymer & Petrochemical Engineering Department,
P
NED University of Engineering & Technology, Karachi

Corresponding author: ahmedr@neduet.edu.pk
2
Department of Chemistry,
P P
NED University of Engineering & Technology, Karachi

Waqas.Ali@midassafety.com
37T 37T
3
P Prime Safety Limited, KEPZ Karachi.
P
ABSTRACT
The assigned study is dedicated to the preparation, understanding of the flow behavior
and characterization of Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) paste which can be used in versatile
applications notably in fabric coating (films and sheets) and gloves coating using relatively
inexpensive industrial equipments. The rheology and mechanical testing of PVC paste were
investigated on Brookfield viscometer and Testometric M250-3 CT tensile machine,
respectively. PVC paste was prepared using high speed overhead stirrer of the
components: Homopolymer PVC (k-value 71), the plasticizer HEXAMOLL DINCH with varying
concentrations (100 phr, 118 phr, and 150 phr), and with other additives required for
gloves applications. The paste was successfully used to prepare coated gloves and
compared with a commercially available PVC glove sample purchased from the local
market. The flow curves were developed using Mitschka’s method and modeled with
Power law constitutive equation. The determined power law index values suggest pseudo-
plastic flow behavior of the samples. The abrasion resistance (> 8000 cycles to failure),
tear resistance (lowest peak force approx. 17 N), puncture resistance (lowest peak force
approx. 24 N), and shore hardness obtained were comparable to the commercially
available glove samples at 118 phr. The findings of this research might be used in future
for the development of a mathematical model for the better understanding of the PVC
gloves paste flow behavior.
Keywords: PVC Paste, Rheological characterization, PVC gloves, Mitschka’s method,

Pseudoplastic
1. INTRODUCTION:
25T via suspension route may be melt-
processed via extruder, injection
Poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) is a versatile molding, compression molding and
polymer and has played a key role in the calendaring. On the other hand PVC
development of chemical industry. powder of approx. 1 μm diameter can
Typical applications of PVC include be synthesized via emulsion
medical devices, blood bags, pipes, polymerization [2]. PVC powder thus
packaging films and many more [1]. PVC obtained is used to prepare PVC paste,
can be synthesized via suspension also known as plastisol , a mixture of PVC
polymerization and emulsion powder and plasticizer with other
polymerization routes. PVC synthesized ingredients [3]. Plastisol finds its
Page 129
industrial applications in fabric coating 3. to compare the mechanical properties

(films and sheets) and dip coating (gloves of the prepared gloves with a
coating) using relatively inexpensive commercially available PVC gloves
industrial equipments. In either case
gelation is carried out in heated oven to 2. EXPERIMENTAL
25T
render a uniform mass with viscoelastic

properties. 2.1 Materials
25T 25T
Rheology is the science of deformation All the raw materials used in this study
and flow. Rheological measurements are were generously provided by the Midas
one of the most important criterion for Safety Limited, Karachi. For the details
the selection of the resin grade and of the raw materials see table 1.
additives for a given formulation. The
rheological characterizations [2] are Table 1: Properties of Raw Materials
important during coating stage of the
plastisol at room temperature and S. Material Properties Supplier
gelation - fusion stage where the No
development of the storage modulus is 1 PVC K-Value 71, INOVYN
a
observed [4-6] due to the polymer (PEVIKON PM v : 74727
P R R Schkopa-
737) cm3/g u GmbH,
network formation. The flow behavior of
P P
Germany
the plastisol in the initial step dictates 2 b
Plasticizer SG (sp.
P P BASF,
the final properties of the gelled mass (HEXAMOLL gravity): Germany
which is itself a function of PVC powder DINCH) 0.94-0.95,
size and distribution, surfactant Dynamic
concentration, concentration and Viscosity @
chemical nature of plasticizer, and 20 °C: 52 P P
cP
additives.
3 Heat SG: 0.90 Chemtura
Many research studies have been devoted Mfg. Co.,
Stabilizer
to the rheological characterization of USA
(MARK
PVC paste gelation, structure and
1495C)
physical properties of these gels [7-13].
4 Epoxidise SG: 0.92 Chemtura
Most of these researchers studied the Mfg. Co.,
Soybean
PVC system with low concentration of the USA
Oil
polymer. Nevertheless, industrial
(DRAPEX
applications, both for flexible and rigid
392)
compounds, require high PVC
5 Pigment PFPL Red West &
concentrations. WS- senior -
There were three primary objectives of 345931PF England
this study: a
PViscosity average molecular weight was
P
1. to formulate PVC paste for industrial determined in THF (Tetrahydrofuran,

gloves applications, Sigma Aldrich) at 25 °C using [η ]25 °C
THF =
2. to determine and model the flow 1.63 ∗ 10−2 Mw 0.760 3
X 1.017 c. g. s. (cm /g) P P
behavior of the PVC paste using low [14]; b

comply REACH (Registration,
P P
and easily available Brookfield Evaluation, Authorization and Restriction

viscometers in chemical industries, of Chemicals).
and
Page 130
2.2 PVC Paste Preparation properties of the cured glove samples

were compared with the purchased
PVC pastes with varying amount of commercial glove sample.
plasticizer (DINCH) ranging from 110 to
150 phr were prepared by adding the dry 2.3 Characterizations
PVC resin to the previously mixed
plasticizer, epoxidized soybean oil, heat 2.3.1 Rheological Characterization
stabilizer and pigment mixture using a
Rheological measurements were
laboratory overhead stirrer with a three-
performed at three different plasticizer
blade propeller (IKA RW 20 B - Germany)
concentrations (100 phr, 118 phr, and
at 100 rpm and three different
150 phr) and temperatures (30 °C, 40 °C,
temperatures of 30°C, 40 °C, and 50 °C.
and 50 °C) using Brookfield RV
The resultant mixture was mixed for 7-8
viscometer (Brookfield Engineering
min till homogenization of the mixture.
Laboratories, Inc., USA) with a No. 6
Air bubbles were removed using a mild
spindle. All the samples were covered
vacuum to prevent foaming.
with aluminum foils during rheological
The PVC paste formulations are given in
measurements to avoid the loss of
Table -2.
plasticizer and other undesirable changes
Table -2: PVC paste formulations in the pastes.
Two different rheological experimental
S.NO COMPONENT QUANTITY protocols were implemented; one to
phr* phr phr follow the viscosity aging (stabilization
time) with time at constant 50 rpm, and
1 PVC resin 100 100 100
second to determine the flow behavior
2 Plasticizer 100 118 150 parameters of the stabilized PVC paste.
In the former experiment, the PVC paste
3 Stabilizer 2 2 2
viscosity was measured with time where
Epoxidized the zero time was dictated for the freshly
4 5 5 5
soybean oil
made PVC paste. In the second
5 Pigment 1.5 1.5 1.5 experiment, the stabilized PVC paste
*phr = Parts per hundred by weight of the flow behavior was measured at various
PVC resin shear rates.
2.2.1 Cured sample preparation 2.3.2 Mechanical characterization

Glove samples with thickness of 7 mm Abrasion Resistance Test
and 2 mm, from each PVC paste
formulation, were made in Prime Safety Abrasion resistance test (EN 388:2003)
Ltd., lab facilities by dip coating. Curing was used to determine the stability of
was done in an oven (Genlab BS-15, the cured samples when exposed to
United Kingdom) at 180 °C. The curing abrasion environment. Martindale testing
time was fixed for 8 min. Samples with methodology was followed using Abrasion
thickness of 7 mm and 2 mm were used tester (BS-5690, United Kingdom) . A
for shore A hardness test and mechanical circular shaped sample, 38 mm dia., was
testing, respectively. clamped into enlarging elliptical T-
A commercial PVC glove sample was shaped holder which rubs against a 100
locally purchased. The mechanical grit sand paper in circular motion for
Page 131
several minutes until the sample fails. clamped as a membrane between the
The number of cycles achieved in this tests chamber (Miran - USA). On the one
test determines the quality of the side of the clamped sample there was
sample. Average of four test samples is water and other side acid or base. The
reported for each sample. water conductivity was measured at
regular intervals. The break through time
Tear Resistance Test (min), change observed in the water
conductivity by mixing of the acid or base
Tear resistance test (EN 388:2003) was via diffusion through sample, was
used to determine the resistance of the measured and reported as performance
cured samples against cut propagation. level of the samples. Average of four test
The tests were performed on horizontally samples is reported for each sample.
and vertically mounted samples (100 mm
x 50 mm) using a Testometric Micro 350 2.3.2 Hardness Test
(Testometric Company Limited; United
Shore A hardness measurements were
Kingdom) tensile machine. Test samples
carried out according to ASTM D2240
of 10 cm x 5 cm (length x width) were
using an analog shore hardness tester
obtained from the cured samples. The
(Instron, USA). Samples of 7 mm
cross head speed was maintained at 100
thickness were used for the hardness
mm/min. Results were recorded from the
measurements. Ten measurements were
company installed software upon failure
carried out on each sample and the
of the samples. Average of four test
average of these measurements is
samples is reported for each sample.
reported.
Puncture Test
3. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Puncture test (EN 388:2003) was used to 3.1 Viscosity Aging in the PVC Paste
determine the resistance of the cured
samples against the sharp objects. The A freshly made PVC paste showed
test was performed on Testometric Micro increase in viscosity, known as viscosity
350 (Testometric Company Limited; aging [15], as is shown in figure 1(a, b,
United Kingdom) using the needle and c) for three different plasticizer
puncture grip. A circular shaped sample, concentrations and temperatures. The
38 mm dia., was clamped between the similar changes in viscosity are well
jaws of the machine and a needle (1 mm documented in literature [15-19]. The
dia.) was penetrated into the sample at a rate and magnitude of the viscosity
speed of 100 mm/min. Readings were increase of the paste depends on the
noted upon failure of the sample. nature of the PVC resin, solvent power of
Average of four test samples is reported the plasticizer and the paste formulation
for each sample. temperature [15]. It is evident from the
figure that the increase in viscosity is
Permeation Test substantial at the beginning and reached
a steady-state value after a certain
Permeation test (EN-374) was carried out period of time. The initial significant
to determine chemical resistance of the increase in viscosity might be attributed
cured samples against sulfuric acid to the deagglomeration of the PVC resin
(H 2 SO 4 ) and sodium hydroxide (NaOH). A
R R R R
particles [19]. The lower initial and

circular shaped sample, 38 mm dia., was steady-state viscosity values for higher
Page 132
plasticizer concentrations (118 phr and

150 phr) and higher temperatures are
attributed to the profound softening Figure 1(a, b, and c): Viscosity aging in
effect of the plasticizer and faster PVC paste at three different plasticizer
diffusion of the plasticizer molecules into concentrations and temperatures, see
the PVC resin capillaries. The softening legends for the details.
effect, in other words decrease in The data of the figure 1 (a, b, and c) was
viscosity, is due to weaken modeled using origin® software. A
intermolecular interactions between the representative curve for the
polymer chains owing to the presence of determination of initial rate of aging,
strong attractive forces between the initial rate of viscosity increase, and
polar groups of PVC and ester linkage of stabilization time, time required to reach
the plasticizer [20-22]. steady-state value, are shown in figure 2.
The determined values are plotted in
figure 3a and 3b, respectively. It is
apparent that the initial rate of aging is
more pronounced at lower plasticizer
concentration at all temperatures with
the minor exception of 50 °C. The
decrease in the initial rate of aging with
increasing plasticizer concentrations and
temperatures is assigned to the
synergistic effect of faster swelling of the
PVC resin particles during PVC paste
preparation and decrease in the
plasticizer viscosity [21, 23] at the higher
temperatures. Consequently, the
stabilization time is decreased.
Stabilization time of the samples
decreases in power law manner (figure
3b).
Figure 2: A representative curve for the

determination of initial rate of aging
(rate of aging initial ) and PVC paste
R R
Page 133
stabilization time. The initial rate of

aging was determined from the initial
slope (shown as slope on the figure) and
the stabilization time from the cross-over
point of the two fitted straight lines.
3.2 Rheological Measurements and

determination of flow behavior of the
Stabilized PVC Paste
Flow curves were developed at three

different plasticizers concentrations and
temperatures using Mitschka’s method
[24]. Figure 4(a, b, and c) shows the
Figure 3 (a and b): (a): Effect of
effect of the plasticizer concentration
plasticizer concentration on the initial
and temperature on the flow behavior of
rate of aging; (b) Effect of plasticizer
the stabilized PVC paste. The data was
concentration on the stabilization time.
modeled using power law model [25]. An
The lines drawn are the power function
example curve for the determination of
fit to the data.
power law parameters is shown in figure
5. The determined flow behavior index
(n), measure of deviation or closeness to
Newtonian fluid behavior, is plotted in
Figure 6. It is evident that, at all
temperatures, the flow behavior index
decreases with increase in plasticizer
concentrations except at 150 phr and 30
°C where the value is increased. Still, at
all temperatures, the value of n is less
than 1 which shows that the flow
behavior of the paste is pseudoplastic.
Page 134
Figure 6: Effect of plasticizer

concentration on the flow behavior Index
at three different temperatures.
3.3 Effect of Plasticizer Concentration

on the Mechanical Properties of the
PVC Paste
Shore Hardness
The effect of the plasticizer

concentration on shore hardness at room
temperature is shown in Figure 7. It is
Figure 4(a, b, and c): Flow Curves: noticeable that the shore hardness
Effect of plasticizer concentration and decreases as the plasticizer
temperatures on the flow behavior of the concentration is increased. The decrease
stabilized PVC paste. For detail is attributed to the softness of PVC due
description see legends on each graph. to the weakening of the intermolecular
interactions between the polymeric
chains. Our results are in accordance
with the results reported in literature
[20-22].
Figure 5: An example curve for the

determination of power law model
parameters (flow behavior Index and
consistency coefficient). The linearized
power law model equation is also shown
on the graph.
Figure 7: Effect of Plasticizer
concentration on Shore hardness at room
temperature. The dotted line shows
shore hardness of a commercial PVC
glove sample.
The results obtained for abrasion

resistance, tear resistance, puncture
resistance, and chemical tests are
tabulated in table 3 along with a
commercially available PVC glove
sample.
Page 135
Mechanical tests results revealed that the ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

PVC paste formulation with plastidzer
concentration of 118 phr have Authors are thankful to MIDAS Safety
comparable results with the commercial (Prime Safety Limited) for their generous
PVC glove sample used in this study and support for this project.
might be used to make PVC gloves
samples for commercial use. Table -3: Effect of Plasticizer
4. CONCLUSIONS Concentration on the Mechanical
Properties of PVC pastes
An attempt was made to formulate PVC
paste notabily for commercial PVC gloves S. Physical Results
N Test
applications and model the flow behavior
o.
of the paste using relatively low cost 100 118 150 CS
viscometers. The aim was to formulate phr phr phr
PVC coatings with, at least, comparable 1. AR >8 k > 8k >8 k >8k
mechanical properties as that of 2. TR 16 N 32 N 17 N 3N
commercially available PVC gloves in the 3. PR 23 N 52 N 24 N 10 N
local market. The findings of this study Chemic-
are: al Test
4. H 2 SO 4 50 45 35 48
• PVC paste was successfully
R R R R
(min)
formulated using relatively 5. NaOH >480 480 400 460
inexpensive industrial equipments. (min)
• The cured glove samples showed CS = Commercial glove sample, AR =
comparable mechanical and chemical Abrasion resistance, TR = Tear resistance,
properties to the commercially PR = Puncture resistance, >8k = 8000 +
available PVC glove sample at cycles
plasticizer concentration of 118 phr.
• The rheological data of Brookfield
viscometer was successfully
5. REFERENCES
transformed into the rheological
material functions using Mitschka’s 1. Charles, E. W., James, W. S., Charles,
37T 37T 37T 37T 2T 2T37
method. A.D., Mark, T. B.

37T 2005.
2T 2T37 PVC 37T
• The flow behavior of all the PVC Handbook, illustrated, Hanser.

paste formulation showed 2. Nakajima, N., Kwak, S-Y. 1991.
pseudoplastic flow behavior in the Journal of Vinyl Technology, 13(4), pp
plasticizer concentration range and 212-222.
temperatures used in this study. 3. Rybachuk G.V., Kozlova, I.I.,
Mozzhukhin, V.B., Guzeev V.V. 2007.
The findings of this study suggest that the PVC Plastisols: Preparation,
PVC paste formulation containing Properties, and Application, Polymer
plasticizer concentration of 118 phr can Science, Ser. C, 49(1), pp 6-12.
be used for the commercial production of 4. Collins, E.A., Hoffmann, D.J., Soni,
34T 34T 34T 34T 34T
PVC gloves once the other properties as P.L. 1979. Rheology of Plastisols of 34T
per applications are tested. Poly(Vinyl Chloride), Rubber 3T
Chemistry and Technology, 52(3).

pp 676-691. 3T
Page 136
5. Nakajima, N., Ward, D.W. 1981. 15. Nakajima, N., Harrell, E.R. 2005.
Gelation and Fusion Characteristics of Viscosity Aging of Poly(vinyl
PVC Resins in Plastisols by chloride) Plastisol: The Effect of
Determination of Their the Resin Type and Plasticizer
Viscoelasticity, Rubber Chemistry and
Type, Journal of Applied Polymer
Technology, 54(5), pp1096-1112.
Science, 95, pp 448-464.
6. Şahin, E., Mahlicli, F.Y., Yetgin, S.,
16. Nakajima, N., Daniels, C.A. 1980.
Balköse, D. 2012. Journal of Applied
Plastisols of poly(vinyl chloride);
Polymer Science, 125, pp 1448–1455. particle size distribution,
7. Te Nijenhuis, K. 1997. morphology, rheology, and
Thermoreversible networks, Adv mechanism of aging , J Appl Polym Sci
Polym Sci,130, pp 1–267. 1980, 25(9), pp 2019-2044.
8. Sugimoto, M., Hida, H., Taniguchi, T., 17. Nakajima, N., Harrell, E.R. 2001.
Koyama, K., Aoki, Y. 2007. Rheology of PVC Plastisol: Formation
Rheological properties of poly(vinyl of Immobilized Layer in
chloride)/plasticizer systems—relation Pseudoplastic Flow, Journal of
between sol–gel transition and Colloid and Interface Science, 238,
elongational viscosity, Rheol Acta, 46, pp 116–124.
pp 957–964. 18. Nakajima, N., Harrell, E.R. 2001.
9. Aoki, Y. 2001. A preparation method Rheology of PVC Plastisol III.
of thermoreversible poly(vinyl Analyses of Dilatancy and Fracture,
Journal of Colloid and Interface
chloride) gels, Macromolecules, 34,
Science, 241, pp 492–496.
pp 3500–3502. 19. Iida, E., Furuya, M. 1968. Processing
10. Watanabe, H., Osaki, K., Kakiuchi, of Polyvinyl Paste (in Japanese),
M., Aoki, Y. 2001. Viscoelastic Rubber Digest, Tokyo.
properties of poly(vinyl chloride) sols, 20. Elgozali, A., Hassan, M. 2008,
Macromolecules, 34, pp 666–670. Effect of Additives on the
11. Kakiuchi, M., Aoki, Y., Watanabe, H., Mechanical Properties of Polyvinyl
Osaki, K. 2001. Viscoelastic properties Chloride, J. Sc. Tech, 9(1), pp 1-
of poly(vinyl chloride) gels: 12.
universality of gel elasticity, 21. Thomas, N.L. 2004. Alloying of
Poly(vinyl chloride) to Reduce
Macromolecules, 34, pp 2987–2991.
Plasticizer Migration, Journal of
12. Li, L., Uchida, H., Aoki, Y., Yao, M-L. Applied Polymer Science, 94, pp
1997. Rheological images of poly(vinyl 2022–2031.
chloride) gels. 2. Divergence of 22. Unar, I.N., Soomro, S.A., Aziz, S.
viscosity and the scaling law before 2010, Effect of Various Additives on
the sol–gel transition, the Physical Properties of
Macromolecules, 30, pp 7842–7848. Polyvinylchloride Resin, Pak. J. Anal.
13. Guenet, J-M. 1992. Thermoreversible Environ. Chem., 11(2), pp 44-50.
23. Hexamoll® DINCH® (CAS Number:
gelation of polymers and biopolymers,
166412-78-8 (outside
illustrated, Academic Press.
U.S.)), http://www.basf.com/plastic
14. De Vries, A.J., Bonnebat, C. ,
37T
izers/index.html, BASF.
Carrega, M. 1971. Pure Appli.
37T
24. Mitschka P. 1882. Simple conversion

Chem., Dilute Solution Properties of Brookfield R.V.T. readings into
and Molecular Characterization of viscosity functions, Rheologica Acta,
Polyvinyl Chloride, 26(2), pp 209- 21, pp 207–209.
240.
Page 137
25. Chhabra R.P., Richardson J.F. 2008,

Non-Newtonian Flow and Applied
Rheology, 2nd Edition, Butterworth-
P P
Heinemann.
Page 138
Evaluation of Conventional and Superpave Mix Design

using Neat and Modified Binder
NUST Institute of Civil Engineering (NICE)

School of Civil and Environmental Engineering (SCEE)
National University of Science and Technology (NUST) Sector H-12
Islamabad
Authors:
M.Naveed Ashraf (B.E. Civil Engineer)

Mubashir Islam (B.E. Civil Engineer)
Massod Hadi (B.E. Civil Engineer)
Khurram Shahzad (B.E. Civil Engineer)
Advised by: Dr. Arshad Hussain (Ph.D. Transportation)
15 July, 2016
Page 139
EVALUATION OF CONVENTIONAL AND SUPERPAVE MIX DESIGN USING NEAT AND MODIFIED
BINDER
Muhammad Naveed Ashraf , Mubashir Islam2, Masood Hadi3, Khurram Shahzad4
1
P P P P P P P
NUST Institute of Civil Engineering (NICE)

School of Civil and Environmental Engineering (SCEE)
National University of Science and Technology (NUST) H-12 Sector Islamabad
ashraf.naveed43@yahoo.com
ABSTRACT
Bitumen behavior is highly sensitive to the temperature. There are several additives to
improve the behavior of bitumen in severe climatic conditions (especially in warm climate
which is 70% of Pakistan Area) and under over loading (common case in Pakistan) where use
of neat bitumen (only bitumen) makes pavement susceptible to pavement failures like
rutting etc. Additive usage may have some negative effects on bitumen properties with their
positive effects so it is really important to investigate the impact of modification before
using it. Traditionally Marshall Mix Design is used to find out volumetric properties and
optimum bitumen content but Superpave (Superior Performance Asphalt Pavements) Mix
U U U U U U
Design was introduced in 1987 to represent actual field conditions faced by asphalt
pavement more precisely in laboratory. This research aims to investigate the effect of
binder modification (Addition of 1.5% DuPont Elvaloy 4170 Reactive Ethylene Terpolymer
(RET)) on volumetric properties of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) and compare the volumetric
properties of Marshall Mix Design and Superpave Mix Design. The materials used are Margalla
Hill’s aggregate, ARL 60/70 bitumen and DuPont Elvaloy 4170 Reactive Ethylene Terpolymer
(RET) as a modifier. Performance testing of aggregate and bitumen was conducted in the
laboratory and test results were compared to standard values. Bitumen was modified by
mixing DuPont Elvaloy RET 4170 according to standard procedure of mixing. The bitumen
contents used to prepare HMA samples were 4%, 3.5%, 5% and 5.5%. For each bitumen
content three samples were prepared each for Marshall Mix Design and Superpave Mix Design
using neat and modified binders, thus resulting in total of 48 samples. Tests were performed
on samples to find out volumetric properties and Optimum Bitumen Content (OBC). Lastly
volumetric properties were compared and conclusions were made.
Conclusion: Volumetric properties with Elvaloy RET 4170 are within range so it can be used
to improve bitumen resistance against rutting and high temperature.
Keywords: Superpave, Binder Modification (Bitumen+1.5% DuPont Elvaloy RET 4170)
1. INTRODUCTION is widely used in the world. Elvaloy

increases both the stiffness and elasticity
1.1 General
of the mix which is good against rutting
Asphalt can be modified with different
and cracking in the flexible pavements.
Binders like SBS, Elvaloy, Glass and Rubber
Marshall Mix Design was introduced
etc. to encounter flexible pavement
by Bruce Marshall in 1939, a former
distresses like rutting, thermal cracking,
bituminous Engineer with the Mississippi
stripping, raveling and damage due to
State Highway Department. Later, US
accidental fuel spillage. In 1902 first
Army Corps of Engineers improved the
Rubber modifier was used in France. Later
method and added some features. Marshall
in 1930 UK and France found the
Mix Design has been proposed for
importance of these rubber modifiers.
aggregate with maximum size up to 1.5
From 1946 to 1985, different other
inch. Marshall Method implemented
modifiers were introduced like SBS, SBR,
throughout the world for almost half a
and Neoprene etc. These modifiers
century. It didn’t take into account the
improve the road system but these
traffic and environmental issues therefore
modifiers also create issues for the
Super-Pave Mix Design was introduced in
environment and needed a specific mixing
1990s by Strategic Highway Research
temperature to react with Bitumen as it
Program (SHRP). Super-Pave stands for
may disturb the properties of Bitumen.
Superior Performing Asphaltic Pavements.
Elvaloy RET which is the product of DuPont
Page 140
It introduced the new design system which • Intensive research review based on
accounts for the aggregate and binder previous research comparing the
requirements and compactive effort Marshall and Super-Pave Mix Design
related to the traffic. After introduction of • Laboratory characterization of
Super-Pave Mix Design, Marshall Mix Design materials including bitumen and
is not used today in USA. aggregate performance tests
1.2 Problem Statement • Preparations of samples using NHA
One of the major problem Pakistani roads Class-A gradation and Superpave
are facing is the rutting. Main reasons are gradation guidelines of Nominal
worse climatic conditions (especially Maximum Aggregate Size (NMAS) of
temperature boost in summers) and 19mm. Samples were prepared by
overloading.Pakistan can be divided into si Marshall and Gyratory Compaction
x temperatures zones requiring the PG 70- method
10 as the most important binder that • Evaluation of volumetric properties
covers more than 70 percent of the like VMA, VFA, Air voids, Stability
Pakistan. At present, commonly available and Flow values of HMA mixes
grades are A-60/70, A-80/100, A-PMB and • Comparison analysis of volumetric
K-40/50, K-60/70, K-80/100 and commonly properties of Marshall and Super-
used binder grades A-60/70 and K-60/70 in Pave Mix Design
Pakistan. The corresponding performance • Comparing effects of binder
grades are PG 58-22 and PG 64-22. These modification on volumetric
softer binders at high temperatures are properties of Marshall and Super-
likely to rut in areas requiring PG 70-10. Pave Mix Design
One of the solutions to increase rutting
2. METHODOLOGY
resistance and to achieve PG 70-10
properties is the modification of bitumen 2.1 General
(i.e. using Polymer as additive to neat Our projects involves the materials;
bitumen). The main aim of our research is aggregate, bitumen and modifier. It
to find out the impact of bitumen involves following steps:
modification on the volumetric properties • Selection of materials
of Marshall Mix Design as well as • Acquisition of Materials
Superpave Mix Design. Additionally • Characterization of Materials
volumetric properties of Marshall Mix • Performance Testing of Materials
Design are compared with the volumetric • Preparation of Modified Bitumen
properties of Superpave Mix Design. (Mixing of modifier and neat
1.3 Objective bitumen)
The objective of this research is to • Sample Preparation (Marshall HMA
accomplish following properties. and Superpave HMA)
• Effects of binder modification on • Testing of Samples
volumetric properties of HMA mixes • Results reporting and analysis
prepared by Marshall and Super- 2.2 Selection of Materials
Pave Mix Design. The properties of materials being used in
• A comparison between HMA mixes Hot Mix Asphalt are one of the main
prepared with neat binder (A- factors on which behavior of Hot Mix
60/70) and modified binder (A- Asphalt depends throughout its service
60/70 + 1.5 % Elvaloy) for both mix life. Therefore it is very important and
designs (Marshall Mix Design and critical stage to select the appropriate
Super-Pave Mix Design) materials. Following points are considered
• A comparison between Marshall Mix in selection of materials:
Design and Superpave Mix Design. • Traffic Factors (Traffic Level and
1.4 Scope of Research Layer Depth)
To accomplish above mentioned • Environmental Factors (Air
objectives, a comprehensive research plan Temperature)
was made and various research tasks were • Traffic Speed
outlined. 2.2.1 Aggregate Selection
Page 141
Aggregate selection is depending upon 3.75 40

Sieve Criteria Selected 2.36 23-49 33.6 25
Size(mm) (Percent (Percent 1.18 22.3- 14
Passing By Passing By 28.3
Weight) Weight) 0.6 16.7- 10
25 100 100 20.7
19 90-100 95 0.3 12.7 6
0.075 2-8 3
12.5 75
9.5 56-70 60
3.75 35-50 40
2.38 23-35 25 100
Percent Passing by
0.3 5-12 10 80
0.075 2-8 5 60
Weight
layer location, traffic level of area and
prevailing traffic speed. Aggregates used 40
in pavement are primarily responsible for 20
the strength of the pavement. So much
importance is given to select the 0
aggregates according to specification (NHA 0 2 4 6
Sieve Size raise to power 0.45
specifications). Results of performance
testing of aggregate dictate, either to Figure 2: Superpave Gradation Criteria
select the aggregate or it should be for NMAS-19mm
replaced by other aggregate sources. Both 2.2.2 Bitumen and Modifier Selection
coarse and fine aggregate used in our Binder selection is based on environmental
project were acquired from Margalla Hills data, traffic level and traffic speed.
of Islamabad, Pakistan as they meet the Pakistan can be divided into six
specification and lower transportation cost temperature zones requiring the PG 70-
was incurred. 10.This binder cover the 70% of total area
Table 1: NHA Class-A Gradation Criteria of Pakistan. The use of 98% reliability
provides extra safety margin against high
100 traffic levels of pavement and
uncontrolled loadings situations. No
Percent Passing by
80 additional bumping of binder grade is

needed as recommended by AASHTO MP1
60
Weight
specifications, because it provide

40 excessively stiff binder. Presently A-60/70
and K-60/70 are widely used in Pakistan.
20 The corresponding performance grades are
PG 58-22 and PG 64-22. These softer
0
binders, especially at high temperature
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Sieve Size in mm are likely to rut in areas requiring PG 70-
10. We selected A-60/70 (PG 58-22) as it is
Figure 1: NHA Class-A Gradation Criteria
widely used in Pakistan and easily
Table 2: Superpave Gradation Criteria
available.
for NMAS-19mm
Modifier was required to enhance
Sieve Criteria Restrict Selected the stiffness to resist rutting phenomenon
Size(mm) % ed Zone % in the area requiring PG 70-10. Previous
Passing Passing studies reveals that polymer modified
25 100 100 binders show consistently better rutting
19 90-100 95 performance than those with other binder
12.5 75 types. Hence we selected DuPont Elvaloy
9.5 60
Page 142
4170 Reactive Ethylene Terpolymer (RET) case if material satisfy the specification of
these test results, then other tests
Test Standard Permissible Results
including gradation, specific gravity and
Value absorption must be performed. The table
Impact ASTM 30% 21.75% given below shown the tests and their
Value D5874 results.
LA ASTM 40% 26.20% Table 3: Aggregate Performance Tests
Abrasion C535-12
Value 2.5.2 Bitumen Performance Testing
Crushing BS 812 25% 21.40% Likewise aggregate we have performed
Value number of performance tests on bitumen.
Gsb 2.51 It was necessary to determine the
ASTM different aspects of bitumen for use in
Gssd C127-88 2.54 Marshall Mix as well as Superpave mix
design.
Gsa 2.59 Table 4: Neat Bitumen Performance
Tests
Absorption ASTM 1.43%
Value C127 Test Standard Permissible Result
as a modifier. Value
2.3 Acquisition of Materials Flash Point ASTM Min. 250 279 °C
After the selection process, acquisition D3143
stage came. We went to the Margalla Hill Fire Point ASTM 302 °C
quarries and selected the aggregate by D3143
visual inspection so that it exhibits the M-13
required properties. The bitumen and Penetration ASTM 60-70 63.5
modifier was already present in National Value D5/D5M
Institute of Transportation Laboratory and Softening ASTM 49-56 °C 50.8
they were used after verifying properties Point D36-06 °C
by performance tests. Viscosity ASTM 0.22-0.45 0.2625
2.4 Characterization of Materials Test D4402 pascal-sec pascal-
After the acquisition, characterization
sec
stage started. It was mainly related to the
Ductility ASTM Min. 100 123
aggregate only. Gradation curves for both
method Marshall Mix Design and Superpave Test D113-99 cm
Mix Design were selected according to the
criteria provided in NHA Specifications and 2.6 Modification of Bitumen
Superpave Series No. 2 (SP-2) by Asphalt Neat bitumen is modified to enhance the
Institute respectively. Criteria and following properties:
selected gradation are shown below. • The stiffness of the bitumen at
2.5 Performance Testing of Materials field construction temperature.
Performance testing is done to check the • If the stiffness is higher, then
coherence of properties of a material to during summer rutting would be
the specification of the job/standard. reduced.
Performance testing of both materials • Elvaloy addition help in reducing
(aggregate and bitumen) was carried out stripping in the pavement.
in laboratory according to the standard The mixing procedure of Elvaloy was
procedure and results were checked out performed as per prescribed manual in
against standard requirements. Technical Bulletin RET 1.1 of DuPont
2.5.1 Aggregate Performance Testing Elvaloy RET. There are two type of
In order to prepare a mix by using Marshall reactions of Elvaloy RET with bitumen.
Apparatus and Superpave Mix design, it is • Speeding up of reaction with the
necessary to determine the aggregate addition of some acid apart from
acceptability. The tests often performed speeding up of reaction also brings
include Los Angeles abrasion, impact test, some other modifications like
crushing value test and shape tests. In raising high temperature range etc.
Page 143
Attock Oil Refinery use PPT as a • Superpave Mix Design Using

catalyst. Modified Bitumen
• The second method is mixing For each type, samples were made of 4
without using any catalyst. different bitumen contents (i.e. 4%, 3.5%,
However in this method the mixing 5% and 5.5%) and for each bitumen
time was too long. content 3 samples were made. So it sums
The 2nd method was followed for
P P up to a total of 48 HMA samples.
formation of PMB in lab for our project. 2.7.1 Marshall Mix Design
Bitumen was heated up to pouring Following criteria was adopted in
temperature and poured in laboratory preparation of HMA samples by Marshall
mixer. The heating temperature of Mix Design method
• Coarse Aggregate (retained on #4) –
bitumen was 190 oC and kept constant at
the same temperature for about 10 60%
• Fine Aggregate (Passing #4 and
minutes. Elvaloy RET 4170 was mixed
retained on #200) – 35%
asphalt at the rate of 10g/minutes in neat
• Mineral Filler (Passing on #200) - 5%
asphalt. After complete addition of
• Weight of Sample = 1200 g
desired percentage of modifier, the mixing
• Mixing Temperature = 140-155°C
procedure continue for 2 hrs. at 170 oC. • Aging Temperature = 135°C
The polymer modified bitumen were • Compacting Temp. = 120°C
placed in the laboratory steel containers • No. of Blows at Each Side of
and then cured for 14 hours in oven at 165 Sample = 75
o 2.7.2 Superpave Mix Design
C.
Following criteria was adopted in
Table 5: Modified Bitumen Performance preparation of HMA samples by Superpave
Tests Mix Design method.
Test Standard Permissible Result • Coarse Aggregate (retained on #4) –
60%
Value
• Fine Aggregate (Passing #4 and
Flash Point ASTM Min. 250 296 °C
retained on #200) – 37%
D3143 • Mineral Filler (Passing on #200) - 3%
Fire Point ASTM 312 °C • Weight of Sample = 4500 g +
D3143 Bitumen Weight
M-13 • Traffic Load = 3 – 30 Million ESAL
Penetration ASTM 60-70 60.5 • Gyratory Compactor: 𝑁𝑖𝑛𝑖 = 8 ,
Value D5/D5M 𝑁𝑑𝑒𝑠 = 100 , 𝑁𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 160 , Applied
Pressure= 600 Kpa, Angle= 1.25°
Softening ASTM 49-56 °C 52°C • Temperatures: Mixing T= 145°C,
Point D36-06 Aging T= 130°C, Compaction T=
Viscosity ASTM 0.22-0.45 0.44 125°C
Test D4402 pascal-sec pascal- 3. RESULTS AND ANALYSIS
sec
Ductility ASTM Min. 100 150cm 3.1 Marshall Mix Design (ARL-60/70)
Test D113-99 Using Marshall Mix Method, specimens
2.7 Samples Preparation were prepared at 3.0, 3.5, 5.0% and 5.5 %
A total of 48 samples were prepared out of asphalt contents. Three specimens were
which 24 were Marshall Samples and rest prepared for each asphalt contents, two of
of 24 were Superpave Samples. There which were used in bulk specific gravity of
were four type of samples as the mix (G mb ) calculation and one was
R R
• Marshall Mix Design Using Neat used to find out maximum theoretical
Bitumen specific gravity of the mix (G mm ). It results
R R
• Marshall Mix Design Using Modified to a total of 24 Marshall Mix Design

Bitumen samples, out of which 12 samples were
• Superpave Mix Design Using Neat prepared using neat bitumen and rest of
Bitumen 12 samples were prepared using modified
Page 144
binder. Volumetric properties determined optimum asphalt content determined at

for Marshall samples compacted at standard compaction (75 blows) is
standard compaction (75 blows) are tabulated in Table
tabulated in Table 6.The optimum asphalt 9.
content determined at standard Table 8: Volumetric Properties of
compaction (75 blows) is tabulated in Marshall Mix Design (Modified Bitumen)
Table 7. % AC % VA % VMA % VFA
Table 6: Volumetric Properties of
Marshall Mix Design (Neat Bitumen) 4 5.73 15.05 61.92
% AC % VA % VMA % VFA 3.5 3.91 13.99 67.24
4 6.58 15.32 57.04 5 2.64 13.91 75.58
3.5 5.17 15.19 65.96 5.5 2.31 13.95 83.54
5 2.94 13.98 72.03 3.2.1 Volumetric Properties at
5.5 2.72 15.06 81.57 Optimum Bitumen Content (ARL-60/70+
1.5% Elvaloy RET 4170)
3.1.1 Volumetric Properties at Optimum The optimum bitumen content was
Bitumen Content (ARL-60/70) determined from the graph at 4% air voids.
The optimum bitumen content was After calculating the optimum bitumen
determined from the graph against 4% air content the values of VMA, VFA, Flow and
voids. After calculating the optimum Stability were calculated from the graph.
bitumen content the values of VMA, VFA, Then the values were checked against the
Flow and Stability were calculated from criteria given in the (MS-2) manual.
the graph. Then the values were checked Table 9: Volumetric Properties of
against the criteria given in the (MS-2) Marshall Mix Design at OBC (Modified
manual. Analyzing the above results in the Bitumen)
table we see the following trend for the Property Result Criteria
Marshall Mix specimens of 60/70 OBC 3.82 % -
Penetration Grade Bitumen. All the
% VA 4 3-5
analysis is done on the basis of criteria of
Marshall Mix Design. Keeping in view the % VMA 13.62 ≥13
limits of the volumetric properties the % VFA 73 65-75
results have been analyzed.
Table 7: Volumetric Properties of 3.3 Comparison between Neat Binder
Marshall Mix Design at OBC (Neat HMA and Modified Binder HMA (Marshall
Bitumen) Mix Design)
Property Result Criteria The results of Marshall Mix Design Method
OBC 3.98% - with neat and modified binder have been
compared in the tabular form as well as
% VA 4 3-5 graphically. It follows the analysis done on
% VMA 13.93 ≥13 basis of comparison. The comparison of
% VFA 72.6 65-75 the volumetric properties is shown below
in the table 10. The volumetric properties
3.2 Marshal Mix Design (ARL-60/70 + are compared at the optimum bitumen
1.5% Elvaloy RET 4170) content and all other bitumen contents.
Using Marshall Mix Method, specimens The results have also been shown
were prepared at 3.0, 3.5, 5.0 and 5.5% graphically showing the variations of the
asphalt contents. Three specimens were two types of bitumen in Fig 3,4 and 5.
prepared for each asphalt contents and Table 10: Volumetric Properties of
compactive effort (standard) making a Marshall Mix Design at OBC
total of 12 specimens. The Marshall Property Neat Modified
parameters determined for samples Bitumen Bitumen
compacted at standard compaction (75
OBC 3.98 3.82
blows) are tabulated in Table 8. The
Page 145
%VA 4 4 compacted in gyratory compaction

%VMA 13.93 13.62 machine and further used for G mb R R
calculations while third one was used in

%VFA 72.6 73 G mm test in loose form. Volumetric
R R
parameters determined for Superpave Mix

8 Design using A-60/70 at compaction effort
%VA-
of N des =100 are tabulated in Table 11.
R R
6 Neat Table 11: Volumetric Properties of

Superpave Mix Design (Neat Bitumen)
%VA
4 % AC % VA % VMA % VFA
4 7.35 13.07 47.76
2
%VA- 5.34 12.78 60
Modi 3.5
0 2.92 12.84 76.89
fied 5
3.5 4.54 5 5.5 6
% AC 5.5 1.68 12.68 86.75
Figure 3: Comparison of %VA
3.3.1 Volumetric at Optimum Bitumen
16 Content (ARL-60/70)
The optimum bitumen content was
15.5 determined from the graph against 4% air
%VMA-
15 Neat 1voids. After calculating the optimum
%VMA
14.5 bitumen content the values of VMA and

VFA were determined from the graph. The
14 %VMA- value of Dust Proportion was determined
13.5 Modified by interpolation. Then these values were
13 checked against the criteria given in the
(SP-2) manual.
3.54.5 5.5
% AC Table 12: Volumetric Properties of
Figure 4: Comparison of %VMA Superpave Mix Design at OBC (Neat
Bitumen)
90 Property Result Criteria
OBC 3.77 % -
%VFA-
80 % VA 4 3-5
Neat
% VMA 12.31 ≥13
%VFA
70
% VFA 69.2 65-75
%VFA-
60 Modifi
Dust 0.83
ed Proportion 0.6-1.2
50
3.5 Superpave Mix Design Method
3.5 4.5% AC 5.5
with Modified Binder (ARL-60/70+1.5%
Figure 5: Comparison of %VFA Elvaloy RET 4170)
Using Superpave Mix Method, specimens
3.4 Superpave Mix Design Method were prepared at 4%, 3.5%, 5% and 5.5%
(ARL-60/70) asphalt content using modified binder.
Using Superpave Mix Method, specimens Trial specimens were prepared at above
were prepared at 4%, 3.5%, 5% and 5.5% stated asphalt contents to estimate the
asphalt content using A-60/70. Trial optimum asphalt content against 4% air
specimens were prepared at different voids. Three specimens were prepared for
asphalt contents to estimate the optimum each asphalt content, out of which two
asphalt content at 4% air voids. Three were compacted in gyratory compaction
specimens were prepared for each asphalt machine with the design no of gyrations
contents with the design number of (N des =100) and third one was used in loose
R R
gyrations (N des =100), two of which were

R R
form for G mm test. The volumetric
R R
Page 146
properties and dust proportion was %VMA 12.31 12.20

determined for each asphalt content. The %VFA 69.12 66.20
results are tabulated in Table 13.
Table 13: Volumetric Properties of
Superpave Mix Design (Modified 8
Bitumen) 7 %VA-
% AC % VA % VMA % VFA 6 Neat
5
4 6.45 12.58 53 4
%VA
%VA-
3.5 2.67 12.10 70.6 3
2 Modi
5 2.06 12.52 80.8 1
fied
5.5 1.24 12.59 88.5 0

3.5 4.5 5.5 6.5
3.5.1 Volumetric at Optimum Bitumen % AC
Content (ARL-60/70+1.5% Elvaloy RET Figure 6: Comparison of %VA
4170)
The optimum bitumen content was 14.5
determined from the graph at 4% air voids. %VMA
After calculating the optimum bitumen 14 -Neat
content the values of VMA, VFA were 13.5
calculated from the graph. Dust Proportion %VMA
was determined by interpolation. The 13
values were checked against the criteria 12.5 %VMA
given in the (SP-2) manual. -
Table 14: Volumetric Properties of 12 Modifi
Superpave Mix Design at OBC (Modified 3.5 4.5 5.5 6.5 ed
Bitumen) % AC
Property Result Criteria Figure 7: Comparison of %VMA
OBC 3.44 % -
4 90
% VA 3-5 %VFA
% VMA 12.20 ≥13 80 -Neat
% VFA 66.2 65-75
70
%VFA
Dust 0.93
Proportion 0.6-1.2 60
%VFA
50 -
3.6 Comparison between Neat Binder Modi
HMA and Modified Binder HMA 40 fied
(Superpave Mix Design) 3.5 4.5 % AC 5.5 6.5
The comparison of the volumetric
properties is shown below in the Table 15. Figure 8: Comparison of %VFA
The volumetric properties are compared
at the optimum bitumen content. The 3.7 Discussion on comparison
results have also been shown graphically between neat and modified bitumen
showing the variations of two type of HMA mixes
bitumen usage in Superpave Mix Design in • Excessive Air Voids (VA) in case of
Figure 6,7 and 8. Neat Bitumen as compared to
Table 15: Volumetric Properties of Modified Bitumen at a typical
Superpave Mix Design at OBC bitumen content will cause
Property Neat Modified pavement more susceptible to Air
Bitumen Bitumen and Moisture Entrance and hence
pavement will be prone to
OBC 3.77 3.44 cracking.
%VA 4 4
Page 147
• Excessive Voids in Mineral Superpave mix method the values

Aggregate (VMA) in case of Neat increase gradually and satisfy the
Bitumen as compared to Modified criteria at all the asphalt contents.
Bitumen will reduce Stability of the • In the Superpave Mix method Gmm
mixture. can be estimated at every
• Excessive Void Filled with Asphalt compaction level, so it gives
(VFA) in case of Neat binder as information about the compaction
compared to Modified binder can of the sample throughout the
cause bleeding in High compaction procedure. While
Temperature Zone areas. Marshall Mix method can only
• At particular Air Voids (e.g. VA = measure the Gmm once the sample
4%), HMA with Neat binder shows has been compacted completely.
more bitumen content as compared
4. CONCLUSION
to HMA prepared with Modified
bitumen. Excessive asphalt content On basis of the experiments and result
can cause bleeding. found following conclusions were made
• Less Optimum Bitumen Content • Modification of bitumen does not
(OBC) in case of Modified binder affect the volumetric properties in
(OBC = 3.44%) can save a lot of a way that it crosses the limits and
expenses as compared to Neat hence Modifier (Elvaloy) can be
bitumen (OBC = 3.77%). used.
• Performance testing of modified • The optimum asphalt binder
bitumen shows that it is stiffer content obtained using Marshall Mix
than neat modifier so it can be design method is higher than the
used in warm areas requiring PG optimum asphalt binder content
70-10. obtained from the Superpave mix
design method.
3.8 Discussion on comparison of • The optimum asphalt binder
Marshall and Superpave Mix Design content of the Marshall Mix design
• For the same bitumen content, % was 0.21% greater than the
air voids for Superpave mix are optimum asphalt binder content of
lower than that for Marshall Mix. Superpave mix design using neat
The air voids estimated by binder (A-60/70).
Superpave are more accurate as it • The optimum asphalt binder
stimulates the field compaction content of the Marshall Mix design
method. was 0.38% greater than the
• VMA calculated from the Superpave optimum asphalt binder content of
mix method is lower than that of Superpave mix design using
Marshall Mix method at any asphalt modified binder (A-60/70 + 1.5%
content. It was found that the Elvaloy).
decreased VMA values, as • The Superpave system provides the
compared to Marshall VMA values, estimation of dust to binder ratio
while designing under Superpave while Marshall Mix Deign doesn’t
could be attributed to the higher provide any estimation about dust
compactive effort of the Superpave to binder ratio.
gyratory compactor as compared to • The bulk specific gravity (Gmb)
the Marshall Compaction hammer. values for Superpave mix design
This problem in the Superpave are greater than those for the
mixes can be solved by using the Marshall Mix design at the same
coarser mixes. asphalt content so it can be used
• The values of VFA for Marshall Mix for heavy loads
method increases rapidly with • .Modifier can be used for the area
increase in asphalt content and of high temperatures without
doesn’t necessarily satisfy criteria affecting volumetric properties.
at all asphalt contents. While for
Page 148
• The best mix design found was Pavements”, University of Minnesota,

Superpave Mix Design with Modified Department of Civil Engineering.
Binder i.e. OBC=4.44%.It saves a lot Tom V. Mathew and K V Krishna Rao,
bitumen and hence reduces the “Introduction to Transportation
cost. Engineering, Ch.23: Pavement Materials:
Bitumen” NPTEL May 24, 2006.
5. REFERENCES
Israa F. Jasim, Comparison Between
Habib, Affan, Et Al. "Comparison Of Marshall And Superpave Mixture Design,
Superpave And Marshall Mixtures For Low- Al- Qadisiya Journal For Engineering
Volume Roads And Shoulders." Sciences, Vol. 5, No. 4, 394-406, Year 2012
Transportation Research Record: Journal Jian-Neng Wang, Evaluation of Pavement
Of The Transportation Research Board Performance on Taiwan’s Freeways
1609.1 (1998): 44-50. Network Using Superpave System,
Musselman, James A., Et Al. "Superpave September, 1999.
Field Implementation: Florida's Early Irfan, M., Et Al. "Determining The
Experience." Transportation Research Contribution Of Different Structural Layers
Record: Journal Of The Transportation Of Asphalt Pavement System To Rutting
Research Board 1609.1 (1998): 51-60. Using Transverse Profile Analysis."
B. L. Swami Y. A. Mehta And S. Bose, A American Journal of Civil Engineering and
Comparison Of Marshall And Superpave Architecture 1.6 (2013): 174-180.
Design For Materials Sourced In India. The John P. Zaniewski, Vasavi Kanneganti,
International Journal of Pavement Comparison of 19 Mm Superpave and
Engineering (Ijpe), Vol. 5 (3), September Marshall Base II Mixes in West Virginia.
2004, Pp. 163–173. Asphalt Technology Program Department
J. P. Zaniewski And V. Kanneganti, Of Civil And Environmental Engineering,
Comparison Of 19mm Superpave And Morgantown, West Virginia, June, 2003
Marshall Base Ii Mixes In West Virginia, MS Thesis By Afaq Khattak “Experimental
Final Report, Prepared For The West Investigation Of Factors Affecting The
Virginia, June 2003. Resilient Modulus Of Bituminous Paving
ASI, Ibrahim M. "Performance Evaluation of Mixes Using Indirect Tension Test”, NUST.
Superpave and Marshall Asphalt Mix Islamabad. Pakistan (2010).
Designs To Suite Jordan Climatic And Pavement Interactive .Org , Volumetric
Traffic Conditions." Construction and Comparison Of Marshall And Superpave Mix
Building Materials 21.8 (2007): 1732-1740. Design
The Asphalt Institute (AI) Manual Series AASHTO Designation (T209-05) Standard
No. 2 (MS-2), Mix Design Methods for Method Of Test For “Theoretical Maximum
Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Specific Gravity And Density Of Hot Mix
Types, 1996. Asphalt Paving Mixtures”
The Asphalt Institute (Ai) Handbook Sp-2, AASHTO Designation (T166-07) Standard
Superpave Mix Design, 2001. Method Of Test For “Bulk Specific Gravity
Tia, Mang. "Fundamentals and Practice of Of Compacted Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Using
Asphalt Mixture Design Procedures To Saturated Surface Dry Specimens”
Assure Adequate Performance." 13th ASTM D3515 (2001). "Standard
Conference on Pavement Engineering, Hsin Specification for Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid
Chu, Taiwan. 2005. Bituminous Paving Mixtures." ASTM
Marshall Mix And Design Analysis Chapter International, West Conshohocken, PA.
4, School Of Engineering, Cochin
University Of Science And Technology
Bruce A Chadbourn, Benita L Crow,
Smantha Spindler ,”The Effect of Voids in
Mineral Aggregate on HOT Mix Asphalt
Page 149
Effective Power Methodology for Home Energy Management Using Smart Grid
1
P Waqas Ahmed, 2Faheem Abbas, 3Aftab Nawaz, 4Abid Khan
P P P P P P P
1
Electrical Engineering Department
COMSATS WAH
engnr.waqasahmed@gmail.com
3TU U3T
2
COMSATS WAH
faheemabbas.atms@gmail.com
U
3
COMSATS WAH
aftabdilnawaz3@gmail.com
3TU
4
COMSATS WAH
mabidk08@gmail.com U U
ABSTRACT:
Upgradation of technology, smart grid facilities the residents to maintain their power
utilization under a specific level by themselves at their homes. One of the several
advantages of smart grid is the significant reduction in the electricity cost of the end user.
The use of power is based on the utilization of electricity and hence the price of
electricity varies accordingly i.e., While electricity price is high at peak hours’ time and
vice versa. In this paper, first we introduce the basic layout of energy management system
using the smart grid and then we intend to propose an optimization scheme using the
Genetic Algorithm to optimize the electricity expense. We also exploit the benefits of
renewable sources in a home to reduce the electricity expense. The real time electricity
price data is taken from Illinois international USA. Simulations are done in MATLAB 2014
This model will provide consumer relaxation in electricity bills and fulfill its requirements
efficiently at the same time making system peak load lesser, stabilization of system at the
end.
1. INTRODUCTION: failures are byproduct. Massive blackout

in history occurred in India, July 2013.
Electricity consumption is 670 million people, which is around 9% of
raising every hour, as due to the world's population suffered from
urbanization, population growth, this. Users had no knowledge about
industrialization and other factors. While which thing had happened to the power
existing infrastructure i.e. electrical station except waiting for time to
power grid system is unable to fulfill the restore the power. And modern
requirements, because of limited technology that overcomes these
resources. An exponential curve between problems making sure of two way
demand and supply of electricity. While communications, Smart Grid, can solve
major problem like blackouts, grid these problems. As technology evolves,
Page 150
people can make power more store energy and is possible to provide
controllable and planned centrally (pilot power to the centralized power grid
control configuration). Modern era through advance metering system. Smart
advancement in power technology, Smart Grid is robust, with less dependence on
Grid's help, we can avoid errors more operators, especially it gives the prompt
efficiently before they interrupt the response when condition changes & it is
system. observable in the sense that it applies
operational data to the maintenance of
Smart grid is upgradation of equipment practices, Integrated, in the
conventional electrical power grid that sense that real-time two way
has features like ability to balance users communications and availability of
loads from worst, and often irregular, control functions, also interaction of
alternative renewable power sources. users and markets, Grid will optimized to
Installed power systems are capable to a new level of efficiency, reliability,
withstand high powers ratings that are availability as well as economic
used to serve far located users via a outcomes Secured from cyber-attack and
transmission (economical dispatch of mother nature disruptions i.e. tornados.
power) while distribution system that was
and is essentially unilateral. For last
many decades we adopt this system and
has served well. However, with
advancement of technology conventional
grid system due to its technical,
economic, and environmental issues is
not an appropriate solution. Modern era
requires system to be more reliable,
scalable, and manageable while also
being cost effective and secure. Modern
era promises a better and advanced
power dispatch system, known as the
"Electrical Smart grid", is a promising
solution to the long-term industry
evolution It is hoped that the intelligent
network to revolutionize the generation,
transmission and distribution, allowing
Fig 1.
two-way network for electric power and
information. One major challenge smart grid
technology will and is facing is cyber
Smart grid provides opportunity
security. Smart grid system advantage
for two-way communication, between
over conventional grid is networking,
users and supplier (Fig 1). Unlike
communication of user and supplier. But,
conventional grid only the supplier is
it's communication and technology can
aware of the system. So, the connection
be hack by organization and, hence can
between energy management systems
control according to their will. Except
enables users to manage energy better,
the difficulty of upgradation of
and help them access to real-time
conventional grid to smart grid, which
pricing. Hence, Smart Grid network will
systems need to communicate and how
facilitate users to get involved in order to
Page 151
information needs to be routed (ring devices must be timed strictly; that is,
system tropology may be) and reliability the running times must have to be the
of Wireless communicators. And specially digits which express multiples of integer
developing countries like Pakistan, India 7.5. Meanwhile, at the exact same
where they can't even meet their operation time, these must have to be
requirements of electricity and higher than or be the closest numbers
infrastructure of communication is not so from the real LOTs of these appliances.
satisfying is a major Problem. We assumed that LOT unit is the number
of slots utilized. For clear view, if
operation time of iron is 48 min, then the
2. METHDOLOGY AND PROPOSED parameter will set to 6 LOT (48 minutes).
APPROACH In another example, if the microwave
For more accurate insight, oven takes 6 minutes to heat the food, 1
overview of the system, single hour is should be set to LOT (7.5 minutes).
subdivided into 8 time chunks i.e. slots; However, the plans to use some of the
hence, the time resolution is 7-min 30 errors in the final result. However, the
sec, so a single day has 192 chunks i.e. error is in a few minutes and can be
slots, which can be represented by the ignored.
symbolic variable. A indicates group of automatic
appliances. For each device a ɛ A, we
t ɛ N = {1, 2, …,192} (1) supposed vector for power scheduling
(time vector belongs to natural number)
(1) (2) (192)
P a = [P a
R R R R P , Pa
P R R P , …., P a
P R R P ]
P (2)
Slot length is 7 minutes and 30
seconds. It is small, as unit of time for (Power consumption and a is the
any operation working duration of nearly appliance and numbers indicates the time
whole of the appliances installed in slot)
home, easy & optimize way to solve
problem is to use Genetic Algorithm and
single day has 192 slots of time, if we where P a is the value of the R R
divide with our unit of time (the binary power consumption for the unit of the
number 11111111 is 256 in decimal). time slot “t”, and the kWh as unit. For
Therefore, the minimum time of the specification of each electrical
operation length of any appliance is device, suppose we have the equipment
assigned to be 7.5 minutes. The for the hour energy expenditure values
operation time length of devices surely for devices, so known and all fixed. Cost
be assigned to an integer of the 7.5 - per hour of power utilization for
minute breaks for easiness. However, appliance a during the time slot tth is P P
there are some other AOAs (appliances determined by A a , energy per time R R
that operate automatically) as well which consumption is represented as

are LOTs for operating once are fixed,
𝐴𝑎
such as microwave oven and electric P a (t) = (3)
8
R RP P R
geyser. Those appliances could operate

automatically so their running times We have our prime objective to
(operation clock) never requires to be optimize the vector P a that denotes the R R
manually controlled. So, the Length of power consumption scheduling vector

Operation time (LOT) Ts of provided which is being transferred to appliance
Page 152
through communicator using centralized equivalent to T Ea -T La . In short, the Span R R R R
wire free network as pictured in Fig 1. of OST for a is

t a ɛ [ T Sa , T Ea – T La ]
R R R(4) R R R R R
3. Problems Formulation:
For easiness, created a vector,
As discussed earlier, it is essential vacillating vector [t 1 , t 2 , …., t a ] which R R R R R R
for end users to put some parameters for consists the Operation Start Time slots
every Appliance that operates for entire appliances that are
automatically(AOA). With this aim, automatically operated. Hence, one can
assumption T S , T E ɛ t (T E > T S, T S is starting R R R R R R R R R R finally describe a scheduling matrix P for
time and T E is ending time of Appliances R R power consumption for all AOAs as
that operated automatically and are
function of time slots t, 192 slots in a
day). Minimum operating time of device P equivalent to
as well as the provided rating of device a
is supposed to be true for suitable
scheduling. Suppose T L is time for R R
Appliances that operated automatically, R

….
R (5)
i.e., minimum number of unit time slots
required or used for the device “P” is represented as matrix, in
operation. Mentioned variables are this matrix every row shows certain
required to be programmed by users via appliance power scheduling. While u is
an in-home display (IHD) to be send to column for index. Finally, expression
the Centralized system. Meanwhile, T E – R
t ɛ N \ [t a , t a + T La ] (6) R R R R R R
T S is supposed to be greater than T L or

R R R R R
denotes that t corresponds to excluding
equal to T L , to elaborate this line take an R R
the span [t a , t a + T La ]. In the power
R R R R R R
example, if the heating system takes 4 consumption/expenditure scheduling

hours to create required atmosphere, matrix, taking summation of entire
then value of T E - T S must be a slot R R R R
values of each column vector. A final
number that is greater than or equivalent form of vector of power consumption
to 32. While equal to and can’t be scheduling will be
greater than 192 slots of the day. Higher
the slots used more outcomes will be. As P scd = {P scd | P scd (t) = Σ P(t)} ….
R R R R R RP P P P (7)
defined T SA as the beginning of operation R R
time (BOT) of a specific appliance. We In the power consumption

(t)
already introduced the variables T E, T S , R R R R
scheduling matrix P indicating tth P P P P
T L and A a , scheduling vector for power

R R R R
column. Users most often assume that
consumption of a appliance would be home devices can early end their work if
easily determined once we are provided possible. Thus, we have assumption that
with t a . R R
by minimizing the delay time rate (DTR)
Now for every appliance a ɛ A, for installed home devices. The
establishes a cluster of variables having representation of delay time rate
OTI [T Sa, T Ea ], LOT T La , and per hour
R R R R R R
described as:
power consumption value A a . Moreover, R R
DTR a R R (8)
OST t a is set a variable. Having T Sa , T Ea
R R R R R R
and T La , t a ought to be higher than or

While in (8) DTRa express for
R R R R
equivalent to T Sa and smaller than or

appliance a. DTR a value shows that time
R R
R R
Page 153
period to operate the appliance if it is Algorithm (GA) Electricity cost was

late so DTR a value is high. 1 & 0 are used R R significantly reduced. Since GA is a
for highest and lowest values. For heuristic based algorithm we used Monte
example, assume that a user assigned the Carlo Simulation method to validate our
variable OTI for a microwave as [T SM , R R results. Another optimization technique
T EM ]and LOT as T LM , and if microwave
R R R R like Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO) &
operated at specific time slot T sM , the R R Ant Colony Optimization (ACO) can also
DTR M will be zero; if it is started at time
R R be adopted to compare the reduction in
slot T EM -T LM , the DTR will be 1. By
R R R R electricity cost.
introducing a delay variable p>l and the
relation with an equation can be
expressed as:
(9)
as the delay variable p>1,

PDTRa geometrically rises as DTR A stays to
P P R R
enhance. So eq.9 will be turning point for

residents and must expected a lower
value if possible. Hence, For the lowering
of the electricity expenditures final
optimization problem, we also try to also
minimize the above value.
From Scheduling optimization of
Power consumption problem, it is cleared
that we have to optimize following:
Minimize: w 1 F 1 (P scd ) +w 2 F 2 (DTR a ) R R R R R R R R R R R R
s.t. t a ɛ [T Sa , T Ea - T La ]R R R R R R R R (10)
F1(Pscd) = ∑192
𝑡=1 (11)
Fig 2. (a)
F 2 (DTR A )=
R R R R (12)
w 1 & w 2 are expressing weights

R R R R
important for the individual objectives.

As obvious w 1 + w 2 must be equal to 1. R R R R
(prc t : EP at tth time slot)

R R P P
4. Simulation & Results
The simulations were done in

MATLAB 2014. Simulation results reveal
significant reduction in Electricity Bill
with Peak Power management. The RTEP
(time Electricity price function was
obtained from Illinois American Company.
After applying the load management
techniques by using the Genetic
Page 154
Transm. Distrib. Conf. Asia Pacific, Seoul,

Korea, Oct. 2009.
[4] T.T.Kim and H.V.Poor,“ Scheduling power
consumption with price uncertainty,”
IEEE Trans. Smart Grid, vol. 2, pp.519–
527,Sep.2011.
[5] A.-H. Mohsenian-Rad and A. Leon-Garcia,
“Optimal residential load control with
price prediction in real-time electricity
pricing environments,” IEEE Trans. Smart
Grid, vol.1,pp.120–133,Sep.2010.
[6] S. Tompros, N. Mouratidis, M. Draaijer, A.
Foglar, and H. Hrasnica, “Enabling
applicability of energy saving applications
on the appliances of the home
environment,” IEEE Netw., vol. 23, pp.8–
16, Nov.2009.
[7] Y. S. Son and K. D. Moon, “Home energy
management system based on power line
communication,” in Proc. IEEE Int. Conf.
Consum. Electron., 2010, pp. 115–116.
[8] M. Inoue, T. Higuma, Y. Ito, N. Kushiro,
and H. Kubota, “Network architecture for
home energy management system,” IEEE
Fig 2. (b) Trans. Consum. Electron., vol. 49, pp.
606–613, Aug. 2003.
5. Future Work & Conclusion [9] M. Erol-Kantarci and H. T. Mouftah,
“Wireless sensor networks for cost-
efficient residential energy management
Future work includes integration of in the smart grid,” IEEE Trans. Smart
renewable energies sources to convert Grid, vol. 2, pp. 314–325, Jun. 2011.
consumer to active prosumers. Such [10]Time-Based Pricing [Online]. Available:
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Time-
optimization techniques coupled with
based_pricing
integration of renewable energy sources
can not only decrease the cost of [11]M.A.A. Pedrasa, T. D. Spooner, and I. F.
electricity for a consumer but also lessen MacGill, “Coordinated scheduling of
the burden on fossil fuels and residential distributed energy resources
conventional energy sources. to optimize smart home energy services,”
IEEE Trans. Smart Grid, vol. 1, pp. 134–
6. References: 143, Sep. 2010.
[12]A. -H. Mohsenian-Rad, V. W.S Wong, J.
[1] L. Peretto, “The role of measurements in Jatskevich, and R. Schober, “Optimal and
the smart grid ear”, IEEE Instrum. Meas. autonomous incentive-based energy
Mag., vol. 13, pp. 22-25, Jun.2010. consumption scheduling algorithm for
[2] G.Xiong, C.Chen, S.kishore, and A. smart grid,” in Proc. IEEE Conf. Innov.
Yener, “Smart(In-home) power scheduling Smart Grid Technol., Gaithersburg, MD,
for demand response on the smart grid,” USA, 2010.
in Proc.IEEE PES Conf. Innov. Smart Grid [13]A. Aggarwal, S. Kunta, and P.K. Verma,
Technol., Anaheim, CA, USA,2011. “A proposed communications
[3] L. Jingjing, X. Da, and A. Qian, “Research infrastructure for the smart grid,” in
on smart gird in China,” in Proc. IEEE
Page 155
Proc. IEEE Conf. Innov. Smart Grid

Technol., Gaithersburg, MD, USA, 2010.
[14]Real-time pricing for residential
customers, Ameren Illinois Power Co Aug.
2012 [Online]. Available:
https://www2.ameren.com/retailenergy/
-realtimeprices.aspx
[15]D. Y. R. Nagesh, J. V. V. Krishna, and S.
S. Tulasiram, “A real-time architecture
for smart energy management,” in Proc.
IEEE Conf. Innov. Smart Grid Technol.,
Gaithersburg, MD, USA, 2010.
[16]S. Young and R. Stanic, “Smart Meter to
HAN communications,” Smart Grid
Australia Intelligent Networking Working
Group, Jul. 2009 [Online]. Available:
http://smartgridaustralia.com.au/SGA/D
ocuments/IN_Work_Group_SmartMeter_H
AN_Comms.pdf
[17]B.R. Szkuta, L.A. Sanabria, and T.S.
Dillon, “Electricity price short term
forecasting using artificial neural
networks,” IEEE Trans. Power Syst., vol.
14, pp. 851–857, Aug. 1999.
[18]D.W. Bunn, “Forecasting loads and prices
in competitive power markets,” Proc.
IEEE, vol. 88, pp. 163–169, Feb. 2000.
[19]Zhuang Zhao, Won Cheol Lee, Yoan Shin,
and Kyung-Bin Song “An Optimal Power
Scheduling Method for Demand Response
in Home Energy Management System”
IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON SMART GRID,
VOL.4, NO.3, SEPTEMBER 2013.
Page 156
BASIC
SCIENCES
Frequency of Candida albicans in paediatric population with candiduria in The

Children’s Hospital, Lahore.
Faiza Shabbir1, Muhammad Ahsan Iqbal2, Dr. Aizza Zafar3
P P P P P
1
Department of Morbid Anatomy and Histopathology,
P P
University of Health Sciences, Lahore-54600

faiza_shabir@hotmail.com
30TU U30T
2
P Department of Morbid Anatomy and Histopathology,
P
University of Health Sciences, Lahore-54600

Ahsan.ravian2010@gmail.com
30TU U30T
3
P Head of Department of Microbiology,
P
The Children’s Hospital, Lahore
Abstract
The urinary tract infection due to candida species is scarce but competently described
ailment in developed countries. In developing countries, it is among the most common
nosocomial infections predominantly infecting patients with predisposing diseases and
neonates. To address this complication among children a cross sectional study was
conducted. Seventy seven positive samples for candiduria in paediatric population were
analyzed to determine the frequency of Candida albicans. Out of these, 49.4% strains of
Candida albicans and 50.6% strains of Candida spp. other than Candida albicans were
detected. Candida albicans urinary tract infections (UTIs) are commonly catheter
associated. The frequency of candiduria associated with catheterized patients is 77.9%.
Moreover the occurrence of candiduria is dependent on different hospital settings, being a
frequent finding in intensive care unit (ICU) patients. It is concluded that Candida albicans
is the most obvious spp. contributing to the candidal urinary tract infections and there is a
strong association between catheterization and candiduria in hospitalized patients. The
best management of these patients is removal of catheters.
Key words: Candida albicans, candiduria, urinary tract infections, germ tube test,
catheter associated.
Page 158
1. INTRODUCTION: limiting. Fluconazole and amphotericin B

The genus Candida and species Candida
30T 30T 30T 30T may be used in complicated cases [6].
P P
albicans were first reported by The objective of the current study was to
botanist Christine 30T Marie Berkhout. 30T determine the frequency of Candida
Candida albicans is the most common albicans as causative agent of candiduria
disease causing fungus among humans. in paediatric population.
Many species of Candida are commensals 2. MATERIALS ANS METHODS:
inhabiting the oral cavity, After approval from ethical committee in
gastrointestinal tract and vagina [1,2,3]. P P the University of Health Sciences,
Candidiasis most commonly occurs in Lahore, study was conducted in the
immunocompromised patients. Children’s Hospital and The Institute of
Urinary tract candidiasis is an important Child Health (CH & ICH) Lahore. Seventy
nosocomial infection. Risk factors include two (72) hospitalized patients with
kidneys and collecting ducts suspected urinary tract infection were
abnormalities, urinary tract pathology, included in our study.
diabetes, previous antibiotic therapy and 2.1. Urine sampling:
malignancy. Application of urinary Urine samples were collected in plastic
catheters enhances the chance of containers. Containers were clean, sterile
infection acquirement [4,5]. P P and dry. After collection they were sent
Candiduria is a complicated problem as it to laboratory for culture and further
has different causes such as colonization, identification tests.
local or systemic infection [6]. The P P
2.2. Chemical examination:
diseases ranges from asymptomatic Urine was first tested macroscopically for
candiduria to sepsis involving all blood traces and then dip strip
anatomic levels of urinary tract examination was done for semi
[7]
P .Patients with asymptomatic candiduria
P
quantitation of pH and specific gravity.
rarely show any complication as 2.3. Wet film examination:
candidiasis seldom results from Using a micropipette, 50 µl (.05 ml) of
candiduria except when obstruction is well mixed centrifuged sample of urine
present or instrumental examination is was placed on the middle of a glass slide.
done [8].Frequent and painful urination,
P P
A cover slip was placed on it avoiding air
dysuria, oliguria, pyuria, pneumaturia bubbles. It was then examined under high
hematuria, flank pain, lower abdominal power dry objective (40x).
discomfort, muscle stiffness and fever, Wet films are helpful to visualize pus
are the most common symptoms observed cells, epithelial cells, red blood cells,
in symptomatic candiduria [9]. P P
yeast cells, casts and organisms in
Diagnostic procedure starts with centrifuged urine.
microscopic examination of urine to find 2.4. Culturing of sample:
pyuria, red cells, casts and yeast cells. A wire was dipped into urine sample after
Candida albicans can grow on bacterial sterilization by heating. The sample was
media like Cysteine Lactose Electrolyte then smeared on the plate of Cysteine
Deficient (CLED) Agar. Creamy white Lactose Electrolyte Deficient (CLED) Agar
pasty colonies having characteristic yeast in a zig-zag manner. The plates were
smell grow after 24-48 hours of incubated at 370C for 48 hours and
P P
[10]
incubation .After macroscopic
P P
growth of Candida was reported as mild,
examination, sample is inoculated in moderate or severe for each specimen.
human serum in an in vitro technique to Growth was evaluated for morphology,
grow germ tubes. The germ tube test is odor, pigmentation and lactose
one of the most significant tests to fermentation. Yeast colonies were
diagnose Candida albicans by reporting isolated and further processed for
yeast cells [11]. P P
Candida albicans identification.
Antifungal therapy is not recommended
in asymptomatic candiduria as it is self-
Page 159
2.5. Identification of Candida

spp. by wet film preparation: Table 2: History of catheterization
Frequency Percentage
Using wire loop, a colony was immersed Catheterized 60 77.9%
in a test tube having distilled water. Non-
After vortexing, a drop of suspension was 17 22.1%
catheterized
placed on a clean glass slide using a Total 77 100%
micropipette. A cover slip was placed on
According to the above data, 60 (77.9%)
this drop avoiding air bubbles. Again it
patients having candiduria were
was examined under high power dry
catheterized while 17 (22.1%) were non-
objective (40x). Budding yeast cells were
catheterized.
seen in the case of Candida species.
2.6. Germ tube test for candida

albicans:
C.albicans will be identified
presumptively by a simple germ tube RBCs
test. Using a micropipette, 500 µl of
human serum was taken into a test tube. Absent
It was incubated at 37ºc for 2-3 hours 17%
0-
after inoculating with a yeast colony. 5/HP
After sufficient time, a drop of serum F
culture was transferred to a clean glass 11%
slide with the help of a pasture pipette. 5-
The slide was examined under 10X and More
10/HPF
40X objectives to identify tube-like than
14%
outgrowths. These outgrowths are called 10/HPF
58%
germ tubes and they form during a.
germination. Culture was reported as
‘C.albicans isolated’ when germ tubes
More Pus cells
were observed and ‘Candida spp. other
than
than C.albicans isolated’ when they were 20/HPF 5-
not observed. 30% 10/HPF
39%
3. REULTS: 15-
20/HPF 10-
A total of 77 Candida spp. were isolated 15/HPF
over a time period of six months. The 13%
18%
frequency of Candida albicans was 49.4% b.
and Candida spp. other than C.albicans
was 50.6% (Table 1). [CATEG
ORY
Proteinuria
Table 1: Organism identification NAME]
Frequency Percentage [PERCE
Candida NTAGE
38 49.4% ]
albicans
Candida
spp. other
39 50.6%
than C.
albicans Absent
Total 77 100% 95%
c.
Page 160
yeast cells Germ tube test Negati

Many
ve
14%
Few 51%
Positiv
38%
e
49%
[CATEG
ORY
NAME]
[PERCE
d. NTAG…
Figure 2: Germ tube test: Germ tube

test was positive in 38 (49%) and negative
in 39 (51%) cases.
Figure 1: Microscopic examination
a, Red blood cells were completely
absent in (17%), 0-5 cells/HPF in 8 (11%),
5-10 cells/HPF in 11 (14%), more than 10 4. DISCUSSION:
cells/HPF in 45 (58%) and completely According to the present study, from a
absent in 13 (17%) cases. b, Proteinuria total of 77 samples of urine 49.4% strains
was present in only 4 (5%) cases. c, The of C. albicans and 50.6% strains of
frequency of pus cells in urine with Candida spp. other than Candida albicans
candiduria is 5-10 cells/HPF 30 (39.0%), were detected. This result is close to the
followed by more than 20 cells/HPF 23 result of Behzadi and his coworkers
(30%), 10-15 cells/HPF 14 (18%), and 15- indicating that Candida albicans is the
20 cells/HPF 10 (13.0%). d, The main pathogen in 50%-70% cases of
frequency of yeast cells in urine with candiduria [11]. Achkar and Fries
P P 30T 30T
candiduria is moderate 37 (48.1%), determined that in urine fungal isolates,

followed by few 29 (37.7%), and many 11 more than 50% were comprised of Candia
(14.3%). albicans [12]. Dimopoulos and his
P P
colleagues reported that the most

obvious culprit contributing towards
increasing nosocomial infections was C.
Table 3: Microbial Culture findings albicans [13].
P
In the present study, the frequency of

Growth Frequency Percent
candiduria associated with catheterized
Mild 15 19.5% patients is 77.9% resembling the
observation of Achkar and Fries which
Moderate 38 49.4% reported that urinary infections due to
Heavy 24 31.2% Candida albicans are more likely to occur
in patients with catheterization. In this
Table 3 presents findings of culture
study, 27.3% samples of candiduria were
examination. Mild growth was observed in
isolated from medical wards (I, II & III)
15 (19.5%) cases. Moderate growth was
followed by 23.4% samples from ICU,
seen in 38 cases (49.4%) while heavy
19.5% from nephrology/urology, 9% from
growth was seen in 24 patients (31.2%).
NNU, 9% from others (including
development ward, cardiac ward and
gastro ward) and rest of 5% from
haematology/oncology which is somehow
closed to the same study concluding that
the candiduria varies in different hospital
Page 161
settings and it is more frequent in A.Z., Hydari, M. and Ahmadzadeh

intensive care units [12]. P P A. (2011). Fungal urinary tract
According to the results of present study, infection in an infant with
proteinuria (protein in urine) is present in posterior urethral valves.
75.3% samples which is supported by the Jundishapur J Microbiol., 4(1):
review conducted by Carter and S71-S76.
coworkers who suggested that between
63 and 83% of cases of culture-confirmed [5] Fisher, J.F. (2011).
UTI having reagent-strip positive tests for Candida Urinary tract infections—
protein [14].
P P
epidemiology, pathogenesis,
The frequency of glucose present in urine diagnosis, and treatment:
samples in the present study is only 5.2% Executive summary. Clin Infect
which shows the percentage of diabetic Dis., 52(6): S429-S432.
patients. The result contradicts the study
[6] Colombo, A.L. and Guimarães, T.
of Sobel and Vazquez which state that
(2007). Candiduria: a clinical and
Candida species is a frequent culprit in
therapeutic approach. Rev Soc Bras
diabetics. This may be due to the fact
Med Trop., 40(3): 332-7.
that, in the present study, the specimens
were collected randomly from paediatric [7] Mahmoudabadi, A.Z., Keradmand,
patients [15].
P P
A.Z. and Enayatollahi, N. (2009).

Frequency of Candiduria in
Inpatients and Outpatients in
5. CONCLUSION: Department of Urology, Golestan
It is concluded that Candida albicans is Hospital, Ahvaz, Iran. Iran J Kidney
the most obvious spp. contributing to the Dis., 3(2): 114-5.
candidal infections of urinary tract and
candiduria is strongly associated with [8] Ivanov, D.V. (2005). Candiduria:
catheterization, and most obvious problems of diagnosis and therapy.
management is the removal of catheter. Antibiot Khimioter., 50: 67-71.
[9] Fisher, J.F., Chew,

6. REFERENCES: W.H., Shadomy, S., Duma,
R.J., Mayhall, C.G. and House,
W.C. (1982). Urinary tract
[1] Erdogan A, Rao SS (April 2015). infections due to Candida albicans.
"Small intestinal fungal Rev Infect Dis., 4(6): 1107-18.
overgrowth". Curr Gastroenterol
Rep. 17 (4): 16. [10] Cheesbrough, M. (2000).
Laboratory examination of urine.
[2] Martins N, Ferreira IC, Barros L, District laboratory practice in
Silva S, Henriques M (June 2014). tropical countries. (Part-2). UK:
"Candidiasis: predisposing factors, Cambridge University Press, pp.
prevention, diagnosis and 107-244.
alternative
treatment".Mycopathologia. 177 (5 [11] Behzadi, P., Behzadi, E.,
-6): 223–240. Yazdanbod, H., Aghapour, R.,
Cheshmeh, M.A. and Omran, D.S.
[3] Tortora, Gerald, J. (2010). Urinary Tract Infections
(2010). Mibrobiology:an Associated with Candida albicans.
Introduction. San Francisco, CA: Maedica (Buchar), 5(4): 277–279.
Pearson Benjamin Cummings.
p. 758. [12] Achkar, J.M. and Fries, B.C.
(2010). Candida Infections of the
[4] Ahmadzadeh, A.R., Valavi, E.,
Shamsizadeh, A., Mahmoudabadi,
Page 162
Genitourinary Tract. Clin.

Microbiol. Rev., 23: 253-273.
[13] Dimopoulos, G., Ntziora, F.,

Rachiotis, G., Armaganidis, A. and
Falagas, M.E. (2008). Candida
albicans versus non-albicans
intensive care unit-acquired
bloodstream infections: differences
in risk factors and outcome. Anesth
Analg., 106(2):523-9.
[14] Carter, J.L., Tomson, C.R.V.,

Stevens, P.E. and Lamb, E.J.
(2006). Does urinary tract infection
cause proteinuria or
microalbuminuria? A systematic
review. Nephrol. Dial. Transplant,
21(11): 3031-3037.
[15] Sobel, J.D. and Vazquez, J.A.

(1999). Fungal infections of the
urinary tract. World j urol., 17:
410-414.
Page 163
Synthesis and Characterization of Substituted Hydrazones from 4-Hydroxycoumarin
Fatima Aslam1, Syed Majid Bukhari1, Asma Zaidi1, Basit Niaz2, Khizar Hussain Shah1,
P P P P P P P P P P
Farhan A. Khan1* P P
1
Department of Chemistry, COMSATS Institute of Information Technology
P
Abbottabad-22060, Pakistan
2
Department of Chemistry, Hazara University, Mansehra-21300, Pakistan
P
Email: chemiub@yahoo.com
Page 164
ABSTRACT
Hydrazones is an important class of compounds. During this research work, synthesis of 1-
amino-4-hydroxyquinolin-2 (1H)-one (1) was carried out by the reaction of hydrazine
hydrate and 4-hydroxycoumarin, subsequently five new compounds were synthesized and
characterized by the condensing compound (1) with several substituted aldehyde
compounds in ambient conditions.
Keywords: 4-hydroxycoumarin, heterocyles, aldehyde, condensation reaction
1. INTRODUCTION
23T followed by its condensation reaction
with different substituted aromatic
Coumarin is a naturally occurring
23T
aldehydes at ambient reaction

compound and its derivatives are known conditions.
to exhibit a variety of applications such
as in pharmacotherapy of breast cancer OH
OH
[1], antituberculosis agent [2], Abs. EtOH
H2N NH2
antiproliferative and Src kinase inhibitor
23T
O O Reflux, 13 hrs
N O
[3] as well as antibacterial agent [4]. Due (1)
NH2
to their broad spectrum of applications O
there is a constant need to explore the C
Reflux
potential of coumarin derivatives and 8 hrs R H
coumarin itself.
HO O
The current research is an attempt to
N
synthesize new pharmacologically active N
compounds [5] of this class. In this paper H

C
R
five new derivatives has been presented.
2. EXPERIMENTAL
Scheme 1: Synthetic route for the
The purchase of all chemicals and synthesis of substituted hydrazones (2-6)
derived from 4-hydroxycoumarin
solvents used in this research was done
from Sigma-Aldrich. All of the solvents 2.1 Synthesis of 1-amino-4-hydroxy
and chemicals were used without quinolin-2 (1H)-one (1)
additional purification. The reactions In 20 mL of abs. ethanol, 4-
were monitored on normal phase TLC hydroxycoumarin (3.0 g, 18.5 mmol) was
plates of Merck Silica gel 60 F 254 . The
R R
added with excess amount of hydrazine

NMR data was recorded on 300 MHz hydrate (64%) and was stirred to reflux
instrument with auto-sampler from for 13 hrs. The obtained crude product
Bruker Avance. The software used to was further purified by recrystallization
analyze the NMR spectra was TopSpin using chloroform.
3.1.
Yield: 92%; m.p. 130-134 °C. 1H NMR
Five new compounds were synthesized (300 MHz, DMSO) δ (ppm): 7.42 (1H, s),
using the synthetic route described in 8.08 (1H, dd), 6.88 (1H, m), 7.25 (1H,
(Scheme 1). In the first step, 4-hydroxy m), 6.76 (1H, dd), 2.0 (2H, NH 2 ) R R
coumarin was reacted with the hydrazine

hydrate to get the compound (1)
Page 165
Yield: 81%; m.p. 160-162 °C. NMR (300

MHz, DMSO) δ (ppm): 1H NMR (300 MHz,
P P
2.2 Synthesis procedure (2-6) DMSO) δ (ppm): 8.62 (1H, s), 8.28 (1H,
d), 8.50 (1H, s), 8.12 (1H, d), 7.78 (1H,
In 25 mL of absolute ethanol, compound dd), 5.92 (2H, d), 5.80 (2H, d), 3.40 (1H,
(1) (1.0 mmol) and substituted aldehyde dd), 4.22 (1H, dd), 16.74 (OH, s), 7.04
(1.0 mmol) were refluxed for 8 hrs; (1H, s)
subsequently, the reaction mixture was
Physical data of compound (1-6) is
concentrated using rotary evaporator.
summarized in (Table 1-2)
The obtained solid was filtered out. The
obtained solid was recrystallized using Table 1: R f values and melting points of
R R
chloroform as a solvent. synthesized compounds (1-6)
2.2. 1 4-hydroxy-1-((nitrobenzyli- Compound R f value

R R Melting
dene)amino)quinolin-2(1H)-one (2) No. (Hexane:Ethyl point
Acetate :: (0C)
P P
Yield: 65%; m.p. 160-164 °C. H NMR1

(300 1:1)
1 0.4 135-137
P P
MHz, DMSO) δ (ppm): 8.38 (1H, s), 8.08

(2H, d), 8.32 (2H, d), 5.90 (2H, d), 6.02 2 0.6 160-164
(2H, d), 3.46 (1H, dd), 4.26 (1H, dd), 3 0.5 144-146
16.72 (OH, s), 6.98 (1H, s) 4 0.6 152-156
5 0.7 154-158
6 0.6 160-162
2.2.2 1-((3-bromobenzylidene)amino-
4-hydroxy quinolin-2(1H)-one (3) Table 2: Substituted R groups and
Percentage yield of substituted
Yield: 79%; m.p.144-146 °C. 1H NMR
P P (300 compounds
MHz, DMSO) δ (ppm): 8.58 (1H, s), 7.76
(2H, d), 7.52 (2H, d), 5.95 (2H, d), 6.05 Compound R group % age
(2H, d), 3.52 (1H, dd), 4.24 (1H, dd), No. yield
16.74 (OH, s), 6.98 (1H, s)
2 NO2 77
2.2.3 1-((3-dimethylaminobenylidene)
amino)-4-hydroxy quinolin -2(1H)-one
3 Br 65
(4)
Yield: 83%; m.p. 152-156 °C. 1H NMR (300
P P
CH3
MHz, DMSO) δ (ppm): 8.54 (1H, s), 7.52
(2H, d), 6.80 (2H, d), 5.92 (2H, d), 5.96 N
4 83
(2H, d), 3.50 (1H, dd), 4.16 (1H, d), CH3
16.72 (OH, s), 7.04 (1H, s), 3.08 (6H, s)
O2N
2.2.4 4-hydroxy-1-((2-nitrobezyli- 5 74
dene)amino)quinolin-2(1H) -one (5)
Yield: 74%; m.p. 154-158 °C. NMR (300 NO2
MHz, DMSO) δ (ppm): 1H NMR (300 MHz,
6 81
P P
DMSO) δ (ppm): 8.56 (1H, s), 8.08 (1H,

d), 7.90 (1H, m), 7.56 (1H, m), 8.02 (1H,
d), 5.88 (2H, d), 5.78 (2H, d), 3.44 (1H,
dd), 4.20 (1H, dd), 16.70 (OH, s), 6.96 3. CONCLUSION
(1H, s)
In this paper synthesis and
2.2.5 4-hydroxy-1-((3-nitrobenzylid- characterization of five new hydrazones
ene)amino)-2(1H)-one (6) derived from 4-hydroxycoumarin has
Page 166
been described; these compounds were

obtained in good yield. Hydrazones are
pharmacologically active compounds with
broad spectrum of applications;
therefore, newly synthesized compounds
will be further subjected to biological
evaluation to have a better insight about
their applications.
4. REFERENCES
[1] Musa, M.A., Cooperwood,
J.S., Khan, M.O.F. 2008. A
review of coumarin
derivatives in
pharmacotherapy of breast
cancer, Current Medicinal
Chemistry, 15(26), pp 2664-
2679.
[2] Rangappa, S.K., Sasidhar,
B.S., Bhari, M.N.M.,
Amélia, S. 2015. Recent
progress in the drug
development of coumarin
derivatives as potent
antituberculosis agents,
European Journal of
Medicinal Chemistry, 100,
pp 257-269.
[3] Abha, K., Sarah J., Rakesh,
T., Amir, N.S., Shilpi, G.,
Shiv, K., Keykavous, P.,
Sunil, K.S. 2011.
Substituted coumarin
derivatives: synthesis and
evaluation of
antiproliferative and Src
kinase inhibitory activities,
Chemistry & Biology
Interface, 1(2), pp 279-296.
[4] Swayam, S.S., Smita, S.,
Subhangankar, N.,
Himanshu, B.S. 2012.
Synthesis of novel coumarin
derivatives and its biological
evaluations, European
Journal of Experimental
Biology, 2(4), pp 899-908.
[5] Nauman, K. 2015. University
of Hazara, Pakistan (MS-
Thesis).
Page 167
EFFECTS OF THE FREQUENT USE OF CALCULATORS ON STUDENTS’ BASIC MATHEMATICS SKILLS
Muhammad Feroz Uddin Ghauri1, Faryal Khaskheli2, Syeda Omama Binte Razi3, Eema
Batool4, Faqiha Sultan5
1,2,3,4
Department of Computer Science, National University of Computer and Emerging
Sciences, Karachi 75030, Pakistan
5
Department of Sciences and Humanities, National University of Computer and Emerging
1
k142182@nu.edu.pk, 2k142039@nu.edu.pk, 3k142810@nu.edu.pk, 4k142067@nu.edu.pk,
5
faqiha.sultan@nu.edu.pk
ABSTRACT
This research investigates the effects of the frequent use of calculators on basic
mathematics skills of students. The major aspect of this experimental research is to
explore the difference in the ability to solve quick mathematical problems with and
without using a calculator. The data for this research have been collected from students
of three distinct grade levels i.e. secondary, college, and university. For this experiment,
the students were given a set of 10 basic mathematical problems, designed according to
each grade level, to solve with and without using a calculator. Comparative analysis of the
scores obtained in this experiment was carried out by paired mean test using statistical
software. The statistical results portrayed a significant difference between the scores
obtained by solving the same mathematical problems with and without using a calculator.
Moreover, students were asked to give their opinions regarding the use of calculators and
interestingly, majority of the students did not agree to the fact that calculators have
harmed their basic mathematics skills but, the findings of this research proved the
opposite.
Keywords: Calculators; Mathematics skills; Paired mean test
1. INTRODUCTION students as they are not challenged

enough. The increasing dependency on
In this era of automation, where
the usage of this device is gradually
everything is expected to be done within
decreasing the confidence of students on
seconds, a great number of students have
their skills.
started out looking the importance of
having basic mathematical skills and have A number of studies and researches have
started using a calculator instead even been conducted to investigate whether
for minor calculations. It is always the calculators are harming students
emphasized that mathematics plays a rather than benefiting them. Some of
crucial part in the logic development of a these researches favor the use of
student but this logic development is calculators whereas the others are
getting suppressed by the excess use of opposed to the excess use of this device;
calculators. Calculators have started to therefore, it is still a conjecture.
become a crutch for the learning
Page 168
This research is conducted to investigate math should be dealt with utmost

that whether calculators are killing our concern.
conventional mathematical skills. For this
purpose, an experimental study is Koay [3] evaluated the opinion of
conducted over three levels of students: different researches about the effects of
secondary, college, and undergraduate use of calculators in primary schools
from different institutions of Karachi, to regarding learning mathematics. This
test their conventional mathematical article discusses the myths and facts
skills with and without calculators. With related to the calculator use. It also
contrast to experimental tests, surveys highlights the importance of the right use
were also conducted to analyze the of calculators. The author emphasizes
opinions of students regarding the use of that calculators must only be seen as a
calculator. helping tool and should not be totally
dependent upon. The author also
2. LITERATURE SURVEY discusses how learning of mathematics
should be made more interesting for the
Ogunkunle and Charles-Ogan [1]
young students.
scrutinized the reliance of students on
calculators for getting hold of basic skills Wilcox [4], a mathematics teacher,
in junior secondary school mathematics. conducted an action research on her class
For this study, the researchers studied of 27 students for this study during a 4-
the exam scripts of 280 students from 5 month period. The researcher first
different schools with 168 boys and 112 started with the hypotheses that
girls. For the analysis of the study, ex calculators have a large influence on the
post facto design was adopted. The learning of students when it comes to
researchers found that students relied on mathematics. She compares the data she
calculators heavily. There was a collected from the same students solving
significant difference in learning of math problems with and without
mathematics between the students who calculators. Even though she does
used the calculators and those students observe that students feel more
who did not. confident with calculators, from the
findings of the research, her initial
Mason [2] analyzed the understandings,
hypothesis is proved wrong since there is
viewpoints, and practices of secondary
no evident difference that calculators
mathematics teachers in learning and
have such a huge impact on math skill
teaching mathematics with the use of
development.
calculators. The data was collected by
the means of questionnaires, Lin and Yuan [5] analyzed the opinions of
observations and interviews. 16 teachers 131 elementary teachers. The data was
from a suburban school participated in collected by the means of questionnaires.
this study. The researcher found that The researcher used factor analysis and
introducing calculators in secondary found two results in this study, some of
mathematics is a complex issue. More the participants protested against the use
teachers believed in the use of of calculators indicating that it
calculators whereas a few emphasized on suppresses the mathematical
its drawbacks. Nevertheless, the matter development of students where as others
of introducing calculators in secondary seemed to agree that calculators can
Page 169
promote mathematical learning amongst Cabanilla-Pedro [9] addressed different

students. concerns related to calculator use and
what evidences researches provide
Carter, et al. [6] presented a study on 32 regarding this matter. The researcher
practicing primary school mathematics provided a variety of unique activities
teachers and 117 pre-service primary which can enhance the learning of
school teachers. These teachers were mathematics and believes that
enrolled in a workshop or classes at calculators focus on ‘whys’ instead of
Singapore’s National Institute of ‘hows’. As other literatures discussed in
Education (NIE). This research was the study, this study also suggests that
questionnaire based and the participants with proper balance of calculators with
completed a survey to indicating the mental, paper and pencil and estimation
crutch or catalyst belief. The findings of techniques can provide a helpful tool for
the research showed that pre-service better understanding and knowledge of
primary teachers seemed to be more mathematics.
leaned towards the calculators being a
crutch belief whereas the practicing Ahn [10] started his research study with
primary teachers believed calculators to the assumption that calculators should be
be a catalyst. used for a better understanding of the
concepts of mathematics. The researcher
Boorman [7] examined several researches stated that using calculators helps
and studies conducted on the topic increase our mathematical skills, which
related to; whether the calculators are should be a priority rather than
bringing more harm than good. The concentrating on mechanical
author discusses various papers and computation skills. The researcher also
researchers from which he concludes that stated a number of cons and pros related
the supporters of calculator use are to calculator use. After discussing some
visibly more than the protestors. questions where calculators can be used
However, the attitudes and approach best, teaching-learning models and
towards calculators must be reframed so shedding light on conceptual questions
that rather than damaging our paper and related mathematics, the author
pencil skills it becomes a helping tool. concluded that calculators are a useful
Papadopoulos [8] presented a two staged device if used appropriately.
study in which the center was on problem
3. METHODOLOGY
solving appropriate to the use of
operators and place-value integrated In this study, the effects of frequent use
with calculator use. Web-based broken of calculators on students’ mathematical
calculator questions were used for this skill are investigated and for this purpose
research study. The findings of this the sampling technique that has been
calculator show that many used for this research work is a stratified
misconceptions regarding mathematics random sampling. For this type of
exist with the use of calculator specially sampling, the population is divided into
the knowledge of place-value. The separate segments or portions that are
researcher suggests that with progressing then called strata. The elements of each
technology, teachers must find better stratum share some similar characteristic
alternatives to incorporate calculators in among them. Subsets from these strata
the daily practice of students. are combined to form the population for
Page 170
the research. Model framework for the 4. STATISTICAL ANALYSIS

study is presented in Figure 1. As mentioned above, frequency test is
carried out for the opinion related
questions and paired mean testing for the
practical test portion. In this section, the
results are presented graphically in
Figures 2-8 and Tables 1-3 show the
outputs of paired mean tests for three
different groups.
Figure 1: Model Framework
As the population for this research is the

students of Karachi, this population is
Figure 2: Students started using
divided into three groups that are
calculator
secondary, college and university. On
total 210 students i.e. 70 of each grade The first question is based on when the
level; Secondary Schools, Colleges & candidates started using calculators. So,
Universities are selected from each the answer received, was almost same
group. Further, different tests are from each grade level as shown in Figure
carried out on these three groups to 2. 80% students started using it in
analyze the impact of calculators on each secondary while 16% selected college and
of these groups separately. 4% selected primary as their answer for
the above question.
The test conducted is based on 7 general
questions which are same for each group
namely secondary, college and university
and 10 mathematical questions which are
set according to the curriculum of each
grade level. These 10 mathematical
questions are first needed to be solved
without calculator and then are again
solved using calculators.
The general questions are analyzed

through frequency test while paired
mean test is applied on the mathematical
Figure 3: Preference to calculator for
questions and comparative analysis is
basic calculations
carried out.
Page 171
The second question of the test is to The fourth question of the test is to
analyze the preferences related to evaluate whether math teachers have
calculator use of students for basic welcomed the use of calculators in their
calculations e.g. simple addition and class rooms or not. In Figure 5, nearly
subtraction. It can be seen in Figure 3 84% students agreed that their teachers
that approximately 64% agreed that they allow them to use calculators during class
would surely prefer to use it. 32% did not but 14% students are still forbidden to
use it, these students mainly belong to
agree to use it for simple calculations
primary classes while a very of few them
while the rest 4% were not sure about
are of secondary.
what to prefer.
Figure 6: Use of calculators to be

Figure 4: Calculators as a support restricted
The third question of the test is to The fifth question of the test is to gather
examine the mindset of students information about the most common
regarding their view of considering query related to the use of calculators
calculator as a helping hand. In Figure 4, i.e. whether the use of this device should
80% agreed to the point that they see be restricted or not. In Figure 6, 58%
calculators as a helping hand while 18% students did not agree to the point that
still believe that it is not a support in use of calculators should be restricted.
fact it can make them dependent on it so But 24% agree that use of calculator
they avoid it as much as possible. should be restricted. At least in this way
they would be using their mind to solve
those questions which can be possibly
solved without calculators which would
further help them to gain trust on their
abilities. There are 18% students also who
are not sure about the restriction plan.
As it can be seen previously in Figure 6
majority had preferred to use calculators
for basic calculations and did not even
want its use to be restricted. Yet in
Figure 7, which explains the sixth
question of the test which is to gather
information about the beliefs of students
Figure 5: Permission of teachers for the regarding harm being brought to their
use of calculators math skills due to excessive use of
Page 172
calculators. 56% accepted that their further because it is found during the
excessive use of calculators has harmed research that majority of the students
get stuck in solving the basic
mathematical questions and scoreless in
the test, when attempted without a
calculator.
This time the ratio of students who are
not sure about their confidence is more
i.e.30%. 58% students are there who
believe that they have confidence on
their skills while the remaining is not sure
of their confidence levels.
The test portion which is based on 10
Figure 7: Calculators harm the basic mathematical questions was first
skills conducted without calculator and then
the same test with calculator. It gave
their basic skill which is also proved in students a fair chance to judge their own
their test as they found much difficulty in skills and check at what point they are
solving simple BODMAS questions. But 38% lacking in.
students still have trust on themselves
that calculators did not cause any harm Pair 1
to them because they use it when it is
actually not possible to solve the Manual -
Calculator
question without it and they have less
time. While 6% students still have no idea Mean -2.5
about their own abilities.
Std. Deviation 2.091
Paired Std. Error Mean 0.254

Differences
95% Lower -3.006
Confidence
Interval of
the Upper -1.994
Difference
t -9.858
df 67
Figure 8: Confidence of students with Sig. (2-tailed) 0.00

respect to recalling basic math facts
Table 1: Mean statistics for Secondary
The seventh question of the test aims to level
measure the confidence of students with
respect to recalling basic math facts. In It can be seen in tables 1-3, respectively
figure 8, more than half of the students that significance value is 0.00 which has
still agree that they have enough been obtained through the mean test
confidence on themselves that they can applied on the mathematical test of the
recall math facts without the help of research. The significance value is same
calculators but this point is disproved for all the three grade level.
Page 173
Pair 1 The confidence interval is kept 95%. As

the significance value is lesser than 0.05
Manual - it means that the scores of the test
Calculator
performed by using calculators are
Mean -2.5 significantly greater than the results of
the test performed manually.
5. CONCLUSION
Paired Std. Error Mean 0.254
Differences
The result attained from this research is
95%
that, indeed, calculators do harm the
Lower -3.006
Confidence basic skills of students which validate the
Interval of initial assumption of the research. The
the Upper -1.994
Difference
opinion based portion of the survey
concludes that students depend upon
t -9.858 calculators a lot. Not many of the users
of this device see it as a negative effect
df 67 on their basic mathematical skills. But,
the practical test portion of this survey
Sig. (2-tailed) 0.00 spoke different numbers, as from the
collected data, from the test portion and
Table 2: Mean statistics for College from mean testing, it is clear that on
level average no candidate was able to answer
correctly more than 6 or 7 basic
questions whereas, when they had
calculators in hand, they performed
Pair 1
better. 62 % of the sample of agreed that
Manual - prefer to use calculators for even basic
Calculator calculations and 58 % opposed to the
restricted use of this device, as a large
Mean -1.765 number of 80 % students see it as a
crucial helping hand.
In the end, this research suggests that
Paired Std. Error Mean 0.175 calculators should be used with more
Differences responsibility, as one may think that it
95% Lower -2.115 doesn’t harm his/her skills. Calculators,
Confidence
Interval of indeed, are a helping hand, but from the
the Upper -1.415 experimental research carried out in this
Difference study, it has been found that use of this
helping hand must be restricted for the
t -10.059
logic development of the student. With
correct use of this device, exploration of
df 67
mathematics may become more
Sig. (2-tailed) 0.00
interesting on a whole new level.
6. REFERENCES
Table 3: Mean statistics for University [1] Ogunkunle, R. and Charles-Ogan,
level G., 2013. Dependence on
calculators for acquisition of basic
skills in junior secondary school
Page 174
Mathematics, Journal of Research [8] Papadopoulos, I., 2013. Using

in National Development. calculators for assessing pupils’
11(1):pp. 228-232. conceptualization on place-value,
[2] Mason, A., 2010. Integrating International Journal of
Calculators in the Secondary Mathematical Education in
Mathematics Classroom: Teachers' Science and Technology. 44(4):pp.
Attitudes and Perspectives. Online 523-544.
Submission. [9] Cabanilla-Pedro, L.A., 2006.
[3] Koay, P.L., 2006. Calculator use Using Calculators in Primary
in primary school mathematics: a Mathematics. Learning Science &
Singapore perspective, The Mathematics: SEAMEO RECSAM.
Mathematics Educator. 9(2):pp. [10] Ahn, B.-G., 2001. Using
97-111 calculators in mathematics
[4] Wilcox, L., 2008. Calculators in a education in Korean elementary
Middle School Mathematics schools, Journal of the Korea
Classroom: Helpful or Harmful?, Society of Mathematical
Action Research Projects:pp. Education Series D: Research in
Paper 17. Mathematical Education. 5(2):pp.
[5] Lin, Y.-C. and Yuan, Y., 2009. 107-118.
The elementary school teachers’
belief of integrating calculator
into mathematic instruction.
Graduate School of Education:
Chung Yuan Christian University
Taiwan.
[6] Carter, J., Ferrucci, B., and
Yeap, B.H., 2008. Incorporating
calculators into primary school
mathematics: prospective and
practicing teachers’ beliefs about
their role. in Proceedings of the
13th Asian Technology Conference
in Mathematics. Citeseer.
[7] Boorman, D., 2015. Should
primary school children be
‘calculator aware’or ‘calculator
beware’?, Teacher Advancement
Network Journal. 7(1):pp. 74-86.
Page 175
Chromosomal Aberrations in cases with Turner Syndrome Phenotype

U
Osheen Sajjad1, Muhammad Yaqoob2, Saqib Mahmood3

P P P P P
1
PDepartment of Human Genetics and Molecular Biology, University of Health Sciences,
P
Lahore-54600
2
Department of Medical Genetics (CH&ICH) Lahore
P P
3
PDepartment of Human Genetics and Molecular Biology, University of Health Sciences,
P
Lahore-54600
Abstract:
Turner syndrome is a chromosomal disorder in females having variable clinical features
like short stature, webbed neck, and cubitus valgus, low posterior hair line, shield like
chest, widely spaced nipples, coarctation of aorta, horse shoe kidney. Primary
amenorrhea, sexual infantilism, streak ovaries and ovarian failure are prominent in
adolescents. The Tuner syndrome phenotype is associated with a group of chromosomal
aberrations of one X chromosome. To address this subject a cross sectional study was
conducted on 30 cases with Turner syndrome phenotype. Physical features of all patients
were recorded. Lymphocyte culturing was done on whole blood samples followed by
chromosomal harvesting, G-banding of chromosomes and then analysis and karyotyping of
the chromosomes according to guidelines from the International System for Human
Cytogenetic Nomenclature. Absence/structural abnormality was found in (36.7%) cases out
of which 7 cases had 45,X0 and 4 had mosaicism and 46,isoXq karyotype. With Turner
syndrome karyotype 11 patients had short stature, 2 had epicanthic folds and wide ears,
and 8 with webbed neck, broad chest and low SMR, 9 patients had widely spaced nipples,
6 cases had low posterior hair line and 7 had cubitus valgus and 3 had edematous hands or
feet. Streak ovaries were found in 2 and hypoplastic ovaries were obvious in 6 patients.
These finding were discussed and compared with other regional and international studies.
Key words: Turner syndrome, chromosomal aberrations, short stature, cubitus valgus,
streak ovaries.
1. Introduction: correctly separate during meiosis), that

Turner syndrome (TS) is a results in 45, X0. In 50% of TS cases, only
chromosomal disorder that alters one X chromosome is inherited leaving a
development in females. It is one of monosomy X genotype and about 30% of
the most common of the sex patients are mosaics with normal cell line
chromosomal aneuploidies. It occurs (45, X0/46, XX). This condition may also
in 1 out of every 2500 live female occur if one of the X chromosomes has a
births but it is much more common structural abnormality. Approximately
among pregnancies that do not
10-15% has an isochromosome X, which
survive to term Elsheikh [2]. It is
usually results from duplication of long
characterized by the absence of all or
a part of one of the sex chromosomes arm of one X chromosome with loss of
in some or all cells. Short stature, the short arm of that X chromosome
webbed neck, low posterior hair line, Doswell [1] Jonassan [5].
epicanthic folds, wide ears, cubitus Other frequent aberrations include
valgus, broad and flat chest shaped partial deletion of the X chromosome
like a shield with widely spaced [del(X)], resulting in a 46,X,del(X)
nipples, short metacarpals and karyotype and a ring chromosome (r), in
Madelung deformity and gonadal which a single chromosome may suffer 2
dysgenesis are the most common breaks and the broken ends are joined
manifestations found in patients with together, thereby forming a ring and a
Turner syndrome Jones [6]. 46,Xr(X) karyotype. Other karyotypes
In Turner syndrome, sex chromosome related to TS include those with
disjunction (failure of chromosome to
Page 176
isochromosome, (45,X0/46,X,isoXp) and Penicillin Streptomycin. It was incubated

(45,X0/46,X,isoXq), with rings, for 72 hours at 37oC.
P P
(45,X0/46,X,rX); or fragments 2.3 Harvesting of chromosomes

Cultured blood was harvested for
(45,X0/46,X,fraX), (45,X0/46,X,delXp),
chromosomes using Colcemid for mitotic
(45,X0/46,X,delXq) are less common. In arresting of the cells at metaphase stage.
rare cases (45,X0/46,XX/47,XXX) and RBC’s washing was done using hypotonic
(45,X0/46,XX/47,XYY) pattern is also solution of KCl (0.075M) and then with
seen Gutiérrez [4], Khan [8],Rapaport the Carnoy’s fixative until the WBCs
[10]. pellet became clear.
2.4 Slide Making and staining
Turner Syndrome features are due to Multiple slides were prepared by taking
reduced dosage of genes on the short arm pallet into a dropper and then dropping it
of the X chromosome (Xp) Zinn [14]. on the frosted slide. These slides were
Short stature phenotype in Turner then placed on a hot plate until they get
syndrome is thought to be due to the dried for heat fixation. Chromosomes
defects of the pseudoautosomal were trypsinized and stained with G-
homeobox gene SHOX. Haplo- banding technique. These slides were
insufficiency of the SHOX gene causes evaluated under bright field microscope
short stature with highly variable clinical for chromosomal analysis and
severity, ranging from isolated short karyotyping.
stature without dysmorphic feature 3 Results:
Leka[9], Rappold [11]. 3.1 Clinical Data
The objective of the current study was to Age of the patients at the time of
find the frequency of various examination ranged from 1 to 384 with a
chromosomal aberrations in Turner mean age of 137.37 months. Mean height
syndrome phenotype. and weight of these patients was 114.76
Use full justifications: and 20.92 respectively (Table 1).
2. Material and Methods Table 1: Mean age (months), height

After approval from ethical committee in (cm) and weight (kg) of children with
the University of Health Sciences, turner Syndrome
Lahore, study was conducted in the age(months) height(cm) weight(kg)
Department of Medical Genetics Mean 137.37 114.76 20.92
(CH&ICH) Lahore. Thirty female patients Std.
68.18 21.58 8.915
presenting with short stature, with or Deviation
without webbed neck, broad chest with Minimum 1.00 55.00 2.50
or without widely spaced nipples, cubitus Maximum 384.00 140.00 40.00
valgus, streak ovaries, primary
amenorrhea were included in our study. The frequency of consanguineous
Male patients and female patients who do marriage was found 63.3% among parents
not had dysmorphic features described of children with short stature (Figure 1a).
above. Low SMR (sexual maturity rate) was
2.1 Blood sampling recorded in 22 cases (73.3%) cases while
After informed consent, 3ml blood was rest (n=8, 26.7%) had normal SMR (Figure
taken in Heparinized vacutainers that 1b).
were subjected to peripheral cell culture
and harvesting of the chromosomes as
mentioned by Jonassan et al in 1986
Jonassan [5].
2.2 Peripheral blood Culturing
Peripheral blood culturing was done using
RPMI 1640 culture media, Fetal calf
serum, L-Glutamine, Phytohemagglutinin,
Page 177
Cubitus valgus 11 (36.7%) 19 (63.3%)

Edema of
4 (13.3%) 26 (86.7%)
hands/feet
3.2 Chromosomal Aberrations

Table 4 shows chromosomal aberrations
in 30 patients. 45,X0 was found in 7 cases
(23.3%) subjects whereas 2 and one
patient had 46,isoX and 46,XX/45,X0
(mosaic) karyotypes respectively.
Figure 1: Percentage distribution of Collectively 45, X0 and other
consanguineous marriages (a), SMR (b) chromosomal anomalies were found in 11
and condition of ovaries (c) in patients cases, (36.7%) as shown in table 5.
with Turner syndrome features Karyotypes 45,X0, 46,isoX are given in
Karyograms figure 2, 3 respectively.
Table 2: Frequency of Hypoplastic
uterus in Turner Syndrome Table 4: Frequency of various Turner
Frequency Percent syndrome karyotype
present 18 60.0 Frequency Percent
absent 12 40.0 45,XO 7 23.3
Total 30 100.0 46,isoX 2 6.7
mosaic 1 3.3
Table 2 and Figure 1c present findings of 46,XX 20 66.7
pelvi-abdominal ultrasound examination.
Hypoplastic uterus was seen in 18 (60%) Table 3.5: Frequency of 45,X0/46,IsoX/
cases. Hypoplastic ovaries were present Mosaic (collective) Karyotype results in
in 11 cases (37%) while streak ovaries Turner Syndrome
were seen in 4 patients (13%). Frequency Percent
Table 2 shows frequency of different present 11 36.7
clinical features in study population. absent 19 63.3
Short stature was preset in all. Widely Total 30 100.0
spaced nipples were present in 17 cases
(58%) followed by broad chest 16 cases
(54%) and least epicanthic folds (n=2,
6.7).
Table 3: Frequency of Clinical features
of Turner Syndrome
Present Absence
n(%) n(%)
Short stature 30 (100%) 0 (0%)
Epicanthic
2 (6.7%) 28 (93.3%)
folds
Wide ears 4 (13.3%) 26 (86.7%)
Webbed neck 12 (40%) 18 (60%)
Figure 2: Female karyotype with 45,X0
Low posterior
8 (26.7%) 22 (73.3%) complement
hairline
Broad chest 16 (53.3%) 14 (46.7%)
Widely spaced
17 (56.7%) 13 (43.3%)
nipples
Page 178
Ultrasonographic findings revealed that

rudimentary uterus, streak and
hypoplastic ovaries were found in 60% of
the cases. This finding is also consistent
with Malaysian study Kannan [7].
In the present study, the mean age of all
the females was 137.37 months (11.4
yrs). While in other studies the mean age
of presentation was 21 years Suri [12].
Probably late presentation of Turner
syndrome in the present study is due the
ignorance and low level of literacy in the
parents of study population. In present
study most of the families belongs to
Figure 3: Female karyotype with poor to middle socio-economic groups.
46,isoXq Out of 11 patients 7 (63.3%) had 45,X0
karyotype, while mosaicism and other X
4. Discussion: anomalies were detected in 36.7%. This
In 30 cases enrolled for the present finding is consistent with another study
study, all had short stature with variable conducted by Huang which reports 50-
frequency of other dysmorphic features. 70% of Turner syndrome cases had 45,X0
Turner karyotype was found in 11 karyotype Huang [15]. However, low
patients in the present investigation. This percentage of 45,X0 has been found by
finding is consistent with another study other investigators Gravholt [3],Suri [12].
carried out in India by Suri and his CONCLUSION:
associates Suri [12]. It was found that Chromosomal analysis is very important
short stature was the most presenting investigation to establish a case with
feature in Turner syndrome patients, Turner syndrome as none of the features
regardless of the karyotype. This TS are pathognomonic of this genetic
indicates that some Turner syndrome disorder. The diagnosis of TS is often
signs can be present in short girls, but delayed. We recommend karyotype
these clinical findings are not specified analysis for all girls with unexplained
for TS. short stature, webbed neck, low
The 70% consanguineous marriages in the posterior hair line, cubitus valgus widely
present study are significantly higher as spaced nipples, hypoplastic uterus and
compared to the general population of streak and hypoplastic ovaries.
this region which has been reported as
46% Yaqoob [13]. This risk factor could be 5. REFERENCES:
more elaborated if we explore other
causes of short stature in all patients as [1] Doswell, BH., Visootsak, J.,
abnormal karyotypes in Turner Syndrome Brady, AN., Graham, JM JR.
have not been documented to be 2006. Turner syndrome: an
influenced by inbreeding. update and review for the primary
Present study shows cubitus valgus in pediatrician. Clin pediatr (phila),
36.7%, broad chest in 53.3%, widely 45(4), pp 301-13.
spaced nipples 56.7% and webbed neck in [2] Elsheikh, M., Dunger, DB.,
40% of the patients. These results are Conway, GS., Wass, JA. 2002.
consistent with another study carried out Turner syndrome in adulthood.
in Malaysia Kannan [7]. In the same study Endocr Rev, 23(1), pp 120-40.
conducted in 2008 by Kannan et al. it was [3] Gravholt, CH. 2004.
found that 57.1% of patients had low SMR Epidemiological, endocrine and
this figure is lower as compared to the metabolic features in Turner
present study 73%. This difference may syndrome, Eur J Endocrinol,
be due to ethnic and regional effects. 151(6), pp 657-87.
Page 179
[4] Gutiérrez, C.EI., Flores, C.RM, A clinical and cytogenetic study of

Cudish, S.JB., Rodríguez, D.MI., Turner syndrome, Indian Pediatr,
Herrera, H.R., Leal-Garza CH. 32(4), pp 433-42.
2003. Evaluation of sex [13] Yaqoob, M., Gustavson, K-H.,
chromosome aneuploidies in Jalil, F., Karlberg, J. 1993. Early
women with Turner's syndrome by child health in Lahore, Pakistan:
G-banding and FISH. A serial case II. Inbreeding, Acta Paediatr,
study, J Reprod Med, 48(10), pp 390(suppl), pp17-26.
804-8. [14] Zinn, AR., Ross, JL. 2001.
[5] Jonasson, JA. 1986. Analysis and Molecular analysis of genes on Xp
interpretation of human controlling Turner syndrome and
chromosome preparations in premature ovarian failure (POF).
Human cytogenetics, a practical Semin Reprod Med., 19(2): 141-6.
approach. DE. Rooney., BH. [15] Huang, B., Thangavelu, M.,
Czepulkowski. Washington DC. Bhatt, S., J Sandlin, C. & Wang,
[6] Jones, KL. 2006. 45 X syndrome S. 2002. Prenatal diagnosis of 45,
in Smith’s Recognizable Pattern of X and 45, X mosaicism: the need
Human Malformation, 6th ed, WB
P P for thorough cytogenetic and
Saunders Company. clinical evaluations. Prenatal
[7] Kannan, T P., Azman, B Z., diagnosis, 22(2): 105-110.
Tarmizi, A.A B., Suhaida M A.,
Mariam, S.I., Ravindran A.,
Zilfalil B A. 2008. Turner
syndrome diagnosed in
northeastern Malaysia, Singapore
Med J, 49(5), pp 400.
[8] Khan, S., Ahmad, S., Khan, Y.
2006. Karyotypic assessment in
patients of Turner syndrome, Ann
Pak Inst Med Sci, 2(4), pp 269-71.
[9] Leka, SK., Tzeli, K. S, Mavrou, K.
A., Kanavakis, E. 2006. Short
stature and dysmorphology
associated with defects in the
SHOX gene, Hormones (Athens),
5(2), pp 107-18.
[10] Rapaport, R. Robert M.
Kliegman., Richard E. Behrman.,
Hal B. Jenson. 2001.
Hypofunction of the ovaries in
Nelson Textbook of Pediatrics,
16th ed, WB Saunders Company.
P P
[11] Rappold, G., Blum, WF.,

Shavrikova, EP., Crowe, BJ.,
Roeth, R., Quigley, CA., Ross,
JL., Niesler, B. 2007. Genotypes
and phenotypes in children with
short stature: clinical indicators of
SHOX haploinsufficiency. J Med
Genet., 44(5): 306-13.
[12] Suri, M., Kabra, M., Jain,
U., Sanders, V., Saxena,
R., Shukla, A., Singh,
GV., Verma, IC. 1995.
Page 180
Genetic Sex Assignment to cases with Ambiguous Genitalia
Shamaila Habib 1, Muhammad Yaqoob 2, Saqib Mahmood 3,

1
Department of Human Genetics and Molecular Biology, University of Health Sciences,
Lahore-54600
2
Department of Medical Genetics (CH&ICH) Lahore
3
Department of Human Genetics and Molecular Biology, University of Health Sciences,
Lahore-54600
ABSTRACT
Ambiguous genitalia are those when on simple observation it is difficult to assign sex to
the individual. In this condition baby’s genitalia fails to form completely or the baby may
have characteristics of both sexes and most commonly the external genitalia do not match
the internal sex organs. This study was designed for the genetic sex assignment to cases of
ambiguous genitalia. A cross sectional study was conducted on 30 cases with Ambiguous
Genitalia. Physical features of all patients were recorded. Standard cell culture technique
used to culture lymphocyte by using peripheral blood samples, chromosomes were
prepared, stained with G-banded technique, karyotyping and analysis was done in
accordance to guidelines from the International System for Human Cytogenetic
Nomenclature. On the basis of thorough clinical examination followed by biochemical,
radiological investigations and chromosomal analysis out of thirty patients, 17 had 46, XY
DSD, 10 had 46, XX DSD, 1 had ovotesticular DSD and two had 46, XX testicular DSD.
Patients with Female pseudo hermaphroditism presented with enlarged clitoris, labial
fusion, and urogenital sinus. In Patients with Male pseudo hermaphroditism, affected
males had micropenis, hypospadias, and palpable gonads. Patients with 46, XX males FISH
analysis advised to explore SRY gene on X chromosomes. Consanguinity was found (70%)
among parents of children with ambiguous genitalia. This study concludes that CAH is
underlying cause of Female pseudo hermaphroditism. 46, XY DSD more common than 46,
XX DSD.
KEYWORDS: Ambiguous Genitalia, Sex Assignment, Disorders of Sex Development (DSD),
Pseudo hermaphroditism, Cytogenetic Abnormalities.
1. INTRODUCTION: Normal human sex development is a

highly coordinated process that occurs in
Ambiguous genitalia are those when on three different phases: in first phase of
simple observation it is difficult to assign development chromosomal sex was
sex to the individual. In this condition, established which leads to the
the newborn’s external genitalia do not development of sex specific gonads and
clearly shown to be either female or phenotypic differentiation of external
male. In ambiguous genitalia either and internal sex organs [22].
genitals of baby failed to develop
completely or baby may show the Disorders of sex development (DSDs) are
characteristics of both sexes and very inherited conditions in which the
often the external genitalia do not match development of chromosomal, gonadal,
the internal sex organs [7]. AG is a or anatomic sex is atypical. DSDs
common condition occurring 1 in 4500 classified into four broad categories:
births [13]. female pseudo hermaphroditism (46, XX
females); male pseudo hermaphroditism
Page 181
(46, XY males); true hermaphroditism Androgen insensitivity syndrome (AIS) is

(ovotesticular DSD); and mixed gonadal an X linked condition in which
dysgenesis [6] [15]. insensitivity developed to androgen. AIS
caused by mutation in androgen receptor
Syndromic disorders of sex development (AR) gene. AR gene required for the
may be due to monogenic defects, normal development of external &
biochemical abnormalities of steroid internal genitalia. The clinical
synthesis, or cytogenetic abnormalities manifestation of these defects varies
comprising micro deletions or from subjects with female external
duplications or unbalanced genitalia to the subjects with mild form
rearrangements [12]. of impaired masculinization [9] [16].
The most common cause of female True hermaphroditism (46, XX) is a
pseudo hermaphroditism is congenital medical condition in which both ovaries
adrenal hyperplasia (CAH) [3].CAH is an and testis present in one individual. Both
autosomal recessive disorder which Wolffian and Mullerian ducts are found
affects approximately 1 in 12,500 births. but external sex organs are usually
21-hydroxylase deficiency of adrenal unclear [20].
cortex is an underlying cause of CAH
which is characterized by deficient in Mixed gonadal dysgenesis (MGD) is a
cortisol levels or with or without chromosomal disorder of sex
aldosterone deficiency and androgen development showing large variation in
excess. Patients with 46, XX and CAH phenotypes. Patients with MGD usually
presented with enlarged clitoris have ambiguous and asymmetric genitalia
urogenital sinus and labioscrotal folds. In with a fusion of Wolffian and Müllerian
46, XY karyotype patients presented with duct derivatives [23].
palpable gonads, undescended testis,
penoscrotal hypospadiasis and small Early diagnosis and proper management
phallus [2]. of AG is challenging issue in our
environment [21].
In patients with male pseudo
hermaphroditism (MPH), affected males The objective of the current study was to
have clitoris like phallus, bifid scrotum, genetic sex assignment to cases with
urogenital sinus and testis are in inguinal ambiguous genitalia.
canal or in labioscrotal folds [19]. MPH is 2. MATERIAL AND METHODS:
a complex disorder in which patients
failed to develop external and internal After approval from ethical committee in
sex organs in the presence of testis. the University of Health Sciences,
Lahore, study was conducted in the
Deficiency of the enzyme 5- alpha Department of Medical Genetics
reductase is the main cause of MPH which (CH&ICH) Lahore. Thirty patients
leads to decrease in levels of presenting with Ambiguous Genitalia are
dihydrotestosterone which is a bioactive selected.
androgen [4]. It is an autosomal recessive
condition in which masculinization in 46, 2.1. Blood sampling
XY individuals fails to develop completely
due to failure to convert testosterone After informed consent, 3ml blood was
into the dihydrotestosterone [5]. taken in Heparinized vacutainers that
were subjected to peripheral cell culture
Page 182
and harvesting of the chromosomes as Table 1: Mean age (months), height

mentioned by Jonasson [14]. (cm) and weight (kg) of patients with
ambiguous genitalia.
2.2. Peripheral blood
Culturing
Age Weight Height
Peripheral blood culturing was done in T- (months) (kg) (cm)
25 cell culture flask by using standard Mean 41.3067 11.3633 79.6183
cell culture techniques using RPMI 1640 Std. 5.5779 1.1044 3.6440
culture media, fetal calf serum, L- Deviation
Glutamine, Phytohemagglutinin, and
Penicillin Streptomycin. It was incubated The frequency of consanguineous
for 72 hours at 37oC. marriage was found 21/30 (70%) among
2.3. Harvesting of parents of children with ambiguous
chromosomes genitalia (Figure 1)
At 72 hours a mitotic inhibitor (colcemid)

was added to the culture. This stops cell
division at metaphase stage. The cells at absent
metaphase stage were harvested by using 9
present present
hypotonic solution of KCl (0.075M) and 30%
21
Carnoy’s fixative. 70% absent
2.4. Slide Making and staining
Multiple slides were prepared by taking

Figure 1: Frequency of consanguinity of
pallet into a dropper and then dropping it
a population under study :( n=30)
on the frosted slide. These slides were
then placed on a hot plate until they get Table 2 showing the frequency of clinical
dried for heat fixation. Chromosomes features of female pseudo
were trypsinized and stained with G- hermaphroditism (46, XX). Frequency of
banding technique. These slides were clitoral enlargement, labioscrotal folds
evaluated under bright field microscope and urogenital sinus was higher which is
for chromosomal analysis and the characteristic of congenital adrenal
karyotyping. hyperplasia.
3. RESULTS:
3.1. Clinical Data
A total of thirty patients were taken over
a time period from June 2011 to
December 2011 in Department of Medical
Genetics, The Children’s Hospital and the
Institute of Child Health Lahore.
Mean and Std. Deviation of Age, Weight
and Height of the patients at the time of
examination is shown in (Table 1)
Page 183
Table 2: Frequency of clinical features Table 3: Frequency of clinical features

of 46, XX (Female pseudo of 46, XY (Male pseudo hermaphrodite).
hermaphrodite)
46,XX(MPH)
46,XX Clinical Features
Clinical Features (FPH) Frequency
Frequency (%)
(%) Labial. 3 (16.7%)
Labial. 2 (16.7%) Fusion(partial)
Fusion(partial) Labial 2 (11.11%)
Labial 5(41.7%) Fusion(complete)
Fusion(complete) Hyper pigmentation 13(72.2%)
Hyper pigmentation 9(75%) Scrotal rugae 11(61.1%)
Scrotal rugae 9 (75%) Size of 13 (72.2%)
Size of 1 (8.33%) penis/phallus(small)
penis/phallus(small) Size of 4 (22.2%)
Clitoral 11 (91.7%) penis/phallus(normal)
enlargement Clitoral enlargement 1 (5.6%)
External meatus 0 (0%) External meatus 3 (16.7%)
Hypospadias 1(8.33%) Hypospadias 14 (77.8%)
Gonads palpable 0(0%) Gonads palpable 15 (83.3%)
Vaginal opening 0 (0%) Vaginal opening 2 (11.11%)
Urogenital sinus 11 (91.7%) Urogenital sinus 1 (5.6%)
Uterus 10 (83.3%) Uterus 3 (16.7%)
Ovaries 4 (33.3%) Ovaries 3 (16.7%)
Testis on USG 2 (16.7%) Testis on USG 15 (83.3%)
17-OH 8 (66.7%) 17-OH Progesterone 4 (22.2%)
Progesterone Testosterone 2 (11.11%)
Testosterone 4 (33.3%) Renin 0 (0%)
Renin 4 (33.3%)
In male pseudo hermaphroditism 3.2. Chromosomal Aberrations

frequency of small size phallus and
hypospadiasis was higher. Ovaries and In Figure 2 chromosomal analysis of our
uterus was also found in 16.7% of patients were divided into two major
patients. groups, 12 (40%) patients were 46, XX
(female) and 18 (60%) were 46, XY
(male). It is further classified into four
broad categories 17 had 46, XY DSD, 10
had 46, XX DSD, 1 had ovotesticular DSD
and two had 46, XX testicular DSD.
Page 184
46, XX
12
40% 4. DISCUSSION:
46, XX Thorough clinical examination

46, XY followed by biochemical,
radiological investigations and
46, XY
18 chromosomal analysis had clearly
60% delineated the sex assignment to
30 cases of ambiguous genitalia in
Figure 2: Frequencies of chromosomal the present investigation.
analysis of a population under study:
(n=30) Out of 30 cases of ambiguous
In figure 3 and 4 showing the normal genitalia male pseudo
karyotype of female with 46, XX hermaphroditism found (94.4%),
chromosomes and male with 46, XY female pseudo hermaphrodite
chromosomes. (83.33%), 46, XX males (16.7%)
and True hermaphrodite (5.6%).
Previous studies from India
reported male pseudo
hermaphrodite (71.7%), mixed
gonadal dysgenesis (5%), true
hermaphrodite (11.6%) and CAH in
11.6%. Difference between
present study and previous study
may be due to small sample size
(30 patients in our study verses 60
patients in previous study) and
also depend upon geographical
distribution, ethnicity and
frequency of consanguineous
marriage [11].
Figure 3: Female karyotype with 46, XX
CAH was diagnosed in > 80% of
patients with intersex disorders.
The clinical manifestations of all
CAH forms are represented by the
masculinization of external sex
organs [8]. In our study CAH
(83.33%) was underlying cause of
all females pseudo
hermaphrodites due to deficiency
of 21- hydroxylase enzyme which
is required to convert
progesterone and 17-
hydroxyprogesterone (17OHP) to
deoxycorticosterone and 11-
Figure 4: Male karyotype with 46, XY deoxycortisol respectively so in
Page 185
our study 17- OH Progesterone A study was conducted at King

levels was found raised in 8 out of Khalid University Hospital over a
12 patients of CAH. 6-year period. The
consanguinity rate was 67.9 % [1].
In 46 XX karyotype patients when In our study the frequency of
there is no palpable gonads first consanguineous marriage was
hypothesis is CAH [10]. 10 cases
found 70%.
of CAH in our study had no
palpable gonads. CONCLUSION:
Previous study from Ankara Karyotype represents the first line

University (Turkey) reported that evidence of investigating a
male pseudo hermaphroditism suspected case of ambiguous
(46, XY DSD) was more common genitalia. Karyotype finding can
(52.4%) than female pseudo be confirmed by FISH. The FISH
hermaphroditism (46, XX DSD) analysis revealed the presence of
(34.6%) and mix gonadal SRY.
dysgenesis disorder (12.99%)[18].
When compared with Japanese 5. REFERENCES:
data, the frequency of testes was
[1] Abdullah, MA. Katugampola,
found greater than in a people
M. Al-Habib, S. Al-Jurayyan,
with other ethnic background and
N. Al-Samarrai, A. Al-Nuaim,
this was relevant to the increase
A. et al. 1991. Ambiguous
incidence of 46, XY [17]. Present
genitalia: medical, socio-
study showed that 46, XY DSD was
cultural and religious factors
more common (94.4%) than other
affecting management in Saudi
DSD’s. while only 1 patient was
Arabia, Ann Trop Paediatr,
found 46, XY True hermaphrodite
11(4), pp 343-8.
and two were 46, XX males.
[2] Al-Agha, A.E. Thomsett,
Patients with 46, XX and CAH M.J. Batch, J.A. 2001. The
presented with enlarged clitoris child of uncertain sex: 17
urogenital sinus and labioscrotal years of experience, J
folds. In 46, XY karyotype patients Paediatr Child Health, 37(4),
presented with palpable gonads, pp 348-51.
undescended testis, penoscrotal [3] Al-Mulhim, A.N. Kamal, H.M.
hypospadiasis and small phallus 2010. Ambiguous genitalia in
[2].In patients with male pseudo neonates: a 4-year prospective
hermaphroditism (MPH), affected study in a localized area, East
males have clitoris like phallus, Mediterr Health J, 16(2), pp
bifid scrotum, urogenital sinus 214-7.
and testis are in inguinal canal or [4] Basak, Yücel. Aslihan, Polat.
in labioscrotal folds [19]. In our 2003. A late sex reassignment
study 10 cases of female pseudo in 5
hermaphroditism and 17 cases of alpha reductase deficiency:
male pseudo hermaphroditism had case report, Int J Psychiatry
similar clinical features. Med, 33 (2), pp 189-93.
Page 186
[5] Chan, A.O. But, B.W. Lau, satisfaction related to gender

G.T. Lam, A.L. Ng, K.L. Lam, and the family equations in
Y.Y. et al. 2009. Diagnosis of disorders of sexual
5alpha-reductase 2 deficiency: differentiation with male sex
a local experience, Hong Kong assignment, Pediatr Surg Int,
Med J, 15(2), pp 130-5. 26(10), pp 955-8.
[6] Chavhan, G.B. Parra,
D.A. Oudjhane, K. Miller, [12] Hiorta, O. Gillessen-
S.F. Babyn, P.S. Pippi Salle, Kaesbachb, G. 2009.
F.L. 2008. Imaging of Disorders of sex
ambiguous genitalia: development in developmental
classification and diagnostic syndromes, Endocr Dev, 14, pp
approach, Radiographics, 174-80.
28(7), pp 1891-904. [13] Hughes, I.A. Nihoul-
[7] Fadeyibi, I.O. Ikuerowo, S.O. Fekete, C. Thomas, B.
Coker, A.O. Disu, Cohen-Kettenis, P.T.
E.A. Akinola, R.A. Onakoya, 2007.Consequences of the
J.A. et al. 2011. Delayed ESPE/LWPES guidelines for
diagnosis of intersex state: diagnosis and treatment of
surgical outcome of cases seen disorders of sex development,
and review of current Best Pract Res Clin Endocrinol
concepts, Nig Q J Hosp Med, Metab, 21(3), pp 351-65.
21(2), pp 106-13.
[8] Frimberger, D. Gearhart, J.P. [14] Jonasson, JA. 1986.
2005. Ambiguous genitalia and Analysis and interpretation of
intersex, Urol Int, 75(4), pp human chromosome
291-7. preparations in Human
[9] Galani, A. Kitsiou-Tzeli, S. cytogenetics, a practical
Sofokleous, C. Kanavakis, approach. DE. Rooney, BH.
E. Kalpini-Mavrou, A. 2008. Czepulkowski. Washington DC.
Androgen insensitivity
[15] Joshi, R.R. Rao, S. Desai,
syndrome: clinical features
M. 2006. Etiology and clinical
and molecular defects,
profile of ambiguous genitalia
Hormones (Athens), 7(3), pp
an overview of 10 years’
217-29.
experience, Indian Pediatr,
[10] Guerra-Júnior, G. Maciel-
43(11), pp 974-9.
Guerra, A.T. 2007. The role
[16] Li, B.K. Ding, Q. Wan,
of the pediatrician in the
X.D. Wang, X. 2011. Clinical
management of children with
and genetic characterization
genital ambiguities, J Pediatr
of complete androgen
(Rio J), 83(5 Suppl), pp 184-
insensitivity syndrome in a
91.
Chinese family, Genet Mol
[11] Gupta, D. Bhardwaj, M. Res, 10(2), pp 1022-31.
Sharma, S. Ammini, AC. [17] Matsui, F. Shimada,
Gupta, D.K. 2010. Long-term K. Matsumoto, F. Itesako,
psychosocial adjustments, T. Nara, K. Ida, S. et al.
2011. Long-term outcome
Page 187
of ovotesticular disorder Endocrinol Metab, 24 (9-10),

of sex development: a single pp 831-3.
center experience, Int J Urol,
18(3), pp 231-6.
[18] Ocal, G. Berberoglu, M.
Siklar, Z. Bilir, P. Uslu, R.
Yagmurlu, A. et al. 2010.
Disorders of sexual
development: an overview of
18 years’ experience in the
pediatric Endocrinology
Department of Ankara
University, J Pediatr
Endocrinol Metab, 23(11), pp
1123-32.
[19] Peterson, R.E. Imperato-
McGinley, J. Gautier, T.
Sturla, E. 1977. Male pseudo
hermaphroditism due to
steroid 5-alpha-reductase
deficiency, Am J Med, 62(2),
pp 170-91.
[20] R, Wiersma. 2004. True
hermaphroditism, Pediatr Surg
Int, 20(5), pp 363-8.
[21] Sowande, O.A.
Adejuyigbe, O. 2009.
Management of ambiguous
genitalia in ile ife, Nigeria:
Challenges and outcome, Afr
J Paediatr Surg, 6(1), pp 14-8.
[22] Steve, S. Kim. Thomas, F.
Kolon. 2009. Hormonal
abnormalities leading to
disorders of sexual
development, Expert Review
of Endocrinology and
Metabolism, 4(2), pp 161-172.
[23] Susanne, M. Cabrera.
Rudy, Alvarez. Martin, N.
Kaefer. Erica, A. Eugster.
Todd, D. Nebesio. 2011.
Unexpected finding of an
intact distal vagina in an
infant with mixed gonadal
dysgenesis, J Pediatr
Page 188
COMPUTER
SCIENCES
Need of Virtual Education and its Significance in Pakistan

Ahsan Sohail1, Ahmed Suleman2, Fahad Farooq3, Hisham Ahmed4, Shaheryar Rashid5, Faqiha
Sultan6
1, 2,3,4,5
Department of Computer Sciences, National University of Computer and Emerging
1
K142109@nu.edu.pk, 2K142014@nu.edu.pk, 3K142032@nu.edu.pk, 4K142081@nu.edu.pk,
5
K142095@nu.edu.pk
6
Department of Science and Humanities, National University of Computer and Emerging
6
ABSTRACT
Technology has changed almost every aspect of life, and education system is one of them.
It has dramatically transformed the teaching and learning process. All the developed
countries are moving towards virtual system of learning to provide ease and accessibility
to all. This research mainly focuses on the need and demand of virtual education in
Pakistan, its effects on students’ performance, and the approach of students and teachers
towards it. The data for this study have been collected through primary means using
separate questionnaires for teachers and students belonging to different educational
levels. To identify the need of virtual education platform in Pakistan, basic frequency
analysis and chi-square test of association is performed on the responses of teachers and
students. On the basis of the results, it is concluded that majority of the audience think
that virtual education will get success and praise in Pakistan and that it is needed and is
helpful, however, some are uncertain about it and have the opinion that if it is
implemented along with a proper management then it may be welcomed.
Keywords: Education system; Virtual education; Interactive lectures; Chi-square
1. INTRODUCTION also effected by technology in recent

years. The ordinary methods of conveying
Virtual education, a significant modern
knowledge from teacher to students has
education tool, is characterized as
now been done by the means of internet,
learning procedures by the utilization of
it has evolved and changed dramatically
World Wide Web. It refers to the
considering new markets demands and
instructions in a learning environment
techniques and hence removing the
where the instructor and student are
barriers of distance and time. Virtual
separated either by time or space, or
universities have been set up in different
both. It has the potential to become a
countries around the world and is
cost effective and efficient educational
working efficiently increasing the literacy
tool that provides ease and comfort to
rate and spreading knowledge to the
the teachers and students and promote
areas where normal schools or colleges
quality education by making it reachable
cannot be set up. Nowadays,
to all.
geographical isolation is no longer a
Over the past decade, advances in factor for lagging behind in education.
internet have taken the world by storm Students from all over the world may
the world is moving rapidly by the help of study courses and complete qualifications
internet in different field. Education is in the leading and best institutions of the
Page 190
world without leaving their homes or accessible to manage the queries and to
work places. Universities like Harvard, clear ideas. Few such stages like
MIT, Stanford and many others offer Edmodo, Coursera and StudyRoom
online courses and give lecture videos to accessible at present have embraced the
advance the quality training throughout comparative thought to encourage
the world. Researches showed that the students by the use of internet. Despite
major issue students’ face at virtual of the fact that these platforms also lack
universities is the lack of interaction and with the feature of interaction during
collaboration between the instructors online lectures, still they are widely used
and the students and that they are and are running successfully in different
bounded by time to attend the lectures. countries over the globe. It might be the
For instance, it may be noon where the right time to move education to the next
instructor is delivering the lecture and level in Pakistan and to introduce
midnight where the student is attending students such a platform along with a
it, the student may be on his working distinguishing feature of collaboration in
hours while the class is being conducted. near future. This study particularly aims
Students are genuinely inspired by the at the need and demand of such virtual
expertise of lecturers but clearly training platform in Pakistan, what
disappointed by the lack of interaction progress it will make in Pakistan, how
and time limitation. much will it expand the instructive yield,
and what percent of the overall
This study acknowledges the above population favors it.
mentioned problems and is an
exploratory research on the current 2. LITERATURE SURVEY
online learning environments. It also
To acquire the maximum advantage of
pitches the idea of live interactive
virtual education, it is required to ensure
lectures with capabilities of virtual
the quality of instructors conducting
colleges and online tutorial exercises are
online course, Hara [1] presented an
amalgamated and joined together.
analysis on an annual report of a
Virtual Colleges lacks with the feature of
graduate educational technology course
collaboration and are bounded by time.
in major university. In the course the
Regardless of what issues the students
teacher fails to interact with student
are confronting the ideal opportunity for
efficiently while teaching the course but
a lecture will not change. Then again
one might argue that this study was the
video instructional exercises do not have
case of an inexperienced teacher trying
the component of interaction. Conversely
to teach an online course probably for
virtual instruction stage presented in this
the first time, this may be the failure of
study will have study material,
the teacher teaching the course and not
instructional exercises, address
of the online education system itself. The
recordings, bunch examinations etc.
faculties who are starting to teach online
identified with various fields along with
courses should be trained in special way
the feature of hiring an online teacher
to achieve the sole purpose of the idea.
for a specific course or point that was not
Barbera [2] conducted a research to find
cleared during the class or for which the
how virtual education can be used to
material accessible on Google, YouTube
maximize the advantages of online
or any other prevailing website is
education. His research supports the fact
unacceptable, insufficient or is not
that online education can only be
Page 191
effective if the quality of teachers is promote education to every corner of the

assured. Due to the lack of quality world. This fact is supported by another
assurance many schools or university does research conducted by Schwerdt and
not completely rely on online education. Chingos [9] in which the comparison is
The research conducted by Holstead and made between the performance of
Spradlin [3] suggested that online students taking virtual and in person
education alone is not enough to assure classes. The results showed that the
quality education nor it should be made a performances of the students were
compulsory thing along with in person similar in both cases, but the virtual
education; however virtual education education provides accessibility and is
may come in handy if it is used as an reachable to maximum students. The
alternative resource. Stiles [4] only problem is quality insurance while
investigated a US based virtual learning offering online courses. Starr [10] also
environment called Creation of Study studied the potential advantages of
Environment (COSE), he suggested that online education. His research concludes
although learning environment helps that online education can bridge the gap
student in many ways, it still required an between students in rural areas and high
admin to administrate. Learning quality teachers across the globe and
environments should be used as an extra ultimately it will help promoting
luxury and can only be successful if the education. Virtual education is the
educations from other means are possible future of education in Pakistan
delivered efficiently. Analyses on the as it was successfully implemented in
virtual schools of US in 2013 and 2014 other countries. Guri-Rosenblit [11]
have been presented in [5, 6]. These studied the current models of virtual
analyses showed that online education education and suggested the future
will help revolutionizing education and trends, which can be used to promote
make it reachable to everyone at lower higher education by online education.
cost and higher quality; however Virtual Many countries are adapting the idea of
schools should ensure quality virtual education to promote education.
deliverance, good instructors and good The traditional method of transferring
management to ensure quality education the education from instructors to
for students. students now involves the mean of
technology and internet. Kumar, et al.
Online education offers potential to [12] discussed the transformation of
provide learning to maximum students education and its advantages in
and it also provides opportunity to promoting higher education across the
improve the quality of education. Volery globe.
and Lord [7] studied the success factors
of online education and suggested that Some students are shy to interact with
the Universities should capitalize the use teachers in person. Delgado-Gaitan [13]
of internet in delivering the education conducted a research to find that how
across the globe. Online education is families can play the role in student’s
playing significant role in promoting education. Families with good education
higher education across the world. background help students in his studies
Moloney and Oakley [8] studied that and enable them to interact with
online education is the fastest growing teachers without difficulties. Online
market and soon it will be able to education can help students who have
Page 192
difficulties in face-to-face interaction by 4. RESULT AND DISCUSSION

allowing them to interact with teachers The main objective of this research is to
by the means of internet find student’s and teachers’ perceptive
on the need of Online Interactive
3. METHODOLOGY
Environment, its effect on Education in
The data for this research is primary, i.e. Pakistan and on Student’s performance.
direct and is collected using separate Moreover, the opinion of students and
questionnaires for students and teachers about the quality of deliverance
instructors of different educational levels for Virtual Learning Environment and
including secondary, higher secondary, willingness of to pay for Interactive
undergraduate and post graduate. The Environment is also asked. The responses
population of this research is a randomly of students on the above mentioned
selected sample consisting of 435 factors are displayed in Figures 2-6 and
students and 65 teachers. This is an Figures 7-10 show the responses of
exploratory research for which a teachers.
questionnaire on four-point scale (Likert
Scale) is used. 159 of the responses of Figure 2 shows the response of students
both teachers and students are collected when asked about their need for an
Online Interactive Environment for study
Figure 2: Student’s response on the

need of online interactive environment
Related tasks, simple frequency chart

shows a very moderate response of
Figure 1: Model framework students. The number of students who
always feel the need of such environment
online through Google forms and the rest
and the number of students who never
are collected by visiting different
feel the need of such platform is
colleges and universities. The data
approximately equal, similarly the
collected from the questionnaire is coded
number students who very often feel the
in SPSS and simple frequency and test of
need of online learning and the number
association Chi-Square is applied on the
students who sometimes need such portal
data. Since the targeted sample is both
is also quite same. The idea of virtual
teachers and students, therefore the
education platform is still new, yet a
responses are analyzed separately.
considerable number of students feel the
Page 193
need of such platforms depicts the future student’s response about the virtual
of virtual education in Pakistan. education being successful in Pakistan.
Simple frequency test in Figure 4 shows
that a vital majority of students believe
that the concept of virtual education will
be successful and welcomed in Pakistan.
The number of students who believe that
it will be very much successful and who
think that it will be successful to some
extent is quite high than the number of
students who are uncertain and who
think it may not be welcomed.
Online education can provide students

Figure 3: Student’s willingness to pay accessibility and can be used as
for interactive lectures additional tool for their studies; if this
tool is used efficiently it may help
Online platforms of such nature require improving the academic performance of
effort to attract quality instructor from students. Figure 5 shows the response of
across the globe. Many teachers will may students about the effect of online
not be willing to offer their services free education on their performance. Simple
of cost. Figure 3 shows the response of frequency test shows that majority of
students when asked about their students hold the opinion that using
willingness to pay for interactive online education as a tool will help them
lectures. The frequency distribution in to perform academically better. This
Figure 3 shows that 35% of students are result also shows that online education
willing to pay for interactive online will be effective in Pakistan.
lectures.
Figure 5: Student’s response about the

Figure 4: Student’s response about effect of virtual education on their
virtual education being successful in academic performance
Pakistan
As the literature survey shows that the
Majority of the countries across the globe assurance of quality is important. Figure
successfully implemented online 6 shows the responses of students about
education system. This concept is still the quality of teachers for online learning
fresh in Pakistan. Figure 4 shows the environments. Almost every student
Page 194
holds the opinion that the quality of large proportion of undergraduate

instructor should be satisfactory for students are willing to pay for online
online learning environment. Instructor interactive lectures. The overall
should be trained enough to use the percentage of students willing to pay is
resources efficiently and should have 35%, it is low but significant.
significant knowledge of the course to
insure the satisfactory deliverance of
knowledge from teacher to students.
Figure 8: Association between students’

response on welcoming the idea of
online interactive lectures and the
Figure 6: Student’s response on the education level of students
importance of quality of instructor for
Figure 8 depicts the association between
online learning environments
students’ response on welcoming the idea
Figure 7 shows the association between of online interactive lectures and the
student’s willingness to pay for online education level of students. The graph
interacting lectures and the education shows that students of higher education
Level of the students. The graph shows level shows more interest about the idea
that the yes-no ratio of students of of online interactive lectures, as shown
Higher Secondary is slightly higher than in the figure, the blue bar of
that of under-graduate, which shows that undergraduate is higher than the higher
secondary students. The negative
response of students for all education is
very low, which shows that students will
welcome the idea of online interactive
lectures in Pakistan.
Figure 9 shows the association between

student’s responses on online education
promoting quality education in Pakistan
and on online education affecting their
academic performances. The graph that
those students who believe that the
online education will promote the quality
Figure 7: Association between student’s
education in Pakistan, also holds the
willingness to pay for online interacting
opinion that it will improve their
lectures and the education level of the
academic performance; however, those
students
students who think otherwise opine that
Page 195
online education will not improve their for a clear concept; however, we can see
academic performances. the blue in every set of students holding
different opinion about non-interacting
lectures, for which it can be concluded
that an additional feature will be a huge
help for the students if the feature is
available, otherwise the online lecture
without questioning or interactive are
mostly enough for a clear concept.
Figure 9: Association between student’s

responses on online education
promoting quality education in Pakistan
and online education affecting their
academic performances
Figure 10 presents the association

between students’ responses on the non- Figure 11: Association between
interactive lectures enough for the students’ responses on their willingness
complete understanding of the topic and to pay for online lectures and the
on the need of additional feature of quality of instructor important for
questioning required during online interactive lectures
lecture. The graph shows that majority of
the students hold the opinion that non- Figure 11 displays the association
interactive lectures are mostly enough between student’s responses on their
willingness to pay for online lectures and
is the quality of instructor important for
interactive lectures. The graph shows
that both the set of students hold the
opinion that quality of instructor should
be assured for online interactive lecture;
however, blue bar of those students who
are not willing to pay for online lecture
shows that quality of instructor might be
one factor of their non-willingness for
spending money on online lectures.
Figure 10: Association between Figure 12 depicts the teachers’

students’ responses on the non- perception about virtual education. It
interactive lectures enough for the shows that teachers believe that online
complete understanding of the topic education has positive effects on
and the need of additional feature of students’ performance. On studying
questioning required during online Figure 12, the same thing can be inferred
lecture that the idea of virtual education has
Page 196
future in Pakistan as more than 65% of teachers who are uncertain and who
the instructors agree that it will result in think it will not be welcomed on the basis
improving academic performance of the of which it can be inferred that the
students. Teacher believes that the concept of virtual education will be
virtual education is effective in Pakistan successful in Pakistan.
if implement and utilized efficiently.
Figure 12: Teachers’ response on the Figure 14: Teachers’ response on the
effect of online education on students’ quality of instructor for online learning
performance environment.
Figure 13 shows perception of teachers Figure 14 depicts the teachers’ response

on the success of virtual education on the importance of quality of instructor
concept in Pakistan. It can be seen that a for online learning environment.
majority of them believe that the Frequency chart shows that teachers also
concept of virtual education will be believe that the quality of instructors
successful and welcomed in Pakistan. The should be assured to acquire complete
number of teachers who believe that it advantages of online education.
Figure 13: Teachers’ response about Figure 15: Teachers’ response about
virtual education being successful in online education promoting quality
Pakistan education in Pakistan
will be very much successful and who Figure 15 shows that a vital majority of
think that it will be successful to some teachers believe that online education
extent is quite high than the number of can help promoting quality education in
Page 197
Pakistan. We can expect that online Figure 17 shows the associations between
education may have future in Pakistan. teachers’ responses on non-interactive
lecture enough for complete
understanding of the topic and their
requirement of additional feature of
questioning during online lecture. The
graph shows that majority of teacher
believe that non-interactive lectures are
sometimes enough for complete
understanding and they will like the idea
of instant questioning during online
lecture.
5. CONCLUSION
The internet is a major technological tool
Figure 16: Association between that our school, colleges, and universities
teachers’ response on will virtual have to adapt for teaching and learning.
education be successful in Pakistan and Internet should be used as a tool for
its effect on student performances delivering education online. This research
Figure 16 presents the associations identified the following result after the
between teachers’ responses on virtual or brief discussion upon different factors of
online education being successful and online education. Students and Teachers
online education improving the student hold the opinion that virtual education
academic performances. The graph shows can have future in Pakistan, it may help
that majority of teacher believe that to improve students’ academic
virtual education has a potential future performance and it may provide students
in Pakistan and it will also improve an additional tool to learn better. Virtual
students’ academic performances if education being independent of the old
implemented efficiently. educational system of Pakistan can also
help to promote the quality of education
in Pakistan.
Majority of the teachers had shown their

willingness to offer their services if such
platform is introduced in Pakistan;
however, both teachers and students
hold the opinion that online education
requires quality instructors which should
be trained and adapted to online learning
environment and should have expertise
over the course to ensure quality
deliverance of knowledge from teacher
Figure 17: Associations between to students, although majority of teacher
teachers’ responses on non-interactive or almost all of teachers will not offer
lecture enough for complete their services for free. A significant
understanding of the topic and their number of students showed their
requirement of additional feature of
questioning during online lecture
Page 198
willingness to pay for interactive [7] Volery, T. and Lord, D., 2000.
lectures. Critical success factors in online
education, International Journal
The idea of online education is still fresh of Educational Management.
in Pakistan and requires a little attention 14(5):pp. 216-223.
to be implemented perfectly. The idea of [8] Moloney, J.F. and Oakley, B.,
2010. Scaling online education:
merging online education and interactive
Increasing access to higher
lecture could be an upgrade to online education, Journal of
education, but to make it effective and Asynchronous Learning Networks.
successful it needs to be implemented 14(1):pp. 55-70.
efficiently and managed timely. [9] Schwerdt, G. and Chingos, M.M.,
2015. Virtual schooling and
6. REFERENCES student learning: Evidence from
the Florida Virtual School.
[1] Hara, N., 2000. Student Distress Annual Conference 2015:
in a Web-Based Distance Economic Development - Theory
Education Course, Information, and Policy; Muenster: German
Communication & Society. Economic Association.
3(4):pp. 557-579. [10] Starr, D.R., 1998. Virtual
[2] Barbera, E., 2004. Quality in education: Current practices and
virtual education environments, future directions, The Internet
British Journal of Educational and Higher Education. 1(2):pp.
Technology. 35(1):pp. 13-20. 157-165.
[3] Holstead, M.S. and Spradlin, [11] Guri-Rosenblit, S., 2001. Virtual
T.E., 2009. Survey of Virtual universities: Current models and
Learning in Indiana. Center for future trends, Higher Education in
Evaluation & Education Policy: Europe. 26(4):pp. 487-499.
Indiana University, July 24, 2009. [12] Kumar, A., Kumar, P., and Basu,
Report No. S.C., 2001. Student perceptions
[4] Stiles, M.J., 2000. Effective of virtual education: An
learning and the virtual learning exploratory study. in Information
environment. in Proceedings: Resources Management
EUNIS 2000–Towards Virtual Association International
Universities. Instytut Informatyki Conference.
Politechniki Poznanskiej: [13] Delgado-Gaitan, C., 1992. School
Citeseer. matters in the Mexican-American
[5] Miron, G., Horvitz, B., Gulosino, home: Socializing children to
C., Huerta, L., Rice, J.K., education, American Educational
Shafer, S.R., and Cuban, L., Research Journal. 29(3):pp. 495-
2013. Virtual Schools in the US 513.
2013: Politics, Performance,
Policy, and Research Evidence.
University of Colorado Boulder,
National Education Policy Center.
[6] Huerta, L., Rice, J.K., Shafer,
S.R., Barbour, M.K., Miron, G.,
Gulosino, C., and Horvitz, B.,
2014. Virtual Schools in the US
2014: Politics, Performance,
Policy, and Research Evidence.
University of Colorado Boulder,
National Education Policy Center.
Page 199
An Information Visualization Framework for Rapid Use of Web-Based Mobile Application by

Elderly Retarded People
Mujahid Rafiq1, Muhammad Sheraz Arshad Malik2

P P P
1
Department of Computer Science,
P P
National Textile University, Faisalabad

mujahidrafiq@hotmail.com
2
P Department of Computing (CS & SE)
P
Riphah International University Faisalabad Campus

sheraz_awan@riphahfsd.edu.pk
ABSTRACT
The purpose of this research study is to understand the interactive use of Information
Visualization (IV) with web-based applications that is increasing day by day due to rapid
growth in the purchase of mobile phones. The population of developed countries is
becoming older that falls in the age of 65years and plus suffering from diseases such as
Parkinson. This class of population faces major IV problems with interfaces of mobile
applications that are designed in a universal pattern and more facilitating and efficient in
operation for young people. Existing IV frameworks fail to address above problem due to
different requirements of old people and young people for mobile web based applications
with reference to usability, efficiency, and learnability. This research paper presents a
detailed systematic review of existing IV technologies for web applications specifically for
a retarded person. This paper also presents novel theoretical framework is proposed as a
novel concept of joining color, icon strength, size, push pattern to facilitate the
understanding and adaptability and improved efficiency in retarded people. This research
also provides a guideline for the developers to make a future demand of IV applications to
improve cognition and use of mobile web based applications for elderly retarded people.
Keywords: Information Visualization (IV), Parkinson, Elderly People, Web Based, Usability
1. INTRODUCTION:
24T exists in an abstract (conceptual) data
space.”
According to M.C.F.De Oliveira [1], “In
information visualization, the graphical Different types of visualization were used
models represents abstract concepts and during different eras of life ranging from
relationships that don’t necessarily lines and maps to modern visualization.
having a counterpart in the physical Above said are different phases discussed
world e.g., information describing user in detail within literature review.
accesses to pages of an Internet portal or Information Visualization (IV) is an
records describing selected properties of applied field of visualization, data
different car brands and models. mining, graphics, and databases. C.Ware
Typically, each data unit describes [2], IV has different frameworks available
multiple related attributes (usually more for different scenarios but this research
than four) that are not of a spatial or work mainly focuses on the available
temporal nature. Although spatial and frameworks for web-based applications
temporal attributes may occur, the data used in elderly people. J.S.Dhillon [3],
Page 200
Some frameworks are used for making and 9.3 million by 2030 [6]. The PD
data and information more visible and actually damages the nerves and disorder
some are used to design front end nervous system of a human being.
interface of mobile applications. This B.Halliwell [7] It slows down the
research work is related to the designing movement of the body also considered
front end of web based mobile as a motor problem and this motor
applications especially for the old problem affect overall performance as
people, IV intends more practice to well as movements of human’s hands,
develop Web-based mobile application R.McNaney [8]. It became more
because of the huge amount of data and problematic for the patient of PD to
information management on small control, dial and execute queries on a
screens. The problem increases when mobile device.
these mobile applications used by elderly
people. Because old people needs In elderly people eyes only receive 1/3
different types of requirements such as percent of light as compared to young
lower usability senses as compared to people, Focus and brightness issues are
young people. Most of the applications also very much common in elderly
are made for the general purpose and peoples, B.Halliwell [7]. There are
they are not fulfilling the needs of old various visualization limitations among
people. J.S.Dhillon [3], According to old people regarding interface like
L.Gamberini [4], there are some factors Visibility, Slow, and Error prone typing,
that should be in your mind while inaccurate clicks, the size of icons,
designing interface for old people. These cognition, and memorization,
main factors are enlisted as cognitive A.Holzinger [9].
differences, psychological differences,
vision and aging problem, speech and According to K.Zickuhr [10], most of the
hearing differences, psychomotor elderly people in developed countries use
abilities, response problems. This the internet as a regular part of their
research reviews the existing IV lives. Most of them use smartphones with
frameworks and then presents the gaps touch screen enabled to use the internet.
regarding old people and then proposes a Research conducted in May 2010, X.Li [5]
new framework that overcomes existing told us that 69% elderly people have their
gaps. own mobile phones.
According to a research study X.Li [5], Android platform provides a number of

that by 2030 there will more than 19% solutions like BIG launcher, Phonotto or
users are those who are over 65 age and Necta but these are not ideal because of
by 2035 every 1 person out of 5 will fall many different problems some are
in the category of elder people. The discussed in literature review portion.
mobile applications are specifically The touch screen is also becoming the
designed for young people would be so need in nowadays. That’s why this
problematic for those 19% people. research paper proposes a framework
that is suitable for android based touch
According to E.Dorsey [6], a research screen device.
study in 2005, 4.6 million elderly people
are affected with Parkinson Disease (PD) This paper is subdivided into various
and this figure doubles to between 8.7 sections such as; Section 1 explains the
complete and brief introduction. Section
Page 201
2 describes the literature review about Then last and final step is the perceiver
IV, PD and other existing solutions for the of the final system using human
elderly use of the web-based mobile cognition.
application. Section 3 presents the
research objectives and Section 4 Techniques in the interaction C.Tominski
highlights the results extracted from [14], are further divided into two sub-
Survey conducted on Parkinson’s categories or groups such as WIMP
Patients. Section 5 highlights proposed (Windows, Icons, Mouse, And Pointers)
framework and Section 6 is the last and post-WIMP interactions. WIMP deals
section concludes about the work. with the interaction of users with
visualization application like handling or
interaction with mouse, keyboards etc.
2. LITERATURE REVIEW S.H.Kim [15], but the post-WIMP deals
IV is applied or concept extracted from with touch interfaces, F.Block [16],
the visualization, it is defined by Tominski, M.Bostock [17], developed a
different spoke persons by different very useful technique in interaction
ways. Some of few definitions by domain that allows the user to select
different scientists or researchers are as freely visual information to compared.
follows This information is then represented
through a different type of view.
• According to A.G.Gee [11], “the
information visualizations The researchers and scientists introduced
attempts to map data variable a number of Frameworks and
effectively or efficiently onto visualization systems for the deployment
visual dimensions in order to and development of various new
make or create graphic applications in the field of visualization.
representations” G. Albuquerque [18], The word system
belongs to the development of libraries
• According to J.A.Jacko [12], “the and toolkits for the development of
basic purpose of information visualization and the framework that
visualization is maximized or denote the modeling of different other
amplifies cognitive performance, techniques of visualization.
not to create pictures interesting,
The development of a visual application
Info. Visualizations should do for
from zero or scratch is very difficult.
the mind what automobiles”
C.Weaver [19]. Due to this reason,
Information is basically the research area scientists and researchers create various
that aims to aid users in exploring, built-in libraries and systems such as
analyzing, and understanding data Improvise, M.Fink [20], InfoVis toolkit
through iterative and visual exploration. J.Heer [21], and Perfuse M.Bostock [17]
R.A.Butler [13], IV has 4 basic processes to create new and customized old
or steps for the solution of any problem, applications. But it is not an easy task to
the first step is the collection and tailoring and customizing visualization.
storage of data, 2nd step involves
P P
Protovis Y.Wu [22], is a newly developed
preprocessing storage of data, Third step system that overcomes the traditional
is to map selected data to some kind of problem occurs in other systems. It
visual image by using certain algorithms. creates a balance between effectiveness,
efficiency, expressiveness. It supports
Page 202
java programming language. Component manufacturer companies to make a

of Protovis is shown in figure 1. D3 is also
P P design by following standard guidelines
a very common online system for this given by different groups that are
purpose. working in the field of IV. According to
L.Chittaro [26], a number of researchers
are working on mobile visualization
techniques. They are trying to purpose
specific mobile visualization techniques.
Mobile devices have certain limitations
that are why simple visualization
techniques are not so useful for mobile.
Some limitations are related to display
i.e. resolution, pixels, small screen and
Figure 1: Protovis [17] components in
fewer colors. Hardware of mobile is also
CDE
less powerful. The input techniques in
mobiles are different, e.g. handwriting
In recent years, there is a boom in this
and pattern recognition on a small
field various new tools and frameworks
surface, point-and-tap with a stylus, one-
are introduced by different research
hand thumb-based input. Due to this
groups and organizations. Numbers of
limitation, the visualization techniques
frameworks are introduced or purposed
developed for simple desktop are not so
to characterize uncertainty S.Liu [23],
helpful or effective on mobile screens
and information theory about IV. J.Heer
[21], Chen and Jänicke, D.Fisher [24], The population of developed countries is
describe an important framework to becoming older and there are a number
correlate information theory with IV. Hey of old people that use mobile and
suggested us that information framework computer applications. Most of them are
for theoretic should have the ability to affected with Parkinson Disease
characterize visualization process. The [27].Parkinson’s Patients have different
new visualization addition with existing kind of disorders like Movement Disorder
toolkits is not an easy task; it requires [28], Sleep Disorder [29], Anxiety
major changes in scene graphs and data Disorder [30], Vascular Disorder [31] and
structures. D.Fisher [24]. WebCharts much more. These disorders have directly
C.D.Correa [25], is an important or indirectly effect on the usage of
framework that helps to integrate or mobile phone. They are facing a lot of
incorporate new visualization into old problems related to interfaces. Software
and existing javascript application, companies are trying to make a
without any major changes. Visualization universally accepted interface but they
process has many different kinds of are unable to make an accepted
uncertainties in information. A.G.Gee interface. Many researchers are trying to
[11] created an inclusive framework to find out the gaps of interface especially
characterize quantitatively and in old people. The F. Nunes [32],
instinctively visualizing complex, vibrant conducted many interviews with the
uncertainty information from visual patients of Parkinson’s, Neurologists and
analysis processes. Physiotherapists because they have
directly or indirectly related to PD
IV plays a vital role in almost every field
patients. The major goals of these
of life. It also influenced mobile phone
Page 203
interviews were to understand how the mobile phone usage. The strength of Grip
major and minor symptoms of that and Pinch are badly affected as age is
disease related to the daily activity like increasing. Hands are affected by the
smartphone usage. Interview was common diseases like (osteoarthritis,
focusing on the four main areas that are osteoporosis, Parkinson's, and rheumatic
arthritis) [35]. These diseases are mostly
i. How Parkinson’s disease found in elderly people. Accurate
changes and affects the working of hands is necessary to work
life of patients with well with a smartphone or its existing
Parkinson? interfaces of smartphones. Upper
ii. How cognitive skills and Extremity has an important part that is
motor affect Parkinson’s our hand. Hands control the performance
disease? quality in living skills of our daily life.
iii. How mobile phone is used Normally we can perform very complex
by the people of and sensitive operation from our hands
Parkinson’s? and especially in smartphone usage.
iv. What are the basic
symptoms that directly With the passage of time and growing
affect the usage of age, our hands face many different types
smartphone? of anatomical and physiological changes.
There are many factors that affect
These were a detailed interview and directly or indirectly on aging hands, few
lasted between 30minutes to 1hour and of them are discussed here. Skeletal
all were audio-recorded. The audio- diseases and common metabolic disease
recorded interviews were then analyzed in elderly people put directly effect on
by Grounded Theory [33].The analysis hands. Malnutrition is also a contributory
was also supported by [32], a qualitative factor in working with hands in elderly
data analysis software. Some results are people, Malnutrition may cause an
similar to proven results by existing imbalance in the homeostasis of some
medical literature but most of the results minerals like calcium metabolism [36].
are different from existing available Behavioral factors, declining or reduced
literature. The results of these interview exercise level and sedentary lifestyles
questions and analysis were divided into also play an important role in impaired
three main categories that are i.e. Motor hand functions [37]. Disuse or low use
characteristics, Cognitive characteristics, atrophy is also very common in elderly
and general characteristics. The people. It may involve a reduction in the
Developers must consider these skeletal muscle and its functioning [38].
characteristics while designing interface PNS (Peripheral Nervous Systems)
for Parkinson Patients [32]. declines with growing age this also
According to E. Carmeli [34], Hands are effects on our hands. It may cause hand
the main part of our body and muscle fatigue [39]. Some other factors
functionality of hands are very are also involved in the impairment of
important. Functions of hands are hands and reduced working level and
decreases in men and women due to procedures of hands that are Prehension
increase in age due to many reasons (grip pattern), Endocrine factor, the
discussed below. Grip and Pinch are the Improper growth of Nails and Nerve
factors of our hands that are important in changes. Many different thoughts must be
Page 204
available to make ergonomic devices for mobiles are suitable for only two age
the aging hands due to different groups that are kids and young people
requirements. Above discussion concludes but the people with 40-60 age limit are
that scientists and developers need to not feasible to use. Figure 3 is showing
pay serious attention to the requirements results from the satisfaction level
of elderly people while making hardware experiment conducted by L.Chitttaro
or designing interfaces. Elderly people [26].
are willing to accept technology but
naturally, they have different needs. It is
not possible to be on the same page with
elderly people unless their technology
related requirements fulfill.
R.Eisma [40], UTOPIA project (Usable

Technology for Older People Inclusive
and Appropriate) was focused on a set of
methods that involved old people while Figure 3: Interaction Experience of
designing IT related products. According Elderly [26]
to D.Hawthorn [41], there are some
factors that should be in your mind while M.Kobayashi [45], conduct an experiment
designing interface for old people. These on old people and found that after some
main factors are cognitive differences, modifications in design they are more
psychological differences, vision and feasible with a touchscreen interface.
aging problem, speech and hearing The modifications are the use of large
differences, psychomotor abilities, icons and buttons, drag and pinch
response problems. J.Strengers [42] gestures should be considered rather
conducted a survey for the requirement than tabs and muti-mode view. R.Eisma
related to interface design for old [27], also agreed on this that further
people. After evaluating the result of studies are required because the
that survey they introduced an interface complete and ultimate solution is still
model that is compared with other required.
existing models and they found better
results as compared to others. The simple
touch screen architecture is shown in 3. RESEARCH OBJECTIVES/PROBLEMS
Figure 2.
As detailed analysis on available
literature, there are two basic research
objectives/problems that will be covered
in purposed framework.
Problem No 1: Touch Screen Interface

that best fit for the patient affected with
PD.
Figure 2: Capacitive Touch Screen [43] Problem No 2: Use of IV to enhance the

usability of smartphones for elderly
S.Sharma [44] conducted a survey and people.
found that existing operation system of
Page 205
The think-aloud technique, B.Ahmad [46] Question 2: Interface of web- based

conducted on Parkinson’s Patients to applications are very interactive to avoid
reverify research problems. errors
4.Analysis and Results

A questionnaire is also designed to find
the exact gaps in existing web-based
mobile applications. This questionnaire is
purely filled by elderly people (both male
and female) with age greater than 65
years. Most of them are Parkinson’s
patients as well. The questionnaire is 5-
Likert scale and further subdivided into
many factors such usability, information Figure 5: Result of Question no. 2
quality, speed, reliability, and
satisfaction. SPSS [47], a statistical tool
is used to analyze data filled by elderly Question 3: Instruction given on the
people. The results of this questionnaire web- based applications are confusing or
will be further used to purpose a new difficult to understand
framework. Some results from the
questionnaire are shown below.
Note: These results are in the form of

descriptive graphs. SDA stands for
strongly disagree, DA stands for disagree,
N stands for neutral, A stands for agree
and SA stands for strongly agree.
Question 1: You can easily use all

existing web-based applications with your Figure 6: Result of Question no. 3
smartphone
Question 4: Web- based applications are

very useful in your social life
Figure 4: Result of the Question no. 1
Figure 7: Result of Question no. 4
Page 206
Question 5: Existing Web- based mobile Question 8: Icons and Graphics used
applications are very easy to visualize within mobile applications are very
helpful
Figure 8: Result of Question No: 5

Question 6: I can accurately use the

touch screen of a smartphone. Question 9: I believe that I became
productive using existing application

Question 7: It is very easy to learn the

complete application.
Question 10: Existing Mobile Applications
have all the functionalities, I expect it to
have
Page 207
5.Proposed Framework components/modules that are elderly

After finding gaps from Literature actor, application view, component layer
Review, Think aloud technique, and and IV components structure. These
analysis on the results extracted from the components are also mention in above
questionnaire, the next step is to design diagram
an IV framework that fits in all web
based applications to improve cognition As you can see the elderly actor is
and usability for elderly people. communicating directly with the
application view of the web-based mobile
This Framework which is presented in this application. The Application view is
research is based on the motivation of actually the complete front end interface
existing frameworks presented by of any web based application. This
R.Eisma [40], B.Ahmad [48], E.H.Chi [49], application view is further connected
A.Holzinger [50], M.S.Al-Razgan [51], with component layer and IV components
L.Gamberini [4], L. Gamberini [52],T.van structure. IV components structure
[53],and A.Tanaka [54]. This proposed module deals with the IV components
framework is basically an improvised that are further subdivided into small
form of existing frameworks and results portions that are Data, Analytical
from a questionnaire filled by elderly abstraction, Visual Abstractions, Visual
retarded people. This theoretical Mapping and view. The Data component
framework is proposed as a novel concept contains Raw Data and then it will
of joining color, icon strength, size and process into Analytical abstraction. The
push pattern to facilitate the Analytical abstraction is further modified
understanding and adaptability and through visual transformation and makes
improved efficiency in retarded people. it into the form of Visual abstraction. The
The proposed Framework is shown in information that belongs to this Visual
Figure 14 abstraction can be visualized. The data
sets in IV are so complex and multi-
dimensional so it will further reduce
through Visual Mapping. The data after
Visual Mapping is ready to view for the
user or it will be used in components
layer as shown in Figure 4.
Components layer is the layer that

performing backend operation and
perform support to application view. The
component layer is further divided into
R, W, U, and S according to the
requirement of elderly retarded PD
patient. R shows the Resistivity level of
touch. S is used to show Sensitivity level
of touch, U is for usability and will
Figure 14: Newly Developed Framework
further contain all other factors related
to Usability like Learnability, Efficiency,
Memorability, Satisfaction and W is used
Figure 14 is showing newly proposed
framework which is made up of different
Page 208
to show the working limitation of PD 6. CONCLUSION

patient related to touch screens. This research provides a guideline for the
developers to make a future demand for
IV applications. It will improve cognition,
These are the actual factors that are usability, sensitivity and use of mobile
lacking in existing frameworks. The web based applications for elderly
developers will not be able to develop retarded PD patients. This research will
such a useful application for the elderly also open new endeavors for developers
people or Parkinson’s Patient unless they and researchers to make elderly or PD
make use of above-mentioned factors. patient socially close with normal
The Section 3 (Literature Review) and generation. This research will also
Section 4 (Results and Analysis) verify provide a platform to remove the barriers
that there is something missing or not of learning technology through web-
covered yet. Figure 4 clearly shows that based applications in elderly people. The
huge percentage of elderly people cannot prototype or application that will build
use the existing mobile applications. on this framework is very simple to
They do not feel comfortable in using operate and then can be standardized for
applications. Figure 5 shows that the elderly or PD patients.
elderly people or Parkinson’s patients
still feel problems related to the
interface. They are unable to avoid Acknowledgement
errors, visualize or memorize application
and find it confusing to understand The authors would like to thank the
information. (As shown in Figure 5, 6 and department of Computer Science at
8), It means there is something more National Textile University, Faisalabad
needed to be done in the usability of for providing technical and advisory
existing applications. support.
As Figure 9 clearly shows that the elderly REFERENCES

retarded and Parkinson patients are
[1] M. C. F. De Oliveira and H.
uncomfortable in the usage of the touch
Levkowitz, "From visual data
screen of the current smartphone
exploration to visual data mining:
applications. The basic reason behind this
a survey," Visualization and
is the Aging hands [34] problems or weak
Computer Graphics, IEEE
motor problem [55] in elderly people.
Transactions on, vol. 9, pp. 378-
The developers have to modify the
394, 2003.
pattern of pinch, press, resistivity,
[2] C. Ware, Information
sensitivity level of touch and combination
visualization: perception for
of gestures used in current applications
design: Elsevier, 2012.
to satisfy the elderly retarded or
[3] J. S. Dhillon, C. Ramos, B. C.
Parkinson’s patients. So the developers
Wünsche, and C. Lutteroth,
should keep the suggested component
"Designing a web-based telehealth
layer (R, W, U, and S) in mind to make
system for elderly people: An
future IV Web-based mobile applications.
interview study in New Zealand,"
in Computer-Based Medical
Systems (CBMS), 2011 24th
Page 209
International Symposium on, Human-Computer Interaction,

2011, pp. 1-6. 2007, pp. 923-932.
[4] L. Gamberini, M. A. Raya, G. [10] K. Zickuhr and M. Madden, "Older
Barresi, M. Fabregat, F. Ibanez, adults and internet use," Pew
and L. Prontu, "Cognition, Internet & American Life Project,
technology and games for the vol. 6, 2012.
elderly: An introduction to [11] A. G. Gee, M. Yu, and G.
ELDERGAMES Project," Grinstein, "Dynamic and
PsychNology Journal, vol. 4, pp. interactive dimensional anchors
285-308, 2006. for spring-based visualizations,"
[5] X. Li, A. Gani, R. Salleh, and O. Technical report, computer
Zakaria, "The future of mobile science, University of
wireless communication Massachussetts Lowell2005.
networks," in Communication [12] J. A. Jacko, Human Computer
Software and Networks, 2009. Interaction Handbook:
ICCSN'09. International Fundamentals, Evolving
Conference on, 2009, pp. 554-557. Technologies, and Emerging
[6] E. Dorsey, R. Constantinescu, J. Applications: CRC press, 2012.
Thompson, K. Biglan, R. Holloway, [13] R. A. Butler, "Discrimination
K. Kieburtz, et al., "Projected learning by rhesus monkeys to
number of people with Parkinson visual-exploration motivation,"
disease in the most populous Journal of Comparative and
nations, 2005 through 2030," Physiological Psychology, vol. 46,
Neurology, vol. 68, pp. 384-386, p. 95, 1953.
2007. [14] C. Tominski, C. Forsell, and J.
[7] B. Halliwell, "Oxidants and the Johansson, "Interaction support
central nervous system: some for visual comparison inspired by
fundamental questions. Is oxidant natural behavior," Visualization
damage relevant to Parkinson's and Computer Graphics, IEEE
disease, Alzheimer's disease, Transactions on, vol. 18, pp.
traumatic injury or stroke?," Acta 2719-2728, 2012.
Neurologica Scandinavica, vol. 80, [15] S.-H. Kim, Z. Dong, H. Xian, B.
pp. 23-33, 1989. Upatising, and J. S. Yi, "Does an
[8] R. McNaney, J. Vines, D. Roggen, eye tracker tell the truth about
M. Balaam, P. Zhang, I. Poliakov, visualizations?: findings while
et al., "Exploring the acceptability investigating visualizations for
of google glass as an everyday decision making," Visualization
assistive device for people with and Computer Graphics, IEEE
Parkinson's," in Proceedings of the Transactions on, vol. 18, pp.
32nd annual ACM conference on 2421-2430, 2012.
Human factors in computing [16] F. Block, M. S. Horn, B. C.
systems, 2014, pp. 2551-2554. Phillips, J. Diamond, E. M. Evans,
[9] A. Holzinger, G. Searle, and A. and C. Shen, "The deeptree
Nischelwitzer, "On some aspects exhibit: Visualizing the tree of life
of improving mobile applications to facilitate informal learning,"
for the elderly," in International Visualization and Computer
Conference on Universal Access in
Page 210
Graphics, IEEE Transactions on, "Visualizations everywhere: A

vol. 18, pp. 2789-2798, 2012. multiplatform infrastructure for
[17] M. Bostock and J. Heer, "Protovis: linked visualizations,"
A graphical toolkit for Visualization and Computer
visualization," Visualization and Graphics, IEEE Transactions on,
Computer Graphics, IEEE vol. 16, pp. 1157-1163, 2010.
Transactions on, vol. 15, pp. [25] C. D. Correa, Y.-H. Chan, and K.-
1121-1128, 2009. L. Ma, "A framework for
[18] G. Albuquerque, M. Eisemann, T. uncertainty-aware visual
Löwe, and M. A. Magnor, analytics," in IEEE VAST, 2009, pp.
"Hierarchical Brushing of High- 51-58.
Dimensional Data Sets Using [26] L. Chittaro, "Visualizing
Quality Metrics," in VMV, 2014, information on mobile devices,"
pp. 119-126. Computer, vol. 39, pp. 40-45,
[19] C. Weaver, "Building highly- 2006.
coordinated visualizations in [27] M. d. de Rijk, C. Tzourio, M.
improvise," in Information Breteler, J. Dartigues, L.
Visualization, 2004. INFOVIS 2004. Amaducci, S. Lopez-Pousa, et al.,
IEEE Symposium on, 2004, pp. "Prevalence of parkinsonism and
159-166. Parkinson's disease in Europe: the
[20] M. Fink, J.-H. Haunert, A. Schulz, EUROPARKINSON Collaborative
J. Spoerhase, and A. Wolff, Study. European Community
"Algorithms for labeling focus Concerted Action on the
regions," Visualization and Epidemiology of Parkinson's
Computer Graphics, IEEE disease," Journal of Neurology,
Transactions on, vol. 18, pp. Neurosurgery & Psychiatry, vol.
2583-2592, 2012. 62, pp. 10-15, 1997.
[21] J. Heer, S. K. Card, and J. A. [28] D. Weintraub, J. Koester, M. N.
Landay, "Prefuse: a toolkit for Potenza, A. D. Siderowf, M. Stacy,
interactive information V. Voon, et al., "Impulse control
visualization," in Proceedings of disorders in Parkinson disease: a
the SIGCHI conference on Human cross-sectional study of 3090
factors in computing systems, patients," Archives of neurology,
2005, pp. 421-430. vol. 67, pp. 589-595, 2010.
[22] Y. Wu, G.-X. Yuan, and K.-L. Ma, [29] E. Tandberg, J. P. Larsen, and K.
"Visualizing flow of uncertainty Karlsen, "A community‐based
through analytical processes," study of sleep disorders in
Visualization and Computer patients with Parkinson's disease,"
Graphics, IEEE Transactions on, Movement Disorders, vol. 13, pp.
vol. 18, pp. 2526-2535, 2012. 895-899, 1998.
[23] S. Liu, W. Cui, Y. Wu, and M. Liu, [30] M. B. Stein, I. J. Heuser, J. L.
"A survey on information Juncos, and T. W. Uhde, "Anxiety
visualization: recent advances and disorders in patients with
challenges," The Visual Computer, Parkinson’s disease," Am J
vol. 30, pp. 1373-1393, 2014. Psychiatry, vol. 147, pp. 217-220,
[24] D. Fisher, S. M. Drucker, R. 1990.
Fernandez, and S. Ruble,
Page 211
[31] G. Scigliano, M. Musicco, P. the menopause: relationship to

Soliveri, I. Piccolo, G. Ronchetti, physical activity, estrogen use and
and F. Girotti, "Reduced Risk anthropometric factors," Journal
Factors for Vascular Disorders in of chronic diseases, vol. 40, pp.
Parkinson Disease Patients A Case- 115-120, 1987.
Control Study," Stroke, vol. 37, [39] K. M. Chan, A. J. Raja, F. J.
pp. 1184-1188, 2006. Strohschein, and K. Lechelt, "Age-
[32] F. Nunes, P. A. Silva, J. Cevada, related changes in muscle fatigue
A. C. Barros, and L. Teixeira, resistance in humans," Canadian
"User interface design guidelines Journal of Neurological
for smartphone applications for Sciences/Journal Canadien des
people with Parkinson’s disease," Sciences Neurologiques, vol. 27,
Universal Access in the pp. 220-228, 2000.
Information Society, pp. 1-21, [40] R. Eisma, A. Dickinson, J.
2015. Goodman, A. Syme, L. Tiwari, and
[33] K. Charmaz, "Constructing A. F. Newell, "Early user
grounded theory: A practical involvement in the development
guide through qualitative analysis of information technology-related
(Introducing Qualitative Methods products for older people,"
Series)," 2006. Universal Access in the
[34] E. Carmeli, H. Patish, and R. Information Society, vol. 3, pp.
Coleman, "The aging hand," The 131-140, 2004.
Journals of Gerontology Series A: [41] D. Hawthorn, "Possible
Biological Sciences and Medical implications of aging for interface
Sciences, vol. 58, pp. M146-M152, designers," Interacting with
2003. computers, vol. 12, pp. 507-528,
[35] T. Reed, R. Fabsitz, J. Selby, and 2000.
D. Carmelli, "Genetic influences [42] J. Strengers, "Smartphone
and grip strength norms in the interface design requirements for
NHLBI twin study males aged 59– seniors," Information Studies.
69," Annals of human biology, vol. University of Amsterdam,
18, pp. 425-432, 1991. Amsterdam, 2012.
[36] D. M. Chilima and S. J. Ismail, [43] L. Mozdzyn, "Capacitive Touch
"Nutrition and handgrip strength Screen," ed: Google Patents,
of older adults in rural Malawi," 2008.
Public health nutrition, vol. 4, [44] S. Sharma, R. Sharma, P. Singh,
pp. 11-17, 2001. and A. Mahajan, "Age based user
[37] D. Carmelli and T. Reed, "Stability interface in mobile operating
and change in genetic and system," arXiv preprint
environmental influences on hand- arXiv:1205.1687, 2012.
grip strength in older male twins," [45] M. Kobayashi, A. Hiyama, T.
Journal of Applied Physiology, Miura, C. Asakawa, M. Hirose, and
vol. 89, pp. 1879-1883, 2000. T. Ifukube, "Elderly user
[38] J. A. Cauley, A. M. Petrini, R. E. evaluation of mobile touchscreen
LaPorte, R. B. Sandler, C. M. interactions," in Human-Computer
Bayles, R. J. Robertson, et al., Interaction–INTERACT 2011, ed:
"The decline of grip strength in Springer, 2011, pp. 83-99.
Page 212
[46] B. Ahmad, M. Aliif, and N. A. 2009 2nd Conference on Human

Iahad, "Websites usability System Interactions, 2009, pp.
instrument validation using think- 164-169.
aloud method," in Information and [53] T. van Dyk, H. Gelderblom, K.
Communication Technology Renaud, and J. van Biljon, "Mobile
(ICoICT), 2013 International Phones for the Elderly: a design
Conference of, 2013, pp. 208-212. framework," in International
[47] S. Landau and B. Everitt, A Development Informatics
handbook of statistical analyses Association Conference, 2013, pp.
using SPSS vol. 1: Chapman & 85-102.
Hall/CRC Boca Raton, FL, 2004. [54] A. Tanaka, A. Parkinson, Z. Settel,
[48] A. U. Sinha, E. Merrill, S. A. and K. Tahiroglu, "A Survey and
Armstrong, T. W. Clark, and S. Thematic Analysis Approach as
Das, "eXframe: reusable Input to the Design of Mobile
framework for storage, analysis Music GUIs," in NIME, 2012.
and visualization of genomics [55] A. H. Snijders, B. P. Van De
experiments," BMC Warrenburg, N. Giladi, and B. R.
bioinformatics, vol. 12, p. 1, Bloem, "Neurological gait
2011. disorders in elderly people:
[49] E. H.-h. Chi and J. T. Riedl, "An clinical approach and
operator interaction framework classification," The Lancet
for visualization systems," in Neurology, vol. 6, pp. 63-74,
Information Visualization, 1998. 2007.
Proceedings. IEEE Symposium on,
1998, pp. 63-70.
[50] A. Holzinger, "Finger instead of
mouse: touch screens as a means
of enhancing universal access," in
ERCIM Workshop on User
Interfaces for All, 2002, pp. 387-
397.
[51] M. S. Al-Razgan, H. S. Al-Khalifa,
M. D. Al-Shahrani, and H. H.
AlAjmi, "Touch-based mobile
phone interface guidelines and
design recommendations for
elderly people: a survey of the
literature," in International
Conference on Neural Information
Processing, 2012, pp. 568-574.
[52] L. Gamberini, F. Martino, B.
Seraglia, A. Spagnolli, M.
Fabregat, F. Ibanez, et al.,
"Eldergames project: An
innovative mixed reality table-top
solution to preserve cognitive
functions in elderly people," in
Page 213
MDSRC - 2016 Proceedings, 16-17 November, 2016Wah/Pakistan
RISE OF ENTERPRENUERSHIP TREND AMONG STUDENTS IN PAKISTAN
Muhammad Umair Siddiqui1, Talha Asif2, Faqiha Sultan3

1,2
Department of Computer Science National University of Computer and Emerging Science,
Karachi 75030, Pakistan
1
K142219@nu.edu.pk, 2K142246@nu.edu.pk
3
Department of Sciences and Humanities, National University of Computer and Emerging
Science, Karachi 75030, Pakistan
3
ABSTRACT
The main purpose of this study is to highlight the rise in entrepreneurship among the
students of Pakistan by assessing why the graduating students are now pursuing
entrepreneurship as their career and what factors and traits of the current entrepreneurs
encourage others to become entrepreneurs. This paper underlines the latest changes in
the government laws and personal, social, and economic factors which have affected the
entrepreneurship, provides a comprehensive statistical report to demonstrate rise in
entrepreneurship in Pakistan, and serves as a motivator for the students to opt for
entrepreneurship as their career so they can help in rising the economy of this country.
For this purpose, the data have been collected from two groups who are most indulged in
entrepreneurship. 100 students from various universities and 91 entrepreneurs from
different incubations and ventures were surveyed using separate questionnaire for each
group. Statistical analysis is then carried out by using a statistical software, regression is
applied to find the relation in different factors affecting the preference of
entrepreneurship and analysis, then presented to prove that there is a rise in
entrepreneurship among the students of Pakistan.
Keywords: Entrepreneurs; Entrepreneurship; Graduates; Venture
1. INTRODUCTION business pioneer and pioneer of new

contemplations and business outlines.
Enterprise recommends grouped things to
various individuals. Some envision tech For the improvement of a business
ponders with Silicon Valley new enterprise society in the Pakistan, the
associations, while others picture little arrangement of laws and approaches that
business visionaries opening up their shop are elevating it will must be
entryways on Main Street. Ordinarily, a disassembled. Business enterprise
representative has been depicted as "a advancement as a cognizant component
man who plans and deals with any try, in Pakistan is a late post-provincial
particularly a business, by and large with wonder.
critical development and danger". As
In Pakistan, the arrangements have
opposed to filling in as a representative,
dependably been one-sided towards the
a business visionary keeps up a little
high class of nation. This is valid for the
business and recognize all the risk and
monetary approaches which have been
prize of a given business endeavor,
one-sided towards the high scale part. As
thought, or staggering or association
opposed to business enterprise,
offered open to be obtained. The
arrangements are made for speculators
business visionary is generally seen as a
and ventures turned into the standard. In
Page 214
light of these issue we chose to do an success stories. Hyder, et al. [1] stated
examination on the enterprise in that there is a strong positive correlation
Pakistan. between entrepreneurial intentions and
professional attractions. They also proved
There are two ways a fresh graduate may that people get motivated by the charms,
proceed towards. One is employment and luxuries and success stories of successful
entrepreneurs. Ahmed, et al. [2]
other is entrepreneurship. Business
concluded that entrepreneurs and non-
visionary is some individual who practices entrepreneurs cannot be divided on the
development by sorting out a test to basis of gender but family background
recognize favored viewpoint of an open and level of education really matters in
passage and, as the pioneer, picks what, making entrepreneur. Hunjra, et al. [3]
how, and the measure of a not all that stated that in Africa young students are
more motivated towards venture
awful or association will be delivered.
creations. These researches have been
Few years back in Pakistan, done in African and European countries
Entrepreneurship was not an easy choice but Pakistan needs these kind of
to pick by the fresh graduates but researches so that more people come
recently the student’s mentality towards toward this passion to stabilize the
their future target is changing and they economy of the country. Tariq, et al. [4]
are more open towards entrepreneurship. presented that the greatest test is
absence of base and Governmental
Nowadays, entrepreneurship is getting Support for new Entrepreneurs in
common to students and many peoples Pakistan. Compounding peace
circumstance, debasement and poor
working in different fields. In order to financial conditions are unmanageable
evaluate the rise of entrepreneurship dangers for new participants.
among the students of Pakistan, and find Ali, et al. [5] stated that the majority of
out why they are going towards the students exhibited positive
entrepreneurship, how they see the entrepreneurial attributes. However,
future of Pakistan in entrepreneurship despite the big difference between
positive and negative entrepreneurial
and much more details for these
attributes, no statistically significant
information this research has been difference was found. This might be due
conducted by us. All the factors affecting to the large variance on the positive side.
entrepreneurs throughout their career Ali, et al. [6] found that work experience
have been covered in this research. The and family income are playing no
main objective of this research is to significant role in the formation of
prove the rising trend of entrepreneurial but family business
background got positive impact on
entrepreneurship in Pakistan and assess
intention in Pakistan but not in China.
why the graduates and students pursue Cull [7] presented that tutors are
entrepreneurship. Secondary objective is required to utilize a methodology
to assess that what are the factors and towards business visionaries that lessens
personality traits that current reliance and expansions self-assurance. a
entrepreneurs possess which encourage style of tutoring which is not so much
graduates to pursue entrepreneurship as mandate but rather more engaging as the
customer's business develops.
a profession. Koçoğlu and Hassan [8] concluded from a
comparative study that TPB based
2. LITERATURE SURVEY
entrepreneurial goal model was a decent
In Pakistan unemployment is the rising clarification of entrepreneurial aim
issue so people are seeking to start their amongst understudies. Besides, current
own ventures after getting motivated by study bolsters the idea that "the
Page 215
connections among the TPB segments are • A questionnaire for entrepreneurs:

similarly solid and tantamount crosswise The questions were based on Socio-
over Pakistani and Turkish societies. Jan, Economical factors and personality
et al. [9] inquired the three demographic
traits which inclines the intentions of
question (Entrepreneurs' age, training
level and experience) and four segment young graduates toward
of accomplishment enterprise business entrepreneurship.
(Opportunity, Risk taking, Innovation and
Resources) from the respondents. Some statistical tests are applied to
Mazzarol, et al. [10] used multivariate evaluate the result. Pearson's Chi-
procedures to break down the squared test is an authentic test
information, the significance of three associated with sets of full scale data to
demographic variables ‐ sexual survey how likely it is that any watched
orientation, past government work and
contrast between the sets developed by
late excess ‐ was distinguished as having
potential negative impacts on little probability. It is sensible for unpaired
business arrangement, and correlations data from colossal illustrations. The Chi-
are made with past studies. square test is suitable for the situation
here to find relation between our key
3. METHODOLOGY factors which encourages our sample to
The statistical methodology behind this prefer entrepreneurship.
research on Rise of Entrepreneurship is
based on nested sampling and certain Regression Analysis is a genuine system
statistical test such as Chi-Square test of for evaluating the relationship among
association, Regression, and correlation variables. It wires different
are applied to gain a concise and an ideal methodologies for appearing and
view of the student and graduates toward investigating several variables, when the
the preference of entrepreneurship. thought is on the relationship between a
reliant variable and one or more self-
The sample of this research consists of overseeing variables (or 'pointers').
about 200 individuals out of which 100
are undergraduates enrolled in different The data is collected from different
major courses in different universities of universities all over Pakistan in order to
Karachi. The other half of the sample make research bold from all sides. The
consists of about 100 entrepreneurs who division is given in Figure 1.
are currently running their own venture
or have been involved in
entrepreneurship at some point in their
life.
As our report have two different samples

so, two different questionnaires were
prepared for them.
• A questionnaire for university

students: It involves questions
related to the factors that motivate
and resist students towards
entrepreneurship.
Page 216
Figure 1: Division of Universities from There were two questions “Poor

where data is being collected. economic conditions resist graduates to
become entrepreneurs” and “one’s high
4. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION interaction towards business motivates
him/her to become an entrepreneur”. On
Chi-square test of association:
applying chi-square test, by the results it
Entrepreneurs Survey Results: was that there is a relation between
economic conditions of a country and
Table 1: Association between Economic one’s high interaction towards business.
Conditions and Interaction towards
Business. Table 2: Association between status of
the venture and resistance to graduates
Asymptotic to become entrepreneurs.
Significance
Value df (2-sided) Asymptotic
Significance
Pearson Chi-
33.734 16 .006 Value df (2-sided)
Square
Likelihood Pearson Chi-
33.600 16 .006 32.558 16 .008
Ratio Square
Linear-by- Likelihood
25.553 16 .061
Linear 3.631 1 .057 Ratio
Association Linear-by-
N of Valid Linear 3.960 1 .047
91 Association
Cases
N of Valid
91
Cases
Figure 2: Association between

Economic Conditions and Interaction Figure 3: Association between status of
towards Business. the venture and resistance to graduates
to become entrepreneurs.
Page 217
A self-evaluation of entrepreneur’s
ventures was asked and a question
stating “poor economic conditions resist A question was included in questionnaire
graduates to become entrepreneurs”. stating “tax imposed on small ventures is
Both were found to be dependent on a barrier towards entrepreneurial
each other since its chi-square value success”. This was found to be dependent
came up as 0.008. This means that the
on status of venture, after applying chi-
entrepreneurs who are rising or
successful though agreed it but those square test. The chi-square value was
who disagree it are not less. Whereas calculated as 0.006. Bar chart shows that
those who are declining or failed blame the successful entrepreneurs disagreed or
economic conditions for their failure. remain neutral to the tax imposed but
the declining and failed entrepreneur’s
state tax as the cause of their failure.
Table 3: Association between tax
imposed and status of small ventures. Student Survey Results:
Asymptotic Table 4: Association between Effect of

Significance Field as Entrepreneurship and
Value df (2-sided) Preference.
Value df Asymp
Pearson Sig.
33.438 16 .006
Chi-Square (2-sided)
Likelihood
30.105 16 .017 Pearson 13.628 4 0.009
Ratio Chi-Square
Linear-by-
Likelihood 15.302 4 0.004
Linear .161 1 .688 Ratio
Association Linear by 11.201 1 0.001
N of Valid linear
91
Cases Association
No of Valid 100
Case
Figure 4: Relation between tax imposed

and status of small ventures.
Page 218
Figure 5: Association between Effect of

Field as Entrepreneurship and
Preference. Table 6: Effect of Law and Order on
Not only the students from the field of Preference.
entrepreneurship believes that their field
push them tow1ards entrepreneurship Value df Asymp
but also other field students also believe Sig.
that there field also promote the idea of (2-sided)
entrepreneurship. Pearson 26.493 16 0.047
Chi-Square
Likelihood 26.295 16 0.050
Table 5: Effect of Economic Condition Ratio
and Economic Policies on Preference. Linear by 0.017 1 0.895
linear
Value Df Asymp Association
Sig. No of Valid 100
(2-sided) Case
Pearson 127.371 16 0.000
Chi-Square
Likelihood 106.014 16 0.000
Ratio
Linear by 50.097 1 0.000
linear
Association
No of Valid 100
Case
Figure 7: Effect of Law and Order on

Preference.
Table 7: Effect of Business Background

on Preference
Value df Asymp
Sig.
(2-sided)
Figure 6: Effect of Economic Condition
and Economic Policies on Preference Pearson 32.750 4 0.000
Chi-Square
The majority of the people disagree that Likelihood 35.490 4 0.000
there is a good chance for Ratio
entrepreneurship in Pakistan and at the Linear by 25.838 1 0.000
same time they also disagree with the linear
fact that economic policies are the good Association
enough for them to become an No of Valid 100
entrepreneur. Case
Page 219
Those who belong to a business

background are highly not sure whether
Majority reject that the economic they choose entrepreneurship due to
condition of Pakistan can promote family business or for some other reasons
entrepreneurship but they don’t think but those who don’t belong to family
law and order situation are the main business are pretty sure business
cause of it. There may be few other background is the not a reason why
reason for example people mentality and students become entrepreneurs. Almost
cultural restrictions etc. which can be 80% of our sample disagree that having a
the cause of lack in entrepreneurs. business background is a necessity to
become entrepreneur. They believe
anyone can be a successful entrepreneur
even without family business.
Regression Analysis:
Regression (Entrepreneur’s Evaluation)
The below table describes the statistics

of all the variables be it dependent or
independent along with their beta values,
co-linearity value, and significant value.
Table 8: Regression Coefficient

(Entrepreneur’s Evaluation)
Figure 8: Effect of Business Background
on Preference Stnd.
Unstnd. Coeff. Coeff.
Std.
Model B Error Beta t Sig.
Constant 1.681 .056 30.09 .000
Personality
.065 .325 3.429 .001
Traits
Social-Eco
Factors of .226 .068 .313 3.309 .001
country
The estimation of beta shows the way of

the relationship amongst needy and free
Figure 9: Having a business background variables. On the off chance that the
is a necessity to become an estimation of beta is certain, it implies
entrepreneur. that positive relationship exists between
the needy and autonomous variable and
Page 220
in the event that it is negative, it implies The estimation of beta shows the way of
that there is a negative relationship the relationship amongst needy and free
between the needy and free variable. variables.
Table 9: Regression ANOVA Table 10: Regression Coefficient

(Entrepreneur’ Evaluation) (Student’s Evaluation)
Sum of Mean Stnd.

Model Squares df Square f Sig. Unstnd. Coeff. Coeff.
Regression 6.758 2 3.379 11.894 .000 Std.

Model B Error Beta t Sig.
Residual 25.000 88 .284
(Constant) 2.950 .096 30.57 .000
Total 31.758 90
Major .426 .097 .399 4.388 .000
According to table 8, both the Family

.171 .097 .160 1.765 .081
independent variable “Personality Traits” Background
and “Socio-Economic Factors” have a
positive impact on 'Preference’ of Economic
.161 .097 .151 1.657 .101
Graduates towards Entrepreneurship. The Status
regression equation formed using beta
value is as follows:
In the event that estimation of beta is
Preference = 1.681 + (.222) (Personality
sure, it implies that positive relationship
Traits) + (.226)(Social-Economical Factors
of country)
exists between the needy and free
variable and in the event that it is
The t esteem demonstrates the relative negative, it implies that there is a
significance of every variable in the negative relationship between the reliant
above model. Sig esteem demonstrates and autonomous variable.
the criticalness of every variable. In the
above table, the Prob. estimations of According to table 10, both the
variables Personality Traits and Socio- independent variable “Major of
Economic Factors are 0.001 and 0.001 Individual” and “Family Background”
individually. Since both the values are have a positive impact on 'Preference’ of
less than 0.1, it can safely be claimed Graduates towards Entrepreneurship. The
that both the independent variables have regression equation formed using beta
a significant effect on Preference of value is as follows:
Graduates towards Entrepreneurship. Preference=2.950 + (.426)(Major of
individual) + (.171)(Family Background).
Regression (Student’s Evaluation)
The t regard exhibits the relative
The beneath table depicts the
noteworthiness of each variable in the
measurements of the considerable
above model. Sig regard exhibits the
number of variables be it needy or free
criticalness of each variable. In the above
alongside their beta qualities, co-
table, the Prob. estimations of variables
linearity esteem, and noteworthy worth.
Page 221
Major of Individual and Family courses and laws are made to soften the
Background are 0.000 and 0.081 tax on entrepreneurs so this industry can
independently. Since both the values are rise further and farther resulting in a
less than 0.1, it can safely be claimed better economy of Pakistan.
that both the independent variables have
a significant effect on Preference of ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Graduates towards Entrepreneurship. Above all, to the Great
Almighty, the author of knowledge and
Table 11: Regression ANOVA (Student’s
wisdom, for his countless love. The
Evaluation)
completion of this research could not
have been possible without the
Sum of Mean participation and assistance of so many
Model Squares df Square f Sig. people whose names may not all be
enumerated. Their contributions are
Regression 23.382 3 7.794 8.373 .000 sincerely appreciated and gratefully
acknowledged. However, the group
Residual 89.368 96 .931
would like to express their deep
appreciation and indebtedness
Total 112.750 99
particularly to Azfar Abbas, Sohaib
Hashmi, Syed Muhammad Abdurrehman,
Abu Zohran Qaiser for their endless
5. CONCLUSION support and understanding spirit during
The analysis based on students’ and our research.
entrepreneurs’ response indicate that
due to some factors there is a rise in
entrepreneurship industry of Pakistan. 6. REFERENCES
Some surprising relations between
[1] Hyder, A., Azhar, A., Javaid, A.,
various variables were found. Most of the
and Rehman, M., 2011.
entrepreneurs and students agreed that Entrepreneurial intentions among
though the economic conditions in business students in Pakistan,
Pakistan maybe poor but the high Journal of Business Systems,
interaction of business at some point in Governance and Ethics. 5(2):pp.
their life is a factor which has compelled 13-22.
them to become an entrepreneur. A [2] Ahmed, I., Nawaz, M.M., Ahmad,
Z., Shaukat, M.Z., Usman, A.,
relation between business students and
Rehman, W.-u., and Ahmed, N.,
non-business students showed that 2010. Determinants of students’
irrespective of what the field is of the entrepreneurial career intentions:
undergraduates, their curriculum and Evidence from business graduates,
studies aggravates the interest in them to European Journal of Social
become an entrepreneur. It was also Sciences. 15(2):pp. 14-22.
[3] Hunjra, A.I., Ahmad, H.M.,
found that business background was not a
Rehman, K.U., and Safwan, N.,
strong factor in the rise of entrepreneur, 2011. Factors influencing
instead according to our analysis business intention to create new venture
education was found to be a strong factor among young graduates, Africa
for the rise in entrepreneurship industry. Journal of Business Management.
We hope that certain steps are taken to 5(1):pp. 121-127.
introduce entrepreneurship’s related
Page 222
[4] Tariq, M., Arif, H., Kumar, R.,

and Mustafa, G., 2015. Issues and
Challenges for young Graduates in
Becoming Entrepreneurs:
Economic andPersonality based
Perspective, International Journal
of Behavioral Research &
Psychology 3(3):pp. 79-84.
[5] Ali, A., Topping, K.J., and Tariq,
R.H., 2010. Entrepreneurial
Attributes among Postgraduate
Students of a Pakistani University,
Online Submission. 7(5):pp. 66-
77.
[6] Ali, S., Lu, W., and Wang, W.,
2012. Determinants of
entrepreneurial intentions among
the college students in: China and
Pakistan, Journal of Education
and Practice. 3(11):pp. 13-21.
[7] Cull, J., 2006. Mentoring young
entrepreneurs: what leads to
success?, International journal of
evidence based coaching and
mentoring. 4(2):pp. 8-18.
[8] Koçoğlu, M. and Hassan, M.U.,
2013. Assessing Entrepreneurial
Intentions of University Students:
A Comparative Study of Two
Different Cultures: Turkey and
Pakistani, European Journal of
Business and Management.
5(13):pp. 243-252.
[9] Jan, S., Irshad, M., and Nadeem,
A., 2013. Determinant of the
success factors for
entrepreneurship business,
International Review of Basic and
Applied Sciences. 1(7):pp. 156-
164.
[10] Mazzarol, T., Volery, T., Doss,
N., and Thein, V., 1999. Factors
influencing small business start-
ups: a comparison with previous
research, International Journal of
Entrepreneurial Behavior &
Research. 5(2):pp. 48-63.
Page 223
Usability Evaluation of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa Universities’ Websites

Hamidullah, S. Jan.
Department of Computer Software Engineering
University of Engineering and Technology, Peshawar, Mardan Campus
hamidullah35@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
Usability plays a vital role in the success of any organization. It not only focuses on the
ease of use, but also can identify potential problems in the websites. The International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) provides comprehensive guidelines for website
usability through ISO 9241-151:2008. However, the majority of the websites can be found
defiant in this regard due to many reasons. In this paper, we have evaluated 12
Universities’ websites against the aforementioned ISO guidelines. Two evaluation
methods, namely, user-based and expert-based were used to evaluate the usability from
various perspectives. For this purpose, a comprehensive heuristic guideline document was
developed which was based on usability criteria defined by the ISO 9241-151:2008.The
heuristic guideline document contained guidelines for Navigation, Search, General Design,
Content etc. All the websites were evaluated by 52 users and 10 experts. In user-based
and expert-based methods, it is found that most of the websites have common usability
problems which need serious attention of the developers to make their website more
usable and effective. In future, the presented detail analysis will provide a road map for
researchers to have better understandings of the evaluation methods and the impact of
various factors on the evaluation itself.
Keywords: Usability, HCI, Standards, Evaluation.
1. INTRODUCTION possible to use it easily and effectively. It

is important to check the interfaces of
Usability not only plays an important role universities’ websites based on the
to measure easiness of the website usability criteria defined by ISO which
interface but also identifies the potential affect the usability of university websites
problems with website interfaces [1]. through different evaluation methods.
This paper explores the issue of usability
based on International Organization for Earlier studies show that usability
Standardization. It has been observed problems of educational websites have
that most universities have developed been evaluated by different methods like
their own websites in the province of inspection based methods, user-based
Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan. While (user-testing) methods and tool-based
taking an overview of these universities’ methods. Inspection based methods
websites, it is found that most of these include experts to identify usability
websites are not developed according to problems during the test while the user-
the guidelines provided by ISO 9241- based testing methods involve the users
151:2008, especially part 151 having title via questionnaires, interviews,
“Guidance on world wide web user observations to find usability problems of
interfaces”[2]. The significance to meet a website. Tool-based method evaluation
usability guidelines for universities’ can be done by using third party software
websites is to enable as many people as tools to identify usability problems of a
Page 224
website [1,3]. In this paper, we have of the developers to make their website
evaluated 12 universities’ websites based more usable and effective.
on heuristic guideline documents. Two
evaluation methods, user based via The other sections of this paper are
Questionnaire and expert based methods proposed as follow: Section 2 is about the
were used to evaluate the usability of related work of this study. Section 3
universities’ websites according to the explains the methodology of this study.
usability criteria defined in the heuristic Section 4 describes the analysis of this
guidelines document. study. Section 5 discusses the conclusion
and future work.
The usability testing is important for
improving the design, but to find 2. RELATED WORK
usability problems depends on the This section provides a detailed overview
number of users or experts, as 80% of of literature. It is further divided into
problems can be found with the help of three sections, the first one is an
10 experts and 10 users [4]; therefore the introduction to usability, the second one
12 university websites were evaluated by is about usability evaluation methods
52 users and 10 experts. The best source (UEMs), the third one is about user
of information for this research is the testing (via questionnaires) and expert
contents of universities’ websites, which based testing.
are accessed online on the internet. The
required data collected from the users 2.1 Introduction to usability
and experts from the selected 12
The definition of “Useful” consist of two
websites on Khyber Pakhtunkhwa
important qualitative attributes utility
universities’ websites recognized by
and usability (Useful = utility + usability),
Higher Education Commission (HEC). The
the utility refers to the features needed
sample of 12 universities’ websites is
while the Usability refers to how easy
selected on the basis of [5] study.
and pleasant these features are in use.
The result of this Research showed that Actually the usability measures how easy
the selected ISO guidlines are not follwed interfaces are used and how to improve
due to which these 12 universties’ ease of use [13]. In this paper, we discuss
websites shows poor usability.The Expert the relevant literature related to
identified the reasons for poor usability usability and not related to utility. More
in this case; 76.66% heuristic guideline than 20 years of span in usability
document categories like navigation, research, current study still suggests
search, general design, content, find that the selecting usability measure is a
information and communication show difficult task and some usability studies
usability score less than 30% but however are weak in conclusion after reviewing
there are a few categories found in 3 180 published materials by the author, so
universties websities which followed to establish a valid and a perfect
heuristic guideline document upto some usability measure you have to choose
limits. The experts for this study were your usability measure easier, to make
selected from different fields related to usability studies and usability research
information technology because multiple strong [9].
experts from different background
2.2 Usability evaluation methods
identifies all usability problems.These
usability problems need serious attention
Page 225
In order to make a usable Web The selection of the appropriate methods

application and to improve their usability for evaluation depends on the goal of
for its users , there are several usability evaluation. If it is suggested to redesign
evaluation methods which can be divided the website and discover most serious
into two different types: (i) Empirical usability problems, then expert based
methods : data collected from real users evaluation and user based evaluation
and (ii) Inspection methods: web methods are good [12]. The practitioner
designer or expert evaluator are involved must note the important point in mind
to inspect final user interfaces with set that all usability problems can’t be
of guidelines [10,16]. The study [16] also identified with the help of single usability
discusses the web usability evaluation evaluation methods (UEM) so most of the
importance and its growing interests. studies suggest to use more than one
UEMS; which can help in evaluating
The three evaluation methods found total infrastructure [16, 17].
187 usability problems in which 54%
through user testing,28% through semi- Here we consider expert based and users
structure interview and 18% through based methods for this research study.
survey which identified that user testing
is an effectual evaluation method than 2.3 User testing and expert testing
other two (interviews, surveys) but
combination of these evaluation methods The design attributes (content, color,
found more usability problems in HER organization, visual organization,
[6].The result obtained from each navigation system, typography) were
experiment shows that web usability closely related to each other in
evaluation process (WUEP) is efficient participants evaluation because they
and effective than heuristic evaluation deliver high level usability and beauty to
(HE) in finding usability problems users but the author of this study is not
[10].The two evaluation methods; one is interested in different evaluation
based on automated tools while other is methods [11]. The usability of king Abdul
based on questionnaires. The online Aziz university website was evaluated by
automated tools are best to measure the using two methods (expert based and
internal attributes of the website which user based via questionnaire); the
is difficult for common users, such as to questionnaire was developed on the basis
find download time, html code errors, of usability criteria like navigation,
size of html pages [18]. The most widely design, content, ease of use and
used method was user testing, but by supporting the user’s tasks [8].The author
reviewing 206 papers it was found that of this study [14] select 3 e-commerce
most of the methods reports, usability websites and 3 e-government websites in
problems and do not provide any Pakistan and found usability issues and
suggestion which can help the designer give suggestions for improvement of
and developer to improve the interface these issues. The result of the study in
[16]. In this paper, we provide a [15] identified are the usability issues in
suggestion for using ISO 9241-151:2008 Pakistan universities' websites, based on
guidelines documents for improving the a questionnaire designed for 3 university
interfaces in various perspectives; in websites having sample of 12 users by
order to achieve usability for universities using Nielson usability criteria. A
websites. questionnaire was designed based on 23
Page 226
usability criteria (divided into 5 The possible value to each guideline is

parts).Each part discusses single usability -2: strongly disagree
point [18].The expert based method -1: Disagree
0: Neutral
identifies the underlying cause of the
+1: Agree
problem because an expert can easily +2: Strongly agree
report those parts of the design which
violates the usability principles, and
Table 1: Detailed categories of heuristic
knows the reasons behind these violations guideline document
[17].
Categories Sub Categories
3. METHODOLOGY
Navigation back to home
3.1 Guideline document design page, navigation links are
simple and understandable,
The heuristic guidelines document is
links working ,Directly
designed based on ISO 9241-151:2008 in Navigation accessing relevant
order to evaluate the usability of 12 information from the home
Khyber Pakhunkhwa universities' websites page, help in navigating the
by using two methods: Expert based and websites (provide navigation
User based. The Guidelines in ISO 9241- overview),Maintain visibility
151:2008 documents are divided into of navigational links, dead
Effective internal search tool
several sections and contain complex
Search available, Help regarding the
guidelines, which is difficult for users and search, advice for
sometime experts also get confused with unsuccessful searches
these guidelines [2,19]. So we select only Attractive of sites, Google or
those guidelines from different sections other Map enabled, URL easy
of part 151 with the help of an IT expert to remember , URL names
(i) Which are easy to use for users and reflect university name
General design
,Proper use of images, Proper
experts. (ii) Which are used for already
use of fonts, Proper page
developed websites. (iii) Which are design, color for fonts, color
specific to University websites.The for background ,rate for
designed guideline document is divided color
into 5 categories: Up-to-date information,
Content
Information about the
x Navigation (7 guidelines) university, login availability
x Search (3 guidelines) Find information Contact us information,
x General Design (10 guidelines) (Ease of use) and returning to home page from
communication any page, Foreign language
x Content (3 guidelines)
support
x Find information (Ease of use) and
communication (4 guidelines)
An online questionnaire was developed by 3.2 Data collection

using “Google form” on the bases of
these guidelines because it is easy and The data were collected from 52 users
cheap during distribution and can and 10 experts for 12 Khyber
generate results easily [7].The rating Pakhtunkhwa universities’ websites based
scale used in the study [19] is on the on the online questionnaire which was
basis of 5-scale level which is as follow: developed on the basis of Table 1.
Page 227
The 12 university names U1, U2, U3, U4, guideline document and inspected the
U5,U6,U7,U8, U9, U10,U12 are accessed various elements of universities’ websites
online through their URLs. and assigned a suited rate to each
guideline on the bases of 5 level scale.
3.2.1 Data from users
The experts were selected with different
The data were collected from 52 users in
expertise, having experienced 5 years or
approximately in 35 to 40 days. The
more than 5 years.
instructions given to the users were to
read the questionnaires before filling. Table 3: Experts participation
Each user first reads the specific
guideline and then checked this guideline Expertise Experience
for online website and then rated a single
value in 5 rating scales. E1 User interface
designer for mobile &
Table 2: Users participation web, logo &
iconography
Item Percentage
E2 Professional IOS apps
Qualification developer
BS : 73.1 %
E3 Web designer & web
MS : 26.9 % developer 5 years
E4 Designer
Internet I.e < 1 year : 7.7 % E5 Web developer
experience
I.e >1 year : 92.3% E6 Web developer and
(I.e)
experts in frameworks
Number of E7 Web & mobile
0:0% developer
websites
1 to 5: 38.5 % E8 Senior developer in
visited on 6 to 10: 21.2 %
daily base android, IOS, PHP,
More than 10:40.4%
Word press 7 years
E9 Mobile computing and
web development
Most of the users in this study are having
E10 Web designer &
an internet experience greater than 1
developer, graphic
year and have a good qualification like 16 8 years
designer, Facebook
years or 18 years of education, also they
Api
visit websites on daily bases, it means
that they interact with websites every
day in various perspectives and have 4. ANALYSIS
enough knowledge about using the
websites. The score of users based and expert
based were calculated in excel sheets by
3.2.2 Data from experts using the following formula below in [19]:
The data were collected from 10 experts
Score = (Raw score/2n) *100
approximately in 30 days; each expert
spent a lot of time on 12 websites. During If the score of each category is at least
this evaluation process experts judged 50%, then it has a good usability, but if
the interfaces, several times based on this score is in the range of 30 to 50 %,
Page 228
then it has reasonable usability and a

score below 30% means that a website
Table 4: Number of categories
has poor usability. The above formula is
used for all categories in Table 1 with the Score Score in range Score
following information: ≥50% 30 to 50% <30%
x Raw score: The addition of all the U1 0 2 3

score for each guideline in each U2 0 0 5
category. U3 0 0 5
x Where “n” is the number of U4 1 2 2
questions related to each U5 0 0 5
guideline in each category having
U6 0 0 5
value -2,-1,+2,+1 while the
U7 2 2 1
neutral value “0” is excluded from
U8 0 0 5
a number of questions.
U9 0 0 5
x Score: It is the score in
percentage; it is calculated for U10 0 0 5
each category.
U11 2 2 1
x Range of score: The range of
score varies between +100% and U12 0 1 4
-100%. If the score is +100%, then
it means that all guidelines of
each category are completely
satisfied, but if the score is -100% 80
then it means that no guidelines
60
are satisfied.
x Overall score: When all the score 40
score
for each category is calculated,
then the average of the score 20
becomes the overall score. 0

<30 30 to 50 ≥50%
On the basis of the result of 52 users and
12 experts, it is found that 12
universities’ websites in Khyber Figure 1: Categories vs. score
Pakhtunkhwa showed poor usability, so
most of the users and experts are Figure 1 show that 76.67% categories
dissatisfied from these websites. The have score less than 30%, while 15%
experts identified that the main reason categories showed score in the range of
behind this was a violation of ISO
30% to 50% and 8.33% categories showed
guidelines. As there are 5 categories
score greater or equal to 50%.As most of
already discussed in the heuristic
guideline document like Navigation, the categories have score < 30% that’s
Search, General Design, Content, Find why these websites show overall poor
information and communication, but the usability, it does not mean that all the
categories on which the developer and categories of 12 universities’ websites
the designer did not focus are identified are not following ISO guidelines. The
by the experts. The 5 categories are
universities: U4, U7, U11 websites
numbered from 1 to 5, while 0 means no
categories. showed that its some categories are
Page 229
following ISO guidelines up to some 4. CONCLUSION AND FUTURE WORK

extent, see Figure 2.
The two usability evaluation methods:
user based and expert based, are
selected on the basis of literature to
investigate the usability of universities’
websites in Khyber Pakhtunkhwa on the
basis of the heuristic guideline
document, which was developed from ISO
9241-151:2008.The results showed that
12 universities’ websites are not
following ISO guidelines due to which it
showed poor usability. Multiple experts
identified that there are 76.67%
Figure 2: Categories following categories involved due which websites
guidelines showed poor usability. There are a
limited number of categories in U4, U7,
From the Figure 2, we can say that the
U11 which follow ISO guidelines up to
“search” category for U7 satisfied the
ISO guidelines up to 52%. The “General some extent. Multiple experts provided
design” category for U7 satisfied the suggestions to different practitioner to
ISO guidelines up to 66%. The “General improve the poor usability. In future this
design” category for U4 satisfied the study will fill the gaps of understanding
ISO guidelines up to 70%. The of evaluation methods and its impact on
“content” category for U11 satisfied usability measures, to make the usability
the ISO guidelines up to 50%. The “Find
area of research strong.
information and ease of use ” category
for U11 satisfied the ISO guidelines up
to 63%.
The following suggestions are made by 3. REFERENCES

multiple evaluators:
x It is suggested to developer and [1] Hasan, L. (2012). Evaluating the

designer when they design and usability of nine Jordanian university
develop websites, they must websites. Communications and
follow ISO guidelines for best Information Technology (ICCIT), 2012
usability. International Conference on, IEEE.
x It is suggested to university
authorities When they Improve or [2]http://www.iso.org/iso/iso_cata
develop universities’ websites, logue/catalogue_tc/catalogue_deta
il.htm?csnumber=37031
they must keep the importance of
usability in their mind.
x It is suggested to software [3] Adepoju, S. and I. Shehu (2014).
Requirement engineers that Usability evaluation of academic websites
during the collection of using automated tools. User Science and
requirements, they should tell Engineering (i-USEr), 2014 3rd
International Conference on, IEEE
about the usability and its cost to
their customer.
Page 230
[4] Schmettow, M. (2012). "Sample size

in usability studies." Communications of [13]http://www.nngroup.com/articles/u
the ACM 55(4): 64-70 sability-101-introduction-to-usability/
[5] Alotaibi, M. B. (2013). Assessing the

Usability of University Websites in Saudi [14] Saeed, S., et al. (2013). "Role of
Arabia: A Heuristic Evaluation Approach. usability in e-government and e-
Information Technology: New commerce portals: An empirical study of
Generations (ITNG), 2013 Tenth pakistan." Life Science Journal 10(1): 8-
International Conference on, IEEE. 13.
[15] Saeed, S. and A. Amjad (2013).

[6] Walji, M. F., et al. (2014). "Are three "Understanding usability issues of
methods better than one? A comparative Pakistani university websites." Life
assessment of usability evaluation Science Journal 10(6s): 479-482.
methods in an EHR." International journal
of medical informatics 83(5): 361-367. [16] Fernandez, A., et al. (2011).
"Usability evaluation methods for the
web: A systematic mapping study."
[7]http://evaluationtoolbox.net.au/index
Information and Software Technology
.php?option=com_content&view=article&i
53(8): 789-817.
d=58&Itemid=154
[17] Matera, M., et al. (2006). Web
[8] Gul, H. and M. Saqib (2015). usability: Principles and evaluation
"Usability Evaluation of an Educational methods. Web engineering, Springer:
Website in Saudi Arabia." VAWKUM 143-180.
Transactions on Computer Sciences 8(2):
1-9. [18] Mustafa, S. H. and L. F. Al-Zoua’bi
(2008). Usability of the Academic
[9] Hornbæk, K. (2006). "Current Websites of Jordan's Universities An
practice in measuring usability: Evaluation Study. Proceedings of the 9th
Challenges to usability studies and International Arab Conference for
research." International journal of Information Technology.
human-computer studies 64(2): 79-102.
[19] García, E., et al. (2012).
Semiautomatic Evaluation of Websites
[10] Fernandez, A., et al. (2013). Usability. Fifth International Conference
"Empirical validation of a usability on Advances in Computer-Human
inspection method for model-driven Web Interactions ACHI, Citeseer.
development." Journal of Systems and
Software 86(1): 161-186.
[11] Lee, S. and R. J. Koubek (2010).

"The effects of usability and web design
attributes on user preference for e-
commerce web sites." Computers in
Industry 61(4): 329-341.
[12] Zahran, D. I., et al. (2014). "A

comparative approach to web evaluation
and website evaluation methods."
International Journal of Public
Information Systems 10(1).
Page 231
MANAGEMENT
SCIENCES
Index tracker Funds- An opportunity for retail investors

Ahmed A. Zaidi,
Preston University
ahmed.zaidi.cma@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
Since the advocacy of Market efficiency, there have been numerous attempts to test
market efficiency. One of the prominent ones is through investigation of the
performance of actively managed mutual funds compared to index tracker funds. If the
latter are able to beat the index-tracker funds- a proxy for overall market performance,
then equity markets can be assumed to inefficient. If index- tracker funds do outperform
the actively managed funds, then it seeks to reason that retail investors should invest in
index tracker funds which are inexpensive for the retail investor
Keywords: Market efficiency, index-tracker funds, investments, retail investor
1. INTRODUCTION these two types of mutual funds by
The term retail investor is used to conducting a review of existing literature
differentiate individuals from institutions with special reference to Pakistan
investing on their own account.
Mutual Funds are used by retail investors

2. INDEX-TRACKER FUNDS VS
to hold a diverse portfolio of assets with
ACTIVELY MANAGED FUNDS
moderately small amount of savings. In
Actively managed funds are
the category of equity mutual funds, the
managed by fund managers who
distinct sub-types actively managed funds
seek to purchase undervalued
and index tracker funds. This study will
stocks and make a gain by selling
seek to compare the performance of
them on price appreciation. Thus
Page 233
the aim of the fund managers is to index to change. As the index
beat the market on a consistent fund manager tries to rebalance
basis to achieve this aim not only index fund, he might find that the
will he try to forecast a target share is costlier due to
price of the stock but also seek to speculators front running i.e.
estimate the highs and lows of the purchasing and selling shares
equity market to increase the before purchase or sale by index
fund return by buying on market fund manager.
lows and selling on market highs.
Index tracker funds form part of 2.1 Strategy
a strategy of passive investing When investing in mutual funds a
seek to imitate the performance retail investor needs to have a
off a particular index by investing strategy according to his/her risk
proportionately n the stocks which appetite and income needs to
compose the index. However, have a strategy according to
perfect imitation of the index is his/her income needs. This
not possible. The lag between the strategy can vary from growth
return of the index and that of strategy for retirement funds to
the fund is called the tracking bond funds for regular income.
error. This error is usually Accordingly for index tracker
between 5-38 bps (Mcgrath [1]). funds, the investor needs to pick a
These errors arise due to inflows suitable index which is aligned to
and outflows and rebalancing of his/her strategy.
the fund as index is rebalanced. 2.2 Fees
The prices of shares rise and fall, For actively managed funds, the
causing the market capitalization annual fees is between 1.4% and 3.5%
and hence the weights of the 1% Mcgrath [1]. Moreover there
Page 234
maybe front –end or back-end loads prices (Malkiel [3]). This makes both
i.e. funds are reduced by a certain technical and fundamental analyses
percentage at the time they are worthless. Therefore securities prices
purchased or redeemed. exhibit a random walk i.e. an
unpredictable path with zero auto
2.3 Turnover correlations. Thus it is impossible for an
Another advantage of index fund over investor to earn an above average return
actively managed fund is that without assuming an above average risk.
securities are bought and sold less Hence if an actively run fund manager
frequently. Thus less capital gains tax has been able to generate above average
is charged on the capital gain earned. return, he is likely to be beaten by the
At the same time less brokerage market in the future. This hypothesis led
commissions are charged on sale and Burton Malkiel, the most passionate
purchase. As cited by Bogle [2]the advocate of EMH to anecdotally remark
cumulative return from actively that an actively managed fund manager is
managed funds as compared to 87% of likely to be beaten by a chimpanzeeo
the cumulative return index funds. throwing darts at the pages of Wall
Besides these obvious advantages for Street Journal [Malkiel (4)].
index fund, this study would peruse

However EMH has not been universally by
the financial theory to conclude
the entire finance academic community.
whether financial theory supports
The leading criticism has come from
investment in index funds or actively
Fama [5] who has found that security
managed funds.
prices do not exhibit zero autocorrelation
3. EFFICIENT MARKET HYPOTHESIS
i.e. they follow a non-random walk.
Efficient Market Hypothesis (EMH) posits
However profiting from such
that securities market incorporate any
autocorrelations has not been not been
relevant information immediately in
possible (Malkiel [3]). Such
Page 235
autocorrelations and other patterns such managed funds as a zero sum
as the January and day of the week game. The outperformance of
effect , as Malkiel [3] has pointed out do some participants is matched by
not have inter-period dependability . the underperformance of some
Furthermore the transaction cost other funds. Hence all funds can
involved, make them economically never outperform in what is called
unfeasible given the transaction costs. “the arithmetic of active
There are several other behavioral management” by Sharpe [7].
anomalies of such as bandwagon effect, 5. EMPIRICAL EVIDENCE
underreaction to new information, Even though existing financial
market manipulation in emerging markets theory is broadly in favor of index
etc. The bandwagon effect happens when funds. However we need to check
investors tend to buy those stocks which whether this is also true in the
majoritof investors are buying or selling. empirical studies that have sought
Asset bubbles are formed when prices are to test this by answering three
irrationally high for an extended period key questions
of time. However despite these
inefficiencies, Shleifer [6] has pointed 1. Is the outperformance off actively
out that it is not possible to bring about managed funds persistent?
rational prices given the noise trader 2. Is the outperformance due to skill
risk. Noise trader risk is the risk that or chance?
investors trading irrationally would push 3. Is the prediction of future
asset values at irrational levels for an persistence of outperformance
extended period of time. possible?
4. ZERO SUM GAME
Malkiel [3] terms temporary 5.1 Consistently beating the market
outperformance of actively
Page 236
The first study to be conducted to check during 1970s to 1990s period. This was
the outperformance persistence was even though there was survivorship bias.
conducted by Jensen [8] using 20 year
post World War II data. He used a good

5.2 Survivorship bias
measure of abnormal risk adjusted return
Survivorship bias is a phenomenon
called the Jensen’s alpha.
whereby the failing funds exclusion from
𝛼𝑗 = 𝑅𝑝 − [𝑅𝑓 + 𝛽𝑃 �𝑅𝑀 − 𝑅𝑓 �]
performance studies tend to skew the
His findings that most mutual funds’
performance of the remaining surviving
alpha were negatively skewed, led him to
funds (Malkiel [3]).
conclude that most actively managed
The main reasons for the
mutual funds underperformed the index.
underperformance of actively managed
Most studies since have corroborated this
funds are the high turnover and higher
statement e.g. Carhart [9], Cuthbertson
expense ratios (Elton et al [12], Bogle [2]
et al [10], Fama & French [11].
and Carhart [9].
Cuthbertson et al [10] further that the
outperformance persistence was seldom

5.3 Star Funds
and there persistence in
Some actively managed funds have stood
underperformance. Carhart [9] in his
out by consistent outperformance over a
landmark study found only 1 year
significantly long period of time to
outperformance persistence in actively
attribute it to chance alone. A specific
managed funds. Makiel [3] testing
example has been the Fidelity
outperformance over a longer time
investments’ Magellan Fund. Magellan
period found no outperformance. His
Fund outperformed the S&P500 index in
research demonstrated that those funds
11 out of 13 years by an average of
which outperformed in a certain decade
10.5%.
underperformed in the next decade
Page 237
5.4 Outperformance due to skill or charged by the actively managed AKD
chance Opportunity Fund (AKDOF). AKDOF,
If outperformance of the actively initially claiming to follow the KSE 100
managed fund can be attributed stock index with 96% accuracy, has now come
selection skills of manager, it would be down to 88%.
sensible to select a skilled fund manager.

The other index tracker fund is the KSE
However this stock picking ability is rare.
Meezan Islamic Fund. It charges
In both US & UK only 10-15% of equity
management fees of 1% with a front end
fund showed stock selection skill.
load of 1%.
However the question remains whether
There has been a dearth of studies on
such skill is identifiable in a clear &
index tracker funds in Pakistan, one
unambiguous manner.
obvious reason being their recent
5.5 . Predicting future
introduction. However one study in
performance persistence
particularly Afza and Rauf [14] concluded
A number of studies in the U.S. including that mutual funds persist with their
Carhart [9] and Cuthbertson et al [10] performance due to the stock selection
have concluded that it is not possible to skills of the fund managers.
choose outperforming funds except with
a less than 12 months time horizon and

7. CONCLUSION
frequent portfolio rebalancing.
Clearly in the light of this preponderance
6. INDEX FUNDS IN PAKISTAN
of theoretical and empirical evidence,
Index tracker funds in Pakistan have a
retail investors should opt for index-
short history. AKD index tracker fund,
tracker funds with their lower charges
launched in October 2005, was the first
and turnover. Stock market efficiency
such fund in the market. Its management
seems to preclude the ability of an
fees of 0.75% is lower than 2% fees
actively managed fund to consistently
Page 238
achieve abnormal risk adjusted returns. [8] Jensen, M.C. 1968. The
Performance of Mutual Funds in
However the lack of substantial the Period 1945-1964, The Journal
of Finance, 23 (2), pp 389-416
investments in Index funds in Pakistan is
[9] Carhart, M.M. 1997. On
Persistence in Mutual Fund
due to the lack of information among
Performance, The Journal of
Finance, 52 (1), pp 57-82
retail investors in Pakistan as well as low
[10] Cuthbertson, K., Nitzsche, D.
number of Index tracker funds in the and O’Sullivan, N. 2008. Mutual
Fund Performance: Skill or Luck?,
market. Journal of Emprirical Finance,
15(4), pp 613-634
[11] Fama, E.F. and French, K.R.
2010. Luck Versus Skill in the
cross-section of Mutual Fund
REFERENCES Returns, The Journal of Finance,
65 (5), pp 1915-1947.
[12] Elton, E.J., Gruber, M.J., Das,
[1] Mcgrath, K. 2014. The
S., and Hlavka, M. 1993,
performance of funds, Coventry
Efficiency with Costly
University, Coventry.
Information: A reinterpretation of
[2] Bogle, J.C. 2002. An Index Fund evidence from Managed
Fundamentalist, The Journal of Portfolios, Review of Financial
Portfolio Management, 28 (3), pp Studies, 6 (1),pp 1-22
31-38.
[13] Harlow, W.V. and Brown, K. C.
[3] Malkiel, B.J. 2003. The Efficiebnt 2006, The Right Answert to the
Market Hypothesis and it critics, Wrong Question: Identifying
Journal of Economic Perspectives, Superior Active Portfolio
pp 59-82. Managament, Journal of
[4] Malkiel, B.J.2007. A Random Investment Management, 4(4), 15
Walk down Wall Street, Including [14] Afza, T. and Rauf, A. 2009,
a lifecycle guide to personal Performance Evaluation of
investing, 9th Edition, W.W.
P P
Pakistani Mutual Funds, Pakistan
Norton & Co. Economic and Social Review, 199-
214
[5] Fama, E.F. 1998. Market

Efficiency, Long- Term Returns,
and Behavioral Finance, Journal
of Financial Economics, 49 (3),
283-306.
[6] Shleifer, A. 2000. Inefficient
Markets: An Introduction to
Behavioral Finance, 1st Edition,
OUP Oxford.
[7] Sharpe, W.F. 1991. The
Arithmetic of Active Management,
Financial Analysts Journal, 47(1),
pp 7-9
Page 239
RESEARCH TITLE
Role of performance appraisal in public sector organizations and its linkages with
employee’s motivation, a case study of government schools of Wah and Taxila City
Sami Waseem Qureshi1, Qurrat-Ul-Ain Butt1, Sammia Tasleem2, Muhammad Hamza Shahab3
P P P P P P P
1
P MBA Scholar Management Sciences
P
University of Wah
samiwaseemqureshi@gmail.com
3TU U3T
qurratulainbutt2016@gmail.com
3TU U3T
2
MPhil Scholar (IAS) P P
sammiatasleem20@gmail.com
3TU U3T
3
Lecturer, University of Wah
P P
hamza.shahab@uow.edu.pk3TU U3T
Abstract
The purpose associated with the study is to explore and analyze the role of performance
appraisal in Public Sector organizations and its linkages with Employee’s Motivation. In
public sector of Pakistan, most of the public organizations are not able to properly deliver
the performance with efficiency and also results in low performance of employees. Here,
the basic question is whether the Performance Management System of public sector is able
enough to accurately measure the performance of employees that ultimately affects the
overall performance of organization? This research will be conduct to answer the above
given issue, for this reason employees of Government School of Wah city has selected. Non
probability sampling strategy will be used in the research study and in non-probability
sampling especially convenience sampling will be used. Qualitative study will be used to
collect the data from officers of top management and subordinates in order to check their
level of motivation after appraisals. This is a cross sectional study, about two weeks will
be spend to collect the data from both officers of top management and their subordinates.
Qualitative data will be collected through structured interviewing questions from 8-10
employees. Thematic interpretative analysis will be used to analyze the qualitative data.
Keywords: Performance Appraisal, Public Sector, Employee’s Motivation.
OVERVIEW question which refers to employee’s

motivation when performance is
Performance appraisal, being an
measured accurately, properly and
important component of effective
rewarded accordingly. Performance when
performance; is it followed properly by
measured and rewarded properly and
public sector? This is an important
equally, it improves the motivation of
Page 240
employees which overall improves the This paper is written with an objective of
performance of organization and vice providing accurate findings on
versa. This factor is mostly not performance measurement of public
noticeable in public sector. A minister of sector referring to Schools of Wah City
Planning, development and reform, Mr. and Taxila and to give suggestive
Ahsan Iqbal said, measures to the education department of
these institutions.
“Performance evaluation
mechanism put in place in public sector LITERATURE REVIEW
organization obsolete and outdated and
The practical implementation of
believed that this system has become
research remains with a gap.
redundant because the performance is
Performance management is a process
evaluated on whims and wishes rather
that continues in a cycle. It starts from
than work”
prerequisites, planning of performance,
Source: Business recorder June 02, 2015 execution of performance, measurement
of performance, performance review
In public sector, mostly an followed by rewards and renewal of
effective performance appraisal process performance. The start of performance
is not observed that become one of the management system is from having the
main reasons of popularity and knowledge about organization, its vision
penetration of private sector. mission and goals then it turns towards
the agreed performance level set
This research refers to appraisal between employer and employee. Then
systems of public schools of Wah City and employee put in his efforts to meet the
Taxila. This paper shows the link desired level of outcome. Performance is
between performance appraisal systems then being monitored and evaluated on
with employee motivation in public whose basis rewards are being decided or
sector. Proper strategic performance the process moves towards renewal or re-
appraisal plays a key role in planning the contracting that is setting the plans again
tasks and getting the desired output by based on gained results. However
the performance performed by motivated difference and distance is being often
staff. If there is no sound performance noticed in knowledge and practical that
appraisal system, this result in low is in correct and damages the actual
motivational level of employees desired performance. Managers and
resultantly affecting overall performance decision makers often ignore the entire
of organization? researches done while practical
implications (Aguinis, H. & Pierce, C.A,
OBJECTIVES
2008).
This research paper aims to
contribute towards the society and According to Kuhlmann (2010),
academics by providing some knowledge performance measurement in public
in the field of performance management sector is applied on two grounds. First is
that will be our step to support accurate at organizational level and second is at
and proper application of performance individual level. Measurement of
appraisal system in public sector. Also organizational performance refers to
this research will be a milestone towards fulfillment of desired organizational
me in accomplishment and achievement. targets. Plus consumption of input in
Page 241
terms of targeted output. While employee’s motivation while some take is

individual performance measurement as mare wastage of resource and time.
means performance evaluation of an
employee individually. Kim (2003), says Mainly performance appraisal refers to
that organizations uses traditional the link between reward and effort of
methods of performance appraisals that employee and increment in employee’s
indicated towards the performance or motivation, yet it possesses many other
the level of effort an employee has put factors in itself. It not only determines
in. the salary or wage ratio but also it
identifies the need of training and
Many studies have shown that in public development plus it increases the
sector performance appraisal takes a lot motivational level of employee that
of time then is required and also public resultantly betters the overall
sector organizations do not like to spend performance of organization (Spriegel,
enough time and money on training of and Mumma, 1961).
managers or supervisors on how to
conduct the performance appraisal Performance appraisal must be a need of
process. This is a general perception organization as well as of individual and
about public sector organizations. It is it must follow an approach that is
also noticeable that the findings of humanistic rather than purely
performance appraisal that must be quantitative or mechanistic. To only
followed by not only high ratings but also measure the quantitative results
monetary benefits but these often face sometimes do not show accurate results
restrictions from regulations, supervisor in assessing effort put in by an employee
or by other employees in public sector. (McGregor, 1966).
Performance appraisal system to be Taft (1971), discusses the importance of
followed properly needs support form top effectively using performance appraisal
management and government (Stearns, process. He argues that performance
G. K, & Whelan, R. K, 1991). appraisal result’s accuracy depends on
Murphy and Cleveland (1995), states the how the rater is motivated to measure
importance of contextual factors in the employee’s performance according to
measuring the performance like all elements of job.
organizational complexity, coordination, A study depicts out three main elements
culture, values and general economic and on which success of performance
political factors that influence appraisal process depends, these are
performance. rater’s motivation, rater’s ability and
Singh, P, Maggu, A. & Warrior, S. K. availability of appropriate appraisal
(1981), discusses in their study that process to be followed (Decotis, 1978).
performance appraisal is a key factor Labovitz (1972), find a strong link
that creates a justice by linking between employee motivation and
employee’s efforts with rewards, if done performance appraisal. He states that if
properly. Different organizations possess performance appraisal are in accurate or
different views regarding performance are biased, they affect negatively the
appraisal. Some take it as a major motivational level of employee and his
concern towards achieving the responsibility towards fulfilling job
organizational goals by enhancing the responsibilities. In order to avoid such
Page 242
problem Lawler (1967), preferred an It is clearly observed in public sector

appraisal approach that is multi-rated organizations that performance
rather than uni-rated. It tends to provide measurement is not done accurately and
more accurate and fair results. Whitla & even if it is done, the findings are then
Tirrell (1945), however states a point not treated appropriately. A good
that is against the opinion of Lawler. performance is not often appreciated
They state that immediate supervisor’s with equal reward and an average
rating is best judgment of performance of performance is not taken towards
an employee. training and development program. This
is because public sector organization’s
Performance appraisal in public sector managers or supervisors do not recognize
has emerged with time. At initial stage of the importance of performance appraisal
acceptance of this concept, performance plus its long lasting effects.
was only measured by quantitative
approach that is in terms of money but In our research we are going to study the
gradually with time it appeared that performance appraisal process and its
there are many other factors that need effect on employee’s motivation in public
to be addressed during appraisal. Two sector organization specifically schools of
important things that need to be sort out Taxila and Wah City.
in performance appraisal of public sector
are what to be measured? And how the RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
findings must be treated? (Boland, T. & Wah city and Taxila is totaling a
Fowler, A. 2000). population of 50 plus schools. In each
school 25 to 30 teachers’ approx are
From all such studies done, it can be
employed. The sampling technique that
concluded that performance appraisal in
we used in our research is convenience
public sector has emerged less time ago
sampling that is interviewing the
and gradually its importance needs no
teachers that were available to save cost
arguments. Performance appraisal
and time. Our target was schools of
generally is a process that has long
Taxila and Wah city. The questions that
lasting and long term effects on
we asked from teachers in natural
organization as well as on individual.
environment were:
When this process is followed properly it
1. On which basis your performance
increases employee motivation and
is measured?
involvement towards his or her job. He
2. Performance should be measured
tries to put in more efforts as he know
yearly or twice a year? Are you
that his efforts are not been taken for
satisfied with current system of
granted or no one else can take credit on
performance management in your
his behalf. On the other hand it also
school?
accelerates the target achievement
3. Are you provided with the
process of organization by having
feedback on measurement of your
motivated staff. If this process is not
performance? If yes then is it only
been taken seriously and treated as mare
by the reward in the form of
wastage of time and money then it has
increment or it is given personally
negative effects on performance of
in form of appreciation note? If no
individual as well as of organization
then do you think you must be
comparatively.
provided with a feedback?
Page 243
4. Does your appraisal system follow Majority people say performance should
modern techniques? be measure twice in year.
5. Do you think appraisal system that
your school is following brings a Some people are satisfied because they
change in each faculty member think that our caliber or command is
like appreciation or depreciation measure easily but majority people say
makes performance of faculty performance should be measure many
members better? times in year because the inspection
6. Are quality management system team member checked the teacher
reviewed regularly? performance through student
7. Do you want the appraisal system achievements. Our educational system is
of your school to improve? not good as compared to Europeans &
8. Feel free to write any suggestions American’s system.
regarding appraisal system. 3. Are you provided with the
feedback on measurement of
FINDINGS
your performance? If yes then is
Collected data was analyzed with the it only by the reward in the form
help of thematic interpretive analysis. of increment or it is given
Themes are mentioned below: personally in form of
appreciation note? If no then do
1. On which basis your
you think you must be provided
performance is measured?
with a feedback?
Teachers reported that our performance
No reward are given in the form of
is measured on the basics of
increment or not it is given personally in
• Annul result or GPA’s of student the form of appreciation note from
• Student achievements higher management .appreciation or
• Lab assessments & assignment feedback must be provided to the
teacher’s because it will help a teacher
But majority of them stated that their to grow professionally to overcome his
performance is measured on the basis of her deficiency
Annual confidential report (ACR) as Mrs.
Tehseen Akhtar said: 4. Does your appraisal system
follow modern techniques?
“Our performance is measured on the
basis of Annual confidential report which Mostly people says yes, they use modern
is maintained by the results we techniques but some people also says no
generate” because our appraisal system has some
drawbacks. There are some factors like
impose dress coat, not fully equipped
labs, appearance of class is not well, the
major drawback is yearly changing of
2. Performance should be
syllabus pattern, teacher are also not
measured yearly or twice a year?
able to understand of that syllabus in
Are you satisfied with current
such a short time. When teacher
system of performance
understand that course or syllabus the
measurement in your school?
higher management again totally change
or replace the new course or syllabus
Page 244
.Change of grading system is not a is like ladder or builder of the

solution of problem. nation
• When teacher are frustrated the
5. Do you think appraisal system whole nation will be disturb.
that your school is following
• If you want to improve the
brings a change in each faculty
performance of the facility the
member like appreciation or
appreciation or depreciation
depreciation make performance
should be given from top to
of faculty member better?
bottom without any nepotism.
All of them say yes because the
CONCLUSION
appreciation or depreciation is necessary
for the performance of the individual .it Conclusion is that we pulled out from this
make the performance of facility member paper is that performance appraisal is
better. not appropriately being followed by the
government sector schools. This is
6. Are Quality assessment system is becoming one of the reasons of
reviewed regularly? popularity of privatization. As reward or
further need of training in job depends
Mostly people say yes over quality
on how well your performance is being
assessment must be reviewed regularly.
measured.
There must be new thinks add to the
In our findings we have noticed that
assessment system for better
mostly in government schools
performance.
performance is measured by ACRs. These
7. Do you want the appraisal ACRs are maintained on the basis of
system of your school to results mostly which is not an appropriate
improve? method of judging performance of an
employ as it strictly is based on
Nothing is prefect in this world except quantitative data not qualitative that is
Muhammad (PUBH).All of them say yes, the effort or emotions or I must say the
we want to improve the appraisal system hidden factors that do not come out in
of our schools with the help of advance IT quantity, the employee put in. So, I will
methods. conclude it as low motivational level of
employees due to improper follow of
8. Feel free to write any suggestion
performance appraisal in government
regarding appraisal system?
sector. It needs to be improved on the
Every person have different point of view modern techniques of performance
few of them are there appraisal and management of schools
needs to be addressed and trained
• Appreciation reward should in the regarding it.
form of awards or certificates
with some cash. Limitations and future research
• The appraisal system is based on
annual result then administration The area that we selected to
should realize ground realties. conduct our research is Wah city and
• Teacher must be tension free Taxila. We conducted the data collection
process via schools of these two cities
from paper works because teacher
only and came to know the above
Page 245
mentioned findings. These results may Public administration review,

not be generalized to all schools because 62(6), 712-725
the schools that we selected for
interview conduction were government [6] Lacho, K. J. (2002) Stearns, G.
schools only in locality of Wah city and K. & Whelan. R. K. (1991).
Taxila. Different areas, however, can Performance appraisal in local
produce different results. government: A current update.
Public productivity & management
References review, 14(3), 281-296
[1] Aguinis, H .& Pierce .C.A
.(2008). Enhancing the relevance
of organizational behavior by [7] Singh, P. Maggu, A. & Warrior. S.
embracing performance K. (1981). Performance appraisal
management research. Journal of systems: A critical analysis. Indian
organizational behavior, 29(1), journal of industrial relations.
139-145 16(3), 315-343
[8] Smith, P. C. & Goddard. M.

[2] Boland, T. & Fowler. A. (2000). (2002). Performance management
A systems perspective of and operational research: A
performance management in marriage made in heaven? The
public sector organizations. journal of operational research
International journal of public society, 53(3), 247-255
sector management, 13(5), 417-
446
[9] Wholey, J. S. (1999).
Performance based management:
responding to the challenges.
[3] Bowman, J. S. (1994). At last, an Pubic productivity & management
alternative o performance review, 22(3), 288-307
appraisal:total quality
management. Public [10] Willem, A. & Buelens. M.
administration review, 54(2), 129- (2007). Knowledge sharing in
136 public sector organizations: the
effect of organizational
[4] Capezio, D. (1983). Perofmance characteristics on
appraisal in public sector: key to interdepartmental knowledge
effective supervision, George L. sharing. Journal of public
Morrisey. Public productivity administration research and
review 7(4), 396-397 theory: J-PART, 17(4), 581-606
[5] Heinrich, C. J. (2002).

Outcomes-based performance
management in the public sector:
implications for general
accountability and effectiveness.
Page 246
An Empirical Investigation of Relationship between Occupational Health and Safety

Measures and Competitive Performance of Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs)
Miskeen Ali Gopang*1, Murlidhar Nebhwani2, Hussain Bux Marri2, Adnan Pitafi3,
P P P P P P P P
Majid Ali Wassan4, Rano Khan Wassan5 P P P P
1
P PhD Research Scholar, 2Professor, Department of Industrial Engineering and Management,
P P P

miskeen.gopang@gmail.com, murlidhar_rs@hotmail.com,
35TU U35T 35TU U35T
hussain.marri@yahoo.co.uk 35TU U35T
3
P PhD Research Scholar, Department of Management Sciences and Engineering,
P
University of Science and Technology, Hefei -230026- Anhui, China

adnanpitafi@gmail.com 35TU
4
Senior Lecturer, Department of Mechanical Engineering,
P P
Mehran University of Engineering and Technology, Shaheed Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto Campus,
Khairpur Mir’s -66020- Sindh, Pakistan
majidwassan01@gmail.com 35TU
5
Lecturer, Department of Industrial Engineering and Management,
P P
Dawood University of Engineering and Technology, Karachi -74800- Sindh, Pakistan

rkwassan@gmail.com 35TU U35T
ABSTRACT
Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs) play significant role to boost economy and solve
livelihood issues such as social security and employment. Meanwhile, SMEs should
cognizant of how to remain in competitive markets, as globalization has made difficult to
do business. Implementation of Occupational Health and Safety Measures (OHSMs) can be
one of the strategies which can enable SMEs to cope with this issue. Therefore, an
empirical study was carried out to explore the relationship between OHSMs and
competitive performance (CP) of SMEs. Data was collected from 35 SMEs located at SITE
Kotri Sindh Pakistan, by means of self-administered questionnaire. Prior to data analysis
reliability of data was checked through cronbach’s alpha coefficient. After that Pearson
correlation was used to understand the association of dependent (CP) with independent
(OHSMs) variables. Furthermore, simple regression was used to check the extent of
variance in dependent variable. Results for correlation (R = 0.69) and regression analysis
(R square = 0.48) revealed that there was positive correlation between OHSMs and CP of
SMEs and 48% variance in the CP of SMEs was explained by OHSMs respectively, which were
significant as ρ-value (0.000) was less than 0.05. These results indicate that SMEs can
improve their competitive performance with the implementation of OHSMs.
Keywords: OHS Measures, SMEs, Competitive performance, Pakistan
*Corresponding Author:
Miskeen Ali Gopang (PhD Research Scholar)

Department of Industrial Engineering and Management,
E-mail: miskeen.gopang@gmail.com Cell No: +92-333-3000080
35TU U35T
Page 247
1. INTRODUCTION:
24T automotive industries of Malaysia. Results
of this study revealed that there was
Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs) play positive relationship of OSHA practices
significant role in markets to boost with both safety and financial
economy to overcome livelihood issues performance [7].
such as social security and employment
[1, 2 and 3]. Meanwhile, SMEs should Similarly, another study was carried out
cognizant of how to remain in with an aim to know the link between
competitive markets as globalization has reduced health and safety risks and
made difficult to do business. competitive performance. It was
witnessed that companies which focus on
Implementation of Occupational Health well-being and safety of their workers
and Safety Measures (OHSMs) can be one yielded more to the investors.
of the strategies which can enable SMEs Meanwhile, safely and health culture
to cope with this issue. Initiatives for the resulted in competitive advantage to the
improvement of occupational health and companies’ in marketplace [8].
safety (OHS) will help SMEs to gain
competitive advantage [4]. Effective Moreover, another study was carried out
health and safety practices critically in Australia to know that whether
reduces the costs of poor business competitive advantage could be achieved
practices and improves long term with the compliance of safety. 25
sustainability of communities, regions, interviews were conducted from owners-
workplaces and economy and enhance managers of the small firms. It was
organization competitive ability [5]. reported that compliance of safety was
beneficial to do business. It also had
An empirical study was carried out to positive link with business outcomes [5].
understand the influence of OHS
awareness on the operational and In the same way, another study carried to
competitive capabilities of SMEs. It was test the hypothesis that whether
realized that good health and safety companies which have higher score on
(HSM) culture lowered the costs, health and safety for achieving corporate
enhanced reputation and/or image and health achievement award (CHAA) have
overall competitiveness of SMEs [4]. greater market performance? In results
this study provided evidence that healthy
Another empirical study was carried out and safe workers were positively
on 455 Spanish firms to explore the correlated with the performance of
relation between occupational safety organizations and enhanced their ability
management (OSM) and firm to yield greater to their shareholders [9].
performance: safety, competitive and
economic-financial. According to results In the context of above literature an
it was concluded that OSM and firm empirical study was carried out to
performance has significant positive explore the relationship between OHSMs
relationship between them [6]. and competitive performance (CP) of
SMEs in Pakistan’s perspective.
Likewise, another research study was
carried out to know the relationship of 2.
24T METHODOLOGY:
occupational safety and health
administration (OSHA) practices with the In order to achieve the objective of the
safety and financial performance of study, a questionnaire of Makori et al.,
Page 248
2013 [10], was used to collect the data 3.

24T 24T RESULTS:
24T
from 35 SMEs situated at one of the

industrial zone of Sindh Province of Prior to data analysis internal consistency
Pakistan known as SITE area Kotri as of scale was gauged.
shown in figure 1. Table 1: Reliability Analysis
No. of
Variable Alpha coefficient
items
OHSMs 10 0.70
CP 4 0.73
As shown in table 1 alpha co-efficient

Figure 1: Area of the study value for both dependent and
independent variables was 0.73 and 0.70
First of all data was entered into M.S respectively which explains that
excel and than transferred to SPSS reliability of data was good enough to be
software for analysis. Prior to analysis analyzed further as rule of thumb
reliability of the data was done by provided by George [11].
applying Cronbach’s alpha which gauges
Table 2: Demographics characteristics
the internal consistency or average of respondents
correlation of items in a survey. After
that analysis was done in two phases. In GENDER
Variable No
first phase descriptive statistics was used
Male 35
and in second phase Pearson correlation
Female 00
and simple regression was done to know EXPERIENCE IN YEARS
the relationship and variance among Less than 1 2
variables (dependent and independent). 1-2 4
Schematic of methodology is also shown 3-4 13
in figure 2. 5-6 3
7-8 8
9-10 3
DATA COLLECTION
MEASURES AND COMPETITIVE PERFORMANCE OF SMALL
More than 10 2
AN EMPIRICAL INVESTIGATION OF RELATIONSHIP
NATURE OF BUSINESS THEY BELONG

BETWEEN OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
(Self-administered
questionnaire)
Textile 17
AND MEDIUM ENTERPRISES (SMEs)
Pipe Manufacturing 4
DATA RELIABILTY Mechanical Works 5
ANALYSIS
Tobacco 4
LITERATURE
(Cronbach’s alpha
coefficient)
Civil Works 2
REVIEW Flour mills 3
OPERATIONAL PERIOD OF THE SMES IN
DATA ANALYSIS YEARS
11-20 13
i. Descriptive statistics
(frequency) 21-30 11
ii. Inferential statistics
(Pearson correlation
30-40 10
& More than 40 1
Simple regression )
After that descriptive statistics

Figure 2: Schematic of Research (frequency) was used. Respondents were
Methodology asked to report their demographics
Page 249
characteristics in the first part of the have to be conscious to cope with this
questionnaire. As shown in table 2 most issue. Among various strategies effective
of the respondents were male and implementation of occupational health
majority of them having more than 3 and safety measures can be one to gain
years’ experience. Majority of them competitive advantage in the
belong to the textile sector and those marketplace. This study was carried out
firms which are being operated for more with an aim to know the relationship
than 10 years. between occupational health and safety
measures and competitive performance
3.1
24T Relationship between of SMEs. It was revealed from statistical
occupational health and safety analysis of collected data that there was
measures and competitive moderate positive relationship between
performance: these variables and independent
variables were able to make 48% variance
In the second phase Pearson correlation among dependent variables. This reflects
and simple regression was applied to data that with the effective implementation
respectively. Table 3 shows the results of OHSMs competitive performance can
for correlation and regression when be increased. It is recommended to the
overall mean score of OHSMs variables government of Pakistan to formulate
(independent) were regressed against CP policies for effective implementation of
variables (dependent). Value for R=0.699, OHSMs. It is also recommended to the
reflects that there is moderate positive owners of SMEs that they should integrate
relationship between variables, which is this important parameter in the routine
significant as ρ=0.000<0.05. Further, operational activities to compete in the
value for R-square = 0.48 revealed that era of industrialization.
48% of variance can be achieved in the
dependent variables due to the 5. REFERENCES:
independent variables, which is also [1] Gopang, M.A. 2015. Impact of
significant as (ρ =0.000<0.05). safety management practices on the
performance of SMEs : An empirical
Table 3: Correlation and regression study at Kotri. M.E. Thesis,
analysis Department of Industirial
Enginerring and Management,
Model Summary Mehran University of Engineering
Model R R Adjusted R and Technology Jamshoro, Sindh,
Square Square Pakistan.
1 .699a .488 .473 [2] Marri, H.B., Nebhwani, M., and
a. Predictors: OHSMs (independent Sohag, R.A. 2011. Study of
variables) government support system in SMEs:
An empirical investigation, Mehran
b. CP (dependent variable) University Research journal of
ρ = 0.000<0.05. Engineering and Technology
(MURJET), 30(3), pp 435–446.
4.
24T 24T CONCLUSIONS:
24T [3] Nebhwani, M., Marri, H.B., and
Sohag, R.A. 2011. An Assessment of
Recent years doing business is very much Entrepreneurs’ Business Strategies
difficult due to globalization. towards SME Success, Mehran
Competition has been increased. SMEs University Research journal of
Page 250
Engineering and Technology the Bottom Line, Journal of

(MURJET), 30(3), pp 469–476. Occupational and Environmental
Medicine, 55(9), pp 993–1000.
[4] Diugwu, I. A. 2011. Re-Strategising
for Effective Health and Safety [10] Makori, E. M., Thuo, J.K., Kiongera,
46T
Standards in Small and Medium-Sized F.N., and Muchilwa, D. 2013.

46T
Enterprises, Open Journal of Safety Assessment of the impact of

Science and Technology, 01, pp 115– occupational health and safety
128. programmes on employee
productivity of manufacturing firms
[5] Mayson, S., Barrett, R., and Bahn, in western province, Kenya, Global
S. 2014. Competitive advantage Advanced Research Journal of
through safety compliance : smaller Educational Research and Reviews
firm responses to changes in the (GARJERR), 2(10), pp 190–195.
Australian occupational health and
safety regulatory context, In 28th [11] George, D., and Mallery, P. 2006.
Australian and New Zealand SPSS for Windows Step by Step:
Academy of Management Answers to Selected Exercises. A
Conference: Reshaping Management Simple Guide and Reference, 7th 1T 1T P P
for Impact, University of Edition, Allyn & Bacon.

Technology, Sydney, NSW, December
3-5.
[6] Fernández-Muñiz, B., Montes-

Peon, J.M., and Vazquez-Ordas,
C.J. 2009. Relation between
occupational safety management
and firm performance, Safety
Science, 47(7), pp 980–991.
[7] Desa, A.F.N.C., Habidin, N.F.,

Hibadullah, S.N., Fuzi, N.M., and
Zamri, F.I.M. 2013. Occupational
Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) Practices and OSHA
Performance in Malaysian
Automotive Industry, Jouranl of
Studies in Social Sciences, 4(1), pp
1-15.
[8] Fabius, R., Loeppke, R.R., Hohn,

T., Fabius, D., Eisenberg, B.,
Konicki, D.L., and Larson, P. 2016.
Tracking the Market Performance of
Companies That Integrate a Culture
of Health and Safety, Journal of
Occupational and Environmental
Medicine, 58(1), pp 3–8.
[9] Fabius, R., Thayer, R.D., Konicki,

D.L., Yarborough, C.M., Peterson,
K.W., Isaac, F., Loeppke, R.R.,
Eisenberg, B.S., and Dreger, M.
2013. The Link Between Workforce
Health and Safety and the Health of
Page 251
SOCIAL
SCIENCES
Impact of Work- Family Conflict Self Efficacy on Job Commitment, Job Satisfaction,
Life Satisfaction on Teachers of Special Children Institutes
Asrana Kousar1, Farah Rasheed2, 3Dr. Samina Rashid
1
Department of Education
University of Wah
Asranak74@yahoo.com
2
Department of Education,
University of Wah
Zilemaryum@gmail.com
3
Department of Psychology
University of Wah
Samina.rashid@uow.edu.pk
ABSTRACT
The present study was conducted to examine the impact of work- family conflict self
efficacy on job commitment, job satisfaction, and life satisfaction on teachers of special
children institutes. Purposive sampling technique was used to collect data from teacher
(N=73) of different private and government special Schools of Wah Cantt, Hassan Abdal,
Taxila and Islamabad. Work- family conflict self efficacy scale, job commitment scale, job
satisfaction and life satisfaction scale were used for data collection. The result showed
the significant negative relationship between the work family conflict self efficacy and job
commitment, job satisfaction and life satisfaction of teachers.
Keywords: Work family Conflict, Self efficacy, Job commitment
1. INTRODUCTION: subsequent to only three to five years

(Hicks) [2]. whilst teachers suffering from
A good educational system is thought out deficiency of job satisfaction are
as the spine of an underdeveloped nation withdrawing or saying goodbye to the
in which the teacher is the axil around career to look for other service,
which the whole system of education (O’Donnell) [3].Contentment and
rotates. It is the excellence and incentive to employment are very vital in
potentiality of teachers which the lives of teachers for they create basic
determines the accomplishment of an rationale for functioning in life.
education system. Teachers being Approximately all teachers work in order
obligatory to the system are most to persuade their desires. They
significant part in the progress of a persistently work up for contentment.
civilization. Teaching is generally an
accountable job, extremely held In the recent history, research inquiring
responsible and technical, challenging, into the work and family matters has
scholarly, poignant, substantial, rigorous fascinated many researchers' interest,
and in exorable, (Sachs)[1].together with (Eby, Casper, Lockwood, Bordeaux &
the basic direct confrontation in Brinley) [4]). For most folks, work and
teaching ,teachers are occupied in a family are two vital mechanisms that
broad array of responsibilities. have to be grasped with complete heed.
In fact, juggling the connection between
Most of the teachers who just begin their work and family is one of the serious
career with passion and great hopes are issues for both executive experts and
having thoughts for altering the track intellectuals (Rothbard & Dumas) [5]).
Page 253
numerous causes that have a say to this dedication. People with this attitude,
existing observable fact such as; the raise intensify and maintain their hard work in
in dual-career family circle, workers are the face of disappointment. They rapidly
more and more occupying synchronized make progress after collapse and
work and family roles and workforce have setbacks. Such effectual stance produces
to deal with job-related stress (Aminah) personal triumph, reduces tension and
[6]). as a result, if the person has trouble lower helplessness to despair (Bandura)
in harmonizing among work and family, [13]). However, an instructor with small
clash may take place, which would as a self-efficacy avoids intricate
result show the way up to destructive responsibilities which he views as
results such as lesser job and life individual intimidation. Such teacher
satisfaction, elevated income intentions, generally has small aspirations and feeble
bigger common emotional twist greater pledge to the goals they have set for
somatic/physical symptoms, higher themselves in their preferred line of
despair and larger suffering exhaustion work.
(Allen, Herst, Bruck, & Sutton,[7]. Job commitment in an association
is augmented by self efficacy. If a
Work family conflict is referred to type of member of staff is found to be well-
inter-role inconsistency in which the job matched to him and others, this
demands are equally mismatched with contributes to intellectual and emotional
profession and family area by various contentment and tranquility of mind; it
regards (Greenhaus & Beutell) [8]). In the also promotes the strength of liability,
past, this theory was thought of as facile involvement and efficiency, and
by several researchers (Carlson, Kacmar eventually awareness of personal, and
& William) [9]). Nevertheless, belatedly cluster and executive goals.
it has been well thought-out bidirectional Allen and Meyer, [14],
in nature, in which job can hinder family documented organizational loyalty as a
and family can obstruct with job mental recognition and affection to a
(Greenhaus & Powel) [10]). Positively, work. They recognized three types of
clash may arise when anyone has to commitment – affective which is exciting
execute several roles (wife, mother, connection, recognition, and
homemaker and employee) that need participation of a worker to its
time, energy and loyalty (Aminah) [11]). association as well as its goal, normative,
Intended for the current study, the a sense of commitment towards the
reason of the work family conflict was organization and persistence, the
derivative of persona feature like self- readiness to hang about in an
efficacy whereas the effect of work organization for the reason that the
family conflict was centered on investment that the worker has which is
contentment results like work and family. unable to be transferred.
Educator self-efficacy is a crucial part The study by Rots et al, [15], established
and a valuable variable in didactic study that teaching commitment was
(Woolfolk & Hoy) [12]). Teacher efficacy completely and directly related to
is defined as a teacher’s opinion of teacher efficiency. Similarly, a positive
his/her own ability to bring about most relationship was established by Chan et
wanted outcomes from students’ al [16], between self efficacy and
commitment and knowledge, yet amid commitment of primary and secondary
those students who may be tricky or school teachers. A positive and
unenthusiastic. A well-built intellect of considerable correlation was established
effectiveness enhances individual between self efficacy and satisfaction
achievement and special happiness in a with job of teachers in junior high school
lot of ways. High assertion in by Caprara et al [17]. Positive
capabilities and effective attitude fosters association among self efficacy,
inherent concern and profound motivation, commitment and work
Page 254
performance was reported by Latham and 2.1 Research Design:

Pinder, [18].The study by Judg and Bono,
[19] found that self efficacy and A quantitative research design was
satisfaction with job were positively employed to study the impact of work
correlated. family conflict self efficacy on job
commitment, job satisfaction, life
It is important that organizations satisfaction of teachers of special
guarantee job satisfaction of their children institutes.
workforce. It would be detrimental for an
organization to permit its employees to 2.1.1 Objectives:
be dissatisfied with their work situation
before it expedites action. Teachers who ∑ To find out the impact of
are contented with their jobs have a high work family conflict self efficacy
level of professional competency. They on job commitment, job
feel capable in terms of their information satisfaction and life satisfaction of
of subject matter and their teaching teachers of special children
skills, and they feel protected about institutes.
classroom supervision. Effects of lack of
job satisfaction among teachers are 2.1.2 Hypotheses
numerous (Buckley, Schneider, Shang,
[20] 1. There is negative relationship
between work family conflict self
The demonstration of job satisfaction has efficacy and job commitment of
implications for the teacher as well as for teachers in special education
the educational system in which he or institutions.
she is working. Being a teacher,
especially a special education teacher 2. There is relationship between
requires deep tolerance and concern for work family conflict self efficacy
children with particular requirements. and life satisfaction among
The special education teacher helps teachers of special education.
students who are facing academic,
sensory and corporal challenges. Special 3. There is relationship between
children need special heed, work family conflict self -efficacy
consideration, resources, specially and job satisfaction among
planned teaching and program of study teachers of special children
that requires their extraordinary and/or, institutes.
exceptional needs. Teachers are being
2.1.3 Operational Definition of the
required more than ever to proceed as
studied Variables
social workforce, family figures and meet
the requirements of pupils with wider Work Family conflict. Work family
range of abilities (Lawrence) [21]. conflict is “the degree to which job
Previous researches were deficient in hamper with family tasks (e.g how does
finding the relationship between work your work hinder with your duties at
family conflict self efficacy and job home (Frone,Russall & Cooper)[22].
commitment, job satisfaction, life Self Efficacy. Self Efficacy is self-
satisfaction of teacher. Thus, this study evaluation of a person s’ insight of
tends to investigate work family conflict proficiency and ability in collecting
self efficacy as correlates of job definite responsibilities (Bandura) [23].
commitment, job satisfaction and life Job commitment. Job Commitment is
satisfaction of Special education referred to an effective reaction or
teachers. approach resulting from judgment of job
condition which relates or attaches the
individuals to the organization (Mottaz)
2. Methodology [24].
Page 255
Life Satisfaction. Life Satisfaction is

referred as an assessment done by the 2.1.6 Procedure/ Data Collection
individuals on the overall conditions of For collection of data, permission was
their life (MCGuinn & Mosher Ashley) taken by the heads of special children
[25]. schools. All the participants were
Job Satisfaction. Job Satisfaction is contacted in job hours. Contribution in
generally acknowledged as how happy an the study was voluntary. Respondent
individual is with his or her job and can were given assurance about the secrecy
be referred to thinking of individuals of their responses. Data was collected
about the nature of their profession from 73 teachers of special education
(Spectors) [26]. institutes. All the questionnaires were
administered by the researchers
2.1.4 Sample personally.
The population of the study was teachers
of special children institutions. Purposive 3.1 Results
sampling was selected to collect data
from sample of (N=73) teachers of special Table 1
children institutions including Nashemon S Varia Α M SD 1 2 3 4
college of Special Education Wah Cantt . bles
,Government Special Education centre #
Taxila, Hassan Abdaal, National special 1 WFSC .83 50.5 8.7 -- - - -
education centre for Mentally Retarded ES 7 1 - .28* .40 .23
Children Islamabad, National Institute of **
2 JCS .79 81.1 14. -- --- .29 .47
special education Islamabad. The
5 21 - * **
respondents belonged to different age
group and with different level of
3 LSC .72 25.0 5.6 -- --- --- .27
qualification and experience. 9 0 - `
2.1.5 Instruments 4 JSC .86 225. 21. -- --- --- ---

48 74 -
Work- family Conflict Self efficacy
scale. Work family conflict self efficacy *p<.05, **p< .01
of teachers was analyzed by the Work
family Conflict Self efficacy Scale Table 1 signifies the satisfactory internal
(Cinamon, [27]. The questionnaire consistencies of the scales ranging from
included 10 items with 7 point Likert .72 to .86. Pearson correlation indicates
Scale (1=strongly disagree, 2=Disagree, a significant negative correlation
3=slightly disagree, 4= Neutral, 5=slightly between work family conflict self
agree, 6=Agree, 7=strongly agree). efficacy and job commitment , life
Job Commitment scale. The scale satisfaction (r=-.28), p <.01, (r=-.40), p <
(Meyar et al.)[28] included 18 items by 7 .01 while the work family conflict self
point likert scale. Reliability of scale was efficacy and job satisfaction of special
determined by cronebach alpha .79. education teachers showed negative and
Life Satisfaction. The questionnaire non-significant results (r= -.23).
(Diener) [29] consisted of 5 items.7 point
likert scale was used for data collection.
Reliability of scale was found at .72. 4. DISCUSSION
Job Satisfaction scale. The Present study examined the
questionnaire (Smith, Kendall & Hulin) correlation between work family conflict
[30] included 6 sub scales consisting 89 self efficacy and Job commitment, Job
items with 4 point Likert scale (1= satisfaction, life satisfaction of teachers
strongly disagree, 2= Disagree somewhat, of special education. A sample of seventy
3= Agree somewhat, 4= strongly agree). three teachers from special schools was
Reliability of the scale was found .86. taken by using purposive sampling
Page 256
technique. Data was obtained by using at job and at home will demonstrate job
four scales. The psychometric properties satisfaction and true evaluation of their
of study variables indicated the scales to capabilities to systemize and perform
be reliable and valid. their courses of action that will increase
their job commitment and life
According to first hypothesis, the satisfaction.
present study found negative significant
relationship between work family conflict 5. Conclusion
self efficacy of teachers and their job Findings of the current study are highly
commitment. Findings of current study significant for the progress of teachers of
are in alliance with the previous research special education. Job satisfaction and
by Allinder,[31],reported that self- satisfaction with life of special education
efficacy of teachers and their job teachers really motivates the teachers to
satisfaction is significantly related. The play great role for the progress of special
significant negative correlation between children. Teachers, satisfied with their
work family conflict self efficacy and job jobs demonstrate great satisfaction in
commitment found in this study supports their life. Results of the study are
Rashid’s [32] study revealed that work decisive for the policy makers and
family conflict and organizational administrators of special education to
commitment have significant negative execute strategies to increase the level
correlated. of job commitment, job satisfaction, and
According to second hypothesis, life satisfaction of teacher working in
the study found negative correlation special education institutes. Findings of
between work family conflict self the study are also helpful to diminish
efficacy and satisfaction with life of the problems of teachers related to job
teachers in special institutes. As life and family responsibilities. Teachers
satisfaction increases, work family need to handle with strain and to be able
conflict decreases. Results of current to maintain their work family conflict and
study supported by the previous studies work life balance.
as conducted with teachers and
academicians also and revealed that work 5.1.1 Limitations
family conflict and life satisfaction have The current study was limited to a small
significant negative association. (Akin) sample of 73 teachers of special
[33]. education only; results can be
Third hypothesis stated relationship generalized by using a large sample. The
between work family conflict self present study was conducted in Hassan
efficacy and job satisfaction of teachers Abdaal, Taxila ,Wah Cantt ,Rawalpindi
and results revealed negative non- and Islamabad, it can be conducted all
significant relationship between work over Pakistan. Moreover, the current
family conflict self efficacy and Job study can be carried out as qualitative
satisfaction. studies; interviews and longitudinal study
The study supports the fact that etc. Future research work can be
special education teachers would be expanded with the moderation effect of
eager to help students’ who are facing other variables like culture, ethnicity,
intellectual, sensory and physical and social support, management of job
challenges. Work life balance and and home tasks by means of large
organizational commitment both are sample. The study targeted only teachers
important because, they are playing vital of Special education, so results cannot be
role in the organizations’ performance generalized to any other type of school.
and family well being. On the bases of Future research can be conducted to the
findings of the present study, it can be more representative sample of all type of
concluded that teachers of special institution.
education who are fully committed with
basic facilities of life, good atmosphere 5.1.2 Implications/ Suggestions
Page 257
Results of current study will on job performance. The Journal of

facilitate the readers in realizing the International Management Studies, 3 (8):
value of correlation between work family 176-180.
conflict self-efficacy and job
commitment, job satisfaction, and [7] Allen, E.A., Herst, D.E.L., Bruck,
satisfaction with life of special education C.S., & Sutton, M .(2000). Consequences
teachers. The study will help the policy associated with work-to-family conflict: A
makers and administrators of special review and agenda for future research.
education to consider the requirements Journal of Occupational Health
of teachers concerning job and family. Psychology, 5(2), 278-308.
Findings of the study will help out
in getting realization that how work [8] Greenhaus, J.H. & Beutell, N.J.
family conflict self efficacy affects the (1985). Sources of conflict between work
job commitment, job satisfaction level and family roles. The Academy of
among teachers of special education. Management Review, 10(1), 76-88.
Results of the current study will be
considered as guiding principle for the [9] Carlson, D.S., Kacmar, K.M. &
counselors in evaluating a person’s self William, L.J. (2000). Construction and
efficacy ideas regarding management of initial validation of a multidimensional
problems related to job and home. measure of work family conflict. Journal
of Vocational Behavior, 56, 249-276.
6. REFERENCES
[1] Sachs, J. (2003). Learning to be a [10] Greenhaus, J.H. & Powell, G.N.
teacher: Professionalism and activism, in (2006). When work and family are allies:
F. Crowther, Ed. A theory of work-family enrichment.
Academy of Management Review, 31(1),
[2] Hicks, P. (2003) .Teachers: feeling 72-92.
the heat, directions in education,
Australian Council for Educational [11] Aminah, A. (1997). Work-family
Leaders, 12(16). conflict and social support: A study of
female secretaries in Malaysia. Pertanika
[3] O’Donnell, B. (2001). Prospects for Journal of Social Science and Humanities,
the profession of teaching in Australia in 5(2): 93-101.
the new Millennium, Unicorn on-line
Refereed Article No. 08,Australian [12] Woolfolk, A.E., and Hoy,
College of Educators. W.K.(1990). Prospective teachers’ sense
of efficacy and beliefs about control.
[4] Eby, L.T., Casper, W.J., Journal of Educational Psychology 82:81-
Lockwood, A., Bordeaux, C. & Brinley, 89
A.(2005). Work and Family Research in
I/O/OB: Content analysis and review of [13] Bandura, A. (2001). Social
the literature (1980-2002). Journal of cognitive theory: an agentic perspective.
Vocational Behavior, 66, 124-197. Annual Review of Psychology 52, 1-26.
[5] Rothbard, N.P & Dumas, T.L. [14] Allen, N.J. and Meyer, J.P. (1990).
(2006). Research Perspectives: Managing The measurement and
the Work-Home Interface. In Jones, antecedents of affective,
Fiona, Burke, Ronald J and Westman, continuance and normative
Mina (Ed.) Work-Life Balance: A commitment to the organization
Psychological Perspective. Psychology Journal of Occupational
Press, New York.
Psychology, 63, 1–18.
[6] Aminah, A. (2008).Direct and
indirect effects of work-family conflict
Page 258
[15] Rots, I., Aelterman, A., Vlerick, [23] Bandura. (1997). Self-efficacy:
P., & Vermeulen, K. (2007). Teacher The exercise of control. New York:
education, graduates’ teaching Cambridge University Press.
commitment and entrance into the
teaching profession. Teaching and [24] Mottaz.C.J. (1988). Determinants
Teacher Education, 23, 543–556. of Organizational Commitment, Human
relations,41(6).
[16] Chan, W. Y., Lau, S., Nie, Y., Lim,
S., & Hogan, D. (2008). Organizational [25] McGuinn, K. K., & Mosher-Ashley,
and personal predictors of teacher P. M. (2000). Participation in
commitment: The mediating role of recreational activities and its effect on
teacher efficacy and identification with perception of life satisfaction in
school. American Educational Research residential settings. Activities,
Journal, 45, 597–633. Adaptation & Aging, 25, 77–87.
[17] Caprara, G. V., Barbaranelli, C., [26] Spector, P. E. (1997). Job

Steca, P., & Malone, P. S. (2006). satisfaction: Application, assessment,
Teachers’ self-efficacy beliefs as causes, and consequences. Thousand
determinants of job satisfaction and Oaks, CA: Sage.
students’ academic achievement: A study
at the school level. Journal of School [27] Cinamon, R. G., & Rich, Y. (2003).
Psychology, 44, 473–490. Work-family conflict among female
teachers. Teaching and teacher
[18] Latham, G. P., & Pinder, C. C.
education, 21 (4), 365-378.
(2005). Work motivation theory and
research at the dawn of the twenty-first
century. Annual Review of Psychology, [28] Meyer J P, Allen N J and Smith C
56, 485–516.
(1993), “Commitment to Organizations
[19] Judge, T. A., Bono, J. E., Erez, and Occupations: Extension and Test of a
A., & Locke, E. A. (2005). Core self- Three-component Conceptualization”,
evaluations and job and life satisfaction: Journal of Applied Psychology, Vol. 78,
The role of self-concordance and goal 538-551.
attainment. Journal of Applied
Psychology, 90, 257–268.
[29] Diener, E., Emmons, R. A.,
[20] Buckley, J., Schneider M and Larsen, R. J., & Griffin, S. (1985). The
Shang, Y. 2005. Fix it and they will stay: Satisfaction with Life Scale. Journal of
the effects of school facility quality on
Personality Assessment, 49, 71-75.
teacher retention in urban.
[21] Lawrence, D. 1999. Teaching with

[30] Smith, P.C., Kendall, L.M.,& Hulin,
confidence. a guide to enhancing teacher
C.L,(1985). The Job Descriptive Index
self esteem. Paul Chapman London.
(Rev.ed). Bowling Green, OH:
Department Of Psychology, Bowling
[22] Frone .M. R., Russell,
Green State University. (Original work
M & Cooper, M.L. (1992):
published 1975).
Antecedent and outcomes of work family
conflicts: testing a model of the work
family interference. Journal of Applied
[31] Allinder, R.M. (1994). The
Psychology, 77 (1), 65-78.
relationship between efficacy and the
internal practices of special education
teachers and consultant Teacher
Education, 17.89-95.
Page 259
[32] Rashid, R., Amjad, W., (2012).

Work family conflict and organizational
commitment; study of Faculty Members
in Pakistani Universities, Pakistan Journal
of Social and Clinical Psychology, 23.
[33] Akin, M., (2008).The effects of

organizational support, social support
and work family conflicts on life
satisfaction, 25(2), 141-170.
Page 260
IMPACTS OF FOREIGN DEBT ON ECONOMIC GROWTH: EVIDECNE FROM PAKISTAN

Amara Akram Khan 1 P0F P
Dr. Abdur Rauf 2, P1F P
Dr. Miraj-ul-Haq 3 P2F P
Nighat Anwar 4 P3F
ABSTRACT
This study focused on the long run and short run impacts of foreign debt on economic growth in
Pakistan by using annual time series data that cover the period from 1972 to 2013. The research
question is tested through a simple analytical model and the long run estimation is made
through Autoregressive Distributed Lag (ARDL) model commonly known as Bound test for
Cointegration. Moreover short run behavior of variables is tested through Error Correction
Method (ECM). The estimated results indicated that foreign debt exerts significant negative
impact on economic growth, this confirmed the existences of debt overhang in Pakistan. Human
capital and physical capital have positive and significant contribution in economic growth of
Pakistan. On the other hand Labor force negatively affects economic growth. The coefficient of
Error Correction Term (ECT) suggested that any deviation from the long term inequality is
corrected by a moderate speed over each year. Significant ECT is further proof of the existence
of stable long run relationship. It is suggested that the government may properly manage the
debt to attain a desirable growth.
Keywords: Foreign Debt, Autoregressive Distributed Lag, Cointegration, Economic Growth.
1
MPhil Scholar, Kashmir Institute of Economics, University of AJ&K ( Correspondence Author:
amarakhan448@gmail.com)
2
Assistant Professor, Kashmir Institute of Economics, University of AJ&K
3
Assistant Professor, International Institute of Islamic Economics, IIIU Islamabad
4
MPhil Scholar, Kashmir Institute of Economics, University of AJ&K
Page 261
desirable macroeconomics goals.
2. REVIEW OF LITERATURE
1. INTRODUCTION: Growth and foreign debt relationship
The key objective of developing has been investigated by many academician
economies is to achieve high growth but and researchers. Mostly the findings of these
because of weak economic systems and low researches found negative relationship
level of per capita they can’t achieve the between the two suggesting foreign debt a
desirable growth. Therefore they opt for big hindrance to economic growth because
foreign debts from international agencies it discourage private investment, a source of
and financial institutions. One of the economic activity bringing growth in the
imperative policy questions is that what economy. Cunningham (1993) studied the
should be the effects of foreign debt on growth and debt relationship. He took the
economic growth of a country? Expansionary sample period from 1971 to 1987 for highly
government policies are although effective indebted countries. His conclusion was very
in short period but reduce long run growth exciting one, one hand he found negative
by crowding out private investment and thus association between the two during the
nullify the positive effects of fiscal period from 1971 to 1979 and during 1980 to
incentives. Foreign debt is needed by a 1987 there was no significant role played by
country to enhance the growth capacity by external debt in growth of the economies.
utilizing it in various developmental Milton A. lyoha (1999) and Maureen (2001)
projects, to meet its obligations and to found that external debt retard growth in
fulfill saving and investment gap. sub Saharan African countries during 1974 to
Foreign debt is of great concern for 1994 and in Kenyan economy in the period
both policy makers and academicians. So far from 1970 to 1995 respectively. Erdal
no common consensus on public debt and Karagöl (2002) found that the foreign debt
growth relationship has been develop services slow down the growth pace of
amongst the researchers. On one side it is Turkish economy and the causality run from
viewed that it brings capital and the debt service to level of GNP. Ogunmuyiwa
productive utilization of this capital helps (2002) and Ezeabasili et al. (2011)
the economy to grow faster. Brings concluded that in Nigerian economy, the
technology which helps in industrial growth foreign debt does not affect growth as both
and furthermore it helps in mobilizing the are exogenous to each other in the period of
human and physical capital which are the 1971 to 2007 and 1975 to 2006 respectively.
engines of growth. On the other side it is Albert Wijeweera et al., (2005), Arshad
viewed that excessive accrual of foreign Hassana and Safdar Butt (2008) found that
debt retard growth by outcropping the external debt and economic growth has
private investment. insignificant association in Sri Lankan and
This inconsistency in the existing Pakistan Economies respectively. Shahnawaz
literature is the base for conduction of this Malik et al., (2010), Mehboob Ahmed and
particular study. The current study focused Maryam Shakur (2011) found that External
on empirical analysis of relationship Debt by crowding out private investment
between external debt and economic deteriorate the growth of Pakistan
growth of Pakistan, amongst the largest economy. Shah and Pervin (2012) concluded
debt receiving economies. This study will be that external debts reduce the growth pace
a helpful contribution addressing the foreign of Bangladesh economy as both are
debt and growth relationship to the existing negatively associated. Boboye and Ojo
literature in general and to literature on (2012) also found negative relationship
Pakistan economy in particular. In light of between foreign debt and economic growth
the findings of this study the policy makers of Nigeria. They concluded that because of
will be guided towards the right policy for debt burden the domestic currency
handling foreign debt to achieve the devalued and thus decrease the national
Page 262
income of Nigeria. Shabbir (2013) taking 3.2. DATA
the panel analysis of 70 developing
economies found that during 1976 to 2011 1. A TIME SERIES DATA FROM
there exist negative relation between 1972 TO 2013 IS TAKEN FOR EMPIRICAL
external debt and economic growth and ANALYSIS OF THE FOREIGN DEBT AND
external debt services and growth of the ECONOMIC GROWTH RELATIONSHIP IN CASE
sample countries. OF PAKISTAN ECONOMY. REAL GDP, FOREIGN
DEBT, PUBLIC INVESTMENT, POPULATION
GROWTH, AND SPENDING ON EDUCATION
3. Model Specification, Data and
ARE THE VARIABLES SELECTED FOR THE
Methodology:
COMPLETION OF ANALYSIS. REAL GDP IS
3.1 Model Specification USED AS A PROXY FOR GROWTH AND THE
This study used the neo- classical DATA ON THIS VARIABLE IS TAKEN FROM
production function for modeling the WORLD DEVELOPMENT INDICATOR (WDI).
external debt and growth relationship. THE DATA ON FOREIGN DEBT, A MOST
Similar model is also used by Cunningham CONCERNED VARIABLE, IS TAKEN FROM THE
(1993), Milton A. Iyoha (1999) and M Hassan VARIOUS ISSUES OF ECONOMIC SURVEY OF
shah and Shahida Pervin (2012). Because PAKISTAN AND SAME SOURCE IS CONSULTED
debt affects the productivity of both labor FOR THE DATA ON PUBLIC INVESTMENT TOO.
and capital so it is rational to include debt DATA SOURCE CONSULTED FOR POPULATION
in the production function. GROWTH (LABOR) AND PUBLIC SPENDING ON
EDUCATION (HUMAN CAPITAL) IS WORLD
Y= f (K, L, FD)..........1 DEVELOPMENT INDICATORS.
3.3. METHODOLOGY:
Where,
3.3.1. Bound test for Cointegration:
Y is output, K is capital, L is used for labor,
and FD represents Foreign Debt This study used ARDL technique
It has to be mention that this develop by Pasaran and Shin (1995) and
particular model included only the foreign Pesaran and Smith (2001). This particular
debt while Cunningham includes both technique is prior over others because of; its
foreign and domestic debts in his model to application in case of small sample size
capture the effects of debt on economic (Ghatak and Siddiki, 2001). Don’t consider
growth. The effects of both foreign and the unit root analysis before estimation and
domestic debt on economic growth are can be applicable although the variables
therefore this study is included the foreign have different order of integration.
debt only. Milton A. Iyoha (1999) also did Specification of the estimated model is as
the same. The specific econometric model under;
for estimation is as following; ∆𝑦𝑦𝑡 =
𝑌𝑌𝑡 = β0 + β 1 𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷𝑡 + β 2 𝐻𝐻𝐾𝐾𝑡 + β 3 𝑃𝑃𝐼𝐼𝑡 + 𝛼 + ∑𝑚 𝑚
𝑖=1 𝛽𝛽1𝑖 ∆𝑦𝑦𝑡−1 + ∑𝑖=1 𝛽𝛽2𝑖 ∆ 𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷𝑡−1 +
R R R R R
β 4 𝑃𝑃𝐺𝐺𝑡 + µ𝑡 ...........2
R
𝑚 𝑚
∑𝑖=1 𝛽𝛽3𝑖 ∆𝑃𝑃𝐼𝐼𝑡−1 + ∑𝑖=1 𝛽𝛽4𝑖 ∆𝐻𝐻𝐾𝐾𝑡−1 +
∑𝑚𝑖=1 𝛽𝛽5𝑖 ∆𝑃𝑃𝐺𝐺𝑡−1 + 𝛽𝛽6𝑖 𝑌𝑌𝑡−1 + 𝛽𝛽7𝑖 𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷𝑡−1 +
Where 𝛽𝛽8𝑖 𝑃𝑃𝐼𝐼𝑡−1 + 𝛽𝛽9𝑖 𝐻𝐻𝐾𝐾𝑡−1 + 𝛽𝛽10𝑖 + 𝜇𝑡 …..3
𝑌𝑌 𝑡𝑡: Gross Domestic Product (GDP)
FD𝑡𝑡: Foreign Debt Where m is lag length and under Bound
testing approach the null hypothesis for no
𝐻𝐻𝐾𝐾𝑡𝑡: Human capital
long run relationship in the model is;
PI𝑡𝑡: Public Investment 𝐻𝐻0:𝛽𝛽𝑖 = 0
𝑃𝑃𝐺𝐺𝑡 : Population Growth 𝐻𝐻1 : 𝛽𝛽𝑖 ≠ 0
Page 263
Where i= 6, 7, 8,9,10
The decision of the existence of long
run cointegration is made through Wald F-
Statistics. Three different decisions can be
made on the basis of the calculated value of
the Wald F- stat. In case the calculated
value is greater than the tabulated value of
Wald F-statistic, at 5% level of significance,
the null hypothesis for no long run
cointegration is rejected and vice versa is
the case where the calculated value of the
Wald F-statistic is less than the tabulated
value of Wald F-statistic. In case the
calculated value of Wald F-statistics lies in
between the lower and upper boundaries of
the critical Wald F-Statistics, the decision
will be inconclusive. Once the long run
decision is made, the 𝛽𝛽𝑖𝑖 is normalized
to find out the long run elasticities;
𝛽8 𝛽
𝑌𝑌𝑡−1 = 𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷𝑡−1 + 9 𝑃𝑃𝐼𝐼𝑡−1 +
𝛽6 𝛽6
𝛽10 𝛽11
𝛽6
𝑃𝑃𝐺𝐺𝑡−1 + 𝛽 𝐻𝐻𝐾𝐾𝑡−1 … . .4
6
Page 264
3.3.2. ERROR CORRECTION MECHANISM these findings the ARDL/Bound test for
Cointegration is best suited for analysis.
Error Correction Mechanism is used
to capture the short run elasticity. This
technique not only helps in explaining the
TABLE 4.1: UNIT ROOT ANALYSIS
changes in regressand because of regressors
but also capture the deviations from the ADF Phillips
long run too. Furthermore this technique is Test -Peron
helpful in minimizing the loss of degree of Test
freedom as well.
Variab Level First Level First
∆𝑦𝑦𝑡 = 𝛼 + les differe differe
∑𝑚𝑖=1 1𝑖𝛽𝛽 ∆𝑌𝑌𝑡−1 + ∑ 𝑚
𝛽𝛽
𝑖=1 2𝑖 ∆ 𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷𝑡−1 +
𝑚 𝑚 nce nce
∑
∑𝑖=1 𝛽𝛽3𝑖 ∆𝑃𝑃𝐼𝐼𝑡−1 + 𝑖=1 𝛽𝛽4𝑖 ∆𝐻𝐻𝐾𝐾𝑡−1 +
∑𝑚𝑖=1 𝛽𝛽5𝑖 ∆𝑃𝑃𝐺𝐺𝑡−1 + 𝛽𝛽6𝑖 𝑌𝑌𝑡−1 + 𝛽𝛽7𝑖 𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷𝑡−1 + GDP - -5.6030 - -5.6012
𝛽𝛽8𝑖 𝑃𝑃𝐼𝐼𝑡−1 + 𝛽𝛽9𝑖 𝐻𝐻𝐾𝐾𝑡−1 + 𝛽𝛽10𝑖 𝑃𝑃𝐺𝐺𝑡−1 + 1.143 (0.0002 1.344 (0.002)
𝜃𝜃𝐸𝐶𝑡−1 + 𝜇𝑡 .......5
8 ) 3
(0.90 (0.86
In the above model 𝑦𝑦𝑡𝑡 is real GDP. 87) 22)
Coefficients from 𝛽𝛽1 𝑡𝑡𝑜𝑜, 𝛽𝛽6, denoted short
run dynamics. ∆ is used for difference and PG - ………… - ………….
𝛽𝛽 0 is constant/intercept and 𝜃𝜃 is expected
R R
4.500 4.654
to be enter with negative sign. Whereas 9 2
error correction term is formulated as; (0.00 (0.00
10) 91)
𝛽7
𝐸𝐶𝑡 = 𝑦𝑦𝑡 − � 𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷𝑡−1 + FD 1.324 -5.1135 - -5.2832
𝛽6
𝛽8
𝑃𝑃𝐺𝐺𝑡−1 +
𝛽9
𝑃𝑃𝐼𝐼𝑡−1 +
𝛽10
𝐻𝐻𝐾𝐾𝑡−1 �.......6 5 (0.0001 1.302 (0.0009
𝛽6 𝛽6 𝛽6 (0.94 ) 5 )
4. Results and Discussion: 56) (0.86
4.1. Unit Root Analysis: 23)
Although the Bound test for
Cointegration does need for prior test of the PI 1.682 -4.0471 - -4.0641
data but it is a fact that time series data 5 (0.0007 1.425 (0.0006
without analyzing for unit root, mislead, (0.64 ) 0 )
because of its non-stationary nature. For 69) (0.60
sidestepping from the haziness in results, 05)
this study checked the data for unit root.
Secondly this will give the idea about order HK 1.543 -3.1452 - -3.1245
of integrations of a particular variable, 8 (0.0056 1.428 (0.0043
which will further guide for a suitable (0.71 ) 0 )
technique, to be applied. Unit root analysis
26) (0.68
is made by employing both Augmented Dicky
and Fuller (ADF) and Phillips-Perron (PP) 41)
tests. The results displayed in table 4.1
suggest that GDP, FD, PI and HK are Note: P values in parenthesis
integrated of order one i.e. 1(1) while the
PG is stationary at level 1(0). The results 4.2. Lag Length and Criteria Selection:
extracted from Phillips Peron test are also
similar to the findings of ADF. Based on
Page 265
2. THERE ARE DIFFERENT the null hypothesis for no long run
CRITERIONS FOR SELECTION OF OPTIMAL cointegration is accepted because the
LAG LENGTH. THE RESULTS DISPLAYED IN values of calculated F-statistics lies below
TABLE 4.2 BELOW SUGGEST THAT AT AKAIKE
the lower bound of tabulated F-statistic at
INFORMATION CRITERION (AIC) INFORMATION
CRITERION AT LAG LENGTH TWO IS THE 5% level of significance.
OPTIMAL CRITERIA TO BE USED FOR
Table 4.3 : The Bound Test for
ESTIMATION PURPOSES
Cointegration
Specificatio Low Upp F- Decision

n er er statis
TABLE 4.2 : SELECTION OF LAG LENGTH bou bou tic
Lag LR FPF AIC SC HQ nd nd
0 69.85 10.31 17.17 29.98 20.69 GDP/FD,PI, 3.51 4.58 5.23 Cointegr
HK,PG ation
1 52.36 4.64* 5.35 7.22 8.33* FD/GDP,PI, ----- ----- 2.00 NO
HK,PG -- --- Cointegr
2 12.92* 6.28 4.29* 4.78* 8.92 ation
* indicates lag order selected by the PI/GDP,FD, ----- ----- 1.23 NO

criterion. LR: sequential modified, FPE: HK,PG -- --- Cointegr
Finalprediction error, AIC: Akaike ation
information criterion, SC: Schwarz
information criterion, HQ: Hannan-Quinn HK/GDP,FD ----- ----- 0.41 NO
information criterion. ,PI,PG -- --- Cointegr
ation
Long Run Cointegration Analysis:
PG/GDP,FD, ----- ----- 1.58 NO
The long run Cointegration decision PI,HK -- --- Cointegr
is made through Wald-F-statistics. In this ation
approach, we compare our F value with
lower and upper bound critical values Note: Critical values are obtained from
calculated by Naryan. (2005). 5 The results
P4F P Narayan (2005).
presented in table 4.3 shows that calculated
F-statistic (5.23) exceeds the upper bound 4.4. Long Run Estimates:
of the tabulated value of F-statistics at 5% After establishing the long run
level of significance and thus there exist Cointegration among the series, in next step
long run cointegration as suggested by we explore long run impacts of public debt
on economic growth, the results are
Pesaran et al. (2001). Moreover, when rest
displayed below;
of the variables are normalized to check
whether there exist a long run cointegration
or not, it is found that in all the other 𝑅𝑅𝐺𝐺𝐷𝐷𝑃𝑃𝑡𝑡 = 3.572 − 0.315 𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡 + 0.43 𝑃𝑃𝐼𝐼𝑡𝑡
specifications (taking each one dependent) − 0.129 𝑃𝑃𝐺𝐺𝑡𝑡 + 0.671 𝐻𝐻𝐾𝐾𝑡𝑡
t- Statistic: (1.920) (3.088)

5
The critical bound value of Narayan (2005) are (4.659) (2.080) (2.541)
calculated on the basis of small as well as large
sample size (30 to 80).
Page 266
growth has negative impacts on economic
P value : (0.087) (0.007) growth of a country. It retards the growth
(0.002) (0.032) (0.008) pace by 12% with every 1% increase in it.
The results support the Mankiw et al (1992)
findings. Higher the population growth less
𝑅𝑅2 0.63 Adjusted 𝑅𝑅2 0.41 will be the per capita income and thus it
DW-Stat: 2.04 F- suggested that government should
Statistics: 12.67 (0.000) discourage the high population growth as it
The result shows that there exist is not only a burden on economy but also a
hurdle in the provision of better services
negative and statistically significant
too.
relationship between foreign debt and
economic growth. The results suggest 3. 4.5. SHORT RUN ESTIMATES:
that every 1% increase in foreign debt
slow down the pace of growth by The Error Correction Model for short
run impacts of public debt on economic
31%.These findings are in line with Malik
growth is presented below
et al. (2010), Shah and Pervin (2012),
Shabir (2013), Zeeshan et al. (2015). 𝐷𝐷𝑅𝑅𝐺𝐺𝐷𝐷𝑃𝑃𝑡 = 0.424 + 0.630𝐸𝐷𝐷𝑡 +
Negative impacts of foreign debt on
1.931𝑃𝑃𝐼𝐼𝑡 + 0.217𝑃𝑃𝐺𝐺𝑡 +
economic growth of Pakistan may be of the
fact that mostly the government got foreign 0.485𝐻𝐻𝐾𝐾𝑡 −0.561𝐸𝐶𝑀𝑡−1
debt to maintain its reserves but because of
huge expenditures on its imports it could t- Statistic: (2.09) (2.150) (1.908)
not maintain it at the desired level. This (2.028) (1.57) (-4.524)
phenomenon leads the government for more
debt and hence debt is accrued which retard P value (0.079) (0.071) (0.087)
the growth of economy. Proper utilization of (0.054) (0.413) (0.000)
foreign debt especially for productive
purposes helps in growth. Amongst the other 𝑅𝑅 2 : 0.482, Adjusted 𝑅𝑅 2 : 0.278,
variables, public investment and economic DW-Stat: 2.21 F-Statistics: 7.342 (0.004)
growth has a strong positive association.
The results suggest that every 1% increase in The results presented in above
public investment contributed 43% in
growth. These results are very much in line equation suggest that foreign debt in short
to the theoretical debate on public run promote growth. The contribution of
investment and economic growth foreign debt in economic growth of Pakistan
relationship. More the government invests is 63% in a short run. These findings support
greater will be the productivity which will the theoretical debate of the traditional
increase jobs and aggregate spending and economist who said that in short run with
thus economic activity will boost up. Human
the increase of debt the consumer increase
capital has positive and significant impact
on GDP which strengthen Lucas (1993) idea their consumption which further leads to
that human capital accumulation serve as an increase interest rate and increase in
engine of economic growth. In light of these interest rate results in capital inflows and
findings it is suggested that the government ultimately growth of economy boosted up.
may increase the share of spending on
education and that will help in providing a Amongst the other variables public
skillful and productive society which further investment (physical capital) and population
helps in increasing not only the individual’s
growth contributes positively. The results
income but also national income too and
thus the economy will grow. Population show that with every 1% increase, the
contribution of public investment is more
Page 267
than unity while population growth
contribution is 21%. The coefficient of ECM
enter in the model with negative sign (- Jarque-Bera test
0.561), which is statistically significant and 1.804 (0.228)
shows high convergence to the long run
equilibrium within a short period of time by White test
56%. Similarly, the overall goodness of the 1.147 (0.363)
model as shown by the adjusted coefficient
of determination is 0.48, which shows that
about 48 percent of the variation 4.6. Stability Test:
experienced in the gross domestic product To test stability of model this study
of Pakistan is explained by the explanatory estimates the CUSUM and COSUMQ stability
variables included in our model. The value test. In present study the variables and
data are stable because the plot of
of F-statistic is 7.34 which show that the
cumulative sum of recursive residuals
explanatory variables are important CUSUM does not cross the critical
determinant of economic growth. boundaries. The results of this test is
presented below;
4. 4.5. DIAGNOSTIC TEST: Fig. 1 CUSUM and CUSUM Sq. Plot
Our model specification satisfied all
the diagnostic tests .Table below represent
the results of these tests. The results
presents in table below suggest that the
estimation of long-run coefficients and ECM 5. Conclusion and Recommendations:
are free from serial correlation,
This study focused on foreign debt
heteroscedasticityfunctional form and non-
and economic growth of Pakistan. Empirical
normality.
analysis covers the period from 1972 to
5. TABLE 4.5: DIAGNOSTIC TEST RESULTS 2013. ARDL co-integration technique and
Error Correction Method are employed for
estimation purposes. Diagnostic test were
TEST STATISTICS F-Statistics also applied to check the validity of the
selected model. Extracted results revealed
that, foreign debt and economic growth are
negatively associated in long run while in a
LM test 1.523 (0.217) shorter span of time the foreign debt
contributes positively towards economic
growth of Pakistan. Human capital and
Ramsey’s test physical capital both contribute positively in
0.258 (0.502) the growth of Pakistan economy Population
growth as expected is the burden on
economy of Pakistan. A long run relation
Page 268
between foreign debt and economic International Research Journal of Finance
growth is confirmed by ECM and suggested a and Economics, 20, 132-140.
high speeds that correct the disequilibria in
a year. In light of the findings of this study, Hasssan, A and Safdar (2008). Impact of
it is suggested that the government may ownership Strucutre and Corporate
utilize the debt in a proper productive way Governance on Capital Strucuture of
to achieve the desirable growth.
Pakistan Listed Companies. International
Furthermore reduction in corruption,
controlling the ever crippling inflation, journal of Business and Management, No.2
minimization of imports exports gap and PP 50-57.
reduction in growing security spending will
help in achieving the desired level of lyoha, M.A. (1999). “External debt and
macroeconomic goals. economic growth in sub-Saharan African
countries: An econometric study”., AERC,
6. REFERENCES: African Economic Research Consortium,
Ahmed, M. and Maryam, S. (2011). Debt A Nairobi. Research Paper 90
Real Hurdle in the Economic Growth of
Pakistan: A time series analysis. African Karagöl, E. (2002). “The Causality Analysis
Journal of Business Management, 5(28): of External Debt Service and GNP: The Case
11532-11538. of Turkey”. Central Bank Review 1:39-64.
Akram, N. (2011). Impact o Public Debt on Malik, S. et al., (2010). External Debt and
the Economist Growth of Pakistan. The Economic Growth: Empirical Evidence from
Pakistan Development Review 50(4), 599- Pakistan, International Research Journal of
615. Finance and Economics, 44: 88-97
Boboye,A.l and Ojo,O.M (2012), “Effect of Narayan,p.(2005), “The Saving and

External Debt on Economic Growth and Investment Nexus for China: Evidence from
Development of Nigeria” International Cointegration Tests” Applied Economics,
Journal of Business and Social Science, 3 37:1979-1990.
(12). 67-82 Pasaran,M.H,Shin and Smith,R.(2001),
Cunningham, R. (1993), “The effects of debt “Bound Testing Approaches to the Analysis
burden on economic growth in heavily of Level Relationship”. Journal of Applied
indebted Econometrics, 16:289-326
developing nations,” Journal of Economic Rais, I.S. and Anwar T. (2012), Academic
Development, 18, 115-26 Research International, Vol 2 (1), PP535-
544
Ellig, J. (2001). Dynamic Competition and
Public Policy: Technology, Innovation and Shabbir and Safia (2013), “Does external
Antitrust Issues. (Eds.). Cambridge: debt affect economic growth: Evidence from
Cambridge University Press. Developing Countries”,State Bank of
Pakistan Working Paper Series No.63.
Hameed, A. Hammad, A. and Muhammad, A.
C. (2008). “External Debt and Its Impact on Shah.M.Hassan and Pervin, S. (2012),
Economic and Business Growth in Pakistan”, “External Public Debt and Economic Growth:
Empirical Evidence from Bangladesh,”
Page 269
Academic Research International. Vol.3,
No.21103.
Sheikh, M. Ramzan, M. Zahir, F. and

Khadija, T. (2010). “Domestic Debt and
Economic Growth in Pakistan: An Empirical
Analysis”. Pakistan Journal of Social
Science, 30(2), 373-387.
Wijeweera, A. et al., (2005). Economic

Growth and External Debt Servicing : A
Cointegration Analysis of Sri Lanka, 1952 to
2002, Working Paper Series in Economics,
University of New England, School of
Economics.
Page 270
Table.4: External Debt and Economic Growth

DEPENDENT VARAIBLE RGDP
Long Run Estimates (ARDL) Short Run Estimates (ECM
Variables Coefficients Variables Coefficients
𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷𝑡 - .315 (0.007) ΔFD 0.630 (0.071)
𝑃𝑃𝐼𝐼𝑡 0.438 (0.002) ΔPI 1. 931(0.087)
𝑃𝑃𝐺𝐺𝑡 -0.1.29 (0.032) ΔPG 0.217 (0.054)
𝐻𝐻𝐾𝐾𝑡 0.671 (0.008) ΔHK 0.485 (0.413)
ECM (-1) -0.561 (0.000)

R-Square 0.632 R-square 0.482
R-Bar-Squared 0.419 R-Bar-Squared 0.278
DW statistic 2.04 DW statistic 2.21
F-statistic 12.67 F-statistic 7.342
(0.000) (0.004)
LM test 1.592 (0.304) Ramsey test 0.215 (0.627)
Jarque-Bera test 0.4936 (0.237) White test 1.853(0.162)
Proceeding of the CIRP 8th P P
International Seminar on Life Cycle

Engineering, Varna, Bulgaria, June
18-20, pp 171-179.
Page 271
IDENTIFICATIONS OF THE FACTORS CAUSING TERRORISM AND ITS EFFECTS ON EDUCATION

Palwasha Syed (Principal Author)
saimjan1010@gmail.com
34TU U34T
Humair Akhtar (Corresponding Author)

umairakhtar848@gmail.com
34TU U34T
th
Students of B.Ed (Hons) 6 Semester P P
Department of Education, University of Haripur

Dr, Tehseen Tahir
Assistant Professor, University of Haripur
tehseen_akhter@yahoo.com
34TU U34T
Dr, Umbreen Ishfaq

Assistant Professor, University of Haripur
umbreenishfaq@hotmail.com
34TU U34T
Abstract:
Terrorism is one of the biggest curses in a society. It has become the issue of third
world countries. Current study of the issue is conducted to find out the causes and
its effects in educational sectors. The major objectives of this study were: To find
out the causes of terrorism: To locate the effects of terrorism in the society
through which how it effects educational institutions: How to deal with the
terrorism and curtail the problem being faced by the people. A questionnaire was
used to get the data from the teachers. 10 Schools were chosen as a sample of the
study. Percentage technique was used to analyze and interprets the data in the
light of objectives. Results of the study show that terrorism badly effects our
education and it has worse effects on education of our new generation.
Keywords: Terrorism, Cause, Effects, Education.
Introduction: terrorizing or dread coordinated at an

Terrorism is a powerful and unlawful expansive number of gatherings of
strategy to accomplish the sought people." (Tavares 2004, p. 1041).
objective. Its sole thought process is Terrorism poses a serious law and
to oust the current peace hardware. order problem and leads to the
It is a conscious utilization of breakdown of society. The episode of
viciousness against regular citizens homicide, torment, mutilation,
and furnished workforce and the abducting, start and blackmail make
state. A straightforward definition the environment of suspicion, dread
describes psychological oppression as and frenzy all around. Life gets to be
the "arranged use, or risk of questionable. The fear based
utilization, of great brutality to oppressors murder unarmed regular
accomplish a political goal through folks, including ladies and youngsters.
Page 272
It is composed wrongdoing and the expense of its sway and survival.

savagery cause social clashes. The It has been all inclusive separated and
interrelationship among different is looking downward on as a nation
radical gatherings and their remote that is not doing what's necessary.
linkages bring unlawful cash and All the more precisely, today the risk
supports sneaking. Numerous radical of fear based oppression is
gatherings gather a certain rate of disintegrating the nation's social
cash from the workers and business structure, financial improvement and
people on standard premise. Financial political framework. The
improvement of the zone arrives at an demonstrations of fear mongering are
end. Our administration needs to undermining Pakistan's lawfulness
make substantial consumption to circumstance, abusing human
meet the difficulties of fear based privileges of the residents, harming
oppression. the fundamental base and future
Pakistan is confronting the danger of financial open doors. Fear mongering
fear based oppression, which wrecked has dirtied the notoriety of the
the nation's social structure, nation; the possibilities of thriving,
monetary advancement and political peace and strength are as a rule
framework. The demonstrations of adversely influenced because of the
psychological warfare are weakening absence of financial development and
Pakistan's lawfulness circumstance, great administration.
disregarding human privileges of the Impact of terrorism on
natives, harming the essential base education:
and monetary open doors. The education system is demolished
Importance: by fear based oppression. Step by
Terrorism is one of the greatest step terrorism mongering increment
condemnation of the general public. in our general public. Be that as it
Instability, frailty and political may, the government does not make a
viciousness have been a clear move against it. The understudies
component of Pakistan since the were not going school and
1980s. Shockingly the most recent one arrangements on the grounds that
decade has seen the acceleration of injected fear mongering. Infact
these marvel as an aftereffect of Pakistan confronted diverse sort of
Pakistan's part as a ―frontline state‖ psychological oppression. Numerous
in the Global War on Terrorism (GWO) urban areas are impact, focusing on
which additionally affect on training. slaughtering and bomb impact
In Pakistan, even following twelve assaults. The present government did
years of dynamic cooperation and not activity so far globally effect was
attempting to accomplish more there contrarily.
is by all accounts no limit to this war. The real effect of this movement is
Truth be told, the risk of that are headed to class or even the
psychological oppression in Pakistan school are being focused by bomb.
has expanded complex and, The real effect of the action is that
subsequently, there are numerous the guardians have ceased their
genuine ramifications of this for the youngsters to go to the school and
nation. which have diminished the level of
In actuality, it would not be right to instruction in the nation where the
infer that Pakistan is paying a gigantic proficiency rate is as of now low.
cost in this war on fear mongering at Many schools were exploded in FATA
Page 273
and the KPK districts while most individuals are being slaughtered in
horrendous occurrence was suicide these fears based oppression
the assault on global foundation, exercises for the sake of religion.
including school, universities and Individuals of Pakistan are tired of
colleges needed to faces these fear this regular circumstance and not a
based oppressor assaults. The solitary individual is sheltered in our
education rate is as of now low is nation.
constantly being decreased. Revamping Education System:
Psychological warfare report uncovers Education plays a key part in creating
that young ladies' schools will mindful and tolerant natives.
probably be focused for obliteration, Beginning from basic to graduate
so the UNESCO report uncovers that training, accentuation must be laid on
young ladies are more averse to be bestowing a community sense. The
taught and less cash is spent on their syllabi must be amended to build
instruction. Crushing young ladies' accentuation on subjects like social
entrance to instruction is a top need studies, expressions, sports, games
for fear based oppressors; giving that and so on., that show cordiality,
same access is a low need for the resilience and collaboration.
state. Together they make an Inconsistencies and disparities in the
impeccable conspiracy of instructional framework need be
obliviousness, a request that the tended to. Pakistan has a lot of the
female remains consigned to a short populace that should be changed into
existence of youngster bearing and an informed gathering of nationals
lack of education. It is vital to with wide assortment of professional
understand that while training is abilities. This should be possible by
crucial to the social and financial pumping more cash into training area
development of any key immature for a more noteworthy number of
district, Pakistan's conditions don't value schools inside the simple scope
take into account simple openness to of populace. The more noteworthy
this administration consistently the number of reasonable and quality
nation over. While a coordinated and state funded schools will diminish the
genuine exertion towards instruction contribution to questionable
effort will undoubtedly take care of establishments where fanatics can
these issues show them their obscurantist belief
Training is the most imperative in the systems.
general public and the nation. Be that Types of Terrorism:
as it may, in these conditions the
Terrorism and its types well-defined
instructional framework exceptionally
by Amy Zalman 2010. According to
poor because of psychological
her, terrorism has classified into
oppression. There are numerous fear
several types which are State
based oppressors associations in
Terrorism, Bio Terrorism, Cyber
Pakistan that are included in
Terrorism, Eco Terrorism, Nuclear
psychological warfare. With the
Terrorism and Narco Terrorism.
progression of time psychological
State Terrorism:
militants exercises are expanding step
State use power or danger without
by step, each day more than one such
pronouncing the war to threaten
occurrence happens which
subjects and to accomplish some
incorporates bomb impacts, target
political objectives.
killings, self-destructive assaults and
Bio-Terrorism:
numerous others. Numerous
Page 274
Bio-fear based oppression is Pukhtunkhwa, Pakistan. Educational

purposefully arrival of lethal natural Research and Reviewsindicated main
specialists to hurt and threaten issues which have directly and
regular people, for the sake of a indirectly affected the performance
political or other cause. It might of Head of secondary Schools.
incorporate microbes, poisons and Terrorism is the main obstacle in
infections that could use in dread improving the efficiency of school
assaults. Heads. School heads are to
Cyber Terrorism: concentrate on motivation of
The utilization of data innovation teachers, coordinate with their
assaults regular people and attract colleagues and take steps to keep up
consideration regarding their cause. the morale of their staff. Government
This may imply that they utilize data needs to take steps to control
innovation, for example, PC terrorist activities and train the Heads
frameworks or broadcast according to the existing situation.
communications, as an instrument to The Heads needs administrative and
compose a conventional assault. managerial trainings and the
Eco-terrorism: management academies are also to be
This sort of fear based oppression is established by the KPK Government.
depicting the savagery in light of a
legitimate concern for Objective of the study
environmentalism by harm properties • To find out the causes of
or to harm ventures which causes terrorism.
financial misfortune. • To identify the effects of
Nuclear Terrorism: terrorism on education.
It alludes to utilize diverse methods
for atomic material as a fear strategy. Research Methodology
This incorporates assaulting atomic Population of study:
offices, acquiring atomic weapons, or The total population of the
discoveries the methods for scatter study comprised of five hundred and
radio-dynamic material. sixteen Boys primary schools in
Narco Terrorism: District Haripur.
Viciousness utilized by medication Sample of study:
traffickers to impact governments or Out of five hundred and sixteen
anticipate government endeavours to Boys primary school Ten Boys Primary
stop the medication exchange. Fear Schools were taken as sample of study
based oppressor bunches use by using convenient sampling
trafficking of medications to finance techniques. Three teachers from each
their operations. This influx of sampled school were chosen as a
psychological oppression has sample of the study.
antagonistically influenced the Research Instrument:
instructional framework, particularly A questionnaire was used to collect
in Higher Education; on the grounds the data from the teachers.
that these fears based oppressor Data Analysis
bunches spread toxin in the
adolescent of the country. Factors of Terrorism
Khattak, U. G., & Iqbal, J. (2015) Table No.1 Rise in cost of
conducted research on the impact of production
terrorism on managerial efficiency of Agre Neutra Disagre
Category
heads of secondary schools in Khyber e l e
Page 275
Frequenc setup while 10% negated this

19 5 6 statement.
y
19(30 Table No.5 Government instability
Percentag 5(30) 6(30)
) Agre Neutra Disagre
e 16.6% 20% Category
63.3% e l e
Table No. 1 shows that 63.3% Frequenc
respondents agreed with the 25 - 5
y
statement that Rise in cost of
Production whereas 20% disagreed. 25(30
Table No.2 Fall in business )
e 0% 16.6%
confidence 83.3%
Table No.5 indicates that 83.3%
Agre Neutra Disagre teachers have agreed with the
Category
e l e statement about Government
Frequenc Instability while 16.6% negated this
18 5 7
y statement.
Percentag 18(30 5(30) 7(30) Table No. 6 Poor policies of the
e ) 60% 16.6% 23.3% governments
Agre Neutra Disagre
Table No. 2 shows that 60% Category
e l e
respondents agreed with the
Frequenc
statement that Fall in business 21 1 8
y
confidence on the other hand 23.3%
negated the statement. Percentag 21(30 1(30) 8(30)
Table No.3 Absence of law and e ) 70% 3.3% 26.6%
failure
Agre Neutra Disagre Table No.6 illustrated that 70% people
Category
e l e agreed with the statement that poor
Frequenc policies of the governments while
22 2 6 26.6% disagreed.
y
22(30 Effects of Terrorism on
Percentag 2(30) 6(30) Education:
)
e 6.6% 20%
73.3% Table No.7 Terrorism is one of the
Table No. 3 illustrates that 73.3% biggest curses in a society
people agreed with the statement Agre Neutra Disagre
Category
that Absence of law and failure while e l e
20% negated the statement.
Frequenc
Table No.4 Improper government 28 1 1
y
setup
Agre Neutra Disagre 28(30
Category Percentag 1(30) 1(30)
e l e )
e 3.3% 3.3%
93.3%
Frequenc
25 2 3 Table No. 7 illustrated that 93.3%
y
respondents agreed with the
25(30 statement that Terrorism is one of
) the biggest curse in a society while
e 6.66% 10%
83.3% 3.3% negated the statement.
Table No.4 shows that 83.3% Table No.8 Education is also facing
respondents agreed with the the maximum loss
statement that Improper government
Page 276
Agre Neutra Disagre Frequenc

Category 24 2 4
e l e y
Frequenc Percentag 24(30 2(30) 4(30)
25 2 3 e ) 80% 6.6% 13.3%
y
25(30 Table No. 11 indicates that 80%
Percentag 2(30) 3(30) respondents are agreed with the
)
e 6.6% 10% statement that schools were
83.3%
Table No. 8 shows that 83.3% particularly targeted in most of areas
respondents agreed with the of Pakistan on the other hand 13.3%
statement that Education is also disagreed the statement.
facing the maximum loss whereas 10% Table No.12 Schools were also
negated the statement. abandoned been because of fear of
Table No.9 Parents have stopped being persecuted
their children to attend the schools Agre Neutra Disagre
Category
and kept them in their houses e l e
Agre Neutra Disagre Frequenc
Category 18 4 8
e l e y
Frequenc Percentag 18(30 4(30) 8(30)
26 - 4
y e ) 60% 13.3% 26.6%
26(30 Table No. 12 shows that 60%
) respondents agreed with the
e 0% 13.3%
86.6% statement that Schools were also
Table No. 9 indicates that 86.6% abandoned been because of fear of
respondents agreed with the being persecuted while 26.6% negated
statement that Parents have stopped the statement.
their children to attend the schools Table No.13 Due to the danger and
and kept them in their houses while threat of terrorist activities
13.3% negated the statement. educational institutions are forced
Table No.10 Most of the girls’ to be closed down
schools were destroyed in terrorism Agre Neutra Disagre
Agre Neutra Disagre Category
Category e l e
e l e
Frequenc
Frequenc 24 3 3
16 6 8 y
y
16(30 Percentag 24(30 3(30) 3(30)
Percentag 6(30) 8(30) e ) 80% 10% 10%
)
e 20% 26.6%
53.3% Table No. 13 shows that 80%
Table No. 10 shows that 53.3% people respondents agreed with the
agreed with the statement that most statement that Due to the danger and
of the girls’ schools were destroyed in threat of terrorist activities
terrorism while 26.6% negated the educational institutions are forced to
statement. be closed down while 10% negated the
Table No.11 Schools were statement.
particularly targeted in most of the Conclusion:
areas of Pakistan 1. Majority of the teachers agreed
Agre Neutra Disagre that Unregulated Madrassas
Category
e l e throughout Pakistan is believed
Page 277
to contribute significantly to its 2. Govt may make aware of

terrorism problems. people about the effectiveness
2. Most of the respondents agreed of education and ensure their
that fall in business confidence protection, especially in ruler
due to the terrorism. areas like FATA, areas of KPK
3. Majority of the teachers agreed and Baluchistan can also
that absence of law and reduce the fear about
failureand improper terrorism, because a large
government setup causes chunk of our population need
terrorism. to be transformed and turned
4. Most of the teachers agreed to educated people.
that Government instability 3. The majority of respondents
and poor policies of the agreed that education is the
government also causes of key in reducing terrorism. So it
terrorism. is recommended that spreading
5. A large of number of the education can minimize the
teachers agreed that terrorism terror activities throughout the
is one of the biggest curse in a country because education
society plays a key role in developing
6. Most of the respondents agreed responsible and tolerant
that education is also facing citizens.
the maximum loss due to the 4. It is also recommended that
terrorism. changes in policies against
7. The majority of the teachers militants can also reduce the
agreed that parents have terrorism. There must be fixed
stopped their children to laws for the terrorist activities
attend the schools and kept to overcome this issue.
them in their houses. 5. Unity is strength so the
8. A large number of the harmony among people is
respondents agreed that most strongly required in order to
of the girls’ schools were get rid of the annoyance of
destroyed in terrorism. terrorism in Pakistan.
9. Most of the teachers agreed References:
that schools were particularly [1]. Abbasi, N. M. (2013).
targeted in most of the areas Impact of terrorism on
of Pakistanand threat of Pakistan. Strategic
terrorist activities educational
1T 1T
Studies,33(2).
institutions are forced to be [2]. CARLILE, L. (2012). The
closed down. Definition of Terrorism A
10. The majority of the Report by Lord Carlile of
respondents agreed with the Berriew QC Independent
statement that Schools were Reviewer of Terrorism
also abandoned been because Legislation Presented to
of fear of being persecuted. Parliament by the Secretary of
Recommendations: State for the Home Department
1. Government make action plans by Command of Her Majesty.
in sabotaging terror activities
throughout the country. [3]. Dhume, D. B. (2005).
The Effect of Women’s
Page 278
Education on Terrorism:
Examining a Causal Chain
Involving Fertility and Young
Male Populations (Doctoral
dissertation, Harvard College
Cambridge, Massachusetts).
[4]. Haider, S., de Pablos
Heredero, C., Ahmed, M., &
Dustgeer, S. (2015). Identifying
Causes of Terrorism in
Pakistan. Dialogue, 10(3), 221.
[5]. Ismail, A., & Amjad, S.

(2014). Determinants of
terrorism in Pakistan: An
empirical investigation.
Economic Modelling, 37, 320-
331.
[6]. Irshad, M. (2011).

Terrorism in Pakistan: Causes &
Remedies. The Dialogue, 6(3).
[7]. Khattak, U. G., & Iqbal,

J. (2015). Impact of terrorism
on managerial efficiency of
heads of secondary schools in
Khyber Pukhtunkhwa, Pakistan.
Educational Research and
Reviews, 10(7), 1003-1008.
[8]. Merriam-Webster.
(2004). Definition of terrorism.
Merriam-Webster's collegiate
dictionary. Merriam-Webster.
[9]. Rabab Khan. (2011).

Education outreach as a
weapon against terrorism in
Pakistan
[10]. Silke, A. (2015). The
psychological impact of the
continued terrorist threat.
Retrieved January 1st.
[11]. Zalman, A. (2012). Types

of Terrorism: A Guide to
Different Types of Terrorism.
Page 279
Post Conflict Rehabilitation: A Restorative Justice Approach

Ilam Khan
PhD scholar at department of Peace and Conflict Studies
Center for International Peace and Stability (CIPS)
National University of Sciences and Technology (NUST)
ilam274pcips@nipcons.nust.edu.pk
3TU
Abstract
Soon after the end of the conflict in Swat in 2009, different rehabilitation programs have
been initiated by the government to restore the conflict-shattered society-from
restoration of civilians to reintegration of soft-core militants (non-combatant) but have
ignored the hard-core militants. This research is focusing on the ex-combatants who could
not rehabilitate properly and joined other militant ranks. The government is following
criminal law, ‘retributive justice’ to deal with combatants, in which the combatants are
punished to satisfy the victims. On contrary, to their proper rehabilitation, replacement of
retributive justice with ‘restorative justice’ could best redress the grievances of victims
and offenders, where both are sit together to discuss the consequences of the crime,
drawing out the feelings of those who have been harmed. Then they discuss how
that harm might be repaired and any step that should be taken to prevent
reoffending. Restorative justice is a community engagement program thus could be
utilized as an indigenous approach to post conflict rehabilitation and reintegration. The
paper is qualitative in nature, following theory of restorative justice, supported with
available secondary data as well as interviews from the experts and practitioners of
rehabilitation.
Key Words: soft and hard-core militants, ex-combatants, rehabilitation, restorative
justice.
Introduction provides opportunity for the victim and

offender express their views openly, thus
The management and dealing with the gives them respect and empowerment.
consequences of conflict having an old This informal criminal justice process
history (Pante, 2006) and thus restorative also benefits state judiciary by saving
justice as old as the history of conflicts time and resources. Lastly, most
and subsisted in different forms and importantly from the perspective of this
processes in the course of law (Garkawe, paper, it enables victims and offenders to
1999). This paper is focuses on its current have direct role in negotiation and
implications in post conflict scenarios and rehabilitation processes. In restorative
only focuses on victims and offenders to justice the offender is encouraged to
reintegrate them into society. This is a accept his offense and compensate the
bottom-up approach in which the victims through apology or any other
community is involved in the process. In means as in this process both the
the process, victim, offender and the offender and victims are brought
community are sit together to reach an together for negotiations and settlements
agreement for the offender to repair the that provide maximum satisfaction to
harm caused by the offender, resultantly, victims and offenders accountability
encouraging their rehabilitation. This (Greg Mantle, 2005).
Page 280
The paper further envisage the communal security forces announced its victory over
approach to rehabilitation and tries to the militants in September, 2009 (Jan,
find ways in which the indigenous 2010).
processes of post conflict rehabilitation
could accommodate in restorative The management and dealing with the
justice. There are many successive consequences of conflict having very old
stories of conflict management and history (Pante, 2006). Scholars termed it
resolution around the world through rehabilitation, emerged after the cold
indigenous traditions but have neglected war where the actors of peace building
rehabilitation and reintegration through have defined it as reconstruction,
indigenous ways. Despite increasing reintegration, engagement or even peace
Westernization of the world and its building. For a period of time,
formal and rational-legal approaches to rehabilitation was limited to physical and
conflict management indigenous medical sciences and was defined as the
traditions are not only relevant but most restoration of an individual to his fullest
suited in many cases (Akanmu G. physical, mental and social capabilities
Adebayo, 2014). Professionals of peace (Villalba, 2011) (Dictionaries, 2016).
and conflict have realized that peace Rehabilitation is a broad concept and
endured and settlement lasts when should be defined different for different
parties involve in the process of conflict scenarios. In post conflict scenario,
resolution and own it (ibid). In rehabilitation could be defined as the
restorative justice, the participants of process through which the scattered,
the rehabilitation process are from the traumatized and radicalized population is
community. They try to give answer to reintegrated into society to the status
the questions that is there any space in from where they were shifted.
indigenous institutions which could
The processes of rehabilitation are
accommodate the modern methods of
conducted to reintegrate the offenders
restoration into reintegration of victims
(combatant and non-combatant
and offenders? How the indigenous ways
population) as well as the victims
could best be made to make them use for
(civilian population). This a complex and
the future rehabilitation process? And,
long term process, as Buxton (2008)
lastly, how this paper contributes to the
stated, through which victims, offenders
field of peace and conflict studies? In this
and the community are resettle into
research, an explorative research
post-conflict communities (social
methodology has been adopted and
element), assist them to become part of
available data have been interpreted
the decision making (political element)
through interpretivists approach.
and took part in the sustainable
Conceptual Ideas employment and economic activities.
Besides, adjust their expectation and to
It is very difficult to specify ‘post’ of a deal with the war related mental shock
conflict. There might be a cold [negative] (Buxton, 2008).
peace when combatants are defeated but
the threat perception exists for a long Although, restorative justice has vast
time, unless, the community does not implications but it has been limited to
start its normal social, political and address victims and combatants only to
economic activities. The activities are fulfill the purpose of this paper. Victims
come with the building of institutions and and combatants could be defined in the
infrastructure in post conflict scenario context of Swat as those civilians who
(Graham Brown, 2011). In contemporary have been harmed in the conflict are
conflicts the era of post conflict starts victims and those civilians who made this
when government’s security agencies harm/offense are combatants. The
enter the conflict area and announce combatants have further divided into
their victory over belligerents. In Swat, hard-core (combatants) and soft-core
the post conflict era started when (non-combatants); the former denotes
Page 281
those who physically participated in the humanitarian approach to conflict

conflict against the state and the later resolution and sustainable peace. This
are the radicalized and supportive of the indigenous-humanitarian approach to
former. conflict resolution, rehabilitation and
reintegration remained successful in most
In most of the countries, the people have of developed states who are trying to
been dissatisfied and frustrated by the replace criminal law with restorative
formal judiciary or justice system, justice.
therefore, they appeal for the customary
or traditional practices of justice to deal Lastly, this indigenous-humanitarian
with the crime and disorder in society. management of rehabilitation contributes
Restorative justice is offer some to the discipline of peace and conflict
welcoming means of resolving disputes study with the utilization of restorative
(Nations, 2006). justice. The research is limited and needs
further ethnographic study to bring
Conceptualization restorative justice approach within the
domain of peace and conflict studies.
Barry Buzan (2003) added to the utility of
conflict management through indigenous Research Methodology
way as, in contemporary conflicts the
state is referent object, but scholars are The paper is a theoretical study of
agreed that all the conflicts arise from restorative justice through qualitative
the society. The society should be research method. The comprehensive
referent object and the conflicts should study needs time and resources and could
be managed through indigenous way not be accommodated in this paper.
(Waever, 2003). The aim of this research Therefore, without some interviews,
is durable peace. Grievances and most of the work is table research; used
frustration are the basis of, almost, every libraries and internet. The secondary
conflict. Unless these grievances and data available in the form of books,
frustration are not addressed restoration research articles, news articles,
of durable peace will remain a hope. An conference proceedings, available
offender when prefer violence over interviews and government documents
peace has grievances and frustration are interpreted in a critical way. To fill
dominant on his minds. For peace the gap in the available literature, semi-
building, it is necessary to address these structured interviews have been
grievances in a way that provide equal conducted from the experts and
justice to offender, victim and overall practitioners sitting in Islamabad, the
community. Therefore, I choose capital. These experts and practitioners
restorative justice approach for belong to governmental and non-
rehabilitation in which grievances of both governmental organizations (NGOs) and
parties to the conflict are addressed. lawyers have been followed to get their
expertise on this topic.
The processes of restorative justice are
prevailing in Pakistan but are not in a All the data collected, is analyzed
systematic way of restorative justice but through interpretivists methodology.
in disperse shape; including, involvement Interpretivism is an epistemological
of community in the form of civil militia, position, contrast to positivism who
aid and compensation to the victims etc. believe in the scientific study of social
This research is trying to give these world. In contrast, interpretivists hold
disperse strategies a systemic form for that people and their institutions are
future rehabilitation programs. Third, fundamentally different from the object
scholars and practitioners of peace and of natural sciences and hence should be
conflict studies are more inclined studied different by social scientist and
towards indigenous solution to conflict to give subjective meanings to human
and peace building and they support actions (Brayman, 2012, p. 30). The
Page 282
interpritivists methodology is adopted to threat

interpret the nature of rehabilitation Societal Vulner Engagement Developing
processes in Swat case, as the nature of able moderate
Asian societies is different from European commu tendencies
societies and should be study in Asian nities
Ideologi Clergy Highlighting Developing
context.
cal religion’s counter
The exploratory research methodology is emphasis on narratives
peace
adopted to explore new dimension in
Political Society Winning Neutralizin
restorative justice, utilizing the at hearts and g security
indigenous ways of rehabilitation. The large minds threats
purpose of this study is to acquire a Source: Report, PIPS, Swat De-
theoretical understanding of the radicalization Model: Prospects for
methods, processes and objectives of Rehabilitating Militants, 2011.
restorative justice and also to know that
how restorative justice can be utilized in In Swat the rehabilitation of ex-
the communal context in the case of combatants has been further divided into
Swat. three projects; the Project Sabaoon
focuses on juvenile, Project Mashaal that
A key weakness of this research is the concentrates on adult captives and
small number of interviews and Project Sparlay for family members of
interviewees that makes it difficult to detained persons (Rana, 2011).
find biases as well as to allow this
research for generalization. The overall purpose of these three
projects is to give an understanding of
Overview of Post-Conflict Rehabilitation Islam to detained-combatants; the
Process in Swat strategy is required to count the
extremist minds of them. Despite of
Soon after the end of the conflict in
many hurdles of expertise and resources,
Swat, the government successfully
the projects’ strategy of de-
resettled the 2.3million displaced
radicalization is successful as of 2014,
population of the Malakand division;
2200 youth have been reintegrated by
including Swat, after four-month violent
the Mashaal project (Kaiser, 2014).
conflict between state of Pakistan and
Tanzi i Nifaz i Shariat Mohammadi (TNSM) The rehabilitation strategy in Swat is
(Ingrid Nyborg, 2012). Beside other criticized on the grounds that, first, it
reconstruction programs; initiated by focuses only on detainees and has
civil government with the help of ignored the rest of the combatants who
national and international non- are not in jails. Second, prison is the
governmental organizations (NGOs); center for rehabilitation which is itself a
Pakistan army initiated rehabilitation question on the rehabilitation process. In
program in 2009 for the detainees who prison, the grievances of the detainees
were arrested during military operation, (combatants) could not be addressed for
willingly surrendered or those who turned which they were fighting. Another, the
in by their families (Rana, 2011). This detainees as prisoner will consider
rehabilitation program, as described by imprisonment as humiliation of them as
Amir Rana (2011), is covering four areas; well as of their family (Braithwaite,
security, societal, ideological and 2003). Third, Abd ur Rahim, law expert,
political. The detail is follows as; reintegration through prison is not
rehabilitation but it is retribution through
De-radicalization Approach in Swat
which a detainee is punished for his
Approac Focus Strategy Objective crime (Rahim, 2016). Fourth, as
h described by Fazal Saeed, Program
Security Detain Rehabilitatio Reducing Manager at Zalaan Communications and
ees n security Research, the program in Swat further
Page 283
differentiates the qualification for not clarify the term properly. Tony
rehabilitation as hard-core and soft-core Marshall (1999) defined restorative
militants. Hard-core are the acute or justice as it, is a process whereby all the
practical militants who actively parties with a stake in a particular
participated in the conflict. Soft-core are offense come together to resolve
the mild-militants who are mere collectively how to deal with the
radicalized from the narratives of the aftermath of the offense and its
militants and have given support to the implications for the future (Marshall,
hardcore militants. In Swat, the focus is 1999). Professor John Braithwaite (2003)
on soft-core militants for rehabilitation had given very short but a comprehensive
and forsakes the hard-core. For a definition to the term as restoring the
successful rehabilitation the strategy balance between victims, offenders and
should universal; i.e. there should be the community. These definitions clarify
political liberalization for all militants the actual meaning and purpose of
(Saeed, 2016). restorative justice which explore that
there must be two parties; victim and
In current rehabilitation process the offender in the negotiation process in the
offenders are supervised for a time by presence of the members of the
the government assigned supervisors community. The community members are
after they released from prisons or playing here a vital role which will be
rehabilitation centers. There activities discussed in the later part of this paper.
are checked for some time. Chris
Grayling (2013), the UK justice secretary, Why Restorative Justice?
called this strategy of supervising
offender is ‘authoritarian and unjust’. An The current strategy adopted for
offender when left jail but in supervision offenders in Swat is retribution. The
it means that he is still in jail. If he offenders are in jails are given different
commits any other crime and not the penalties; either by judiciary or military
crime for which he is under supervision, courts, established in different parts of
will again go to jail (Spiked-online, 2013). the country. These penalties are
On the other hand, the collective extended from monetary penalties to
engagement of victims, offenders and the imprisonment or even death sentences.
community in rehabilitation process Mehran Wazir, Program Manager at FATA
through restorative justice gives them Research Center, says, these are
maximum opportunity of views sharing revengeful acts by security forces against
freely and negotiate the harm done to offenders. Through this retributive
the victims and find ways in which the strategy, the soft-core offenders may
victims and offenders are reintegrated agitate and could re-join their ex-ranks.
into society (Wazir, 2016). This is an In the opposition of this strategy, a
indigenous approach to rehabilitation humanitarian approach is imperative for
which encourages reintegration. reintegration of the offenders into
society. In contrast to retributive justice,
Defining Restorative Justice restorative justice is a humanitarian
approach in which both offenders and
Restorative justice subsisted throughout victims are given justice. The former is a
history. It is a complex term and cannot punitive approach in which the offender
be defined precisely (Garkawe, 1999). is punished to satisfy the victim(s). The
Although, scholars and professionals have supporters of retributive theory are of
tried to give a definition which could the view that ‘crime is an individual act
nearly explain the term. A simplified against the state, a violation of law’,
definition of restorative justice drawn by punishment is good to deter the
the United Nations is, any program that offender’ ((CSC), 2016).
uses restorative processes and seeks to
achieve restorative outcomes (Nations, The earlier mentioned rehabilitation
2006). But this is still ambiguous and does centers in Swat are the reformative
Page 284
centers, initiated in 19th century, in

P P He has not been ignored on the basis of
which the state called the reformatory to wealth, race or sex. This empowerment
rehabilitate the offenders in a semi- to the criminal as well as to the victim
military regime. The reformatories makes them responsible persons and will
introduced educational and vocational try to resolve the issue in a constructive
trainings and the prisoners could be manner (Rodríguez López, 2015).
released earlier on their conduct. The
reformatories also introduced There are many examples around the
classification of the prisoners (Campbell, world who replaced criminal law with
2005). In Swat, this reformatory strategy restorative justice. Majority of the
is intake in rehabilitation centers and the countries are trying to make restorative
militants have been divided into hard- justice processes a formal procedure
core and soft-core. But, later on, the dealing with criminals. Formally, first
reformatories advocated punishment for New Zealand set up the state-run victim
prisoners and, ultimately, retribution re- compensation fund in 1963, then the
emerged (Campbell, 2005). United States initiated her first
compensation program in California in
The third concept, restorative Justice, 1965 (Bright). The program further
evolved in 1970s to correct some extended to most of the European
weaknesses in criminal law in formal countries; including, the Netherland,
legal system, based on retributive Austria, Denmark, Sweden, Germany,
justice, for rehabilitation of criminals to Ireland, France, the United Kingdom and
reintegrate them into the society. Norway (ibid). In Australia, the Canberra
Currently, there are numerous and the North NSW Youth Conferences
rehabilitation programs around the world are found more successful where the
but restorative justice is wide in its scope victims and offenders found more time to
than criminal law (Zehr, 2009). The express and share their views than in
formal-legal system is concerned with the prisons (Rodríguez López, 2015)
offender and neglects the victim. On (Garkawe, 1999).
contrary, restorative justice engages all
parties in its processes; i.e. victim, In Africa and Asia the Sierra Leonean
offender and community. Evidences Truth and Reconciliation Commission
suggest that restorative justice empower (TRC) (2003), the Peruvian TRC (2003),
the victims, offenders and communities and the Commission for Reception, Truth
of an offense to engage in the processes and Reconciliation in East Timor (2005)
and to formulate public response to the were authorized to find the root causes
offense. This process strengthening and legacies of the conflicts and their
public trust over justice system and may works were specified to peace building
reduce even re-offense rate (Gabbay, and post conflict rehabilitation
2005). Usually, the restorative justice (Friedman, 2013). Dr. Ishtiaq Ahmed,
processes are conducted as conferences. professor at Qauid-e-Azam University
Islamabad, added that during 1996-7
Disrespect begets disrespect, says blasts in Cairo, Egypt, caused many
Howard Zehr (1995). In restorative people died. The authorities imprisoned
justice conferences the offender feels the leaders of the known extremist
not in isolation. In isolation he might feel groups. Those groups had spread violent
shame over his actions and will not wish literature in the country that had
to rejoin his community. The restorative developed an extremist narrative among
conferences gives an offender maximum the population. In prisons, they were
opportunity to express his views and given non-violent education through the
explanations of the crime he has done. professors of Al-Azhar University. When
This participation with community in the they released, they revised their ideology
conference gives him a respect; and started publishing non-violent
ultimately, empowered him by not literature. That is considered a successful
ignoring him in the negotiation process. rehabilitation program (Ahmed, 2016).
Page 285
Currently, most of the countries have reintegration will not be successful.

shifted their attention to a more Provision restorative justice may be
participatory approach to rehabilitation difficult in the countries where
and reintegration by admitting the indigenous society is weak. But, in Swat,
deficiencies of paternalistic 1 P0F P the people still following their norms and
reintegration programs, they include; the values and, therefore, restorative justice
Democratic Republic of Congo, the could be utilized as it involves the
Philippines, and Colombia. These community. Involvement of the
participatory approaches guarantee the community in post-conflict rehabilitation
engagement of ex-combatants, receptive and reintegration is like the vertebral
communities’ members, local and column that sustains social, economic
national stakeholders; such as, elders and and political aspects of the society
religious figures (Buxton, 2008). (Rodríguez López, 2015). Majority of the
population in Swat is Pashtun and
Restorative Processes following Pashtun code of life
‘Pashtunwali ’. Most of the principles of
Restorative process defined by United restorative justice are found in
Nations (2006, p-9) as, any process in Pashtunwali. Howard Zehr (2009),
which the victim and the offender, and, Professor of Restorative Justice, pointed
where appropriate, any other individuals out three main principles of restorative
or community members affected by a justice are; restoration, accountability
crime, participate together actively in and engagement;
the resolution of matters arising from
the crime, generally with the help of a • Repair the damage caused by the
facilitator (Nations, 2006). The other offender (restoration)
community members means; nuclear • Encourages proper responsibility
relatives of the victims and offenders, for addressing needs and repairing
friends and elders. Braithwaite (2003) has the harm (accountability);
given a comprehensive definition to the • Involvement of the affectees,
restorative process as, Restorative including the community in
justice conferences work by inviting restorative process (engagement).
victims and supporters (usually family
supporters) of the victim to meet with Reparation and Compensation in
the offender and the people who care Restorative Justice in the Context of
most about the offender and most Swat:
enjoy the offender’s respect (usually
including both the nuclear and The consent of both parties is necessary
extended family, but not limited to to bring them to negotiations or
them). within this negotiation the conferences (Gabbay, 2005). The
consequences of the crime, drawing agreement when concludes may “include
out the feelings of those who have reparation, restitution and community
been harmed. Then they discuss how services, the purpose of community
that harm might be repaired and any services, to fulfill the individual and
steps that should be taken to collective needs and responsibilities of
prevent reoffending (Braithwaite, 2003). the parties, achieving reintegration of
Restorative justice is seen theoretical the victims and offenders” (Nations,
when it comes to its practical 2006).
application. Most of the critiques are of
the view that an offender if could not Reparation as apology
compensate then restorative justice for
Apology is one the basic tenets of
1
restorative justice. Before entering to
The system, principle, or practice of managing or negotiations, both the parties have
governing individuals in the manner of a father already made their consent that victim
dealing benevolently and often intrusively with his
children.
Page 286
will give apology and offender believes nature of the conflict (Saeed, 2016). The
that he will be apologized. communal conflict should not include in
this compensation fund. Through this
Monetary Restitution fund, the government will compensate
the economic, social and political losses
Monetary restitution remained the of the victims as well as offenders.
popular culture of restorative justice.
The offender will pay money for the harm Pashtunwali and Restorative Justice
he caused, either in cash or any other
form, as decided in negotiations, to the Pashtunwali is the Pashtun way of
victim. life. It is an umbrella term, covering all
codes of Pashtun culture and tradition in
Reparation as Community Services it. The most relevant codes of
Pashtunwali with restorative justice are;
During the negotiations if it decided that Jarga, Nanawati, Kushunda, and
offender will do community services or Salweshti.
he will provide services to the victim.
This penalty is given to the offender in Jarga; as defined by Gohar (2014) is
case when the offender is unable to community-based fact-finding, and it
reparate the victim. acts like a modern jury. It intervenes to
halt violence, identify the issues, and
Compensation by the State resolve then through mediation or
Compensation by the state to the victims arbitration and further works for
and offenders have adopted by most of reconciliation and rehabilitation (Gohar,
the countries around the world (Bright) 2014). There are different types of Jarga
(Garkawe, 1999) (Friedman, 2013). They but the working principles are same.
have established different institutions Jarga usually made at the consent of
and arranging conferences for restorative both parties and both parties are present
justice. It is responsibility of modern in its processes. Jarga listen the claims of
nation states that it should care about its both parties and then the light of Pashtun
citizens. The state is for the individual, codes, they decide accordingly. Same is
as liberals says, and should do whatever the process in restorative justice in which
citizens feel feasible. The purpose of the parties and the community are sit
rehabilitation in prisons is to assist the together to resolve the conflict and
ex-combatants in rehabilitation. rehabilitate the victim. Usually, the
Similarly, the state should assist the Jarga members are from the same area
offender to compensate the victims for or may call from other areas too. The
the harm done by the offender. only difference in restorative conference
and Jarga is; in former, the parties to the
Pakistan is, already, assisting the victims conflict are come to an agreement while
for their losses in the conflict. State in Jarga it is community who decide the
getting assistance from international case for the parties.
donors and it further distribute that
assistance among its victim citizens in The processes of Jarga are following;
the form of aid. Now, for the purpose to When Jarga sits, its jurisdictions can be
strengthen restorative justice’s
Nanawati or Kushunda (only in case of
philosophy the state should encourage it rehabilitation) the detail is follow;
and compensate the victims as decided
during restorative justice process. There Nanawati: ‘pleading for apology’ in
should formulation of policy and English. The Jarga when decide that the
allocation of special ‘compensation fund’ offender will seek apology of his crime he
through which the government has done. The offender is bound to follow
compensate the victims and offenders of Jarga jurisdiction and will plead for
a conflict. The policy should clearly apology. Now it depends on victims to
mention the eligibility on the basis of
Page 287
accept his apology or not, but usually it is and safe. In current rehabilitation
accepted as a tradition and the offender strategy in Swat, when an offender is out
when seeks apology the elders of the of security forces control his family
community are accompanied with him. members are arrested. Making offender
The processes of Nanawati are; the Kushunda, the rest of the family will
offender go to the victims home for remain safe and the victim grievance is
seeking apology; offender enter the grave addressed.
when any relative of the victim is died
and offender stays there till he is A story from Bajaur Agency;
forgiven; in extreme cases the offender
Nisar Khan is a Kushunda living in
send women to the victim home for
Islamabad since 2012. There was 70 years
seeking apology; or as may decide the
old enmity between two tribes in Bajaur
Jarga (Wazir, 2016). It is jurisdiction may
Agency. A number of people were killed.
be in the form money or land. When
In 2012, Jarga resolved the enmity and
victim agrees for apology then the whole
the one tribe were compensated and a
community is called for a public eating
member, Nisar Khan, of the offender
and the expenses are to be paid by the
tribe made Kushunda to compensate the
offender. Through this way the victim
tribe for the killing of its member. Now,
and offender are rehabilitated through
Nisar Khan is living in Islamabad and the
indigenous ways.
tribes are living in peace there in Bajaur
The tradition of Nanawati can be utilized (Khan, 2016).
in restorative justice and could be made
Salweshti: Salweshti ‘or the forty’ in
it as a formal procedure for rehabilitation
English is execute the jurisdiction of the
and reintegration. As the apology is also
Jarga. It is forty men standing force,
one of the principles of restorative
consists of the community members on
justice.
volunteer basis. The strength of salweshti
Story from South Waziristan; is different in some Pashtun areas. In the
North, it called Shalgon; that is body of
The youngsters had beaten a member of twenty men. Thus, it is very difficult for
Taliban. Taliban came and took many an offender(s) to violate the Jarga’s
youngsters of the tribe in their custody decision. Jarga represent the whole
for nearly three days and did violence on community, and if violated its decision,
them. The tribe agitated and wanted to means the offender or (in case if it is a
take Badal (revenge) of Taliban. Other tribe) becomes the enemy of the whole
tribes of the area realized the situation community.
that the conflict may escalate to a more
violent. They intervened and formed a Discussion
Jarga of 120 members. The Jarga
Any conflict leaves deep impact on the
jurisdiction was that that Taliban will
community in which a conflict arises.
follow the code of Nanawati (will seek
Sometimes the case of post-conflict
apology of their act) and will
rehabilitation becomes very difficult,
compensate 12 buffalos to the victims. In
especially in stimulating the people to
that way, the conflict was resolved and
start dealing with their own problems
the victims were rehabilitated (Wazir,
(Pante, 2006). Restorative justice
2016).
approach to rehabilitation is most
Kushunda: ‘the expel-one’ in English. feasible for reintegration of the ex-
Jarga in its jurisdiction may decide combatants and victims into society.
Kushunda, instead of Nanawati, that the
The most attractive principle of
offender will leave the community and
restorative justice is the engagement of
will not return to home for a specific
community and as the offender is from
period or for lifetime. Through this way
community, he or she can be easily
the rest of the family remains in honor
Page 288
rehabilitated and could be reintegrated In 2012, hundreds of civilians watching

into society in a respectful way. football match; used to organize
annually by the local players. A suicide
The imbalance civil-military power expulsion caused 120 civilians died and
relationship in Swat in respect of counter more than a hundred wounded. Later on,
terrorism and reintegration making it was revealed from Taliban that sports
hurdles in formulating a sound policy. activities are abolished as it has
Civil Powers Regulations and National decreased the locales recruit to their
Action Plan are the strategies those ranks.
dominated military interference over
civil and political institutions. In Conclusion
restorative justice, community is
involved to rehabilitate the offender. “Resilience at national level is influenced
Thus, empowerment of local political by what is happening at the global and
representative will encourage restorative community level of society” (Lundy,
justice processes. 2014). All the conflicts are arises in the
society and should manage them through
Formal and informal dialogue with indigenous ways of conflict management,
militants could count the narratives the rehabilitation and, then, to restore the
militants have developed. Formal victims and offenders into the society.
dialogues means, recognized by Academicians and practitioners of peace
government as well as official and conflict studies have worked
representatives. The informal dialogues tremendously on conflict resolution and
include the discussions in academia, its management on society level but
media, bazaars, hujras, mosques and there is very little attention has been
other forums of social gathering. Dr. given rehabilitation and reintegration in
Qibla Ayaz, ex-Vice Chancellor of this regard. Restorative justice could be
Peshawar University, adds that these one of the best and easy ways of
dialogues should be universal and should rehabilitation at societal level. The
not be limited to a specific group of research institutions and other
militants (Ayaz, 2016). The extremists’ stakeholders of peace and conflict
narratives had built through the studies need to do work on indigenous
dominant discourse in society. Now, solutions of post conflict rehabilitation.
these narratives can only be counted Every society has its distinct norms,
through new narratives (or counter values and traditions and they have
narratives). Prisons or rehabilitation solutions for conflict management and
centers accommodate very small number rehabilitation in it. The scholars need to
of radicalized persons at a time. find those traditions for every society
Developing a discourse is the best separately. This will ease the burden of
solution to count the extremists’ conflict management on state as it
narratives. consumes a lot of state resources in
resolving the conflict and post conflict
“The ex-combatants’ participation in rehabilitation.
informal groups of friends, sports, work,
volunteering and associations are 1. REFERENCES
experienced as valuable networks that
serve the purposes of reintegration, (COI), C. o. (2014). Sri Lanka: Tamil
(re)identification with non-violent groups Separatism. London: Independent
(or the normal civilians) and so facilitate Advisory Group of Country Information
spaces for civic participation” (Rodríguez (IAGCI).
López, 2015).
(CSC), C. S. (2016, April 19). Retributive
A story form South Waziristan Agency, vs. Restorative Justice. Retrieved from
FATA:
cscsb.org:
Page 289
http://www.cscsb.org/restorative_justic Friedman, R. (2013). Transitional Justice

e/retribution_vs_restoration.html and Conflict Transformation in Post-War
Societies: Practical and Ethical
Ahmed, D. I. (2016, July 21). Communal Implications. London: King’s College
Rehabilitation. (I. Khan, Interviewer) London.
Akanmu G. Adebayo, J. J. (2014). Gabbay, Z. D. (2005). Justifying
Indigenous Conflict Management Restorative Justice: A Theoretical
Strategies; Global Perspective. Maryland: Justification for the Use of Restorative
Lexington Books. Justice Practices. Retrieved July 18,
Ayaz, D. Q. (2016, July 21). How to 2016, from International Institute of
rehabilitate the ex-combatants. (I. Khan, Restorative Practices:
Interviewer) http://www.iirp.edu/pdf/justifyingrj.pdf
Braithwaite, J. (2003). Restorative Garkawe, S. (1999). Restorative Justice

Justice: Theories and Worries. Australia: from the Perspective of Crime Victims.
The United Nations Asia and Far East Retrieved July 13, 2016, from Australian
Institute (UNAFI) for the Prevention of Legal Information Institute:
Crime and the Treatment of Offenders http://www.austlii.edu.au/au/journals/
(UNAFEI). QUTLawJl/1999/4.pdf
Brayman, A. (2012). Social Research Gohar, A. (2014). Jirga: An Indigenous

Methods. UK: Oxford University Press. Institution for Peacebuilding in the
Pukhtoon Belt of Pakistan and
Bright, C. (n.d.). Victims Compensation Afghanistan. In J. J. Akanmu G. Adebayo,
Fund. Retrieved July 20, 2016, from Indigenous Conflict Management
Restorative Justice: Strategies: Global Perspective (pp. 183-
http://restorativejustice.org/restorative- 193). Maryland: Lexington Books.
justice/about-restorative-
justice/tutorial-intro-to-restorative- Graham Brown, A. L. (2011). A Typology
justice/lesson-3-programs/victim- of Post-Conflict Environments: An
compensation-fund/ Overview. London: Centre for Research
on Inequality, Human Security and
Buxton, J. (2008). Reintegration and Ethnicity (CRISE).
Long-term development: Linkages and
Challenges. Bradford: University of Greg Mantle, D. F. (2005). Restorative
Bradford. Justice and three Individual Theories of
Crime. Internet Journal of Criminology
Campbell, K. M. (2005). Rehabilitation (IJC) .
Theory. In M. Bosworth, Encyclopedia of
Prisons and Correctional Facilities (pp. Ingrid Nyborg, B. N. (2012). Rural
831-834). Thousand Oaks: Sage Development in Swat, Pakistan:
Publications. Understanding Food and Livelihood
Security in Post-Conflict Context.
Dictionaries, O. (2016, April 12). Norway: Norwegian Agency for
Rehabillitation. Retrieved from Development Cooperation (Norad).
oxforddictionaries.com:
http://www.oxforddictionaries.com/defi Jan, R. (2010, May 25). Paradise
nition/english/rehabilitation Regained: Swat One Year On. Retrieved
Page 290
July 24, 2016, from Critical Threat: Rodríguez López, M. A. (2015). From ex-
http://www.criticalthreats.org/pakistan/ combatants to citizens: connecting
paradise-regained-swat-one-year-may-25- everyday citizenship and social
2010 reintegration in Colombia. , 3 (2).
Journal of Social and Political Psychology
Justice, T. N. (2016, April 10). , 3 (2), ...
Recidivism. Retrieved from nij.org:
http://www.nij.gov/topics/corrections/r Saeed, F. (2016, July 16). Rehabilitation
ecidivism/pages/welcome.aspx in Swat. (I. Khan, Interviewer)
Kaiser, D. F. (2014, January 20). Swat Soofi, A. B. Employing the Sri Lankan
deradicalisation project-1. Retrieved May Rehabilitation Model To Pakistan’s
26, 2016, from Daily times: Counter Terrorism Framework.
http://dailytimes.com.pk/opinion/20- Islamabad: Research Society of
Jan-14/swat-deradicalisation-project-i International Law.
Khan, N. (2016, July 08). Indigenous Spiked-online. (2013, May 16). What’s so
Rehabilitation Processes. (I. Khan, liberal about rehabilitation? Retrieved
Interviewer) June 09, 2016, from Spiked online:
http://www.spiked-
Lundy, B. (2014). Monitoring Conflicts of online.com/newsite/article/13623#.V1nt
Interest: Social Conflict in Guinea-Bissau's sKJlDIU
Fisheries. In J. J. Akanmu G. Adebayo,
Indigenous Conflict Management Starkweather, D. A. The Retributive
Strategies: Global Perspectives (pp. 151- Theory of "Just Desserts" and Victim
165). Maryland: Lexington Books. Participation in Plea Bargaining. Indian
Law Journal , 67.
Marshall, T. (1999). Restorative Justice:
an Overview. Rearch Development and Villalba, D. C. (2011). Rehabilitation as a
Statistics Directorate, Home Office. Form of Reparation under International
London: Crown Publishers. Law. London: RDRESS.
Nations, U. (2006). Handbook on Waever, B. B. (2003). Regions and

Restorative Justice Program. New York: Powers: the Structure of International
United Nations. Security. London: Cambridge University
Press.
Pante, P. (2006). Introduction:
Conceptual and Terminology Issues of Wazir, M. (2016, July 25). Role of
Post-Conflict Rehabilitation. In V. a. Indigenous Institutions in Rehabilitation.
Sofia, Post Conflict Rehabilitation (p. 5). (I. Khan, Interviewer)
Vienna: Study Group Information.
Zehr, H. (2009, October 22). Restorative
Rahim, A. u. (2016, July 13). legal status Justice; What's That? Retrieved July 13,
of restorative justice. (I. Khan, 2016, from International Institue for
Interviewer) Restorative Practices:
http://www.iirp.edu/article_detail.php?
Rana, M. A. (2011). Swat De- article_id=NjMx
radicalization Model: Prospects for
Rehabilitating Militants . Islamababd:
Pakistan Institute for Peace Studies (PIPS)
Page 291
Impact of prosocial behavior on life satisfaction among university students

P
Mobeen amjad1, Tamkeen saleem 2, Humma ghalib3, P P P P
1
P P
P
MS scholar International Islamic university Islamabad

Ibrar.ch914@gmail.com
P
34TU U34T
2
Department of psychology
Lecturer international Islamic university Islamabad

tamkeen.saleem@iiu.edu.pk
34TU U34T
3
P
MS scholar International Islamic University Islamabad

hummasyed316@gmail.com
34TU U34T
Abstract
Prosocial behavior is any behavior done for the betterment of others without any return.
Prosocial behavior learning to give is in our biological needs and fulfilling the instincts
leads to satisfaction. The aim of present study was to investigate the impact of prosocial
behavior on life satisfaction among adolescents. The participants of the study were
adolescents (75 Males and 75 Females), students of university of fast and IIUI with age
range 18-25. Sampling technique was purposive sampling. The questionnaire used was
Satisfaction with life scale by Dannis and Altruistic personality scale by Rushton. The data
was analyzed using SPSS. The results of the study were significant. Pro social behavior
increases life satisfaction because when people serve for the welfare of others and society
the discrepancy and other pathological behaviors diminished and satisfaction increases.
Key Words: Prosocial behavior, Life satisfaction, Self efficacy
Page 292
The proper definition of life satisfaction

is defined as ones overall evaluation of
1. Introduction life as a whole, rather than their current
feelings and emotions”. (Barker, E.
Human is a social animal that
2014, March 15).The word life
always wants to live with other people by
satisfaction involves both cognitive and
making societies. While living together
emotional perspective of individual.
they perform different actions and
Prosocial behavior increases life
behaviors. Some of these actions are
satisfaction because when people serve
beneficial for self or society and others
for the welfare of others and society as a
may be harmful. Among beneficial
whole the discrepancy and other
behaviors prosocial behavior is the
pathological behaviors such as inferiority
central part. Prosocial behavior is any
complex etc. diminished and satisfaction
behavior done for the betterment of
increases. Prosocial behavior can be
others without any return. Such behaviors
either pleasure based or pressure based.
increase harmony and reduce problems in
Pleasure based prosocial behavior is when
society. The purest form of prosocial
individual helps others due to empathy or
behavior is altruism. This research
personal preference and pressure based
explores the impact of prosocial behavior
is when helping others depend upon
on life satisfaction among university
pressure by society peers parents.
students.
Pleasure based prosocial behavior is
Prosocial behavior can be defined as positively related to life satisfaction
“Prosocial behavior refers to voluntary rather than pressure based. (Gebaue,
46T
behavior intended to benefit other. It Riketta, Broemer and Maio.2008). 46T
consists of actions which are beneficial

for other people or society as a whole, Many past researches and this research
such as helping, sharing, donating, co- also apply principles from empathy-
operating, and volunteering.” altruism theory to prosocial behavior and
(Eisenberg, Fabes and Spinrad, 2006). argue that much of what we do for others
Prosocial behavior is defined as helping stem from the feelings of empathy. We
behavior without any reward in return. help others when we feel empathy for
Prosocial behavior is planed or conducted them. The theory is based on self-
action which is entirely motivated by interest or pleasure based prosocial
self-interest. Prosocial activities involve behavior and it assumes that self-interest
sharing, love attention for others without has no genetic basis. Helping others can
any expectation of return. The purest give us reward in three ways: it can
form of prosocial behavior is altruistic increase the chances that someone will
behavior, an unselfish interest in helping help us in return in the future; it can
other person. According to Sanstock relieve the personal distress and can
(2007), the circumstances most likely increase life satisfaction; and it can
evoke altruism are empathy for an achieve us social approval and increased
individual in need, or a close relationship self-worth.
between the benefactor and the
Previous literature suggests that
recipient.
people who express prosocial behavior
Life satisfaction is a term that describes are more satisfied with their life as
how a person is satisfied with his life. compare to those who do not. A study
This satisfaction includes cognitive was conducted to explore interpersonal
emotional satisfaction. A person feels self efficacy in the regulation of affect as
that he is living an ideal life. Happiness predictor of prosocial behavior and
well being all is synonyms of life prosocial behavior as predictor of life
satisfaction. Life satisfaction is achieved satisfaction in the participants of 4
when person become satisfied with his different age groups. Results indicate
present status, health and quality of life. that interpersonal self efficacy effect our
Page 293
prosocial behavior. Results show that as compare to those who spend money on
although prosocial behavior effect life themselves. According to this research it
satisfaction in all groups but it higly can be assumed that prosocial behavior
influenced old age group. (Gian Vittorio influence life satisfaction. (Dunn, Aknin,
Caprara, Patrizia Steca,). Another
P P Norton 2008).
research was conducted by Hunter and This study will enhance prosocial
Lin (1981) to see whether prosocial behavior and in turn life satisfaction
behavior has an impact on life because now a day satisfaction is the
satisfaction. The participants were main concern of people and by knowing
retirees who engage in prosocial that prosocial behavior is linked with life
activities and those who were not and satisfaction people may show more
results indicated that retirees who altruistic attitude that in turn will have
engage in prosocial activities were more positive effect on student’s performance.
satisfied with their life as compare to Students will learn to work in a group
others. Like hunter and Lin another study setting and antisocial behavior will
that was conducted on middle school reduced. This study would provide new
students found that increase in prosocial ideas for research. More over recent
interaction is positively linked to and psychological problems are due to
influence life satisfaction (Martin and society’s discrepancy, this study might
Huebner 2007). helps to increase prosocial behavior and
reduce this discrepancy.
Another study was conducted with
Nigerian students. The variables of this 2. Methodology
study were religiosity, life satisfaction
prosocial behavior, social exclusion, 2.1.1 Objective
residence location, and cultural The main objective of the research was
differences. The purpose of the study to explore the impact of prosocial
was to find out predictors of prosocial behavior on life satisfaction.
behavior. Study was conducted through
cross sectional survey design and data To investigate whether prosocial behavior
gathered from 440 students of which 230 is a predictor of life satisfaction.
were males and 210 females with age
range of 19 to 27 years. The results 2.1.2 Hypothesis
indicate that religiosity, social exclusion
and life satisfaction are predictors of High level of Prosocial behavior leads to
prosocial behavior. Results also show that high level of adolescents life satisfaction.
those who score higher on life
Increase in prosocial behavior leads to
satisfaction also express more prosocial
increase in adolescent’s life satisfaction.
behavior than those who score lower on
life satisfaction. Because the results show 2.1.3 Operational Definition
that variables are highly correlated it
means that prosocial behavior can  Prosocial Behavior
predict life satisfaction. (Cook, A. 2012).
Prosocial behavior can be defined as
A study was conducted to see effects of helping behavior without any reward in
giving money to others on happiness (life return. It is a broad category of actions
satisfaction). Study was conducted such as sharing, cooperating etc. with
through cross-sectional and longitudinal others.
survey design. Participants were
randomly assigned to two groups. One  Life Satisfaction
group asked to spend money on them and
others were asked to spend money on Life satisfaction is state of mind that
others. Results found that the group who describe who positively a person view his
spend money on others were more happy life experiences, how close his actual life
to his ideal life.
Page 294
way my life is close to my ideal and

respondent respond on 7 points.
2.1.4 Participants
2.1.6 Procedure
150 students (75 male, 75 female)
The objective of this study was to
participated in this research. All
explore influence of prosocial behavior
participants were university students
on life satisfaction. The research design
with age range 18-24 year. All
was survey method and instrument was
participants signed an informed consent
questionnaire. The target population was
before participating in this study. In
university students of Islamabad and
informed consent necessary information
sample was selected through purposive
regarding study was given to them.
sampling. Data was collected from two
Settings of students were International
group males and females and they were
Islamic University and Fast University
the students of IIUI and fast university.
Islamabad.
The important information regarding
2.1.5 Materials research was given to participants.
Informed consent attached with
Instrument of this research was questionnaires was given and participants
questionnaire comprises of section A to were asked to read it carefully. The
C. All the questions were close ended. participants were asked to respond
The questioners used were Altruistic honestly. An enough time was given to
Personality Scale and Satisfaction with participants to complete the
Life scale. Section A gather information questionnaires.
on demographic variables that include
Sex, Age, Education and marital status. 3. Statistical analysis
 Altruistic Personality Scale Data of this research were analyzed using

SPSS statistic. To see effect of prosocial
Section B contained a 20-item Rushton behavior on life satisfaction Regression
Altruistic personality scale designed to was performed. ƿ- values of less than
measure altruistic tendency. Participants 0.05 were considered significant.
response on a 5 point scale ranging from
never (0) to very often (4).Scoring scale 4. Results
is a continues measure and it is the sum
Here scores of all variables were
of score of each item
statistically tested. Table 1 describe the
 Satisfaction with life scale reliability of scale.
Section C contained satisfaction with life Table 1

scale. This scale was designed by Danes
i. Psychometric properties of
to measure the degree of participant’s
variables (N=150)
satisfaction with life. Life satisfaction is
simply the overall evaluation of life Variable N α Range
either favorable or not. It is a 5 item
scale. Responses of participants were P A
ranged from 1 to 7. 1 show strongly
disagree, 2 disagree,3slightly disagree,4 Prosocial
neither agree nor disagree,5 slightly Behavior 150 .823 6-69 0-80
agree,6 agree, 7 strongly agree. Scoring
is sum of all scores on each item and
Life 150 .504 5-65 5-64
ranges of satisfaction with life scale is
Satisfaction
from extremely satisfied to extremely
dissatisfied. Example of item is In most
Page 295
The Altruistic Personality scale consisted Discussion

of 20 items (α=.82), Satisfaction with life
scale consisted of 5 items (α=.504). The aim of this study was to
explore the impact of prosocial behavior
The reliability analysis indicates on life satisfaction. For this purpose the
that the reliability coefficient of all scales I used were Devin’s satisfaction
scales is significant and that scales are with life scale and Rushton’s altruistic
reliable. personality scale. The sample size was
n=150 composed of 75 males and 75
Table 2 females. The sampling technique was
purposive sampling.
Linear regression analysis of
prosocial behavior and life satisfaction The hypothesis of this study was
(N=200) “prosocial behavior has impact on life
satisfaction among university students
Model and results proved it. The results showed
Prosocial that there is a positive correlation
behavior between prosocial behavior and life
and life satisfaction and that prosocial behavior
satisfaction predicts life satisfaction. These findings
95% CI are consistent with past studies. As
indicated in a study conducted by Netta
and Richard that prosocial behavior
promoted greater life satisfaction both in
Variable B UL LL the helpers and recipients. Their results
also revealed that autonomous
motivation of prosocial behavior was
responsible for greater life satisfaction
and well being. Reliability analysis
14.1 21.4 indicated that scales are reliable in our
Constant 17.8 culture.
Prosocial .051 .244 Limitations of study, conclusion and

behavior .147 recommendations
It is crucial to state here that

R² .058 even though the present study provides
important clues for future researches it is
not free from limitations. The most
F 9.13 common problem of survey research is
that it is subject to social desirability.
NOTE.*p<0.05 Participant may not be able to exactly
tell the amount of helping behavior that
Table 2 shows linear regression they has showed in previous few years
analysis predicting prosocial behavior on and so may give more positive answers
life satisfaction. The results of the regarding their helping bahavior only to
regression analysis indicated that become good. Secondly, the research is
predictor explained 5% of variance limited in its Generlizability because the
participants were selected from just two
(R2=.058, F (1,148) = 9.126, p<0.005). It
Institutions located in the same geo-
R R
was found that prosocial behavior graphical area in Islamabad. Thirdly

significantly predicted life satisfaction Compared to student’s total population
(ß= .241, p>.1). the sample was very small. Other
variables that may influence results of
Page 296
the study such as education, marital processes in the Niger-Delta. University

status etc. were not controlled. of Ibadan, Ibadan, Nigeria.
Recommendations Anderson, K. (2009). Relationships
between prosocial behavior, spirituality,
Therefore, future researches
narcissism and satisfaction with life.
should focus on experimental study of
Retrieved on September 18, 2012
prosocial behavior to reduce problem of
social desirability. Future researchers [2] Bonner, K., Koven, L. P., Patrick, J.
should select participants from different H. (2003). Effects of Religiosity and
areas of Pakistan to increase Spirituality on Depressive Symptoms and
generlizability of the study. It should also Prosocial Behaviors. Journal of Religious
study the effects of spirituality, Gerontology, 14, 189-205.
Narcissism, gender, leaving area and
demographic variables on prosocial [3] Chou, K.-L. (1998). Effects of age,
behavior. Overall the study concluded gender, and participation in volunteer
that prosocial behavior influence life activities on the altruistic behavior of
satisfaction among students. Chinese adolescents. The Journal of 1T 1T45
Genetic Psychology, 159, 195-201. 1T45 1T49 49T
[4] Cook, A. (2012). Factors which

Implications of study influence prosocial behavior. Retrieved
on December 17, 2012 from
The findings of this study describe
http://www.morefreeinformation.com/A
prosocial behavior as beneficial in many
rt/ 50632/185/Factors-Which-Influence-
ways. First prosocial behavior impacts
Prosocial-Behavior.html
various social behaviors, promotes well
being, life satisfaction and allows people [5] Dietz, T., Kalof, L., & Stern, P. C.
to express themselves through helping (2002). Gender, values, and
others and get peace of mind. Second environmentalism. Social Science 1T 1T45
because this study was done with Quarterly, 83(1), 1353-364.

1T45 1T49 49T
students so it may help them to increase

prosocial behavior and in turn increasing [6] Dovidio, J. F., Piliavin, J. A.,
satisfaction in a competitive Gaertner, S. L., Schroeder, D. A., &
environment. This study can be helpful Clark, R. D., III. (1991). The arousal:
for depressed and anxious people who Cost-reward model and the process of
are less satisfied with their lives. This intervention: A review of the evidence. In
study can help them to increase life M. S. Clark (Ed.), Review of Personality
satisfaction by helping others and by and Social Psychology: Vol. 12. Pro-social
solving their problems. The study holds behavior (pp. 86-118). Newbury Park, CA:
both theoretical and practical Sage.
implications for social experts,
counselors, teachers, therapists and the [7] Eagly, A. H., & Crowley, M. (1986).
consultants. Teachers can teach the Gender and helping behavior: A meta-
students to work in a group and help analytic review of the social
other students when needed. This psychological literature.Psychological 45T
behavior may help to reduce bully Bulletin, 100(3), 3283-308.

1T45 1T49 49T
behavior that is most burning issue of the

day. [8] Eisenberg, N., Fabes, R. A., &
Spinrad, T. L. (2006). Prosocial
References development. In N. Eisenberg (Vol. Ed.),
W. Damon & R. M. Lerner (Series Eds.),
[1] Afolabi, O. A. (2004). Influence of Handbook of child psychology: Social,
five factor personality attributes, need emotional, and personality development
for achievement and emotional (Vol. 3, pp. 646–718). New York: Wiley
intelligence on work team interaction
Page 297
[9] Gebauer, J. E., Riketta, M., Broemer,

P., Maio, G. R. (2008). Pleasure and [18] Weinstein,N &
pressure based prosocial motivation: Ryan,M.R.(2010).When helping helps:
Divergent relations to subjective Autonomous motivation for prosocial
wellbeing. Journal of Research in behavior and its influence on well being
Personality, 42, 399-420 for the helper and recipient Journal of
personality and social psychology,VoL98
[10] Hunter, K. I., & Lin, M. W. (1981).
Psychosocial differences between elderly [19] Williams, R. J. (2003). Women on
volunteers and non-volunteers. corporate boards of directors and their
International Journal of Aging and influence on corporate.
Human Development, 12, 205-213
[20] Zakriski, A. L., Wright, J. C., &
[11] Korte, C., & Kerr, N. (1975).
Underwood, M. K. (2005). Gender
Response to altruistic opportunities in
similarities and differences in children’s
urban and non-urban settings. The
social behavior: Finding personality in
Journal of Social Psychology, 95, 183-
contextual patterns of
184.
adaptation. Journal of Personality and
[12] Martin, K. & Huebner, E.S. (2007). Social Psychology, 88(5), 5844-855.
Peer victimization, prosocial experiences
and emotional well-being of Middle
school students. Psychology in the
Schools, 44, 199-208.
[13] Ma, H. K. (2005). The relation of

gender-role classifications to the
prosocial and antisocial behavior of
Chinese adolescents. The Journal of
Genetic Psychology, 166(2), 2189-202.
[14] Pursell, G. R., Laursen, B., Rubin, K.

H., Booth-LaForce, C., & Rose-Krasnor, L.
(2008). Gender difference in patterns of
association between prosocial behavior,
personality and externalizing
problems. Journal of Research in
Personality, 42(2), 2472-481.
[15] Rushton, J. P. (1982). Social

Learning Theory and the development of
prosocial behavior. In N. Eisenberg
(Ed.), The development of prosocial
behavior (pp. 77-105). New York:
Academic Press.
[16] Sprecher, S., Fehr, B. (2005).

Compassionate love for close others and
humanity. Journal of Social and Personal
Relationships, 22(5), 629-51.
[17] Valor, C. (2006). Why do managers

give? Applying prosocial behavior theory
to understand firm giving. International
Review on Public and Non Profit
Marketing, 3(1), 117-28.
Page 298
The Rise of Hindu Nationalism and New Indian Historiography: Lessons

for the Hindu Diaspora
Sabah Mushtaq
Research Scholar
Department of History
Quaid-i-Azam University, Islamabad
Sabahshah82@gmail.com
Page 299
Abstract
The contemporary ascent of religious-based Hindu nationalism in India has been one of the
reasons behind large scale conflict and violence directed against individuals from the minority
Muslim communities. This paper makes an attempt to investigate the historical roots of
communal violence – violence directed against individuals who belonged to different faiths –
and the historical evolution of identity based around being a 'Hindu'. I contend that identity
politics in India is the outcome of colonial construction of Indian society, and the contemporary
ascent of Hindu nationalism to hold state power. I also argue that sagacity drawn from new
Indian historiography needs to inform debates on "race" and “ethnicity” outside India and the
braiding of religious identities into rightist political movements ought to make us careful about
classifying groups with various histories on the premise of religion. I concentrate on the
movement based around the deity Ram and contend that the bolster given to this by individuals
from the Hindu Diaspora acted as a violent configuration which tried to restore perceived
historical wrongs through the platform of a religious-based nationalism.
Keywords: Hindu Nationalism; Communal violence; New Indian historiography; the Hindu
Diaspora.
1. Introduction formed by the Hindu elite in 1909 and later

on Hindu Mahasabha in 1915. The Hindu
India is viewed as a secular, tolerant, and Mahasabha and RSS became the ideological
pluralist state where Hindus are in majority. foundation of Hindutva. Kothari [2]
It is also known for its culture, ethnic,
religious, and linguistic diversity. Secularism As per Hindutva’s post colonial view of
in India has always faced resistance from the India, religious minorities were seen as the
parties based on Hindu nationalism such as second class citizens.
the BJP to acknowledge the primacy of
Hindu nationalism. Ludden [1] The Bharatiya Janata Party the BJP is a
party based upon Hindu nationalism. The
When it comes to the origin of Hindu main motivation of BJP has always been the
Nationalism, it emerged during the time replacement of secular Indian nation with
when the movement to get freedom from Hindu nationalism. In 1980s it was originally
the British rule started. Mohandas Karam founded as the Bharatiya Jana Sangh. In
Chand Ghandi recognized the need of all 1991 the BJP gained power in the Indian
inclusive movement in order to take might States Himanchal Pradesh, Utar Pradesh,
on the British. Despite having different Rajasthan, and Madhya Pradesh that
faiths and ideologies, many leaders such as major victory led to the decline of the
Abul Kalam Azad, MK Chand Gandhi, Congress Party’s political fortunes. The
Jawaharlal Nehru, Chandra Bose, Ambedkar symbolic and immediate goal of the BJP
joined this freedom movement that revolved through political platform was the
th
around Indian nationalism whose basis were destruction of a 15 century Babri Masjid in
liberty, equality, and fraternity. Many Ayodhya in 1992. Jaffrelot [3]
organizations came into existence in order
to get freedom. Subsequently, these The BJP aimed to replace the mosque with
organizations formed All Indian National the temple of Ram. The destruction of the
Congress in 1885. All Indian National mosque on 6 December, 1992 and a rampant
Congress was seen as an all inclusive power violence at the Muslim community led to the
to combat the colonial rule. In 1906 the mobilisation of Hindu nationalism. As the
Muslim elite formed All India Muslim League Hindu nationalism got strength with the
after realizing that they had no electoral victory of BJP, it became a grave
representation in the subcontinent. In threat to the security of the Muslim
reaction to this Punjab Hindu Sabha was community living in India. The consolidation
Page 300
of Hindu nationalism was focused more than untouchable); it likewise tries to rally these
the consolidation of the power of dominant divergent groups into supporting and
social classes in India. establishing a nation-state committed to the
union of the power of this recently arranged
political development.
Romila Thapar with her considerable
2. Communal violence in India knowledge of Indian History argues that the
The wresting of religious symbols into a invention of religious identities have been
political development and the endeavor at the part of political project that used
giving a particular sort of "historicity" to communalism as the basis for ideology. The
methological figures, (for example, the focal contemporary identification is the
figure of Ram in 'The Ramayan') have been construction of the 19th century, because no
basic stands for the intensified role of discernible and identifiable ‘Hindu
communal violence in contemporary Community’ existed before that. Romila
India.The activities of certain organs of the Thapar [5]
BJP gave further boost to them. Such kind of I will come back to the compound
political violence is thoroughly analyzed by enunciations and statements required in the
Paul R. Brass who is a professor at University process whereby the development of the
of Washington. As per him, there is a world communal ideology turned out to be
of difference between organizers whose aim naturally interlaced within the political
is to create a situation to be labelled as processes which emerged during the time of
“riots”, and those who want themselves to colonial rule. In the first place, I need to
be identified as “Pogroms”. Brass [4] He consider the political context in which the
states that the partition violence of 1947 Hindu nationalism has used its force against
also contributed to the communal violence the Muslim minorities living in India. This
in India. Many BJP ministers have been sets the parameters to the more extensive
apparently involved in such kind of violence intellectual issues included.
in India. When it comes to the intended
victims, Muslims have always been on the 3. The Ayodhya Movement
target of BJP. This systematic targeting of
the Muslim community can be identified On December 1991 a campaign started to
through voter’s list and other documents. In replace 15th century Babri Masjid with the
addition to this, many BJP leaders have temple of Ram in Ayodhya under the BJP
played the role of conversion specialists leader L.K Advani. The anti-Masjid stance of
while supporting the Hindu rioters.Paul R. the BJP outmanoeuvred the poddling
Bass [4] congress government of P.V. Narashima Rao
Hindu nationalism has been successful in who was known for his compromising
attitude after Rajiv Gandhi’s assassination in
mobilizing a large scale of Upper caste
1991. Brass [4]
Urban India against the other religious
In addition to this, the Gujarat election
communities. Arya Samaj was founded by
crisis of 2003 can be considered another
the Rashtriya Swayam Sevak Sangh in 1925
frightening but seminal event that helped
that aimed to rewrite of history in order to
enhance the power of BJP.
show that Hindus have a long history of
The Ayodhya temple was considered to be
persecution under the Mughals, the British
the birth place of the Hindu god Ram by
rule, and under the secular governance in
many devout Hindus, the incarnation of the
more contemporary times as well.Jafferlot
Hindu God Vishnu (Sacred icon of the BJP
[3]
Nationalist movement). It was believed by
The claim to a continuing history of
many Hindus that when the Mughal emperor
mistreatment of all those individuals
Babur came to Ayodhya in 16th century, he
incorporated into the category of "Hindu"
destroyed the Ayodhya temple and built
does not just deny the different and
mosque on the temple ruins. Paul R. Brass
conflicting interests of each one of those
[4]
social groups looked to be united inside one
Many Hindu nationalists have claimed that
religious ID (counting the past antyaj, the
such kind of incidents took place all over the
'tribal' communities, and in addition the
Page 301
subcontinent during the Muslim rule in India. When it comes to the parameters of political
This was the time when citizenry was discourse in India, they changed after the
mobilized against the Muslim community by destruction of Babri Masjid which ultimately
considering the destruction of Ayodhya led to the change in the nature of
temple a vivid symbol of wounds inflicted by intellectual discourse. Many efforts were
the Muslim invaders on the pride of Hindus. made to reshape the contours of civil
The destruction of the Masjid was pre- society, and to make dissent to an
planned and considered to be a chilling authoritarian Hindu Raj. The historical claim
success of the BJP in several respects. that Ayodhya was the place where the
During the Ayodhya movement all the mythological legend Ram got birth, and that
Muslims including traders, neighbourhoods, Babur built the mosque at that place after
locales, and workers experienced large scale demolishing the temple turned into an
violence throughout India. Some of the intense image of animosity, power and
worst violence was witnessed at Bombay and assertion by Hindu forces that sallied
Surat against the Muslim minority group. forward to restore a perceived 'historical'
Most affected palaces in Bombay were slums wrong. Even the police was no longer able to
in Jogeshwari, Dharavi, and Govandi. In stop violence against a significant religious
Govandi, police accompanied the supporters minority that constitutes approximately 12
of the Shiva Sena and opened fire. Brass [4] percent of Indian society. An aggressive
On 9 December, 46 hutments that belonged religious conciosuness in the Indian society
to the Muslim community were set on fire on was leading to the erosion of a decent
at Dharavi.Engineer [6] At Jogeshwari area civilized polity. Muslims were subjected to
on 18th February 1993, the tenements were ostensible discrimination.Francis Robbinson
demolished by the Bombay Municipal [9]
cooperation. Violence was done to both As a consequence of what happened at
people’s lives and property by the Shiva Ayodhya, Muslims became the second class
Sena, the police, and the members of the citizens in their own country. The political
municipal authority. One event occurred situation in India and even more,
outside the Surat city in train when persons concern at the rending apart of civil
who had the Muslim background were society led an academic scholarship to
targeted after being identified by dress and understand the beast named communalism.
circumcisions marks. Women from the
minority religious community also became 4. Communalism and Indian
the victim of this violence.Gurbir Singh [8] Historiography
While substantial areas of the middle classes
and the upwardly mobile castes were Concern over the communalisation of Indian
ensnared in this savagery against the political issues and Indian society has called
minority groups, sociological examination forth a complex and rich body of sociological
has indicated the aggrandising class nature and historical writings. This has gone beyond
of this assertion and the communalisation of taking a gander at the causing of communal
political issues as a portion of some major points of view in the period of colonial rule,
processes which have sustained into the anti to consider the very premises of Indian
Muslim violence. More than 2,000 Muslims nationalism, enunciated, anticipated and
became victims of the movement and got depicted in a conflicting process of liberal
assassinated. Engineer [6] meanings of citizenship and individual rights
This was the time when an effort was made and the tackling of religious identities and
by the BJP to assert an authoritarian ‘Hindu’ caste into the political development itself. It
face in the period of increased globalisation. is critically important to trace the changing
The structure of political identification and process that has a great impact on the
the imbrication of religion into the political history writings written on the basis of
system continue to affect the nature of civil religious identities and communal divisions.
society and electoral politics. Sarkar [8] The menacing hand of the British was seen
Therefore, it becomes critically important to by the both nationalists and communists in
comprehend and analyze the communalism encouraging separatist politics based on
and its forces in their historical processes. religious identification. Nehru ends his
Page 302
‘Autobiography’ (1936) with a stirring call to ‘The History of British India’ divides Indian
‘religion should be kept out of politics’ history into ‘Hindu’ and ‘Muslim’. Mill [14]
which is a classic example on this The colonial periodisation of Indian history
issue.Nehru [10] divided it into Muslim Civilization, Hindu
With the departure of the British, Civilization. A disjuncture was anticipated
consideration moved to debates regarding between the Hindu and the Muslim period
the part of the autonomous state in around 1200. There has been an
achieving the fundamental improvements in unquestioning acceptance of scheme until
living conditions. After independence India the late times when it was tried to be
witnessed many outbreaks of communal replaced, but there is an endeavour to
violence and the landed classes remained all reintroduce it with different labels. The
powerful. Naxalite movement started in historian Gyan Panday in his book, The
1960s when the newly independent state Construction of Communalism in Colonial
failed to implement radical land reforms. North India (1990), argues that by the end of
Naxalites greatly criticized the Indian the 19th century, the colonial writings
nationalist program and many other 19th depicted the Indian society as consisting of
century social reform movements that were two mutually hostile religious groups, the
associated with religiosity.Dutt [11] ‘Hindu’ and the ‘Muslim’. Pandey [13] This
Although the Naxalite movement was depiction led to the religious identification
brutally crushed by the state but its as being the driving force of history. Romila
intellectual critique was taken by many Thapar in her book, Somanatha: Many Voices
historians and intellectuals in various ways. of History (2002), contends that the oriental
The historical backdrop of partition (1947), approach viewed the Indian society
with all its attendant violent arrangements, consisting of two very diverse monolithic
lets us know much around a specific religious communities which were thought to
historical conjuncture within which social have their own beliefs, traditions and social
connections (precarious dependably, yet not structures; therefore the Indian history was
as a matter of course severed by religious analyzed as per a religious schema. Thapar
identities) were rent separated in particular [5]
urban and rural areas of North India.1 While this contention made progress in the
Memories of this period have additionally nineteenth century, with the backing of
deserted a legacy of politically Orientalist scholarship, it was additionally
communalised observations. While the joined by indigenous social reform
conditions of Gujarat and Maharashtra were movements, for example, the Arya Samaj
not specifically influenced by the partition which looked to "purge" religious convictions
(just like the Punjab and Bengal), the arrival both to make it good with the religion of the
and settlement of outcast groups, for colonizers, and to upgrade the degraded
example, the Sindhis within this area, and, a self-images of the rising middle classes. The
great deal all the more as of late, the Arya Samaj was especially capable to use its
feeding of historical feud through the power in the Punjab, giving the urban
mobilising of anti-Muslim sentiments around tarders a particular focus to a political
the temple of Somantha in Gujarat have assertion.Jones [15]
generalised the sense of a heightened social The Cow protection movement having close
divide. Butalia [12] links with the Arya Samaj also became one
of the reasons for a specific kind of
5. Communalism the colonial aggressive religious consciousness among the
construction people. Gyan [13]
As per Rajini Kothari, The identification of
In order to understand the roots of peoples by the colonial administrators and
communal politics, it is important to turn to ideologues helped various sections enter into
the colonial period. James Mill in his book the movements of self assertions in order to
enhance their status within the fabric of a
changing colonial society. Kothari [2]
Page 303
6. The Hindu Diaspora and ‘Ram’ events in order to support the Hindu
nationalists. One function was organized by
The aim has not only been unity among the the black Members of Parliament in Britain
Hindus residing within the boundaries of the to sanctify bricks enroute to Ayodhya.
Indian state under the banner of Ram, but Sardar [17]
attempts are made to build up a global The reliance of Hindu Diaspora has always
community of Hindus for whom a culturally been on its creative and intellectual class
assertive movement based around the for the public acknowledgement of its
demonstration of power provides an scattered and diffuse existence. At the
important point of identification. In the point when its changed and scattered
contemporary ascent of Hindu nationalism, histories and experiences are looked to be
the political programme of giving Ram a real bound and epitomized around the idea of a
topographical origin (in the town of particular religious identity ('Hindu
Ayodhya), and giving him a visible sign of his diaspora') then the different social,
power in the shape of a temple (based on regional,political and various cultural
the promised obliteration of the Babri histories of these groups are emptied into
masjid) was the one primary notable the prism of a solidly constructed religious
ideological force which launched the BJP identity. Parikh [18] There is in this way not
into political power. just a narrowing of intellectual and
The various communities settled abroad, in conceptual categories, additionally a
the Indian diaspora, have been implicated in disavowal of the complex experiential bases
this contemporary nationalist assertion too. of various groups possessing the Hindu
The Hindu diaspora did not only organize the diaspora, which experiential bases require
sending of bricks to Ayodhya, but also better investigation in sociological and
participated in religious functions and historical discourse
Conclusion this religious group. The history of the

evolution of this category, and the
I have endeavored to demonstrate the ideological stages that it has gained, I would
different political and historical processes propose, require at the very minimum a
which have prompted the construction of hesitation in the scholarly use of the
the category of 'the Hindu', contending not expression "Hindus" as a promptly valuable
just this essentialises the peoples of the category; whether at an illustrative or an
Indian sub-continent, yet this is inherently analytical level. The usage of this category
ensnared within the formation of a has had extensive ramifications in the
distinctive authoritarian nationalism. A focal structuring of social relationships in India
plank of this Hindu nationalism is to change and the Hindu diaspora. In an undeniably
the historical backdrop of the Indian sub globalized world, the obligation of turning
continent (and the histories of each one of away the continuing ascent of religious-
the individuals who fall within the ambit of based nationalism lies as much with
'the Hindu people group') so as to form these scholarly classes, and the world-perceptions
within a political movement devoted to the they anticipate, if what's to come is to be
compensation of perceived wrongs done to shorn of the dread it moves.
Page 304
15. Jones, Kenneth W. (1976) Arya

Dharm: Hindu Consciousness in
References Nineteenth Century
1. Kothari, Rajni. (1970) Caste in Indian Punjab, Berkeley: University of
Politics, Delhi: Orient Longmans. California Press.
2. Ludden, David (ed.). (1996) Making 16. Pandey Gyan (eds.) Subaltern Studies
India Hindu: Religion, Community, VII: Writings on South Asian History
and the Politics of Democracy in and
India, Delhi: Oxford University Press. Society, Delhi: Oxford University
3. Jaffrelot, Christoffer. (1966) The Press, pp.1–39.
Hindu Nationalist Movement in India, 17. Sarda, Har Bilas. (1906) Hindu
New York: Columbia UP. Superiority; An Attempt to
Determine the Position of the Hindu
4. Brass,Paul. R. (2003) The Production Race in the Scale of Nations, Delhi:
of Hindu-Muslim Violence in Kumar Brothers.
Contemporary India, London: 18. Parikh, P.C. (1982) The Nijanand Sect
U.Washington Press. and Saint Prananath, Jamnagar:
Khijada
5. Thapar, Romila. (2002) Somantha: Mandir.
the Many Voices of History, New
York: Versace.
6. Engineer, Irfan. (1994) 'Backward
Communities and Migrant Workers in
Surat Riots',
Economic and Political Weekly, 29 (22),
pp.1348–60.
7. Singh, Gurbir. (1993) 'Hindutva's Low-
Intensity War Against Bombay's Riot
Victims',
Economic and Political Weekly, 28
(19), pp.908–10.
8. Sarkar, Sumit. (1983) Modern India:
1885-1947, Delhi: Macmillan.
9. Robinson, Francis. (1974) Separatism
Among Indian Muslims. The Politics
of theUnited Provinces’ Muslims,
1860-1923, Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
10. Nehru, Jawarharlal. (1936) An

Autobiography, London: Bodley Head
11. Dutt, R. Palme. (1940) India Today,
London: Victor Gollancz.
12. Butalia, Urvashi. (1993) 'Community,
State and Gender: On Women's
Agency during
Partition', Economic and Political
Weekly, 28 (17), ws12–ws24.
13. Pandey, Gyan. (1990) The
Construction of Communalism in
Colonial North India,
Delhi: Oxford University Press.
14. Mil, James. (1826) The History of
British India, Vol 3, London:
Baldawin, Cradock, and Joy.
Page 305
Factors affecting the child’s nutritional status: Evidence from PDHS-2013

Muhammad Shahid1, Rashida Haq2
P P P
1
M.Phil. Scholar
P P
Department of Health Economics

Pakistan Institute of Development Economics (PIDE)
Muhammadshahid_15@pide.edu.pk
2
PSenior Research Economist
P
Pakistan Institute of Development Economics (PIDE)

rashida@pide.org.pk
ABSTRACT
The nutritional status of children is an important indicator of health status of the
community and human resource development of a new generation. Pakistan is a
developing country with second highest infant and child mortality and morbidity rate in
South Asia. In Pakistan, overall 45 percent of children under age 5 are stunted, 11 percent
are wasted, and 30 percent are underweight as reported in Pakistan Demographic Health
Survey (PDHS), 2013. The objective of this study is to examine the impact of different
factors on nutritional status of both male and female children under age five on the basis
of data from PDHS 2013. In methodology, a composite index of anthropometric failure
(CIAF) is constructed for measuring child malnutrition and a logistic regression model is
employed to examine the probability of malnutrition. Results show that child lower weight
at time of birth, lower birth interval, higher number of children in house and child age are
sensitive to increase the malnutrition in both male and female children. Similarly, mother
education, richest economic status of house hold, small household size, less number of
children below age of 5 years, mother employment status and female headed household
cause decrease in the probability of malnutrition. A need of multi-dimension plan for
solving this issue i.e. implementing nutritional programs focusing not only child nutrition
but also mother nutrition, poverty reduction, mother’s awareness programs regarding
their own health as well as children’s health.
Keywords: CIAF, PDHS, BMI, Malnutrition, Binary Logistic model
1. INTRODUCTION
2T child would show a higher susceptibility
to ill health, and delayed mental and
The The nutritional status of children physical growth, and inclined to become
under age 5 is an important indicator of an anemic adult (World Bank 1994). It is
children’s health. Globally, child considered that if malnutrition occurs
malnutrition is the major cause of child during first two years of child age or
mortality. It is described as a condition during pregnancy, there will be
that is caused by taking an unbalanced permanent problem of mental and
diet lacking certain nutrients. It is also an physical development. Therefore, much
indicator of poverty. Generally, it is more importance is given to mother body
observed that poverty, malnutrition, and mass index (BMI) and her nutrition during
disease are so closely interlinked with pregnancy so that it can bear healthy
each other that they all need to be child. The outcomes of malnutrition not
addressed simultaneously (Rice et al. only affects the single child but also is
2000). Malnutrition is a multi-faceted transferred from one generation to
issue. Mother’s nutritional status affects another particularly female malnutrition
the unborn child, and a low birth weight e.g. malnourished girl to malnourished
Page 306
mother that born malnourished child inequality among children are some of
(Khan and Raza, 2014). In most of the the most important reasons. Child’s
developing countries, the women play malnutrition is directly linked to low
dual roles, providing care to their
family income, mother illiteracy and
children and earning incomes. Men are
primarily given only the role of earning large family size that causes to higher
income, and mostly they are less involved mortality and morbidity rate. In Pakistan,
in child care, especially child under age mortality rate among children under age
five (Evans 1995a; Anandalakshmy 1994; five is 72 per 1000 children that are
Olmsted and Weikart 1995). The mother’s higher as compared to other regional
primary role is of providing care to their countries (Khan,A. 2014). In Pakistan,
children, but when they participate in
several factors are linked with child poor
labor force, they are unable to spare
sufficient time for breast feeding and health during diseases. Nutritional
preparing nutritional foods for their problems of women such as iron
children. The quality and quantity of care deficiency, lower body mass index during
provided to the children might be pregnancy period affect children’s health
insufficient. So, the women, who choose inversely. A malnourished mother’s
to participate in labor force, have to pay children are more likely to face lower
an opportunity cost in the form of their
resistance to infection, mental
children’s poor nutritional status. It is
highly observed from previous studies weakening, higher hazard of diseases and
that female children are more mortality and short stature in whole life.
malnourished compared to male child The culture and norms of Pakistani
due to gender discrimination at household also associated to malnutrition
household level i.e. differentiation in during illness. The believes of people to
caring practices during illness, unequal
restrict some particular food during
food distribution among male and female
child. Malnutrition in girls in their adult illness for example breast milk should not
age or in reproductive age, can causes to give to children during diarrhea and milk
create vicious cycle of under nutrition and rice should not give during fever.
and poverty (Mehrotra 2006, Choudhury Although these essential nutrients are
et.al 2000).The positive impact of important for child during illness since it
increase in household income by working helps to early recovery from disease but
women may overweigh the negative
the restriction from food not only causes
impact of providing insufficient time for
child care (Glick 2002). In developing to malnutrition but also causes to late
countries, children and adults are in recovery from illness (Hirani, 2012). .
danger to malnutrition because of short Childhood malnutrition causes to create
dietary intakes, infectious diseases, lack higher chances of vast array of illness like
of appropriate care, and unbalanced heart diseases, failure of organs and
distribution of food within the household. diabetes later in life (Latham and Cobos,
Children’s nutritional status is a
1971). In Pakistan, overall 45 percent of
replication of their overall health. When
children have access to a sufficient food children under age 5 are stunted, 11
supply, are not exposed to repeated percent are wasted, and 30 percent are
illness, and are well cared for, they reach underweight (PDHS 2013).
their growth potential and are considered
well nourished (Khan and Raza, 2014). 2. DATA AND METHODOLOGY
In Pakistan the causes of malnutrition are
poverty; population growth; lack of To measure the major objectives which
sufficient food; burden of diseases; are; 1) to analyze factors affecting on
illiteracy; environmental damage i.e. CIAF, and 2) to analyze the impact of
lack of safe drinking water; and different factors on nutritional status of
Page 307
both Male and female children under age 2.2 Construction of Wealth Index
five, the data was taken by PDHS(2012- In DHS, this index was constructed on the
13) for our two models Male and female. basis of household asset data including
The sample size for our two model male ownership of a number of consumer items
child and female child are 1128, and 1099 ranging from a television to a bicycle or
respectively. Binary logistic regression is car, as well as dwelling characteristics,
used in our two models. In the logistic such as source of drinking water,
regression the results for CIAF determine sanitation facilities, and type of material
the probability to increase used for flooring. It is an indicator of the
anthropometric failure in both male and level of wealth that is consistent with
female child. CIAF is our dependent expenditure and income measures
variable. (Rutstein, 1999).
2.1 Construction of CIAF (Composite Econometric Models:

index of Anthropometric
Failure) Use Following two econometric models
are estimated in our research:
For estimating prevalence of malnutrition
in children, a CIAF index is generated. It Model-1(Male child malnutrition)
is used as indicator of nutritional value
According to WHO standards (2006) in CIAF (male child) = β 0 GOC ij + β1
CIAF three indices are measured in form
R R R R R R R R
of Z-Score. These three are expressed as CAM ij +β 2 SCAM ij + β 3 BON ij + β 4 MAGE ij +

follows:
R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
1) Stunning(chronic malnutrition) if β 5 MEL ij + β 6 MBMI ij +β 7 MES ij + β 8 AOW ij +

height for age Z-score<-2 standard
R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
deviation (SD) β 9 DSWOE ij + β 10 RTI ij + β 11 TPR ij + β 12 NCF ij +

2) Wasting(Acute malnutrition) if
weight for height Z-score < -2 SD β 13 WI ij + β 14 HDR ij + Ɛ ij -- ----- (1)

3) Underweight(Any protein-energy
R R R R R R R R R R
malnutrition) if weight for age Z- Model-2(Female child malnutrition)

score < -2 SD
But these three may not provide CIAF (female child) = β 0 GOC ij + β 1 CAM ij
comprehensive estimation. According
R R R R R R R R R R
to CIAF classification, children are +β 2 SCAM ij + β 3 BON ij + β 4 MAGE ij + β 5 MEL ij +

divided into seven groups which are
as follows: β 6 MBMI ij + β 7 MES ij + β 8 AOW ij + β 9 DSWOE ij +

A: No Failure, B: Stunted only, C:
Wasting only, D: Underweight only, E: β 10 RTI ij + β 11 TPR ij + β 12 NCF ij + β 13 WI ij +

Stunted and underweight, F: wasting

and underweight, and last is G: β 14 HDR ij + Ɛ i ----(2)
R R R R R R
stunting, wasting, and underweight.

The total measure of child 3 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
malnutrition prevalence is calculated
Our sample size for Model 1 is 1128 male
by combinations of all except group
children and for Model 2 are 1099 female
A. It is binary variable use “1” if child
children of age under five years. Out of
is malnourished otherwise use “0” if
total fifteen variables in combine male
child is not malnourished.
and female models, twelve show
significant results for our dependent
variable, CIAF.
Page 308
MDSRC ‐ 2016 Proceedings, 16‐17 November, 2016 Wah/Pakistan
Table 1: Binary Logit Regression Results for CIAF for Male Child and Female Child
(Model 1and 2)
Results for CIAF for Male Child Results for CIAF for Female Child
CIAF Coefficient S.E p-value Coefficient S.E p-value
1. CAM (Continuous
0.4401 0.1707 0.010* 0.3730 0.1671 0.026**
variable)
2. SCAM (Continuous
-0.0449 0.0198 0.023** -0.0289 0.0195 0.139
variable)
3. BON (Count variable) 0.0387 0.0961 0.687 0.2352 0.0955 0.014**
4. MAGE (Continuous
-0.0225 0.0744 0.763 -0.0834 0.0738 0.259
variable)
5. MEL (No education-reference)
Primary 0.1535 0.1967 0.435 0.0585 0.1998 0.770
Secondary -0.4855 0.2071 0.019** -0.4951 0.1983 0.013**
Higher -0.206 0.2616 0.432 -0.4930 0.3109 0.113
6. MBMI(Below 18.5
-0.6099 0.2085 0.003* -0.6889 0.2028 0.001*
kg/m2-reference)
7. AOW (No-reference) -0.3708 0.1774 0.037** 0.0159 0.1842 0.931
8. DSWOE(Not
-0.7982 0.2544 0.002* 0.0376 0.2590 0.885
involved-reference)
9. RTI (No-reference) -0.3686 0.1601 0.021** -0.3172 0.1572 0.044**
10. TPR (rural-
0.3561 0.1563 0.023** 0.1184 0.1567 0.450
reference)
11. NCF (Count
0.0788 0.0666 0.237 0.0645 0.0654 0.324
variable)
12. HDR (No-reference) -0.1463 0.1592 0.358 0.3557 0.1672 0.033**
13. WI (poorest-reference)
Poorer -0.1944 0.2010 0.334 -0.2872 0.1922 0.135
Middle -0.5239 0.2213 0.018** -0.2781 0.2170 0.200
Richer -0.7138 0.2387 0.003* -0.7228 0.2327 0.002*
0 0
Richest -1.2982 0.000* -0.8266 0.002*
.2858 .2706
14. MES 0.4386 0.2340 0.057*** -0.1660 0.2320 0.474
15. GOC (Female-
0.212 0.0904 0.019** 0.212 0.0904 0.019**
reference)
No. of No. of observations=1099
Prob>Chi2= 0.0000
observations=1128 Prob>Chi2= 0.0000
LR Chi2 (19 )= Pseudo R2=
LR Chi2 (19 )= 114.55 Pseudo R2= 0.0750
102.32 0.0676
(*, **, and *** represent significance level at 1 percent, 5 percent, and 10 percent
respectively)
Page 309
3.1 Child’s Age (CAM) more care, better diet, and proper
medication if required.
There is positive and significant
association in child age and malnutrition 3.5 Child’s Birth-order (BON)
in both models. As child’s age increases,
the probability of malnutrition also Our analysis shows that the birth-order in
increases as shown by our results. Child only female child model is positively and
malnutrition increases up to a certain significantly related with risk of being
age, and then start decreasing. Our malnourished in Pakistan, while in male
results are consistent with Garcia and model it is not significant. (see also
Alderman (1989); Wamani, et al. (2004); Ukwuani, et. al. 2003). It means that
Rahman and Chowdhury (2007); Hien and more children a woman bears, the higher
Hoa (2009); and Das, et al.(2011). It will be the probability of child
reflects that most of parents are failing malnutrition for the child with higher
to fulfill prime food requirements of their birth order.
children by increase in child’s age.
3.6 Received Tetanus Injection (RTI)
3.2 Mothers body Mass Index (MBMI)
Negative and significant results in both
A healthy mother bears a healthy child. models shows that a woman having
Our results have shown that MBMI tetanus vaccination will bear a child
negatively influence the risk of with better health status. The child
malnutrition in both models. Same is the having such type of vaccination before
result of our analysis, negative and birth has more immunity against
significant for child malnutrition (Victora, diseases than those not having.
et. al. 2008; Mbuya, et. al. 2010; and Das
and Rahman, 2011). 3.7 Had diarrhea recently (HDR)
3.3 Mother’s Education Level (MEL) In female model diarrhea affect CIAF
positively and significantly, but not in
In both models, only one category of male. It shows that a female child who
mother’s education level, i.e., secondary has diarrhea recently has more
education level, shows significant and probability to be malnourished than the
negatively association with child one who has not. Diarrhea becomes
malnutrition. The findings by Mukherjee, more dangerous if the child belongs to a
et. al. (2008) supported the results by poor family. The child loses a number of
explaining that educated females get minerals, and in this situation she needs
married late than illiterates. Early child a better diet to overcome the weakness.
birth affects both child and mother’s But the poor families mostly treat
health. Educated women have higher female child discriminately.
child interval and fewer children and can
do better child health-care and medical 3.8 Asset Owned by woman and
consideration. Decision to spend Woman’s Own
Earning
3.4 Wealth Index (WI) There is negative and significant relation
of asset ownership of a woman and her
All categories of wealth index show involvement in decision-making on CIAF
negative association with CIAF, the last in male child model, but is not significant
three categories in male child model and in female model. It reveals that child
last two categories in female are malnutrition will be tackled if the woman
significant. It reveals that the families, has economic empowerment. She can
with better economic status have more more freely spend on her child’s food,
resources to provide their children with medication, and other requirements.
Page 310
3.9 Type of Place of Residence(TPR) nutritional status of female children

compared to males in several studies (El –
In male child model, the significant and Sayed et al. (2001); Marcoux, (2002); and
positive results for urban residence show
Babatunde et al. (2011).
that a child living in urban area has
more probability of being malnourished.
4 CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION
Our result controverts with Makoka, B.
(2013). The justification of this result is Malnutrition in early age results in poor
that there is more population burden on health in young age causing burden on
urban areas as compared to the rural the household as well as the economy.
areas. As a result, shortage of Better nutritional status of a child
employment opportunities for increased improves household economic and social
urban population. Another reason is welfare, which in turn raises the overall
pollution factor in urban areas. economic welfare. The regression results
of above two models shows that
3.10 Number of Children under Five malnutrition is positively associated with
(NCF) child age (in months), gender of child
(for both male and female model), and
A child living in a household with higher birth order number, had diarrhea
number of children under five is more recently (for only female). While there is
likely to be malnourished. It reflects significant and negative effect of square
that a lower birth interval results in of child, mother’s educational level
more number of children under age five (secondary level), received tetanus
in a household. It reduces the per capita injections, and wealth index for richer
food availability as well as the care for and richest category (for both male and
the children. female model), while decision to spend
women’s own earning and assets
3.11 Mother’s Employment Status ownership by women(for only male
(MES) model). Considering all above there are
some recommendation to improve the
The positive and significant association of nutrition of children are as follows:
mother’s employment status in male • For mothers’ awareness, more easy
child model shows that the mothers access of girls to secondary education
belong to poor families, where their is strongly recommended. For this
incomes are all spent in meeting other purpose, government should strictly
household expenditures rather for their observe the working of schools in
children nutritional requirements (Abbi rural areas. Governmental and non-
et al. 1991; and Rabiee and Geissler, governmental organization should
1992). The results are not significant establish formal and informal income
Model 2. generating sector for women in rural
and slums areas with better wage
3.12 Gender of Child (GOC) rates.
There is positive and significant • Health awareness programs are
association of gender of child in both needed to be organized. The major
models with CIAF. Generally, boys are causes of diarrheal and several
considered to be favored by mothers, so infectious diseases are lack of mother
their probability to be malnourished is education and awareness.
supposed to be less than the girls. But
• Property right should be practically
the results are opposite in our analysis.
given to the women for their
The results show that the male children empowerment. Economically strong
are more likely to be malnourished as mothers spend more on their
compare to their female counterpart. children’s health.
There has been evidence of a better
Page 311
5. REFERENCES
[1] Abbi, R., Christian, P., Gujral, S., [8] Glick, P. (2002). Women’s
& Gopaldas, T. (1991). The impact Employment and Its Relation to
of maternal work status on the Children’s Health and Schooling in
nutrition and health status of Developing Countries: Conceptual
children. Food and Nutrition Links, Empirical Evidence, and
Bulletin.113(1),20-25. Policies.
[2] Anandalakshmy, S. (1994). The [9] Hien, N. N. and Hoa, N. N. (2009)
girl child and the family. An Nutritional Status and
action research study. Delhi, Determinants of Malnutrition
India:Department of Women and inChildren Under Three Years of
Child Development, Ministry of Age in Nghean, Vietnam. Pakistan
Human Resource Development, Journal of Nutrition, 8(7), 958-
Government of India 964.
[3] Bose and Mandal. (2010) Proposed [10] Hirani, S.A.A. (2012) Malnutrition
new anthropometric indices of in young Pakistani children.
childhood under nutrition. Mal Journal of Ayub Medical Collage,
Journal of Nutrition. 16(1): 131- Abbottabad. 24(2): 150-153.
136.
[4] Babatunde, R.O., F. I. Olagunja, [11] Khan, Ahmed. (2014) Health &
S. B. Fakayode, and Sola-Ojo. F.E. Nutrition: Pakistan Economic
(2011) Prevalence and
Survey 2013-14. Government of
Determinants of Malnutrition
among under five children of Pakistan, Ministry of Finance.
farming household in Kwara State, (11): 167-177.
Nigeria. Journal of Agriculture
Sciences, 3(3): 173-181. [12] Khan, E.A., & M.A. Raza. (2014)
[5] Evans, J. (1995). Men in the lives Nutritional status of children in
ofchildren.Coordinator’s Notebook Bangladesh: Measuring composite
no. 16, Consultative Group on index of anthropometric failure
Early Childhood Care and (CIAF) and its determinants.
Development, available from Pakistan Journal of Commerce
http://www.ecdgroup.com and Social Science. 8(1): 11-23.
[6] El-Sayed, N., Ashry Gad Mohamed, [13] Latham, M.C, and F. Cobos. (1971)
Leila Nofal, Ahmed Mahfouz, and The effects of malnutrition on
Hamdy Abou Zeid, 2001, intellectual development and
Malnutrition among Pre-school learning. American Journal of
Children in Alexandria, Egypt, J Public Health. 61(7): 1307- 1324.
HEALTH POPUL NUTR;Vol 19, No.
4, pp 275-280. [14] Makoka, B. (2013) The impact of
maternal education on child
[7] Garcia, M. and Alderman, H.
nutrition: Evidence from Malawi,
(1989) Patterns and Determinants
of Malnutrition in Children in Tanzania and Zimbabwe. DHS
Pakistan: Impact of Community Working Papers. Working paper
Health. Pakistan Development No. 84.
Review, 28(4), 891-902.
[15] Mbuya, M. N. N., Chidem, M.,
Chasekwa, B. and Mishra, V.
(2010) Biological, Social, and
Environmental Determinants of
Low Birth Weight and Stunting
Page 312
among Infants and Young Children International Journal for Equity in

in Zimbabwe. Zimbabwe Working Health, 3(1),9.
Papers. Calverton, Maryland, USA. [23] World Bank. (1994) A New Agenda
for Women’s Health and Nutrition
[16] Mukherjee, M. R., Chaturvedi, L. Development in
C. S. and Bhalwar, C. R. (2008) Practice.Washington D. C.: World
Bank.
Determinants of Nutritional Status
of School Children. Medical [24] WHO, the Multicenter Growth
Journal of Armed Forces India, Reference Study Group: WHO
64(3), 227-231. Child Growth Standards:
Length/Height-for-Age, Weight-
[17] Rabiee, F., & Geissler, C. (1992). for-Age, Weight-for-Length,
The impact of maternal workload Weight-for-Height and Body Mass
on child nutrition in rural Iran. Index-for-Age: Methods and
Food and Nutrition Bulletin. 14(1), Development. Geneva: World
43-48. Health Organization, 2006.
[18] Rahman, A. and Chowdhury, S. Available at:
(2007) Determinants of Chronic http://www.who.int/childgrowth
Malnutrition among Pre-school /standards/
Children in Bangladesh. Journal of
Biosocial Sciences, 39, 161-173. [25] Das, S. and Rahman, R. M. (2011)
[19] Rutstein, S.O. (2005) Effects of Application of Ordinal Logistic
preceding birth interval on Regression Analysis in Determining
neonatal infant and under five Risk Factors of Child Malnutrition
Years of mortality and nutritional in Bangladesh. Nutritional
status in developing countries: Journal,10,124.
Evidence from the Demographic [26] Olmsted, P. P., & Weikart, D. P.,
and health survey. International eds. (1995). Families speak. Early
Journal of Gynecology and childhood care and Education in
Obstetrics. 89: S7-S24. eleven countries. Ypsilanti, MI:
[20] Ukwuani, F. A., and Suchindran, High/Scope Press.
C. M. (2003) Implications of [27] Mehrotra,S. (2006) Child
Women's Work for Child malnutrition and gender
Nutritional Status in Sub-Saharan discrimination in South Asia.
Africa: A Case Study of Nigeria. Economic and Political Weekly.
Social Science and Medicine, 912-918.
56(10), 2109-2121. [28] Choudhury, K.K ., M.A. Hanifi., S.
[21] Victora, G. C., Adair, L., Fall, C., Rasheed, and A. Bhuiya. (2000)
Hallal, C. P., Martorell, R., L. Gender inequality and Severe
Richter, and Sachdev, S. H. (2008) malnutrition among children in
Maternal and Child Under- rural area of Bangladesh. Journal
nutrition: Consequences for Adult of Health Population and
Health and Human Capital. Nutrition. 18(3): 123-130.
Lancet, 371,340-357. [29] Marcoux, A. 2002 “Sex
[22] Wamani, H., Tylleskär, T., Differentials in Undernutrition: A
Åstrøm, A. N., Tumwine, J. K., Look at Survey Evidence”
and Peterson, S. (2004) Population and Development
Mothers’Education but not Review, Vol. 28, No. 2. pp. 275-
Fathers’ Education, Household 284.
Assets or Land Ownership is the [30] Rutstein,S.O., & Haggerty, P. A.
Best Predictor of Child Health (1999).Breastfeeding and
Inequalities in Rural Uganda. complementary infant feeding and
the postpartum effects of
breastfeeding.
Page 313
A Comparative Study of Teacher’s Performance in Government and Private Schools of

Islamabad
Munazza Aslam1, Sidrah Aslam2 P P P
1
PDepartment of Education, University of Wah
P
munazaaslam@ymail.com
3T 3T
2
P P
International Islamic University Islamabad

sidrahaslam92@hotmail.com
3T 3T
ABSTRACT
The study was conducted to investigate the comparison of teacher’s performance in
government and private schools of Islamabad at secondary level. The aim of the study was
to motivate the teachers for increasing the quality level of their performance. The study
was quantitative in nature. The simple random technique was used to collect data from
(N=50) students and (N=50) teachers from different government and private schools of
Islamabad. Two self developed questionnaires were pilot tested then applied in the study.
One questionnaire was for teachers and the other for the students of government and
private schools of Islamabad. The results revealed that there is a minor difference
between the performance of government and private school teachers of Islamabad.
Keywords: Teacher performance, Government school teachers, Private school teachers.
1. INTRODUCTION The aim of present study is to

investigate the comparative performance
In Pakistan Islamabad has the of teachers in government and private
highest literacy rate which is 87%.in this schools of Islamabad at Secondary level.
city there is a large number of public and Present study provides comprehensive
private sector institutions. These higher information and understanding of
education institutions are either federally comparison between performances of
chartered or administered by private teachers at secondary level of education
organizations and approximately all of in Islamabad.
these are recognized by the Higher
Performance of the teachers
3T
Education Commission of Pakistan, High

“Refers to identification with, and
3T
schools and colleges are either affiliated

involvement in the teaching occupation.”
with the Federal Board of Intermediate
Jay [4]. In this study, “the performance
3T
and Secondary Education or with the UK

of teachers is considered as the act of
3T 3T
Universities Education Boards O/A Levels.

scheming, lesson planning, and
3T
Page 314
assessment of students through giving of Islamabad. Teacher is the main factor

tests, exercises and participation in co- in the achievement of students. The good
curricular activities of the schools.” Jay quality of education depends upon the
[4]. good quality of teachers. The quality of
education is always considered a central
Performance is measured by what tissue in system of education. The quality
teachers actually do in the classroom, of education is more and more judged by
and it have been found to be connected focusing on performance of teachers,
to later teacher’s effectiveness, there what teachers actually teach, and how
are a lot of effective tools for evaluating well the students learn. There are
competence of teachers and readiness as number of studies conducted with the
well as for supporting needed changes in aim of investigating how value in
teacher education. Darling-Hammond [2]. education of teachers is achieved.
Raising the teacher’s performance Very high number of teachers at
is perhaps the policy direction most likely secondary school level has no
to lead to considerable benefits in professional qualification. By conducting
student’s learning. It is very important to a research in Pakistan, it is explored that
know the strengths of teacher and those there was no clear difference in quality
aspects of their practices which could be between trained and untrained teachers.
further developed. From this perspective, They are given very low salaries paid to
establishing the institution of teacher’s teachers and tended to be no immediate
evaluation is a essential step in the drive desires among unqualified teachers to
to improve the effectiveness and improve them academically or
efficiency of teaching and learning and professionally.
raising educational standards. Quality of teacher’s performance in
Education follows these five elements.
Performance is the responsibility o Humanizing the teacher’s
of job and duties are carried out by the performance and standards of
teacher. The teachers provide classroom teaching.
instructions and promote progress of o Improving the standards of
student. The Teacher’s Performance knowledge and the performance of
Assessment System provides teachers students.
with significant assessment that o Providing the relevant curriculum
encourages professional growth and that can fulfill the needs of
learning. The process is designed to consumers.
encourage development of teacher and o Facilitating the teachers with
identifying the opportunities for further modern AV Aids
support where it is needed. By helping o Improving the teacher’s salaries
the teachers to achieve their full according to their qualifications
potential, the performance assessment
development provides one element for It is expected that by improving
achieving higher level performance of the quality of all these five elements will
student. repeatedly improve the quality of
performance teacher’s in system of
There is a growing concern in the education.
difference of the performance of
government and private school teachers
Page 315
There are many factors that to significant cost savings for the
effect the job performance of teachers government in the prerequisite of
such as ability outlook, mastery in education. The authors also noted that
subject matter, methodology of teaching, despite the growth in private schools,
personal characteristics, setting of educational institutions still did not
classroom, , individuality, general mental service large proportions of the country’s
ability, relationship with students, population, particularly troublesome was
planning and research, efficiency and the segregation of girls in rural areas. In
effectiveness in presenting subject this situation the government or public
matter, relationship with other schools plays an important role.
employees, self improvement,
relationship with community and parents, “Public schools and colleges are
poise, intellectual ability, techniques of managed by federal or provincial
teaching, student interaction, proficiency government’s bodies”. Iqbal [3].
in teaching, motivational skills, fairness Education is free up to
in evaluation and attitude of teachers matriculation level in public schools. In
towards the students. Public schools majority of students that
are enrolled belongs to middle and lower
In Pakistan there are number of middle class families. Education in public
schools which are designated as Public- schools is better at secondary level than
Private Partnership (PPP) schools. These private schools. Class size is usually very
schools are often categorized as private large in public schools. Maximum public
schools in that their control and school heads have people-oriented/
management does not lie with democratic leadership style. They plan
government but rather with educational and implement the department policies
entrepreneurs, NGOs or philanthropists and monitor the school functions.
are interested in improving the quality of The results of earlier researches
education in the country. Where these showed that there is no difference in
PPP schools differ from other private existence of appraisal systems of public
schools is that their students do not pay and private secondary schools but
fees directly. Amjad , MacLeod [6]. implementation of assessment system is
The schools which are established, different in private and public sectors. It
is being applied in more strict way in
4T
conducted, and supported by a non-

governmental agency are known as private schools. The classroom
Private Schools. Private school is defined environment of both sector schools is
better, Khan [5] .Without good and
4T
as a school that is owned and operated

by a private person, firm, association, qualified teachers the education system
organization/ corporation, rather than by cannot be transformed quality of
a public agency or institution. education cannot be improved. In public
sector schools a series of educational
In two related papers, Jimenez reforms in the area of teacher education
and Tan (1985, 1987) investigated the were introduced but they failed to make
role of private education in Pakistan. any substantial impact on the teacher’s
Based on a school mapping exercise quality and teaching process. Awan [1].
conducted in 1983, the authors noted a
large boost in the number of private
schools after denationalization, leading
Page 316
2. METHODOLOGY Instrument of the Research

23T
2.1. Research Design Two self made questionnaires

were employed in this study, one
This study was of quantitative
questionnaire for teachers and the other
type. The survey method was used
for students. The questionnaires were
to collect the data from the
close ended. Questionnaires were
government and private schools of
prepared at five point scale. The
Islamabad.
questionnaires were started with
2.2. Objectives Personal Information from the sample.
o To investigate the teachers 2.5. Data collection

23T
performance in government
2.5.1. Pilot Testing
schools.
23T
o To investigate the teachers The questionnaire for teachers

performance in Private schools. was pilot tested on the 20 selected
o To compare the performance of samples of teachers. After some
teachers in government and correction the questionnaire was
private schools. conducted. In the same way, the
questionnaire for student was pilot
2.3. Hypothesis
tested by on 20 selected samples of
• There is no difference between students.
the performance of government
school teachers and private 2.5.2.
23T Administration of Student
school teachers. Questionnaire
• The performance of private The researcher personally visited
school teachers is higher than the the government and private schools of
government school teachers. Islamabad. The questionnaire were
delivered to the target samples and later
2.4. Population
on collected by hand.
The convenient sampling technique
was used to collect the data from 2.5.3. Administration of Teachers
23T
different government and private Questionnaire

schools of Islamabad. Both male and
The researcher personally visited
female teachers and students were
the government and private schools of
taken as a sample of the study.
Islamabad. The questionnaires were filled
in front of researchers.
2.4.1 Sample of the selected population
Students: 40 Students of 2.5.4. Statistical
23T Analysis of the
government and private schools of Questionnaire
Islamabad were selected through
Percentage method was used to
the convenient sampling.
analyze the collected data. Five point
Teachers: 40 Teachers of Likert scales were used to collect the
government and private schools of data. Scale values assigned to each of the
Islamabad were selected through five responses were as: Strongly agree
the convenient sampling.
Page 317
5),Agree (4), Disagree (3), strongly

disagree (2) and Uncertain (1).
3. RESULTS
Table 1:
Teacher’s Questionnaire:
Sr.No Statements Schools SA A N DA SDA
Government 45% 45 10% 0% 0%

1. Employment satisfaction
Private 10% 65% 15% 10% 0%
Government 10% 50% 40% 0% 0%

2. Improvement in teaching
Private 20% 40% 25% 15% 0%
Government 45% 45% 1% 0% 0%

3. Knowledge and understanding
Private 60% 40% 0% 0% 0%
Government 15% 60% 15% 0% 0%

4. Dealing with students
Private 70% 20% 5% 0% 0%
Government 15% 55% 25% 0% 0%

5. Teaching in multicultural setting
Private 35% 35% 20% 0% 5%
6. Government 15% 80% 5% 0% 0%

Confident role image
Private 50% 35% 5% 0% 0%
Government 5% 35% 35% 15% 5%

7. Lack of confidence
Private 25% 35% 15% 20% 5%
Government 15% 60% 15% 5% 0%

8. Relaxed style
Private 30% 65% 0% 0% 0%
Government 35% 60% 5% 0% 0%

9. Environment of understanding
Private 30% 70% 0% 0% 0%
Government 20% 75% 0% 0v% 5%

10. Ask questions
Private 60% 35% 5% 0% 0%
Page 318
Government 20% 60% 15% 0% 5%

11. Provide activities
Private 50% 35% 10% 5% 0%
Government 10% 70% 20% 0% 0%

12. Teach through experiments
Private 20% 70% 10% 0% 0%
Government 15% 30% 25% 10% 10%

13. Private schools provide more facilities
Private 55% 15% 20% 5% 0%
Government 15% 40% 30% 10% 0%

14. Government schools are better
Private 5% 15% 45% 30% 5%
Government 10% 75% 5% 5% 0%

15. Avail opportunities
Private 45% 40% 15% 0% 0%
Government 10% 50% 25% 15% 0%

16. Take role in school development
Private 30% 40% 15% 0% 5%
Government 10% 55% 20% 10% 5%

17. Participate in a training plan
Private 25% 60% 10% 5% 0%
Government 20% 35% 20% 20% 5%

18. Receive monetary and non monetary rewards
Private 30% 25% 15% 15% 15%
Government 20% 25% 5% 30% 20%

19. More innovative
Private 20% 30% 20% 10% 15%
Government 35% 50% 5% 10% 0%

20. Background knowledge of the students
Private 30% 30% 35% 5% 0%
Page 319
1. Finding no 1 and 4 helps to 7. Finding no 17 helps to conclude

conclude that both government that private school teacher
and private school teachers are participates in training programs
equally satisfied with their but government school teacher
teaching profession and always some time don’t participate s in
dealing with students in a good these programs.
and professional way.
2. Finding no 5 and 16 helps to

conclude that government and
private both equally take role in
school development and they can
teach in multicultural setting.
3. Finding 3, 6,9,11 and 15 helps to

conclude that the government and
private both equally avail
opportunities from the school and
also they provide activities to for
effective learning. And both
creates learning environment and
also they presents a confident
role image.
4. Finding no 7 and 19 shows that

both government and private
school teachers are more
innovative but in some situations
they feel lack of confidence.
5. Finding no 14 helps to conclude

that government school teachers
feels that the government schools
are better but private school
teachers feels that the
government schools are not better
then private schools.
6. Finding no 8,12 and 20 helps to

conclude that both government
and private school teachers
teaches through experiment and
thinks that the background
knowledge of the students is very
helpful in teaching.
Page 320
Table 2
Student’s Questionnaire
Sr.No Statements Schools SA A N DA SDA
Government 45% 45% 0% 5% 5%

1. Justification For Absentees
Private 30% 45% 20% 0% 5%
Government 60% 30% 5% 5% 0%
2. Explains Clearly
Private 25% 35% 20% 20% 0%
Government 70% 20% 5% 5% 0%

3. Feed Back
Private 10% 50% 30% 0% 10%
Government 70% 25% 0% 5% 0%

4. Subject Interesting
Private 30% 30% 15% 20% 0%
Government 60% 30% 5% 0% 5%
5. Well Prepared Classes
Private 25% 20% 25% 30% 0%
Government 50% 30% 10% 5% 5%

6. Work Plan Of The Subject
Private 10% 25% 50% 15% 0%
Government 35% 10% 30% 5% 15%

7. Evaluation Activities
Private 5% 50% 35% 5% 0%
Government 50% 35% 5% 5% 5%

8. Receptive Attitude
Private 15% 65% 10% 10% 0%
Government 70% 20% 2% 5% 0%

9. Encourages Students
Private 35% 40% 20% 0% 0%
Government 35% 40% 5% 5% 15%

10. Illustration Of Theoretical Concepts
Private 25% 60% 10% 0% 5%
Page 321
Government 35% 15% 15% 15% 15%

11. Enthusiastic About Teaching
Private 35% 25% 35% 5% 0%
Government 65% 0% 35% 0% 0%

12. Voice Is Easily Heard
Private 45% 20% 15% 15% 5%
Government 60% 30% 5% 0% 5%

13. Eye Contact
Private 40% 40% 10% 0% 0%
Government 65% 20% 5% 10% 0%

14 Stimulate Interest In Subject
Private 5% 65% 20% 10% 0%
Government 45% 30% 25% 0% 0%

15 Introduce New Methods
Private 15% 30% 20% 20% 15%
Government 35% 50% 5% 10% 0%

16. Appropriate Level Of Activities
Private 5% 50% 25% 20% 0%
Government 65% 25% 10% 0% 0%

17. Cope With The Course Uploads
Private 45% 30% 15% 5% 5%
Government 65% 5% 5% 20% 5%

18. Interactive Teaching
Private 10% 25% 50% 5% 10%
Government 25% 20% 15% 15% 15%

19. Administration Of Small Quizzes
Private 15% 50% 25% 5% 5%
Sharing Interest And Research Government 60% 20% 10% 10% 0%

20.
Outcomes
Private 55% 35% 5% 5% 0%
Page 322
1. Finding no 1,9 and 17 shows that Discussion

government school teachers Percentage method used to
encourages class participation and analyze the collected data. The
provides course uploads but private percentage results revealed that the
school teachers sometimes do government and private both want to
these activities and sometime not. receive the monetary rewards and there
is a same ratio of teaching improvement
in government and private schools. Both
2. Finding no 2,3 and 4 help to government and private school teachers
conclude that government school are equally satisfied with their teaching
teachers makes the subject profession and always dealing with
interesting and gives the students in a good and professional way.
explanation and feedback on the Both kinds of schools equally take role in
other hand private school teachers school development and they can teach
also makes the subject interesting in multicultural setting. The government
and gives explanation and and private both equally avail
feedback but they do not meet opportunities from the school and also
the government level teachers. they provide activities to for effective
3. Finding no 20, 13 and 8 helps to learning. And both creates learning
conclude that both government environment and also they presents a
and private school teacher’s shows confident role image. Both government
receptive attitude and develop eye and private school teachers are more
contact with students and also innovative but in some situations they
share the interests of the students. feel lack of confidence. The government
4. Finding no 5, 14, 10 and 16 helps school teacher’s feels that the
to conclude that both the government schools are better but
government and private school private school teachers feel that the
teachers develop subject government schools are not better then
stimulate, teach with the examples private schools. Both school teachers
and prepare the classes before teach through experiment and thinks that
lecture. the background knowledge of the
5. Finding no 7, 11 and 12 helps to students is very helpful in teaching. The
conclude that both government private school teacher participates in
and private school teachers are training programs but government school
equally enthusiastic about teaching teacher some time don’t participate s in
and discloses the evaluation these programs.
criteria and have good pitch of According to the students the
voice. government school teachers encourages
6. Finding no 15 and 18 helps to class participation and provides course
conclude that government school uploads but private school teachers
teachers are more interactive and sometimes do these activities and
introduces new teaching methods. sometime not. the government school
7. Finding no 19 help to conclude that teachers makes the subject interesting
private school teachers administer and gives the explanation and feedback
small quizzes more than on the other hand private school teachers
government school teachers. also makes the subject interesting and
gives explanation and feedback but they
Page 323
do not meet the government level should participate in training

teachers. Both government and private programs for innovative teaching.
school teacher’s shows receptive attitude • The teacher’s monetary or non-
and develop eye contact with students monetary rewards should be
and also share the interests of the according to their need so in this
students. The government and private way they will be more responsible
school teachers develop subject with their profession.
stimulate, teach with the examples and
prepare the classes before lecture. Both 4. BIBLIOGRAPHY
government and private school teachers [1] Awan, A. G. (2013). Comparative
are equally enthusiastic about teaching Analysis of Public and Private
and discloses the evaluation criteria and Educational Institutions: A case
have good pitch of voice. The study of District Vehari-Pakistan. .
government school teachers are more Journal of Education and Practice
interactive and introduce new teaching .
methods. The private school teachers
administer small quizzes more than [2] Darling-Hammond, L. (2010).
government school teachers. Evaluating Teacher Effectiveness
Recommendations How Teacher Performance
Assessments Can Measure and
• 35% students stated that their Improve Teaching. Centre of
teachers administers the small Amercan Progress .
quizzes .according to them if their
teachers administer small quizzes [3] Iqbal, M. (2012 ). Public versus
their learning will be enhance Private Secondary Schools: A
and also they can ready for final Qualitative Comparison . Journal
exams. of Research and Reflections in
• 75% students stated that they Education .
learn from the example more
[4] JAY, A. (2014). The Prinicipals’
effectively so that it is
Leadership Style and Teachers
recommended that the teacher
Performance In Secondary Schools
should explain theoretical
Of Gambella Regional State.
concepts by examples, comments
Institute of Education and
on texts, exercises, problems,
Professional Development Studies
projects etc.
.
• 55% students stated that the
teacher introduces new and [5] Khan, H. M. (2013). omparison of
interesting way of teaching. So Performance Appraisal System in
that that it is recommended that Public and Private Schools.
training courses for teachers Pakistan Journal of Commerce
should be organize for effective and Social Sciences .
teaching.
• 40% teachers stated that they [6] Ravish Amjad , Gordon MacLeod.
don’t participate in training (2012). Exploring aspects of
programs so that it is strongly private, public and private-public
recommended that the teachers partnership (PPP) schooling in
Pakistan. . The Globalization,
Page 324
Regionalization and Privatization

in and of Education in Asia
Conference, 28-29 September
2012, Kathmandu, Nepal.
Page 325
SUFISM AND POLITICS IN MEDIEVAL INDIA
NADEEM AHMAD FAROOQ

M.Phil (History)
Department of History & Pakistan Studies
University of Sargodha
Nadeemahmad@uos.edu.pk
ABSTRACT
Indian sub-continent includes modern day states of India, Pakistan and Bangladesh. Muslim
Sufis played vital role in the development of Islam in Indian sub-continent. Sufism has
been discussed at large as spiritual branch of knowledge. Hence, a common perception
exist that early Sufis aloof them from any social activity like politics. But evidential study
supported that during the medieval period some Sufis were active in socio-political
activities. Suhrawardia was leading and influential Sufi Silsilah in Dehli Sultanate during
the medieval period. In this context, aim of this research is examining relationship of
Suhrawardi Sufis with political elite. This study will also try to investigate that at what
extent this relationship contributed in political stability during the understudy period.
Findings of this relationship helped us to understand different reasons that move Sufis to
take part or reject political activities. The core focus of this research paper is political
ideas and activities of Suhrawardi Sufis of Multan during the 13th and 14th centuries.
P P P P
Keywords: Suhrawardia, Multan, Silsilah, Dehli Sultanate, Sufis.
1.26TSUFISM EMERGENCE AND western coastline of India[2]. Arabs were

ACCEPTANCE IN INDIA good in trade and naval transportation
while non-Muslims of India considered it
Political and religious history of India, to sin to cross sea. Thus Muslim easily travel
some extent, is interlinked as religion one place to another and made
played a key role in political history as permanent settlement on different sea
well[1]. India is origin of Hinduism, ports[3]. Muslim trader, sailor, craftsmen
Buddhism, and Sikhism. During medieval spread message of Islam wherever they
period large number of populous in India landed or settled. Social structure and
comprises Hindu, even in present caste system in India also played a vital
geographical division followers of role in development of Islam and Muslim.
Hinduism are in majority. India is not The low caste Hindus were refrained
origin of Islam. However, Muslims within from religious obligations and attaining
a century made systematic developments knowledge of religion by higher caste
in Arab Peninsula after emergence of Hindus. Al-Beruni (d.1048 A.D), renowned
Islam that paved way for Muslim rule in scholar, visited India and deeply observed
India in later centuries. Islam being Hinduism and its different branches of
Muslim religion played a key role in rapid knowledge, which he briefly mentioned
expansion and unification of Muslims in in his traveler account. He stated that
India. The early Islam introduced in India Hindu religious authority has isolated
through coastal areas, mainly by Muslim religion for elite class and only
merchant, traders and navels. According Brahmans, an upper Hindu caste, has
to Baladhri, Islam reached first the privileged to it [4]. In India, these were
Page 326
Sufis, who propagated and advocated devotes recorded with many other Sufis
human equality irrespective of race, which showed that irrespective of
caste, and religion. This practice religion or faith Muslim Sufis earned high
accelerated popularity of Islam and prestige in India. This distinct feature, to
Sufism in short period. some extent, distinguished them from
Ulema in development of Islam among
Sufism is believed mystical branch of non-Muslim.
knowledge in Muslims and renowned as
Tasawaf[5]. It is esoteric aspect of Islam 13th Century is considered turning point
P P
for contemplation of spiritual or divine in history of Sufism in India[15]. During

realities[6]. Since the early 19th century
P P the period, Muslim territorial expansions
in Western languages it has been call and Sufism popularity increased
Sufism[7]. One who practices Sufism for significantly. Chishtia and Suhrawardis
self purification and spiritual journey is Silsilahs made significant development in
called Sufi. Love for God and its important cities of Sultanate like Dehli,
creatures for spiritual progress are Gujarat, Bihar and Multan. Disciple and
considered as common feature in Sufis. Deputies (Khalifa) of both Silsilahs
From individual capacity to group form disseminated message of Islam. Spiritual
there had been evolutionary stages in attachment with spiritual mentor
Sufism. Sufis Khanqahs or Sufi dwelling (Shaykh) and Silsilah connected them in a
appeared around ninth century[8]. chain which resulted transformation of
Khanqah used as Sufi lodge, center of Silsilah in an institution with defined
common gathering and a learning school principles and practices. Reasoning of
for disciples at the same time. Free making space by Sufis was simple,
residence and food was available for humanistic and equality based attitude
everyone. Soon these Khanqahs became irrespective of religion, race, region or
community center. During eight and social status. Sufis plays role of mentor
ninth centuries Sufism major center in and trained their disciples focusing moral
Islamicate were Basra, Kufa, Baghdad, and ethical lines. Therefore, their
Khurasan[9], interestingly no center exist trained disciples act and conduct was
in South Asia. Sufis reached India before exemplary. These trained disciples were
Muslim invasion of Sindh. Afterwards, sent to various localities for preaching of
number of Sufis came India and settled in Islam and their efforts significantly
different regions [10]. Shaykh Safi al-Din contributed in expansion of Islam.
Garzuni (d.1007) [11]and Shaykh Ismail Furthermore, in India among non Muslims
Lahori (d:1056) [12] are prominent Sufis lower caste Hindus were in majority.
who settled in India. In Punjab, Lahore Their customs and tradition were based
became center of learned men and on caste system. They were living
renowned Sufis like Miran Hussain miserable life due to unjust social and
Zanjani, and his brother Yaqoob Zinjani, financial conditions. Attaining spiritual
Ali Ibn-i Uthman, popularly known as purification or religious knowledge was
Data Ganj Bakhsh[13]. In Punjab, another only right of upper class Barhamans[4].
Sufi of this period who attracted many Such discriminated practices made India
Hindu tribes was Saiyyid Ahmad, fertile land for missionary activities.
renowned as Sultan Sakhi Sarwar or Lakh Equality based principles of Islam got
Data. He was born at Kursi Kot, a rapid response in India. Sufis preaching
surrounding area of Multan. He was a attracted non Muslim to Islam and Muslim
trained Sufi, learned man and belong to a towards real essence of Islam[3, 11].
noble family. He had a large number of
Hindu devotees called Sultani. He was 2. INTRODUCTION OF SUHRAWARDIA:
murdered in 1181 A.D but some ritual Emergence of Suhrawardi Silsilah started
still existed on his name among his non in Iraq[3].The founder of the Silsilah was
Muslim devotees even passing hundred Shaykh Najib al-Din Abul Qahir (d.1167
years[14]. The example of non Muslim A.D), also known as Zia al-Din Abu Najib
Page 327
Suhrawardi. He was nephew and disciple Shihab al-Din as administrative head.

of Shaykh Waji al-Din. Both were resident Though his life style was due to his
of Suharaward, a town in Iraq, hence official status of Shaykh ul Shuyukh, the
called Suhrawardis[16]. Shaykh Abu Najib official head of all the Sufis of
had circle of learned men and Sufis. Baghdad[22],but acceptance of these
Shaykh Abdul Qadir Jilani, founder of ample facilities showed that Shaykh did
Qadria Silsilah, Abul Qasim Qusheri, not considered these facilities any sort of
Qutab Baghdadi and Shaykh Ahmad hurdle in his religious services and
Ghazali, brother of renowned philosopher obligation.
and scholar Imam Muhammad Ghazali,
were his contemporaries and had good Shaykh Shihab wrote many books but
term with them[17]. After death of Abdul ‘Awarif ul Muarif’ is his famous literary
Qadir Jilani (d.1166 A.D) he was most legacy, even referred to renowned
senior in Sufi circle of Baghdad[18]. Chishti Sufis by their spiritual mentors.
Shaykh Abul Najib was succeeded by his Shaykh Nizam al-Din also mentioned in
disciple and nephew Shaykh Shihab al-Din his Malfuzat that he had learned some
Abu Hafs Umar Suhrawardi[19]. Shaykh
P P
chapter of this book[21, 23]. Shaykh Abu
Shihab al-Din (d.1236) is considered real Najib and Shaykh Shihab never visited
founder of Silsilah, as he expanded India but their trained disciples spread
spectrum of Silsilah from Baghdad to the Silsilah from Baghdad to India, Africa
South Asia and Egypt. and Egypt[19]. Shaykh Zakariyya was his
talented disciple who accompanied him
Shihab al-Din early education was in for short period but through him Silsilah
Islamic studies and he got status of flourished in India at large scale.
Muhaddis (Command on Saying of Holy
Prophet) and Faqih (Interpreter of Islamic 3. SUHRAWARDI SUFIS OF MULTAN:
principles). In Fiqh he followed Abu Present Multan is district of Southern
Abdullah Muhammad Ibn-i Idris Al-Shafi Punjab and known as Madina tul Oliya,
(d.820 A.D) a renowned Muslim jurist. city of Sufis, due to large number of
Shihab al-Din was known as orthodox Sufi shrines and tombs of great Sufis in the
with firm practice according to Sharia city. In medieval period this city was
(Islamic principles). He was a man of high popular as center of Suhrawardis in India.
esteem and activism. For living hood he Shaykh Baha al-Din Zakariyya and his
also perform job of Mashki (water cane family successors are buried in Multan.
filler). He had collection of wealth under Multan itself a historical subject of study
his charge but had no affection of it. as it is one of the oldest cities in the
Shaykh Farid al-Din Ganj-i-Shakar stated world dating back hundred years. Due to
that during his stay with him he observed its geographical position it was hub of
many days a lot of wealth sent to him trade and culture between South Asia
and he distribute it on the same day and Central Asia during medieval
among deserver[20]. period[24]. At that time Multan was a
The Suhrawardis believed that for part of Sindh. [12] But it prospered under
spiritual purification and self Muslim rulers. Muqaddasi reported
contemplation wealth or luxuries are not condition of Multan as:-
a hurdle, if heart is detached. Therefore, “it is smaller than Mansura in size, but
unlike Chishti Sufis, Suhrawardi Sufis led
4T
had large population, warm climate,

a visible comfortable life. This tradition trade activities center, mannered
started in early Sufis of the Silsilah. people, small wooden houses and
Shihab al-Din Suhrawardi was chief supremacy of law”[25].
religious advisor to Caliph Al-Nasir(r-
4T
1180-1225) [21]. The caliph build Under governorship of Prince Muhammad

luxurious cloister in Baghdad, with (d:1285), son of Balbun, Multan became a
garden and bath houses. Caliph also cultural center for scholars, poets, and
builds six other Khanqahs and appointed
Page 328
artists, who were displaced due to Khalifa of his father Shaykh Sadar al-Din
political instability in Baghdad and and direct disciple of his grandfather
Bukhara[21]. In India, Shaykh Baha al-Din Shaykh Baha al-Din Zakariyya. He
Zakariyya is considered real founder of followed and extends policy of political
Suhrawardia Silsilah. After his death (d. association with Muslim rulers (Sultans)
1265) family linage provided strong like his grandfather. During his life
foothold to Silsilah and Multan remained Silsilah influence increased significantly
central headquarters of Suhrawardi Sufis among masses and rulers. After death of
more than a century. Shaykh Zakariyya Shaykh Rukn al-Din (d.1335 AD), spiritual
was a learned scholar and practitioner hegemony of Suhrawardis in Multan
Sufi. After completion of his religious shifted to Uch, where Shaykh Jalal al-Din
study and spiritual purification he Bukhari (d.1291 ), a senior disciple of
returned Multan on instruction of Shaykh Shaykh Zakariyya, flourished Silsilah on
Shihab al-Din Umar Suhrawardi. He strong footing. His family successors
belonged to a noble family of Multan. His made Uch a spiritual center of
forefathers enjoyed official appointments suhrawardis. To sum up, among Multani
during the Muslim rule in India. Soon his Sufis, Shaykh Zakariyya set founding of
fame and influence spread in and around the Silsilah and Shaykh Sadar al-Din and
Multan. Here he started religious services Shaykh Rukn al-Din gives it much possible
and build a Madrasa (school of religious height.
studies) and Khanqah in Multan. Shaykh
Zakariyya and his successor followed a 4. POLITICAL ASSIMILATION OF
unique policy of having good terms with SUHRAWARDIS:
contemporary Muslim ruler, Sultan of
In India, Suhrawardia was first Silsilah
Dehli. Shaykh Zakariyya was offered and
who established cordial relationships with
appointed official status of Shaykh ul
political authorities. They believed that
Islam by Sultan Shams al-Din Altutmish (r.
it was necessary to guide ruler, in light of
1210-1236). A sixteenth century
Islamic principles, to show him right path
hagiographer Shaykh Jamali known as
of the reason that if Sultan was right he
Hamid Ibn-i Fazlullah (d.1536) asserts
could better served the people and Islam
that this official status remained in
as well. S.M Ikram asserts that during the
Shaykh Zakariyya family until around
reign of Mamluk and Khiljis, Suhrawardi
1535[26]. Shaykh Zakariyya promoted Sufi
Sufis had influential relations with
image as an active society member. He
Sultans and used this relationship to
has firm belief in self dependency for
facilitate common man[14]. This aspect
respectful living. After his death, Shaykh
have answer, to some extent, of criticism
Sadar al-Din Arif became his spiritual
that relationship with Sultan and court
successor. Shaykh Sadar al-Din Arif
are against norms of Sufi traditions and
(d.1285 A.D) elder son and senior Khalifa
sabotages inner purification.
became spiritual heir of Shaykh
Zakariyya. He was a pious man and also According to K.A Nizami, among three
known as Arif Billah[27]. Unlike Shaykh Silsilahs Chishtia, Suhrawardia and
Zakariyya there is limited information of Firdosia, Chishti Sufis adopted straight
his social or religious work. But available policy and keep them aloof from state
record confirmed that he had less matters and politics. On the other hand,
interest in wealth and had relations with Suhrawardis maintained good terms with
political authorities. rulers and practically involved in state
affairs. Firdosia had no straight policy but
Shaykh Sadar al-Din was succeeded by his
they clearly avoided to accept official
son Shaykh Rukn al-Din Abu Al-
assignment[28]. Nonetheless to say,
Fateh(b.1251). Khawaja Shams al-Din
Chishtis avoiding policy with state affairs
added Aalim (world) with his name[27].
or officials gives them independence to
He was also known as Qibla Hajat due to
work and establish their Silsilah[29] but it
serving needs of deserver[11]. He was
create a distance between Sufis and
Page 329
Sultan. Suhrawardis fills this gape and towering personality of the city, and
their political associations also helped secondly, Shaykh Zakariyya have enough
them to publicize the Silsilah at large resources to respond. Although this
scale. interaction can be a coincident of
political authorities and Shaykh Zakariyya
History of Suhrawardis also revealed that but another event confirms political
founding figures of Silsilah in Baghdad intervention of Shaykh Zakariyya which
had clear inclination and respond to showed his clear intention for change of
political authorities at different events. political setup of Multan or at least
Such response and services rendered by replacement of present governorship.
the early Sufis later on determined This event also explored deeply
political philosophy of the Silsilah. It is relationship of Shaykh Zakariyya in court
reported that the founder of the Silsilah, of Dehli. In detail of event Farishta
Shaykh Najib al-Din Abul Qahir stated that Shaykh Zakariyya have grave
Suhrawardi had such prestige and honour concern on political administration of
in the court of caliph that if anybody Governor of Multan, Nasir al-Din
sought shelter in his Khanqah, no one Qabacha[33]. Though in-depth
could be forcibly taken away him, even information of his concern is not
by the ruler[30]. Likewise, his successor discussed in his work[34]. However,
and nephew, Shaykh Shihab al-Din Abu Shaykh Zakariyya with the help of
Hafs Umar Suhrawardi earned similar Moulana Sharaf al-din, the Qazi of
prestige and honour in the eyes of Multan, wrote a letter to Sultan of Dehli,
Abbasid Caliph Al-Nasir (r. 1180-1225). Iltutmish, and requested him to take
He accepted official assignment of the action against Nasir al-Din Qabacha.
diplomat and chief religious adviser to There was already a tussle between
the Caliph[21]. The Caliph founded six Sultan and governor on power sharing.
Khanqahs in Baghdad and appointed Unfortunately, letter captured red
Shaykh Shihab al-Din as the director of handedly and governor aggressively
Khanqahs even established by others[31]. summoned up Shaykh Zakariyya and the
Shaykh Shihab al-Din, besides accepting Qazi in his court. After investigation and
religious affairs assignments, also admitting by the Qazi, the governor
performed some pure diplomatic services sentenced the execution of the Qazi.
to help the Abbasid Caliphs in their hour However, when Qabacha asked Shaykh
of need. For instance, when the ruler of Zakariyya for clarification the Shaykh
Khwarizm, Shah Muhammad II (r. 1200- clearly replied “whatever he did was
1220) and his armies marched towards instinct inspiration and the governors do
Baghdad in 1217-18 A.D, it was the what he wants”[35]. Shaykh Zakariyya
Shaykh who dissuaded him from attacking fearless stance astonished Qabacha and
the city [32]. he left the Shaykh without any
punishment. Huda has viewpoint here
In India, Shaykh Baha al-Din Zakariyya that it was a political decision of the
continued this policy of association with governor Qabacha who wants to avoid
Sultans of Delhi, and accepted titles, any further conflict as he was well aware
official positions, cash grants and land of authority of Shaykh Zakariyya. And his
endowments from the state. First execution possibly provide an opportunity
interaction between Shaykh Zakariyya
to Iltutmish to attack on Multan[21]. But
and political authorities reported when one aspect is also considerable that the
Multan was experiencing severe famine
Qazi was a highly respectable state
due to shortage of rains. Governor of official, whereas, Shaykh Zakariyya was
Multan Nasir al-Din Qabacha approached not holding any official title. However,
to Shaykh Zakariyya for support. Shaykh these events confirmed that Shaykh
Zakariyya not only supplied grains but Zakariyya was succeeded to make space
provided cash grant. Qabacha request for in political circles before death of
favour unfolded two aspects, first the Qabacha (d.1227).
governor considered Shaykh Zakariyya
Page 330
5. IMPACT OF POLITICAL ASSOCIATION: particularly Sufis[38]. During the period

of Dehli Sultanate, title of Shaykh ul
Multani Sufis used their association with
Islam mostly held by Suhrawardi’s Sufis.
political authorities as a tool for molding
First Suhrawardi Sufi was Noor al-Din
behaviour of rulers and high state
Mubarak Ghaznavi (d.1234) who accepted
officials towards public services. Political
this title and conferred by Shihab al-Din
philosophy of Suhrawardi revealed on
Muhammad of Ghaur (d- 1206), supreme
public service principles, beyond of
ruler of the Ghurid Empire. In Dehli
official title or material benefit. Even, in
Sultanate, the office of Shaykh ul Islam
some cases, these Sufis performed
was first introduced by Sultan Shams al-
official assignments and in some cases
Din Iltutmish (d.1236). Sultan Iltutmish
influenced the decision-making process
conferred this title to Shaykh Baha al-Din
or state policies. The state and the
Zakariyya that remained in his family for
political authorities, on the other hand,
a long period. In political structure of
benefited from the social acclaim of the
Dehli Sultanate, the Sultan was prime
Sufis in order to overcome their political
authority. As mentioned above, the
problems and extend the legitimacy of
office of Shaykh ul Islam had a means of
their rule among the public. Since the
association with the Sultan court, hence
early Suhrawardi Sufis of Multan were
this title might be closer the Sultan to
quite active to run their social and
Suhrawardis. As Sufis affection on Sultan
religious services, they were not
faith and decision was common and it
dependent on state funds or likewise that
was not particular with Suhrawardi Sufis.
Blain referred as ‘state sponsored
Excepting a few one, all Sultans were
Sufis’[36, 37]. In fact, they were in
devotee of contemporary Ulema or
position to materially help the state and
Sufis[39].
public, as mentioned earlier. In another
event, when the Mongol armies besieged Suhrawardis developed unique
the city of Multan, Shaykh Baha al-Din relationship with Sultan, even had power
Zakariyya interceded on behalf of the to alter Sultan decision. For instance,
political authorities, and negotiated for once Governor of Multan Kishlu Khan
peace with the Mongol leaders. The raised revolt against Sultan Muhammad
Shaykh gave one hundred thousand dinars Ibn Tughlaq, that time Shaykh Rukn al-
or gold coins to the Mongol leader from Din brother named Imad al-Din sided with
his own wealth [22, 30,37].In this way, the Sultan army and rebellions killed him
Multan and its inhabitants were saved in assault[29]. Barani stated that after
from brutality of Mangols. suppressing revolt the Sultan decided to
take punitive action against inhabitant of
Though Suhrawardia was first Silsilah in
the Multan city. Shaykh Rukn al-Din
India which Sufis accepted official titles,
although had lost his brother during
state grants and remained associated
revolt but he requested the Sultan for
with the political elite, direct or indirect
immunity and the Sultan accepted his
means, but this relationship often used in
request of pity[40]. This was second
terms of social and public service and not
event when using his association with
for power ambitious. Likewise,
Sultan, Shaykh Zakariyya family saved
Suhrawardi Sufis performed diplomatic
Multan from any unpleasant incident.
missions, mediational services, and
Here one aspect is noticeable that
accepted official titles but none of the
hagiographer or court historians
status was misused.
portrayed Sufis association with Sultan in
The office of Shaykh ul Islam was less appreciating or even disappointing
considered senior most official title that meaning. For instance, in context of
mainly deals with financial and above event, Ibn-I Battuta stated that
administrative issues of Khanqahs and after death of the Shaykh Rukn al-Din
Madrisa. The scope of office was also to brother Imad al-Din in combat with
patronage of eminent men of religion, rebellions, the Sultan compensated the
Page 331
Shaykh by granting him one hundred Shaykh Makhdum Jahaniyan effectively

villages as Jagir[29, 41]. On contrary, utilized his influence to change the state
historical evidence supported that Sufis approaches in favour of public. For
never demanded or accepted any instance, once Sultan Feroze Tughlaq
personal favour. Instead, it was a (r.1351-88) settled stipends for the
contemporary tradition that Sultans for deserving and the poor at the behest of
blessing and paying respect to Sufis Makhdum Jahaniyan[43]. On another
P P
presented gifts on his visit or granted instance, when there was intense food
cash and lands for distributing among shortage in Thatta in Sindh, Makhdum
deservers and to meet Khanqah Jahaniyan requested Sultan Feroze
expenses. For instance, when Shaykh Tughlaq at the behest of the general
Rukn al-Din visited Dehli, Sultan Aala al- population for compensation. Thus, the
Din presented two lac tinka (currency) on Sultan ordered lessening in the costs of
arrival and five lac tinka on departure of food things[44].
P
the Shaykh. And the Shaykh distributed

on the same day among deserving[26]. According to Bijan Bidabad, Sufi
approach and concept of diplomacy is
Serving humanity was integral part of quite different and not restricted to
Sufism doctrine. Humanity services were acquiring security and material benefit,
meant to alleviate the sufferings of instead performed responsibility of
people by extending whatever possible political agent to protect interest of
help the Sufi could. Hagiographical humankind through negotiation[45].
writing proposes that whenever Shaykh Suhrawardi Sufis followed this approach
Rukn al-Din visited court in Delhi to see and we see that sometimes an
his contemporary Sultans, the general intervention of Suhrawardis in politics
population, especially the troubled ones, turned out to be a boon for the people,
used to put their petitions in his likewise when during invasion of Punjab
palanquin. The Shaykh never kept the by Mongols in 1247 the fortress of Multan
general population from doing as such. was captured, Shaykh Baha al-Din
The Sultans, thinking of it as a honor, Zakariyya successfully carried out peace
used to issue orders on them, and in this negotiations with the Mongol military
way, satisfy the requirements of the leader Suli Nuyin, as a result the
general population[41, 42]. In this way
P P conquerors were content with laying
the Shaykh used his privilege to the tribute and left Multan[22, 46]. Likewise,
Sultan court to benefit and betterment of in another event Shaykh Rukn al-Din
the common man especially for ones senior khalifa Makhdum-i Jahaniyan
having no access to political elite or the performed diplomatic services and set
Sultan court. Such acts of leading figures peace talks among the Sultan Feroze
are of great significance as it set a Shah and a group of rebellions who had
tradition and principle that later on captured territory of Thatta, in Sindh. He
followed by disciples and Khulfa. In this diplomatically negotiated and agreed the
case, Sufi Shaykh Saiyyid Jalal al-Din Sultan to forgive the conquered rulers
Bukhari, popularly known as Makhdum and the people who had resisted [47]. In
Jahaniyan, (b.1308-d.1385), and Khalifa this way, the Shaykh saved the lives of
(deputy) of Shaykh Rukn al-Din, who the inhabitant of the city. It was the
established the Suhrawardi Silsilah in cordial relationship of Shaykh Makhdum
Uch, followed the Shaykh footstep. with the Sultan which enabled him to
Whenever he visited court in Delhi to see mediate between the conquerors and the
the Sultan, common folk used to put conquered.
their petitions in his palanquin. Taking
after the custom of his preceptor, he 6. CONCLUSION:
never kept them from doing so. The According to Gilmartin defining
Sultans of Delhi took it as a honor to relationship between religious and
issue orders on these petitions[43]. political authority has been a problem
Page 332
and in this context studying the Indian [8] H. A. R. Gibb, Mohammedanism

subcontinent is good[48]. In India, Sufism vol. 17: Oxford University Press,
and Khanqahs popularity increased during 1970.
the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries. [9] T. Anjum, Chishtī Sufis in the
Chishtia and Suhrawardia were early Sufi Sultanate of Delhi, 1190-1400:
Silsilah in India. Chishtia adopted From Restrained Indifference to
avoiding policy of relationship with state Calculated Defiance: Oxford
characters and did not approve any University Press, 2011.
association in political affairs. This gape [10] L. Massignon and H. Mason, The
filled by Suhrawardi Sufis. In India, Passion of al-Hallaj: mystic and
Suhrawardi Sufis of Multan provided martyr of Islam vol. 98: Princeton
strong footing to the Silsilah. They University Press, 1994.
accepted official titles, grants and also [11] A. H. M. Dehlvi, Akhbar ul Akhyar.
maintained cordial relationship with Lahore: Akbar Book Seller, 2004.
political elite of Dehli Sultanate. Their [12] S. Annemarie, Mystical dimensions
inclination towards politics was not for of Islam. North Carolina: Chapell
power or authority. They often played Hill University, 1975.
role of political agent in mediational [13] N. A. Chaudhry, Lahore: Glimpses
services and held peace talks for conflict of a Glorious Heritage: Sang-E-
resolution. Sufficient evidence supported Meel Publication, 1998.
that Suhrawardi Sufis did not consider [14] S. M. Ikram, History of Muslim
social or political indulging as any means civilization in India and Pakistan:
of hurdle in spiritual journey. a political and cultural history:
Furthermore, their peace and Institute of Islamic Culture, 1989.
mediational services contributed in [15] N. Green, "Making Sense of
political stability at number of times. The ‘Sufism’in the Indian
Suhrawardis in point of fact portrayed Subcontinent: A Survey of
the image of a Sufis as dynamic member Trends," Religion Compass, vol. 2,
of living society. pp. 1044-1061, 2008.
[16] S. M. A. Rehman, Bazam e Sufia
Lahore: Allama Abu Albarkat
7. REFERENCES Academy, 1988.
[1] R. Islam, Sufism in South Asia: [17] S. Q. Mahmood, Islami
Impact on Fourteenth Century Encyclopedia. Karachi: Shahkar
Muslim Society. Karachi: Oxford Book Foundation, 1989.
Universty Press, 2002. [18] S. u. D. Suhrawardi, Awarif ul
[2] Baladhuri, Futu Al-Buldan. Muwarif. Karachi: Madina
Leiden, 1866. Publishing Company, 1989.
[3] S.M.Ikram, Abe Kousar. [19] A. S. Lahori, Kahzinat ul Asfiya.
Rawalpindi, Pakistan: Services Lahore: Maktaba Nabviya, 1990.
Book Club, 2002. [20] D. Siyara, "Auliya Kiram Number "
[4] Al-Biruni., Alberuni's India. India: vol. II, 17th ed, 2008, p. 248.
S. Chand & Company., 1964. [21] Qamar-ul-Huda, Striving for
[5] S. H. Nasr and R. Jahanbegloo, In Divine Union. London:
search of the sacred: A RoutledgeCurzon,, 2003.
conversation with Seyyed Hossein [22] A. Suvorova, Muslim Saint of
Nasr on his life and thought: ABC- South Asia. Moscow: Institute of
CLIO, 2010. Oriental Studies, 1999.
[6] T. Burckhardt, Introduction to [23] H. Sijzi, Fawaid ul-Fawad
Sufi doctrine: World Wisdom, Inc, (Malfuzat Khawaja Nizam al-Din
2008. Auliya). Lahore: Al-Faisal
[7] N. Green, Sufism: a global history Nashran, 2014.
vol. 34: John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
Page 333
[24] A. M. K. Durrani, History of [39] S. M. b. M. Kirmani, "Siyar-ul-

Multan: from the early period to Awliya," ed. Lahore: Mushtaq Book
1849 AD: Vanguard, 1991. Corner, 1978, p. 774.
[25] S. Al-Muqaddasi, "Ahsan ut- [40] Z. U. D. Burni, Tarikh Feroz Shahi.
Taqasim fi Ma’rifat ul-Aqalim," Colcata: Asiatic Society, 1860.
Bibliotheca Geographorum [41] A. Khurd, Siyar al-Awliya.
Arabicorum, MJ de Geoje [42] H. M. Q. Farishta, "Tarikh-e-
(ed.),(MJ Leiden: EJ Brill, 1906), Farishta," in Tazkirah-i Mashaikh-i
1906. Karam, ed. Lahore: Ahsan
[26] H. I. F. A. Jamali, "Siyar ul Brother, 1965, pp. 163-64.
Arifeen," ed. Lahore: The Urdu [43] Prof. Muhammad Aslam, Historical
Science Board, 1967. Significance of the Malfiuz
[27] P. M. A. Qadri, Makhdum Jahanian Literature. Punjab University,
Jahangasht. Karachi: H.M Saeed Lahore: Research Society of
Company, 1983. Pakistan, 1995.
[28] P. K. A. Nizami, Salateen e Dehli
k Mazhabi Rujhanat. Dehli: Nidwa [44] S. Mirza, "Tazkirah-i Hazrat
Tul Musanfeen, 1958. Makhdum Jahaniyan Jahan Gasht,"
[29] I. e. Batuta, Ajayb Ul Asfar. ed: Hyderabad: Institute of Indo-
Lahore, 1898. Middle East Cultural Studies,
[30] K. A. Nizami, Some Aspects of the 1962, pp. 35-36.
Religion and Politics in India [45] B. Bidabad, "Diplomacy principles:
during the Thirteenth Century an Islamic Sufi approach,"
Aligarh: Department of History, International Journal of Law and
Muslim Universtiy, 1961. Management, vol. 54, pp. 253-
[31] J. P. Berkey:, The Formation of 273, 2012.
Islam. Religion and Society in the [46] T. Anjum, "Mediational Role of
Near East, 600-1800. Cambridge: Sufis in Islamicate South Asia,"
Cambridge University, 2003. J.R.S.P.V, vol. 51, pp. 157-177,
[32] "The Encyclopaedia of Islam," in Jan-June 2014.
Art vol. V-II, new ed ed, p. 997. [47] S.-i. S. Afif, Tarikh-i Firoz Shahi,.
[33] M. Q. Farishta, Tarikh Farishta Calcutta: Asiatic Society of
vol. IV. Lahore: Al-Meezan, 2008. Bengal, 1910.
[34] Kirmani. [48] D. Gilmartin, Shrines, Succession
[35] H. B. F. Jamali, Sayerul Arifin. and Sources of Moral Authority.
Lahore: Urdu Science Board, 1989. Berkeley, 1984.
[36] B. H. Auer, Symbols of authority
in medieval Islam: history,
religion and Muslim legitimacy in
the Delhi Sultanate vol. 6: IB
Tauris, 2012.
[37] B. Auer, "Intersections between
Sufism and Power: Narrating the
Shaykhs and Sultans of Northern
India, 1200–1400.”," Curry, John
J. und Erik S. Ohlander (Hgg.):
Sufism and Society. Arrangements
of the Mystical in the Muslim
World, pp. 1200-1800.
[38] R. W. Bulliet, "The Shaikh Al-Islām
and the Evolution of Islamic
Society," Studia Islamica, pp. 53-
67, 1972.
Page 334
A Study to Evaluate the Employees Performance through
360 Performance Appraisals Technique in public sector universities of the Punjab

Nazia Naureen Saif 1,
Sayeda Mehvish Dildar 2, Maria Yaqub 3, Dr. Anjum Naz 4
1
M.Phil Scholar Department of Education
University of Sargodha, Sargodha
Nazia319@yahoo.com
2
Syedawish786@gmail.com
3
Maria.edu134@yahoo.com
4
Assistant Professor
Anjum.naz@uos.edu.pk
ABSTRACT
performance appraisal is neither a technique nor a single step, it can be considered a continues
process that includes employee motivation to perform well, knowledge of employees about what
their managers expect of them and evaluation of their performance aimed at identifying areas where
the improvements are needed. The aim of this study was to evaluate the employees’ performance
through 360 performance appraisal method in public sector universities of Punjab. This study is
based on a survey research in which data is collected through using adopted and amended
questionnaire from 50 administration and 80 faculty members randomly that include line
managers/superior, self, peers/subordinates and clients/students. Data was entered, edited, cleaned
and interpreted for further analysis n and standard deviation was calculated to find out the result. The
analysis and the finding of this study reveals that the appraisal system does not address the important
purpose upon which it should. It is used only for promotion purpose and salary increase. Review
discussions are not conducted in universities Teachers are not allowed to participate in the planning
process of appraisal system but they have strong desire of transparent and systematic performance
appraisal.
Key words: Performance Appraisal, 360 Degree Evaluation
INTRODUCTION assessment and advancement instruments. One

device that has picked up prevalence and has
Authoritative pioneers unmistakably have turned into a developing pattern nearly in entire the
numerous options while selecting execution world as of late is the 360 degree execution survey.
Page 335
This notoriety depends on the impression of administration is neither a method nor a solitary
hierarchical pioneer's that 360 degree audits set up stride process, it can be considered as an
a society for ceaseless learning and give more arrangement of procedure that incorporates
worldwide criticism to workers, which prompts information of representatives about what their
enhanced execution of representatives. As per directors expect of them, their motivation to per-
Human Resource Consultant, William M. Mercer, form well, mentoring and evaluation of their
forty percent of American organizations utilized performance aimed at identifying areas where the
360 degree input in1995; by 2000 this number had improvements are needed.
bounced to sixty-five percent. In 2002, 90% of
Fortune 500 organizations were utilizing a 360 360 Degree Performance Appraisal Method
degree execution audit process (Linman, 2006).
A 360 degree execution audit is a formalized
Literature Review procedure whereby an individual gets criticism
An institutionalized, measured, and computerized from numerous people or "raters" who frequently
representative survey procedure is a fundamental collaborate with the individual being explored,
approach to track worker advance and amplify normally alluded to as "the learner". The goal is to
efficiency in the working environment. Most give the learner criticism on their execution
directors and human asset divisions comprehend practices and results and additionally their
the center advantages of worker surveys. potential, while recognizing and building up
Customary assessments guarantee advancement objectives. As an aftereffect of this
acknowledgment for high performing laborers, and input, the learner is required to have the capacity to
they keep midlevel entertainers on track toward the set objectives for self-improvement which will
accomplishment of sensible objectives. bolster the progression of their professions and
Assessments additionally help directors manage thus advantage the association.
low entertainers by giving an unmistakable record
of all endeavors made to dodge end. The raters commonly speak to the learner's
supervisor/bosses, peers/subordinates, clients and
As indicated by Tziner and Kopelman (2002) this once in a while even their huge others. Their own
is encouraged through the accompanying self evaluations finish the circle. Antonioni (2002)
components: raters' recognizable proof of workers' upheld the possibility that 360 degree input
qualities and shortcomings, the arrangement of supports collaboration and smooth down the work
criticism and the assistance of correspondence with connections amongst representatives and chiefs.
administrators. Another accepted perspective is The 360 degree execution examination strategy can
worried with the common sense of execution be characterized by the accompanying graph:
examination: Time and Costs for improvement and
execution periods of the procedure don't beat the Superior
hierarchical win which is come to by assessing
execution (Jacob et al., 1980).
Performance and Performance Appraisal.
Execution evaluation is a constant
procedure through which execution of workers is
recognized, measured and enhanced in the
association. This procedure incorporates different Peers Self Client
practices like acknowledgment of representatives'
accomplishments, giving them standard criticism
and offering profession improvement (Aguinis,
2007; Lansbury, 1988). Wilson (2005) upheld the
thought and investigated that execution
Page 336
Customer Service Standards require
Subordinate agencies to survey internal and external customers
publish customer service standards, and measure
agency performance against these standards.
Bosses Internal customers are defined as users of products
Assessments by bosses are the most conventional or services supplied by another employee or group
wellspring of representative's criticism. This type within the agency or organization. External
of assessment incorporates both the appraisals of customers are outside the organization and include,
people by bosses on components in a worker's but are not limited to, the general public. In
execution arrangement and the assessment of academic institutions the students are the clients of
projects and groups by senior directors. the teacher employees who rate their teacher
against their performances.
Self-Assessment
Statement of the problem
In a some degree more formal methodology,
bosses request that workers recognize the key The aim of this study was to evaluate the
achievements they feel best speak to their Employees Performance through 360
execution in basic and non-basic execution Performance Appraisals Technique in
components. In a 360-degree approach, if self- public sector universities of the Punjab
appraisals will be incorporated, organized
structures and formal methods are prescribed. Objective of the Study:
Peers The objectives of this study were:
With cutting back and diminished pecking orders 1. To identify job, professional competency
in associations, and in addition the expanding and skill for performing the job of
utilization of groups and gathering responsibility, employees by using 360-degree feedback
companions are frequently the most significant process.
evaluators of their partners' execution. Peers have a 2. To measure the employee’s work
one of a kind viewpoint on an associate's responsibility, orientation and positive
occupation execution and representatives are for attitude toward their jobs by using 360-
the most part exceptionally responsive to the idea degree feedback process.
of rating each other. Peer appraisals can be utilized 3. To analyze the problem solving ability and
when the representative's mastery is known or the judgment in decision making by using
execution and results can be watched. 360-degree feedback process.
4. To evaluate interpersonal skills and team
Subordinates ability of employees within their job by
An upward-examination procedure or input using 360-degree
overview (now and then alluded to as a SAM, for Significance of the Study
"Subordinates Appraising Managers") is among the
most noteworthy but then dubious elements of a This research was conducted to assess the
"full circle" execution assessment program. Both performance of employees in the organizations of
supervisors being assessed and their own particular Sargodha. Different departments were taken from
bosses concur that subordinates have a special, University of Sargodha. This study has measured
regularly vital, point of view. The subordinate the performance of employees on the job through
appraisals give especially profitable information on the 360 degree performance appraisal method. This
execution components concerning administrative study would be helpful for the employee who is
and supervisory practices.Clients/Customers
Page 337
assessed because he can improve his flaws through questions, is 0.804, which is more than the required
the results of this research paper. one i.e., 0.70. Hence this scale is reliable.
Research Methodology Population
Research Design
This study is based on a survey research

using quantitative technique. The data is tabulated
and analyzed applying percentage means using The population was comprised of all the employees
SPSS Version 19. In the light of data analyzed, from the all department of University of Sargodha.
finding and conclusion were made.
Sample
Research Instrument
Sample size is comprised on all the
Already developed scale(s) of 360 degree employee of four departments from University of
feedback questionnaire was used as the tool of Sargodha. Four departments were selected for
research instrument for collecting data. collecting the data about performance appraisal of
Questionnaire was comprised on 35 items that employees through 360 degree performance
were developed on the basis of review of related appraisal technique by systematic (random)
literature based on five point rating scale such as sampling method from a statistical population of
US= Unsatisfactory, IN = Improvement Needed, the employees.
ME= Meets Expectation, EE= Exceed Expectation,
OS= Outstanding. Analysis of the study
Scoring of Data
Analysis, Findings and Conclusion
The collected data on evaluating the
performance of employees of university of The survey was conducted in main branch
Sargodha through 360 performance appraisal that is administrative branch of the University of
method were scored according to given criteria. Sargodha and from the department of education of
university of Sargodha. Profile of the respondents
Sr. Scale Coding includes professors, assistant professors and
1 1 lecturers who are serving at Dean, Chairman/HOD,
Unsatisfactory and Controller and at various faculty levels.
2 Improvement Need 2
3 3 According to the 360-degree feedback
Meets Expectations method, a difference is observed among the results
4 of different employees’ performance evaluation
Exceed Expectations 4 (Job and professional Competency, Work
5 Outsatnding 5 responsibilities and orientation, Analytical and
problem solving ability, Interpersonal and team
Administration of the tool ability, Planning and mobilizing ability,
The measurement tools of 360 degree Supervisory and supportive ability, Personal
performance appraisal questionnaire was delivered effectiveness) of the employees of University of
and collected personally. Sargodha. The results are show according to the
Scale Reliability different factors that are use to assess the particular
faculty member’s performance according to the
The Scale Reliability of 360 degree 360- degree performance appraisal feedback.
feedback questionnaire, having thirty five
Page 338
1. Job and professional Competency
1. Work Responsibilities and Orientation
Table No.1 Table No.2
N M S.D N Mean Std. Deviation

Executed and created 10 3.10 1.287
Understood job and professional 10 3.3 1.567
responsibilities willingly
responsibilities and requirements. 0
and innovatively
Demonstrated professional competencies 10 3.0 1.414 Demonstrated sense of 10 2.60 1.430
and characteristics needed for job 0 responsibility and
accountability for results
Applied professional knowledge and skills 10 3.2 1.476 Showed concerns for and 10 2.50 1.179
for performing job 0 endeavored to achieve
quality results
Updated oneself with new developments in 10 2.9 1.370 Valued and worked for the 10 3.20 1.135
the job and the profession 0 satisfaction of service
users
Sought opportunities for the improvement 10 2.4 1.265 Showed positive attitudes 10 3.20 1.229
of the existing job competencies 0 and approaches towards
the job responsibilities
The information presented in Table 1 indicates the

assessment of employee’s first indicator that is Job The information presented in Table
and professional Competency. The first statement 2 indicates the assessment of employee’s
Understood job and professional responsibilities second indicator that is Work Responsibilities
and requirements shows that (N= 10, M = 3.30, and Orientation. The first statement Executed
Std.D = 1.567) this indicate that this statement is in and created responsibilities willingly and
the favor of employee that is assessed. The second innovatively shows that (N= 10, M = 3.10,
statement Demonstrated professional competencies Std.D = 1.287) this indicate that this
and characteristics needed for job shows that (N = statement is in the favor of employee that is
10, M = 3.00, Std.D = 1.414) the statement also in assessed. The second statement
the favored of assessed employee. The third Demonstrated sense of responsibility and
statement Applied professional knowledge and accountability for results shows that (N = 10,
skills for performing job shows that (N = 10, M = M = 2.60, Std.D = 1.430) the statement also
3.20, Std.D = 1.476) this statement in favor of in the favored of assessed employee. The
assessed employee. The fourth statement Updated third statement Showed concerns for and
oneself with new developments in the job and the endeavored to achieve quality results shows
profession shows that (N = 10, M = 2.95, Std.D = that (N = 10, M = 2.50, Std.D = 1.179) this
1.370) this statement also in favor of the employee statement in favor of assessed employee. The
who is binning assessed. The fifth statement fourth statement Valued and worked for the
Sought opportunities for the improvement of the satisfaction of service users shows that (N =
existing job competencies shows that (N = 10, M = 10, M = 3.20, Std.D = 1.135) this statement
2.40, Std.D = 1.260) not in the favor of the also in favor of the employee who is binning
employee because this statement is less than the assessed. The fifth statement Showed positive
total mean of the scale that is (2.50). attitudes and approaches towards the job
responsibilities shows that (N = 10, M =
3.20, Std.D = 1.229) is also in favor of the
employee.
Page 339
employee who is binning assessed. The fifth
statement Was decisive and responsive in the
2. Analytical and Problem Solving Ability face of problems and issues shows that (N =
Table No.3 10, M = 2.80, Std.D = 1.317) is also in favor
Std. of the employee.
Devia 2. Interpersonal and Team Ability
N Mean tion Table No.4
Diagnosed key problems and 10 3.00 1.247 N Mean S. D
addressed them rationality and Communicated and interacted 10 2. 1.418
creatively regularly and productively with 70
others
Analyzed issues and 10 3.00 1.700
Built effective rapport with all 10 3. 1.494
understood underlying causes
30
and implications deeply
Develop and facilitated team 10 3. 1.595
Solved problems and made 10 2.50 1.179
members 10
decisions timely and effectively
Contributed to and made the 10 3. 1.430
Exercise fine judgments in 10 3.00 1.491 team achieve results 40
making decisions Was open to suggestions and 10 2. 1.524
Was decisive and responsive in 10 2.80 1.317 avoided conflicts 90
the face of problems and issues
The information presented in Table 4
indicates the assessment of employee’s
fourth indicator that is Interpersonal and
The information presented in Table 3 Team Ability. The first statement
indicates the assessment of employee’s third Communicated and interacted regularly and
indicator that is Analytical and Problem productively with others shows that (N= 10,
Solving Ability. The first statement M = 2.70, Std.D = 1.418) this indicate that
Diagnosed key problems and addressed this statement is in the favor of employee
them rationality and creatively shows that that is assessed. The second statement Built
(N= 10, M = 3.00, Std.D = 1.247) this effective rapport with all shows that (N = 10,
indicate that this statement is in the favor of M = 3.30, Std.D = 1.494) the statement also
employee that is assessed. The second in the favored of assessed employee. The
statement Analyzed issues and understood third statement Develop and facilitated team
underlying causes and implications deeply members shows that (N = 10, M = 3.10,
shows that (N = 10, M = 3.00, Std.D = Std.D = 1.595) this statement in favor of
1.170) the statement also in the favored of assessed employee. The fourth statement
assessed employee. The third statement Contributed to and made the team achieve
Solved problems and made decisions timely results shows that (N = 10, M = 3.40, Std.D
and effectively shows that (N = 10, M = = 1.430) this statement also in favor of the
2.50, Std.D = 1.179) this statement in favor employee who is binning assessed. The fifth
of assessed employee. The fourth statement statement Was open to suggestions and
Exercise fine judgments in making decisions avoided conflicts shows that (N = 10, M =
shows that (N = 10, M = 3.00, Std.D = 2.90, Std.D = 1.524) is also in favor of the
1.491) this statement also in favor of the employee.
Page 340
Table No.5
N Mean S.D
360 Degree 10 2.991 .80869
Performance Appraisal 4
The Table No. 5 shows that the overall mean

of all factors that are used to measure the
performance of employees through 360
degree performance appraisal method shows
(N = 10, M = 2.99, Std.D = .808).
Conclusion
The primary goal of the study was to analyze
the current performance of employees
through 360 degree performance appraisal
technique. Findings of the study show that
the employees have a high performance
within their job. The µ hyp > µ tru , so the all
evidences are in the favor of employee.
Page 341
REFERENCES [10] Wilson, JP. (2005). Human Resource
Development: 2nd edition. Kegan Page.
[1] Aguinis, H (2007). Performance
London.
management. Printice Hall. London.
[2] Antonioni, D (2000). 360 degree feedback.

Industry. Manage.
[3] Davis, R. (1995). Choosing performance

management, holistic approach Journal,
Cupa Publication, New Delhi- India.
[4] Jacobs, R. et al. (1980). Expectations of
Behaviorally Anchored Rating Scales.
Personnel Psychology, 33, 595-640
[5] Linman, Terri. 360-degree Feedback: Weighing
the Pros and
Cons http://edweb.sdsu.edu/people/ARos
sett/pie/Inter venations/360_1.htm
accessed May 25, 2015.
[6] Lansbury R (1988). Performance Management.
A Process Approach. Hum. Resource.
Management. Australia, 46-55.
[7] Parrill, S. (1999). Revisiting Rating Format
Research: Computer-Based Rating
Formats and Components of Accuracy.
Unpublished manuscript. Virginia
Polytechnic and State Institute,
Blacksburg, VA.
[8] Reinke, S.J. (2003). Does The Form Really
Matter? Leadership, trust, and acceptance
of the Performance Appraisal Process.
Review of Public Personnel Administration,
Vol. 23, No. 1, 23-37.
[9] Tziner, A. & Kopelman, R.E. (2002). Is there a
Preferred Performance Rating Format? A
Non psychometric Perspective. Applied
Psychology: An International Review, 51
(3), 479-503.
Page 342
Relationship between Religious Orientation and Frustration Tolerance among Adults
Dr. Samina Rashid 1, Kainat Zia 2, Riffat Jamshaid 3

1
University of Wah
Samina.rashid@uow.edu.pk
2
International Islamic University, Islamabad
universalpsyche@gmail.com
3
Department of Psychology,
University of Wah
kriffat92@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
The current study aimed to investigate the relationship between religious orientation
and frustration tolerance among adults. Religious Orientation Scale and Frustration
Tolerance scale were used to measure the studied variables. The purposive sampling
technique was used for data collection. The sample of the study consisted of (n=100)
male and (n=100) female adults. The results of the study showed significant positive
relationship between religious orientation and frustration tolerance among adults.
Results also revealed the existence of non-significant gender differences on the scale
of religious orientation and frustration tolerance.
Keywords: Religious Orientation, Frustration tolerance, purposive sampling
1. INTRODUCTION: made upon ethics, healthy values, and the

accord of man and God. Religion serves
Religion is an ancient entity that exists
various purposes for various individuals
from the start of the human till the end in
(Hood et al.) [1].These multiple
different form as per the belief of the
motivations are named as religious
people worldwide. It is a mandatory part
orientations; that have a significant
of all the individuals especially Muslims.
impact on the empirical study of religion
While most people usually engage in
(Flere & Lavric; Francis) [2,3].
religious activities to different extend;
people show varied forms of drives such as Religious orientation is the scope
taking religion to enhance spiritual of a person’s life regarding the religious
growth, in search of relief from one’s beliefs; intrinsically; one lives his/her life
crisis, and looking for occasions to according to his/her religion, whereas
strengthen encouraging social extrinsically; a man may be more inclined
relationships. Religion is professed as a by the other societal pressures and tend to
continuous process of beliefs that are contribute in religious actions to gain the
Page 343
subjective needs (Allport & Ross) [4]. Tolerance to frustration can be
Religious orientation can also be expressed taken as the extent of an individual’s
as the unique and fixed system that is capability to endure frustrating or
shared by members of the group and can traumatic stimuli prior to take action in
be identified by norms, values and inappropriate manner (Heth & Somer) [9].
behavioral practices of social contribution Humans having high tolerance towards
(Kalra) [5]. People having intrinsic frustration are equivalent to saints as no
orientation of religion take their desires worldly thing can irritate them and they
and longings as a less significant entity; appear supremely unaware of the stuff
they can make them attuned with their around them. However, the person with
own religious beliefs and directions. poor frustration tolerance is considered as
Internally turned people gain their core irritable and ready to react ludicrously on
drive in religion (Rodriguez & Henderson) trivial things. According to the societal
[6]. view of religious orientation; it is the
entity that holds the people together as
Faith in the religion is the effective
they share identical views for the
entity in the development of physical and
endorsing the sayings of kindness and
spiritual growth; it also enhanced the
forgiveness, and this orientation can help
personal skills and way of living. It has
the people to have a good support system
seen in many studies that the tolerance to
and to avoid frustrations of life (Krause)
stressor or frustration can be elevated
[10,11].
through the help of religious orientation.
Individual having religious orientation can Researchers like Skinner, Correa,
better tolerate the frustration and have Skinner, & Bailey [12] and Biesinger, &
better mental health. It was also studied Arikawa [13], have indicated that the
that being religious is the most essential intrinsic religious orientation is correlated
supporter of mental health and to with optimal stage of life happiness and
revitalize the general energy of individual decreased depression, anxiety,
and its tolerance towards frustration, the frustration, stress and emotional issues
aimless life can also be reformed with the regardless of gender. Further it was seen
help of religious orientation (Motamedi, that intrinsic religious orientation is linked
Ajeyi, Azad, & Kiamanesh) [7]. Yong and with the positive job results and traits in
the colleagues [8] found that the force the individual like decision making, self
which can alleviate the mental pressure efficacy, commitment to work,
and frustration of life and can energize satisfaction of job and meaningful
the life satisfaction is the religion. approach towards career, hence these
traits are important to study in order to
see the tolerance level of person’s
Page 344
frustration and how they can have an multiple levels of frustration tolerance on
impact of individual’s frustration level the basis of external cues.
(Dik, Duffy & Tix; Duffy & Blustein)
Enormous empirical studies have
[14,15]. Cirhinlioglu and Demir [16]
proved that the people can have different
conducted a survey on university students
levels of frustration tolerance despite
and founded that the females were scoring
their religious beliefs or can learn to have
high on extrinsic religious orientation as
different levels by religious orientation as
compared to males. Study also disclosed
well. Literature also reported that the
the relationship between religious
people having deprived life situations are
orientation and locus of control,
more religiously oriented in approach than
depression and frustration in life.
non deprived ones, as their faith is a form
A study showed that the highly of compensation for their frustrations. The
religious people as slightest tolerant of study also revealed that there could be
frustration while some studies also support some kind of correspondence in tolerance
the above statement that the highly to frustration and religious orientation and
religious individuals scored low on there could the correlation between the
frustration tolerance (Donahue; Ghorpade, two (Yetim) [21].
Lackritz & Moore) [17,18]. Despite of the
A study done in past resulted that
above mentioned study, literature also
people having religious orientation
enlightened that the people who are calm
towards life are better in concentration
and religiously sound can have high power
towards life tasks and religiosity was taken
of tolerance and more tolerant to
a personality pattern and it can influence
frustrations; Stolz [19] concluded that the
frustration tolerance like age, culture,
frustration can direct towards aggression,
socio-economic status, family background
as studying frustration many studies of
and education level (Motamedi, Ajeyi,
past objected on the work of Miller and
Azad, & Kiamanesh) [7]. As Pakistani
Marcus [20] about frustration aggression
literature explained that the religious
hypothesis or displayed aggression, it
orientation of Muslims can intervene their
showed that the religious individual have
coping styles towards frustration and
consistent pattern of frustration that can
stressors while the healthy impact
be displayed in the form of aggression to
between the two is ambiguous (Khan,
people, the religious orientation is present
Sultana, & Watson; Khan & Watson) [22,
in almost every human being and it can be
23]. For the Islamic point of view studies
varied from person to person on the basis
from the past revealed that the Religiosity
of their tolerance of frustration level. It
holds the entire measures of religious
was studied that one individual can have
orientations or being religious in the
Page 345
communities to which the individual literature of Islamic psychology; it was
belong (Sulmasy) [24]. seen that the relationship of mental
health and the level of being religious are
Previously, a cause and effect
best studied by western researchers and
study revealed that the religious
Islam is the under studied religion in this
orientation could affect the mental and
phase (Leondari & Gialamas; Possel et al.)
physical health (Paloutzian & Park) [25], it
[36, 37]. The present study would prove
was studies that the ability to forgive is a
beneficial for adding the literature
coping mechanism (Robb) [26] that can
regarding Islamic orientation and impact
decrease the domestic violence caused by
of Islam on the tolerance of frustration. As
frustration (Watlington & Murphy) [27].
Pakistan is in stressful situation due to
Religious orientation could boost the
many reasons and frustration level seemed
psychological health of the person which
to be generally high and this study will
in turn has the positive effect on biology
reveal how well the religious orientation
of the person and provide wisdom in life
impact of frustration tolerance and their
(Park) [28]; it also aids the maintenance of
correlation. Present study would also
person’s well being (Wink & Dillon; Lee)
enlighten the readers about the way of
[29, 30]. Religious orientation was taken
religious orientation that is strongly
as the social support system for the time
affecting the decrease in frustration
of frustration (Kilbourne, Cumming &
tolerance. Practically this study would be
Levine; Watlington & Murphy; Paloutzian
helpful for the psychologist/ counselors to
& Park) [31, 32, 25].
guide their clients/ patients or even
It was studied in the past that general population to understand the
religious orientation is a coping system extrinsic or intrinsic religious orientation
while handling the stressful life events for the betterment of their frustration
(Wachholtz, Pearce & Koenig; Hill & level. The gender differences also help the
Pargament; Koszycki, Raab, Aldosary & readers to see what religious orientation is
Bradwejn) [33, 34, 35]. Religious usually under the use of men and women.
orientation could explain a person as
1. METHOD:
highly religious being and the traits would
1.1 Objective of the study
be very polite and generous to other
The objective of the present study is as
beings. There have been multiple
following
researches that elucidate that the
• To investigate the relationship
religious orientation has the effect on the
between Religious Orientation and
personality traits and can cause certain
Frustration Tolerance among Adults.
behaviors while the present study will
• To study the gender differences of
focus on Islam and the Muslims. As per the
the study variables.
Page 346
1.2 Hypotheses The sample of the study consisted of
To meet the objective of present (n=100) male adults and (n=100) female
research, following hypothesis was adults. The adults are selected at the time
formulated: of data collection were volunteered to
1. There is a positive relationship participate.
between religious orientation and 1.5 Instruments
frustration tolerance among adults. 1.5.1 Religious Orientation Scale.
2. Females show more frustration Religious Orientation was assessed by
tolerance than males. using scale having with 20 item, the scale
3. Females score higher on religious has two sub scales i.e., extrinsic religious
orientation than males. orientation (09 items) intrinsic religious
1.3 Operational Definition of Variables orientation (11 items). It was developed
1.3.1 Extrinsic Religious by Allport & Ross [4]. The questionnaire is
Orientation. It is characterized as measured on a 5-point likert scale to
religion that primarily serves other more measure religiousness.
ultimate ends rather than central religious 1.5.2 Frustration Tolerance.
beliefs. It is useful to fulfill more basic Frustration Tolerance was assessed by
needs such as social relations or personal using 18-item scale which is developed by
comfort (Allport & Ross) [4]. Knaus [39]. The questionnaire was
1.3.2 Intrinsic Religious measured on a 3-point scale to measure
Orientation. Intrinsic religiousness is the level of frustration tolerance.
characterized as a religion that is an end Procedure
itself, a master motive. It is used as a The sample was assessed at
framework for their lives and they try to university by adults (19years and above).
consistently live the religion that they All the questionnaires were administered
believe (Allport & Ross) [4]. individually. Instructions and purpose of
each study are explained in each scale.
1.3.3 Frustration Tolerance. The participants were also assured that
Frustration Tolerance is an evaluative the information obtained from them would
component in dysfunctioning and irrational be kept confidential and only be used for
beliefs (Ellis) [38]. research purpose.
1.4 Sample
The present study was conducted
on a sample of (N=200) male and female
adults from Taxila and Wah Cantt. The
convenient sampling technique was used.
Page 347
2. RESULT:
Table 1: Alpha reliability coefficient and Pearson correlation among the scales of
Religious orientation its sub scales and frustration tolerance (N=200)
S. # Variables
α 1 2 3 4
1 Intrinsic Religious .76 - .45** .85*** .44**

Orientation
2 Extrinsic Religious .73 - - .82*** .16

Orientation
3 Religious Orientation .81 - - - .27
4 Frustration Tolerance .69 -
p***<.001, p**<.01
Table 1 signifies the satisfactory frustration tolerance r (198) = .44, p <.01
internal consistencies of the scales ranging while the extrinsic orientation and
from .69 to .81. Pearson correlation religious orientation showed non-
indicate that intrinsic religious orientation significant results.
has a significant positive correlation with
Table 2: Mean, standard deviation and t-values for males and females on the scales of
religious orientation and frustration tolerance (N=200)
Variables Male (100) Female(100) 95% CI
M SD M SD t(198) Cohen's d LL UL
Religious 72.21 12.04 73.52 8.72 .38 -0.13 -4.25 1.62
Orientation
Frustration 34.24 4.33 35.24 4.78 .15 -0.22 -2.27 0.79
Tolerance
Table 2 showed mean, standard Present study examined the relationship

deviation and t-values for males and between religious orientation and
females on religious orientation and frustration tolerance among adults and
frustration tolerance. Results indicated compared the study variables on the basis
non-significant mean differences with t of gender. A sample of two hundred adults
(198) = p >.05. Statistics showed no was taken in equal proportion by using
gender differences on religious orientation convenient sampling technique. Data was
(t= .38) and frustration tolerance (t= .15). obtained by using two scales which
3. DISCUSSION: included religious orientation scale
(Allport & Ross) [4] that was instigated to
assess two ways of religious orientation.
Page 348
Respondents’ tolerance to frustration person’s wellbeing, and has negative
was measured by the scale called association with psychological distress,
frustration tolerance scale (Knaus) [39]. frustration and trait anxiety (González;
The psychometric properties of study Paloutzian & Park; García & Bernabé; Mela
variables indicated the scales to be et al.; Bahrami & Ramezani) [45, 25, 46,
reliable and valid. 47].
According to first hypothesis there
is a relationship between religious In Muslim community people
orientation and frustration tolerance interpret their every day routine by using
among adults and results indicated a religious orientation (Hefti) [48]. As per
significant and positive relationship Islamic sayings, prayer to Allah gives
between intrinsic religious orientation and peace and satisfaction to heart. It is also
frustration tolerance. Findings of current seen that in harsh times of life; Muslims
study are in alliance with previous are advised to seek aid in tolerance and
researches according to which; intrinsic remembrance of Allah. However, extrinsic
religious orientation has a positive religious orientation is deemed as a sign of
association with psychological well-being insincerity (Nifaq) in Islamic point of view.
of the person by having control over stress Therefore, these results are in favor of the
and frustration and an inverse relation was findings of present study that indicated
seen for extrinsic religious orientation intrinsic religious orientation as correlated
(García & Bernabé; Mela et al.) [40, 41]. with frustration tolerance and to decrease
Ismail and Desmukh [42] resulted from a mental distress (Amer, Hovey, Fox, &
study on Pakistani Muslim that a strong Rezcallah) [49].
positive association occurred between Second hypothesis stated that
religious orientation and psychological females showed higher frustration
health, while religious orientation has tolerance than males and results were
negative relation with anxiety, frustration non-significant; many researches indicated
and being aloof. Vasegh and Mohammadi the difference in scores but few studies
[43] also examined the correlation of backed the results of present work that no
religiosity, anxiety, depression and gender differences were found for
frustration in Muslim pupils. frustration tolerance (Ludewig et al.;
Findings of a previous study Grillon et al.; Kring & Gordon) [50, 51,
revealed that frustration, stress, anxiety 52].
and depression have negative relation with Third hypothesis stated that
religiosity (Momtaz et al.) [44]. It was females score higher on religious
seen that intrinsic religious orientation has orientation than males. Statistics reported
considerable positive relation with the non significant results; few previous
Page 349
researches indicated that the same orientation as the tool to enhance their
findings; examined no statistical frustration tolerance.
differences between males and females The present study will help in
with their intrinsic and extrinsic religious reaching an understanding that how the
orientation (Beisinger & Arikawa; Khan et use of intrinsic religious orientation
al.) [13, 53]. affects the frustration tolerance level
among adults and how this affect differs
4. LIMITATIONS: on the basis of gender.
The present study has a few
6. REFERENCES:
limitations; in the current study the data
collected is about 200 individuals only and [1] Hood, R. W., Jr., Hill, P. C., &
it can be carried out on a larger sample in Spilka, B. (2009). The psychology
order to get the results generalizable. The of religion: An empirical approach.
current mental and physical health of New York, NY: Guilford Press.
adults might have influenced their [2] Flere, S., Lavrič, M. (2008), Is
responses and they might have over or Intrinsic Religious Orientation a
under estimated their religious orientation Culturally Specific American
and frustration tolerance. In this study Protestant Concept? The Fusion of
gender of adults was included other Intrinsic and Extrinsic Religious
demographic variables can also be Orientation Among Non-
searched. Family background and support Protestants. European Journal of
could have influenced relationship Social Psychology, 38, 521-530
between the study variable. The present [3] Francis, L. J., (2007). Introducing
study was entirely taken in Taxila and Wah the New Indices of Religious
Cantt it can be taken in other cities of Orientation (NIRO):
Pakistan as well. Lastly, other resources or Conceptualisation and
means can also be used to carry out this measurement. Mental Health,
study like qualitative studies; interviews Religion and Culture 10: 585–602.
and longitudinal study etc. [4] Allport, G., & Ross, J. (1967).
5. IMPICATIONS/ SIGNIFICANCE: Personal religious orientation and
Findings of present study will prejudice. Journal of Personality
enable the readers to understand the and Social psychology, 5, 447-457.
importance of relationship between [5] Kalra, L. (2007) Faith Under the
religious orientation and frustration Microscope [editorial]. Stroke,
tolerance. The practical applications of 38:848-849
this study will facilitate the adults to bring [6] Rodriguez, C. M., & Henderson, R.
into light the need for using religious C. (2010). Who spares the Rod?
Page 350
Religious orientation, social with developmental delays.
conformity, and child abuse American Journal on Mental
potential. Child Abuse and Neglect, Retardation, 106: 297-313.
34:84-94. [13] Biesinger R, Arikawa R.
[7] Motamedi A, Ajeyi G, Azad Falah P, (2008). Religious attitude and
Kiamanesh A. (2005). Studying happiness among parents of
relationship between religious children with developmental
orientation and successful disabilities. Journal of Religion,
agedness. Scholar, 12:43-56. Disability & Health, 11(4): 23-34.
[8] Young, JS. (2000).The moderating [14] Dik, B. J., Duffy, R. D., Tix,
relationship of spirituality on A. P. (2009). Religion, spirituality,
negative life events and and a sense of calling in the
psychological adjustment. Journal workplace. The psychology of
of counseling and value, 45(1):49- religion and workplace spirituality.
58. Charlotte, NC: Information Age
[9] Heth, J.T., & Somer, E. (2001). Publishing.
Characterizing stress tolerance: [15] Duffy, R. D., & Blustein, D.
‘‘controllability awareness” and its L. (2005). The relationship
relationship to perceived stress and between spirituality, religiousness,
reported health. Personality and and career adaptability. Journal of
Individual Differences, 33, 883- Vocational Behavior, 67, 429-440.
895. [16] Cirhinlioglu, FG, Demir G O.
[10] Krause, N., (2006). (2012). Religious orientation and its
Exploring the stress-buffering relation to locus of control and
effects of church-based and secular depression. Archive for the
social support on self-rated health Psychology of Religion, 34:341-362
in late life. Journal of [17] Donahue, M. J. (1985).
Gerontology: Social Sciences. 61B: Intrinsic and Extrinsic
S35-S43. Religiousness: Review and Meta-
[11] Krause, N., (2008). The Analysis. Journal of Personality
social foundations of religious and Social Psychology, Vol. 48, No.
meaning in life. Research on Aging. 2, 400-419.
30: 395-427. [18] Ghorpade, J., Lackritz, J.
[12] Skinner, D. G., Correa, V., R., & Moore, R. (2010). Intrinsic
Skinner, M., & Bailey, D. B. (2001). religious orientation: The
Role of religion in the lives of conservative Christian connection.
Latino families of young children
Page 351
International Journal for the to stress among Muslim university
Psychology of Religion, 20, 201-218 students. The International Journal
[19] Stolz, J. (2009) "Explaining for the Psychology of Religion, 16,
religiosity. Steps towards a unified 101–112.
theoretical model and an empirical [24] Sulmasy, D. P. (2009)
test (submitted). Spirituality, Religion, and Clinical
[20] Miller, N., and Marcus N. A., Care. Chest; 135; 1634-1642
(1997). "A Conceptual Analysis of [25] Paloutzian, R. F., & Park, C.
Displaced Aggression." In R. Ben-Ari L. (2005). Handbook of the
and Y. Rich, eds., Enhancing psychology of religion and
Education in spirituality. New York, USA:
Heterogeneous Schools: Theory and Guilford Press.
Application. Ramat-Gan: Bar-Ilan [26] Robb, H. B. (2007). Treating
University Press. anger with forgiveness may
[21] Yetim, U. (2003). The sometimes require reconciliation.
impacts of Journal of Rational-Emotive &
individualism/collectivism, self- Cognitive Behavior Therapy, 25,
esteem, and feeling of mastery on 65-75.
life satisfaction among the Turkish [27] Watlington, C., & Murphy,
University students and C. (2006). The Roles of Religion
academicians. Social Indicators and Spirituality among African
Research, 61:297-317. American Survivors of Domestic
[22] Khan, Z. H., Sultana, S., & Violence. Journal of Clinical
Watson, P. J. (2009). Pakistani Psychology, Vol. 62, 837-857.
Muslims dealing with cancer: [28] Park, C. (2006). Exploring
Relationships with religious coping, relations among religiousness,
religious orientation, and meaning, and adjustment to
psychological distress. In M.M. lifetime and current stressful
Leach (Guest Editor, Special issue: encounters in later life. Anxiety,
Islam and Mental Health). Research Stress, and Coping, 19: 33-45.
in the Social Scientific Study of [29] Wink, P., & Dillon, M.
Religion, 20, 217–237. (2008). Religiousness, spirituality,
[23] Khan, Z. H., & Watson, P. J. and psychosocial functioning in late
(2006). Construction of the adulthood: Findings from a
Pakistani Coping Practices Scale: longitudinal study. Psychology of
Correlations with religious coping, Religion and Spirituality. S, 1, 102-
religious orientation, and reactions 115.
Page 352
[30] Lee, C. (2007). Anxiety Disorder: A Pilot
Patternsofstress and support among Randomized Trial. Journal of
Adventist clergy: Do pastors and Clinical Psychology, 66, 430-441.
their spouses differ? Pastoral [36] Leondari, A., & Gialamas,
Psychology, 55, 761-771. V. (2009). Religiosity and
http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s11089- psychological well-being.
007-0086-x [37] Possel, P., Martin, N. C.,
[31] Kilbourne, B., Cummings, S. Garber, J., Banister, A. W.,
M., & Levine, R. S. (2009). The Pickering, N. K., & Hautzinger, M.
Influence of Religiosity and (2010). Bi-directional relations of
Depression among Low –Income religious orientation and depressive
People with Diabetes. Health & symptoms in adolescents: A short-
Social Work, 34,2. term longitudinal study. Psychology
[32] Watlington, C., & Murphy, of Religion and Spirituality.
C. (2006). The Roles of Religion Advance online publication
and Spirituality among African [38] Ellis, A. (1967).
American Survivors of Domestic Objectivism, the new
Violence. Journal of Clinical religion. Rational Living, 2,1-6
Psychology, 62, 837-857. [39] Knaus, W. J. (1983.).
[33] Wachholtz, A. B., Pearce, Children and low frustration
K. I. & Koeing, H.G., (2005). Is tolerance. In A. Ellis & M. Bernard
spirituality a critical ingredient of (Eds.), Rational-emotive
meditation? Comparing the effects approaches to the problems of
of spiritual meditation, secular childhood. New York: Plenum.
meditation, and relaxation on [40] García Alandete, J. Y., &
spiritual, psychological, cardiac, Bernabé-Valero, G. (2013).
and pain outcomes. Journal of Religious orientation and
Behavioral Medicine, 28, 369–384 psychological well-being among
[34] Hill, P. C. & Pargament, K. Spanish undergraduates. Acción
(2008). Advances in the Psicológica, 10, 135-148.
Conceptualization and [41] Mela, A. M., Marcou, E.,
Measurement of Spirituality. Baetz, M., Griffin, R., Angelski, C.,
American Psychologist, S,1, 3–17. & Deqiang, G. (2008). The effect of
[35] Koszycki, D., Raab, K., religiosity and spirituality on
Aldosary, F., & Bradwejn, J. psychological wellbeing among
(2010). A Multifaith Spiritually forensic psychiatric patients in
Based Intervention for Generalized
Page 353
Canada. Mental Health Religion health care, psychiatry and
& Culture, 11, 517-532. psychotherapy. Religions, 2, 611–
[42] Ismail, Z., & Desmukh, S. 627. doi: 10.3390/rel2040611.
(2012). Religiosity and [49] Amer, M., Hovey, J. D.,
psychological well-being. Fox, C. M., & Rezcallah, A. (2008).
[43] Vasegh, S., & Mohammadi, Initial development of the Brief
M. R. (2007). Religiosity, anxiety, Arab Religious Coping Scale
and depression among a sample of (BARCS). Journal of Muslim Mental
Iranian medical students. Health, 3, 69-88.
International Journal of Psychiatry [50] Ludewig, K., Ludewig, S.,
and Medicine, 2, 213-27. Seitz, A., Obrist, M., Geyer, M. A.,
[44] Momtaz, A.Y., Ibrahim, R., & Vollenweider, F. X. (2003). The
Hamid, A. T., & Yahaya, N. (2010). acoustic startle reflex and its
Mediating effects on social and modulation: Effects of age and
personal religiosity on the gender in humans. Biological
psychological well-being of Psychology, 63, 311–323.
widowed elderly people. Omega, [51] Grillon, C., Warner, V., Hill,
41, 145-162. J., Merikangas, K. R., Bruder, G.
[45] González Anleo, J. (2010). E., Tenke, C. E., Nomora, Y.,
Positive psychology, happiness, and Leite, P. & Weissman, M. M.
religion. Religióny Cultura, 254, (2005). Families at high and low
523-548. risk for depression: Three-
[46] Mela, A. M., Marcou, E., generation startle study. Biological
Baetz, M., Griffin, R., Angelski, C., Psychiatry, 57, 953–960.
& Deqiang, G. (2008). The effect of [52] Kring, A. M., & Gordon, A.
religiosity and spirituality on H. (1998). Sex differences in
psychological wellbeing among emotion: Expression, experience,
forensic psychiatric patients in and physiology. Journal of
Canada. Mental Health Religion & Personality and Social Psychology,
Culture, 11, 517-532. 74, 686–703.
[53] Khan, Z. H., Watson, P. J.,
[47] Bahrami, F., & Ramezani A.
& Habib, F. (2005). Muslim attitude
(2005). The role of intrinsic and
toward religion, religious
extrinsic religious belief in geriatric
orientation and empathy among
mental health and depression rate.
Pakistanis. Mental Health, Religion
Rehabilitation; 6: 42-7. Persian.
and Culture, 8, 49–61. doi:
[48] Hefti, R. (2011). Integrating
10.1080/13674670410001666606.
religion and spirituality into mental
Page 354
Impacts of War on Women

and Children: A case Study of
Intra- conflict in Syria and Iraq
Shehar Bano
Research Scholar, Department of History
Quaid-e-Azam University, Islamabad
Veritusravian@yahoo,com
Abstract
Women and children are still treated as secondary issue in War. It is still
putatively easy for leaders to ignore uncomfortable truths. The past and present human
history shed light on the gloomy picture of war’s shock effects on mankind especially on
women and children. War has both short term and long term psychological effects on their
conscious. It includes Post war traumatic disorder, mood disorders, and low self-esteem. This
paper discusses the case studies of conflict due to rise of ISIS in Syria. The decreased
hope in future ripens in the unconscious mind of a child and his/her future builds on the
distress feelings of vulnerability and fear. This paper reviews the psychological morbidities of
war related terrorism on women and children and their psychological response. The paper is
meant to focus that how translation of progress into action remains a daunting challenge,
because there is less or insufficient data on the scope of problem and minimal political will to
enforce social programs which uplift both the character and personality of child and girls.
Key Words: Post traumatic stress disorder, mood disorders, traumatic disorder, ISIS
In every conflict and war women and children women and children. The paper hence, fathom
have to face ghastly terrible circumstances. out the impacts of war on psychology of
History of wars makes it clear that conflict women and children. The selection of women
botched without adoption of any strategy for and children in ISIS conflict is pertinent to
Page 355
contemporary issues and also instigate a religious conflict also engulfed the lives of non
development and understanding about the Muslims.3
wholesale adoption of brutal policies of SIS.
Research has relied on primary sources which The civil war activities in Syria by
involve the accounts of different women and ISIS also known as Daesh in Pakistan, have
reports of international organization. rendered the Yazidi women and children as
Analytical research is applied to evaluate the spoils of war. In the state of Iraq and Syria
facts and information. Along with vexed Shias and Yazidis were considered thorny
question of impacts of war the impeding weed and they supposed to be eradicated by
factors are also highlighted which defies the the custodians of caliphate. From its inception
rehabilitation from trauma. it started a systematic cold blood massacre of
other communities and the atrocities not
1. Introduction equated by any level. Slowly controlling
different areas of Iraq and Syria recently, ISIS
Some people create their own storms took control over the large areas of northern
and get upset when it rains. After the demise Iraq; it also includes the town of sinjar that
of bipolar world and wreck of Soviet Union, was being inhibited by the Yazidis. IS,
theories of Freud and Marx seemed to be deeming the Yazidis as heretics considered
failed in applications.1 This can be truly said jihad as an important step to spread Islam and
about the legacy of America in Iraq. During to abolish the heretics and the infidel. It
the time when war on terrorism is still going carried out the genocide against the Yazidis in
on, local militant which aroused as result of Syria. Before Syria Christian community was
USA War under the name of ISIS in Iraq, threatened by the terrorist attacks in Iraq. This
rampant the major part of country with a genocide also marked by the brutal abuse of
population of around two million. Using the women and children and is most petrified
name of Islam they proclaim Iraq as Islamic activity of Islamic states. However, these
states of Iraq and Syria. Raised from prison of inhuman activities are justified under the title
Jordan the group got free under amnesty and of Islam as they use it as a mask to cover their
as a strategic mistake of western power. US activities and in a way to exercise power over
led invasion of 2003 in Iraq; built Iraqi army the terrified people.
and advance weaponry which was easily
controlled by the local militia.2 The collapse of 2. Background: the formation of ISIS
Iraqi army provided a chance to the militants ISIS erupted as a result of global war,
who derived their pursuits from Sunni sect of consolidated itself using the name of religion
Islam and swiftly controlled almost all the and used Islam as a tool. President Bush made
areas including the hometown of Saddam a haste to wage war in Iraq for one reason or
Husain, Tikrit which was hub of Sunnis. Amid other but this war also sparked the militancy
this civil war in Syria women and children the price of which is being paid by the
could not keep themselves aloof from its hundreds of lives. Most of attention has been
impacts. After taking over a big military shed on the spreading power of ISIS and
named camp speicher, militant controlled all countries under its influence. Little has been
over region. The conflict on the basis of unpacked that how women and children had to
ethnicities and sectarianism was no longer suffer from the catastrophe of war.
rosy for the other than Sunni sect of Islam. International authorities do not find the way to
While the war from its inception was based on deal with this pertinent issue though war on
terrorism has always been a priority of world
super power.4 The paper is aiming to shed
light on this subaltern part of community
1
Majid Tehranian, 1997. Militant Religious which has been kept as captive by ISIS. Along
Movement: Rise and Impacts, Economic and with an elaboration that how women and
Political Weekly, 50(32), PP 3213-3214. children has been treated by the ISIS an
2
Majeed Khaddar, 2016.Combating Violent
extremism and radicalization in Digital era, 1st 3
Joby Warrick, 2015. Black Flags: The Rise of
Edition, Information science Reference USA, P ISIS, 1st edition, Transworld, p 32.
4
486 Ibid, P.56
Page 356
attempt is also made to provide some cases of Amid this turmoil, the policies of ISIS
survivors who escaped from captivity in Syria. towards women make humanity to lose its
face. From 2014 brutal policies of ISIS were
The austerity of IS happened to bring more vivid. During all major attacks till august
severe impacts in the lives of hundreds of 2014 women were abducted. In August 400
thousands of women and children. Practices of women from sinjar were kidnapped to sell as
IS reveals using the name of religion women sex slave. From most of reports and statement
are forced for conversion on resistance they of government more than 500 women were
have to face punishment either they are beaten abducted till August 10. By the end of August
or gang raped by arms gang. Children are more than 2500 women and children were
snatched by armed militia as young as nine for abducted. A scholar of Yazidi History at
the recruitment in army. Often they are University of Chicago compiled a list of
witnessed to face violence before they are names of all the abducted women and children
transferred as captives in the main camps of and they were above 4800. Rape was the
Syria and Iraq. weapon of war that ISIS used to abuse women
in their captivity. According to the report of
3. Policies of ISIS towards women and CNN a group of gynecologists examined the
children abducted women most of them were found
Islamic law as interpreted by ISIS sexually and physically abused and if they got
imposes forceful conversion of Yazidis. ISIS pregnant as a result of this torture they were
extolled conversion as only choice for the forced for abortion. Atrocities of the civil war
heretics otherwise they have to die. They in Syria and in Iraq due to the ISIS had
cannot pay jizya tax as they are not people of happened to be with this feature that name of
book. The only way they can live on the earth Islam is being used to captive women. A
is by accepting Islam. ISIS has derived their report of Woodrow Wilson International
persuasion from the ottoman caliphate that in center for scholars have shown the abuse of
1640 attacked Yazidi community on the same women by militants. Trying to establish
land. The campaign of Sultan Abdulhamid II caliphate they tend to sell old women while
in 1892 which perpetuated same propaganda young women are raped or married to fighters.
which did not targeted only Yazidi but The marriage is usually temporary after having
Armenians and Christian were also engulfed in had sex girls are passed to next fighter. In
the campaign. Atrocities of ISIS on Yazidis October 2014, reports showed the captive
began in 2007 when they hostage a bus and women were treated like animals they had to
murdered 23 the Yazidi in the bus. In August face physical and sexual violence. As objects
2007 two communities of Yazidis got perished they were exposed in slave market developed
in an explosion. USA has already started a war by ISIS carrying the price tag.6 According to
against Al-Qaeda and it identified they attack the reports of United Nations almost 500
against Yazidis in co-ordination with existing women were transported to Iraq which was
group. In 2014 ISIS controlled Sinjar either to be given to the ISIS as reward or they
completely a town that was inhabited by had to be sold as sex slave. These women
Yazidis. The day to day execution of Yazidis preponderated from Yazidi and Christian
made them to migrate to other areas and as a community.
result thousands of migrations occurred and
3.2. Psychological impacts
almost 50,000 people fled to nearby mountains
where starvation and dehydration was their The effect of these atrocities do lingers
destiny. 5 on a longer trail. Terrorist activities of ISIS
have done numberless causalities but the
3.1. Atrocities on women assault of women and children has rendered
them as silent causalities. According to
UNICEF 5.5 Million children who have
experienced a kind of mental trauma need
5
Deeyan Khan, 2015. ISIS Escapees describe the
systematic stories of rape, The Independent.
https://www.hrw.org/news/2015/04/14/iraq-isis- 6
U Dr Adil Rasheed, 2015. ISIS: Race to
escapees-describe-syst Accessed on 2nd July 2016
U Armageddon, VIJ Books India, p 93.
Page 357
assistance to overcome the disorder. No matter Slavery is prohibited under the

how many news stories we confront that inflict International human rights. According to the
sympathy towards the victims the point to be estimation of office of kidnap affairs, almost
stressed is that every number is a human being 1800 women have been escaped from captivity
and has a life story. Atrocities that have been of ISIS. Statement of ISIS shows the sexual
committed by the militants are beyond the violence is justifiable under the name of
bearish of children. The least thing to be Islam.9 Interview of Yazidi women reflects the
identified is that children are grown ups and policies of ISIS or committing genocide on the
they had identification which is distorted by community. Women who have been held for
the stingy circumstances. Over 8000 children more than one year describe to be force for
have reached on border of Syria in search of work and were forced repeatedly for sexual
refuge. One in ten refuges was able to cope relation. They were beaten, physically, and
with the circumstances while every girl among verbally abused. These miseries cannot come
the five are forced for marriage where she has without malnutrition and shortage of food.
to face exploitation in the form of domestic Two of the escapee describing their stories
violence. According to researchers of Missouri narrate that they were to serve 40 members of
University Columbia almost 40% of refugee ISIS other than domestic work they were
children have developed post traumatic stress raped. One of them tried four time suicide. On
disorder.7 The symptoms of PTSD like, anger, the finding of their attempt of suicide or
fear, and self destructing behavior were found escape they had to face physical violence. One
in Syrian children. On the other hand if escapee named Khalaf told that she was to
children grow up with these symptoms without serve four men and she had been over handed
facing them through some counseling the to nine soldiers of ISIS. One of her master use
effect will indubitability will influence their to beat her brutally. While narrating her story
personality. in an interview at BBC she told time and again
that you cannot call them human being they
Midst of much death and vast store of are worse than animals. Similarly another
tragedies slavery of women is permissible woman told she escaped from a soldier to
which make the situation more cataclysmic. whom she was sold as a slave in a slave
There is no war by definition but war is market in Syria. Another, thirty years old
everywhere and it has wrecked the women escape and told that she has been sold
infrastructure. Men from Christian, Jewish, to three soldiers. She and her children were
and Yazidi communities are killed and women abducted two of her children were with her but
are brought in slave market. They are forced two are still missing who were separated by
for conversion or sold to ISIS members to ISIS. Atrocities are not only confined to older
keep them as captive. Women who had to live women; the agenda and guidelines ISIS has
in this hell had to bear the life any way but describes it is permissible to intercourse with
those girls who have escaped from this torture as young as nine years old. Fourteen years old
have longer effect on conscious that cannot be girl who escaped in December 2015 recounts
dispensed with. Though their escape is a major that she was locked in room for months and
victory but trauma and terror that they have never saw sun for months. The women who
passed through always leaves a mark on their have escaped have a mark on their conscious
conscious. Yazidi clerics themselves have that can never be cleared they have passed
raised eyebrows against the honour killing but through such a trauma that it is almost
taboos in society do not vanish easily.8 If impossible to forget that time without any
Yazidi women got released from the captives psychiatric help. International organizations
they got sting by relatives and friends in an are helping to some extent but full relieved
honored culture. seems almost impossible.10Germany has
3.3. Islam as a tool to cover frustration 9

Annabell V.D.B (3 March 2016). Humiliation
replaces fear for women kidnapped by ISIS. The
7
Human Rights Watch, Iraq Women Suffer Under Guardian, p A4.
10
ISIS, Retrieved April 2016. Farida Khalaf, Andrea C. Hoffman, 2016. The
8
Heather Saul, (2nd July 2015). Life under ISIS, Girl who Beat ISIS, 1st Edition, Penguin Books,
The independent, p A1. p.325.
Page 358
poured some sympathy by allowing a large its name. As the Yazidis women are kept as
number of refugees to Germany. Hundreds of slaves by soldiers their Muslim wives could do
traumatized girls have made their way to little for Yazidis as they were already
Germany. Post traumatic stress disorder and dominated by the patriarchal society. Clerical
other mental diseases are pervasive in Yazidi group of jihadists had issued a fatwa with
women escapee. Raped and abducted women special guidance for laves and captives.
need a long term psychological and medical Families are kept as slaves they are tortured,
support but large number of escapee and other beaten, and annihilated but little is done by
living problems deploys these issues a authorities. Those who are successful to
secondary position. Moreover, as the war is escape narrate about those who failed to
not over, there is still expectation of arrival of escape and ended their life in suicide.14
Yazidi women.11 According to a report of International authorities are striving for
human rights watch due to other living refugees and for escapees but those who are
problems psychological and medical care are burning in the hell had to face what destiny
lacking in women and children. By the year has defined for them.
2016 some improvements have been seen in
newly formed camps for the displaced people 4. Role of international organizations
by Iraqi Kurdish government. Most of these
camps have social workers and volunteer but International authorities did not posed
needs are met in the way that it could by doing their attention to the issue until torture on
efforts on a broader level. Social taboos and women was galvanized by media. A drift of
lack of expertise on female sexual abuse also almost 50,000 people including women,
impede the process of therapy. Amid these children, and men derived to mountain of
efforts by international organizations the most sinjar left to starve. A report of United Nations
important responsibility falls on state. Along has confirmed that thousands of men have
with fighting terrorists and cutting a huge been executed and almost 7000 of women
budget for war it is also responsibility of state have been forced for sexual slavery. At the
to pay attention on this pertinent issue as it same time, thousands of women who escaped
cannot be dispense with.12 This is not only the from captivity have to face extreme
case with Yazidi women in fact Muslim psychological trauma. These escapees are in
women also had to meet more or less similar critical need of help related to sexual abuse
fate. Muslim Women are forced to wear Hijab including pregnancy problems and transmitted
with only black color. If they wear any other diseases like HIV. Suffering from acute level
color than black then they are beaten with of stress and depression many kinds of suicidal
lashes or have to pay heavy fine. Morality tendencies have been seen among them. As
police of women prepared by ISIS also deals they have to face immense torture, they are
the crime with very strict hand. These hard desperate to leave Iraq for any other place due
restrictions have made women’s abilities to fear of capture. 15
paralyzed to participate in community and
progress. Most of women have lost their male Humanity, by the time of Nazis and by
family members in war and to make a living it now has betrayed. World organizations
is hard for them to move out. Imposing strict haven’t had the vision towards the problems
Sharia laws, ISIS has dumped all the hear with that precision. Jan kizilhan, who himself
dressing shops and if any one dear to return to as a psychologist sent almost 1100 women to
this profession she has to face severe Germany. He visited refugee camps in Dohuk
punishment from Sharia court.13 Moreover many a time which was being governed by
freedom of expression has been seemed to lose Kurdistan government. As psychologist he
11 14
The Guardian, Germany open its doors for Human Rights Watch, (8th April, 2016). Women
enslaved Yazidi women and Children, Retrieved, who fled ISIS abuse in the need of support, The
March 2016 New York Times, p.A5.
12
Skye Wheeler, (18th April 2016). Yazidi Women 15
Leanne K. Simpson, Newsweek ,
after Slavery: Trauma, Human Rights Watch, p. A3 www.newsweek.com/middle-east-islamic-state-
U
13
Heather Saul, (2nd July 2015). Life under ISIS, yazidi-women-christianity-429748 retrieved: 5-15-
U
The independent, p A1. 16
Page 359
passed through many stories that are 4.1. Brutalities are tactics for genocide
unforgettable. In his interaction with people in
camps as young as eight years old during the The cataclysmic violence in the form
examination of victims. She was sold with her of separation of families, murder of family
mother and was raped hundred times over the members and sexual abuse do not set them
period of fourteen months. Deterioration of free even if they got escaped. The feelings of
self esteem and coming towards life is hard to tarnished honour do not let them stand straight
imagine. Another girl almost fourteen years in the society. A number of women do not
old was looking like a zombie; she burned even know that the psychological counseling
herself to make her ugly so that she could support is very important for them. The
escape from the rape. Her migration to atrocities of ISIS clearly reflect that it is
Germany was arranged by Kizilhan where she committing genocide against the Yazidi
had to get operate fifteen time during surgery. community. By stating that it is permissible to
Children also have to face more or less than buy, sell and dispose Yazidis as they are not
same situation. They are snatched from their people of book make it quite vivid that they
mothers and are turned into young soldiers are aiming to perish the whole community.
afterwards they fight against their own mother. Instrumentalizing and abusing the children
The pattern of mistreatment of ISIS works on transforming them into soldier is purposeful
a systematic plan because of this reason it is destruction of generation and it indicates
hard for women to escape. They came to a genocide of community. They subject women,
settled community or to school and collect under the subjection of unimaginable horror,
people, they separate men from women and sexual slavery, forced conversions and forced
execute them while take the women and marriages to prepare a new generation of
children with them. This is a not a mindless jihadis to fight for terror while using the name
violence and no sensible person can show of Islam. Along with physical and sexual
mindless attitude towards this issue. ISIS on violence they are also forced for impregnation,
the other hand, is working on fascist agenda many of women wanted to eliminate
that one who do not embrace their ideology pregnancy but on doing so they have to face
must be eliminated from earth like she have no punishment by ISIS soldiers. The systematic
right to live. These subverted women need a capture and subjugation is also a willful
sense of justice and ray of hope to live. In an destruction of whole community and it
interview to Philip Sands kizilhan told that constitute war crime against the humanity17.
many destitute people have still their half or ISIS, during this time periods of upheaval and
more than half family members in the captivity destruction seems to be more sexually
of ISIS16. Stigma of rape as a post syndrome frustrated. This hatred wrath is also due to
trauma struck many women and it develops constant challenge that west is posing to
extreme tendencies among the women. Islamic system of values, and its
Condition of camps is also not good enough to organization18. To counter this challenge in the
provide these basic facilities. UN, Aid form of spreading terror and bringing miseries
Agencies, and donors have come to help the in the lives of people who are not Muslims
refugees but lack of sources, money on one will never provide a way to have a victory
hand and stigma and confusion on the other over the west. In fact the terrorist activities
hand, make women reluctant to access care. have tarnished the image of Islam widely at
Out of every fifteen girls only one is receiving international level. The religion, which was
regular mantle health services. Along with spreading widely in late 1990s now has
depression and anxiety many women are also become a phobia in west.
facing insomnia. Engulfed by flash backs and
fear that they will be caught again by ISIS they
sleep hardly for three hours a day.
17
Jessica Rose, Daesh Gender based Crimes
against Girls and Women include Genocide, Global
Justice Centre, P 8.
16 18
Philip Sands Genocide and Trauma, Elie Michael Nasrullah, Hostage to History: the
http://www.ft.com/cms/s/2/2ce55dee-01c7-11e6-
U Cultural Collapse of 21st century Arab. Friesen
ac98-3c15a1aa2e62.html , accessed on 5-15-2016
U Press, p 123.
Page 360
Conclusion reflected that how hallow is the life of women.

Other than facing the oppression as slaves if
Yazidi women in this case of ISIS war they are escaped they are ashamed to revisit
in Syria have happened to be the case. Women the memory of that time. On the other hand,
in this shady area of world either it was children had to pass through unforgettable
Afghan Jihad or war on terror; have to face traumas which damage their personality and
similar despair and destitution. Yazidi women self esteem. At the same time concentration
or Hazara community are the cases in both war span of international organizations on this very
which was started on the name of religion. The issue is making little fruit because of impeding
realities of life that arise amid this conflict social factors and economic problems.
Page 361
Bibliography
V.D.B, Annabell (3 March 2016). Humiliation replaces fear for women kidnapped by ISIS. The
Guardian.
Hoffman, Farida Khalaf, Andrea, C. 2016. The Girl who Beat ISIS, 1st Edition, Penguin Books.
Khaddar, Majeed, 2016.Combating Violent extremism and radicalization in Digital era, 1st Edition,
Information science Reference USA.
Khan, Deeyan, 2015. ISIS Escapees describe the systematic stories of rape, The Independent.
https://www.hrw.org/news/2015/04/14/iraq-isis-escapees-describe-syst
U U
Nasrullah, Elie Michael, Hostage to History: The Cultural Collapse of 21st century Arab. Friesen
Press.
Rasheed, Dr Adil, 2015. ISIS: Race to Armageddon, VIJ Books India.

Rose, Jessica, Daesh Gender based Crimes against Girls and Women include Genocide. Global
Justice Centre.
Saul , Heather, (2nd July 2015). Life under ISIS, The independent
Tehranian, Majid, 1997. Militant Religious Movement: Rise and Impacts, Economic and Political
Weekly, 50(32).
The Guardian, Germany opened its doors for enslaved Yazidi women and Children, Retrieved, March
2016
Warrick, Joby, 2015. Black Flags: The Rise of ISIS, 1st edition, Transworld.
Wheeler, Skye, (18th April 2016). Yazidi Women after Slavery: Trauma, Human Rights Watch.
News Paper
Human Rights Watch, (8th April, 2016). Women who fled ISIS abuse in the need of support,The New
York Times.
Human Rights Watch, Iraq Women Suffer Under ISIS, Retrieved April 2016.
Sands, Philip, Genocide and Trauma, http://www.ft.com/cms/s/2/2ce55dee-01c7-11e6-ac98-
U
3c15a1aa2e62.html , accessed on 5-15-2016

U
Simpson, Leanne K., Newsweek , www.newsweek.com/middle-east-islamic-state-yazidi-women-

U
christianity-429748 retrieved: 5-15-16

U
Page 362
Evaluate Staff Empowerment Practices at Higher Education Level

Sayeda Mehvish Dildar 1, P P
Nazia Noureen Saif 2, Dr. Anjum Naz 3, Faisal Siddique 4

P P P P P
1
P M.Phil Scholar Department of Education
P

Syedawish786@gmail.com
32TU U32T
2
P P

Nazia319@yahoo.com 32TU U32T
Assistant Professor
3
Anjum.naz@uos.edu.pk32TP PU U32T
4
P M.Phil Scholar Department of Education
P

Faisal_siddiq6040@yahoo.com
32TU U32T
Abstract
Learning is the prime trademark for instructive hierarchical. On the off chance that college is
considered as center of advancing and producing information then concentrate on the strong
society is up and coming with a specific end goal to dissect the related practices in the colleges
which shape them as learning association. A large portion of the studies address business
associations; be that as it may, the motivation behind the study was to recognize the elements of
educator's strengthening at advanced education level. The populace involved the educators of
University of Sargodha. The study was delimited to University of Sargodha. In such commence
present study was attempted on an arbitrarily chosen test of 100 educators of University of
Sargodha at Sargodha. A 5 point likert scale poll was led. T.Test and Simple mean is utilized for
results. The instructors were requested that fill the questionier. On the premise of the reactions of
the educators the discoveries uncover that Most of the male respondents encountered that their
Department head treats them without considering their own sentiments and does not recognize
their great execution but rather gives them extraordinary acknowledgment when their work is
great. They encountered that Department Head leads yearly staff fulfillment and recommendation
overview, makes required assets accessible to all staff, looks for new open doors for the division
and auspicious speaks with them about choices.
Key terms: Empowerment, University Employees
1. Introduction ideas, however provides direction and

consolation as a backing to her tyke. She
From the time that we're conceived, we're on basically enables her kid to do the
this way to independence. We need to have homework all alone.
the capacity to do things all alone with a
little help along the way when we require it. What is vital to get a handle on here is that
For sure, a key fixing in independence is a strengthening is not something that a man
strong emotionally supportive network. Be can accomplish for another; fairly it is
that as it may, supporting is not the same as something that somebody needs to provide
benefiting; an emotionally supportive for another person with the goal that they
network is there to give the establishment to can thus do whatever it is that they are
another person to accomplish enormity, not presently engaged to do.
to do it for them.
Strengthening is a method for urging and
For instance, a mother does not do her tyke's permitting people to assume individual
homework for them basically on the grounds liability for enhancing the way they carry
that they're battling with a portion of the out their occupations and add to the
Page 363
association’s objectives. The motivation “Any experience that developmentally

behind staff improvement is to place power influences the way one considers, feels, or
in the hands of the educators who need it acts may be seen as enlightening. Frobel
most to take care of business by settling on called training as a procedure through which
choice power, data assets and abilities inner capacities are communicated”. As per
promptly accessible to them for prevalent Tagore, "Instruction makes man's life in
execution. It urges and permits staff to congruity with all presence."
assume individual liability for enhancing the
way they carry out their employments and As per Rig-Veda, "Instruction is what makes
add to the authoritative level. a man independent and benevolent."
1.1 Statement of the Topic John Milton, a late essayist, characterizes
The point of this study was to Evaluate Staff instruction as takes after:
Empowerment Practices at Higher Education
Level an investigation of college of "I call a complete and liberal training what
Sargodha. fits a man to perform fairly, skillfully and
generously every one of the workplaces,
1.2 Objective of the study: both private and open, of peace and war."
2. To evaluate the Staff Empowerment
Practices of male and female The American thinker John Dewey sees
respondents at higher education instruction as "the way toward shaping
level. essential airs, scholarly and enthusiastic,
3. To investigate the impact of staff towards nature and kindred men."
empowerment on staff performance.
4. To identify the factors of teacher’s Herbert Spencer: "Training is finished
empowerment at higher education living"
level.
Concepts of Education as defined by
42T
1.3 Hypothesis: Western philosophers:

1. Socrates: "Training implies the bringing
Ho1: There is no significant difference
out of the thoughts of general legitimacy
between the Staff Empowerment Practices
which are dormant in the brain of each
of male and female respondents at higher
man".
education level.
2. Plato: "Instruction is the ability to feel
2. Literature review: delight and torment at the right minute.
It creates in the body and in the spirit of
Education the student all the magnificence and all
the flawlessness which he is prepared to
Direction is the exhibit or technique of do."
giving or getting general learning, 3. Aristotle: "Preparing is the
developing the power of intuition and arrangement of a sound identity in a
judgments and all-around of setting oneself sound body. It develops man's staff,
up or others rationally for full developed especially his mind with the objective
life. that he may have the ability to
welcome the thought of unique truth,
Direction is the path toward empowering goodness and incredibleness of which
learning. Data, aptitudes, qualities, feelings, impeccable happiness fundamentally
and affinities for a social event of people are involves.
traded to different people, through 4. Level of education
describing, examination, teaching, get ready,
The training framework in Pakistan is by
or ask about. Preparing as a rule happens
and large partitioned into five levels:-
under the bearing of instructors, however
learners may similarly train themselves in a 1) “Primary (Class one to Class 5)
methodology called self-educating learning.
Page 364
2) Middle (Class 6 to Class 8) 4. Organizations require more cross-

utilitarian working, more co-operation
3) High (Class Nine to Class 10) Also amongst ranges, and more reconciliation in
known as Secondary their procedures in the event that they are to
address the clients' issues. Such co-operation
4) Intermediate (Class eleven to 12) Also can be accomplished through strengthening.
known as Higher Secondary
5. Empowerment gives your worker a
5) University (Undergraduate and Graduate feeling of self-sufficiency, which will build
degree) (14 to 16 Years of Education)” work fulfillment. Representatives will be
Empowerment more agreeable at work in light of the fact
that creates certainty and a feeling of worth.
Delegate fortifying is giving laborers a
particular level of self-administration and 6. Empowerment makes a capacity to
obligation in regards to fundamental learn new aptitudes or enhancing one's close
initiative concerning their specific definitive to home power or gathering power.
errands. It licenses decisions to be made at Methodology & discussion:
the lower levels of an affiliation where
delegates have an exceptional point of view The study was related to university as an
of the issues and issues facing the organization empowering its staff. For these
relationship at a particular level. reason teachers of all the departments of the
University of Sargodha were included in the
Fortifying happens when a laborer is given population of the study. The university
the open door, power, trust, independence, teachers were the important part of the
and backing to do business related learning organization. Randomly a sample of
assignments. Right when used as a 100 was drawn from teaching faculty of the
motivational system, fortifying can outfit a departments of university. Questionnaire is
specialist with a sentiment pride and duty used for measuring the variables Five point
regarding work. People need to feel in Likert scale was used to ask the respondents
control of their destiny, especially in the how strongly they agree or disagree with a
workplace. statement. T.Test and Simple mean is used
Importance of empowerment for results.
Worker strengthening gives some Research Instrument:

unmistakable preferences. In the wake of inspecting the interrelated
1. Employee strengthening ought to and critical writing, a survey on a five point
prompt expanded hierarchical Likret scale was created to gather the
responsiveness to issues and issues and an information. The poll incorporates twenty
expansion in profitability. inquiries which have been painstakingly
drafted. Poll is straightforward and
2. It ought to likewise prompt a more justifiable, which has clarity of inquiries
noteworthy level of worker responsibility to with the goal that Employees can without
hierarchical objectives, since representatives much of a stretch comprehend and reply.
can take some level of proprietorship in the
choices made towards objective Sampling:
accomplishment. Hundred questioner were appropriated
3. Empowerment may uncover among full time college instructors reaction
wellsprings of administrative ability, which rate was 100 and surveys were get back as
were already unrecognized, and making an adequate specimen size for examination.
circumstances in which such ability can Questioners were filled through individual
thrive. organizations.
Findings:
Page 365
Analysis of data facilitates in deriving some • On average, more male

useful findings of the study. These findings respondents (M= 2.17, SE=
are not only based on answers of the 0.123) experienced that their
research questions but also channelize Department Head prepares
recommendations which further suggest Resource Requirement plan
corners to conduct future research. Overall (RRP), as compared to female
results of staff empowerment are not respondents (M=2.02,
satisfactory. Following are the findings of SE=0.124). This difference was
the study: not significant (t= 0.851, p >
0.05).
• On average, more female
Results: respondents (M= 2.09, SE=
0.132) experienced that
Department Head assesses the
respondents (M= 2.23, SE=
resource requirements of staff in
relation to their role, as
department Head arranges
compared to male respondents
weekly staff meeting to share all
(M= 1.92, SE= 0.129). This
relevant information, as
difference was not significant
(t= -0.869, p > 0.05).
(M= 2.06, SE= 0.112). This
• On average, more male
(t= -0.889, p > 0.05).
department Head timely and
adequate made required
resources available to all staff,
department Head discusses
as compared to female
(plans, achievements, problems,
respondents (M=1.89,
opportunities, concerns, needs
SE=0.115). This difference was
and other issues) to seek
not significant (t= 1.004, p >
suggestions, as compared to
0.05).
male respondents (M= 1.98,
not significant (t= -1.809, p >
0.05).
Department Head conducts
yearly staff satisfaction and
suggestion survey, as compared
to female respondents (M=2.11,
department Head created a data
bank and give access to all staff,
as compared to female
0.05).
respondents (M= 1.94,
0.147) rated their department
0.05).
head more fair and effective, as
(M=2.02, SE=0.125). This
department Head timely
(t= -0.457, p > 0.05).
communicates with them about
decisions, as compared to
female respondents (M=2.09,
0.147) experienced that their
Department Head has a personal
interest in helping them, as
0.05).
Page 366
compared to male respondents 0.137) experienced that their

(M=2.00, SE=0.135). This Department head treats them
difference was not significant without considering their
(t= -1.712, p > 0.05). personal feelings, as compared
• On average more female to female respondents (M=2.02,
respondents (M= 2.34, SE= SE=0.134). This difference was
0.147) experienced that their not significant (t= 0.772, p >
Department Head appreciate 0.05).
them on good performance as • On average, more female
compared to male respondents respondents (M= 2.23, SE=
(M=1.96, SE=0.120). This 0.150) experienced that their
difference was not significant Department head always gives
(t= -0.206, p > 0.05). them positive feedback when
• On average, more female they perform well, as compared
respondents (M= 2.19, SE= to male respondents (M=1.79,
0.151) experienced that their SE=0.109). This difference was
Department Head positively significant (t=-2.422, p<0.05).
reinforces them, as compared to • On average, more male
male respondents (M=1.96, respondents (M= 2.08, SE=
SE=0.120). This difference was 0.126) experienced that their
not significant (t= -1.199, p > Department Head gives them
0.05). special recognition when their
• On average, more male work is very good, as compared
respondents (M= 1.92, SE= to female respondents (M=2.06,
department Head is always not significant (t= 0.063, p >
seeking new opportunities for 0.05).
the department, as compared to • On average, more female
female respondents (M=1.89, respondents (M= 2.02, SE=
not significant (t= 0.171, p > Department Head personally
0.05). compliments them when they do
• On average, more male outstanding work, as compared
respondents (M= 2.26, SE= to male respondents (M=1.96,
Department Head paints an not significant (t= 0.51, p >
interesting picture of the future 0.05).
for them, as compared to female • On average, more male
respondents (M=2.09, respondents (M= 2.68, SE=
not significant (t= 0.989, p > Department Head frequently
0.05). does not acknowledge their
• On average, more female good performance, as compared
respondents (M= 1.94, SE= to female respondents (M=2.47,
Department Head has a clear not significant (t= 0.897, p >
understanding of where they are 0.05).
going, as compared to male
respondents (M=1.83,
SE=0.111). This difference was Conclusion:
not significant (t= -0.653, p >
Most of the male respondents
0.05).
experienced that their Department head
treats them without considering their
personal feelings and does not acknowledge
Page 367
their good performance but gives them [8] Chelimsky, E. & Shadish,
special recognition when their work is very W. (Eds.), (1997)
good. They experienced that Department Evaluation for the 21st
Head conducts yearly staff satisfaction and Century: A handbook.
suggestion survey, makes required resources Thousand Oaks, CA: SAGE.
available to all staff, seeks new opportunities [9] Cousins, J. B., Donohue, J.
for the department and timely communicates J., & Bloom, G.A. (1996).
with them about decisions. Collaborative evaluation in
North America: Evaluators’
Most of the female respondents self-reported opinions,
found that the attitude of their department practices and
head was fair, effective and helping towards consequences. Evaluation
them. They got more appreciation, Practice, 17(3), 207-226.
compliments and positive feedback on their
good performance. They experienced that
department Head arranges weekly staff
meeting to discuss plans, achievements,
problems, opportunities, concerns, needs and
other issues, to seek suggestions and to
assesses the resource requirements of staff in
relation to their role.
Reference
[1] Horne, Herman H., "The
Philosophical Aspects of
Education", Ibid., p. 176.
[2] Niblet, W.R., Education and
the Modern Mind, Quoted,
Hughes, Education: Some
Fundamental Problems, op.
cit., p. 82.
[4] Dewey, John. Democracy and
Education, Macmillan, p.
115 (emphasis mine).
[5] Niblett, W.R., Education and
Modern Mind, Quoted,
Hughes, Education: Some
Fundamental Problems, p.
84 (emphasis mine)
[6] Campbell, D. T. (1971).
Methods for the
experimenting society.
Paper presented at the annual
meeting of the American
Psychological Association,
Washington, D.C.
[7] Chelimsky, E. (1997). The
coming transformations in
evaluation. In Chelimsky, E.
and Shadish, W. (Eds.),
Evaluation for the 21st
Century: A handbook.
Thousand Oaks, CA:
SAGE.
Page 368
Impact of Teacher’s Behavior on Student’s Academic Achievement at

Secondary level Dr. Sadaf Zamir Ahmed1, Hina Zamir2, Dr. Muhammad Naeem Butt3
P P P P P P
,
1
P Assistant Professor Department of Education ,University of Wah
P
dr.sadaf.zamir@uow.edu.pk
3TU U3T
2
P M.S Scholar Department of Education, Foundation University Rawalpindi
P
zeehina1@gmail.com
3TU U3T
3
P Assistant Professor ,Institute of Education and Research, Kohat
P
buttmuhammadnaeem@yahoo.com
3TU U3T
ABSTRACT
Teachers’ sense of self is particularly important, because of the way in which it
influences their perspectives of, strategies with and actions towards children. The
study aim to (i) investigate the behavior of teachers at Secondary school level (ii)
to examine the academic achievement of secondary school students as a result of
teacher’s behavior (iii) to find relationship between the teacher’s behavior and
academic achievement of students(iv) to recommend strategies for improvements
for teachers behavior .population of the study consisted of all public secondary
school teachers of Rawalpindi. Simple random sampling technique was used for
selection of sample which included 10 public secondary schools of Rawalpindi, six
teachers were randomly selected as the sample of the study. Two questionnaires
were developed for teachers and students .Collected data were analyzed using
percentages.Conclusion of the study were teacher’s behavior toward students were
positive .There were positive correlation between teacher’s behavior and students
academic achievements but the teachers need to be trained enough to tackle with
unavoidable circumstances.
Keywords: Keyword1, Keyword2,...
Page 369
1. Response behaviour
Introduction 2. Association behavior
Education has long been 3. Multiple-discrimination

recognized as the central element in
the development of human 4. Behaviour chains
personality. But in the 20th Century, 5. Class concepts behavior
it has acquired a new range of
functions. It is no longer merely one 6. Principles
of the sectors of national life-like
7. Strategies
agriculture or industry, but a multi-
dimensional one that energizes and He further highlighted the
provides to all the sectors. Education school characteristics that positively
enables individuals to make the affect the students, behaviour and
transition to new social orders by their academic achievements. Both
providing self-understanding and good standards set by the institution
better knowledge of the choices and good behaviour models provided
available and a critical appreciation by the teachers had positive effects.
of the nature of change itself. Thus,
education at all the stages becomes a Approaches for Effective Behaviour
kind of future shock absorber. Sybouts (1994) stated that
The impact of teacher’s there are three approaches, which
behaviour plays an important role in are used for effective behaviour or
the academic achievement of effective institution. a. Goal
students. Behaviour is a description of Attainment Approach: The goal
the observable outcome of teacher attainment approach bases the
and student performance in different effectiveness of institution, on its
activities of institutions. Behaviour achievement of goals and purposes.
may be positive or negative and Learning objectives, subject content,
effective or ineffective. Taneja standardized tests, and national
(1989) stated that "the meaning of norms are all considered being
behaviour is conduct or carry one self important. Another concern with
or behaviour is what we do, especially using the goal attainment approach is
in response to outside stimuli". The the question of goal ownership and
main purpose of this study was to one final consideration is goal
investigate the impact of teachers’ expectations.
behaviour on the academic b. Process Approach: The process
achievement of students. approach emphasizes the processes
Categories of Behaviour Das and means that administrations and
(1993) has suggested seven categories teachers use to heightened student
of behaviour, which are as under: out-comes. Principal focus on process
seems to be instructional leaders.
Page 370
They take an active part in classroom teachers and parents) to reinforce

instructional programmes and academic behavior. Reinforcement
curriculum development 10 and have using all three agents was the most
a clear view of goals to be achieved. effective way to improve
Too much important can be placed on achievement (Gauthier et al., 1984).
process.
Kincheloe (2004), this means
c. Environment Response Approach: educators must: possess a wide range
This approach is linked with of education in the culture; TV, radio,
perception. Principals work to popular music, movies, the Internet,
illustrate to members of the school youth subcultures, and so on;
board, parents, and numerous other alternative bodies of knowledge
interest groups that their colleges are produces by marginalized or low-
successful. This approach is a type of status groups; the modus operandi
environmental selling programme. (MO) of the way social regulation
operates; the complex processes of
An effective teacher knows
racism, gender bias, class bias,
well about the learners. Different
cultural bias, heterosexism, religious
information necessary for the teacher
tolerance, and so on; the cultural
are
experiences of students; diverse
(a) reasons for getting teaching styles; the forces that shape
enrolled, the curriculum; the often-conflicting
purposes of education; and much
(b) motivation, more. (p. 3)
(c) intellectual ability, Teacher education must
include coursework that provides
(d) reactions to the
students with the opportunity to
personality of the teacher,
examine the complex issues Kincheloe
(f) sense of confidence and outlines. Prospective educators will
independence and then be prepared to enter into
situations where student experiences
(g) physical and emotional are vastly different from their own.
health conditions, etc. They will understand the importance
Academic achievement has of forming partnerships with parents
been variously defined as a level of and community members in order to
proficiency attained in academic work ensure that curriculum is relevant to
or as formally acquired knowledge in the lives of their students. Finally,
school subjects, which is often educators will have the skills
represented by percentage of marks necessary to confront practices that
obtained by students in examinations unfairly advantage or disadvantage
(Kohli, 1975). Academic achievement others.
was enhanced the most by use of
three socializing agents (peers,
Page 371
According to Gage (1971), METHODOLOGY:

teaching or instruction means
arranging the conditions of learning The study was descriptive in
nature and survey method was used
that are external to the learner. It
refers to all the facilities provided by POPULATION:
the teacher which could facilitate
students' learning and increase their Population of the study
involvement in different classroom consisted of all teachers and students
activities. These facilities are, such of public secondary school teachers
as, providing clear instruction, of Rawalpindi.
obtaining students' attention,
SAMPLE,
arranging materials required,
responding to students' needs, Twenty Six teachers and fifty
explaining clearly, providing students were randomly selected as
feedback, dealing effectively with the sample of the study.
students' problems.
INSTRUMENT :
Adalsteinsdotter (2004) stated
that successful teacher-pupil Two questionnaires 20 open
interaction in the classroom is ended questions were self developed
essential to the educational and social for teachers and 20 open ended
development of pupils and that questions were developed for the
teachers' understanding of their own students .Pilot testing was done in
behavior is, therefore, of paramount F.G Quaid –e-Azam public school
importance. Scheme III Chaklala .Six teachers and
ten students were selected for pilot
OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY: testing of the instrument .On the
basis of pilot testing first 3 items in
The objectives of the study were:
questionnaire were amended .
(i) To Study impact of the
DATA ANALYSIS:
behavior of teachers at
Secondary school level Date was analyzed using
(ii) To examine the academic percentages
achievement of secondary
school students as a result of RESULTS
teacher’s behavior
These are responses of teachers and
(iii) To find relationship between students
the teacher’s behavior and
academic achievement of Teachers feel comfortable in
students teaching
(iv) To recommend strategies for
According to teachers and
improvements for teachers
students responses 72 Percent of
behavior
teachers feel comfortable while
Page 372
teaching as they feel relaxed while percent responded that the teachers
teaching because they come to the are un aware of latest technology
class fully prepared .28 percent of and they use traditional methods for
teachers feel overburden and are not teaching.
satisfied with the procedures being
Teachers listen to the students with
followed and lack of opportunities.
patience
Teachers are approachable to the
students after the classroom session Both teachers and students
responded that 54 percent teachers
is over
listen to the students with patience
Teachers and students where as 5 percent responded that
responses for teachers to be due to lack of time and over burden
approachable to the students after of work of teacher they cant listen to
the classroom were 54 Percent students problems or queries
teachers are approachable to the patiently.
students after the classroom session is
Teachers have tolerance in their
over where as 56 percent teachers
have other duties to perform other behavior
than teaching so they don’t have 72 percent responded that
enough time left . teachers have tolerance in their
behavior which leaves positive impact
Teachers are professional
on students performance. Where as
development and receive in-service
28 percent responded the behavior of
training time to time
teachers donot shpw tolerance in the
According to teachers and classroom while teaching which leaves
students responses 62 percent negative impact on students academic
teachers are professionally trained achievement
and they received M.Ed and time to
Teachers properly guide students
time in-service training courses which
help them to be updated in the 71.73 percent responded that
teaching profession where as 48 the teachers are competent enough
percent teachers donot have and they guide during lecture
opportunities for professional whereas 28 percent were in view
development and they do not receive that the teachers are only dictators
in-service training and they donot properly guide
students
Teachers use latest technology
during teaching and learning Teachers use different teaching
process. methods while teaching
45.6 percent responded that 54 percent responded that the
teachers use latest technology during teachers uses different teaching
teaching and learning process 54.4 methods while teaching and focus on
Page 373
leaning of the students whereas 5 6. Karnes, F. A., J. E.

percent responded that the teachers Whorton and B. B. Curries. 1984.
use lecture method only . Correlations between WISC. R. IQs
and wide range Achievement Test
DISCUSSION
grade equivalents for Intellectually
The relationship between the Gifted students. Psychological of
teacher’s behavior and students Reports, 54:69-70.
academic achievement revealed that
7. Kohli, T. K. 1975.
there was highly positive the behavior
Characteristic Behavioural and
of teachers with the academic
Environmental correlates of Academic
achievements of students. The higher
Achievement of over and Under
positive behavior of teachers towards
Achievers at different levels of
their students led to the higher
intelligence. Punjab University,
academic achievement of the
unpublished Ph.D. Thesis. P. 48.
students
8. Reis G., M. Hahn and D.
REFERENCES
Barkowski. 1984. The Development
1. Derk, R. 1974. Educational of Achievement related level of
Technology in Curriculum Aspiration and Self-evaluation in
Development. Harper and Row Primary school. Psychologies in
Publications, New York. U.S.A. P. 19 Erziehung and Unterricht, 31(3):188-
196.
2. Gauthier, D., M. Loranger
and R. Ladouceur. 1984. The
Reinforcement of Academic
Behaviour: An economic strategy on
the intervention of a scholastic
environment. P.14, 22.
3. Holpur, G. and P. Helen.

1986. Accommodating instruction to
Learner’s field independence
dependence: a study of effects on
achievement and attitudes Perceptual
& Motor Skills, 62 (3):967-974.
4. Iqbal, Z. 1996. Teacher’s

Training. Institute of Policy Studies
and International Institute of Islamic
Thought. Islamabad, Pakistan. P. 19.
5. Joyce, B. 1980. Models of

Teaching. Printice Hall Co.,
Englewood Cliffs. U.S.A. pp. 307-308.
Page 374
Impact of Professional status on marital satisfaction and dimensions of relational

jealousy among adult women
Anika Asghar1, Tamkeen Saleem2, Summia Ilyas3
P P P P P
1
P MS SCHOLAR,Department of Psychology
P
International Islamic university Islamabad

anika.asghar1@hotmail.com
2
Lecturer, Department of psychology,
P P

32TU U32T
3
P MS SCHOLAR, Department of psychology,
P

Samiyahmir720@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
The current study was conducted to study an impact of professional status on marital
satisfaction and dimensions of relational jealousy among adult women. A sample (200)
adult working and non-working women were selected through purposive sampling. Pfeiffer
and Wong (1989) Multidimensional jealousy scale and Funk and Rogge (2006) Couple
satisfaction index (16) were used. Regression analysis was computed to study professional
status as a predictor of dimensions of relational jealousy. Findings indicate that
professional status explained significant variance in marital satisfaction. It was found that
professional status significantly had an impact on marital satisfaction. Professional status
impact on cognitive jealousy and behavioral jealousy explained that Professional Status
significantly predicted cognitive jealousy and behavioral jealousy whereas professional
status impact on emotional jealousy had ns impact. The results showed that professional
status had significant impact on marital satisfaction as well as dimensions of jealousy.
Keywords: Marital Relationship, Jealousy, Women.
1. INTRODUCTION:
21T Guerrero (1992) found that
romantic jealousy is basically cluster of
According to White (1981) complex emotions, thoughts and actions
Relational jealousy basically defined as a and it is an emotion which is experienced
composite of different actions emotions by all universally and most dominant
and cognitions which leads to a threat to emotion experienced in specifically
the relationship quality as well as to the couple relationships.
self esteem of a person, and those
threats evoked by the presence of
potential attraction among the couple.
Page 375
DeSteno and Bartlett (2006) found According to Mac million

that Jealousy is considered very dictionary professional status can be
important and necessary emotion within defined as person's legal position so in
couple relationships. current study it was considered as the
division on the basis of working and non-
Roach and Bowden (1981)defined working women.
Marital satisfaction as global level of
favorability that the spouses reported
with their romantic relationship and also
defined as individuals interpretation of According to Burke and Weir
overall quality of marriage as weal a (1976) to determine an impact of
happiness of a person with marriage. employment status of wives on to the life
satisfaction, marriage and job And
Graham and Jeziorski (2006)found reported that professional status had a
that Marital satisfaction depicts the costs great impact on satisfaction with life,
and benefits in a relationship the more marriage and job and working women
strings attached with marriage or the experienced less marital satisfaction and
more costs inflicted the less satisfied on communication with spouse than non
is with his/her marriage and the more working women as well as working wives
benefits leads to strengthened the husbands were less satisfied with their
relationship and more satisfaction one is marital life and performed less
experienced. effectively than the husbands of non-
Barelds and Dijkstra (2006) found working women.
that Extreme relational jealousy can have
negative connotations because it lacks Bean et al.(1977) conducted a
trust in a relationship which decreases study to investigate that familism is a
couple satisfaction. as everyone expect very significant aspect in Mexican family
that trust is the basic building factor in a so they were interested to investigate
romantic relationship but when relational either there was an impact of wife works
jealousy comes and becomes a persistent on marital satisfaction and the findings
pattern then it effects the foundation of reported that the marital satisfaction
strong relationship and may become a lessened when wife works and even wives
major cause of termination of are less satiated when they had to work
relationship as well. voluntarily.
Stevens and Riley(2001)
Pfeiffer and Wong (1989) theory conducted a study on dual earning
of Multidimensional jealousy explained families and end examined impact of
that cognitive jealousy refers to working status, dependency of economy
significant thoughts, worries and and an ideology of gender on satisfaction
cognitions that one experience at the with marital life and concluded that
time of jealousy expression and there is a difference in satisfaction with
Emotional jealousy as sought of marital life of adult women and men and
perceived threat to their valued and the factors contributed in women
lovable relationship and behavioral marital satisfaction are economic
jealousy can be defined as the action dependency , sharing of household tasks
taken to reduce their obsessions , contribution to emotional work had an
regarding jealousy. impact on marital satisfaction whereas
Page 376
men marital satisfaction based on wife to earn their bread and butter so they
hours spent on house work and don’t want to live like a scapegoat and
contributions to partners emotional prefer divorce if their relationship don’t
work. work and the rate of divorce increase day
Buric and Zecevic by day due to conflicts which precipitate
(1967)conducted a cross cultural study to by relational jealousy and infidelity
investigate the marital satisfaction cross especially among working women
culturally and reported that the marital whereas non working women are still
satisfaction tendencies in Yugoslavia dependant so they are trying to
differed from other countries, so as compromise but still had an impact on
regards the marital satisfaction the relational jealousy and marital
higher the husband’s education the lower satisfaction ,so there is an impact of
wife satisfied with the marriage and it professional status on relational jealousy
was negatively affected by wife’s and marital satisfaction among adult
employment. women. The current study will be very
beneficial for the society because
changing in the professional status of
The purpose of this study was to women in turn greatly influenced the
evaluate an impact of professional status marital life which leads to discarding
on marital satisfaction and relational marriages and increase the divorce rate
jealousy , so for that purpose working which has a very bad influence on whole
and non-working women were taken to society as well.
explored the concept of professional
status
The impact of professional status METHOD

on marital satisfaction and relational
jealousy has been studied before many 1.1 OBJECTIVES
times as evident by the given literature 1. To study the impact of
but this study specifically focused on Professional status on behavioral
adult women of working and non-working jealousy.
class in order to showed its impact on 2. To study the impact of
marital satisfaction and relational Professional status on emotional
jealousy, so based on the previous jealousy.
literature, authors believed that there 3. To study the impact of
was an impact of professional status Professional status on cognitive
which include working and non-working jealousy.
women on marital satisfaction as well as 4. To study that Professional status
relational jealousy . has an impact on Marital
satisfaction
Rate of divorce is increasing in
Pakistan day by day from few decades. In 1.1.1 HYPOTHESES
Pakistan divorce is consider as a big
• Professional status predicts
stigma and women had to compromise
behavioral jealousy.
due to financial dependence and social
• Professional status predicts
pressure for no to opt divorce .But the
emotional jealousy.
things are not same anymore now women
are financially independent and capable
Page 377
• Professional status predicts and marital satisfaction among working

cognitive jealousy. and non working women .Following
• Professional status has an questionnaire were employed for present
impact on marital satisfaction. study.
1.1.2 Operational definition  Demographic sheet: It includes

age, gender, marital status and
According to Guerrero et al. (2011) professional status.
Relational Jealousy can be defined as a  Pfeiffer and Wong (1989) scale
threat perceived by one individual of Multidimensional Jealousy
regarding the involvement of the measures 24 item which include
romantic partner with any third party. To three subscales: cognitive,
investigate the jealousy multidimensional emotional and behavioral
relational jealousy scale was used which jealousy.
focused three specific types of jealousy  Funk and Rogge(2006) The
which include emotional jealousy, Couple Satisfaction index (16)
cognitive and behavioral jealousy among was used to assess the marital
working and nonworking women satisfaction.
Mary (2016) defined marital satisfaction

Procedure
as an attitude of couple toward their
marital life as contended and satisfied. The present survey purpose was to
study an Impact of Professional status on
Couple satisfaction index (16) scale was
marital satisfaction and dimensions of
administered to investigate an impact of
relational jealousy among adult women..
the professional status on marital
Sample was selected through purposive
satisfaction.
sampling technique. Informed consent
1.1.2.1 Sample was taken and respondents were assured
regarding confidentiality of their
A sample of 100 working women and 100 responses .Respondents were
non working women were selected acknowledged and thanked for their
through purposive sampling technique. cooperation. The multi dimensional
The sample for working women (N=100) jealousy scale and Couple Satisfaction
were taken from Khyaban e Sir Side Index scale was administered on the
school Rawalpindi , OPF college selected sample.
ISLAMABAD , KRL Hospital , POF Central
Library and Government Viqar un Nisa PG
College for women Rawalpindi and the
non working women (N=100) were
selected residents of Sector I-8,1-10
Islamabad, Rawalpindi. And the age
range was 20-60.
1.1.2.1.1 Instrument
The present survey was conducted to
study the degree of relational jealousy
Page 378
RESULTS Table 2
Table 1 Linear Regression Analysis indicating
Professional status as the predictor of
Reliability analysis of Cognitive jealousy cognitive jealousy (N=200)
scale, Emotional jealousy scale,
Behavioral jealousy scale and Couple
Satisfaction Index N= (200). Model
Professional
Scale No. of cronbach
status
items alpha
95%CI
CJS 8 .94
EJS 8 .92 Variable B UL LL
BJS 8 .91
CSI 16 .96
Constant 31.92 37.18 26.6
Note: cognitive jealousy scale(CJS),emotional

jealousy scale(EJS),Behavioral Jealousy
scale(BJS)and Couple Satisfaction Index(CSI).
Table 1 shows cronbach alpha CJ 9.690 -6.35 -13.0

reliability value of Cognitive jealousy
scale, Emotional jealousy scale, R2 P .14
Behavioral jealousy scale and Couple
Satisfaction Index, which indicates that
all the scales meet the criteria to F 32.90
investigate the impact of professional
status as a reliable and suitable Linear regression analysis Professional
instrument for the study sample.
status as the predictor of cognitive
Dimension of Relational jealousy. Results
showed that professional status
significantly predicted cognitive jealousy
and explained 14% variance, F (1,198)
=32.90 with p<.001, so the professional
status significantly predicted cognitive
jealousy and (β-.378 with p<.001).
Page 379
Table 3
Linear Regression Analysis indicating Table 4

emotional jealousy (N=200) Linear Regression Analysis indicating
behavioral jealousy (N=200)
Model
Model
Professional
status Professional
status
95%CI
95%CI
Variable B UL LL
Variable UL LL
B
Constant 40.93 46.58 35.37
Constant 34.40 440.27 28.5
EJ 2.34 5.91 -1.23

BJ -8.09 5.91 -1.2
R2 .00
R2
P
P .08
F 1.66
F 18.46
Linear regression analysis shows Linear regression analysis shows

Professional status as the predictor of Professional status as the predictor of
emotional Dimension of Relational behavioral Dimension of Relational
jealousy. Results showed that jealousy. Results showed that
professional status non-significantly professional status significantly
predicted emotional jealousy and predicted behavioral jealousy and
explained 0.8% variance, F (1,198) Professional status impact on behavioral
=1.666, P=ns so, professional status had jealousy explained 8% variance, F
impact on emotional jealousy (β .09, (1,198) =18.46 with p<.001, so the
p=.198) professional status significantly
Page 380
predicted behavioral jealousy (β -.292 2.CONCLUSION

with p<.001)
The present study was conducted to
Table 5 study professional status impact on
marital satisfaction and dimensions of
relational jealousy among adult women.
Linear Regression Analysis indicating
Pfeiffer and Wong(1989) Multidimensional
jealousy scale and Funk and Rogge(2006)
Marital satisfaction (N=200) Couple satisfaction index were used
which had excellent reliability.
Linear Regression analysis was

Model
conducted in order to test the hypothesis
and results explained that professional
Professional status significantly predicted marital
satisfaction where as professional status
status as a predictor significantly predict
dimensions of relational jealousy except
emotional jealousy
95%CI
Kanwar and Sharma (2015)
conducted a study to investigate an
Variable B UL LL
impact of professional status on
relational jealousy and marital
Constant 37.2 46.19 28.26 adjustment between working women and
women who are not working of urban and
rural areas and finding suggested that
adult couples of rural areas belongs to
non-working class showed more
MS 12.2 17.90 6.57
satisfaction with their marriage and as
well as reported more jealousy and
R2 P .08 urban couple of working class reported
well adjusted family life but more
jealousy than rural area couples of non
F 18.12 working class women.
Staines et al. (1978) conducted a

Linear regression analysis shows
study to investigate that employment
Professional status had an impact on
status had any effect on satisfaction with
marital satisfaction. Results showed that
marital life and concluded that working
professional status significantly predicted
women were more indulged in
Marital satisfaction and explained 8%
terminated their marriage and more
variance in marital satisfaction, F (1,198)
marital dissatisfaction as compared to
=18.12, P<.001. It was found that
the housewives.
professional status significantly had an
impact on marital satisfaction (β .290, p<
.001).
Page 381
Limitations and suggestions [4] Barelds D. P. H., Dijkstra

P. (2006). Reactive,
The survey was conducted was anxious and possessive
conducted to study Professional Status forms of jealousy and their
impact on Marital Satisfaction and relation to relationship
Dimensions of Relational Jealousy and quality among
every study has some sought of heterosexuals and
limitations so in this study the sample homosexuals. Journal of
was taken from only one city. So the Homosexuality, 51, 183-
study lacks diversity as well as for 198
further suggestion it could be seem as [5] DeSteno D., Valdesolo P.,
preferable to extend the study on men Bartlett M. Y. (2006).
instead of including just women. There Jealousy and the
may be any sought of cultural influence threatened self: Getting to
also there which lacks generalizability. the heart of the green-
eyed monster. Journal of
RFERENCES
Personality and Social
Psychology, 91, 626-641.
[1] Burke, R. J., & Weir, T. doi:10.1037/0022-
(1976). Relationship of 3514.91.4.626
Wives' Employment Status
to Husband, Wife and Pair [6] Graham JG, Liu YJ,
Satisfaction and Jeziorski JL. The Dyadic
Performance. Journal of Adjustment Scale: A
Marriage and the reliability generalization
Family, 38(2), 279. meta-analysis. Journal of
doi:10.2307/35038 Marriage and the
[2] Bean, F. D., Curtis, R. L., Family. 2006;68:701–717.
& Marcum, J. P. (1977). [7] Guerrero , Eloy. (1992).
32TU U32TP P 32TU U32T
Familism and Marital Relational satisfaction and

Satisfaction among jealousy across marital
Mexican Americans: The types. Communication 32TU
Effects of Family Size, Reports, 1(5), 23-31.

U32T4 34T
Wife's Labor Force [8] Guerrero, L. K., Hannawa,

Participation, and Conjugal A. F, & Babin, E. A. (2011).
Power. Journal of The communicative
Marriage and the responses to
Family, 39(4), 759. jealousy scale: Revision,
doi:10.2307/350480 empirical validation, and
[3] Buric, O., & Zecevic, A. associations with relational
(1967). Family Authority, satisfaction,
Marital Satisfaction, and communication methods
the Social Network in and measures.
Yugoslavia. Journal of Communication Methods
Marriage and the and Measures. 5(3). 223-
Family, 29(2), 325. 249.
doi:10.2307/349694
Page 382
[9] Kanwar, S., Zinta, R., & http://www.macmillandict

32TU
Sharma, A. (2015). Level of ionary.com/dictionary/brit

jealousy and marital ish/statusU32T
adjustment amongst rural [15] Stevens, D., Kiger,

and urban working and non G., & Riley, P. J. (2001).
working couples. SIJMAS, Working Hard and Hardly
2(10), 11. Working: Domestic Labor
http://dx.doi.org/10.1908
32TU and Marital Satisfaction
5/journal.sijmas021003 U32T Among Dual-Earner
[10] Mary E. King Couples. J Marriage and
(2016, March 21). Marital Family Journal of Marriage
Satisfaction and Family, 63(2), 514-
[Abstract]. The Wiley 526. doi:10.1111/j.1741-
Blackwell Encyclopedia 3737.2001.00514.x
of Family Studies. [16] Staines, G. L.,
doi:DOI: Pleck, J. H., Shepard, L.
10.1002/9781119085621. J., & O'connor, P. (1978).
wbefs054 Wives' Employment Status
[11] Peter A. Andersen, and Marital Adjustment:
Eloy, Guerrero & Yet Another Look.
Spitzberg. (2009). Psychology of Women
Romantic jealousy and Quarterly, 3(1), 90-120.
relational satisfaction: A doi:10.1111/j.1471-
look at the impact of 6402.1978.tb00528.x
jealousy experience and [17] Wright, J. D.
expression. (1978). Are Working
Communication
32TU Reports, U32T4 Women Really More
2(8), 77-85. Satisfied? Evidence from
[12] Pfeiffer, S. M., & Several National
Wong, P. T. P. (1989). Surveys. Journal of
Multidimensional jealousy. Marriage and the
Journal of Social and Family, 40(2),
Personal Relationships, 301.doi:10.2307/350761
6(2), 181-196.
[13] Roach. A. J., [18] White, G.L. (1981).
Frazier. L. P. & Bowden. S. Jealousy and partner's
R. (1981). The Marital perceived motives for
Satisfaction Scale: attraction to a rival. Social
Development of a measure Psychology Quarterly, 44,
for intervention research. 24–30.
Journal of Marriage and
the Family, 43, 537-546.
[14] Status definition
and synonyms | Macmillan
Dictionary. (n.d.).
Retrieved June 21, 2016,
from
Page 383
EVALUATION OF READING AND THINKING COMPETENCY SKILLS FOR

TEACHING ENGLISH LANGUAGE AT GRADE XI LEVEL
First Author (Sobia Nazakat), Co-author (Dr.Saddaf Ayub)
University of Haripur
Sobianazakat234@gmail.com
3TU U3T
Dr.Saddaf Ayub
Missraja2007@yahoo.com
3TU U3T
University of Haripur
ABSTRACT
English is a compulsory subject in our education system and without passing it, students
cannot continue their studies. English language teaching is not very promising in Pakistan
especially in Government sectors. Pure Urdu medium instruction and inadequate learning
atmosphere are the main reasons for it. In addition, untrained teachers, rote learning,
grammar translation method and overcrowded classroom have also affected the process of
language proficiency. There is a dire need to do something concrete to bring about a
change in ELT in Pakistan to meet the growing demands of education and career
development. This study was designed to identify the reading competency level among the
students and to identify the activities related with Reading skills and Thinking prescribed
in English textbook of grade XI.. The study was endeavored to identify reading competency
level of students at intermediate level. To evaluate the activities related with reading
skills and thinking prescribed in English textbook of grade XI. This is a qualitative research.
Documentary was conducted. Four units were taken out of eight units of English Textbook
for XI level as sample for documentary analysis. Unit wise analysis was done according to
two standards and five benchmarks of reading and thinking skill of National Curriculum for
English Language. It was also found through documentary analysis that (B2.2,4),
(B3.2,3,4,5), (B4.3,4,5,6) of Standard 1and (B1.3,5,7,8,9) of Standard 2 were missing in
the English Textbook for grade XI level.
Keywords: Reading competency, Critical thinking, Document analysis, English as a Foreign

language, students of intermediate.
Page 384
1. INTRODUCTION: (2006) had pointed out that the role of an

official and second language is best
Language is a code which is used to express illustrated by English because it is a global
feelings, ideas, thinking and to language.
communicate with others. In a language
different sounds and words are used to English got special status due to the British
speak. Language is specific to human which colonialism. The former British colonies
distinguishes human being from other which had emerged as independent
creatures of the world. Hedge (2006) countries like Ghana, Nigeria, India,
defined Language is a link between the Bangladesh, Pakistan, Singapore have some
people, communities and countries. It is an sort of similarity with English language.
impressive tool of communication, which is Crystal (2006) English has gained the status
used to form a bridge between different of second language in these countries and
sections of people. Short & Fitzsimmons it has now become the official mode of
(2006) stated that there are some communication. These countries are
languages which play vital role in struggling to master the official language
combining the people from all the poles of as it is very essential for their contact with
the world in a single platform which is the international world. Mclean (2012)
performed by English language. stated that English has now become a
highly desirable skill in these ex-British
1.1 ENGLISH AS A GLOBAL countries. It makes the people to learn the
LANGUAGE: language. Learning English can drastically
improve their potential to earn a living in
What make language a global language? Is these non-English speaking nations.
it because of the number of people who
speak it as a mother-tongue or national 1.3 STATUS OF ENGLISH IN
language or is it due to the geographical PAKISTAN:
spread of the language. But Crystal (2006)
claimed that if global status would be Our country is an ex-British country. It also
setup only by numbers of native speakers has an impact of English language like
or geographical spread English won’t be other former British countries. Rehman in
one, Because it is very essential for a (2007) has pointed out that during British
language that it must have an impact on colonialism in the Sub-continent, English
the other factors which can give a had become official language of the
language a special position i-e global territory. After independence English
status. As Crystal (2006) stated that a maintained its position as an official
language achieves genuinely a global status language. Since then it is used to teach as
when it develops a special role that is a compulsory subject. Hayat (2013) stated
recognized in every country. that Pakistan is a multilingual country.
According to Parveen (2013) in estimated
1.2 ENGLISH AS A SECOND AND that in Pakistan 20 million out of 180
OFFICIAL LANGUAGE: million people speak English which make it
third largest English speaking nation of
Roy (2006) pointed out that the special Asia. Haydon (2010) stated that
role of English language is evident in those government of Pakistan has announced
countries where a large number of people that English is the official of the country
used it as a medium of communication in and Urdu is the national language of the
different areas such as government, law, country. Despite the fact it has received a
court and education system. Such a
prestigious position as a major language in
language is called official language and our society. It has become the language of
second language Gobby (2007). Tuleja
administration medium of instruction and
Page 385
the main vehicle of official comprehension failure. The ability to

communication. understand the contextual meaning from
word appropriately is vital to reading skill.
1.4 READING:
1.5 READING COMPETENCY:
Aslam (2008) has defined reading is
generally a process that help us to Wong (2007) defined competency is an
understand, interpret and sense the ability or capability that can be associated
meaning of the words. Reading is involved with the successful performance of one’s
in understanding and grasping message in a specific job. Elliott (2010) further
conveyed through written text. The write stated that competency is the overall
is the sender or encoder. He encodes the behavior of the learner that includes
message through written text. In active questioning, calculating, solving problems,
process of reading, the reader is involved thinking critically which is needed for
in getting at these messages, which is academic achievements. According to
called decoding and the reader is receiver Wong (2007) English language reading
or decoder. According to Rehman (2006) competency refers to the ability of a
Reading is a skill that makes the readers reader to read a text with exact
capable for identifying and understanding pronunciations, expression, intonation and
the written text. Reading is a complex fluency. It is one of the major skills.
activity that involves both awareness and
thought. Reading consists of two related A good reader can be a good Speaker.
processes: word recognition and English Language courses do not focus on
comprehension. Word recognition refers to the development and mentoring of the four
the process of observing how written text major language competencies i.e reading,
symbols resemble to one’s spoken writing, listening and speaking; rather they
language. Comprehension is the process of laid emphasis on the use of language for
making sense of words, sentences and academic purpose. Competency based
connected text. language teaching involves which
competency need to groom among the
Readers normally make use of contextual leaners and which competency a learner
knowledge, vocabulary, grammatical need to master. As Bojovic in (2010) stated
knowledge, experience with text and other that it is very essential to master a
strategies that help them to understand competency in order to achieve a
written text. Smelser & Beltes (2007) particular task.
claimed that skilled readers are those who
score above some standard on this 1.6 CRITICAL THINKING:
valuation and readers of low skills are
Critical thinking is making
those who score below the valuation.
inferences using inductive and
Degirmenci & Ertenl (2014) stated that
deductive reasoning’ Willinghan,
effective reading skills are inexorable in
2007 p 8.
order to have tranquil and firm access to
knowledge and information for individuals • Gelder (2005, p 43) argues that
living in today’s society in which critical thinking is ‘intrinsically
information and communication general in nature’, which
technologies are speedily changing. paradoxically, is why critical
Reading process depends on the language thinking skills and abilities are
of the reader and the writing system which notoriously difficult to transfer to
encodes that language. Perfetti in (2005) new context.
assumed that readers who lack efficient
word identification processes are at risk for
Page 386
• According to Paul and Elder (2006) Miri (2007) and Gelder (2005) pointed out
critical thinking are aspect of good that it is based on universal intellectual
purposeful thinking. values that excel subject matter divisions:
clarity, precision, exactitude, stability.
• Facione (2006, p.3) defined Critical Students can gain critical thinking by
thinking as “habitually inquisitive, practicing to transfer skills, solving
well informed, and trustful of problems, participating in open-ended
reason, open-minded, flexible, and discussion, and conducting inquiry-oriented
fair-minded in evaluation. experiments.
• Halpern in (2005, p.5) suggested Analysis of the activities related with
that critical thinking is “directed reading and thinking competency skills
thinking because it focuses on prescribed in English textbook of grade
obtaining a desired outcome”. XI.
Critical thinking involves attitudes and
habits of mind including fair-mindedness
and flexibilities that is needed for making
inferences, solving problems, evaluating
etc. Critical thinking is a competency
which enables a person to think with
reasoning, make decision and solve
problem. Mchuinness (2009) argued that
critical thinking start developing in a
person at very young age. When a person
reaches to adulthood he becomes able to
think critically with reasoning but it need a
little bit grooming and polishing. An
average man is lack of basic reasoning but
it can be enhanced with proper
instructions and techniques.
Willingham (2007) it is very important that

students must have background knowledge
when they about to demonstrate critical
thinking. Students with intellectual ability
can get a lot from critical thinking. Scriven
and Paul (2008) also argued that Critical
thinkers exhibit willingness to plan;
willingness to consider new options. They
are able to analyze, synthesize and
evaluate information which is collected
from observation, experience, reasoning,
or communication.
Page 387
Table 1: Analysis of Unit 1 according to Analysis:

the Standard 1 of Reading and Thinking
Competency. The analysis of table 1 showed that
Benchmark (1.1) supporting details and key
Benchma Benchmark Benchmark Benchmark ideas related to the theme were indicated
rk .1 .2 .3 .4
on the page 11, 13, 25, 26 of the textbook.
Evaluate Analyze, Analyze, Gather, (B 1.6) Chronological arrangements of the
pattern Synthesize synthesize analyze, paragraph were reflected on page 11-13.
of text and information evaluate and
Lesso organizati evaluate from a synthesize Short questions related to (B 2.3 and 2.5) i-
n No on and events, visual clues information e critical thinking and personal response of
function issues, or a graphic to use for a the students were presented on the page
of various ideas and organizer to variety of
devices viewpoints, summarize, purposes 16,30,34,35. Availability of (B 2.1) on page
used applying highlight including a 10 give prior knowledge related to the
within reading the key research
and comprehens areas main project.
lesson. Picture of a bird (3.1) was reflected
beyond a ion and trends on page 11. (B 4.1,4, 2) analyze,
paragrap thinking synthesize and evaluate information for
h in text. strategies.
study skills were mentioned on page
20,21,30,31 in the form of exercise related
to parts of speech.
1 B 1.1 on B 2.3 on B3.1 on B4.1on page
page (11- page (16) page11(pict (20) (Q10)
13) (Q 1-6) ure of a The above analysis indicated that all the
bird) B4.2on three lessons of unit 1 were formulated
B 1.6 on B 2.5 on page(20)(Q11 according to Standard 1 of Reading and
page (11- page (16) )
13) (Q7,8,9) Thinking Competency. Analysis indicated
B4.1 on that all the four benchmarks and their
B2.1 on page(21)(Q12 learning outcomes can be achieve through
page 10 ,13)
the textbook but outcomes of Benchmark
2 B1.1 on B 2.5 on B4.1 on page 1 function of various devices (B1.2,3,4)
page page (29- (31)(Q 15) and Benchmark 3 analysis through visual
(25,26) 30)(Q6-13).
B4.2 on page clues (B3.1) were only reflected in lesson
B1.6 on B 2.6 on (30) (Q14) 1. Benchmark 4 evaluate and synthesize
page page (29) information for research project(B4.1) was
(25,26) (Q 12-11)
only presented in Lesson 1,2.The outcomes
B 2.3 on of Benchmark 3 analyze and synthesize
page (29)(Q information from graphic organizer to
1,,5,7-10)
summarize (B3.1,2,3,4,5,6) and B4
B2.1 on evaluate and synthesize information to use
page 10
for research project(B4.3,4,5,6) were not
3(poe B2.1 on available in the textbook.
m) page (10)
B2.3 on
page (35)
(Q3)
B2.5 on
page (34)
(Q2)
Page 388
Table 2: Analysis of Unit 1 according to Analysis:

the Standard 2 of Reading and Thinking
Competency. The analysis of table 2 showed that
Benchmark (1.1) make predictions about
Lesson no Benchmark.1:Analyze and evaluate short story using contextual clues were
stories, poems, essays and one act play,
relate how text affect their lives and presented on page 16,29,32.(B1.5) identify
connect the text to contemporary universal theme was indicated on page
/historical ideas and issues across culture. 35.(B1.6) make connection between
L1 B1.1on page (16) (Q 2-3) characters and events were available on
page 35.(B1.10) give personal response
L2 B1.1 on page (29) (Q9-10) with justification was presented on page
L3(poem) B1.10 on page (34)(Q2,4,5)
34.(B1.11) analyze how poet/writer uses
language was indicated on page 35,37.
B1.11 on page (35)(Q3)
The above analysis showed that all the
B1.5 on page (35)(Q4)
three lessons of unit 1 were formulated
B1.6 on page (35)(Q5),B1.11 on page according to Standard 2 of Reading and
(37)(Q11) Thinking Competency. Analysis indicated
B1.1 on page (32)
that some benchmarks and their learning
outcomes can be achieve through the
textbook but outcomes of Benchmark 1
analyze and evaluate short stories
(B1.2,3,4,8,9) were not available in the
textbook.
Page 389
Table 3: Analysis of Unit 2 according to the paragraphs were reflected on page

the Standard 1 of Reading and Thinking 39,40,53,54. Short questions related to (
Competency. B 2.3 and 2.5) i-e critical thinking and
personal response of the students
Lesso Benchmar Benchmark Benchmar Benchmar
n no. k .1 .2 k .3 k .4
presented on the page 44,57,61 . (B 2.1)
on page 10 give prior knowledge related
to the lesson was given on page 39.
Evaluate Analyze, Analyze , Gather,
pattern of Synthesize synthesize analyze,
Picture of a Valley (3.1) was reflected on
text and informatio evaluate page 39. (B 4.1,4,2) analyze, synthesize
organizati evaluate n from a and and evaluate information for study skills
on and events, visual synthesize
function issues, clues or a informatio were mentioned on page 52,58 in the
of various ideas and graphic n to use form of exercise related to parts of
devices viewpoints, organizer for a speech.
used applying to variety of
within and reading summariz purposes
beyond a comprehen e, including The above analysis indicated that all the
paragraph sion and highlight a research three lessons of unit 2 were formulated
in text. thinking the key project.
strategies. areas according to Standard 1 of Reading and
main Thinking Competency. Analysis indicated
trends that all the four benchmarks and their
L1(Sto B1.1 on B2.1 on B3.1 on B4.1 on learning outcomes can be achieve
ry) page (39- page (38) page (39) page (52) through the textbook but outcomes of
40) Benchmark 1 function of various devices
B2.3 on
B1.6 on page (44) (B1.2,3,4) and Benchmark 3 analysis
page (39- (Q1-5) through visual clues (B3.1) were only
40) reflected in lesson 1.Benchmark 4
B 2.5 on
page (Q6,7) evaluate and synthesize information to
use for research project(B4.1) were only
L2(Ess B1.1on B2.1 on B4.1 on presented in lesson 1,2.The outcomes of
ay) page (53) page (38) page (58)
Benchmark 3 analyze and synthesize
B1.3 on B2.3 no information from graphic organizer to
page(53- page (57) summarize (B3.1,2,3,4,5,6) and
54) (Q 1,3,4,5)
Benchmark 4 evaluate and synthesize
B1.6 on B2.5 on information to use for research
page (53- page (57) project(B4.3,4,5,6) were not available in
54) (Q6-10)
the textbook.
L3(po B2.1 on
em) page (38) Table 4: Analysis of Unit 2 according
to the Standard 2 of Reading and
B2.3 on
page (61) Thinking Competency.
(Q1,3)
Lesson no Benchmark.1:Analyze and evaluate short
B2.5 on stories, poems ,essays and one act play,
page (61) relate how text affect their lives and
(Q2) connect the text to contemporary
/historical ideas and issues across culture.
L1(Story) B1.1 on page (44) (Q3)B1.6 on page (39-

43)
Analysis:
L2(Essay) B1.1 on page (53,54),B1.6 on page
The analysis of table no 3 showed that (53,54),B1.4 on page (57) (Q2)
Benchmark (1.1) supporting details and
key ideas related to the theme was L3(Poem) B1.10 on page (59)
indicated on the page 39,40,53 of the
B1.10 on page (61) (Q1,2)
textbook.(B1.3)analyze information in
the line, bracket was given on the page B1.11 on page (63) (Q12),B1.5 on page
53.( B 1.6) Chronological arrangements of (61) (Q3)
Page 390
B1.10 on page(62) (Q4,5) B1.6 on page (69) a blanket)

page (65- (Q1-6)
68)
B2.5 on
page (69)
(Q10-13)
L2(Aut B1.1 on B2.1 on

obiogr page (71- page (64)
aphy 74)
B2.3 on
Analysis: B1.6 on page (76)
page (71- (Q1-5)
74)
The analysis of table no 4 showed that B2.5 on
Benchmark (1.1) make predictions about page (76)
(Q6,7,8)
story using contextual clues were
presented on page 16,29,32.(B1.5) B2.5 on
identify universal theme were indicated page (76)
(Q9)
on page 35.(B1.6) make connection
between characters and events was L3 B2.1 on
available on page 35.(B1.10) give (Poem page (64)
)
personal response with justification was B2.3 on
presented on page 34.(B1.11) analyze page
how poet/writer uses language was (81)(Q1,2,3)
indicated on page 35,37. B2.5 on
page
The above analysis showed that all the (81,82)
three lessons of unit 2 were formulated (Q4,5,6)
according to Standard 2 of Reading and
Thinking Competency. Analysis indicated
that some benchmarks and their learning Analysis:
outcomes can be achieve through the
textbook but outcomes of Benchmark 1 The analysis of table no 5 showed that
analyze and evaluate short stories Benchmark (1.1) supporting details and
(B1.2,3,4,8,9) were not available in the key ideas related to the theme was
textbook. indicated on the page 65,68,71,74 of the
textbook.( B 1.6) Chronological
Table 5: Analysis of Unit 3 according to arrangements of the paragraphs were
the Standard 1 of Reading and Thinking reflected on page 65,68,71,74. Short
Competency. questions related to ( B 2.3 and 2.5) i-e
Lesso Benchmar Benchmark Benchmar Benchma critical thinking and personal response of
n no k.1 .2 k.3 rk.4 the students were presented on the
page 69,76,81,82 .(B 2.1) was available
pattern of Synthesize synthesize analyze, on the page 64 prior knowledge related
text and informatio evaluate to the lesson. Picture of Blanket (3.1)
organizatio evaluate n from a and was reflected on page 65. (B 4.1)
n and events, visual synthesiz
function of issues, clues or a e analyzes, synthesize and evaluate
various ideas and graphic informati information for study skills were
devices viewpoints, organizer on to use
used applying to for a
mentioned on page 70 in the form of
within and reading summarize variety of exercises related to parts of speech.
beyond a comprehens , highlight purposes
paragraph ion and the key including The above analysis indicated that all the
in text. thinking areas main a
strategies. trends research three lessons of unit 3 were formulated
project. according to Standard 1 of Reading and
Thinking Competency. Analysis indicated
L1(Sto B1.1 on B2.1 on B3.1 on B4.1 on
ry) page (65- page (64) page (65) page (70) that all the four benchmarks and their
68) (picture of learning outcomes can be achieve
B2.3 on
Page 391
through the textbook but outcomes of according to Standard 2 of Reading and

Benchmark 1 functions of various devices Thinking Competency. Analysis indicated
(B1.2,3,4) and Benchmark 3 analysis that some benchmarks and their learning
through visual clues (B3.1) were only outcomes can be achieve through the
reflected in lesson 1.Benchmark 4 textbook but outcomes of Benchmark 1
evaluate and synthesize information to analyze and evaluate short stories
use for research project(B4.1) were only (B1.2,3,4,8,9) were not available in the
presented in lesson 1.The outcomes of textbook.
Benchmark 3 analyze and synthesize
information from graphic organizer to Table 7: Analysis of Unit 4 according to
summarize (B3.1,2,3,4,5,6) and the Standard 1 of Reading and Thinking
Benchmark 4 evaluate and synthesize Competency.
information to use for research Lesson Benchmark Benchmark. Benchmark Benchmar
project(B4.3,4,5,6) were not available in no .1 2 .3 k.4
the textbook.
pattern of Synthesize synthesize analyze,
Table 6: Analysis of Unit 3 according to text and evaluate information evaluate
the Standard 2 of Reading and Thinking organizatio events, from a and
Competency. n and issues, ideas visual clues synthesize
function of and or a graphic informatio
various viewpoints, organizer n to use
Lesson no Benchmark.1:Analyze and
devices applying to for a
evaluate short stories,
used within reading summarize, variety of
poems, essays and one act
and beyond comprehensi highlight purposes
play, relate how text affect
a paragraph on and the key including
their lives and connect the
in text. thinking areas main a research
text to contemporary
strategies. trends project.
/historical ideas and issues
across culture.
L1(Sto B1.1 on B2.1 0n page B4.1 on
ry) page (85- (84) page 93 94
L1 (Story) B1.6 on page (65-68)
90)
B2.3 on page
B1.2 on page (65-68)
B1.6 on (92) (Q1-8)
page (85-
L2 (Autobiography) B1.10 on page (76) 90) B2.5 on page
(92,93) (9-
L3 (Poem) B1.10 on page (78,79) 16)
B1.11 on page (83) (Q9)
B1.10 on page (81,82) L2(Sto B1.1 0n B2.1 on page B4.1 on

(Q4,5,6) ry) page (84) page 98 99
(95,96)
B2.3 on page
B1.6 on (98) (Q1-5)
page (95-
Analysis: 96) B2.5 on page
(98) (Q6-11)
The analysis of table no 6 showed that
Benchmark (1.1) make predictions about L3(Poe B2.1 on page
m) (84)
story using contextual clues was
presented on page 16,29,32.(B1.5) B2.3 on page
identify universal theme was indicated on (103) (Q2)
page 35.(B1.6) make connection between B2.5 on page
characters and events was available on (103) (Q3,4)
page 65,68.(B1.10) give personal
response with justification was presented
on page 34.(B1.11) analyze how
poet/writer uses language was indicated Analysis:
on page 35,37. The table 7 showed that Benchmark (1.1)
The above analysis showed that all the supporting details and key ideas related
three lessons of unit 3 were formulated to the theme was indicated on the page
Page 392
85,90,95,96 of the textbook.( B 1.6) The table no 8 showed that Benchmark

Chronological arrangements of the (1.1) make predictions about story using
paragraphs was reflected on page contextual clues was presented on page
85,90,95,96. Short questions related to (B 16,29,32.(B1.5) identify universal theme
2.3 and 2.5) i-e critical thinking and is indicated on page 35.(B1.6) make
personal response of the students were connection between characters and
presented on the page 92, 93, 98,103. (B events was available on page
2.1) was available on the page 84 give 65,68.(B1.10) give personal response with
prior knowledge related to the lesson. (B justification was presented on page
4.1) analyzes, synthesize and evaluate 34.(B1.11) analyze how poet/writer uses
information for study skills were language was indicated on page 35,37.
mentioned on page 93,94,98,99 in the
form of exercise related to parts of The above analysis showed that all the
speech. three lessons of unit 3 were formulated
according to Standard 2 of Reading and
The above analysis indicated that all the Thinking Competency. Analysis indicated
three lessons of unit 3 were formulated that some benchmarks and their learning
according to Standard 1 of Reading and outcomes can be achieve through the
Thinking Competency. Analysis indicated textbook but outcomes of Benchmark 1
that all the four benchmarks and their analyze and evaluate short stories
learning outcomes can be achieve (B1.2,3,4,5,8,9) were not available in the
through the textbook but outcomes of textbook
Benchmark 1 functions of various devices
(B1.2,3,4) and Benchmark 3 analysis 1. CONCLUSION:
through visual clues (B3.1) were not
1. The analysis indicated that all the
reflected in any lesson of this unit.
three lessons of unit 1 were
Benchmark 4 evaluate and synthesize
formulated according to Standard
information to use for research project
1 of Reading and Thinking
(B4.1) were only presented in lesson
Competency. Analysis indicated
1and 2.The outcomes of Benchmark 3
that all the four benchmarks and
analyze and synthesize information from
their learning outcomes can be
graphic organizer to summarize
achieved through the textbook
(B3.1,2,3,4,5,6) and Benchmark 4
but outcomes of Benchmark 1
evaluate and synthesize information to
function of various devices
use for research project(B4.3,4,5,6) were
(B1.2,3,4) and Benchmark 3
not available in the textbook.
analysis through visual cues( B3.1)
Table 8: Analysis of Unit 4 according were only reflected in Lesson no 1
to the Standard 2 of Reading and .
Thinking Competency.
2. The analysis showed that all the
Lesson no Benchmark.1:Analyze and evaluate three lessons of unit 1 were
short stories, poems, essays and one formulated according to Standard
act play, relate how text affect their
lives and connect the text to 2 of Reading and Thinking
contemporary /historical ideas and Competency. Analysis indicated
issues across culture that some benchmarks and their
L1(Story) B1.2 on page (92) (Q9-14) learning outcomes can be achieve
through the textbook but
L2(Story) B1.2 on page (98) (Q6,7,8) B1.10 on outcomes of Benchmark 1 analyze
page (98) q 9,10,11
and evaluate short stories
L3(Poem) B1.11 on page (102) (Q1)B1.10 on (B1.2,3,4,5,8,9) were not
page (103) (Q2,3,4).B1.11 available in the textbook.
3. The analysis indicated that all

the three lessons of unit 2 were
Analysis:
Page 393
formulated according to Standard Jenkins, J. (2007) English as a lingua

1 of Reading and Thinking franca: attitude and identity. Oxford:
Competency. Analysis indicated Oxford University
that all the four benchmarks and
their learning outcomes can be Press, 2007. Print. Pinon, R. & Haydon, J.
achieve through the textbook but (2010). The benefits of the English
outcomes of Benchmark 1 Language for individuals and Societies:
function of various devices Quantitative Indicators from Cameroon,
(B1.2,3,4) and Benchmark 3 Nigeria, Rwanda, Bangladesh and
analysis through visual clues Pakistan. Custom report compiled by
(B3.1) were only reflected in Euromonitor International for the British
lesson 1. Council.(Britton Street, London, ECIM
5UX, United Kingdom).
4. The analysis showed that all the
three lessons of unit 2 were Parveen, S. (2013). A Study on Attitudes
formulated according to Standard towards Varieties of Spoken English in
2 of Reading and Thinking Pakistani Context.
Competency. Analysis indicated
Roy, L. (2006). In search of the global
that some benchmarks and their
graduate. Transforming international
learning outcomes can be achieve
experience into intercultural
through the textbook but
competence.
outcomes of Benchmark 1 analyze
and evaluate short stories Rahman, T. (2006). Language policy,
(B1.2,3,4,5,8,9) were not multilingualism and language vitality in
available in the textbook Pakistan.
3. REFERENCES: Shamim, F. (2008). Trends, issues and
challenges in English language education
Aslam, M. (2008) Teaching of English: A
in Pakistan: Asia Pacific Journal of
Practical course for B.ed (2nd Edition).
Cambrigde House,438114.Ansari Road, Education.Retrieve from
Daryagangi, New Delhi 110002.Cambrigde (http://www.informaworld.com/smpp/titl
e~content=t713724324)
University Press India Pvt.Ltd.
Crystal,D. (2006). English as a Global Tuleja, E. ( 2006). Aspects of

Language second edition. Cambridge intercultural awareness through an MBA
University Press. The Pitt Building, study abroad program: Going Backstage.
Trumpington Street, Cambridge CB2 IRP, Journal of Business Communication
United Kingdom. Quarterly, 71(3),314-337.
Diamond,Linda& Gutlohn, Wong, R.M. (2007). Competency –based

L.(2006).Teaching language.Retrieved English Teaching and Language Learning:
From http: eltj.oxford Investigating Pre-service teachers o
journal,org/cgi/content/abstract/50/115
2.Dec,6,2006.
DeKeyser, R.M. (ed.) (2007). Practice in a

Second Language. Perspectives from
Applied Linguistics and Cognitive
Psychology. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Gobi, P. (2007). Business communication

needs a multicultural perspective.
Journal of Business and Technical
Communication, 21(4),425-437.
Page 394
DEVELOPING READING COMPREHENSION AT INTERMEDIATE LEVEL THROUGH

NEWSPAPERS
Farrukh Kamran1, Saadia Khan 2 Intikhab Alam3, Gulshan Iqbal4, Farid Anwar5
Farrukh Kamran
Institute of Education and Research,
Kohat University of Science and Technology (KUST), Khyber Pakhtoon Khawa, Pakistan
farrukhkust@gmail.com
Saadia Khan
National University of Modern Languages (NUML), Islamabad, Pakistan
saadiacs@gmail.com
Intikhab Alam
Department of Linguistics, Air University, Islamabad
intikhabapollonian@gmail.com
Gulshan Iqbal
Sir Syed College of Education, Kohat
beatsu674@yahoo.com
Farid Anwar
Institute of Education and Research,
Kohat University of Science and Technology (KUST), Khyber Pakhtoon Khawa, Pakistan
Faridkk81@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
English enjoys a great prestige in the world over. It is used for communication in many
countries of the world including Pakistan. In Pakistan, at all levels of study, it is
considered as a compulsory subject. The skill, which is employed the most, is reading
skills. Nevertheless, students face many problems in reading. The aim of the
researcher in conducting a present research was to develop the reading
comprehension of the students at the intermediate level through newspaper. The
research was experimental in nature. Students were divided in to Experimental and
Controlled Groups. Both the groups were given pre-test in beginning. Students of
Experimental group practiced different activities i.e. silent reading, speed reading,
skimming and reading in chunks, using newspapers. Finally, Post-test was given to both
groups. The analysis of Post-test and Pre-test shows improvement in the performance
of the pupils of the Experimental Group. The average increased is from 9.75 to 18.5.
According to the data obtained and analyzed, the areas of study in which the students
made a considerable improvement were identification, Classification, and Evaluation.
While in Interpretation and Analysis, a slight improvement was shown by the students
of Experimental Group. However, the results in all areas of study were encouraging.
The performance of the Control Group remained more or less the same, as they did
not receive any treatment. Therefore, the researcher has seen that the utilization of
English Newspapers will absolutely support and inspire the pupils and help them to
master their reading and comprehension level.
Key Words: Teaching of Reading skills, the skill of Reading, Reading Comprehension
Page 395
1. INTRODUCTION
19T 4. Seeing the relationship of ideas and
use these in reading with meaning and
Reading is an essential part of our daily fluency is Critical reading.
life. It is a receptive skill which is used
for personal and academic purposes. Its Reading must be viewed as a
aim is to get expressed ideas and demonstration of communication.
thoughts clearly and effectively. That is There is a communicator (the writer of
why all English language teachers lay the book that the reader is reader),
stress on it [1]. there is a message (exchanged to the
reader by means of images on paper),
For teaching the skill of reading, it is and there is beneficiary of the message
important to encourage students to (the reader), and there is recipient of
read newspaper, short stories, essays the message (the reader). The reader
and articles of their own interest. The involved in variety of different
reading purpose is to associate the activities which he deals with the text;
thoughts on the page to what you in fact, the act of reading is a decision
definitely know. On the off chance that making process as he attempts to bring
you don't know anything around a his own sense of meaning to the
subject, then pouring words into your vagueness of print [2].
mind resemble pouring water into your
hand. You don't hold much. The The reading process procedure is a
objective of teaching skills of reading greatly complex one effectively
to the pupils is to empower them to including both half of the mind. It is
peruse without help new authentic attempted to streamline this procedure
writings, at fitting speed and with by separating it into three noteworthy
satisfactory comprehension. strides of identification, organization
and reaction.
Reading skills are particular abilities
which make possible a reader to: 1.1 Identification
• To read the written structure as This includes the student's capacity to
important meaningful dialect take up with words as they show up in
• To read anything composed with reading. This is the premise of reading;
autonomy, appreciation and for sounding out phonemes and
familiarity morphemes makes no difference to the
pupil on the off chance that he can't
Various kinds of reading skills are: recognize or call upon either
connection pieces of information.
1. Figuring new words by the reader is
a Word attack skills. 1.2 Organization
2. Predict the next word, phrase and This is organizing the ideas by reader to
sentence promptly enough to speed produce a logical result.
identification is Comprehension Skills.
1.3 Reaction
3. Analyzing larger segments, phrases This includes an enthusiastic and
and groups of words as a whole is scholarly response, which most actually
Fluency Skills. will rely on upon the sort of material
the pupil read. In this way if reading
has been pleasurable on the grounds
Page 396
that the pupil has possessed the • The events in the text are
capacity to recognize effectively connected to prior knowledge or
(sincerely and mentally) with the experience
content, and to arrange the material,
then the student needs to read more. 1.5 Memory
The yearning will set off a chain
Memory plays important role in
response, which will prompt all the
comprehension. The process of memory
more reading, and the more the
can, therefore, be said to consist of
student reads, the better he will read.
three stages- encoding, storage and
This is one of the objectives of the
retrieval. That is, reader first process
instructors [3].
the written word for the brain the
Sociolinguistics competence: Learning deposits it for future use and finally
about various sorts of writings and their withdraws it as the occasion demands
standard structure and substance. [8]. There are two types of memory.
Strategic competence: the talent to 1.5.1 The Short- term Memory

use top-down strategies as well as
It is immediate demand. The normal
knowledge of the language (bottom-up
span for such memory is 15 to 20
strategy)
seconds, and it has been suggested that
a number of the chunks that can be
1.4 Reading Comprehension
held in the short- term memory for
Comprehension intends to get under instance recall is approximately 5 to 7.
the text. Reading Comprehension is This shows clearly enough the very
characterized as the level of limited capacity of this particular
comprehension of composing. Reading storage system.
cognizance results when the reader
knows which abilities and techniques 1.5.2 The long term Memory
are suitable for the kind of content,
and see how to apply them to On the other hand, it is capable of
successfully complete the reading holding information for a much longer
purpose. The traits like motivation, time, and seems to have an unlimited
concentrations and mental framework capacity for holding different kinds of
for holding ideas are required for information. When somebody wants to
reading comprehension. [6]. store information in the long term
memory, he/ she have to rehearse, or
Highly skilled readers, for instance: practice, that information and make
some conscious attempt to hold it [4].
• By using clues readers can
Predict what will happen next in 1.6 Speed Reading
a text
Speed reading or quick reading is
• About the main idea, plot or
essentially a procedure that permits a
message of the text can Create
pupil to read content at an expanded
questions
rate. This should be possible by
• keep an eye on understanding of
skimming or specifically reading certain
the sequence, context, or
words or expressions that are
characters
significant to the content. It is directly
• Clarify confused parts of the related to reading comprehension.
text Readers whose reading speed is very
slow are generally unable to
Page 397
comprehend the text with any degree • Two uncounted words

of efficiency. Likewise, those who read • Four or five words in a
too fast are unlikely to comprehend as meaningful sequence (E.g. a
much as they should [5]. phrase or a short sentence)
The normal reading comprehension rate Reading in chunks not only increases
of an individual is around 75%. speed and comprehension but also
Notwithstanding, a few techniques frees the reader from undue concern
people utilize to accomplish speed over individual letters and words. It has
reading altogether cuts into this figure, been found that an individual letters
as much as less than 50%. When this are not necessary for word
happens a reader's understanding level identification and that individual words
is comprised. Under this condition it are not necessary for word
would be extremely troublesome for a identification and that individual words
pupil to learn or concentrate new are not essential for sentence
materials. completion. It has been shown that
good readers are not proofreaders,
Fast reading at the expense of since attention to small detail is not
comprehension is futile, but a good part of their reading strategy. Such
reader is certainly not a slow reader. readers ‘correct’ in accuracies of print
Reading at a deliberately slow pace as they go along [9].
does not necessarily ensure effective
comprehension. Apart from slowing down the reading
speed, stopping at individual words
1.6.1 Skimming hinders comprehension. As a reader is
engaged in worrying over the individual
It is utilized to rapidly recognize the
meaning of separate words, he is in
primary ideas of the content. At the
danger of missing the overall meaning
point when individuals read the daily
of the sentence as a whole. Such a
paper, they are likely not
reader ‘cannot see the wood for trees’.
understanding it word by word; rather,
they are skimming the content. 1.6.3 Silent Reading
Skimming is done at the pace three to
four times quicker than ordinary In most of the schools and colleges in
reading. This procedure is valuable Pakistan, reading aloud is still regularly
when looking for particular data as practiced and there is very little
opposed to reading for comprehension. encouragement of silent reading. True
Technique of skimming functions reading is silent reading. It is a two way
admirably to discover dates, names, process of negotiation between the
and places. It may be utilized to survey writer and reader. It is not appreciated
diagrams, tables and outlines. that reading aloud brings with it its
own problem [11].
1.6.2 Reading In Chunks
The reader of the text has to think and
The eye is capable of reading groups of rethink as he proceeds. Sometimes he
letters or words; it does not necessarily has to pause and then refer back;
progress word by word. Studies have sometimes he has to skip a head a
shown that a skilled reader can take in check a prediction. All this can be done
a single eye glance quite naturally when reading silently,
but is denied to the reader who is
• Four or five uncounted letters
forced to read aloud.
Page 398
IDENTIFICATION OF THE PROBLEM peculiarities and grasp the new

structures
In Pakistani schools, English is taught as 7. To develop students’ interest in
a compulsory subject right from class 1 and taste for independent
but it is a common observation that reading;
students are unable to read properly in
English. The reasons are many. At HYPOTHESIS
school level, the students are taught
rules of grammar. They learn spelling If newspapers are used with the
and punctuation, parts of speech, techniques of silent reading, speed
tenses, voice and narration. The reading, reading in chunks, and
problem at the school level is that skimming a significant development can
there is more emphasis on grammar be brought about in reading
and mechanics than on the reading and comprehension of the students at
writing [10]. intermediate level.
Students read compositions, essays, RESEARCH METHDOLOGY

stories and articles without analyzing
The present research was conducted to
ideas, thoughts and style of the writer.
develop the reading comprehension of
The efforts of the teacher are directed
the students at intermediate level. The
to complete the course and the efforts
students were divided in Experimental
of the students are directed to prepare
group and controlled group. Pre-test
themselves for examination. Therefore,
was given to both groups. The
the students rely on rote learning. The
experimental group studied and
students learn each and everything by
analyzed the reading text; practiced
heart and write the same in the
different activities such as speed
examination papers. Reading and
reading, silent reading, reading in
writing go side by side. Reading
chunks and skimming. Finally, both the
comprehension plays an important role
experimental group and controlled
in effective and creative writing. If
group were given a post test. The
there is no comprehension, there will
results obtained were analyzed,
be no effective writing at all [12].
conclusions were drawn and
PURPOSE OF THE STUDY recommendations were made for future
research.
1. To grasp the meaning of
expressed thoughts, feelings or 1.7 DELIMITATION OF THE STUDY
impressions in the short time.
The study is limited to the students of
2. To understand fully what they
intermediate classes of Army Public
read.
School and College, Kohat.
3. To analyze writer’s idea or
style.
4. To enable students to retain the 2. METHODS AND METHODOLOGY
overall meaning of the material
read 2.1 Experimental Research
5. To enable students to
The present research is experimental in
understand the meaning of new
nature. There are two basic groups in
words, phrases and idioms in
an experimental design.
future use.
6. To enable students to
understand grammatical
Page 399
Experimental Group_ which is exposed • Find out the sample

to the assumed casual variable population’s background
knowledge of the English
Controlled Group_ which is not Language.
exposed to the assumed casual variable • Determine their use of the
English Language in personal
It is important to note that for
and academic reading.
experimental design there is an
assumption, i.e., the groups being • Get their own view of their
compared are equivalent before the reading skill in English.
introduction of the treatment. 2.5 Pre- Test
Further [13] states the steps of Both experimental and control Groups
experimental method, which are as were given Pre-Test. A reading score
follows: card was designed and the pre-test of
both the groups were scored according
• Pre- test of experimental and
to the reading score card.
control groups
• Final test of experimental and Students of Experimental Group worked
control groups as whole. They were given practice in
• Measurement of pupils mean different techniques i.e., silent
gain i.e., final test scores minus reading, reading in chunks and
pre-test scores skimming. All the four grouped in two
activities and the names were given as
Keeping in view the above information, Activity of Silent and Speed Reading
the researcher selected two groups of
and Activity of Chunks Reading and
students of intermediate level studying Skimming.
at Army Public School and College
Kohat. One group was experimental 2.6 Post- Test (Final Test)
group while the other served as the
controlled group. Final test was given to the Students of
experimental and Control Group. Their
2.2 Areas of Study tests were scored according to reading
score card. On the basis of result, a
The researcher was focused on the comparison was made between the pre-
following main areas of Reading test and the post test and the final
Comprehension: results obtained were interpreted and
• Identification analyzed and conclusions were drawn.
• Classification
3. ANALYSIS OF THE DATA AND
• Evaluation
INTERPRETATION
• Interpretation
• Analysis
The pupils of experimental and control
2.3 Methodology Groups performed different activities.
For all activities, newspapers were
The following methodology was used. The Controlled Group took the
employed in conducting this research: pre and post-test but at the same time
the Experimental Group performed
2.4 Questionnaire activities based on silent reading,
reading in chunks, speed reading and
The questionnaire was designed to: skimming in addition to pre-test and
Page 400
post-test. The main purpose behind this

was to see how effective newspapers
are in the development of Reading Identification
Comprehension using techniques of
Pretest Silent Chunks Post
silent reading, reading in chunks, speed
and reading test
reading and skimming.
speed
The main areas of study were Marks 29 44 49 51
Identification, Interpretation, Average 2.4 3.7 4.1 4.25
classification, Analysis and Evaluation. The graph shows improvement in the
Under the area of identification came performance of pupils in the area of
the theme or central idea, an interpretation by Silent and Speed
understanding of the topic and focus on Reading and Chunks Reading and
the topic. In the area of classification, Skimming. The Average speed increased
the arrangement of ideas was seen from 2.41 to 4.25.
while in interpretation, effective
understanding was checked. Under area Classification
of analysis came relationship between
words and development of sense. Pretest Silent Chunks Post
Under evaluation variety and and reading test
effectiveness was checked. speed
Marks 23 35 44 49
The performances of the Average 1.91 2.91 3.66 4.08
Experimental and Control Group is The graph shows improvement
analyzed and presented on the in the performance of pupils in the
following pages: area of interpretation by Silent and
3.1 Analysis of Experimental Groups Speed Reading and Chunks Reading and
Performance Skimming. The Average speed increased
from 1.91 to 4.08.
An analysis of Experimental
Group’s performance in the areas of Evaluation
study after going through the activities Prete Silent Chunks Post test
of Pre-test, Silent and Speed Reading, st and reading
Reading in Chunks, skimming and Post- speed
test is given below.
Mark 22 38 42 46
The following graphs show the s
total marks obtained and average by Aver 1.83 3.16 3.5 3.83
the people of Experimental Group in age
the area of Identification, The graph shows improvement in
Classification, Evaluation, the performance of pupils in the area
Interpretation and Analysis. of interpretation by Silent and Speed
Reading and Chunks Reading and
Data of total marks follows the Skimming. The Average speed increased
Graphs from 1.83 to 3.83.
Page 401
Interpretation performance of the pupils of the

Experimental Group. The average
Prete Silent Chunks Post test increased from 9.75 to 18.5.
st and reading
speed 3.3 Analysis Of Control Group’s
Performance
Marks 22 38 42 46
Avera 1.83 3.16 3.5 3.83 An analysis of Control Group’s
ge performance in the areas of study after
The graph shows improvement in going through the Pre-test and Post-
the performance of pupils in the area test is given below.
of interpretation by Silent and Speed The following graphs show the total
Reading and Chunks Reading and marks obtained and average by the
Skimming. The Average speed increased people of Experimental Group in the
from 1.83 to 3.25. area of Identification, Classification,
Evaluation, Interpretation and Analysis.
Analysis
Data of total marks follows the
Pretest Silent Chunks Post Graphs
and reading test Identification
speed 40 28 29
Marks 21 28 28 37 Marks
20
Avera 1.75 2.33 2.33 3.08 2.33 2.41
ge Average
0
Pre-test post-test
The graph shows improvement in the

The graph shows no significant
performance of pupils in the area of
improvement in the performance of
interpretation by Silent and Speed
pupils.
Reading and Chunks Reading and
Skimming. The Average speed increased
Classification
from 1.75 to 3.08.
40 26 29
In the conclusion, it can be pointed out
that performance of pupils in all areas 20 Marks
2.16 2.41
of study improved after going through 0 Average
the activities of Pre-test, Silent and Pre-test post-test
Speed Reading, Chunks Reading and
Skimming and Post Test.
3.2 Analysis Of Experimental Of improvement in the performance of
Groups Pre-Test And Post-Test pupils.
Activities Total Average Evaluation

Marks
Pre-test 117 9.75 40
23 23
Post-test 222 18.5 20 Marks
1.91 2.16
0 Average
Pre-test post-test
The analysis of Post-test and Pre-test
shows improvement in the
Page 402
The graph shows no significant 3.5 COMPARISON BETWEEN THE

improvement in the performance of RESULTS OF EXPERIMENTAL GROUP
pupils. AND CONTROL GROUP
Interpretation
40 26 26 Experimental
300 222
group total
20 Marks
2.16 2.16 200 117 130 128 marks
0 Average 100 9.7510.83 18.510.66 Experimental
Pre-test post-test 0 group average
Pre-test Pro-test marks
The graph shows no significant Increase in Marks of Experimental

improvement in the performance of Group
pupils.
= Post Test – Pre Test
Analysis
= 222-117
40 27 24
Marks =105 Marks
20
2.25 2
Average Increase in average of Experimental
0
Group
Pre-test post-test
= Post Test – Pre Test
improvement in the performance of =18.5-9.75
pupils.
=8.75 Marks
3.4 ANALYSIS OF CONTROL GROUP’S
PRE-TEST AND POST TEST 4. FINDINGS, CONCLUSIONS AND
RECOMMENDATIONS
4.1 Summary of The Problem And

Activities Total Marks Average Results
Pre Test 130 10.83
Post Test 128 10.66 The present research has been
conducted to develop the Reading
Comprehension of the students through
The analysis of Post-test and Pre-test newspapers at intermediate level. For
shows no improvement in the developing the reading comprehension
performance of the pupils of Control silent reading, speed reading, reading
Group and no increase in average. in chunks and skimming were used as
the main tools. Students were divided
in to Experimental and Control Groups
and Experimental methods were
applied to the Experimental Group.
The research has yielded important

results. The use of newspapers using
the techniques of silent reading, speed
reading, reading in chunks and
Page 403
skimming proved effective. According • Suitable techniques may be

to the data obtained and analyzed, the employed for teaching reading
areas of study in which the students skill to the students.
made a considerable improvement • Paper pattern must be set in
were identification, Classification, and such a way to discourage rote
Evaluation. While in Interpretation and memorization.
Analysis, a slight improvement was • The syllabi at the school and
shown by the students of Experimental college level may be reviewed
Group. However, the results in all areas keeping in view the needs of
of study were encouraging. The students in reading skill.
performance of the Control Group • Along with textbooks, the
remained more or less the same, as students may be encouraged to
they did not receive any treatment. read even for pleasure using
their own background
4.2 Implications of the Findings
knowledge of language.
The findings imply that English • The examinations may be
Language Teaching in Pakistan needs conducted in such a way that
change. The traditional methods of the comprehension of the
teaching English in our schools and students could be checked.
colleges do not encourage our students • The learners may be enabled to
to comprehend and think. Reading and apply the learnt vocabulary to
writing both skills are treated as the other similar situation.
means to pass examination. The • It is recommended that further
reading skills, including reading research may be conducted in
comprehension skills, are not taught other area of reading skills such
properly since the usual practice is to as phonics, fluency and
make students memorize someone vocabulary.
else’s ideas. They do not read for
comprehension but they do just rote 6. REFERENCES
memorization and reproduce when [1] Aslam,M.2003.Teaching of
required. English.New Delhi: Foundation
Books (pp 76, 78)
In the conventional method, the
[2] Barr, Ian and Reynolds, J.
student must say something that he has
2001.IGCSE English. London:
only learned. There is all the
John Murray (pp 6-7)
distinction in the world between having
[3] Dash. B.N.2004. Teaching of
something to say, and saying
English. New Delhi: Dominant
something.
Publishers and Distributors.(pp
The main implication of the findings is 121-122. 127-129).
that he reading skill, especially reading [4] Doff,Adrain.1988. Teach
comprehension skills can significantly English training course for
be improved by using different Teachers, Cambridge:
techniques. These techniques enable Cambridge University Press.(pp
the students to read and comprehend 18-19)
completely. [5] Frisby,A.W.1987. Teaching
English. London: Longmans.
5. RECOMMENDATIONS (p.25)
[6] Gurrey,P.2001. Teaching
The following points are recommended. English as a Foreign Language.
Page 404
Oxford: Oxford University

Press.(pp.35-36)
[7] Higgins, John.1884. Reading
and Risk Taking. ELT Journal.
(vol.38, p.3).
[8] Munter,Mary.1987. Business
Communications Strategy and
Skills. New Jersey: Prentice-
Hall, Inc. (pp 121-122, 125- 127)
[9] Naqvi,et al. 2008. Teaching of
English as a Foreigh Language.
Lahore: Famous Products.
(pp.209-2010, 237-241)
[10] Nuttal, Christine. 1996.
Teaching Reading Skills in a
Foreign Language. London:
Heinemann Educational. (Chap.
4).
[11] Pitcher,John.1985. Francis
Bacon: The Essay. London:
Penguin Group. (p. 209).
[12] Pugh. A. K. 1980. Silent
Reading. London: Heinemann
Educational. (p.27).
[13] Steele, Richard. 1710. The
Tatler. Oxford: Oxford
University Press (p. 23)
Page 405
Electronic Media Detection of Crimes: Comparative Study of GEO News and ARY News,
Pakistan
Daniyal Ahmad Chughtai, Mahnoor Alam, Saniya Khan, Dr Shoaib Ahmed

Department of Humanities & Liberal Arts
Foundation University Rawalpindi Campus
rw13daniel@gmail.com
Abstract
The paper seeks to study the detection of crimes by Pakistan’s E-Media (TV). Two leading
crime shows namely FIR and Saray-Aam are targeted, hailing from TV channels GEO News
and ARY News respectively. This study is largely based on in-depth content analysis of
both shows within the purview of specific parameters, formulated to attain the objectives
of the study and to answer the research questions. Moreover descriptive analysis is
employed to further strengthen the study. The results of the study have been interesting
as they are contrary to the dominating viewpoint held about Pakistan’s TV crime shows.
Keywords
E-Media (Television), Crime, Crime Shows
1.1 Introduction quite popular among the audience and

In technical jargon, electronic media are has substantial viewership in E-Media.
that form of media that employs Though this trend originated from
electromechanical energy for the Western E-Media, in subcontinent,
audience to receive the content, especially Pakistan, it is still in its
contrasted to the static media, or in developmental stages, but thriving
other words print media, which do not nonetheless. Some practitioners also call
require any form of electronics to be investigative journalism as watchdog
accessed. Electronic media devices, of journalism or to be more precise,
which Television is an integral part, have accountability reporting. Rightly so, if
paved their way into almost every part of done correctly, investigative journalism
our lives, so much so that TV sets are can easily surpass the law enforcing
now present in our bedrooms. From bodies in tackling crimes, and in some
academic standpoint, E-Media has cases even guiding them, irrespective of
innumerable uses, but our area of the fact that who committed what crime.
interest is Journalism, specifically
Investigative Journalism in the world of The E-Media of today now extensively
E-Media industry (Television). According incorporates investigative journalism into
to American Press Institute, ‘Journalism its domain. The concept of crime shows
is gathering, processing and in E-Media is prevalent for a longtime.
dissemination of news and information Crime and Investigation Network is a
related to an audience.’ To narrow down, typical example from Western Media.
Investigative Journalism follows the same This network airs largely reruns of crime
principle as of larger body of Journalism, dramas such as Nash Bridges and Hack;
of which it is a sub-category, but herein furthermore, it also airs crime
journalists thoroughly investigate one documentaries by the name of SWAT,
specific topic of their interest, which can Uncovered and The First 48. Pakistan’s E-
be a serious crime, political corruption or Media industry is no exception in this
corporate misconduct. It is a highly regard. As it is evident from the title of
sensitive form of journalism, which this paper, the focus of this research is
necessitates great deal of in-depth study on E-Media detection of crimes in a
and legal awareness on part of society by the virtue of investigative
journalists. Over recent years, journalism. To delve deeper into this
investigative journalism has become subject, two leading TV channels of
Page 406
Pakistan’s E-Media industry, namely GEO advancement, these tales are telecasted
News and ARY News are considered. Both on television. TV disseminates the
of the channels are running a dedicated cultural images via which we comprehend
prime time program for crimes in the elements of our social world, margining
country. GEO News regularly airs a crime from our own identities to our
show by the name of FIR and likewise, conceptualization of correct and
ARY News airs Saray-Aam. So to study the incorrect (Wilson, 2000; Wittebols, 2004;
E-Media detection of crimes in Pakistan, Wykes and Gunter, 2005) [3-5]. Since the
both of these shows will be studied on de novo of TV, one the most prevailing
comparative basis to develop a sound genres of this particular mass medium
body of knowledge in this sphere, which has been the crime shows or drama
will greatly help not just the (Mawby, 2004) [6]. Crime dramas offer
academicians of this field, but also media interpretative paradigms that mold our
personnel, in understanding the role of cognition, (Jewkes, 2004) [7]. Crime
Pakistan’s E-Media in detecting crimes. shows or dramas are ethical plays which
girdles around the concept and fight of
1.2 Originality of the Study good and evil, between heroes and
A substantial literature gap was observed villains (Rafter, 2006) [8]. The crime
in Pakistan regarding role of E-Media in genre exposes constant elements, e.g.
detection of crimes, as such, this study Coverage of a crime, mostly violent
will fill the current void in literature and crime, and the ensuing fight for justice.
will significantly contribute to the In past 50 years, TV crime drama has
existing body of knowledge. This will moved from stories wherein detectives
benefit not only media practitioners and (private) or criminal lawyers safeguarded
personnel, but also media academicians, their innocent clients, to programs
law enforcement agencies, humanitarian wherein police apprehend the guilty
groups and the society at large. (Cavender, 2004) [9]. These days, the
police personnel are the good guys and
1.3 Objectives of the Study lawyers are the bad guys who obstructs
This study aims to achieve the following
their fight for justice (Rapping, 2003)
objectives: [10]. To large extent, the designs of
• To create a database of crimes comprehending that the crime genre
detected by Pakistan’s TV crime circularize go unchecked, due to multiple
shows reasons. Firstly, the producers of TV
• To develop a comparison of two crime dramas/shows try to attract a large
leading channels, in terms of their number of audience, they are inclined to
coverage of crimes on-air programs that mirrors the cultural
• To formulate a perceived impact beliefs and feelings about crime shared
of crime shows on the audience by the audience (Rapping, 2003) [11].
Likewise, crime genre storylines are
2.1 Literature Review easily incorporated in the dominating
According to a renowned formulation, social and political ideologies (Cavender,
culture comprises of the tales we tell 2004) [12]. Lastly, crime dramas/shows
ourselves regarding ourselves (Geertz, offer comprehension of criminals and
1973) [1]. The tales offer an crimes, which is in accordance with the
interpretative design through which we criminological theories (Rafter, 2006)
are fostered to comprehend sundry [13]. The designs of comprehending the
components of culture (McCullagh, 2002) crime are unchecked then, for they
[2]. This design stretches upon symbols mirror over-powering, for granted
and meanings, and utilizes these cultural premises, but in turn, they continue
components even as it reinforces them. those premises and by doing so,
Such tales then, both mirrors and mold perpetuate cultural opinions regarding
our culture. In the current age of criminals and crime. The crime genre
unprecedented technological also telecast cultural images of gender.
Page 407
These images mostly go unchecked 2.2 Theoretical Framework

because they are also in accordance with The theoretical framework of the study
cultural premises (Roberts and Inderman, includes three crime theories which
2005) [14]. Cultural ideals regarding underpin the study. Firstly the
gender affect ideas of heroism (Rafter, deterrence theory which states that
2006) [15]. In previously telecast crime crimes can be thwarted by the threat of
shows/dramas, the hero is usually a punishment, followed by special
macho man, and with a great probability deterrence theory which states that the
of being a loner. In present time though, penalties for criminal acts should be
females are included more in crime sufficiently severe so that the convicted
dramas/shows, and ideas of the best cop criminals will never repeat their acts,
or hero is less focused on heroic and lastly, the utility theory which holds
projection of physical strength and more that a criminal will attempt to maximize
on technical ability, what Messerschmidt the utility from criminal behavior.
(1993) dubs as techno-masculinity [16]. Moreover, Social learning theory by
The hero is less expected to be a loner Albert Bandura posits that learning is a
and more expected to be a part of police cognitive process that takes place in a
organization. These genre shifts mirrors social context and can occur purely
greater cultural changes, like changes in through observation or direct instruction,
the nature of manhood (Messerschmidt, even in the absence of motor
1993) [17], what it really means to be a reproduction or direct reinforcement,
hero (Cavender, 1999) [18], or due to the which can be easily related to the theme
fact that there are many women in the of this paper.
criminal justice work environment
(Martin and Jurik, 2006) [19]. 3.1 Research Questions
• What are the types of crimes covered
The move in the direction of more by Saray-Aam and FIR? RQ1
dramas regarding the police carries some • What is the intensity of crimes
other changes in the crime genre. The covered by Saray-Aam and FIR? RQ2
stories in current dramas or shows not • What is the region of crimes covered
just deal with crime and the measures or by Saray-Aam and FIR in terms of
efforts to apprehend the criminal; they urban or rural area? RQ3(a)
also include details regarding the police • What is the region of crimes covered
culture and about the personal lives of by Saray-Aam and FIR in terms of city
the police personnel (Wittebols, 2004) or locality? RQ3(b)
[20]. These personal lives can be shown • Is the legal action taken by the Police
as home life (McCullagh, 2002) [21]; on for the crimes covered by Saray-Aam
other occasions, the personnel of the and FIR? RQ4(a)
police department are shown as police • Is the legal action taken by the Court
family (Joyrich, 1996: 48–9) [22]. These for the crimes covered by Saray-Aam
stories largely have a melodramatic trait, and FIR? RQ4(b)
complete with intriguing plots that are • Is the vocal projection of crimes
charged up by the characters background covered by Saray-Aam and FIR
stories (Mittell, 2004) [23]. Apart from sensational, exaggerated or both?
these shows/dramas melodramatic RQ5
essence, current crime drama is
• Is the visual projection of crimes
connected with crime news and reality
covered by Saray-Aam and FIR
TV (Altheide, 2002; Jewkes, 2004) [24-
dramatic, violent or both? RQ6
25]. Crime news, America’s Most Wanted,
• Based on the answers of the questions
and crime drama all emphasize violent
above, what would be the perceived
crime (Cavender et al., 1999; Chadee and
impact on mass audience of such
Ditton, 2005; Roberts and Inderman,
coverage? RQ7
2005) [26-28]
3.2 Assumption
Page 408
The term E-Media is very vast in its • L2: Legal action by Court?
meaning, but in context of this paper, it • M1: Media vocal projection:
specifically refers to Television. To Sensational & Exaggerated?
reiterate, this paper will focus on crime • M2: Media visual projection:
detection by the virtue of crime shows Dramatic & Violent?
on-aired during prime time of two
leading TV channels of Pakistan, namely
ARY News and GEO News. 4.1 Content Analysis of Program and
Sample A
3.3 Methodology 25 Episodes of FIR ranging from April
The universe for this research can be 2014 to Sep 2014
metaphorically termed as crime TV
Shows. The study is quantitative and RQ 1: What are the types of crimes
qualitative in nature. A model is created covered by FIR?
in order to perform in-depth content The results show that most of the crimes
analysis to study two leading crime covered by FIR are primarily murder
shows, namely, Saray-Aam (ARY News) incidents, followed by kidnapping and
and FIR (Geo News). For Saray-Aam, 25 corruption. Property damage, fraud,
episodes were randomly selected as a economic crime and smuggling are next
sample from July 2014 to May 2015 and in line. It can be safely assumed based on
for FIR, 25 episodes were randomly the results that the priority of FIR is to
selected as a sample from April 2014 to
Sep 2014. This makes the collective
sample size of 50, on which an extensive
content analysis is executed based on the
parameters defined by the research
model. Descriptive analysis is performed
to answer the research questions.
3.4 Content Analysis

This research is largely based on in-depth
content analysis of two leading crime
shows of Pakistani TV Industry. The Figure I
instrument applied to achieve the
objectives of this study is basically a
framework of different parameters,
directly related to the topic statement.
The content analysis is done in
accordance with these parameters.
Following details should be noted:
Program A: FIR of GEO News

Program B: Saray-Aam of ARY News
Sample A: 25 episodes of FIR
Sample B: 25 episodes of Saray-Aam cover murder incidents.
Timeline A: April 2014 to Sep 2014
Timeline B: July 2014 to May 2015
3.5 Parameters of the Model

• C1: Crime Type?
• C2: Crime Intensity?
• R1: Region: Urban or Rural?
• R2: Region: City or Locality?
• L1: Legal action by Police?
Page 409
Crime Type Frequency The answer of this RQ further

Murder 10 corroborates the previous one, as most of
the crimes covered by FIR were from
Kidnapping 4
Karachi, which is an entirely urban area,
Corruption 4 followed by other cities rather randomly.
Property Damage 2
Fraud 2 City/Area Frequency
Economic Crime 2 Karachi 20
Smuggling 2 Sahiwal 1
Property Dispute 1 Khanewal 1
Violence 1 Mandi-Bahudin 1
Bribery 1 England 1
Fake Identities 1 Other 1
Animal Hunting 1 Table IV
Physical Abuse 1 RQ 4(a): Is the legal action taken by the
Robbery 1 Police for the crimes covered by FIR?
Terrorism 1 The results show neutrality in this regard,
Officials 1 as in twelve instances police took a legal
Negligence action against the offenders, whilst in
thirteen instances there was no legal
Table I action by the police. Although crime
RQ 2: What is the intensity of reporting is meant to trigger counter
crimes covered by FIR? actions on part of the authorities,
FIR largely covered high intensity crimes, unfortunately in this case the statistics
followed by moderate intensity crimes speak otherwise.
and with no instance of low intensity Police Action Frequency
crimes. This shows consistency in the Yes 12
content analysis as majority of the crimes No 13
covered by FIR were murder incidents,
Table V
and such incidents are considered as high
intensity crimes. RQ 4(b): Is the legal action taken by the
Court for the crimes covered by FIR?
Crime Intensity Frequency The result shows that in most of the
High 20 instances, that is eighteen, there was no
Moderate 5 legal action by the court against the
Low 0 offenders, with only seven instances of
Table II actual legal action by the court. The
statistic is a big question mark on the
RQ 3(a): What is the region of crimes judicial system of Pakistan.
being covered by FIR in terms of urban
or rural area? Court Action Frequency
Most of the crimes covered by FIR were Yes 7
from urban region, with only three No 18
instances of rural region. This shows that
Table VI
the area of interest of FIR is basically
developed places, such as cities etc. with RQ 5: Is the vocal projection of crimes
less priority to under-developed areas, covered by FIR sensational,
such as villages etc. exaggerated or both?
Region Frequency
RQ 3(b): What is the region of crimes Urban 22
covered by FIR in terms of city or Rural 3
locality?
Table III
Page 410
Majority of the crimes covered by FIR Crime Type Frequency

were projected vocally in a Fraud 7
sensationalized manner, with three Corruption 7
instances of both sensationalized and Environmental 6
exaggerated projection. This can be Crime
considered as a thriving crime shows Illegal Business 6
culture in Pakistan, to sensationalize in Economic Crime 4
order to gain viewership Bribery 4
Prostitution 3
Media Vocal Frequency
Kidnapping 2
Projection
Blackmailing 2
Sensational 22
Cybercrime 2
Exaggerated 0
Violence 2
Both 3
Health Crime 1
Table VII Child Abuse 1
RQ 6: Is the visual projection of crimes Money Laundering 1
covered FIR dramatic, violent or both? Girls Selling 1
In terms of visual projection, FIR largely Child Selling 1
resorted to dramatic projection, with Human Trafficking 1
only one instance of violent projection Rape 1
and one instance of both, dramatic and Officials Negligence 1
violent projection. The mixture of Table IX
sensationalized vocal projection and
dramatic visual projection creates a RQ 2: What is the intensity of crimes
unique blend which is meant to attract as covered by Saray-Aam?
much audience as possible; a common Saray-Aam largely covered high intensity
strategy of Pakistan’s crime shows. crimes, followed by moderate intensity
crimes and with only one instance of low
Media Visual Frequency intensity crime. This exhibits Saray-Aam’s
Projection priority to cover primarily the high
Dramatic 23 intensity crimes, much like FIR.
Violent 1
Both 1 Crime Intensity Frequency
High 21
Table VIII Moderate 3
4.2 Content Analysis of Program and Low 1
Sample B Table X
25 Episodes of Saray-Aam ranging from
July 2014 to May 2015 RQ 3(a): What is the region of crimes
covered by Saray-Aam in terms of urban
RQ 1: What are the types of crimes or rural area?
covered by Saray-Aam? Similar to FIR, most of the crimes
The results show that the top two crimes covered by Saray-Aam were from urban
covered by Saray-Aam are fraud and areas, with only two instances of rural
corruption, followed by environmental areas. This point towards a leading trend
crime and illegal business. Unlike FIR, in Pakistan’s crime shows that they focus
which covered murder incidents the more on urban areas in terms of
most, there is not a single murder coverage, as compared to rural areas.
incident covered by Saray-Aam. Overall,
the show covered different types of Region Frequency
crimes. Urban 23
Rural 2
Table XI
Page 411
RQ 3(b): What is the region of crimes All of the crimes covered by Saray-Aam
covered by Saray-Aam in terms of city were vocally projected in a
or locality? sensationalized manner, with no instance
Most of the crimes covered by Saray-Aam of exaggerated or, sensational and
were from Karachi, but unlike FIR, the exaggerated vocal projection. This point
coverage of Saray-Aam is more evenly towards a rising trend of sensationalized
spread throughout the country, with culture in crime shows of Pakistan.
cities of Punjab also a focus of the show.
Media Vocal Frequency
City/Area Frequency Projection
Karachi 10 Sensational 25
Lahore 6 Exaggerated 0
Faisalabad 2 Both 0
Other 2
Table XV
Islamabad 1
Rahim Yar Khan 1 RQ 6: Is the visual projection of crimes
Jhang 1 covered Saray-Aam dramatic, violent or
Mangla 1 both?
Hyderabad 1 In terms of visual projection, Saray-Aam
much like FIR, largely projected crimes
Table XII visually in a dramatic manner, with one
RQ 4(a): Is the legal action taken by the instance of violent projection, and five
Police for the crimes covered by Saray- instances of both dramatic and violent
Aam? projection. As mentioned earlier, both of
Unlike FIR, in majority of the instances the crimes shows are heavily influenced
police took legal action against the by developing culture of sensationalized
offenders, with seven instances of no and dramatic crime reporting to gain as
legal action. This might indicate towards much viewership as possible, the
better reporting and follow-up on part of statistics corroborate this assertion.
Saray-Aam’s team.
Media Visual Frequency
Projection
Police Action Frequency
Dramatic 19
Yes 18
Violent 1
No 7
Both 5
Table XIII
Table XVI
RQ 4(b): Is the legal action taken by the
Court for the crimes covered by Saray- RQ 7: Based on the answers of the
Aam? questions above, what would be the
The result in this case is peculiar. In spite perceived impact on mass audience of
of increased police response, the legal such coverage?
action by court can be observed in only Both of the crime shows in terms of their
one instance, with twenty four instances coverage, be it vocally or visually,
of no legal action by court against the consistently and for most part resorted to
offenders. sensationalized and dramatic coverage.
Such sort of reporting is against the
Court Action Frequency ethics of journalism and has proved to be
Yes 1 detrimental for audiences, at least
No 24 psychologically. Moreover, weightage is
given to more developed and urbanized
Table XIV areas in coverage of crimes, though
RQ 5: Is the vocal projection of crimes considerable population of Pakistan lives
covered by Saray-Aam sensational, in rural areas, this apparent bias can also
exaggerated or both? affect the audience negatively. In
Page 412
connection to this, Karachi was the most [4] Wittebols, J. (2004) The Soap Opera Paradigm:
hit city in terms of coverage by both Television Programming and Corporate Priorities.
Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield.
crime shows, especially by FIR, which [5] Wykes, M. and B. Gunter (2005) The Media and
further strengthens the bias element in Body Image: If Looks Could Kill. London: SAGE
the reporting of both crime shows. The Publications.
northern region of the country is not [6] Mawby, R. (2004) ‘Completing the Half-formed
Picture? Media Images of Policing’, in P. Mason
given that much importance in terms of (ed.) Criminal Visions: Media Representations of
coverage compared to the southern Crime and Justice, pp. 214 – 37. Cullompton:
region. The legal action by the police and Willan.
the court has also been highlighted, and [7] Jewkes, Y. (2004) Media and Crime. London:
the results in this regard are unfortunate SAGE Publications.
[8] Rafter, N. (2006) Shots in the Mirror: Crime
as legal response is not appropriate for Films and Society, 2nd edn. New York: Oxford
the great part. Lastly, both of the crime University Press.
shows gave priority to high intensity [9] Cavender, G. (2004) ‘Media and Crime Policy: A
crimes, compared to moderate and low Reconsideration of David Garland’s The Culture of
Control’, Punishment & Society 6(3): 335 – 48.
intensity crimes, repeated and consistent [10] Rapping, E. (2003) Law and Justice As Seen on
exposure of the audience to high TV. New York: New York University Press.
intensity crimes can lead to the [11] Rapping, E. (2003) Law and Justice As Seen on
formulation of wrong opinions and TV. New York: New York University Press.
perceptions on part of the audience [12] Cavender, G. (2004) ‘Media and Crime Policy:
A Reconsideration of David Garland’s The Culture
pertinent to the society they live in, of Control’, Punishment & Society 6(3): 335 – 48.
coupled with psychological [13] Rafter, N. (2006) Shots in the Mirror: Crime
complications. Films and Society, 2nd edn. New York: Oxford
University Press.
4.3 Conclusion [12] Roberts, L. and D. Inderman (2005) ‘Social
Issues as Media Constructions: The Case of Road
This study has comprehensively covered
Rage’, Crime Media Culture 1(3): 301 – 21.
the proposed objectives and aptly [13] Rafter, N. (2006) Shots in the Mirror: Crime
answered the formulated RQ’s. It is first Films and Society, 2nd edn. New York: Oxford
of its kind and can prove to be an University Press.
indispensible resource of authentic data [14] Roberts, L. and D. Inderman (2005) ‘Social
for media personnel, academicians, Rage’, Crime Media Culture 1(3): 301 – 21.
researchers and law enforcement [15] Rafter, N. (2006) Shots in the Mirror: Crime
personnel. The underlined aim was to Films and Society, 2nd edn. New York: Oxford
study the developing genre of TV industry University Press.
[16] Messerschmidt, J. (1993) Masculinities and
of Pakistan, i.e. Crime shows. The results
Crime: Critique and Reconceptualization of
have been fascinating for a great part, as Theory. Lanham: Rowan & Littlefi eld.
opposed to a general viewpoint about [17] Messerschmidt, J. (1993) Masculinities and
crime shows of Pakistan. This study has Crime: Critique and Reconceptualization of
paved a new way for researchers of this Theory. Lanham: Rowan & Littlefi eld.
[18] Cavender, G., L. Bond-Maupin and N. Jurik
field. The current study will definitely be (1999) ‘The Construction of Gender in Reality
a stepping-stone for future researches in Crime TV’, Gender & Society 13(5): 644 – 63.
this domain. [19] Martin, S. and N. Jurik (2006) Doing Justice,
Doing Gender: Women in Legal and Criminal
Justice Occupations, 2nd edn. Thousand Oaks, CA:
SAGE Publications.
5.1 References [20] Wittebols, J. (2004) The Soap Opera
Paradigm: Television Programming and Corporate
[1] Geertz, C. (1973) The Interpretation of Priorities. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield.
Culture. New York: Basic Books. [21] McCullagh, C. (2002) Media Power: A
[2] McCullagh, C. (2002) Media Power: A Sociological Introduction. Basingstoke: Palgrave.
Sociological Introduction. Basingstoke: Palgrave. [22] Joyrich, L. (1996) Re-viewing Reception:
[3] Wykes, M. and B. Gunter (2005) The Media and Television, Gender, and Postmodern Culture.
Body Image: If Looks Could Kill. London: SAGE Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.
Publications. [23] Mittell, J. (2004) Genre and Television: From
[3] Wilson, C. (2000) Cop Knowledge: Police Power Cop Shows to Cartoons in American Culture.
and Cultural Narrative in Twentieth Century London: Routledge.
America. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Page 413
[24] Altheide, D. (2002) Creating Fear: News and

the Construction of Crisis. New York: Aldine de
Gruyter.
[25] Jewkes, Y. (2004) Media and Crime. London:
SAGE Publications.
[26] Cavender, G. (1999) ‘Detecting Masculinity’,
in J. Ferrell and Neil Websdale (eds) Making
Trouble:Cultural Constructions of Crime, Deviance,
and Control, pp. 157 – 75. New York: Aldine
DeGruyter.
[27] Chadee, D. and J. Ditton (2005) ‘Fear of
Crime and the Media: Assessing the Lack of
Relationship’, Crime Media Culture 1(3): 322 – 32.
[28] Roberts, L. and D. Inderman (2005) ‘Social
Rage’, Crime Media Culture 1(3): 301 – 21.
Proceeding of the CIRP 8th P P
International Seminar on Life Cycle

Engineering, Varna, Bulgaria, June
18-20, pp 171-179.
Page 414
IS LAFFER CURVE ALIVE IN PAKISTAN?
Irfan Khan1, Abdul Mansoor2

1
Department of Economics
Preston University Islamabad,
ik78849@gmail.com
2
Department of Economics,
University of Wah, Wah Cantt
mansoor.inu@outlook.com
ABSTRACT
Laffer curve is a tradeoff between tax cuts and tax revenues. The sketch of Laffer curve was
drawn by Arthur Laffer at a dinner with his friends on his napkin that reduction in taxes will
increase tax revenues. Laffer curve explained that lower tax rate could encourage an additional
output and it would increase income, which builds bigger tax base in an economy. In this
research we have estimated the Laffer curve on the basis of Taxes on goods and services for
Pakistan economy for the period of 1990 to 2015. Time series data have been collected from the
world economic data base. Results explained that all the variables are significant and signs of
coefficients are in accordance with the theory. Results confirm that Laffer curve is alive in
Pakistan economy but its existence is in the prohibited area of Laffer curve. It is suggested that
plans of taxation should be modified in such a way that maximum number of people could bring
under the tax brackets. The taxation structure of the economy should ensure to lower the indirect
taxes, encourage the progressive taxes and elasticity of taxation should be increased. The pattern
of taxation should be encouraged after introducing some sort of incentives such as relief in the
income tax and higher bank deposit rates should be realize.
Keywords: Laffer curve, Taxes on goods and services, Tax revenue, Multiple Regression,
Pakistan
1. INTRODUCTION: This paper investigates was given by Arthur Laffer in a dinner party in
the implication of Laffer curve in Pakistan. Washington Dc in 1974 invited by Don
The Laffer curve basically is an association Rumsfeld and dick Cheney while discussing
between tax cuts and increase in income President Ford’s WIN i.e. whip inflation now
Fullerton (1980). Papp and Takats (2008) also and the increasing taxation strategy. He draws
possess same set of words “tax cuts boost up a sketch of Laffer curve on his napkin that
the tax revenue”. The idea of the Laffer curve reduction in tax will increase income or we
Page 415
can say Laffer curve is a tradeoff between tax (2015). Study like Chakraborty also favors the
cuts and tax revenue Laffer (2012). The idea idea the idea that Laffer curve can be used an
becomes so popular that it recognized against effective tool in the developing economies to
his name as he was a supply side economist get rid of the fiscal deficit. The views of the
Laffer et al. (2012). The idea of Laffer curve Papp and ElődTakáts (2008) as quoted earlier
was firstly introduced with public by were that tax cuts can enhance tax revenue.
wannisiki in a paper in 1978 and he amazed to Here more authentically we can counter their
see the popularity of the curve he wished in words that tax cuts up to a minimum possible
funny mode that if I was not out of mind I level can be good as those who always try to
would introduce it with wannisiki curve. avoid tax can be brought under the tax net.
Laffer curve tells from where the taxation Now if we consider the case of Pakistan
should be started Bunescu and Comaniciu taxation system it is not as effective as
(2013). Furthermore progressive taxation will developed countries. Laffer curve can be used
not increase revenue but Laffer curve will as an effective tool for increase in income.
increase revenue Holter et al. (2014). If for Pakistan economy is facing a high Deficit to
further accuracy we copy the exact words of budget ratio locally and loans from World
Dr. Arthur Laffer to the Kansas House Tax Bank, Asian development bank and IMF on
Committee is “If you look at their high interest rate abroad. This phenomenon
performance over the last decade, those states also distorts the attention of foreign investors
without an income tax compared to the states also. Taking the situation granted Laffer curve
with the highest income tax… the differences can be used as tool to decrease the tax net up
are huge, Those states without income taxes to a desired level and bring the elites and tax
have grown much, much faster” TEF series avoider’s under tax net. It will increase tax
(2012). It is evident from the Bunescu and revenue and the way of deficit financing will
Comaniciu (2013) statement that tax rate also be blocked.
which is at specified level or upper fiscal limit
enhances tax revenues.
Study such as Tatu (2014) recommend that
Laffer curve can be used as to eliminate fiscal
deficit as tools of taxation of Laffer curve
serve as a guide line for the economists. Laffer
curve shows his best fit also in the recession
while when the fiscal tightness has his role Source; Arthur Laffer http://www.heritage.org/
over the economies Isakov and Pekarski
Page 416
Graphical representation of the Laffer curve (2015) also favored the earlier saying. They
for the euro zone by Bunescuand Comaniciu workout data for the period of 1995-2011 for
(2013) showed that tax system take changes the selected 27 European countries and found
by itself over a long period of course. The best that high rate of VAT lied the economy in the
possible point from where taxation should be prohibited zone. The supply side economists
started is to look at a Laffer curve that is what are considered very important in the Laffer
should be maximum possible tax rate for the curve analysis. By reckoning the words of
economy although taxation varies along the Lucas (1990) they considered it a free lunch
member countries. While Holter et al. (2014) and we should have to follow their guideline.
recommend that progressive tax system will But on the other hand study like Trabandt,
create low income because the individual Riksbankand Uhlig (2007) found the 15
households vary along by studying the selected countries of the European Union i.e.
American and European society Laffer curve EU-15 has best fit to Laffer curve than the
of seven percent would be better to enhance United States. Tax incentives results much
the income. The concept of no debt can also more than United States in earlier case and
be overcome with Keiichiro (2014) formulated they considered it there is no free lunch as the
through Laffer curve that debt can be recover notion of free lunch comprises that tax
through a tax culture. The tax revenue can be declined will enhance revenue but even it was
used as a key to expenditures for the public not observed in the Reagon administration
and then tax again by opting an ideal rate of case when tax was down on advice of Laffer.
the tax. In times of depressions Laffer curve For the maximum tax revenue the government
can serve as income generator for the may adopt the Laffer strategy and should
economy study such as Isakovand Pekarski increase tax in labor tax and decrease capital
(2015) favored the idea that although it cannot tax, study such as Nutahara (2013) who
be good for the labors and spending for shows analyzed the implication of Laffer curve to the
positive results for tax and revenue increases. Japanese economy. Japan that has a high debt
In depression the economic activity is down to GDP to ratio and tax is increasing on
and the debt has huge cost of interest rate in regular basis which is quite for the public so
that case Laffer curve tactically can be paves by implying Laffer curve techniques it can
the way for upward movement. yield sound results. The issue of high debt has
Furthermore if the tax rate not necessarily hampered the economic condition of the
down to specified limit then we can be in the countries over years. Pakistan also facing high
prohibited area of the curve as shown in the deficit ratio in budget study like Bachvarova
graph. Study such as Oliveira and Costa (2008) andIsakov and Pekarski (2015) which
Page 417
measures dimension for the Pakistan economy found that in recent times Indian economy is
also same sort of study carried by Bachvarova experiencing debt ratio significantly high
(2008). Data was analyzed for the said because the state is now focusing on giving
purpose on 127 developing and small social security and basic necessity of life to
countries by for 1990-2005It was found that the public. The Laffer curve can be used for
Laffer curve helps in debt overhang situations the proper functioning of the economy.
because most of the countries have not as Pakistan economy receives a high amount of
much resources to invest. Furthermore the foreign aid. Foreign aid has a huge amount of
political and financial condition of the payback interest rate which at times or most of
countries also distorts the way. the times taken out all the output of the
Laffer curve can be used in a economy and run is taken into granted for
multidimensional way as a tradeoff between more aid or loan to fulfill the earlier ones. The
tax cuts and tax revenues Laffer (2012) idea of aid Laffer curve can be used as a tool
between wealth and retirement behavior to the aid level that is aid Laffer curve.
Hainault, Langat and Sopraseuth (2005) 2. Research Methodology and Model
between debt overhang and revenues Isakov Specification
In this research we have estimated the Laffer
and Pekarski (2015) and Bachvarova (2008).
curve on the basis of Taxes on goods and
Furthermore Hairault et al. (2005) analyzed
services for Pakistan economy for the period
data for the French economy and found that
of 1990 to 2015. Time series data have been
government should force the public to delay
collected from the world economic data base.
their retirement by receiving handsome
The initial model which we have used in this
amount of allowances from the government or
research is mentioned as below:
to locate minimum amount of pensions after
retirement. This can be inculcated as Laffer
…… (1)
curve for the minimization deficit which is to
be given them in the form of pensions. Tax
cuts significantly affects the rate of revenue in Where Revs is the tax revenues percent of
United States, Russia, Japan, Europe and in GDP, Gap is the gross domestic product,
many other developing and small economies billions of U.S. dollar, Taxt refers to taxes on
studies like Laffer (2012) and Papp and Takats goods and services, percent of total revenue,
(2008) and Nutahara (2013) and Bachvarova Tax2 is the square of taxes on goods and
(2008) also suggested same idea. Furthermore services, percent of total revenue at year t
Chakraborty (2015) analyzed the Indian while et is the error term of the model.
economy through seigniorage Laffer curve and
Page 418
Further 1st lag of the dependent variable has other influences, the Laffer effect is present in
also included in the model in order to capture Pakistan in the case of goods and services and
the autocorrelation problem and trend variable tax revenue from the year 1999 to 2015 but in
has also been introduced in order to de-trend the opposite direction. Opposite direction
the present time series. The adjusted model means prohibited area of Laffer curve can be
may be written as: seen here in this diagram where tax revenues
are decreasing as the taxes on goods and
services increasing.
Diagram 3.1: Taxes on Goods and Services
and Tax Revenue in Pakistan
Here all the other variables are the same,

explained in basic model in addition trend
variable and lag one of dependent variables
has been included.
Taxes on goods and services in Pakistan Source: Author’s own calculations using
Envies
include general sales and turnover or value
added taxes, selective excises on goods, Further in accordance to the theory of Laffer
selective taxes on services, taxes on the use of curve, existence of Laffer curve could be
goods or property, taxes on extraction and confirmed in an economy if both the
production of minerals and profits of fiscal parameters (α and β) of taxes are significant
monopolies. Tax revenue refers to compulsory and both the parameters must have appropriate
transfers to the central government for public signs. Accordance to the theory of Laffer
purposes. Certain compulsory transfers such curve, In order to obtain the bell shape of the
as fines, penalties, and most social security Laffer curve the parameter α should be
contributions are excluded. Refunds and positive sign and parameter β should have the
corrections of erroneously collected tax negative sign and both the parameters might
revenue are treated as negative revenue be significant.
(World Bank).
3. Result and Discussions
In diagram 3.1 taxes on goods and services
and tax revenues has been presented for the
Pakistan economy. The rough sketch of this
diagram could suggest that apart from the
Page 419
Table 3.1: OLS Estimation of Initial Model

Variable Coefficient Std. Error t-Statistic Prob.
TAX 0.027550 0.003239 8.505801 0.0000
TAX2 -0.000730 0.000101 -7.247599 0.0000
R-squared 0.582707 Mean dependent variable 0.141611
Adjusted R-squared 0.565319 S.D. dependent variable 0.089511
S.E. of regression 0.059015 Akanke info criterion -2.748253
Sum squared residuals 0.083586 Schwarz criterion -2.651476
Log likelihood 37.72728 Hanna-Quinn criteria. -2.720384
Durbin-Watson stat 0.698985
Source: Author’s own calculations using E.views
The results from the initial equation presented

above have been presented in the above table
no. 3.1. Although both the variables are
significant and their signs are in accordance
with the Laffer theory but the 1st order serial
correlation has been indicated by the Durbin-
Watson stat. That is the reason the value of R-
square is relatively low. In order to capture the
correlation problem, this research presented
another adjusted model in which lag
dependent variable has been introduced as an
independent variable, result of which has been
presented in table 3.2. Here all the variables
are significant as both the probability values of
Tax and Tax2 are less than 5 percent level of
significant and the signs of coefficients are in
accordance with the theory of Laffer curve.
The R2 value is 0.910, which is quite high,
shows that almost 91 percent fluctuations of
dependent variable has been explained by the
independent variables incorporated in the
research. Durbin-Watson stat which is 2.1
shows that residuals of the adjusted model are
not serially auto correlated.
Page 420
Table 3.2: OLS Estimation of Adjusted Model

Variable Coefficient Std. Error t-Statistic Prob.
TAX 0.006534 0.002682 2.436358 0.0234
TAX2 -0.000166 7.51E-05 -2.214194 0.0375
REV(-1)/GDP(-1) 0.067117 0.007811 8.592127 0.0000
R-squared 0.910310 Mean dependent variable 0.133959
Adjusted R-squared 0.902156 S.D. dependent variable 0.082220
S.E. of regression 0.025718 Akaike info criterion -4.371050
Sum squared residuals 0.014552 Schwarz criterion -4.224785
Log likelihood 57.63812 Hanna-Quinn criterion -4.330482
Durbin-Watson stat 2.166277
Table 3.3: Breusch-Godfrey Serial Correlation LM Test

F-Statistics 2.670917 Prob.F-stat (2,20) 0.0937
Obs* R-squared 5.269686 Prob. Chi-Squared(2) 0.0717
Table 3.4: Breusch-Pagan-Godfrey Test of Heteroskedasticity

F-Statistics 0.640548 Prob. F-stat(3,21) 0.5974
Obs* R-squared 2.095883 Prob. Chi-Squared(3) 0.5527
Table 3.5: Residual Normality Test
Table No. 3.3 possesses the important residuals of the model are not autocorrelated.
information regarding serial correlation. In this study corresponding probability of
Literature on the auto correlation or serial observed R-squared value is 0.0937 which is
correlation stated that the corresponding more than five percent and desirable. Hence
probability of observed R-square value may be there is no auto correlation. Similarly table no.
more than five percent to confirm that 3.4 tells about the homoskedasticity or
Page 421
heteroskedasticity in variance of residuals. the progressive taxes and elasticity of taxation

Literature on the OLS stated that should be increased. The pattern of taxation
homoskedastic variation of residuals is should be encouraged after introducing some
desirable. So in this research corresponding sort of incentives such as relief in the income
probability of observed R-squared value is tax and higher bank deposit rates should be
0.5527 which is again more than five percent realize.
and acceptable. Hence variation of residuals in
this study is homoskedastic. Further normality References
of residuals may also be confirmed with the
[1] Bachvarova SE. 2005.The Debt Laffer
table 3.5 of normality test statistic where the Curve: Estimates for 1990-
2005.Honors Thesis submitted in
corresponding probability value of Jarque-
partial fulfillment of the requirements
Bera statistic is 0.612350 which is more than for Graduation with Distinction in
Economics in Trinity College of Duke
five percent shows that residual are normally
University. Duke University Durham,
distributed. North Carolina.
[2] Bunescu L, Comaniciuc C. 2013.

4. Conclusion & Policy Implication: Graphical analysis of Laffer theory for
In this research we have estimated the Laffer European member states. Annals of the
Constantin Brâncuşi” University of
curve on the basis of Taxes on goods and TârguJiu, Economy Series, 2.
services for Pakistan economy for the period
[3] Chakraborty L. 2015. Fiscal seigniorage
of 1990 to 2015. Time series data have been “Laffer curve effect” on central bank
collected from the world economic data base. autonomy in India. National Institute
of public finance and fiscal policy New
Results explained that all the variables are Delhi. Working paper no. 2015-156.
significant and signs of the coefficients are in http://www.nipfp.org.in.
accordance with the theory. Results confirm [4] Fullerton D. 1980.Can tax revenue goes up
the existence of Laffer curve in Pakistan when tax rate go down? Office of Tax
Analysis. OTA 41. U.S. Treasury
economy but its existence is in the prohibited Department.
area of Laffer curve. Taxes on goods and
[5] Hairault OJ, Langot F, Sopraseuth T. 2005.
services are very high in Pakistan due to this A Quantitative Investigation of the
tax revenues are decreasing. It is suggested Laffer curve on the Continued Work
Tax: The French Case. IZA discussion
that plans of taxation should be modified in papers No 1499.
such a way that maximum number of people
could bring under the tax brackets. The [6] Holter AH, Krueger D, Stepanchuk S.
taxation structure of the economy should 2014. How Does Tax Progressivity and
Household Heterogeneity Affect Laffer
ensure to lower the indirect taxes, encourage
Page 422
Curves? Penn institute for economic 853d-11e4-a702-

research working paper. 14-015. fa31ff4ae98e_story.html.
[7] Isakov SK, Pekarski ES. 2015. Financial [12] Nutahara K. 2013.Laffer Curves in Japan.
repression and Laffer curve. Basic Canon institute for global studies.
research program working papers. 113. Working papers no 13-007.
http://ssrn.com/abstract=2701807. http://www.canon.igs.org.
[8] Laffer BA. 2004. The Laffer curve: Past, [13] Oliveira F G, Costa L. 2015. The VAT
Present, and Future. The heritage Laffer Curve and the Business Cycle in
foundation No 1765. the EU27: An Empirical Approach.
Economic issues. 20(2).
[9] Laffer BA, Mantilla JA, Watkinson WG.
2012. Corporate Income Tax [14] Papp KT, Takáts E. 2008. Tax Rate Cuts
Elasticity: How Republicans Can Have and Tax Compliance-The Laffer curve
Lower Tax Rates and Democrats Can Revisited. IMF working paper 8(7).
Collect More Tax Revenue! Laffer
center. Pacific research institute. [15] Tatu S. 2014. An Application of Debt
Laffer curve: Empirical Evidence for
[10] Lucas R E. 1990. “Supply-Side Romania's case. Romanian Journal of
Economics: An Analytical Review.” Fiscal Policy. 5(1): 29-38.
Oxford Economic Papers. New Series.
42: 239–316. [16] Trabandt M , Riksbank S, Uhlig H.2007.
How Far Are We From The Slippery
[11] Moore S. 2014.The Laffer curve turns 40: Slope? The Laffer curve Revisited.
the legacy of a controversial idea. Tilburg University and Deutsche
Washington Bundesbank.
post.https://www.washingtonpost.com/
opinions/the-laffer-curve-at-40-still-
looks good/2014/12/26/4cded164-
Page 423
Impact of Déjà vu in Language Acquisition; a Psycholinguistics

approach
Rabia Mubarak
Saman Ali
Supervisor: Azhar Pervaiz
University of Sargodha
Sargodha.
Abstract:
This paper aims to highlight the impact of Déjà vu on language acquisition. Déjà vu
occurs due to some abnormality in temporal lobe, an area of brain responsible for
language, memory and planning. This research also focuses on memorization of
new words with the help of déjà vu which results ultimately in acquisition of
language. Further, thus research aims to give a new to the field of
Psycholinguistics. Before this research work no considerable research in this field
of building a relationship between déjà vu and language acquisition. A hypothesis
is proposed in this research that the words ‘already heard’ are familiar so they are
easy to memorize and eventually helpful in language acquisition. For the sake of
this research a sample of 50 random students of University of Sargodha
substantiate to prove the hypothesis correct (that déjà vu helps in language
acquisition). This research is qualitative work based on interviews and
questionnaire. Moreover, this research tends to prove that déjà vu happens due to
fatigue, depression and repression. The positive response of students proved to be
helpful for researchers to draw a new hypothesis regarding language acquisition.
Keywords: Déjà vu, language acquisition, temporal lobe
Page 424
1. Literature Review literature is related to the exploration

of déjà vu in the field of psychology
‘Déjà vu is a common intuitive
and literature. There are different
experience that has happened
theories present regarding language
with many of us. The expression is
acquisition. The most prominent ones
derived from the French, meaning
are Behaviorist, Mentalist UG
‘already seen’. When it occurs, it
Paradigm etc. Language acquisition is
seems to spark our memory of a
concerned with brain. It is
place we have already been, a
scientifically proven that left part of
person we have already seen, or
brain is responsible for language. It is
an act we have already done’.
not a new thing to bridge two distinct
Déjà vu is not a new term. A lot of psychological phenomena. For
work is done on it. It is not only a instance, in this research work a
psychological phenomenon but this questionnaire was utilized as a tool to
term is highly used in literature too. measure the application of déjà vu in
The linguist Ruth Wodak (year) in her language acquisition. And question# 9
work ‘Understanding and explaining (see analysis) proved that there is a
social change: déjà vu experiences’ link between language acquisition and
explain the phenomenon of linguistic déjà vu. It means that all
déjà vu. According to her she was psychological phenomena are not
born to do work in field of linguistics. poles apart. These are linked with
It was already known to her. each other in the form of a network.
Similarly, an article was published on Déjà vu plays a role in memorization
Jan 19, 2013 named: ‘New speak, and with the help of memorizing
Déjà vu and Feminine bridges: The something language acquisition
Sapir Whorf Hypothesis’. In this becomes tranquil.
article the usage of more than one
Introduction:
word for referring a single thing was
analyzed by using Sapir Whorf Déjà vu,a French word meaning
hypothesis. In this article the lexical ‘already seen’. ‘Any subjectively
choices for a single thing was seen inappropriate impression of
through the lens of déjà vu. It was familiarity of a present experience
also discussed that either females are with an undefined past experience is
more prone towards to be the victim known as Déjà vu’ (Neppe, 1983).
of déjà vu or not. Other literature Deja vu experiences have been
present on this phenomenon includes, described in many works of fiction
Neppe V (1983), Gleason (2010), including those by Dickens, Tolstoy,
Jones M and Flaxman L (2010), Proust and Hardy (Sno, Linszen, & de
Hocking I (2011), James M (2012), Jonghe, 1992).
Starling D (2013), Brown A (2014),
Reed S (2014), Renato J (2014), Salter Déjà vu is concerned with dis-
K (2015) Broder D (2015), Hartsien M functioning of temporal lobe of brain.
(2016) and Roper B (2016). All this Temporal lobes present in brain are
Page 425
responsible for memory, language and Researchers are concerned with Déjà
some other things. Déjà vu is not a su (already heard) and Déjà lu
much worked on phenomenon. It (already read). It is because language
came into focus since 1980’s. It is is heard and read. Most of the times
suggested that people experience one does not see words, that’s why
Déjà vu mostly when they are main focus of this research is on deja
fatigued. Even though it is purely a lu and dejasu.
psychological phenomenon but some
linguists like Roth Wodak worked on Methodology
this phenomenon. This paper using The purpose of this paper is to
qualitative research methodology explore the impact of Déjà vu in
aims to create a bridge between Déjà language acquisition.
vu and language acquisition in the
perspective of Psycholinguistics. i. Research Questions
• Whether or not there is an
Déjà vu is of two types: Associative impact of Déjà vu in language
and Biological. Associative one occurs acquisition?
to normal and healthy persons while • Does this phenomenon of Déjà
biological ones tend to happen among vu help in memorization of new
those who suffer from some mental words?
disorder.
• Does Déjà vu happen due to
Second-language acqusition, second some depression or fatigue?
language learning or L2 acquisition is ii. Sampling
a process through which people learn The participants for this study
a second language. Second-language have been chosen randomly. That is
acquisition is a proper scientific without any discrimination, the
discipline dedicated to study that students of different departments of
process. It is a sub-discipline of University of Sargodha were given the
applied linguistics, but it also receives questionnaires to fill. To make the
research attentio n from other research more reliable and authentic,
disciplines like psychology and the subjects were chosen irrespective
education. There are different of age, race, religion and gender. A
theories regarding language sample of 50 students is used in this
acquisition but still a lot more work is paper for the research.
needed to be carried out. This
research would be proved fruitful in iii. Instrument
this regard.
For this quantitative research, the
). Déjà vu is totally a psychological researchers have designed a
phenomenon while language questionnaire highlighting the data
acquisition too. Now a common point obtained from two questionnaire
is tried to find about between these surveys (Kusumi, 1994, 1996) and
two different phenomena. from an experiment (Matsuda
&Kusumi, 2002). The questionnaire is
Page 426
comprised of nine questions. Covering Sr. Question Yes. No.in%

some general questions about Déjà In %
No.
vu, Apart from the questionnaire, 34
students have also been interviewed 1 Have you ever 82% 22%
by the researchers in order to further been at a new
place and felt as
explore their experience about Déjà if you had been
vu. there before?
Data Analysis 2 Have you ever 74% 26%

There are basically two types of Déjà gone somewhere
vu in common. and felt as it
was familiar to
1. Associative Déjà vu you?
2. Biological Déjà vu 3 Have you ever 70% 30%
met someone for
Associative déjà vu:The most
the first time
common type of déjà vu experienced and you feel as
by normal, healthy people is you have met
associative Déjà vu. You experience them before?
(see, hear etc.) something that gives
4 Have you ever 74% 26%
a feeling that you associate with heard voices
something you've experienced (seen, that you have
heard, visited etc.) before. Many heard before?
researchers think that this type of
5 Have you ever 62% 38%
déjà vu is a memory-based experienced
experience. that someone is
calling your
Biological Déjà vu: This type of déjà name when no
vu occurs among people with one familiar was
temporal lobe epilepsy. Just before there?
having a seizure they often 6 Did it happen to 62% 38%
experience déjà vu. Some researchers you when you
say that this type of déjà vu is were a victim of
distinctly different from typical depression?
(Associative) déjà vu. The person 7 Do you 52% 48%

experiencing Biological Déjà vu may experience such
truly believe they've been through the thing when you
exact situation before. The feel loss (of
someone or
researchers in this research are
something)?
dealing with Déjà vu on whole,
without prioritizing any of the type of 8 What do you 64% 36%
Déjà vu. The first question asked by think it happens (real) (imaginar
in real? Or it is y)
researchers is very general about
imaginary?
visiting Déjà vu.
Page 427
9 Have you ever 68% 32% that voice before. 74% of students
experienced told that they have felt Déjà intendu
while reading or
many times in their life.
listening to a
new word that
Some researchers have also
you are already
familiar with it? involved the phenomena like;
dreaming, hallucinations, paranormal
activities etc. with the researches
about Déjà vu. Dreams according to
Freud S. are a result of some
50 students were asked this suppression of emotions. According to
question among them 41 answered him (ibid) this suppression, depression
yes i.e. 82% of the total population. and mental fatigues etc. also play
The result from Table 1 shows that their part in Déjà vu.
visiting Déjà vu occurs on high
proportion among the university This question (5) seems
students. sometimes paranormal to some
people but it’s actually hallucination
Second question deals with Déjà that occurs due to some psychological
visite, already visited. Question was disorder or fatigue in the mind of
asked about any familiar experience psychic patient. 68% of total
like Déjà visite that students have population resulted that they
ever encountered with. Among total experience such hallucinations in
population 74% answered ‘yes’ (see some fatigue or suppression.
Table 2). It means that this
experience of Déjà visite is also very This paper also lime lights the
common. Déjà rencountre is a cause of Déjà vu which according to
phenomenon in which someone on Freud S. is mental suppression and
meeting a person for the first time fatigue. Many researchers agree with
feels that he has met that person him too.
before. This is also a category of Déjà The results of Table 6 also seem to
vu. Students were asked a question agree with the theory of Freud S. that
whether experienced this these Déjà vu experiences are result
phenomenon of Déjà rencountre. And of some mental disorders. Because
70% of the total population responded 62% of total population responded
positively. that phenomenon of Déjà vu occurs to
Table 3 shows the results regarding them due to depression. Or it is on
the question of Déjà rencountre. high proportion in days of fatigue or
depression.
Table 4 tells the statistics about
question 4 of questionnaire that deals Seventh question of questionnaire
with Déja intendu which tells that elaborates the previous concept that
someone on hearing a voice of some is cause of Déjà vu. Students were
person feels like he has already heard asked question that does Déjà vu
Page 428
happen when you are in disparity or in response of question no. 9 were

emotional breakdown due to loss of then visited by the researchers for
something or someone? And almost sake of an interview. In interview
more than half i.e. 52% said that yes students were asked 4 simple
it happens because of it too. questions about language. The
analysis is given below.
Question 8 deals with the type of
Déjà vu, Associative Déjà vu or 1. Does this re-occurrence of
Biological Déjà vu. Students were the word help in memorization
question for them was this feeling of of that word?
Déjà vu real (i.e. Biological Déjà vu) Yes No
or was it just a feeling of association 23 11
imaginary? (i.e. Associative Déjà vu).
The results drawn from Table 8 assert 2. When you hear or read that
that 64% of the students suffer from word which you have
Biological Déjà vu and 36% of them already heard or read, does
suffer from Associative Déjà vu. It it remain in your mind for
shows that the percentage of longer time?
Biological Déjà vu persons is more Yes No
than that of Associative Déjà vu 22 12
(normal Déjà vu).
Last but not the least; it deals

3. Do you think it improves
with Déjà su (already heard) and Déjà
your capacity of learning
lu (already read). This question deals
new vocabulary items?
directly with the language problem.
Students were asked, whether it Yes NO
happened to them ever that while 20 14
reading or listening to a new word
they feel like they have already heard
or already read it before from some 4. Do you think it really
book, magazine, newspaper or movie improves your vocabulary?
etc. And 68% of them responded Yes No
positively (see Table 9). This helped 19 16
the researcher in formulation of their
result because this process of Déjà su
and lu help in memorization of new 5. The analysis of the data
words. Many of the students told the reveals that Déjà vu helps
researchers that it helps to memorize to improve the learning
the vocabulary items which results capacity of people.
ultimately in language acquisition. Especially the learning of
new words, lexical item or
The 34 students out of total any structure. It Results
population of 50, who answered ‘yes’ and Discussions
Page 429
As Freud S. asserts that Then they were also asked

phenomenon of Déjà vu occurs due to about their Déjà vu experiences
some suppression of emotions, whether it help them in vocabulary
dreams, desires. It also occurs due to building or memorization? This part is
fatigue, depression etc. Depression, about language. It includes 4
repression or fatigue causes a direct questions of interview and the last
impact on temporal lobe of the brain. question of questionnaire as well. The
As a result of some disturbance in this analyzed data shows that more than
part of brain people experience the 50% of total population experienced
mental phenomena like Déjà vu, the phenomena of Déjà vu (Deja su
hallucination etc. Keeping in view this and Deja lu). The students who
theory of Freud S. this paper also answered ‘yes’ (see Table 9) were
reveals that the experiences of Déjà visited for interview. The results of
vu occur due to some depression or interview show that there is great
loss etc. (see Table 6 and 7 for more impact of Déjà vu in learning new
details). words, vocabulary of a language and
eventually the language itself.
This paper aims to bring
forward the impact of Déjà vu in 6. Conclusion
language acquisition. There were
Déjà vu is a phenomenon in
three probabilities at first in the
which a person experiences (sees,
minds of researchers. Whether Déjà
hears or reads) what has been
vu positively affect language
experienced (seen, heard or read)
acquisition? Or it causes some
before. In past, all of these
negative impact on acquisition of
experiences were named as Déjà vu
language? Or has it no effect on
now they are named differently
language acquisition at all? In order to
according to the experience e.g. Déjà
know the answers of these questions,
su, Déjà lu, Déjà intendu, Déjà
the researchers took help of a
recountre etc. These terms have been
questionnaire and a very short sort of
defined by different researchers in
interview. The analyzed data above
the field of Déjà vu. According to
shows that Déjà vu really helps in
some of the researchers this
learning new words which
phenomena occur due to some
automatically reveals that it helps in
abnormality in the temporal lobe of
acquisition of language. First of all
brain. There are different theories
the students of University of Sargodha
about the causes of Déjà vu proposed
were asked generally about their
by different researchers. For
experiences of Déjà vu (), Déjà su (),
example, Hologram theory, Memories
Déjà lu (), Déjà intendu () etc. Most
and Dual processing etc. This paper
of the students replied in ‘yes’, they
explores that the cause of Déjà vu is
have experienced these phenomena
some depression or feeling of loss of
many times in their life.
something or someone in mind of the
Page 430
person which ultimately results in the J.G Renato (2014). The Déjà vu
form of Déjà vu. Experiment: A journey to the outer
limits of the mind. Veritas Shield.
The paper also reveals the fact
that the phenomenon of Déjà vu helps Jessica Gleason (2010). Déjà vu
in memorization of new vocabulary Review Pharmacology. ( 2nd edition)
P P
items. Since the word appears to Mc-Graw-Hill Education/Medical

them as already read or heard so it
K.A Salter (2015). Déjà vu.
lasts longer in the mind of that person
Createspace Independent publishing
and helps to memorize it more easily.
Platform.
So it can be encapsulated from all
discussion that Déjà vu directly or Marie D. Jones and Larry Flaxman
indirectly makes the process of (2010). The Déjà vu Enigma: A
language acquisition easier for the journey through the anamolies of
persons who experience Déjà vu in Mind, Memory and Time. New Pages
their life. Books (1st edition).
P P
References Michal Hartsien (2016). Déjà

Alans Brown (2014). The déjà vu vu.Createspace Independent
experience. Psychology Press (Reprint publishing Platform.
edition). Monique O’Connor James (2012). Déjà
Billy Poper (2016). Déjà vu. vu. Createspace Independent
Createspace Independent publishing publishing Platform.
Platform. New speak, Déjà vu and Feminine
bridges: The Sapir Whorf Hypothesis.
D.J Starling (2015). Déjà vu.
Posted by BrightBlueSaturday In the
iUniverse.
Words in the Mind (Sat 19, Jan, 2103)
David Broder (2015) Déjà vu and the
Ruth Wodak (2005). Understanding
end of the history. Verso.
and explaining the social change:
Dr. VeronNeppe (1983). The “déjà vu” experiences.
psychology of Déjà vu. Witwaterstand
University Press, Johannesburg, South
Africa.
Dr. VeronNeppe (2006). Déjà vu:

Revisited. Witwaterstand University
Press, Johannesburg, South Africa.
Ian Hocking (2011). Déjà vu: A

technical thriller. Createspace
Independent publishing Platform.
Page 431
DECISION MAKING PRACTICES BY HEADS OF SECONDARY

SCHOOLS OF PUNJAB
,
P P Hina Zamir1, Dr.Alia Jawad 2, Dr. Sadaf Zamir Ahmed
P P P P
3
P
1
P M.S Scholar Department of Education, Foundation University, Rawalpindi
P
zeehina1@gmail.com
3TU U3T
2
P Lecturer, Fatima Jinnah Women University
P
Aliajawad09@gmail.com
3TU U3T
3
P Assistant Professor Department of Education, University of Wah
P
dr.sadaf.zamir@uow.edu.pk
3TU U3T
Heads have to manage resources of schools for students and to impart

knowledge to the students. The main responsibility of head is to manage the
resources of the school for providing conducive, teaching learning environment for
the progress of the school. The objectives of the study were (i) to find out current
decision making practices in Secondary schools. (ii) to investigate current decision
making practices in Secondary schools. (iii) To give suggestions for policy formation
regarding decision making practices in secondary schools in Pakistan. This study
will be of great significance for the heads of schools as this study may provide
strategies to them in the completion of their assigned responsibilities regarding
decision making. This study will find out current practices of decision making in
schools. Decision making is required in allactivities so as to fulfill the
requirements of curriculum within the academic year. The population of the study
consisted of heads of secondary schools of Paksitan. Convenient sampling
technique was used for selection of sample .Survey method was used.Data was
collected through questionnaire .data was analyzed using SPSS. The study
concluded at decision-making practice in secondary schools were found
unsatisfactory due to centralization of powers and exploitation of rules and
regulations. Decisions are not made on the basis of specific technique because of
political interference of ruling party.
KEYWORDS: Decision making , Heads, Secondary schools
transform their skills for over all

INTRODUCTION personality development. Therefore
management is prime responsibility of
Head teachers of high schools have heads of schools by taking decision while
to manage the administrative and academic performing managerial tasks. According to
matters of the schools in order to bring Shami and Waqar (2007,p. 24) “
change the behavior of the students and management is a process which deals with
Page 432
the academic matters such as development spent on teachers, instructional aides,

and delivery of curriculum, monitoring specialists, or clerical support. Once
classroom activities, appraising teachers, determinations are made regarding staffing
providing adequate feedback to teachers needs, schools are actively engaged in the
and creating conducive teaching, learning selection of new school personnel.
environment to improve the quality of
education in schools”. In the third decision area, decisions
regarding the curriculum and instructional
strategies are determined at the school
1.1 Scope of level within a framework of district or
Decision–Making state goals, while attending to the school's
unique mission and needs. School-level
There are three areas of decision-making personnel draw on their professional
process in a school based on: budget, expertise and localized knowledge in
employees, and curriculum. School making decisions that affect the school's
finances, under goes school-based educational program and instructional
decision-making models, schools receive system. School personnel monitor the
budget or some portion of the district effectiveness of their programs and their
budget from which they may make students' academic performance. Decisions
decisions regarding employees, equipment, pertaining to budgeting, staffing, and the
materials, supplies, and professional instructional program are often restricted
development. Although budget authority and controlled, however, by district
implies a new level of autonomy, because policies regarding matters such as class
personnel expenditures account for size, tenure, hiring, firing, assignment,
approximately 85 percent of the district curriculum initiatives, textbooks, and
budget and other fixed costs cover an assessment procedures.
additional 5 to 10 percent, few
discretionary dollars actually remain for 2.1
school-level allocation. Therefore, staffing
expenditures and decisions regarding 3.1
staffing structures and assignments are key
4.1 Decision-Making
to schools making decisions that might
substantively affect the school's operation Structures
and effectiveness.
To operationalize school-based decision-
In terms of personnel decisions, schools making, structures at the school level need
are afforded flexibility and the power to to be implemented to facilitate the
determine how best to staff their schools. involvement of key stakeholders in the
Personnel decisions typically fall in two decision-making process. Schools
areas: determining staffing needs based on embracing shared decision-making
the school's mission and educational plan typically develop councils consisting of
and selecting people to fill the positions. representative stakeholders in the school,
Schools are afforded the latitude to decide such as teachers, parents, support
whether their personnel funds are best personnel, and administrators. The school's
Page 433
governance structure is supported by satisfaction, and organizational change. In

guidelines that specify representation, addition, studies have found that
terms of membership, council size, participation enhances communication
meeting format, and delineated lines of among teachers and administrators,
authority. Frequently, site councils further contributes to the quality of teachers' work
disperse involvement through the use of lives, and assists in professionalizing
subcommittees. Subcommittees allow teaching and democratizing schools. Other
greater numbers of teachers to participate research on school-based decision-making
in the formal decision-making process and has generally been descriptive, and yet a
reduce the overall burden of extended substantive body of research has not yet
involvement of others. explored causative relationships between
school empowerment and school
In addition to decision-making governance improvement or student achievement.
councils, schools that embrace shared Nonetheless, the combined effects related
decisionmaking understand that reaching to participative structures that are
collective agreement and consensus democratic and collaborative and focus
around difficult decisions require extended mainly on issues of curriculum and
discussions, off-site meetings, and instruction are likely to bring about change
collective planning. Thus, schools that at the classroom level.
engage in shared decision-making at an
authentic level set aside time for teachers
to meet and places for them to congregate Roles and functions of school Heads in
and talk. In addition, school schedules are school management?
often redesigned to facilitate teacher
interaction by structuring common Policy-Making
planning periods. • School vision school and educational
goals and to enhance the effectiveness of
5.1 learning with the goal of the development
strategy
6.1 Effectiveness of School-
Based Decision-Making • Policies and priorities for development
projects attract
Although school-based decision-making is
• Manage school resources
often the centerpiece of school reform,
• Mission of the school is carried out
there remains little empirical evidence that
relates it to improved school performance.
Management
Most of the evidence of effectiveness of
decision involvement at the school level
• Personnel Management
focuses on teachers and administrators.
– Staff meeting, encouragement and
Studies exploring organizational variables
removal from office
have generally found positive relationships
– Staff performance management and
between decision involvement and
professional development
organizational outcomes, such as
– Establishing communication channels
organizational commitment, job
and handling complaints
Page 434
which needs to be solved? (b)

• Financial Management Remembering the old axiom:
– Approving school development plan, “Nothing is as useless as the
annual school plan and school budget right answer to the wrong
– Managing government and non- problem. (c) Defining the
government funds properly to ensure the problem correctly takes more
appropriate use of resources time at first, but saves time in
• Curriculum the decision process.
– Ensuring curriculum design is in line ii) Analyze the problem; The

with government education policies next stage is to collect all
– Ensuring provision of a coherent, possible facts and information
flexible, broad and balanced curriculum about the problem. Then
that is in line with the aims of education separate relevant facts based on
• Setting the direction for long-term your definition of the problem.
development of the school, and giving (b) Be fair and objective in
teachers suffi cient fl exibility and gathering and examining the
authority to implement specifi c duties facts. Try to eliminate opinions,
and plans involved in the day-to-day biases, and preconceived ideas.
operation of the school (c) Consider tangible and
• Reviewing school plans and budgets intangible factors. Tangible:
to see if they are in line with the time, cost, facts, Intangible:
overall education goals and school reputation, moral, personal
policies, and making appropriate bias.
adjustment when necessary
• Building up relevant network with
outside bodies and securing iii) Develop alternatives; It is
community resources to enhance also necessary to make the list
teaching all possible alternatives –
effectiveness routine as well as unusual. Be
• Promoting education for the students creative and innovative. Don’t
of the school and leading the school to ignore routine alternatives, but
strive for excellence and continuous don’t get stuck on them either.
improvement (b) Do not try to decide if the
alternative is good or bad at
Whereas Daft (2003) stated that this point. (c) If none seem
decision making process are taken the desirable, choose the one that is
following six steps. the least undesirable.
i) Define the problems; The iv) Evaluate Alternatives; The

process of decision making is next step to evaluate base on of
started with the problem questions: (i). Will the decision
identification. What is problem help us to reach our objectives?
(ii) Is the decision time – and
Page 435
cost-effective? (iii). Do we problem or decision. (ii) Listen

have the resources to to your educated guess, but do
implement the decision? (iv). not let it stop you from utilizing
Are there negative other decision possibilities.
consequences of the decision
that will haunt and hurt us vi) Implementation of decision;
later? Consider the evaluation
factors of risk, resources, and A decision must be converted
research. Risk: All decisions into action: (i) the selected
have a risk. Estimate and alternatives must be executed
quantify the risk on the basis of in a manner that promotes the
success/failure potential (that success of the decision. (ii)
is, 90%, 80%, 20%, 30%, and Objectives must be clear; tasks
70%); Resources: Look at the must be assigned and accepted.
availability of your facilities,
equipment, labor, time, and
budget. Estimate, which vii) Follow up and check results;
decision provides the most for (a). A decision is not complete
the least. Research: Check past unless followup is utilized to
decisions and their results. check up the results and
Remember that every problem consequences. (b). Follow-up
is somewhat different in a provides feedback and
different time frame…even demonstrates the continuing
once successful past decisions cycle of the decision making
may be poor choices now. process. (c) Learn from your
mistakes as well as your
successes.
v) Select an alternative; on the
basis of evaluation of the OBJECTIVES:
alternative select the best
alternative. (i) A supervisor’s The objectives of the study were (i)
experiences are invaluable, to find out current decision making
especially with routine or practices in Secondary schools. (ii) to
reoccurring problems. (ii) investigate current decision making
Experience can be misleading practices in Secondary schools. (iii) To
if you forget to compare current give suggestions for policy formation
with the past conditions regarding decision making practices in
educated guess versus gut secondary schools in Pakistan
feeling (i) an experienced
person’s educated guess is a
valid decision factor, if it is METHODOLOGY OF THE STUDY
based on general experience
and possible on specific
experience with this type of
Page 436
The study was descriptive in nature The male and female heads of
and Survey method was used . The study secondary schools opinion were that they
was designed to findout decision making keep in view the objectives of the
practices in secondary schools of Punjab . institution while making decisions and the
Head Teachers and teachers of public high teachers of the secondary schools opinion
schools located in Punjab serving in the was that the heads of the secondary
public sector served as population of the schools make decisions according to
study. The convenient sampling technique present situation and keeping in view the
was used to select the sample of the study. resources and circumstances they are
Total Head Teachers (48 male and 48 facing.
female) and teachers (48 male and 48
female ) of public high schools located in 1.2 Decisions are made for setting
rural and urban areas were selected from targets for academic year
Rawalpindi, chakwal and Gujarkhan of
Punjab for this study. The male and female heads of
secondary schools opinion were that they
make decisions at the beginning of the
SIGNIFICANCE OF THE STUDY academic years.ie. they plan for the whole
year and they set targets and they try their
This study has great significance for the level best to accomplish those targets .Few
heads of schools as this study may heads were of opinion that the targets are
provide guidelines to them in the set at the top level they have to implement
accomplishment of their assigned those set targets but due to lack of
responsibilities regarding decision making. resources and over burden of work all the
This study will explore current practices of targets set are accomplished . Teachers of
decision making in schools. Decision secondary schools were of opinion that the
making is required in both curricular and targets are set and decisions regarding
co-curricular activities so as to fulfill the their implementation are taken.
requirements of curriculum within the
academic year.
1.3. Decisions are used for designing

strategy to achieve the objectives
CONCLUSION
The heads of secondary schools
Decision making by heads opinion regarding decision made by heads
regarding overall management of and they design strategies to achieve the
objectives but they modify in design
the secondary school
strategy according to need of time
.Teachers opinion regarding decisions used
1.1 Decisions are made by heads of
for designing strategy to achieve
secondary schools for planning
objectives were they help the authorities in
objectives of the institution
achieving the set objective but due to need
of the time the set objective are modified
Page 437
2: Decision practices regarding

1.4. Decision making are used for equal supervision of students
distribution of work among staff
members 2.1.Decisions are used for academic
guidance and counseling to students
Heads opinion regarding equal
distribution of work among staff members Heads of secondary schools make
were not possible as majority of the decisions regarding academic guidance of
institutions have less teaching staff students and help students in solving their
available and many seats vacant. and due problems and academic matters. Teachers
to less paid and lack of resources it is opinion were that the decisions are made
impossible to equal distribution of work by heads along with collaboration with
.but few heads opinion were that they have teachers in academic guidance and
enough teaching staff so they equally counseling of students and majority of the
distribute the work load keeping in view teachers were satisfied by decision making
the abilities and potential of the teaching practices followed by heads of secondary
staff. schools.
1.5 Decisions are made for performance 2.2. Decision making is used for
appraisal of the staff as per assigned organizing and coordinating (internal
tasks and external) examinations
Heads opinion were that decisions Heads and teachers both opinion
are made for performance appraisal of the were same regarding decision making
staff members and at the same time used for organizing and coordinating
teachers opinion were the heads make internal and external examinations but few
decions for performance appraisal of the opinion were that there is political pressure
staff as per assigned tasks in external examination
2.3. Decision making is used for

Decision making practices are developing skills, interest & aptitudes
being made in the handling general among students in classroom activities.
management of secondary schools in
Punjab. In Punjab decisions are made by Heads of secondary schools
heads for setting targets, designing opinion were that efforts are done for
strategy to achieve objectives, equal developing skills ,interest & aptitude
distribution of work and performance among students in classrooms but due to
appraisal of staff. lack of resources and funds it was not
possible to provide conducive learning
environment to the students
Page 438
2.4. Academic decisions are made for 5. Daft, L. R. (2003). Management

monitoring students’ activities as per (sixth edition).United States of
curriculum requirements. America: Thomson, SouthWestern
6. Funk, I. K. (1957). New Standard
Heads of secondary schools Dictionary, Fund and Wagnaus Co.
monitor students activities as per New York.
curriculum requirements but due to busy Goldstein, G., and Michel H.
schedule they lay majority of (1984).Handbook of Psychological
responsibilities on senior teacher who assessment. – New York:
provide them report of the students Pergamon Press.
activities .Teachers opinion were that the
heads as well as the higher authorities
don’t involve and engage in monitoring
students activities as per curriculum
requirements .
REFERENCES
1. Ayub, I. (2000). Assessment of

training needs of head teachers in
schools of Islamabad.
Unpublished Master’s thesis. Rawalpindi:
University of Arid Agriculture.
2. Bateman, S.T., and Snell, A.

(2002). Management Competing in
the New Era. New York:
McGraw-Hill.
3. Best, J. W. and James, V.

K.(1996). Research in education
(7th Ed) - Englewood Cliffs:
Prentice-Hall.
Prentice Hall.
4. Choudhury, N.R. (2001).

Management in Education. – New
Delhi: A.P.H. Publishing
Corporation.
Page 439
7. Good, C. V. (1956) Dictionary of

Education. Mc. Graw Hills Book Co 15. Hussain, K.S .(2011) Needs
New York. Assessment and Development of a
Model for Managerial
8. Good, C. V. (1969).Introduction to Training of Heads of Secondary Schools.
educational research. - Appleton Islamabad: Unpublished thesis of Doctor
Century Crofts. of
Philosophy of Education, Allama Iqbal
9. Gorton, R. A.(1983).School Open University.
administration and supervision:
leadership challenges and 16. Khan, H. (2002). National
opportunities. – Dubuque: WMC. Diagnostics of Head Teachers in
Pakistan: Improving School
10. Government of Pakistan (1959). Management in Asia: Capacity Building
Report of Commission on National for Head Teachers. Islamabad: Academy
Education. Islamabad: of
Ministry of Education. Educational Planning & Management.
11. Government of Pakistan. (1998). 17. Khan, S.D. (2002). A Study of

The National Education Policy Secondary School Heads Leadership Style
1998-2010. Islamabad: and Performance of Teachers: Situational
Ministry of Education. Leadership Model Approach. PhD Thesis.
Lahore: IER,University of the Punjab.
12. Govinda, R. (2002). Role of head
teachers in school management in 18. Mathur, P. (2005). Academic
India-case studies fromsix states Dictionary of Management. Delhi:
(ANTRIEP). New Delhi: Dora Isha Books.
Offset. ijcrb.webs.com
ijcrb.webs.com INTERDISCIPLINARY JOURNAL OF
INTERDISCIPLINARY JOURNAL OF CONTEMPORARY RESEARCH IN
CONTEMPORARY RESEARCH IN BUSINESS
BUSINESS COPY RIGHT © 2013 Institute of
COPY RIGHT © 2013 Institute of Interdisciplinary Business Research 474
Interdisciplinary Business Research 473 MAY 2013
MAY 2013VOL 5, NO 1 VOL 5, NO 1
13. Gupta, L. D. (1987). Educational 19. Mukhopadhyay, M. (2005). Total

administration. – New Delhi: Quality Management in Education
Oxford & IBH Publishing. (2nd Ed.). New Delhi:
SAGE Publications.
14. Harms, H. E. (2000). The Generalist
theory of Educational 20. Nadeem, et al. (2008). Decision
Administration. Scott, Foresman Making Practice in Universities of
and Company, Chicago, pp2-12. Pakistan. – Journal of
Page 440
Diversity Management – Fourth Quarter,

Vol.3, No.4.
21. Pettigrew, A. et al. (2002).

Handbook of Strategy and
Management. New Delhi: SAGE
Publication.
22. Rashid, M (2009) Impact of

professional development on the
performance of secondary
schools heads. Rawalpindi; Unpublished
Master in Education thesis, Fatima Jinnah
Women University
23. Reddy, R.S. (2006). Modern
encyclopedia of secondary
education.
New Delhi: Rajat Publications.
24. Shami, A.P. and Husain, S.
(2007). Handbook Research method
in education. Islamabad:
Academy of Educational Planning and
Management.
ijcrb.webs.com
INTERDISCIPLINARY JOURNAL OF
CONTEMPORARY RESEARCH IN
BUSINESS
COPY RIGHT © 2013 Institute of
Interdisciplinary Business Research 475
MAY 2013
VOL 5, NO 1
25. Wilkin, M. and Sankey D, (1994)
Collaboration and Transition in
initial Teacher Training Kogan
Limited.
Page 441
Impact of Family Conflict on Adolescents Psychological Wellbeing

U
J.Sundus1, S.Tamkeen2 P P P
1
P P
MS scholar International Islamic University Islamabad

Sundusjadoon@yahoo.com
3TU U3T
2
Department of psychology
P P
Lecturer international Islamic university Islamabad

3TU U3T
ABSTRACT
Family has an utmost role in the wellbeing of a child. Family conflicts such as
parental discord, divorce, physical punishment, rejection, negative parenting and all the
disruptive behaviors can influence the wellbeing of children. Psychological wellbeing is
how individuals evaluate their abilities in fulfilling certain aspects of their lives, and this is
shaped directly through the family processes. The present study was conducted to
investigate the impact of family conflict on psychological well being. To study 200
adolescents were chosen from International Islamic University and FAST University
Islamabad, Pakistan. Each participant was chosen by purposive sampling technique. For
the questionnaires the Index of Family Relation by Walter W. Hudson and Ryff’s
Psychological Well Being scale Carol Ryff was selected. After the data was collect, SPSS
was used for data analysis. The results of the study were significant. The results indicate
that family conflict significantly predicts psychological well being.
Keywords: Family conflict, psychological well being, adolescents.
Parent’s wellbeing is another important

1. INTRODUCTION factor in any family relationship. Less
Family plays an important role in educative parents are mostly involved in
shaping Childs and adolescents well being drug abuse such as smoking, drinking,
(Shek, 1989) [1]. The quality and physical and verbal abuse towards their
structure of relationship between family partner as well as children. This type of
members is of fundamental importance family environment can harm their
that influences both the parents as well children’s psychological as well as
as the children. Family relationship is emotional well being. This occurs
interpreted broadly. For example the because of stress, poor parenting styles,
relationship of father and mother, their lack of resources and social isolation.
stability and quality of interpersonal
relationship, the wellbeing of parents, The key function of family is to raise
parent- child relationship as well childs their children into a healthy and secure
wellbeing in the family environment. person by providing them a safe, secure,
Stable interpersonal relationships and nurturing, healthy and supportive
two parent families are the best family environment. There are positive and
structure for children. negative parenting practices that can
highly influence the child’s behavior and
emotional state. Positive practices are
characterized by parental warmth, rules
Page 442
and reasoning are used to promote frequency and severity of family conflicts
obedience and discipline, physical play a major role in child’s adjustments
punishment is also avoided (Baumrind, but also has negative effect on children.
1971; Lamborn, Mants, Steinberg & For example children in high conflict
Dornbusch, 1991)[2]. Negative parenting marriages are likely to face severe
can involve physical punishments and emotional, social, behavioral and
rigid rules. This style can lead to psychological factors, such as,
disruptive behaviors within children and aggression, low self esteem, delinquency,
can include many risk factors such as disobedience, antisocial behaviors as well
deviant behaviors and delinquency as depression. According to (Amato,
(Simons, Chao, Conger, & Elder, 2001; 1994; Flouri & Buchanan, 2003; Knoester,
Wells et al, 2000) [3][4]. 2003; Roberts & Bengtson, 1993;
Wilkinson, 2004) [7][8][9], “Psychological
Family harmony provides a sense of well-being refers to how individuals self-
belonging and a feeling of security and evaluate and their ability to fulfill certain
this security is threatened by conflicts aspects of their lives, such as
that arise within families. Conflicts can relationships, support, and work.” The
occur when people have different views physical and psychological well being is
or beliefs and can create shaped directly by three factors:
misunderstandings between individuals. personality characteristics, family
Family conflicts can be defined as process and social-economic
“Interpersonal tension or struggle among environment. (McKeown, Pratschke, and
two or more persons (within the family) Haase, 2003) [10] The personality
whose opinions, values, needs or characteristic of parents is an important
expectations are opposing or determinant of physical and psychological
incompatible” (Kramer et al., 2006). A well being as they determine their skills
variety of issues can cause these conflicts and styles that they use for effective
such as financial difficulties, extramarital parenting. Two types of parental traits
affairs, poor communication, parenting are highly influential in promoting well
styles and excessive arguing. Due to being in their children, i.e. the state of
which family as a whole can experience negative emotionality and the state of
negative emotions and consequences. psychological independence. Negative
emotionality diminishes well being and
Well being is used as a synonym of results in distress, guilt, insult, irritable
“happiness” that includes physical and feelings. Whereas psychological
psychological well being. Mental and independence increases well being and
emotional well being is of utmost refers to feelings such as self-reliance,
importance to overall health of an independence, willingness to take risks
individual. By positive mental health and fulfill ambitions. These personality
people recognize their full potentials and traits have a direct influence on
cope with their stressors. Early childhood psychological well being (McKeown,
experiences influence this well being and Pratschke, and Haase, 2003). The major
have a lasting effect on their lives. influence on the well being is of the
Anxiety, mood disturbances, disruptive characteristic of mother, her
behaviors and family violence can alter supportiveness and encouragement in
the overall well being of an individual. offering help, and her skills used to
resolve conflicts with her partner. The
Family conflict is a key factor that factors which can reduce well being are
affects childs psychological well being. negative emotionality, which can lead to
Researchers have studied that parental conflicts in couple relationship and cause
discord is more harmful for children than a negative effect on children. Another
even divorce or a death of a family influence of well being is the father’s
member (Grych and Fincham, 1994; characteristic that is supportiveness this
Peterson and Zill, 1986) [5][6]. The can increase overall life satisfaction and
Page 443
psychological well being of child. In Family processes perspective theorists

short, the well being of children is in the believe that if children have high parent-
hands of parents. Where, mothers have a child relationship and low levels of
greater influence on the well being than parental conflicts, then it can lead to
fathers. (Mckeown, Pratschke, Haase, high well being, both psychological and
2003). physical.
With reference to adolescents Parental conflicts have been influence

psychological well being, a link has been the psychological well being of children
found between parenting style and (Emery, 1982; Hetherington, 1989;
problematic behavior, well being, Mechanic and Hansell, 1989) [22][23].
delinquency, drug abuse and self These conflicts are harmfull for two
concept. As adolescents is a crucial reason. Firstly children are in intense
period of development whether physical, need of seeing their parents getting along
psychological or mental (Santrock, 2004) together (Wallerstein and Blackeslee,
[11]. They learn from the real world and 1989) [24]. Secondly, often these
strive for independence from parents as children are drawn into parental conflicts
well as the social groups (Santrock & (Buchanan, Maccoby and Dornbush, 1991)
Yussen, 1984) [12]. The want to feel as [25]. This places both physical and
adults in making their own decisions and emotional stress on children.
being included in a group, for this
purpose they desire the support from The quality of parent’s relationship or
their parents. This parent’s involvement the social class position can also effect
can affect the social development and well being (McKeown, Pratschke, and
academic success (Gecas & Schwalbe, Haase, 2003). Psychological distress can
1986; Harris & Goodall, 2008; Jeynes, lead to childs many negative emotions
2007) [13][14][15]. The types of and personal thoughts. Diong and
relationship they face from their parents associates (2005), have associated anger
determine their attitude towards and stress to psychological distress.
themselves and the quality of Psychological distress also affects an
relationship with their peer group individual’s physical health and
(Gecas, 1971; Wilkinson, 2004)[16]. As behavioral patterns. Low psychological
psychological well being refers to how well being can result in low levels of
people evaluate themselves to fulfill satisfaction, self esteem and happiness,
their lives such as any relationship, with a greater level of distress (Amato,
support and work. So for adolescents 1994). Similarly, children who posses low
psychological distress can result in many psychological well being may have low
negative evaluation, thoughts and levels of happiness and self-efficiency,
emotions. with high levels of depression (Flouri &
Buchanan, 2003) [26].
Some researchers have taken into
account the family processes A study conducted by Fauzia Naz (2012)
perspective. This suggests that family [27], was aimed at investigating parental
processes influence the childs well being rejection- acceptance and childhood
(Acock and Demo, 1994; Demo and abuse in adolescents with somatoform
Acock, 1988) [17][18]. Two important disorder. Their results indicated that
family processes are: 1. Quality of those adolescents who faced more
relationship between parents and 2. parental rejection and childhood abuse
Parent-child relationship. (Rosenberg, reported somatoform disorder as well as
1979) [19]. Adolescents whose parents maladjusted personalities along with
show high level of affection, support, and anxiety and depression.
acceptance have reported lower levels of
depression and anxiety (Goodyer, 1990; Past researches have suggested that
Mechanic and Hansell, 1989) [20][21]. instable family environment experienced
Page 444
by children face the worst developmental the psychological wellbeing of children

outcomes. The children who face from six family structures and found that
multiple transitions in family structure children who belonged to intact families
have low well being rather than those had higher psychological wellbeing than
children who were raised in stable two children from stepfamilies.
parent families or stable single parent
families (Paula & Andrew, 2011). From Block and associates (1986) [33] found in
past researches it is evident that children their study that adolescent’s boys
from intact families have higher belonging to disruptive families had more
psychological well being (Acock and behavioral problems than those in intact
Demo, 1994; Amato and Keith, 1991; families. These boys were observed to be
Conger and Chao, 1996; Furstenberg, more aggressive, uncooperative and
1983) [28]. Acock and Demo (1994) found anxious when they had unfavorable
that children from divorced families environment. While Doherty and Needle
scored lowest on emotional well being. (1991) [34], found in their research that
McLanahan and Sandefur (1994) [29] adolescent girls belonging to disruptive
argue that intact families create a system families had lower psychological well
of check and balance and parents can put being and were involved in greater
pressure on each other to spend a quality substance abuse. These studies have also
time with the child. In this way they are shown that boys showed psychological
more likely to be involved with their adjustment problems and greater
children. On the other hand, parental substance abuse before divorce, but their
conflicts may also be present in intact difficulties increased greatly after
families (Simons et al., 1996) [30], and it separation.
is not necessary that emotional presence
is insured with physical presence of Mechanic and Hansell (1989) conducted a
parents (LaRossa,1988) [31]. This notion longitudinal study on adolescents and
has been supported in past researches found that adolescents in high conflict
that family conflicts have a direct effect intact families showed lower
on child’s psychological well being than psychological wellbeing than those
even divorce (Mechanic and Hansell, adolescents from low conflict divorced
1989). According to Amato, Loomis and families. Some researchers have also
Booth (1995) [32], this relationship of examined whether greater verbal or
divorce, parental conflicts and physical aggression and anger contributed
psychological well being becomes more to conflicts. Cummings et al. (1981) [35]
complex. When parental conflicts end had conducted a study on children by
through divorce, the child’s psychological showing then videos of physical and
well being increases. But the parental verbal aggression within families and
conflicts may also lower the level of found that children experience greater
psychological well being, when there was distress when witnessing physical
low parental conflict before divorce. aggression than verbal aggression among
adults.
Growing body of literature has been
developed over the past decade on the Morrison, Coiro, Blumenthaf (1994) [36]
impact of family conflicts on child’s conducted a research, ‘Marital
psychological well being. Research Disruption, Conflict, and the Well Being
indicates that family structure, whether of Children’, In which they have studied
it is divorce, the type of family whether children from low conflict
environment, parent-child’s families before marital disruption will
relationships, family instability and experience negative effects as compared
interparental conflicts all are a major to children from higher conflict families.
predictor of child’s well being. Christina They examined three outcomes that are,
D. Falci, (1997), had conducted a children's behavior problems, and
research, in which they have compared children's mathematics and reading
Page 445
achievement, among boys and none for behaviors then it is seen that it has a
girls. They found that negative effect of major impact on Childs well being, both
divorce was larger and affects boys well physical and psychological. Due to this
being greater than pre disruption martial they may develop low self esteem, guilt,
conflict had on their behavioral or shame, disruptive behavior and can
academic achievement. While among indulge in aggression and antisocial
girls the result indicated that those from behaviors which may seem socially
high conflict families had lower behavior acceptable to them. Parenting styles can
problems after divorce than those with also influence the individuals well being.
less severe conflicts before separation. Strict parenting, no understanding,
Mechanic and Hansel (1989), have found inflicting verbal punishments can all
in their longitudinal study that contribute to the delinquent or disruptive
adolescents in high conflict, intact behaviors in adolescents. This study will
families had greater adjustment also focus on family conflict as a
problems than those in low conflict predictor of psychological well being.
disruptive families. Slater and Haber Sample of our study is adolescents and
(1984) [37] in their study have also adults between 18 – 25 age ranges. By
illustrated that high conflict families studying past researches, we can further
reported lower self esteem and greater hypothesize that greater family conflicts
anxiety among adolescents, regardless of can lead to lower level of adolescents
whether their parents are divorces or psychological well being. From
married. researches we can also assume that high
family conflicts can increase the risk for
Based on the literature reviewed above it developing psychological disorders such
is expected that family conflicts can lead as, depression, antisocial behavior, lower
to low psychological well being. The self esteem, behavioral problems,
purpose of this research is to indicate aggression and even disobedience. In any
whether family conflict has an impact on organization weather they are students,
psychological well being of adolescents. professionals the support system of
As adolescents is the major transition family is so weak and demanding system
period that can determine their cooping is so strong. These pressures results in
behaviors, adjustment problems, unhealthy psychological wellbeing of a
academic difficulties, negative person approaching to the standard given
emotionality, self evaluation, self by family indulge in conflicts with the
esteem, guilt or shame. This research is family and affect a stable personality.
conducted to investigate the overall
family conflict which can include all
aspects that cause conflicts within a 2. METHODOLOGY
family such as divorce, harsh family
environment, family pressure, parent 1.1 2.1 Objectives
child relationship even the impact of • To study the impact of family
parent’s relationship on the psychological conflict on adolescents
well being of adolescents. Our psychological well being.
investigation will also examine the • To investigate whether family
gender role in these factors and conflict is a predictor
determine whether males or female will psychological well being.
suffer more psychological well being due
to family or marital conflicts. Family 2.1 2.2 Hypothesis
environment also plays a major role on
the psychological well being of • Greater family conflicts leads to
adolescents. For example, the family lower level of adolescents
environment in which parents are psychological well being.
involved in verbal and physical abuse,
drug abuse, smoking and aggressive
Page 446
3.1 2.3 Operational Definition indicate the potential presence of a

clinically significant problem. The second
2.3.1 Family conflict. Family conflict is
cutting score is 70. Scores above this
24T 24T
the independent variable. It can be

level nearly always indicate that clients
defined as “Interpersonal tension or
are experiencing severe stress with the
struggle among two or more persons
possibility that some type of violence
(within the family) whose opinions,
might be present or used in dealing with
values, needs or expectations are
problems. Carol Ryff has established the
incompatible”.
psychological well being scale. It was an
2.3.2 Psychological wellbeing. The
18 item scale in which the items were to
24T 24T
dependent variable of this study is

be rated on a six point likert scale.
psychological well being. Psychological
Respondents rate statements on a scale
well being can be defined as “How
of 1 to 6, with 1 indicating strong
individuals self-evaluate and their ability
disagreement and 6 indicating strong
to fulfill certain aspects of their lives,
agreement. The scale consists of six
such as relationships, support, and
dimensions. Higher score on each of the
work.”
scales indicates greater well being on
4.1 2.4 Sample that dimension.
The sample of this study consisted

of 200 adolescent’s. They were selected 2.6 Procedure
through purposive sampling. This sample This study was conducted to
was selected from different universities measure the impact of family conflict on
that are International Islamic University adolescents psychological well being. In
and FAST University, Islamabad. order to study these different scales
were chosen to measure these variables.
5.1 2.5 Instruments For family conflict the “Index of Family
Relation” scale was chosen where as for
In order to study these two
psychological well being “Ryff’s
variables different scales are used. ‘Index
Psychological Well Being Scale” was
of Family Relation’ is used to investigate
chosen. The participants of my study
family conflict and ‘Ryffs Psychological
were chosen through purposive sampling
Well Being Scale’ is used to study
technique in which the sample was
psychological well being. The author of
collected from different universities in
‘Index of Family Relation’ is Walter W.
Islamabad. 200 adolescents were chosen
Hudson. It is a 25 item scale used to
with age ranging from 18-25 years from
measure the severity, extent or
International Islamic University and FAST
magnitude of problems that family
University, Islamabad. For data collection
members face in their relationship with
a survey method was chosen that is
one another. There are two cutting
questionnaires which the respondent had
scores for the IFR. The first is a score of
to fulfill honestly that could contribute
30 (±5); scores below this level indicate
to my study. After the data was collect,
absence of a clinically significant
SPSS (Statistical Package for Social
problem, while scores above this level
Sciences) 21st version was used for data
P P
Variable N α analysis.
3. RESULTS
Table 1: Psychometric properties of
Psychological 200 .614
variables. (N=200)
Wellbeing
Family Conflict 200 .832 Table 1 indicates the Cronbach alpha
reliability of family conflict and
psychological wellbeing. The results
Page 447
indicate that the reliability of both scales 6.1 4.1 Limitations

is reliable.
• Sample of the present study was
Table 2: Linear regression analysis of relatively small and there was a
family conflict and psychological well shortage of time. There was use
being (N=200) of scale rather than a
standardized published test.
Model • The sample consisted of
Psycholo adolescents. Limited range of
g-ical participants were chosen and
Wellbein from only a few universities of
g Islamabad.
95% CI
Variabl B UL LL 7.1 4.2 Suggestions
e • It is also recommended that a
Constan 72.3 [71.0, 73.6] broad spectrum of age should be
t taken.
Family -.19 [-.26,-.11] • The sample size should be
Conflict increased so that we can
R² .109 generalize the findings. This will
F 24.2 help further strengthen reliability
NOTE.*p<0.05 and validity of the study.
Table 3 shows linear regression analysis 4. REFERENCES
predicting family conflict on
psychological wellbeing. [1] Shek, D. T. L. (1989). Perception
of parental treatment styles and
4. DISCUSSION psychological well-being in a
sample of Chinese secondary school
The goal of current study was to
students. The Journal of Genetic
predict whether family conflict has an
Psychology, 150(4), 403415.
impact on psychological well being. For
this purpose a sample of 200 was chosen
in which the difference in family conflict [2] Lamborn, S. D., Mounts, N. S.,
and psychological well being was studied Steinberg, L., & Dornbusch, S. M.
among 100 males and 100 female. To (1991) ‘Patterns of competence
study these scales that were used were and adjustment among adolescents
index of family relation and psychological from authoritative, authoritarian,
well being scale. The results of the study indulgent, and neglectful families’
were significant. The results of the Child Development 63: 1049-1065.
regression indicated that predictor
explain 10% of variance. It was found that [3] Simons, R. L., Chao, W., Conger,
family conflict significantly predicted a R. D., & Elder, G. H. (2001).
variance in psychological wellbeing (β=- Journal of Marriage and Family. 63
.331, p<.05). The results indicate that . 63-79.
family conflict significantly predicts
psychological well being. [4] Wells, K. C, Epstein, J. N.,
Hinshaw., S. P., Conners, C. K.,
This finding is consistent with previous
Klaric, J., Abikoff, H. B., et al.
setting, a study conducted by Acock and
(2000). Parenting and family stress
Demo in 1994 found the results that
treatment outcomes in Attention
family happiness is associated with higher
Deficit' Hyperactivity Disorder
level of psychological well being and
(ADHD): An empirical analysis in the
parental conflict places both physical and
MTA Study. Journal of Abnormal
emotional stress on children.
Child Psychology, 28r6y 543-553.
Page 448
[13] Gecas, V., & Schwalbe, M. L.

[5] Grych, J. H., dr Fincham, F. (1986). Parental behavior and
D,(1990). Marital conflict and adolescent self-esteem. Journal of
children's adjustment: A cognitive- Marriage and Family, 48, 37–46.
contextual framework.
Psychological Bulletin, 108, 267- [14] Harris, A., & Goodall, J. (2008).
290. Do parents know they matter?
Engaging all parents in learning.
[6] Peterson, James L . and Zill, Educational Research, 50, 277–289.
Nicholas . 1986. Marital
[15] Jeynes, W. H. (2007). The
disruption, parent-child
relationship between parental
relationships, and behaviar
involvement and urban secondary
problems in children.Journal of
school student academic
Marriage and the Family 48(May):
achievement: A meta-analysis.
295-3U7.
Urban Education, 42, 82–110.
[7] Amato, P. R. (1994). Father-child [16] Gecas, V. (1971). Parental
relations, motherchild relations, behavior and dimensions of
and offspring psychological adolescent self-evaluation.
wellbeing in early adulthood. Sociometry, 34, 466–482.
Journal of Marriage and Family, 56,
1031–1042. [17] Acock, Alan and David Demo.
(1994). Family Diversity and Well-
[8] Wilkinson, R. B. (2004). The role of Being. Thousand Oaks: Sage
parental and peer attachment in Publications.
the psychological health and self-
esteem of adolescents. Journal of [18] Demo, David & Acock, A. (1988).
Youth and Adolescence, 33, 479– “The Impact of Divorce on
493. Children.” Journal of Marriage and
the Family, 50: 619-648.
[9] Roberts, R. E. L., & Bengtson, V.
L. (1993). Relationships with [19] Rosenberg, M. (1979). Conceiving
parents, self-esteem, and the Self. New York: Basic Books.
psychological well-being in young
adulthood. Social Psychology [20] Goodyer, Ian G. (1990). “Family
Quarterly, 56, 263–277. Relationships, Life Events and
Childhood Psychopathology.”
[10] McKeown, K. , Pratschke, J. and Journal of Child Psychology and
T. Haase (2003) Family Well- Psychiatry, 31: 161-192.
Being: What Makes A Difference?
The Ceifin Centre and Department [21] Mechanic, D. and S. Hanell.
of Social and Family Affairs. (1989). Divorce, Family Conflict
and Adolescents’ WellBeing.
Journal of Health and Social
[11] Santrock, J. W. (2004). Life-span Behavior, 30: 195-116.
development (9th ed.). New York:
McGraw-Hill. [22]Emery,Robert.
(1982).“Interparental Conflict and
[12] Santrock, J. W., & Yussen, S. R. the Children of Discord and
(1984). Children and adolescents: Divorce.” Psychological Bulletin,
A developmental perspective. 92: 310-330.
Dubuque, IA: Wm. C. Brown
Publishers. [23] Hetherington, M.E. (1989). Coping
with Family Transitions. Child
Development, 60: 1-14.
Page 449
[24] Wallerstein, J. S., SE Blakeslee, S. Adulthood”, Social Forces, 73, 896-

(1989), Second chances: Men, 916.
women. and children a decade after
divorce. New York: Ticknor & [33] Block, J. H., Block, J. & Gjerde,
Fields. P. F. (1986). The personality of
children prior to divorce: A
[25] Buchanan, C.M., E.E. Maccoby & prospective study. Child
S.M Dornbusch. (1991). “Caught Development, 57:827-84Q.
Between Parents: Adolescents’
Experience in Divorced Homes.” [34] Doherty, W. J. & Needle, R. H.
Child Development, 62: 1008- 1029 (1991). Psychological adjustment
and substance use among
[26] Flouri, E., & Buchanan, A. (2003). adolescents before and after a
The role of father involvement and parental divorce . Child
mother involvement in adolescents’ Development, 62, 328-337.
psychological well-being. British
Journal of Social Work, 33, 399– [35] Cummings, E. M., Zahn-Wa~~ler,
406. C .and Radke-Yarrow, M. 1981 .
Young children's responses
[27] Naz, F. (2012). Parental to expressions of anger and
Acceptance Rejection and affection by athers in the family.
Childhood Abuse in adolescent with Child Development 52 :1274-1282.
Somatoform Disorders. University
of Punjab. [36] Moore, K.A., Morrison, D .R.,
[28] Conger, Rand & Chao, W. (1996). Coiro, M.J., and Blumenthal, C,
“Adolescent Depressed Mood.” In 1994 . Divorce and youth
Ronald Simons (Ed.), Understanding wellbeing: Multiple pathways of
Differences Between Divorced and influence . Washingtan, DC : Child
Intact Families. Thousand Oaks: Trends, Inc.
Sage Publications.
[37] Slater. E. J.. & Habcr. J. D.
[29] McLanahan, S. and G. Sandefur. (1981). Adolescent adjustment
1994. Growing Up with a Single following divorce as a function of
Parent: What Hurts,What Helps. familial conflict. Journal of
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Consulting and Clinical psychology,
Press. 52.920-921.
[30] Simons, Ronald and Jay Beaman,

1996. “Father’s Parenting.” In
Ronald Simons (Ed),Understanding
Differences Between Divorced and
Intact Families. Thousand Oaks:
Sage Publications.
[31] LaRossa, R. 1988. “Fatherhood

and Social Change.” Family
Relations, 37: 451-457.
[32] Amato, PR., Loomis, LS., and

Booth, A., 1995. “Parental
Divorce, Marital Conflict and
Offspring Well-Being During Early
Page 450

MDSRC 2016 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MDSRC 2016 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MDSRC - 2016 Proceedings, 16-17 November, 2016 Wah/Pakistan

Sr. Contents Page

A Survey on Analysis and Design of Scheduling Algorithm for LTE-Advanced

Mohammad Masoom Zafar1, Ammar Hafeez2, Sir Ahmad Mudassir3

1. INTRODUCTION (orthogonal frequency division

LTE (latest technology), eNBs (evolved Node

Figure 2: LTE frame structure [1].

2.4. Resource Block:

2.1. Packet Gateway (PGW):

Table 1: Main LTE Performance Targets

4.5. Radio Resource Management resources. For example for video

5.5.2. Blind Equal Throughput:

5.6.2. Maximum Throughput : Table 2. Notations used for Scheduling

5.6.3. Buffer-Aware scheduler:

5.8. Channel-Aware/QoS-Aware (7)

5.8.2. Proportional Fairness (PF):

Figure 6: Graph of downlink throughput for

Same at this time also with cahanging the

Max.Throughput, FLS, MLWDF and EXP) and

5.11. COMPARING DIFFERENT

7. REFERENCES [12]S. Liu, C. Zhang, Y. Zhou and Y. Zhang,

for Optimum E-UTRA DL Performance (5-20

CFD Analysis of 105mm HE Artillery Shell & validation of Computational Results

Muhammad Kashif, Roman Kalvin, Nauman Rasheed,

Keywords: HE Artillery Shell, Scaled Modeling, CFD

1. INTRODUCTION considered on research. CFD underway in

Figure 3: Geometry of 105mm HE Shell in Gambit

Figure 1: 105 mm Artillery shell 1

Modeling includes making of the model Figure 4: O Type Domain of Shell

Figure 7: Dimensional Meshing of Shell 1

During the iterations the residual or

After completing the 2-D meshing we

Figure 6: 3D Meshing of Shell Graph 2: Drag vs Mach 1

The above figure shows the relation

Graph 5: Drag Coefficient Vs Angle of Attack

Graph 3: Lift Vs Mach

The above graph figure shows the relation

Graph 8: Coefficient of Moment vs Mach

Awareness of workplace hazards among workers in textile mill:

Department of Industrial Engineering and Management

Mehran University of Engineering and Technology, Jamshoro -76062- Sindh, Pakistan

Keywords: Hazards Awareness, Textile, Noise, Heat, Dust, PPE, Pakistan.

Mohsin Ali Shaikh (M.E. Student)

Industrialization has exposed workers working environment [3]. Noise is big

about hazard. Illiterate workers don’t Questionnaire was consisted of closed

only 3 (3.7%) respondents were graduate.

57(71.2%) cotton dust particles 73 of hazards. Respondents 71 (88.7%) had

3.5 Health problems due to Table 9: Hazard prevention training

Mostly respondents were facing many Yes 09 11.25

It is concluded that there is no and heat. The main health problems

[2] Nazia, M. Ashfaq, A. Tariq, S.P.

Multinational Ondernemingen & CCC Determination of Occupational Injury

Impact of Innovative Work Behavior on Strategic Management in Competitive sector:

Iqra Aitbar1, Iqra Saeed2, Syed Kamran Hussain Shah3

Keywords: Innovative Behavior, Strategic Management, Competitive

Strategy, Social Media

Strategic management has a noteworthy

implement change, apply new knowledge implementation of strategic

Innovative behavior is considered to be Strategic management combines:

According to the researches [15],it is advantage through strategic management

employees) and vertical levels and suppliers and bringing a positive

According to most of the managers, in Chart 1: Comparison of Social media

competitor’s reputation: their strengths the literature on innovative behavior,